A Critical Edition ·of the

MALA TIMADHAVA
 2
A Critical Edition
of the
- --
MALATIMi\'DHAVA
v

by
MICHAEL COULSON

Revised by
Roderick Sinclair

DELHI
OXFORD U VERSITY PRESS
BOMBAY CALCUTIA MADRAS
[989
Oxford University Press, Walton Street, Oxford OX2 6D'P
NEW YORK TORONTO
DEun BOMB A Y CALCUlT A MADRAS KARAClD
PETALING JAYA SINGAPORE HONG KONG TOKYO
NAIROBI DAR ES SALAAM
MELBOURNE AUCKLAl'D
and associates in
BERLIN ffiADA

© Oxford University Press 1989'

ShN 0 19562354 1
,t{

Filmset and printed by All India Press

Kennedy Nagar, Pondicherry 605 001
and published by S.K. Mookerjee Oxford University Pr,ess
YMCA Library Building, Jai Singh Road, New Delhi 110 001.
For Donna
 PREFACE
It is almost seventeen years since Michael Coulson submitted his
critical edition of the MiHat"imadhava as a doctoral thesis at the
University of Oxford. The principal reason for the delay in its pub-
lication was Coulson s realisation of the importance of Harihara s
commentary for a full understanding of the play. In 1967 he travelled
to Kathmandu and photographed one of the two known manuscripts
of this corrfmentary but he hardly made any progress with the tasks
of transcription and collation before he died.
It -8;oon became evident that publishing Harihara's commentary
together with Couison sedition of the play would not be practicable :
the result would have been a book of quite unmanageable proportions.
A propercritica1 edition of Harihara s commentary (with a recon-
struction of his text of the play) remains a desideratum, but as an
interim measure I have incorporated his into the Apparatus
Criticus and occasionally drawn attention to his commentary in the
Notes.
A further complication was caused by the fact that -Coulson himself
made numerous alterations to his edition. Most of these seem to have
been due to a growing conviction that Bhavabhuti wrote a revised
version of the play, which is represented principally by the Newan,
recension.Wberever possible Coulson's additions and alterations
have been incorporated into this edition-though in a few places
it has proved beyond the wit ofman to understand their purport. Much
has had to be re-written, especially in the Notes. I have not marked
these re-wr.itten passages except where I have added something on
my own initiative (in which case I have added the initials 'R.S.'), but
the reader should bear in mind that any infelicities of language are
likely to be my responsibility. I have completely re-written the section
on Harihara in the Introduction.
Thanks are due to many people: to those who administer the
Boden Fund for financing my work on this project; to Dr. D. George
of the Staatsbibliotbek, for trying (albeit unsuccessfully) to
trace the present whereabouts of the Kathmandu manuscript of Hari-
hara; to all my friends at the Oriental Institute, Oxford, for their
advice and encouragement (especially Alexis Sanderson and l)"ofessor
Vlll Preface

Richard Gombrich) ; and to my fellow-householders-Sarah

Souray-ya, Tim, Simon and Jonathan for bearing with me so patiently
over the past year.
Great Milton, Oxfordshire Roderick Siuclair
July 1983
 CO TE TS

11
Intr du tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XI
MalatImadha ate t .. ... .. . .... .. . ... .. .. . 1
Act] . . . . . .. . . . ... .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
A t 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
t III . ...... . .. . . . .. .. ... .. .... .... 54
A t IV ..... .. . ... ... . .. .. . . . .. . .. . .. . 79
At . . . .. ......... . . . . . . . . . .. . . ... . . 94
Act VI . ... . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . ... .. III
Act YIl .... , . . . . ... . .. . ....... . . ... .. 137
A t UI .. . .. ... ...... .. . . ... . ... . . . .. 164
A t IX ............. . ... ... . . . . . .. ... 1 7
Act .. .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
ote ..... . . .. .. . ... . . . ... . . . ... ... . . . . .. _33
 INTRODUCTIO·

1. List of mss selected xi 10. Con entions of the

2. Description of mss xiii apparatus criticus xl ii
3. Ms reiationships xviii 11 . Arrangem,e nt of text and
4. Other mss and sources xx apparatus xlix
5. Features unrecorded in 12. Punctuation of compounds I
the apparatus. xxii Representation of
6. The selection of readings IV sandhi hi
7. Evidence for revision Rema rks liii
Two versions of the ] 3. The pattern of stage-
prologue xxxii directions I
Revision tbroughout 14. Geographical and bio-
the play x x ij graphical references I i
8. The Prakrit passages xli 15. Bibliograpby Iviii
9. Commentaries xl i [6. Abbreviations and signs Ix

I. List of mss selected

This edition is based upon the following fifteen mss of which eleven are
complete or nearly so :
A. (to VIII 7.1) ewan (vartula) Kathmandu at Lib 793
B. (to V115.11) ewari ( artula) Calcutta ASH 5655 (Cat.
5297)
C. ewarl (vartula) Kathmandu BiT Lib 1473
D. Maithilj Kathmandu at Lib 792
E. Bengali Banaras Skt Univ 41342
F. (fragments) ewarl Calcutta ASB 4'804 (Cat.
5296)
G. sarada Poona, BORI no 162 of
1'875 - 6
H. (to X 11.4) sarada Poona BORI no 163 of
1875 - 6
I. sarada Oxford Bodleian Sansk d 88
(Cat. 1247 (4»
1. (to IH 12. 44) rarada London India Office 1242a
(Cat. 7358)
K. nagari SISM 7 230
Xll M iilatfmadhava Sect. l

L. nagari Banaras, Skt Univ 42901

M. Grantha Madras, Adyar Lib 721 ] 6
N. Telugu Mysore, ORI fUDlV Lib) 1088
O. (printed in nagari) Tex.t of Trivandrum ed of
1953
(It will be seen that 0, although for the sake of simplicity referred
to as a ms, is in fact a printed source. See further below.)
In the case of so popular a work as the Malatnnadhava a full
collation of the many scores of mss available in libraries tliroughout
India would be an arid and profitless undertaking; and to at.t emptto
incorporate such a collation into an apparatus criticus would be
positively wrongheaded. Essential. matter would disappear in a
welter of triviality. The task therefore is to construct an apparatus
out of the best and most representative material available. All the
Newari and sarada mss so far .found are included. For the other
traditions, representative mss have been chosen. Of the Newan mss,. I
found Band F at the Asiatic Society in Calcutta, the rest (ACD) in
Kathmandu. Of the sarada mss, G and H were obtained from Kashmir
by Buhler and used by Bhandarkar in his second edition ; J and I which
is the most interesting of the four, I found in this country. Choosing
a
mss to represent the other traditions was harder task: those showing
the most interesting affinities with older and probably better mss
would for that very reason be less typical of their class. As a Bengali
ms, I chose E. The two mss K and L represent the nagan
tradition. The mss of the South show remarkable homogeneity, their
differences consisting mostly though Dot entirely in superficial cor-
ruptions of a unitary source. M , from Madras, and N, from
are particularly close to each other, while 0 -has a certain indepen-
dence.
A trip to Kerala proving difficult to include in my tour of India I
hoped to obtain the transcription of a selected InS from the University
Mss Library by post. Letters and a telegram elicited in the end a pro-
mise, but no subsequent sign of its fulfilment. It was only aft,er I had
been back in England for over two years, and long after I had aban-
doned all hope, that the requested transcription arrived, too late to
make the task of reworking the apparatus to incorporate it seem
worthwhile. I had by then decided to use the text of the Trivandrum
edition to represent the Malayalam recension. On balance, there has
probably been more gain than loss in this. On a few points of detail
 Introduct ion X III

the Trivandrum printed text has [suspect been modified to bring it

mor,e into line with other published ,editions of the Malatimadhava,
but essentially it provides a much closer reconstruction of the text
known to the commentator Piimasarasvafi than a single ms would be
likely to afford .. Besides which when the apparatus is already over-
burdened in the Prakrit passages with the extravagances of M and N,
the comparative orderliness of 0 is a welcome relief.
It is probably not too hopeful an estimate to suggest that the fifteen
mss between them represent at least 95 per cent of those published
variant r1eadings that are of any interest (besides of course many
important new readings). What gaps there are I have tried to supply by
dting other mss on occasion. Often it is more a matter of bolstering a
too tbooy attested V.: triant or of correcting a reading which has been
slightly corrupted in the ms regularly cited,. than of supplying some-
thing absolutely fresh. Occasionally however it has not seemed
worth preserving any longer (particularly in.swamps of Prakrit variants
already tedious enough) a reading of Bhandarkar based entirely on an
idiosyncrasy in one or two of his original nagan mss (thus at 1 21.5 his
yatosyiih is found only in his mss D and O ' at III 12.52 his ABDBh
all happen to read devvavilasida for de aduvvilasid.a ).
Far bolder would be any suggestion that the apparatus gives as
broad a picture of the textual tradition as we are ever likely to get
While we are still in the midst of the processes whereby private mss
are finding their way into public oollections and adequate catalogues
of those are being pr,e pared the bringing to light of new
mss of the Mala6madhava showing an independent tradition or even a
mark1edly earlier stage of transmission remains a real possibility. My
strongest regr,et is that despite a visit to Ahmedabad and the helpful-
ness of the scholars I met there I could not find any trace of a Jain
ms of this play. Here particularly one may still hope for the future.

2. Description of mss
(For further remarks on peculiarities of the mss see sect. 5.)
A. National Library no 79'3
Newan (vartula) script .. palm leaf. incomplete.
foil 32. 7 - 8 lines to page.
Begins: oqlnam$arasvatyai// sanandannandi
Ends: (VIII 7.1)
Neatly written, and what is preserved is mostly legible,- but several
XIV M iiJa lfmiidhava Sect. 2

leaves are tom at the right-hand side, particularly in Act I.

B. Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta, no 5655 (Cat no 5297)

Newart (vartula) script. palm leaf. incomplete.
fo1l30 (1-35, with 1,9,18, 24 and 31 missing). 7- 8 lines, to page.
Begins (l 3.9): rantyaryavidagdhamisraScabbagavantobbfrmidevasca f
Ends' malatIbhagavatasadpianirmmanasarpyogarasi (VI 15.1 I)
On the leaves which are well preserved, the writing is bold and
legible; but some are badly faded, and others tom. The leaves are less
elongated in shape than those of the other Newarl mss.

C. Bir (formerly Durbar) Library, Kathmandu, no 1473 of

the Durbar Library p. 56)
Newarl (vartula) script. palm leaf. 1156 A.D. complete.
foIl 39. 8 lines to page.
Begins: ya II sanandannandi
Ends: pramoda1?-praja1:t /1 I/
. .
natakaml/ .
If If If
caI!lmyarpsukradine (the next nine syl1ables erased
and H*budharakhitasya written over them in a different hand)
pustakoyam / / 1/
In the Newarl era, the year 276 is 1155-6 A.D. There seems no
reason to suppose this ms older than the undated A and B. Its general
state of preservation is no worse, but it is badly eaten away at the right
hand margin, so that at least two or three syllables are lacking from
almost every line of the ms. The writing is legible, but more cursive than
that of A and B; faint nicks below the line indicate word-divisions
(even within a compound), but it is difficult to teU whether these were
s
added later. is frequently written for s.

D. National Library, Kathmandu, no 792

Maithili script on cover). palm leaf. nearly com-
plete.
foIl 30 (numbered 1-30, but a leaf is missing between 16 and 17). 10
lines to page.
Begins: of!lnamomaiijunathaya If ciiqap14aka pala
Ends: pramodal?-praJa1:tl/ / /
/ / sama ?ptacedammalatTmadhavakhyamprakarat;tati1q-tariyammaha-
ka ver bhiigarbhasyeti /1 f I
 Introduction xv

Neady written in small characters. Ther,e is confusion between

two forms of certain letters. such as short 'i', no doubt because it was
copied from ,a ms in the script of A and B whose recension it closely
follows, ,a nd rdiably suppiements. Initial .i is not distinguished from 1.
It is written with care but shows signs of haste in the last few folios,
with frequent omissions of syUab]es-to meet what ancient deadline
one can only speculate.

E.Library of the Sanskrit Univ.ersity Banaras,. no. 4m342 (Old no 4484)

Bengali script. paper. nearly complete.
Joll 59. 6 lines to page.
: 11 sanandam.nandi
Ends: (X 25a)
It is unfortunate that the final leaf (no 16 0) containing the colophon
bas been lost. The writing is more liegularand more easily readable
than iliat of the general run of Bengali mss. n and are similar in
appearance, and Me frequently confused.
F. Asiatic society of Bengal. Calcutta nQ 4804 (Cat no 5296)
Newar'i (square) script. palm leaf. fragments.
foll 5 (numbered 10, 28. 44, 46 (sic), 54) 6 lines to page.
Begins (fo1 10): (I 4k)
Ends (fol 54): v,agamrtajaUl (X 17c)
Written very legibly ID the ,square-cut Nepali script not dissimilar
to nagari. It was 'c opied from a ms Closely resembling C, but in many
places the original reading has been obliterated and a reading of the
GHIKL type substitUted (cf its readings at IT 0.1 5, VIII 13.2. 14b, X IIc,
11 .4 and 13.I). FoH 44 and 46 are badly tom ..

G . BhandarkarOriental Research Institute, Po ana, Lno 162 of 1875-6'

(not mentioned in Descriptive Cat.)
sarada script.. paper. complet'e .
foll 90. 10 lines to page.
Begins: / / srigaJ1lesayanama1;t / /
svatyai /1 IloJ!lcuq,aplqa
Ends: // // Ifsamap-
(then possibly 'Some-
thing which has been erased).
The leaves are folded to open like a book, and the pages are almost
sqWlre in shape. In this as in the other 's aradimss, use is quite often
made of special signs, for jihvamu6ya. and upadbmamya. A
XVI Ma/a t'imadha va e t. _

of the Prakrit is provided by interlinear glosses: those syllables of the

Prakrit words which differ from their Sanskrit equivalents have the
corresponding Sanskrit syllables written above them.

H. Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute Poona '-no 163 of 187 - 6'

(not mentioned in Descriptive Cat.)
safada script. paper. nearly complete.
foIl 3-69 (with no 6 missing) .. 8-10 lines to page.
Begins (I 7 .2): tad
antevasinyastvaham
Ends ex 11.4): turnhettisambhavidaqlasi 1 hatatavirama ... tatpra-
sldasambha
This is the on ly ms ()f those selected which contain a chaya written
out as part of the text: each sentenoe of the Prakrit i followed im-
mediately by its Sanskrit translation. G and J are the only other
mss to provide a chaya of kind. For this ms and the one preceding
which are Bhandarkar's Kl and K2 I have made u e of Bhandarkar
own collation, and have referred to the originals only where there
seemed reason to question the reading: where this is other than
given by Bhandarkar, I cite the ms foHowed by the word sic - G le
'Hsic' .

I. Bodleian Library, Oxford, Sansk d 88 (Cat no 1247 (4 )

sarada script, paper. c. 1693- 4 A.D. complete ..
foIl 52. 19 lines to page.
Begins: oqlsrlgaq.esayanamaq. orpcl1," api4akapala
Ends: pramoda4praja4 11 kamaevametat itini.kranta arve da'a-
moilka4 I I
lqtirmahaka vevividhabudhacakranlrajitapadad va yambhoja ya
srTbhanabhavabhiiteritibhadram ll/1
This forms part (foil 165 -216) of a bound volume opening ide-
ways as a book: the date is taken from three other work in the volume
all evidently copied by the same scribe, Rajanalasaka (see the catal.ogue
by Winternitz and Keith). It is legibly and carefully written though
the diphthong signs are not always placed directly abo e the con onant.

J. India Office, London , no 2242a (Cat no 7358)

sarada script . paper. c. 1660 A.D. incomplete.
foll 25. 8- 9 lines to page .
Begins: svasti 1/ srlgailesayanamal? / /
 Introduction XVII

Ends (Ill 12.48):

The first leaf is torn. The approxima le date at which the ms was begun
('sake 1582 saIpvat 36') can be gather,ed from a single leaf bound up
with this ms written in the same hand as foil 1- [2 and 14 - 17 (the
scribe's name being Rajanaka .. These leaves follow a
recension similar to (not identical with) that of G with plentiful
corrections according to a recension like that of H. foU 13 and 18 - 25
are written in another hand contain few corrections, and broadly
follow the recenSlon of H while retaining minor features of G's
recension. In other words they are replacements of the original [eaves.
In fact the last words of Act I occur both at the beginning offol14 and
at the end of (the rewritten) fol13. For the whole ms ther,e is an inter-
linear chaya' like G s except that syllables identical in Prakrit and
Sanskrit are more often duplicated.

K. Bharata Itibasa Poona, no 7,230

nagarl script. paper (watermarked [ Wha1man). Saka 1704. complete.
foU 1- 81. 9- 11 lines to page.
Begins: 11
Ends : / / 24 / / /1 evamastu 11
1/ 10 / I
//
klla kecai-
tramasisama pt ima gama t
Written in the spring of 1782 A.D. in a neat aJ.. d careful hand .
There are 'explanatory glosses in the margin. The staozas are numbered
continuously within each act. A small vertical stroke at the top right
of the letter marks the final syllable of a Prakrit word but elements
within a compound are not distinguished. Another ms in the BISM
collection 53 / 52ka is quite possibly copied from this: it is dated
saka 1771 on paper watermarked 1841 but contains corrections
perhaps made after reading Jagaddbaras commentary which LS
pr6cised in an accompanying ms written the roUowing year.

L. Sanskrit University Banaras no 42901

nagarl script. paper. complete.
foIl 1-50. 11 - 13 lines to page.
Begins: /1 srlmatapitfbhyannamah // snsaras-
vatyai /1 nirvighnamastu 1/ .
Ends : / / 1/ / emaIa-
XVlll Mala tfmiidha vo Sect. 2

tipraptir namadasa ?moqJ ?kaJ? snrastu

The writing is careless but extremely legible. A small circle or point
placed at mid-height is employed, though very erratically in the Pra-
krit passages to mark offwords, including the elements of a compound.

M. Adyar Library , Madras no 72116 (Cat no 1455)

grantha script. palm leaf. complete.
foIl 25. 7- 9 lines to page.
Begins: haril?omsubhamastu / cii4ap14a
Ends: / / itini .krantaq
sarve / dasamo)nkalfl / srlgurubhyona-
mal). /

N. Oriental Research Institute, Mysore no 1088

Andhta (i.e . Telugu) script. paper. worm-eaten. complete.
foIl 39. 10- 15 lines to page.
Begins: srlhayagrlvayanamal). ! / / / subhamastu / /
Ends: / / /I
tas sarve / / 1/ dasamo)i1kaq. / / srI / /
namahsii / / sri // / / snrama I
MY ' knowledge of the readings of these two mss is through the
medium of transcriptions made available through the kindness of
the Theosophical Society and the University of Mysore respectively.

3. Ms relationships
A family tree illustrating the inter-relationships and descent from
an archetypal copy or copies of an our mss, although it must be in-
scribed somewhere among the tablets of heaven, I suspect to be beyond
our own reach. It is indeed not difficult to shape one part or another
of the evidence into such a pattern, but only by ignoring other sets of
correspondences too numerous to be due to coincidence. Such efforts
if they embrace all branches of the tradition, are likely to end cir-
cularly, with a need to make some IllS descend from itself. The reason
for this seems fairly plain, namely that from the earliest stages of
transmission mss, far from perpetuating themselves in isolation, were
compared and annotated one against another as opportunity presented
itself. In the nature of things the IllSS compared would usually be from
neighbouring geographical areas and of rather similar recension. But
the effect upon a particular tradition of a single ms from the other end
 Introduction X1X

of India might wen be profound. It will have been seen from the pre-
ceding section tbat we have two most striking examples of this process
of annotation actually at work. The ms J was copied aocording to one
type of sarada su b-recension and conected according to another.
Some of its leaves were then replaced with the corr1ections incor-
porated, but naturally without a totally SliCC sful suppression of all
the features of the first recension. Onle can imagine the bafflingly
hybrid· result if the whole of this contlated version had then been
copied again, de nOllo. Here at least we are concerned with two similar
r,ecensions. F, on the oth.e r band, was written according to one rec'en-
sion and corrected alc cording to the reoension most radically dis-
similar to it, and again very many of its original featuf1es wer'e not
obliterated. (For another example of conflation see the description
of 'Bhand's 0' in section 4 below.) -
The result is that the grouping of UlSS can be described only in
general t'e rms and with many quabficat]ons. The most significant
grouping, in the senr.e that it involves contrasted readings of evident
antiquity and oftenradicaJ dissimiJanty . is that which divides tbe mss
into ABCDFMNO and EGHUKL. The position of E is the most
ambiguous. It evidently descends from an old conflation the r,everse
of F's, based on GHIJKL and corrected acording to ABCDF. A
similar but independent tendency is shown by K especially in the
later acts. Within ABCDF ABD form a single recension and CF
:;:mother. (At this point F, which is a mere fragment and J, which
shows little independence of G and H may be omitted from the dis-
cussion). The position of I is of some interest. Insofar as it is a sarada.
ms, it agrees far more closdy with H than with G . Indeed HI is an
important subgroup, whereas G and I do not usuaUy agree without the
support of H. But far more onen than H I shows an agre·e ment with
ABeD or MNO, or both. The isolated support of C or I for MNO
(or sometimes for ° alone) may be taken to indicate an early sub-
stratum of the Southern recension whereas tne support of K orL
cannot be so construed and in fact rather suggests the opposite.
0, as already mentioned, is somewhat independent of M. This in-
dependence consisting to some extent in a doser agreement with other
mss (K and L apart) the readings of 0 may be given ratber more
weight than those of MN. L has a particular tendency to share cor-
ruption with MNO. K groups itself more frequently than L with GHI.
and particularly with HI.
lt is within this general framework of relationships that the amount
xx Miilatimiidhava Sect.. 4

of independent support given to a reading by the concurrence of

particular mss may be judged.

4. Other mss and sources

a) uncollated mss
In addition to the mss used in the apparatus t I examined several
others and collated selected passages (in particular the pIologue, where
variation is wider-ranging than anywhere else in the play). I have
cited their eyidence in one or two places, referring to them by abbre-
viations which are intended to be reasooably self-explanatory, but
which are here expanded.
BirLibKath p74: Kathmandu, Bir Library (Cat p.74). Old Be:ngali
script. Dated samvat 469 i.e. 1586 A.D. If the facilities in
Kathmandu had been better or the other mss there less important,
I should have made more use of this copy.
CalSktColl 243 and 276: Calcutta Sanskrit College. oagari script.
The first of the two, which resembles my K, has a translation in
Avadhi: it breaks off at the end of the praveSaka of Act Vll.
ASBCaicutta 9245: Asiatic society of Bengal no 9245 (Cat no 5298).
oagari script.
BO RI DesCat 158: Poona, Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute
no 437 of 1887- 91 (Cat no vol XIV 158). nagari. 1803
BISM Poona 7,352: Poona, Bharata Itihasa Samshodhaka
00 7,352. nagari.
(For BISM Poona 53/ 52ka see description of K , section 2)
BanSktUniv 73668.' Banaras, Sanskrit University. nagari
" 41290 " " MaitbiIT
FlorB96: Florence, Biblioteca Nazionale 'De Gubernatis B96'. nagari.
1.0. 895a: London, India Office. Bengali.
1.0.1890: " nagari.
b) printed sources
Telang: The Malatlmadhava of Bhavabbuti with the Commentaries
of Tripurari Siiri and Jagaddhara ed by M. R. Telang revised by
 Introduction XXI

Vasudev Laxman Sastri PaJ?Sikar 6th cd. NirJ?aya Sagar Press, Bom-
bay 1936.
I quote the readings of the text which accompani.es Tripurari's
commentary. These generally agree with my mss MN.
Trivandrum's : in conjunction with a nagari tetter this £ormula distin-
guishes the mss used for the text of the Trivand.rumedition. Un-
fortunately no hint of their provenance is given in the introduction
to that edition. I append my own observation:-
s- are of the Malayalam recension
is Bengali
correspond to my MN
are of the nagan recension.

In fact, despite discrepancies, I strongly suspect that the last five

are printed editions - respectively the Calcutta edition of 1830 or
1866; the Madras edition (Telugu script) of 1883- and the editions
of Telang, Bhandarkar and Kale.
Bhand's: placed before various letters, tbis formula distinguishes the
mss used by Bhandarkar for his edition. They are the most important
source of printed variants, and merit individual descriptions:-
(Bhand's) B 'from the Library Sastri Agase of Ratnagiri'.
Last folio lost. Apparently early nineteenth century. Of a similar
recension to my L.
C (BORI Des Cat vol XIV 153) From Nasik, lcopied under the
superintendence of Dr Biihler' . RecensioD similar to the above and to
my L.
A This is in fact the Calcutta edition (by Kailasachandra Datta)
of 1866. It avoids the more obvious peculiarities of the nagari recen-
sion, but is rather closer to it than is my E ..
D (BORI Des Cat vol XIV 157) Breaks off in Act VI' It is in nagan,
but has more in common with Bhand's A than with Bh.a nd's BC.
E E!phinstone CoUege, copied from a ms dated saka 1608 (1686 A.D.).
Collated by Bhandarkar from where his D breaks oif, and very similar
to it.
N Telugu, from Bangalore. Corresponds to my MN though with a
few independent readings of some interest.
In his second edition, Bhandarkar used also the foUowing mss:-
Bh Bombay branch, Royal Asiatic Society. Dated 1765 (1708 A.D.).
xx 11 Miilatfmiidhava Sect. 4

Rccension very close indeed to my K.

o (BORI Des Cat vol XIV 155) From Olpad, near Surat. Dated
t 715/saka 1580 (1658 A.D.), according to Bhandarkar, but the last
leaf is now lost. The recension is in many respects similar to that of my
K, but is evidently superior. It has extensive corrections which, though
not markedly dissir.ailar, are certainly made with a different pen and
probably by a different hand. These corrections follow a recension
almost identical with Bhand's B. The first leaf, a more recent replaoe-
ment, follows this recension exclusively, so that the original reading::;
for the beginning of the play are lost.
KI and K2 These are my own G and H respectively.
Subhasita: In view of the unusual authoritativeness of Kosambi and
Gokhale's critical edition of the I have noted
its principal readings fOT those stanzas of the Malatimadhava which it
includes. It will be seen however that there is little of exceptional
interest in its readings, and it is of course in the stanzas of Sanskrit
verse that further testimony as to readings is least required.
Dasarupa: Dhanika's commentary on this work quot,es MM V 10
and the preceding prose passage.

5. Features unrecorded in the apparatus

The apparatus criticus is essentially intended to be a complete record
of the respects in which the mss selected differ from my text, but the
literal achievement of this goal would have overloaded the apparatus
with trivialities. Certain classes of information have been excluded
completely, most notably that concerning punctuation (although if a
mark of punctuation occurs in the middle of a reading quoted in the
apparatus, it is of course retained). The differences of usage between
mss otherwise closely related suggest that no particular authority
attaches to their practice. In the use or omission of the my text
simply follows at almost every point whatever seems the general con-
sensus of the mss. I consistently drop the however, after the
names of speakers (dialogue assignments), which I print on a separate
line, and after stage directions, which I enclose in brackets. Other
marks of punctuation such as -oommas are of course supplied by me.
Capital letters are employed to distinguish proper names or epithets
used in place of proper names: e.g. Bhagavati. Dialogue
assignments I have printed in full (in capitals) .. The usual ms practice
is to abbreviate them (e.g. madha for except at the time
 in lrodu.ction xxm

of their first occurrence in each scene. The numbering of the stanzas

is my own. Among an the mss they are numbered only in K . At the
end of a stanza, the mss usually write a double except for B,
which most otten writes the single Before the stanza, all except
OF write the double In the middle of the stanza, a single
is usual except in K, which writes the double in all
circumstanoes. In prose passages, the Newan mss mostly use the
single wber'eas the saradft mss use the double regularly and
single sparingly. E's punctuation is erratic and frequent use is made
of a point placed at mid-height especially after the name of a speaker.
L also employs this point and its use of point or single or double
seems totally hapazard. K on the contrary llsed the point in
the modern manner, not as punctuation but to mark the abbreviation
of a speaker's name, and followed b the double
It will be seen that in the text sandhi is not aJwa s observed within
the sentence (mostly after vocatives sometimes between clauses).
again I follow ms practice. I may sa that before I began coUa-
tion, I was always mystified by the comment in Sanskrit primers that
failure to observe sandhi serves as a form of punctuation: in our
modem texts it does nothing of the sort.
In the use of anusvara and the class nasals I have followed the con-
ventional practice, whicit is however oot fully supported by the mss.
ABCDEGHIJ use the class oasal consistently even with prefixes
(e.g. sandigdha), and sometimes even between words'· FKL use only
anusvara. KL sometimes repeat the aspIration of a doubled consonant
(khkha ete). The Southern mss use a sign oot unlike anus vara. to
indicate the doubling of a consonant, and so their authority is between
the readings ka1!lPa and kappa etc is limited. In quoting single mss
I have kept as far as possible to the actual orthography of the ms, but
where mss share a reading no distinction between their speHing con-
ventions is made. [ have not usually aUempted to distinguish the
letter b and v in the variants. ABCDEF ha e but one letter for the
two; the other mss make a small distinction, but do not observe it
very rigorously.
The Newari mss (especially C) are badly tom. and eaten away. To
have described all lacunas minutely would ha e been impractical.
My practice has been to pass over the lacunae in. silence where no
important variants are involved, or where most mss - including all
related mss - concur in the reading of the text.. In all other ICirCum-
stances the evidence of the ms involved is described as lost.
XXIV Miilatimiidhava SectS

The other limitation upon the completeness of the apparatus is of

a different order, being consciously selective. It is a matter of
observation that most mss are full of trifting errors and mistakes of
spelling, and most especially is this true of passages in Prakrit. An
editor has a duty not to clutter his pages with those trivialities. But
equally is it true that what seems trivia1 may be a clue to something
important. There is no solution to the dilemma except to exercise
as much care as possible. An obvious refinement on this general
principle is to pay greater regard to the minor aberrations of the older
and more trustworthy mss, and thIS I have done. In fact in the case
of the Newari mss very little has gone unrecorded. Since a much
smaller proportion of the errors of K, L, M and N are recorded, the
impression may even be given that the Newan mss are actually more
prone 10 such slips, when the opposite is quite strikingly the case, and
I seek to redress any such impression.
There is however one feature usually ignored which I have taken
the trouble to preserve, namely the use of a sign (represented in text
and apparatus by '2') to indicate the doubling of the preceding word.
The matter is a small one, and though the practice is obviously ancient
this does not in itself justify its preservation. Nevertheless the fact
that such a sign can so easily drop out may influence our judgement
in deciding whether to read a word singly or twice over, and it is everi
possible to see some distinction of usage (though rather dubiously
in one or two places, such as VD 0.32), on the lines that 2 is used
affectively, while actual doubling is made for grammatical iteratives
-e.g. aho 2, but varrup..

6. The selection of readings

It is worth stating as baldly as possible the object of a critically edited
text (at least where the work is evidently the unified creation of a single
writer): namely to establish from existing evidence the form in which
the work issued from its author. (If it is known or suspected that in
his lifetime he produced more than one version, then the question
of whether these versions can be distinguished must also be con-
sidered). One consequence of this commonly agreed aim is that no
reading or emendation can be accepted purely on the ground that it
improves the text: acceptance must always imply an opinion con-
cerning the author's intention.
In the case of the Malatimadhava, it is evident that none of the
 Introduction xxv

available fiSS is a copy contemporary with and approved b Bhava-

bhuti t nor is there any likelihood that any of them was directl Ic opied
from such. a ms. On the contrary thefie is ample evidence that some
generations of ms confusion intervene between the or· ginal work and
our earliest mss. lt is an observation of classical textual schol.a rs that
the major corruptions establish themselves in the first few oenturies
of a work's existence, and this no. doubt is true of the MaJafimadhava.
This being so, there exist at many points in tbis work variant read-
ings anyone of which might on the face of it be traced back to the
archetype. It is safer to' express the matter in this fashion. rather than
to rush to establish criteria of reliability by which the Jieadings of one
IllS are preferred to those of another. Where mss close to the archetype
have not survived,. the usefulness of extrinsic evidence (that is .of the
evidence of ms relationships) is very limited particular] in view of
what has been said above about ms contamination. The typical case
belO'Ved of textual tbeo.rists, whe[1eby the .a greement .of A and B (being
of .one recension) with C proes the corruptness of the reading of D
(which shares C's recension) has no practical application unless not
merely the possibility of an accidental similarity of .c orruption but
also the possibility of D or an ancestor sever ha.v ing been compared
against some independent ms can be ruled out.
A further variety of extrinsic evidence shou1d be which
at first sight might seem to. be intrinsic in nature oamdy the evaluation
of the general trustworthiness 'Of a ms in the light of the proportion
of its which it seems reasonable to accept into the text.
However, in its application to the settling of any particular rle ading
such an evaluatiDn is a purely extrinsic test since it takes no accoUnt
of the inherent worth of the reading its appropriat.eness tD the context,
consistently with the author s style and so on nor .of the inherent
likelihood (shDuld such a question arise) of its being the author's
earlier or later versiDn of the text.
As things therefore extrinsic evidence can establish nD more
than the degree of probability (without reference to its merit) of any
reading, and even this, notion of probability must be qualified. An
editor who consistently adopted the extrinsically most probable
reading, would at the"end of the day be himself a victim .of the pro-
bability that he had accept,e d a number of false readings into his text.
This would be true even if he confined himself to thDse extrinsically
probable readings which were not intrinsicaJly impossible.. Even the
best mss have many readings which are manifestl absurd: this being
XXVI Miilat"imiidhava Sect. 6

so, it is obvious that they must contain other errors which are less
manifest.
Extrinsic evidenoe falls broadly under two headings: firstly the con-
currence of independent mss, secondly the worth of an individual InS.
The latter, as is implied above, is itself based upon intrinsic evidence.
One could of course imagine a ms known by extrinsic proof to be a
direct copy of the archetype. And it might be thought that the age of
a ms is a valid extrinsic criterion: but although in practice age and
excellence tend to go together, no editor finding an old InS to be badly
corrupted, would respect it the more for the date on its colophon.
If the worth of a ms' is based on the intrinsic worth of its readings, the
use of this authority to override the intrinsic merits of a particular
reading is a form of tail-chasing: what wilJ now become evidence of
the ms's worth has been based on a prior assumption of that worth.
I have laboured this point at some length because the basic principles
of textual criticism do not always seem to have been accepted even
among very reputable Sanskritists. Todar Mall's edition of the Maha-
vlracarita is an impressive example of exact and careful scholarship.
But a passage of his introduction (p.xx) presents almost too temptingly
easy a target. Holding that the Southern mss represent the original
and the Northern mss the revised text of the play he says, 'I have
consequently adhered to the readings of the Northern Group, and in
that Group, too, to those of the Subdivision no. 4 comprising the MSS,
eu, K and E, which are the oldest and represent the oldest text. I have
totally avoided the dangerous and unscientific principles of electicism,
of picking up the best readings from the MSS.. of different Groups
or of different recensions. Though in about half-a-adozen cases I was
forced to adopt the readings of the Southern Group (the readings of
the MSS. of the Northern Group giving no sense), yet even these few
cases I have taken care duly to point out ID the Illustrative Notes.'
But what of cases where the Northern mss give poor sense? Does
he think that Bhavabhuti revised hi text so as to replace good readings
with bad ones? If he believes that Bhavabhuti was in is dotage when
he made the revisions, he would surely be justified in seelcing to
establish the earlier version instead. And if such were really his belief,
should he not perhaps accept even the nonsensical readings into his
text? But it can at least be granted that when textual revision is in
question, all the readings of one recension are under suspicion, and
that where they are of radically different appearance rather than adopt
them we should try to emend the alternative recension (though equally,
 Introduction xxvu

whether it gives poor sense or no sense at all). More objectionable is

his adherence to his Northern Subdivision 0 . 4 whose mss he says
are oldest 'and represent the oldest te.xt. ' It i not I think, mere verbal
quibbling to point out that all the mss r'e present a text of equal age
(save, indeed, that by his own reckoning the Southern mss represent
a text marginally older). He means on]y that the text of this sub-
division is closest to the archetype, and this in turn means nothing
more than that it contains the fewest errors of transmission. What
he fails to see, is that since he does not believe that the mss of the other
subdivisions are descended from Cu, K and E it is absurd to suppose
that they have duplicated all the errors of these latt .f, however many
other errors of their own they may have committed. The greatest
Sanskritist ever to edit one of Bhavabhuti s plays if he aad had better
materials, the present work would be unnecessary and impertinent}
was, I think, R. G. Bhandarkar: and it is heartening to note how firmly
his edition of the Malatlmadha a was founded upon the 'dan-
gerous and unscientific principles of eclecticism.
The burden of an these considerations is that an editor cannot let
rules of ms authority dictate his text. Tile fatal aUure of such rules,
as Housman has pointed out, lies in the fact that once formulated
they can be applied endlessly with no further trouble. I ha e tried to
bear in ntind that there must be at least two or thr,ee places .mthe play
where even my humblest ms has preserved the truth. alone or almost
alone. I have erred, I am on the side of too much veneration
for authority. With so much fresh ms e idence m main preoccupation
has been with establishing the general picture and grasping its signi-
ficance. My hope is that readers of the text I present will, on a more
mature consideration of the evidence, be enabled to point to the places
where the text can be improved by accepting a cogent minority reading
which I have passed over too hastily.
The above is an account of the principles I have tried to follow in
dealing with textual cruces. There remains a further category of
readings in which variants have to be chosen between: those where
intrinsic judgements are not involved because the text is hardly
affected by the choice of one reading rather than another. In European
textual criticism this class is made up of a few everyday synonyms,
variations of formulae and the like. In Sanskrit, on the contrary this
type of variant in terms of sheer number outweighs the other. Three
reasons may be distinguished for this. The first is the limitations on
our knowledge of classical Sanskrit usage. This can only be remedied
 XXVlll M alat lmiidhava Sect. 6
by large numbers of critical editions and daunting lexicographical
and grammatical labours. I have been struck by the fad that in several
places in the Mfllatlmadha va slight peculiari ties of expression in the
published editions turn out to be based on late readings which can be
corrected from earlier mss. One may wonder to what extent our
notions of permissible turns of phrase are subconsciously based on
the recollection of one or two vividly remembered passages ofquestio-
nable authenticity.
This consideration shades into the second and more important
reason, which is the undoubtedly actual flexibility of Sanskrit idiom.
This is apparent both at the grammatical leve1,in the numerous
modes of expressing such notions as past time and injunction, and
at the lexical level, in the wealth of exactly equivalent synonyms. The
general truth that there is nothing to choose between these synonymous
expressions when they occur as variants, must of course be modified
sometimes by the question of their £ppropriateness in other respects
most obviously in terms of verbal assonance and word-play.
The third reason is on a rather different level to the other two, and
helps to explain the frequency of variant readings of the types just
discussed: namely the character and attitudes of those who copied
the mss. It seems clear that the majority of them were by no, means
mere scribal hacks, mechanically copying without comprehension
whatever was put before them. On the contrary they must frequently
have been men of considerable education, well versed in the Sanskrit
language. This unfortunately is by no means more likely to ensure an
accurate copying of the text. The mistakes of an uncomprehenrung
hack, although if he is careless they may be frequent, are usually
superficial in nature and easily corrected by an editor. The mistakes
of an educated copier are more devious and deep-rooted often leaving
no trace on the surface and puzzling only the attentive reader. This
is true even of one anxious to be minutely faithful to his exemplar.
One must add the thought that some paI?-4its had no such notion of
their responsibilities - that if one had taxed them with having re-
placed one word by another equally appropriate or more to their
taste, they would have regarded the reproach as puzzling and pedantic.
An editor when he has put his apparatus aside may be able to feel
sympathy for such a view, but it is also true that alterations may not
always be as trivial as they seem, or may multiply over the centuries
and give rise to larger corruptions.
 Introduction XXlX

It is in these circumstances that the criteria of extrinsic plausibility

may legitimately operate. ormally this would mean accepting into
the text that reading which commands the greatest amount of inde-
pendent support among the mss or is attested by those mss which have
proved themselves least subj ect to error. In the case of a work which
shows signs of revision by the author, however, an editor is provided
with an extrinsic crit,e rion of exceptional usefulness. The Mfilati-
madhava would appear to be such a work, and I postpone to the
roJlowing section a detail.ed consideration of the question and its
effect upon the selection of readings. Within the context of the present
discussion, I will merely point out as between two readings of
equal intrinsic merit, the general evidence for revisiun still provides
nothing more than an extrinsic criterion, which can be followed only
with misgivings and Jaute de mieux.
One consideration in the selection of r,eadings might be formally
subsumed under the question of what constitutes a reading. By this
I refer to the frequently observable phenomenon whereby variants
in two neighbouring words or phrases follow identical patterns of
distribution. This may good even where the two readings are
logically and grammatically independent of each other. This no doubt
comes about from the fact that ms were copied phrase for rather than
'S}:llable by syllable. Its implic'a tion for an editor is that in such cases
the 'phrase should be consider,ed first of all as a whole,. and the first
consideration given to adopting the reading of one set of mss in. toto.
The 'mixing ,of in these circumstances although sometimes
desirable, must be regarded as invo l iog an element of editorial
emendation .
. - ··A... ·mnll problem remains that of insta nces where none of (he mss
readings seems to have a rea onable chance of f,e presenbng the
original text, I have made few emendations in the coure of the play
and all of them are of a more Of less formal nature in oIving little
more than a correction of spelling or the reconstruction of an ac-
ceptable Prakrit fonn from the evidence of m and commentaries
(e.g. orul)l?-a at VII pr. U ). Radical emendation is called
for when the evtdence does not provide or point directly to an ac-
ceptable reading and the first step in such emendation is an explicit
adjudgement that the passage is corrupt I ha e taken this first step
in a few places, but in none ha e I feU the confidence to go beyond
it. It may indeed seem in a ea e a retrograde tep to produce an
xxx Miilafimiidha a Sect. 6

edition of this play with certain passages marked corrupt when

previous editions are supposedly capable of being construed through-
out. However the readings of those editions in such passages are
based on a few late mss and appear to be mere patcb ings up with
little chance of representing the original. It may here be observed that
while it is perfectly legitimate to adopt a poorly attested minority
reading into the text, one of the tests which such a reading must pass
is that of not making the aberraticns of all the other mss seem totally
inexplicable.
The fact that I mark very few passages as requiring em,e ndation
does not imply that I regard emendation as being on the whole un-
necessary, merely that I regard it as being generally impossible .. There
may well be some dozens of passages where ncne of our surviving
mss preserv:; the and where corruption lies successfully hidden.
More important however are the hundreds of instances where the
truth has survived, but with its existence 0 bscnred by the clamorous
presence of highly plausible variants. It is to be hoped that a good
many of these wiU yield with fair certainty to a more refined and
leisurely analysis of the evidence now presented in the apparatus.

7. Evidence for revision

The possibility that Bhavabhuti revised his original text was first
raised by Bhandarkar, who says (Preface to second edition, p.vi)
'Looking to the fact that the groups give readings which are intelligible
enough and often equally good, though a shade of difference can be
discovered. which renders one preferable to the other tbe conviction
forced itself upon me that these changes were made by the poet himself
at different times, and some mss have preserved tbe earlier form and
some the later.' And S. M. Katre in support of this view has instanced
the stanzas I 3 and III 8. Todar Mall found similar evidence in theMV
(Introduction p.xviil and at about the same time so, it seems, did
S. K. Be.l valkar in the UR (cf. Introduction p.lxxii). It is to be strongly
regretted that the third volume of Belvalkar's edition was never
published, for in it he promises two appendices (nos. 6 and 8) dealing
with the question.
There is nothing extravagantly fanciful in the notion of revision
by an author. In Bhavabhiiti's case it is evident enough that bis plays
were written for performance. We have at the most therefore, to
suppose that at some time after its first production a proposal for
 IntroduClion XXX 1

revlvrng the Malatlmadhava under Bha abbuti s supervlslon was

made, and that he decided, as any author naturally might to make
certain revisions in the text. His earlier versions would already have
gained currency. U mess his revisions were positively suppressed their
chances of also becoming known would be great. 0 more would be
needed than the survival of a ms with Bhavabhfiti s corrections
written in, even supposing he had ne er bothered to have a fresh copy

The idea of two editions is attracti e in that it would more than

adequately account for tbe great proLiferatmn of varian at an early
stage of the tradition. What it unfortunatd would not dispel is the
evidence for a high degree of contamination between tradition also
at an 'early stage. The only hypothesis that .m ight account fo r this (if
we suppose that it needs accounting for. beyond what has already
been said about the prevalence of textual conflation) is that of a whole
3eries of revised versions issuing from Bhavabhiiti s pen some of which
might even in certain places revert to earlier thoughts - again a not
uncommon trait of authors (for a possible example , cf. note on IX
27b). There is nothing to rule suoh a possibilitx out but it must be
said that our chances of reconstructing the ddails of such a sequence
are remot'e .
Thus the notion that Bha vabhiiti wrote more than one version of
the play cannot be discarded. However a conclusive demonstration
of it is in the natU[le of things extremely difficult. A bigb proportion
of the evidence must be uncertain or ambiguous. Between two variants,
both a priori acceptable, one can usuall · dredge up arguments on
either side as to which is the original and which the correction. And
even if it is established that a particular f1e cension represents a syste-
matic revision of the text, it is still open to a sceptic to argue that the
reviser was someone other than the author. Furthermore the fact must
not be lost sight tb.at mss which unite in p,r esenting a particular
version of the author s text must be expected to how equal unity in
the presentation of a number of errors. I rather think indeed that
Katre's second ,example falls into this category. At III 8a he is surely
right in preferring sratp.sayaty to but it is now po sible
to see that the former is far from being a rc:ading only of the Southern
mss: it is in fact supported not only by ABD but also by I which is
normally ams of the earlier text'. In view of this there seems a lot in
favour of the solution which Katre does not consider , namely that
itself is a mere error .. Katre s other example stanza I .3
XXX 11 Miilatlmiidhnva Sect. 7

forms part of the prologue, which contains more radical divergences.

than any other portion of the play. With the exception of the rewriting
of the dialogue between stanzas 3 and 5 by the Southern mss (which
is discussed in the Notes), these divergences all seem to me to bear
signiificantly an the question of two versions, which I consider there-
fore first of ;ill in relation to the prologue, and thereafter in the wider
context of the play as a whole.
Two versions of the prologue
There are five major points of ms divergence. Details are given in the
apparatus, but for convenience they may be summarized as follows:-
1) stanza 1 placed first by ACENO; placed second by
DGKLM: omitted by I
2) stanza 2E omitted by ACDEGHK ; read by ILJmarg
MNO
3) stanza 3: the readings 'bhajanam etc' ACELMNO' etc'
DGIJK
4) stanza 6A Cgul)ai4') omitted by ABCD EL; read by GIJKMNO
5) 7.i-vi ('ato ... pnwartantam') omitted by ABCDE ; read by GIJKL ;
the second sentence (tat. .. °tantam) read after stanza6by MNO;
the whole read elsewhere by two further mss.
It will be seen that despite fluctuations a rudimentary pattern
emerges. The readings I have adopted are aD supported by ACE; what
is more they are in essence supported by MNO, but with the distinc-
tion that the rejected stanzas are admitted (or readmitted) into the
text, and that a part of the rejected prose is readmitted at a different
point. At the start of the play the ms D most uncharacteristically
deserts the other Newan mss, but later enters the fold. (Whether the
first leaf of B agreed with D or with ACE is a matter for speculation,
but it may he noted thitt at 4.3 it sides with ACE in omitting Vidar-

If we consider the three versions which emerge, that of ACE, that

of the Southern mss, and that centring upon I, the only one which
seems completely coherent as it stands is the first. We may take as
our starting point stanza 6A which is a reference to Bhavabhuti's guru
lnananidhi. Bhandarkar rightly rejects it as inappropriate here, but
seems wrong in implying that it is an importation from the prologue
to the MV. The fact that it.;; second half is identical with the second
half of stanza 5 of that play carried little weight in itself. Bhavabhiiti's
 Introduction XXXlIl

habit of repeating even whole stanzas between one play and another
is well-known, and here the first half although it is given d ifferently
in different mss bears not the slightest relationship to that of stanza
5 there. When it is found ip so many mss, the first and most natural
assumption is that it is original. The fact remains that it sits awkwardly
with stanza 7. It is the language of a beginner recommending himself
by his antecedents. The stanza which follows expresses the point of
view of a mature poet insistent that his work should be judged on its
own merits. Consequently we may fonn the hypothesis that stanza 6A
belongs to an earlier form of the prologue and was r,e placed by stanza 7.
Divergences (1) and (2) may be considered together. Stanza 2B has
much poetic merit and is read by many mss. On the hypothesis pro-
visionally adopted we may assume that it formed part of the original
prologue and was later rejected by the poet. I suggest th at it was re-
jected in favour of stanza 1, which is surely the most delightful and
original of all the benedictory stanzas. This would help to explain
the alternative positions of stanza I , and even the odd comment of
Harihara (see Notes). Originally the play would have started with
stanzas 2 and 2B (as it in fact does in I). Later this would have been
corrected by the addition of stanza I in the margin and the cancel-
lation of 2B. In copying this it would be easy to ignore the canoellation,
and to include stanza 1 in the wrong place. What is more, in first
correcting the original version the words api ca might have been placed
immediately before stanza 2. If the earliest of the mss which incor-
porate stanza 1 at the wrong point bad left api ca where it was, the
result would have been that which HaRbara apparently had before
him.
The version of stanza 3 given by DGIJK is hardly likely to have
originated from anyone but8havabhuti : its spare forcefulness of
style is somehow not what one would expect from an interpolater.
In adopting the other version, I am staking aU on the
supposition that this represents Bhavabhuti's own later thoughts.
The clue possibly lies in the epithet introduced into the v,erse, viSV3-
miirte'. Bhavabhiiti (whose sympathies, a.c cording to Harshe p.90,
were at bottom Vedantin) may have wished to avoid giving the im-
pression of worshipping the Sun as .a n independent deity. In the
connection arises the vexed question of t he identity of Kalapriyanatha
evidently an important deity of the town or city in which Bhava-
bhiiti's plays (all three of them) were performed t but a deity nowhere
else mentioned under this name.. And as a prdiminary, the question

3
XXXLV Mala tfmiidha va ect. 7

of Padmanagara and Padmavati must be clarified.

Padmanagara (or Padmapura) was Bhavabhiiti birthplace and
was in the South (MV and MM, all mss), probably in Berar (MM m
DGIJKLO). After reading MM IX 3.l-5, .one can hardly doubt that
it wall not far from the river Goda vari Bhandarkar very reasonably
suggests that it was in the Chanda district of Berar where there are
still many Taittireyi1"l. Brahmins (V. V. Mirashi proposes modem
Padampur, some two miles from Amgaon in the Bhandra di trict-
but this is much further from the Godavari and there are five other
Padampurs in these two districts alone). Padmavati i where the scene
of the MM is laid . It is not in Berar (l 9.4 e6) and, from the pa age
just referred to (IX 3.1- 5), not in the South at alL On the basis of quite
precise descriptions at the end of Act IV and beginning of Act IX
General Cunningham identified it with modem N arvar (in the Gwalior
region, 100 miles south of Agra); and M. V. Lele, refining on tbis
discovery, has identified Padmavatl with the remains of a considerable
city near the village of Pavaya, to the north-east of arvar. (Basham
in 'The Wonder that was India' plate 26a, shows a pillar capital
depicting Surya, from 'Pawayft, GwaJior'.)
I can see no virtue in Kane's suggestion that Kalapriyanatha is the
name of a local shrine at Padmanagara. Everything indicate that
Bha'.'abhiiti left his ancestral home and travelled north: the entence
'asti Padmanagaraf!! nama nagaram is absurd other-
wise - as if an audience at the Shakespeare Memorial Theatre wer"
to be infonned, 'There is in the county of Warwick a town called
Stratfoni. ' There is another belief, that KaJapriyanMha is the famou
mahakala linga of Ujjain. This, so far as I can di cover is based
entirely upon Tripudiri's brief gloss, Kalapriyanathasya maha-
kalftspadasya But there seems no reason to uppose that
Tripurari was doing more than guessing (as is Jagaddhara on 1 4.3:
'Padmanagararp. Padmavatl'). Jagaddbara restricts himself to tad-
desadevabhedsya', while - significantly, if he too j
not guessing - says 'KalapriYaJ:!l nama devata ya .
M. V. Lele advances the claims of modem Kalpi (about 75 mil
south of Kanauj on the right bank of the Jumna). This claim is de-
veloped by V. V. Mirashi, who believes that the city of Kruapriya had
a shrine dedicated to the Sun. The arguments on both sides may be
studied in Kane's Introduction to the UR (pp 11-22). Briefly the
evidence rests on the legend of Samba who established
temples to the Sun in various parts of India. Mirashi quotes
 Introduction xxx.
ca karayam asa tatt a itl Udayacale
Yamunayas ca madhye Kalapn) am madhyahne
sthapya cottamam/ etc. (Varahapurar:ta 17 55-6 B.Led 177 51-2).
Kane points out that the PuraJ?ic tex · are corrupt and unreliable and
that the references to Kfllapriya (here and Bhavi . apura£?a 1 129.16)
may be late. The fact remains that we have a ource quite independent
of Bhavabhuti connecting KalapI i a \ ith the un. And with the city
Kalapriya we are surel nearer to a parallel for the word Kalapriya-
natha than we are with the name Ka la puj ita and Kalanatha as
synonyms of Siva (Kane in fact would prefer to read KalapriyamHha.
but this reading is poorly attested in M and UR and not at all
in MM).
That the city of Kalapriya is modem Kalpi i made almost certain
by a quotation which Mirasru adduces from Raja ' ekhara (Kavya-
p.94 - 'yo (dig-vibhagal:t Gadhipurasya a
Gfldhipura mean Kanauj of which Kalpi is
indeed due south. Rajasekhara s choice of an example sugge ts that
in his day at least (perhaps rather less than two centuries after Bha a-
bhUti) there was easy commerce between Kaiapriya and the capital.
It will be seen that this all fits weU with the statement in the Raja-
taratigini that Bhavabhiiti like Vakpatiraja was a subject of
varman. Although the e idence is sparse and therefore inconclusive
the most consistent hypothesis seems to me to be this: that Bha a-
bhuti like his hero Madhava came orth from Vidarbha (possibly
indeed, like Madhava, to further his education i Padma atl)' that
he grew to know well the region south of the Yamuna which embraces
Padmavati and Kalapriya' that be settled in the latter place which
contained a shrine to a tutelary deity'Kalapriya-natha probably
identified with the Sun-god' and that he wrote his plays for per-
formance at the festi als of this deit .
The identification of Kalapriyanatha with the un would of course
be established beyond doubt if we accepted the reading of I K and
three otherms at 7.iii (see apparatusp.A9)
suryasya . E en if on the other band we totally
deny the identification, the theory that Bhavabhiiti altered stanza 3
from what might be called theological moti es is still not invalidated.
But the point remains interesting and relevant because e idently the
problem of the precise terms in which a particular deity is to be re-
ferred to, will present itself with special force to the poet s mind if he
knows that his work is to be performed at that deity s shrine.
xxxvi Ma/at fmiidhava Sect. 7

Although the arguments are less compelling, it seems quite reason-

able to explain the lines of prose (7.i-vi) attributed after stanza 7 to
the sutradhara by GIJKL, on the same basis of textual revision. As
things stand, the speech partly echoes the phrasing of 5.1- 5. If both
are original, Bhavabhuti no doubt eliminated the second as being too
nearly tautologous, at the same time pruning out as unnecessarily
artificial the instructions for performance and the assistant's immediate
recollection that these are already being carried out. These instruc-
tions are inserted by MNO after stanza 6: this is easily accounted for
if we accept the notion which I implied earlier that the Southern re-
cension is based on a revised text into which material of the earlier
versiQn has been deliberately reincorl'orated. The fact that two mss
place the whole speech just before the assistant's entry also suggests
that the lines had some sort of floating existence.
A possible objection to rejecting the passage is that the title of the
play is no longer explicitly mentioned (although suggested by the
assistant in his subsequent remarks), unless we follow E in including
it at 5.5. This is however the fact of the matter as presented by ABeD
MNO, and it does not seem to me a fatal flaw, especiaUy since we are
merely assuming that the title was there in the first place and was
eliminated by Bhavabhiiti in redrafting, either accidentally or because
the point did not worry him. It is in fact extremely interesting to note
that those very mss which do include the passage under discussion
with its mention of the title are the ones which omit the phrase MaJatl-
vallabhasya at 7.5 below.
The pattern of ms alignments in the prologue is more confused than
in the rest of the play. This is not surprising, since the beginning of a
work is obviously in an exposed position where the risks of conflation
are concerned. But despite the confusion, I think that certain points
do emerge. First, there is good evidence that the prologue was deli-
berately revised. Secondly, if we accept this, then the revision must
have been by Bhavabhuti: no one else is likely to have written stanza
1 or to have taken it upon himself to cancel stanza 6A. It is in the
Newari and Southern recensions that we are to look for the revised
readings, and it is only the Newari mss which (if we ignore D's
initial aberration) present the revised version in a reasonably pure
form. But on the other hand no ms would appear to present the
original version in its pure form: all, except I, read stanza I, and all
without exception read stanza 7. The general picture which emerges
is of a whole range of versions stemming from mss corrected to a
 ..
Introduction xxx vu

greater or lesser extent against the revised text.

Revision throughout the play

How does such a picture compare with the textual evidence for the
rest of the play? First, the mss settle down into a far more regular
pattern of agreements. The Newari mss with or without the support
of MNO, are ranged against EGHIKL.. E, I and K however are prone
to change sides. This tendency is particularly marked in E and that
it stems from a conflation of traditions is clearly shown by its readings
at VI. 9.10 and VIII 10.4 where it inoorporated both versions - in
the latter case at least taking over what I judge to be a corrupted
reading from the Newarlmss (see note on VllI 10.3-] 1.8). HI often
forms an interesting sub-group, but its peculiarities seem to be partly
due to deliberate interpolation (thus at IX 33.1l, savakrandam must
result from misinterpreting sapavadam as a stage-direction). The un-
supported testimony of MNO is similarly dubious I(cf the notes on the
Southern readings at I 3.5 and X 6. 5-7.1). Unfortunately for an
editor's peace of mind, the mss do not always divide along expected
lines: thus at I 10.2, the naga.ri mss K.L support the Newan reading
arovedi, while the Southern. and sarada mss a£le agreed on tuvaravedi .
The question raised above, namely whdher EGHIKL represent
the original version in its pure form, or themselves incorporate correc-
tions, is difficult to answer satisfactori[y. Most of the chan.ges in the
body of the play are small-scale involving no more than the alteration
of a word or phrase, and if therefore similar changes had operated
upon EGHIKL, no trace of the fact would remain. There is, I think,
no conclusive proof that these mss do not give us the true original
version, and that the different picture presented by the prologue is
not due to its special liability to conflation. On the other hand, the
supposition that no part of the ms tradition has 'escaped the effects
of revision makes an easier working hypothesis .. The queshon is for
instance relevant to one of the few large-scale cruces in the play,
VIII 10.3-11.8 (see note ad loc.): if we can think of EGHIKLas
stemming from an original text with marginal the crux
can be explained. in terms of textual revision" if not, we mu . explain
it as due to the accidental omission of a few lines,. despite the sug-
gestive fact that the shorter form of the passage mak'es a plausible first
version.
A quite different question is whether the revised recension itself
is based upon a corrected ms of the first version. I think it is, but only
XXXVlll M iilatTmiidhava Sect. 7

in the sense that Bhavabhiiti made his corrections upon an exi ting
IllS and left it to someone else to copy it out. There are a number of
instances, none individually conclusive but cumulatively significant
where revision seems to have led to a disarrangement of the text Thus
at X 11.3 a marginal lekkalla may have caused I;limmalakulekka to
be changed to l)immalekkalla. At VHl 4.10 satyameva ha replaced
priyesatyam, when it may have been meant to replace only at yam .
and two lines further on, the position of vac a is changed which might
explain why it is omitted in KM O. At III pr.12 replaces
bhaavadie in IMNO, and is added to it in A BeD wherea what is
needed is 'jat:la:t:llea'. Similarly at VI 9.10 is not a very
satisfactory substitute for slma: what i needed is something
like 'yuktaeva At IV 3b and Vl2a it looks as if the sub-
stitution of 'nirvy.aja' for avyaja may in each case have l.ed to the loss
of the preceding grammatical inflection. At VU 0 . 22 was
evidently added before in this ca e the ewan
omission of the latter may be a subsequent and unrelated error. At
V 2M. tbe Newan for skhalayati gatim is odd, and it
may be that a further correction to the stanza has been 10 t. If the
corrected copy was intended for a particular performance (as is sug-
gested by the rearrangement at X 23.5--6), Bbavabhuti might have
added some comments for the benefit of the producer or performers
and this might explain the Newari taradlrarava at VII 1.32. Most such
comments, of course, would not have become accidentally inco:r-
porated. But there is just possibly anotber example at I 15.5. If
Bhavabhuti glossed the word as 'Madhavfmtikam upeyad
this might explain why aB'revised' text mss substitute
the latter phrase and most 'first version' mss add it after .. I
find the prevalence of the phrase inexplicable on any other terms .
Most of the apparent corrections listed above are, I think, of the
kind that no one but an author would be likely to make to his work ..
The same could well be said also of such improvements as amhe for
tumhe at VII 0.30; the replacement of sreyas at VI 19d and 24d (would
an interpolator have the stamina for such consistency?) ' total changes
of phras' g at VII 0.53 and 0.85; and the changes of construction
at VII 1.1-4 and 1.43 and X ILL Bhavabhuti appears to be seeking
to correct an ambiguity at IX 33.11 , sapavadalpl tu for kif!ltu sapa-
vadam; at X 20c, labdha for datta (this one could be due to a copyist)·
and possibly at VII 0.53, asantaam for vaagadam. P'a rticularly signi-
ficant are two passages where it looks as if discarded Hnes of verse
 Introduction XXX1X

have been turned into prose; tad evam. natidfuavartinah. kramagata

kanyaka, instead of bata karmagata paso!?
kanyaka In 17.1· and Karala atanam
instead of etat Karalayatanarp drutam V 32.5.
In addition there are many instances where 're ied text' readings
are evidently due to a desire to improve the text although there i
nothing in the change itself to prove that it must have been by the
author. Such are taram for mugdham at US ; yugma for kumbha
VIII 6b· tamra for sikta VIII 7c· kadarassa for t;tibbharassa VIII
8.10; the addition of vfuna at V 25. L niskrantau
. Cor niskrantah
. . arve
at the end of Acts IV and VI· the r,e writing at VIa 7 . 10- ] 1 etc.
However the point has already been made that if a group of mss
stems from an ancient recension it is likely to be united in tran mitting
also a number of ancient corruptions. An obvious example is IX 4.1.
where only D (AB being ]ost) reads of \ hich the
gamanam of other mss must be an earty and ery natural corruption.
Similarly at VIIl9b, CE' aparatra (of which D s apiyatra is a separate
corruption) is not merely an improvement on anupatya: the whole
sentence demands the reading. It is not conceivable that Bha abhfiti
having originally written the gerund anupatya should then discover
that the sentence was accidentally capable of yielding much better
sense by the substitution of a word of similar appearance but different
grammatical function. There are probably similar instances of unity
in corruption at VIII 8.38, where original text' mss introduce the name
for kalakala · at V 25a where they read for taql:
at I 20a, where most of them read rajas for ca yas' and at III 12.57,
where all but the Newan mss read vimala for bimba.
Far more important from an editorial point of view is the problem
of corruption in the revised form of the text. Frequently it is the
Newarii mss alone that preserve the revised reading. But these mss
form a homogeneous group and share many readings which t:annot
be anything butcoITuptions. No one, I imagine would wish to accept
into the text 'amaIigaJa.J?:fldo (VI 9.1) dantavali' (VII 1.44), 'vita-
tirnyayiiyujat' (IX 48d), or lajjfu:!1 (X 22.1) .. Scarcely less
certain corruptions are (VII 1.53) 'anayavyaktam'
(VIII 5.16), pamhalida' (Vlll 8.26), na vyavahar3.mi (IX 34.2)
(IX 47. 14) and sama.gamaS ca ex 24c) etc. I have there-
fore not accepted into the text Newa.r1 readings which wtrile not
absolutely impossible seem poorer than the readings of other mss -
e.g. plq.ayant1 (VI 0.3). suha4avflvara' (VIII 8.37) mukham' (IX
xl Ualatlmiidhava Sect. 7

39d), 'katharn api' (IX 49a), ex la), 'Kaman-

ex
daki ... jlvati' 6.5). I have also indulged myself to the extent of
rejecting two corrections which are very probably Bhavabhuti sown .:
'asthi' (V 17a) and 'priyavayasyam etc' (VI. 18.14).
A particular problem arises when the Newari reading is very similar
in fonn to the reading it replaces. Here there is too obvious a possi-
bility of simple miscopying to the hypothesis of revision parti-
cularly probable. Thus I have rejected vara for ghara at VII pr.6·
vivajjida for visajjida at VIl 1.37 ; bandhavarp. for bandhave at IX
19a; for at IX 37c; and prayasam for pravasam at
X 13a. Unfortunately the principle (like any other extrinsic test) is
not infallible. When a writer revises his work, a rn.inor alteration of
sense usually precipitates a major alteration of sounds. But sometimes
it will occur to him on reading through his work that slightly changing
a syllable or two will lead to a gain in sense. There may be instances
of this in the readings quoted above. A more elaborate instance is
l'Jssibly found at VII 1.2, where the Newan reading kavalidajantu
has for me a genuine ring. If the alternative kavalijjanta is equally
genuine, we do have a case where the sound-pattern of the original
version has suggested to the author the form of a correction.
When the N ewan mss themselves are in conflict, the choice of
reading is especially difficult. It is C which shows some independence
of the others, and where it deserts them (as in failing to read avapi-
danirbhinna' at VI 12a and at VIII Sa), authority for a
possible revised reading is even more restricted. C and D alone survive
for the last two and a half acts: where they agree, the Newfui readlllg
may be taken as well-established; where they are at variance an
editor is in some difficulties.
There are cases where the Newari mss give a clear indication of a
different version, but where I have not been able to make sense of
their readings - thus, at VII 1.43. Major in-
stances occur at IV 4.14 etc', VII pr. 11 'mantharapaehirp.
etc', and VIII 8.31-34 (see apparatus).
Omissions pose a special problem, in that the evidence they provide
is essentially negative. An omission can sometimes be shown to be
accidental, but it is difficult ever to demonstrate that it is deliberate.
For this reason, despite the agreement of the Newan and Southern
mss, I have preserved vlqia at VI 4.7; baddba at V] 4.8 '
jividappadait:ta at VII 0.86; da<.?ha at VIl 0.89; and kila at IX 47.13.
On the other hand it is quite obvious that any writer in revising his
 Introduction xli

work can be expected to strike out a n umber of words and phrases.

Wher'e therefore there is good authority for an omission, and reasons
can be adduoed for its ha,ing been made I have accepted it into the
text. Thus I have omitted at VII 1.:2; at
VIII 4.13; and even tu at IX 35.5; and longer pbra e at 1 34.3 HI
pr. 16 and X 13.].
In working upon the text of the pia , the belief that Bha abhuti
made revisions to it has grown in me slowl and steadily until I now
have very little doubt in the maUer. As observed abo e, such a hypo-
thesis gives an editor a powerful instrument for discriminating rational-
ly between variants. Without the supposition that the ersion of the
Newari mss represen ts Bha abhiit.i later t.houghts, one would
hesitate a long time between readings so nearly equal as ikirna and
.. at V ISb' pasahanam
vivarna . . and paradhlnam. . at Vl1 0.36 ' duppurisa
and purisa at VIII 6.14 ; fllI?4a and at VIII 9c' dravati etc and
etc at VIII 12b; and at IX 33.4' ahamenam
and tavad at IX 39 .1; anyatra and at IX 41c' mahusao and
abbhudao at X 9.1 . antarida adikkanta and adiritta at X 18.4. Even
so, as the discussion above of cases where the Newan evidence is
conflicting or difficult to interpret wiLl have shown a frontier of un-
certainty must remain' and the evidence for revision serves merely to
shift its location and limit its ,extent.

8. The Prakrit passages

The editing of the Prakrit passages raises particular problems. In gen-
eral they are much the more corrupt For this two reasons may be ad-
vanced: first that Bha abhiiti s style in the Longer Prakrit speeches
is one of extreme oomplexity second, that Prakrit ceased to be widely
understood at an earJy period so that in. the end the cribes were
copying what was mainly incomprehensible to them. Thi ma seem
at variance with what was said abo e about the advantages of mechan-
ical copyists: but the trouble here ]ies in the long period when Prakrit
was half-understood, and in the fact that the attitude of the copyists
did not move with the realities of the situation. They retained an
expectation of understanding what they copied e en when totany at
sea. The standard of aocurac in the Prakrit is more do ely related
to the actual age of the ms than is the general quality of its recension.
But even the oldest mss show many aberrations and our earliest
commentator, Harihara, writing not later than L216 A.D ..
xlii Mala tlmadhava Sect.. 8

Prakrit as 'vitdisakari kudhiyam adhunatananam .

In the South particu larly, Prakrit seems to have presented difficulties
from an early date, and the Southern mss of this play are more prone
than the others to incorporate into the text a Prakritized gIo in place
of an incomprehensible des] word. This i not necessarily to be
gretted: such a practice is sometimes a useful cro -check upon a
disputed reading. One of the most interesting examples is at HI 15 . 11
where Cl's camadida, corrupted even in ABD, is strikingly confirmed
by the 'pamahida' of 0 . Sim ilarly at VI 14.3 0 s kulaitthi' no doubt
represents a gloss upon ABCDE's ammaka (cf. HMs 'kulakaI]l)akao
for the same word at VII 0. 35). So too M reads 'via anta for vosat-
!hanta at VIII 8.30, while this and 'papphulla' are among the variants
for the same word at VI 11. 6. At VJlI 8.32 the word oalla even if it
were not read by I a nd J agaddhara, might have been reconstructed
by an exceptionally attentive editor from the variants
'pallattha' and 'vippaladdha' (none of them, in fact, quite the correct
meaning in this particular oontext).
The Prakrit of the Malatlmadhava is entirely in prose and in the
Saurasenl dialect. In all the difficulties of tracing t he Sanskrit passages
back to their original form, we have at least tbe advantage of dealing
with a known language whose grammar and orthography are generaUy
inviolable. In the case of Bhavabhuti's Saurasenl, to the other dif-
ficulties is added our uncertainty as to whether he in fact conforms
to all the prescriptions of the grammarians. In the end I have been
forced to the conclusion that he does not On this point there is a smaU
piece of direct evidence. At Act VI stanza 10 and 11 , Madhava speaks
two Sanskrit stanzas which he intends Malati to mistake for the
Prakrit of Lavangika:-
Sarale sahasaragam parihara rambhoru munca
virasarp. virahayasarp. soq.hllI!1 tava cittam cell
va vicchedadaruI.1ayasakarit;li/
kamarp. kuru vararohe dehi me /
are no important variants: the verses are evidently as
bhuti wrote them. The evidence they provide is meagre, but important
in being completely certain. The use of intervocalic y, and of m for
an usvara, we may dismiss as matters of minimal importance. The
infinitive and the quantities. of 2nd sg imperative with their
perhaps slightly archaic flavour are no doubt pr'essed into service for
the occasion. Similarly with the form tava,. not used elsewhere in the
 Introduction xliii

Prakrit of the play (instead the fonn tuha occurs at II 0.3J) - though
negatively it suggests that te for de would ha e been phonetically
unacceptable. We are left with the forms kariq.l. and viccheda.
From them we may deduce that Bha abhfIti regarded it as permissible
in Saurasenl to retain initial k within a compound and g and d inter-
vocalically. We cannot infer however that the forms raarp and
vicchea would have been les . acceptable. But the facts as they stand
are sufficient to throw doubt on our usual assumptions about dramatic
Sauraseni With regard to iccheda, a particularly interesting point
emerges. Bhavabhuti uses the word at three other places in the play.
At Hr 12.50 and VI 4.9 the e idence for the fonn without d is very
strong, especially in view of the natural tendenc of the ms towards
Sanskritization. At VII 1.81 on the other hand after this stanza,
not a single ms omits the d. It is an ob iOllS conclusion that Bhava-
bhOti favoured the form vicchea but that ha ing been driven to use
viccheda he resolved to stick to the latter.
There is evidence of other inconsistencies -cf maJ?ahara VI 5.6
with manohara
. III 3.10 12.37 etc: ahini
. esa VI 7.32 with abhini . esa
II pr. 14, VII 0.57' In 12.49 with saal!la III l2.43. The last Corm
is no doubt chosen there for assonance \\ ith raanlo . The same desire
for assonance no doubt explains the unusual past participle form in
-ia at III 12.17-'aviaviasiasia in A s reading.
In making revisions, Bhavabhuti may ha e changed certain Prakrit
forms - e.g. bidia for ducfia passim with the probable exception of
VII 1.81, where the correction may not ha e been made or not have
been incorporated' vatti for etb VI 2.l 2 and V]] 1.58'
for damsedum VII 0.46' and ekkalla for ekka VII 0.88 and X 11.3.
Instead therefore. of retaining any a priori notions about Prakrit
forms, it has seemed wise simpl' to establish what sort of general
picture the mss actually present. In formal terms what I have done
is to remove questions of grammar and pbonology from the sphere
of intrinsic evidence (or rather of intrinsic assumption) where they
would naturally belong, to the sphere of extrinsic evidence. Where
the ms evidence is strong, I have accepted a fonn whether it is the
approved Sauraseni or not. But in cases of doubt I have always allowed
a certain weighting towards the approved form and towards con-
sistency: my object has not been to present confu ion for its own sake,
but to draw attention to those points over which the conclusions of
Pischel and themss of this play plainly part company. In many cases
it has not been possible to choose with any confidence. Forms are
xliv M iilatlmiidhava Sect .. 9

discussed in the Notes as they arise - e.g.. in Act 1 khu I 8.]; daI;li
8.2; (Ip.)ti 10.1 ; kadhatp. 19.6; jjeva 19.6.

9. Commentari,es
The following commentaries are available in print:·
a. Jagaddhara. Malatlmadhavap:ka. Published in Bhandarkar's and
Kale's editions, and in the appendix to Telang sedition. Jagaddhara
appears to have been a native of Mithila, and to have lived in the 14th
century or a little later. The text he fonowed seems to have been rather
eclectic, and he evidently used some good and ancient mss; where his
readings can be determined they are often of some interest, and he
not infrequently quotes variants. N. A. Gore shows in Annals of
B.O.R.I. vol XXII p .38 that the commentary Df Harihara was known
to Jagaddhara.
b. Tripurari Suri (and Nanydeva) . Malatimadhavabhavapradjpika.
PUblished in Telang's edition. The last three acts are by Nanydeva
and entitled Vibudharatnavali.. The commentary was based on a
recension similar to that of M andN.
c. PurrJasarasvati. Published in tbe Trivandrum edition.
The text which he followed, and which is reconstructed in that edition,
is entirely of the Malayalam recension: almost all its readings are to
be found in some or all of the mss If 'Ef s- coUat(rl for the edition.
(Among modem that of Haridasa Siddhantavag'isa
in the edition published by himself (Naldpur, 2nd eel
1920) may be mentioned for its common sense and comprehensive-
ness.)
The following commentaries exist in manuscript:·
d . Harihara Two copies of this com-
mentary are known to exist:
(i) Calcutta, Asiatic Society nD 4805 (Cat no 5299). Newari (vartula)
script. palm leaf. 1215-16 A.D. many leaves tom. foU 94 (but with
10 odd leaves missing) . 6 lines to page.
Begins.' na ya/ 1 d urvvaravarida vanagamakandaSika
(etc. 4 stanzas followed by) athatiipakadav (etc. as described at the
beginning of the Notes).
Ends: 11 /1 itimisrasrlmadamoghadevatmajamiSraSrlhariharaviracita-
/ / / srlmanhari-
 Introduction xlv

haramisrovisami / vyadhitaparasara-
rucirfu:!l / / / /
suklesavasare / bh!"gujeca111!"te yogerajlye >rimalladevape / / anena
pa / lokabha
saravivarjjita (the margin, which can only have contained a syllable
or two, is here tom off).
(ii) A ms written in Old Bengali script. (In 1967, when Coulson
photographed it, it was in the ational. Library Kathmanndu. Since
then it appears to have been - there is no record of it at the
Staatsbibliothek, Berlin whkh has a comprebensiv1e catalogue of mss
in NepaL) pahn leaf. foll 116 (lacking 6 leaves towards the beginning).
5 lines to page.
Begins: / / durvvada aridavalagamakandika
(etc., as above).
Ends: / / / /
malatimadha / / sriharinathas,y a
pustakam idam / /
The Calcutta InS is extremely legib]e. The Kathmandu ms is more
difficult to read but can usuaUy be deciphered with a litde care.
There can be little doubt that Haribara was a native of Kashmir.
Although very eclectic in his choice of readings he tends to prefer
the sarada recension (part.icularly the version represented b ms I).
He often says that a reading or an interpretation of the text originates
in Kashmir, and in his discussion of .A ct V he displ.ays a specialised
knowledge o(Saiva phno ophy which would srnely have been possessed
only by a Kashmirian scholar.
It is possible to speculate that Haribara was not living in Kashmir
when he wrote his commentary. This would belp to account for the
fact that no sarada illS of the commentary is known, and also explain
wby he specifically say that certain interpretations of the text are
adopted in Kashmir (something which a Kashmirian audience would
hardly need to be told). Harlhara was clearly a widely travelled man
as can be seen from his knowledge of differeDt receDsions of the play.
He frequently quotes variant readings.
Neither of our mss is Harihara s original copy-both contain
numerous corruptions and misunderstandings .. It seems fairEy clear
that the two mss are independent of eaCh other. The Calcutta illS is
certainly Dot dependent on the Kathmandu InS as it preserves many
passages omitted by the latter. On the other hand the Kathmandu
ms occasionally preser es the truth where the Calcutta ms is corrupt.
xlvi MiilatTmiidhava Sect . 9

There is some evidence that the Kathmandu ms may have been copied
from a ms in the Newan script (like the Calcutta ms) in that it some-
times miswrites p for y or vice versa - in Newan p and y are virtually
identical. The Kathmandu ms reflects its Bengali origins by occasional-
ly substituting a reading which is the same as that of m E though it
may give the game away by reverting to the original reading (as
preserved in the Calcutta ms) a few lines later.
Harihara must obviously have written his commentary some time
before the date on the colophon of the Calcutta ms (336 in the ewan
era = 1215 -16 A.D.), but it is difficult to know how much time to allow
for the process of corruption which we can observe. If we had to a sign
a date to the commentary, some time in the second half of the twelftb
century might be a reasonable gue s .
Harihara's is the oldest surviving commentary on the
madhava, and quite possibly the first ever written. It i certain that
Harihara used mss that are no longer available to us. The commentary
includes a chaya which is particularly useful (although at be t it can
only provide indirect evidence as to the underlying Prakrit text). For
all these reasons, and also because the commentary has never been
published, I have quoted Harihara extensively in the Apparatus.
To a certain extem: I have 'edited the text of th'e commentary in that
I have corrected any obvious TTlistakes in the mss, but if I have been
in any doubt I have contented myself with printing the readings of
the mss as they stand. Very probably I have thus allowed into the
apparatus a few ghost readings which should have been laid to rest,
but it seemed better to do this than to risk omitting something im-
portant. I have added the abbreviation ch' whenever it appears that
we are dealing with a Sanskritization of a Prakrit word in the play.
[R ..S.]
e. Miinanka. Durgamasubodhini..
i) London, India Office 895c Bengali script
ii) London. India Office 158b nagarl
iii) Oxford, Bodleian 136a nagarl
The last two accompany the text jointly with Jagaddhara's com-
mentary, and the Oxford copy may be a transcription of the one at
the India Office.
r. Dhariinanda. (or
Poona, B.O.R.1. (Des Cat vol XIV 162) 438 of 1887-91
" " ,,163) 430 of 1892-95
 Introduction xlvii

Both in nagari. An earl nineteenth century abridgement of Jagad-

dhara.

10. Conventions of the apparatus criticus

In the apparatus. the relevant portion of text ("ru bric' i printed in
heavy type, and the mss supporting its reading enumerated. The
readings of the other mss are then supplied, separated by semic01.ons:
mss are quoted in alphabetical .order except insofar as ariants group
themselves naturally together, Where the reading of the text is shared
by the majority ofmss these are not enumerated: a colon is substituted,
and only mss which show ariants are listed. Very occasionally when
a minority reading is adopted (as over a matter of orthograpby), the
majority variant is qualified by cett, indicating that all mss not other-
wise specified support. In ,c omplicated readings groups of ariants
are sometimes separated off by a double semico]on. Where a ms
shares the reading of otbers except in a minor particular, it is separated
from these others by a comma, and the particular is specified in
italics.
An words which are not part of the quoted reading are printed in
in italics, with the exception of one or two common abbreviations
such as 'om' for 'omitted by .
Variants frequently ,consist merely of a rearrangement of order,
or of an insertion. These are represented by the words before or
'after', the use of the one formula rather tban the other being dictated
by considerations of naturalness and simplicity of presentation. In
the case of insertion into the printed text this formula provides the
rubric: where it seems desirabl.e to specify the mss wbich support the
text, they are enumerated with 'om at the end.
The citation of a ms may be qualified by the self-evident abbre-
viations'marg (in the margin) 'I t' (as original rleading), and 'corr
(as its corrected reading). For none of the mss used has it seemed
feasible or useful to try to distinguish between corrections by the first
hand and corrections by a subsequent hand.. In revising his ms, a
scribe might well use a new pen or a different ink-or even band it
to someone else for checking against tb.e exemplar .. Conversely he
himself might incorporate readings from a second source. Whether
the alterations are meant to represent the c.orrection of error or the
introduction of variants, has therefore to be decided from their nature.
A primary preoccupation has been to present ariants in the most
xlviii M iilatTmadhava Sect. 10

rational and easily comprehensible form, but here two not entirely
reconcilable principles are involved, since variants may operate either
on the formal level of syllabic substitution or on the morphemic level
of word substitution. Consistency can be achieved by limiting the
apparatus criticus to the level of syllabic substitution, but at the prioe
of a stultifying disregard of the reader's oonv,enience. If for anyatbai-
voktam certain mss read anyathevoktam, tbis may be represented as
anyathe for anyathai, or thevo for thaivo etc, but the information
which the reader needs, and which should be presented to him as
straightforwardly as possible is that it is a substitution of iva for eva.
Consequently it is to be assumed in the apparatus unless otherwise
stated that the normal rules of sandhi are to be applied. Where it seems
useful to draw attention to the operation of sandhi, the symbol -- is
employed. Thus in the above example the reading anyathapyuktalL.
would be represented as "" apy for eva. Wbere sandhi is not observed,
the symbol '-/ is employed. Thus '-/ apy would imply the reading
anyathiiapyuktam.
Where the use of these signs might not be immediately dear, a
device of wider application is employed, namely sequence brackets:
a bracketed letter or word placed on either side of a reading gives the
immediate context of that reading. If, in the above, the y of apy wer,e
not thought to make the form of the following word sufficiently
obvious, the reading might be represented as - apy(u) or '" apy
(uktam). This device is especially useful for the noting of trivial
variants without the need of a separate rubric .. If kk is read for kt we
may print simply"" apy(ukkam). The value of sequence brackets in
making clear the results of transposition and omission will also be
evident.
The mention of a ms within brackets means that its reading is already
implied. Thus 'om BCD(A)' would be used where BCD omit a partic-
ular word and A has already been stated to omit the passage: a way
of reminding the reader that the evidence of a related grou p of mss is not
positively conflicting at this point. The bracketing of a ms in the
rubric before a colon is a device for avoiding complete enumeration.
Thus 'eva(J): iva GH' implies that all mss but GH readeva, including
J, which might have been expected to side with GH .
Variants are quoted without word-division or punctuation (other
than that occurring in the mss). Such punctuation is a form of editing
and an editor should not assume responsibility for readings which
he rejects. At a more practical level, the point of a rejected reading
 lnlrociucl ion xlix

may have escaped him, and false punctaation wiU then tend to obscure
it to other eyes. Although this consideration will appl only onae in a
hundred or a thousand cases the only safeguard is adherence to a
general principle. I have departed from the principle only in the
quotation of long passages where incon enience to the reader had to
be avoided. The principle does not appl to the rubric since that is
taken from the text, but here the Teader s convenience caUs for the
suppression of distracting punctuation-marks significant only in tbe
context they are taken from and 0 [ ha e usuaUy pre erved no more
than the actual division of the words .
The language of the apparatus is formalistic to the extent that one
'instruction' may require to be int1e rpreted in the light of another.
If BGHI have a certain reading 'before Makarandiiya but E is else-
where stated to read r..-fakarandasya t:or Makarandaya then for
E the interpretation should be 'before M,akarandasya'. This mild
application of the methodOlOgy of generative grammar is not in-
appropriate in dealing with the ]anguage in which paq.ini wrote, but
for practical convenience I hae kept it to a minimum b the use of
seq uence brackets and a choice between the before and after
formulae.
The symbol * represents a syllable lost or unreadable; * * represents
*
two such syllables and* * tbr,ee or more. The question-mark(?) before
a syllable implies doubt as to the reading. A queried syUable within
brackets marks an alternative interprdation of the preceding syUable:
e.g. 'so (?mo)hal?-a to be "read as either sohaI,la or The
mid-placed circumflex in ai and au draws aUention in Ihe Prakrit
variants to the fact that a ms has VIi ritten a long diphthong. The
sign), when llsed in quoting a variant represents all avegraha in the
ms. The formu]ahelie om which is no doubt self-explanatory implies
that although the mss in question omit the word or phrase at this
poin t, something of corresponding import has been described as
occurring elsewhere. When a list of mss is divided by a comma e ..g.
'ABD,CE', the implication is that whae the two groups coincide at
this point they differ in their versions of the context.

11.. Arrangement of text and apparatus

In accordance with rational modern practice the stanzas of verse
are numbered separately within each act and the lines of prose are
n um bered afresh from each stanza. In citation the act is represented

4
 Miilatlmiidhava ect. ]L

by a roman numeral, the tanza by an arabic numeral and the line

of prose by another arabic numeral eparated from it b a point:. thu
J

VI 6.3. The padas of the stanza are numbered a b c and d. Lines

preceding the first tanza of an act are numbered a 0.1 onvard. But
since acts beginning with a pravesaka man contain a con iderable
stretch of prose before the first stanza, I ha e numbered the pra e ' aka
separately as pr.l etc. Thus the last line of the pra e ' aka in Act II
is II pr. 21 and the following line is II 0.1.
In the apparatus, to facilitate reference to the text I ha e given the
line number against the first variant which oc ur for each line of text.
The first variant in each pada is distinguished by the letter a b c or d.

12. Punctuation of compound

Advantage has been taken of the opportunities which tran lite ration
affords, to punctuate compound words so as to reveal their grammatical
structure. The symbols used are semicolon (.) colon (:) hypen -
underscore C) inverted circumflex (v) and occa ionally a cuded
hypen C).
Grammatical analysis
The relationship between two elements wilJ normally be one of three
kinds:
Co-ordinative (dvanda): paq.4ita 'putra scholar and on
Descriptive (karmadharaya): pat?-4ita :putra cholarly son
Dependent scholar son.
(Descriptive and dependent are merely types of determi'rlative
compound and their separation is not essential to a y tern of analysi .
But I have marked the distinction in view of its frequent practical
importance. For certain purposes a more elaborate analysi of tat-
might be made according to their case-relationship by . uper-
scribing the appropriate number. So paq.4ita2putra or genitive
case) . I am indebted to Mr Richard Gombrich for this excellent ug-
gestion.)
Two elements related as above may fulfill a grammatical role which
nei ther bears individually:
Adjectival transformation (bahuvnhi): paq.4itayutra whose son is
a scholar' go-.:mukha 'having the face of a cow.
(Adjectival transformation of a dvanda is perhap to be seen in a
title such as '(play) concerning and a
 Introduction li

ring', etc.)
Compounds are syntactically progre si e. Each con:plete element
subsumes all preceding elements within it elf. so that at each tage the
compound is grammatically complete: Kasl-pra asat
caritam 'behaviour of the son of the Banara - i iting- cholar'. Here
Kasl-p ravasat qualifies paI?qila Kasl-pravasat:par:t4ita qualifie put-
ra, Kasl-pravasat:paI)qita-putra quaJifie caritam.
At any point in this progression however the so far complete
compound may qualify not the next word but the next group of words.
To express this differently any element of a compound except the
first may be expanded into an number of interrelated word (0
far as thefirSI element is concerned the notion is of cour e meaningle s,
since nothing precedes to qualify the whole element and so mould it
into a unit) .
This subordination of a group of word i indicated b the symbol y:
Subordination : Kasl-prava atpar:t4ita:::putra-caritam behaviour of
the scholar's son on a trip to Banara' '.
In tenns of infonnation p rovided thi i the mo 1 important of all
the marks of punctuation, in that it determine the rhythm of t he whole
compound. In long compounds the mo t seriou ambiguities are usual1
those connected with subordination. Some complex: compound con-
tain a subordinated group within a subordinated group :. - n a ta...;.-
?vasana V 24a wearing a garland and dress
dyed with lac' . (Beyond this degree of analysis it has never seemed
worthwhile to go. But oocasionaUy even a further stage of subordi-
natioIls can be det,ected in such bahuvnhis: virajatkat ipa
(X2a) in which there shine forth the tip of
a few soft buds of teeth.)
Compounds of which the first element is a prdix might legitimately
be treated on the same basis: e.g. a:dhanna ·unri.gbteousness' a...;.dhar-
ma ' unrighteous' . But the gain would u ually be outweighed by the
irritation caused to t he reader.. I ha e 0 punctuated only v here the
prefix subordinates a group, a in a:loka:::samanya I lOc) 'not common
in the world' .
A suffix added to a compound rather than to a single word is distin-
guished by the sign-:
Kasl-p ravasat:pal!qita -pratinindita...;.putra- taya becau e the scholar,
w hile visiting Banaras had r,e buked hi on .. Thi sign i u ed al 0 to
draw attention to a suffix: e.g .. t ara. at( taraIp. VI 2d.)
Sometimes the relationship between the elements i neither deter-
 lii Miilatrmiidhava eet. 1

minative nor co-ordinative. Such are the normal type of compound in

French, e.g. essuie-glace', and the special cia of Vedie compound
e.g. 'dharayatkavi '. Since such compound are by definition adjec-
tivally transformed, I have (if punctuating them at all) u ed the under-
score but without an accompanying mark of relation hip. Thu
atLmukta beyond pearls', as de cribed'
vacanam according to the seer s words'. From the point of view of
analysis it is possible to distinguish sa..;pak. a taking the ame ide
from winged', and sa..;piI?qa 'having the ame pi1fqa from
having a piI?q.a etc.

Representation oJ sandhi
Since the systematic punctuation of compounds involves the
separation of words united by vowel sandhi this has been undertaken
on a regular basis both within compounds and between independent
words in such a way as to preserve the form of the sandhi while re-
moving all ambiguities.
The union vowel is attached to one word, and the avagraha (» or
double avagraha (») to the other. In accordance with the usual prac-
tice) represents short a after e or 0 (deve )pi, devo )pi), and by a not
uncommon convention after a also (tatM )pi). Elsewhere the fol-
lowing two principles are observed:-
(a) The union vowel is attached to the second word and a circum-
flex is placed over it except when it is identicaJ with the original second
vowel.
(b) The original first vowel is represented by) when short and»when
long.
The Makarand)-anandana, A valokit»-anandana, but Makarand>-
abhihita (and AvalokiHi-)bhihita).
It will be observed that> always represents a and» always 0., except
in the union of two like simple vowels: sis)-upanayanam, MalaO)·
The remaining vowel sandhis are covered by the following
table:-
- 2nd vowel -
a a 1 I U fl e al 0 au
a )a )a )e )e )0 )0 )ai )ai )au )au
1st vowel:
a a) » a »e »e »6 »6 »ai »ai »au »au

l
 Introduction liii

The makron over e and 0 is a modification of the circumflex to

distinguish cases where the original owel was long : thus Makarand>-
eksanarn. Unmarked e and 0 win therefore not OCCUI in Sanskrit as
sandhi vowels, but are possible in Prakrit - e.g. bandhaI! )-ovarida
(VII 1.38), Skt. bandhan)-apavarita.

Remarks
Since the punctuation of compounds is my own responsibility, it
is no doubt up to me to try to justify the practice. It might be argued
that while the system could be useful as an aid to beginners it has no
place in an edition intended to be used by scholars. This I am sure is
true of the representation of sandhi considered in isolation and I
would seek to justify it only as a necessary adjunct to the grammatical
punctuation of compounds. So far as the grammatical analysis itself
is concerned, I am anxious not to give the impression of imagining
that experienced Sanskritists stand in the same need of it as an aid to
interpretation as I do myself. One might neverthele s urge its merits as a
simple convenience to all readers like word-di ision the use of which
does not imply that scholars would be unable to separate the words out
for themselves. However my case rests on quite different grounds
those supplied by Hertel to ju tify word-division itself namel that
its use provides the simple t form of running commenary. To ju tify
his choice of reading an editor mu t make clear how he construes
his own text. In a style such as Bhavabhu6' this will hinge to a con-
siderable extent on his interpretation of the compounds and much
of this interpretation can be gi en implicid in the punctuation instead
of explicitly in the notes. Even more to the point a check on bis in-
terpretation is provided where he does not suppose any comment to be
needed. I am afraid that I will ha e expo ed ignoranoe in many places
where it might otherwi e ha e remained hidden.
Consistent analysis of compounds has forced me to a better appre-
ciation of their structure. The interpr'e tation which on other grounds
is most desirable is usually that which also is simplest in terms of
punctuation. Just as Sanskrit words have a hierarchy of meanings of
which the highest must be the operative one unless it is inappropriate
so there seems a hierarchy of relationships within the compound.
Broadly speaking, perhaps, a relationship will be karmadharaya onJy
where is obviously improbable and d anda only where
both are improbable. More important subordinate units are formed
only where the first member of the unit cannot by itself be construed
liv M alatlmadhava e t. L

naturally with what precedes. The r.atural movement of adjectives

and participles is towards the first available sub tanti ,e. In general
where two adjectives qualify a sub tantive they do not seem to me
to stand in a dvanda relationship: rather the econd tend to tand
in a closer relationship with the substantive than doe the fir t and
so to [ann to subordinate unit with it: e.g. 'va ad:a ita :bhujanga
hissing black snakes'. So too in English - tartled old woman
means not a woman who is startled and old but an old woman who
is startkd. Where both an adjective and a participle are in 01 ed it
is usually the adjective which stands second. If the adjecti e tands
first., it probably qualifies the participle adverbiaH : e.g. pr,a t agra:
vikasita:kadamba freshly blossomed kadamba. In this "'onoection
a past participle is more ' adjecti at than a preent participle-
:.uUariya 'upper garment unnoticedJy slipping off'.
It has not always been easy to decide upon the correct analy i of
a compound. In particular the borderline between karrnadhara a
and is a blurr,ed one, In some cases indeed the di tinction i
clear-cut: thus (IX 16b as opposed to priyarigu:
syama tU1 9c), instances where punctuating the other way round
would totally change the meaning. But elsewhere I have felt a great
deal of hesitation. vlsama 1 19.8 I ha e taken to mean 'the
happiness of having a rest rather than . the bappiness ' hich having
a rest would bring'. But a (Vl 7.1) I tak,e as 'the
to be found in death'. I punctuate as karmad haraya z;tim sa:
viggham (VIII 4.4) 'the obstacle which a blink would be and muha:
kandaro 'the cavern which is his mouth. But does manobha agni
(Ill 6a and passim) mean the fires of rove' or "the fire' wbich 10 e is ?
A further type of compound which gh'es me difficulty' that uch
as duraloka (IX 16.1), charming in being indi tinct .
I assume this to be a rather unu ual kind of karrnadhara a. Th com-
mentators t nd to explain such compound ', ith "ata eva' - dura-
lokai?- ata eva which trictly perhap imph anal i a
a dvandva. But such an explanation would be a rather artificial wa
of dealing for instance with sambharijjanta :diisaha (VU 0.38) un-
bearable on being brought to mind'. er. :madhuram
in DaSakumaracavita IT (Brough, Selections from classical. San hit
Literature', p.128),
 Introduction

13. The pattern of stage-directions

The ba ic dramatic format as in modem play . 1 ·f peeche eacb
one preceded b it a ignment to a parti ular chara ter or group of
characters. The e as ignments when the are not abbre iated in the
mss, a.re expressed baldly in the nominati ,e case without a supporting
grammatical construction. In m text following the conenient
practice of many printed European play I ha e printed the assign-
ment in capitals on a separate line.
What is notable about Sankrit drama is that almost all stage-
directions are moulded into conformity . itb this ba ic [annat. Direc-
tions concerning scenery or the place of action are of cour e entirely
absent. It IS po ible therefore in principle to a ign all tage-direc-
tions to particular characters and this is hat is done. It may be noted
in passing that these are not in fact expre ed as directions or instruc-
t ions like the 'Enter of modern English pIa s or the Exeat' of Ra/ph
Roister Doi le, but as impfe information : when a finite erb i u ed
it is always in the indicati e mood (present tense).
Where a stage-direction of action precedes or intervenes in a speech
of the character to which it is as igned, it is expressed b means of a
gerund (very occasionally b a present participle) - 0 'nir
upavisya, Where on the other hand no further speech
follows or where no peech at all has been a signed to the character.
the action is expres ed by mea!DS of a finite verb and in the first of
these two cases it may be preceded b the oId iti - (ity) upavisati .
These star,e-directions ha e therefore much the same status as actual
dialogue and of them may be preceded by tage.,directions
of a rather different order namel ad erbial qualification applicable
in one case to the action and in the other to the dialogue. So . akaru-
means gazing tenderly while a akarur;tam
means gazing and saying in tender tones. (The particle 'iva is used
only when a pretence within tbe terms of the story is in oIved: thus
'sakopam iva at IX 44.2 because Madhava is not in fact angry.
As a prop to these expre ions when they have neither dialogue nor
substantial action to qualif . a erb such as is employed..
When Malat] looks confused and spea the formula is • alajjam .
when she looks confused and sa s nothing the formula'
natayati'.
The circumstance under which neither action nor dialogue can be
ascribed to particular characters is when it takes place offstage. Here
lvi Mala llmiidhava L I

of course the stage-direction nepathye takes the place of a haracter

assignment, and acquires the same statu. It hould be ob er ed rh t
speechesnepathye' are mostly intended to be poken b pecifi
characters of the drama, though only the context can tell u whom.
In the course of Act X it is first M ad ha a, later at tT and then
Kamandakl: but stanza 9 is ultered by an otherwi unkno n · ane-
cara' (cf X 14c). The formula 'punar nepathye' is re erved for ocas-
casions when the same character speak a second time. The word
ne path e' a serts it unique tatu among a ignment-word onl
when followed not by speech but b the tage-direction 'kalakalah .
Here, since it is a locati e in form it i n turaH not on tru d a the
subject of a finite verb.
The stage-directions which break this overriding p ttem re thoe
concerning entrances and exists. In the formula ' pra i' a' e have
no more than a gerund po itioned before in tead of after the a ign-
ment-word. But tataJ? pravisati Madha and (iti arve-
are of a different order. The nominati es they contain could n t
sensibly be regarded as assignment-words and the are elf-contained
formulae which cannot be extended by the addition of dialogue. When
pravisati Madhava4' is followed by a speech of Madhava, the
repetition of the word Madha which logic demands is m fact
found: where some mss omit it, error or a disinclination to write the
word twice over is no doubt the cause.
The rigid simplicity of this general format has been de. cribed
because it provides a yard-stick by wh ich variant may be judged.
The most important practical con equence i that peeches may not
be interrupted by stage-directions to another character. If when
Ma.dhava i peakjng ' Ma.lafi tiryan calay ti ' , then
any further words of his must be given afresh the assignment Madha-
vah' .
There is one small exception to the rule that tage-directions mu t
be given their assignment-word: this may be omiued after a speech
when other characters share in the speaker s action. So the invitation
'upavisava4' may be followed simply by "upa not neces arily
by ubhe upavisata!:t'. Even then further words of the 1st character
must be given a fresh assignment (cf VII 4.1-3 I 19.11 - 13).

14. Geographical and biographical r,eferences

Geographical references within the play itself occur at the following
 Introduction 1 ii

points :-
Sindhu IX 2.1: (it confluence with Para) I 9.1. IX la: (wi th
Madhumati) IX 3.5
Madhumotf IX 3.5 X 7.9
Lavana IX 2a
Piira!iivall IX 37.2 40.1
Brhadasmnn IX 5d
Suvarnabindu ( HhavZinlpali) IX 3.6, X 9
Srfpa ;vata I 15.12 1 .16 VUI8.1 IX 0.2 . X 14a
Vidarbha 1 9.4 n 8.1
Kundinapura I 9.5
Padma vati I 9.6 IX 0.2 la, X _2.3
There are the foJlowing topographical references to public places
in or about Padmavatt:
Temple (and garden ) of the god of 10 e I 15.7 16.10 19.14 20.2
H pr.S, pr. 8, 2.13 HI8.12 12.21 VIlI-.17 IX 43.-
Temple of Karala I 15.14 V 4.3 21a IX 4 ,.13
Temple (and garden called 'Kumsumflkara ') of Samkara In pr. 8
pr. 13, 3.14, 15.3 IV 0.32 VU O. 0
Temple of the (nagaradevatii ' Vl 2.2 2.11
The following items of biograpbical information contained in the
prologue) are common to all or nearl all mss:-
Bhavabhuti' famil) were brahmin de eendant of Ka 'yapa and
followers of the Taittirlya recension of the Black Yajur Veda. The
a re given the epithet panktipa paikagn aD
dhrtavrat8.4 . Their homp a at Padmanagara in the
Deccan. His grandfather's name Gopala, Hi father's name
was Nilakantha.
.... Hi mother' name \. . as Jatiikaml.
. H i mtl1 name
was Bbavabhuti. and he bore the tide (The name bhiigar-
bha in the colophons of C and D is ery odd but hardly counts against
the consensus of all including C and D at I 5.3.)
The following two items may be accepted although they are not
in all mss:
The town of Padmanagara was in Berar (ace. to DGUKLO).
The name of Bhavabhuti s guru wa Jiiananidbi acc. to GIJ
KMNO).
In addition, the mss I and J give his grandfather the epithet' aja-
peyakratuyajin .
His famil) name is not certain. It . gi en in CDEL as dambara
Iviii M iilatlmiidhava Sect. 13,

in LKMNO as udumbara. G and I read uqambat"a, but in the sarada

script 4a is almost identical with duo (See note on 1 4.5)
In all rnss the occasion of the performance in des ribed at I 3.2 as
being Kalapriyanatha ya yatra. Of those mss which contain the
passage 7 i-vi, while GJL have the phrase Kalapriyanathasya puratal;t
I substitutes sakalajagadekacak. u. 0 vi ' amanaJ? ury . a
and K (with certain other nagari mss) als'0 contains this phrase pre.-
ceded by the word Kalapriyanathasya.

15 . Bibliography
a) Editions of the Malatzmadhava
MM with the comm. of Jagaddhara. R. G. Bhandarkar Bombay,
(l st ed) 1876, (2nd ed) 1905
MM with the comm. of Piirt;lasaras an. Published by Mahopadhyaya
K. S. Mahadeva Sastrl, Trivandrum, 1953.
MM with the comms. of Tripurari. and Jagaddhara. M . R. Telang
(revised by V. L. S. Pansikar), Bombay, (6th 00) 1936.
MM with the comm. of Jagaddhara, English translation and note. .
M. R. Kale, Bombay, 1908, 1913, ] 928.
MM with a Skt. comm. Haridasa SiddhantavaglSa
Nak'jpur, (2nd ed) 1920.
MM with English translation and notes. C. R. Devadbar and
N. G. Sum, Poona, 1935.
I have made fairly regular use of the above six editions for help in
interpretation of the play. The foHowing is a list of all other editions
of the MM which I have been able to discover:
MM with a comm. on the Prakrit passages. 1830. (This was
judged by Bhandarkar to differ hardly at aU from the' following
collated by him for his own edition:)
MM with a translation of the Prakrit passages. Kailasa Candra Datta,
Calcutta, 1866.
Malatimadhavae fabulae actus primus cum variis lectionibus. C. Las-
sen, Bonn, 1832.
MM with a Skt. comm. Jivananda Calcutta 1876.
MM with the co mm. of Tripurarisuri (Telugu script). Madras, 1883.
 Introdu.ction fix

MM with the comm. of' am adeva·. Bangalore 18 3. (This and the

foUowing two are lited in Todar Man' ed of the M
MM Safika. Part I. Calcutta 1 6.
MM with the comrn. of Jagaddhara . Bhu\'anacandra a aka Cal-
cutta, 1886.
MM with a Skt comm. Ctattvabodhinl'). Kunjavihari Taraka id-
dhanta Bh attacar a Manbhum 1919.
MM with Engli h tran lation and note .. R. D. Karmarkar Poona
1935.
"
MM with Skt and Hindi comm . 'arrna Sa tn Banara 1954.

b) Genera1
PW Sanskrit-Worterbuch. Otto Bobtlingk und Rudolph Roth St
Petersburg 1855- 75.
M W A Sanskrit-Engli h Dictionarv. Monier Monier- iHiam.
Oxford, 1899.
PSM o. HargoviLld Das T.. Sbeth 2nd ed
Prakrit Text Society) Banara 1963.
Turner A Cornparati e Dictionary of the lndo-Ar an Language ..
R. L. Turner London 19'62-. , Reference is by numbered entrie .)
Mayrhofer Kurzgefas tes etymologi cb orterbuch de Altindi-
chen. Manfred Mayrhofer Heide!berg, 1953-.
Whitney Sanskrit Grammar. William D ight hitne H ar ard
1889. (Reference is by paragraph .)
Pischel Crrammatik der Prakrit-Spra hen. R. Pi chel, Stra sburg
1900. (Reference is b paragra,pb. Tht _nd led of Subhadra Jha's
English translation Banaras 1965 includes ickrema inghe' Index.)
MV Mahavlracaritam by Bbavabbuti. Edited v,.jth critical apparatu
introduction and notes. Todar all revi eel and prepared for the
press by A. A. MacdoneU). London 1928.
UR Uttararamacari tam b Bha abhuti. ith the omm. of Ghana-
syama, introduction, notes and tran laboo (the b C. ..1"0 hi).
P. V. Kane, (3rd ed) Bombay 1929. (4th ed) otilal Banar idas 1962.
also: UR critically edited b S. K. Bel alkar. Part I introduction
and translation, Harvard 1915' P·a rt I text only Poona 1921.
Ix Mala lcmadhava eel. 1

Ob ervation ur la Vie et l'Oeuvre de Bha abhuti. R.G. Harshe

Paris, 1938.
Bhavabhiiti der Dichter des Dharma. Lud ig Kretz chm r, HaHe.
1936.
MM sara va vidira. M. V. Lele, Hyderabad Sindh 1900. and
UR with the same title, 1901.)
Introduction to Indian Textual Critici ID. S. M . Katre Bombay 1941
Poona 1954.
Studies in Indology Vol I. V. V. Mirashi Nagpur 1960. (The identi-
fication of Kalapriyanatha is discus ed on pp 35-42.
The appearance in instalments of Professor Turner' dictionary
while this edition was being prepared, has been of incalculable help
in wrestling with the difficulties of the Prakrit pas ages (and I here
record my gratitude for the extraordinary rapidity with which the
successjve fascicules have appeared). I have been able to make re-
sonably full use of fascicules I-IX (up to siti), and some use of fascicule
X (up to sphurati).

] 6. Abbrevations and Signs

(Very obvious abbreviations are omitted - e.g. nom. pI. rnasc. for
nominative plural masculine. The significance of many of the abbre-
viations listed below is explained in greater detail in the preceding
sections of the Introduction.)
Bhand's Bhandarkar's ms
BORI Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute
Cal Calcutta ms of Harihara s commentary
cat catalogue
cett (ceteri) all other mss
cf (confer) compare
ch chaya
comm commentary
COIT corrected
cpd compound
des cat descriptive catalogue
ed edd edited by; edition(s)
if and in the pages following
 IntroducTion !xi

fo1 foll (folio) leaf lea es

Har Harihara
illeg illegible
Jag Jagaddhara
Kath Kathmandu ms of Harihara' commentar
marg in the margin
MM Malatlmadha a
MR Mudraraksasa
ms mss man uscri pt )
MV Maha iracarita
MW Monier- William
no nos number(s)
om (omittit) i omitted by
p pp page s)
p.p. past participle
PSM Paia- adda-mahannavo
PW St Petersburg Worterbuch
q.v. (quod vide) which ee
8ak Sakuntala
SCrlPSl my emendation
SIC as here tated usually in correction of Bhandar-
kar)
Skt San krit
Subhasita Subhasitaratnako
. .a
S.v. (sub oce under the word
Telang MM ed Telang
Triv's Tri andrum edition s ms
UR Uttararamacarita
v.I. ( aria lectio ariant reading
vol olume
t reading corrupt
'* yHable 10 t or illegible
*(above line) reconstructed form
with andhi
without sandhi
 - --
MALATIMADHAVA
ACT I

Nandi-basV -ahata:muraja-ra )-ahfna :Kaumara : barbi-

trasan nasa-)gr,a-randhraf!l visati bhoga- arp.koca-bhaji /
e S,iilapaq.er
Vainayakyas ciraf!l vo pantu cltkara at /1 / /
apl ca
)-apl"a -kapaJa ;galan Mandakini::va ra 0
imi'ra...;.t i. /
pantu tvam 0
Bhiltesasya bhuj3.I!1ga:valli:valaya : I I - 1/
Stanza I here ACE Q' after tan:::a 2 DGJKJ Har : m 1
1a muraja: rnurava 0
b nasi: nasa C
c kakubbas :* debhas E landlill"c 'liLapat;JIer ADEGHIJ IN: ghaHalla\, la la-
vi ' va O · (kakubho)? gl:hU C clt A DEGIJKl; phit M ; phut : 0
1. 1 api. ca: nandyante ijlradha 0
2a stanza 2: after stanza 2A Tri . alan : alan
milan I· palan
b praya (J): kaSa I ; illeg in Jmarg locana.: loca I pm3.: ' ikhi I
Triv's jyotir: jvala M
c panto tvam a : I npantu [marg ker k : kaita
d vain valay.a : bhogavalana I sran: rag CG : san. I iida 'G
after stanza 1:
api ca! u a ananavyakula
aninaJ:l !
raant urDla
sam bber brahmakapalakandara()<lri. pan( u al) I _A I'
I , fO T lang
apj ca. TeIang; ki'!lca M· om 0 u4budbuda 0: udgadgada . Telang
abbigbata 0 Tela.ng· abbiyala M jarjad'O : marmara. . ;jarjbara;
slr1!a Telang s1kbaS O · : Telaa
ormaya' kandara : kandha.ra pari : 0
api cal i ya
yasrnin kala aj a juha\ a I
arcirni .!aptacuqasa.Sigalita
tiirliyIkaf'!1t Purare . tad ,a · a.t u locanaf'!l al) 11_8 11
I 0 T lang
api ICB ]MOJmarg' an acca Td ng· om L kal;l8 L I 0 Tela.ng;
2 M ala tlmadhava 2.1

(nandy-ante)
SUTRADHARAl:I
bhagavan tad
/ (praI?-amya)
tvam asi mahasam
dhuryarp atha mayi dhehi, deva, praslda /
yad yat papaJ1l, pratijahi jagannatha namrasya tan me
vitara bhagavan bhiiyase mangalaya //3//
(nepathy)-abhimukham avalokya) suvihutani ranga-
mailgaiani, ca Kalapriyanathasya yatra-
prasangena nailS. :diganta-vastavyo / tat kim ity udasate bhara--
/

gaI)a IJmarg ILJmarg Telang ; MNO k!"tsna&

samuho LMNO Telang; krtsnasyapuro IJ juhflva : juhoti 0 arcir:
an tar IJmarg I jbamkflri 1Umarg; satkari M N
Telang ; satkari 0 purares : smarares

2. 1 nandy ante: here om 0

2.2 beJore udi[Q: purvamdisamavalokya / aye D ; purovalokya j aye E; alamativi tarel)a /
purovalokya j aye GKL?J ; nabhovalokya aye J. tadalam M ; alamalarnativi ta-
reI)a N ; alamativistareI)a / p uratovalokya I aye 0 ; ay Har' om AC udita:
udito I ACDEILC; sa GJK' eva MN bhuvana : om AGJ aJter
dipas: tapanal:l GJO tad : tu L ; tam 0
2.3 L pra",amya : om [
stanza 3: The alternative version of the first half is:
kalyaqfmam tvam ihamahasam(mahatam) vidhatse
atha rnayi dehi deva pra lda /
3a asi ACELMNO; iha DGIJK mabasam: mahatiim D1 Har(but mahasam Har
v.!.) bhajanam ACELM CHar v.1. DGIJK Har
visvamurte ACELMNO Har v.!. ; tvamv idhastse DGIJK, Bhand' • Har
b dburyam ACEGJKLMO; PUI?yaIp DJ Har ACELMNO; dr ' am
DGlJK . dhehi ACELMO; dehi DGIJK Har
3.1 IDarisa CEGKMNO Har ; marsa AD)' mahi a L
.
beJore ranga : a vataraI?a 0
' .
3.2 patitaS: piititas I orn J
3.3 digaota vastavyo: desadagato ); desagato CalSktColl 243 ACDEM .
janasamilhaJ:l GKL ; mahajanasamajal:l 10; J
before tat kim : casmi vidagdhavidvajjanapari . ada yatha kenacid apur a-
aprakara£?ena vinodayitavya iti GJ, (yatba om) L ; om A DEJK
The following is the next portion oJ the text, as read by MNO
... vastavyo janal:l l tat kim ity udasate bharataJ:l? / adqo >srni
yatha kena cid apurvavastuprayogena vayaJ11 vinodanlya iti / tat pari.adal11 nirdi.-
3.5 Act I 3

(pm i'ya)
p ARIP ARSVmKAH
bhava )smi yid ad, yatha kena cid
apiirva :prakaraJ?ena vaYaq1 vinodayitavya iti I tat
n) adhigacchama iti I
SUTRADHARAH
katame tatra yao udaharanty arya vidagdhamisras
ca bhagavanto bhumideva.' ca? I 10
ATAH
Bhumna fa gahanal;l pra ogai?
sauharda-bfdyani I
auddhatyam
citra katha vaci vidagdhata ca 1/4//
pra j ' a ATAH
bhava katame te tatra yan udaharanty aryami ' ra bhfunide
SUTR DHAR H
Bhumna fa anarp etc,
ATAH
bhava kasmin? I
UTRADHARAH
asti etc.
MN' 0 "id aiiana om M ' idval ena cid 0 ;
adyatvaya M prayogena prasangena nirdista 0 ;
nirdi tena M prabandbena O · bandh na Datab M : pari-
par ' vikah 0 bElava MO' om ta1ame I O ' kaeLe M tat:ri 0 ;
om M ca. 0 : om M
in stanza 4 : auddbatyam M . aUll.ukyam 0 - ojita O· ahocita .
citra 0 ; M (I) 'idagdhati ca idagdhateti 0
bbava MN; om 0 bsmin M' kasmin Q. katamasminpraka-
raneN
For the readinge of n 0 mss interm dimel itunted between this .'er ion and that of
the text, see Notes.
3.6 ACDJL' paripar ' G ?Jlst; El ... vinoda i-
tavyii iti here BanSkt niv 73668 ' bef ore lat k.iIn GJL) ; aft r tat kin! it) udfl me
(M 0); om ACDEIK
3.7 tat BanSktUniv 73668 CM 0 ); om ACDE1K GJL I
3.8 gul,lal!l EG lJ; ACOL(M O} nidhi ACDI ' na a EGJ KL iti
ACDI L; om EGJK
3.9 afterkatame:te:GJ (ud- rmtyiryi:
folio 2 of B her begins : tlris first sun'ivur leaf is very faded and oft n ill ib/e.
arya ABCD ?J; iirya EGIKL idagdha : here om I
3.10 mi'ras ca AB D: mi' ra EGIJKl ' g,a te: vidagdha allabbarajiino
4d citra: 1(M )
 4 Miila tTm iidh a va 4.1

SlJTRADHARAH
(smrtim abhinlya) tarhi /
NATAH
Bhava, ka iva? /
SUTRADHARAl:I
asti Padma:nagaraf!1 nama nagaram / tatra ke cit
taittireyir:tal:t Kasyapas carar:ta-gurava1;t pailkti-pavanal:t paiicagnayo
5 soma-pHino pambara...;.namano brahma-vadinah
prativasanti /
Te srotriyas tattva-viniscayaya
bhilri:srutaq-l sasvatam adriyante /
pilrtaya ca karmaI?-e >rthan
daran apatyaya, tapo->rtham ayu1;t / / 5 //
tad tatrabhavatal:t bhana:
Gopalasya pautra4,
Srikar:ttha:padaJafichano Bhavabhutir nama JatUkarq.l-putra1;t kavir
n isarga-sauhfdena vartamanai;l, sva evaf!1...;.praya:
5 guJ?a-bhilyaslm asmakam arpitavan I yatra khalv iyarp vaco-yuktil). -
4.2 natab : om E bbava: om El ka ABCDGJKL ; kim EJ iva : iha B
4 .3 after aSli: khalu M after GIJKLO H ar:
D; om ABCEMN Padma nagaram: padmapuram I Telang BirLibKath p74 '
lost in A before kecit: MN
4.4 ABCDOJK ; EO; I Har : L;
MN after taittireyiIJah : brahmaIfa}:i 0 : after
NO; om M gunval:t: after M 0
4.5 dh!'ta : om N BCDE ; lost in G ?JKIM 0 ; I
J?ambara CDEL BirLibKath p 74, FlorB96 Har, BanSktUniv 41290, margin of
BISMPoona 53/52ka Bhand's A ; lost up to mbara A' dha(?va)mbara B ; (na) -
udumbara lK; (na)uqambara O?I ; (gurava)udumbara MNO
4.6 prativasanti : santi E; prativasantisma 0
5b bhuri : bahu E
c )rthan : )svan E
5. 1 tad: tatra E after vajapeyakratuyajinas IJ namno:
om MNO
5.2 before SrfkaT}{ha: bhaWI G?J
5.3 after padavalcyapramal?ajfio MNO bbiitir nama ACDEMNO :
bhutinama GJKL; bhutirnama [ ; illeg in B J at iikan:ii om M 0
after / sakila M
5.4 sauh!dena: sauhardena N; sauhfdad 0 D' om 0
praya: vidha N; om KM
5.5 after bhuyasfm: malatimadhavannamaprakarar;tam E arpitavan: samarpita.-
van B1 yatra: yatraca Har
6a Act I 5

Ye nama ke cid iha nal:t prathayanty a

jananti te kim api-tan prati n) ai.a yatnaJ;t /
utpatsyate tu mama ko >pi ' amana...;.dharma
kala hy niravadlur vipuJa ca prth 1//6//
aplca
Yad ved>-adhyayanaI11 tath» yogasya ca
tat-kathanena na hi ka' cid nflJ!ake /
yat prau<;thatvam udarata ca . acasaf!l . ac c) arthato
tac ced asti tatas tad eva p aidagdh a / J7 //

6c tu mama ABeD mamatu M Q . stimama EGUcorrKL ; ?himama

J(1 st)
after stanza 6:
tad ucyantaf!1 tatprakhyapaoaya sarve ku 'Ha atha saf!lgitaka prayoge
vart?ikaparigrahe ca pravartaDtam iti / M 0
tad MO; om sar...e MO ' yathis'l<'am O ' yatha. M' yathaa
0 ; M ca MO ' om pravartJlotim M
omO
kavivarl?anaq:t ca prati tenai am uktam I
mama yatha ko )trn pra.k hyapito bha et /
yatharthanama bhagavan yasya Jiiananidhir /l16AI/ GUKM 0
lavi... uktam: apica K kavi : 1 mama yadti. ko >tra GIJ '
mamakatharp.kotra K ; • sataQloamama ko O ·
6.1 api ca : om K
7a siJ?lkbyasya : sfu::p.khYaI!lca L ogas)'a : om E
after stanza 7:
7. i ate yat (ad asmakam priya uhfda tatrabha\rara Ita ' apena Bha-
II vabhutinamna malafimadha a.qI nama akrtih
11l tad asyaiva bhagavataJ;t .. urya ya
iv prakhyapayitum aham ud sarve
v bhlimikagrahar:tena ca matsaniihitasam-
Vl padanaya pra artantam I I mrtva / kriyate I
vii ki.J!:ttu ya ya ya yujyate bhumika kbalu etc.1 GUKL Har
tad IK ' om IG JL arpita . : samarpitam I 't atrabbavata GIK' atra-
bha vata JL ki.Syapeoa lJK' om G l I _ . IK ; om GJL
here IK ' after prakaralJilm GJL i cl asyaha J; tadasminne a K'
tadeva GJ; deva L bbaga ata . IK; tatrabha GJL sakd ...
sfuyasya J; kalapriyanailia a sakala .. _ iiry K Bhand' Bb. BanSktUni
73668 BISM Poona 7 352' kalapriyanatha )fa GJ ' kalanailia' ya L be/or
prayogefJa: K aham.ud GIKJma.rg: JI t:, ud ataQt
L tat ••• p.r avartantim: cf the reading of M 0 after lan=a 6 sane
here IK; before GJL yathis a . ' lK' om GJL sa iblla
G DK Har; L prasaJ!lgena K ' prayogena I
ca JK; om 'G JL pra artantim: pra artalam IL
smrtvII: here om I smrtva /1 J yoj at GIJ ' om KL(E
 6 M ii/atimiidhava 7.1

NATAH
(smrtva) khalu bhavena tad» aiva sarve vargya4
saugata:jarat:parivrajikayas tu Kamandakya4 prathama:bhiimi-
bhava eko )dhitI, tad-antevasinyas tv aham Avalokitayat,l /

tata!). kim ? /
NATAH
5 tatas Malati-valIabhasya Madhavasya
katham? /
SDTRADHARAH
Makaranda -pra ves>-a tat suvihitam /
NATAH
tena hi tat-prayogad ev> samajikan upasmahe /
SDTRADHA.RAH
baC;lham / )smi Kamandaki /

7.1 natah: om N smrtva: om MNO(J) kbalu BCD; lost in A ; tabhumikas

0; M; tavatbhiimikassarve N;
kintuyayasyabhumika E; ( ___ bhumika) GIJKL
bbiivena: om N; after piil:hitiivargyii E tadaiva ACGIJMO ; tadeva BD - om
EKLN; before bhiivena GIJMO sane: om E; (sarval)tadaivabhavena) sarve
M E BI;
N
7.2 parivriijikayas ABCDEM; pravra.jika.yas GIJK.LNO pratbama:
(tu)prathamatrlkamandakyastuprathamaqt(bhiimikam.) I with ndakyiil}: folio 3
of H begins pratbama ABCDN; prathamaf!1 EGHJKLMO; prathamaI11 (I)
CD; bhumikiiya( ?yaf!l) AB; bhumikaJ!l EGHIJKLMNO
7.3 eko ACDEM ; lost in B ; eva" GHUKLNO >dh"iti ABeD; adhHe EGHIlKLMN
o B ; lost in A after iti GHJK
7.4 siitra/tatal;l om K
7.5 tatas: om LMNO tat ABCD; om cett nayakasya: nathasya N Miilat.
vallabbasya: om GHJKL Madhavasya: only in marg C; madha L
7.6 after katham: syat MN
7.7 sutra." .upasmabe: om N ABCDGL; EHIlKM 0
Makaranda: makaranda yo}:l M; makarandaka C avasare : a vasarel).a CKL;
anantaram E tat: tatsarvarp.tatra I after suvihitam: vihitam H ; tat E
7.8 om H tena hi: tadehi BH before prayogad: prabandha E?JN ;
prasiddha 0 .; pratibandha I; lost in AC; om BDGHKLM
tatrabhavatal). G upasmabe : upasvabe E
7.9 (Cmarg): om C before evam L after "eva" KL
7.10 Act J 7

NATAH
aham apy Avalokita l ]0
II iti prasta vana 11
(parivrtya ubbav upavi$.u
KAMANDAKI
vatse A valokite /
AVALOKITA
aL,lavedu Bhaavadi /
KAMA DAKI
api nama tayol). Bhurivasu· Devar.a t)-apatyayor 15
Ma.latJ:; Ma.dhavayor syat /
eva antara-jiiena
spburata vamaken} api avalambyate l/ 8·/1
AVALOKITA
mahanto khu Bhaavadi'e ettba citta-vikkhevo I 2

7.10 natab : om B aflerna[ai}: sasmitam MO apy: aham L; om H

7.11 it. ABCDO ; EGHJKL' om M . after,iti parikramya ni .kranmu GHIJO ;
EKL; D ' parivrtya M itiprastavana
after N
7.12 pari.v!Tya .... praviSatal:a:
pra.viSati kamandaki avalokita ca 11 (Kiimao etc)
GHIJKL
tatal:a pr.aviSati GHIJ ; pm . is a KL rakta ,G HU' K;
(napath a) L
E· here om M ·1051 in B ra.k:t:a
D?B ; raktapaWka EM . rum yavanika nepathyiv ABCDEO ;
krtanaipatbye(upa) M; nepatya(rtha) . nepathye Har u 3" , CO ; om ABBE
MN (nepatya) rtbapra
7.13 Avalokite : .om E
7.14 Bhaavadi : bhavadI KL
7. 15 tayob ; .om ElM N (0) ; kacyam in parentheses 0 after kalyiiIJinor : anayor IM
before Bniirivasu:. amatya [
7.16 Milafi Midhuayor: om be/or,e abhimaralJ: anayo r 0 a'
grabat:-: [ before syat: katham befor.e saJrar-
GHJcorrKL pandaIlaJ!lSucayiitva
ElNO
8d av.alambyate : avalambate L
8.1 before mahanlo: ijiiapayatubbagavati Hac cb mahanto: mahando I; mabato K ;
M khu: GHsicULM ; kkhu BCEKO AD Bhaa17adie : bhaya-
 8 Miilatlmiidhava 8.2

jaJ'!l dat:l i pal).a-

antim Bhaavadim "idise aase amacca:Bhurivasu nioedi l tahim ca
avaggaho appa tumhehir;l pi / .
KAMANDAKI
5 vatse ma m» bruhi 1
Yan sa bhavan niyuilkte
snehasya tat phalam-asau pral).ayasya
pral}ais tapobhir athava
krtyaq1 suhrdo yadi, tat krtarp syat /1 9//
na vetsi yad» aikatra no vidya-parigrahaya nana :diganta-
sahacaryam asH? / tad» aiva c> anayor
Bhurivasu;Devaratayor yad vrtt» pratijiia 'avasyam avabhyam
vadi N; before citta L ettba ABD ; etba E; esa C; eso GHsicJKLMNO "ik-
khevo EGHJKLM Hari ch v.l.); avakkheo ABO Har cb);
avakkhevo CNO; avakkheba I ABD; C ; acharlyarp.
E; accharia I ; GHJKLM; accaria N; 0 2 DEHJKLM ;
om ABCI; a G ; ca 0 Har ch; the word repealed N
8.2 ABCDEI; daryir!l ?GHJKMNO; daryll!l L clvara: dura HJ after
cfvara: metta KN DGHIJKN; parichadaJ!l ELM ; om ARC;
0 L vada: vaa GsicJ ; pada I; paa HO ; paral)a
N metta : matta Gsic ABD; v1lvara Har v.l. ; kida N; om EGHIJ
KLMO prarya L
8.3 ACcorrD; anUm Har; anti D; attal!' CEGJKLO Har v.l. ; atta Hsic ;
I; mettarp. M; pavunti N after antim: a E; pi 0 ABDIJKM ;
EO; bhaavadi C; bhaavadi GsicHsicLN after Bhaavadi1?1: khu I
idise: edise I; irisesu MNO aase: ase G; aasesu M ; asesu N ; ayasesu 0
amacca: amacco EM; acco N; >macca L n:i I oedi (Gsic): yuiijedi E ;
ocei N tarp.hi HsicJ; taharp. N; tatti M ; tassirp. 0 ca ABCDIL ; khu
M;om K;a EGHJMO
8.4 ABCDHsicKL; ukkhalida E; (a)kkhaqida GsicJ ; ukkuqia I;
MN; 0 avaggaho ABCDEKLMO; avaggahehil!l CGHIJN appa:
apa M; before CMNO tumbehil!' pi: om I; tube N pi: vi LM ; om CE(lN)
-:-iuiijiadi AD KL; J?iuiic1adi B; f.lihippiadi C ; nihippladi Har Kath ; Qihladi E'
f.likkhivladi GHJMNO; khiviadi Har Cal ; J?ihippido I
8.5 Ma: om I briihi: om MNO
9a bbavin: C
c abhimatair NO
9.1 bejoreki'?1: api GHJ .. .isIt: om N yada: yad CL ekatra : eva IMO
after diganta: vastavya E; G; HJ;vasinii:ql LO ; om ABCDJKM
(N)
9.2 tadain: tadeva N ca : om GHKLN asmat: asmadantevasinI HJ
Saudimaru ABCD Kcorr; saudaminI EGHIKlstLMNO
9.3 yad ABCD; ni N; bhiiri K; om EGHIJLMO vrtti: vrtli ' I aVaSyam: yad E
9.4 ACl I 9

kartavya iti tad idarbha-raja-mantriqa

sata Devaratena Mlidha putram Kundina:
purad imaf!1 Padmavatlq:I ata u vibitam I
Apatya-saqlbandha- idhi-pratijiia
priyasya nlta. suhrdal:l smrtiI!l ca l
a:loka-::samanya.4UJ!.as
pra rocan>-artharp. prakapkrta' ca / / 10//
AVALOKITA.
tado ti Maladirp amacco appal?-a I?-a paqi adedi Mahava sa
jeJ?a coria-vivahe arovedi ? I
KAMA DAKI
Taql yacate narapater narma-suhfO andano nqJa-mukhena
tat kopaya ' iva t a am If
AVALOKlTA
acchariaql 2-Qa hu amacco Maha assa pi 'anadi tti
I?iravekkhadae lakkhladi /
KA.MA 0 Ki
samvaranam
. .. hi tat /
tu balat at tayo[ vi
tena Madhava·Malatyol.t s a:mati-nihnavalf //12 /1
9.4 tad : om N raja : raja ya
9.5 sats : sta ; om M adhya anaya 0 B
9.6 om E prahif,lv8Iti.: ata 0 suvibit8lf!l vihit3m ABCDEGHJL '
suvihitam IKMNO before stanza 10: atah E
lOe aloka : ananya HIJ ' alolca
10.1 LMNO ; ki?nti A' kitti 10 line Miladil!l: maladiIll CE
amacco: amacca E; om HJlst t:Ja: oa E p M sdedi : adei 0
Mabava a here ABeD Har Katb (but with other words in different order . mma-
vassa C; before appaTlii GHUKLM 0 Har Cal; om E
10.2 vivabe: Bbaa ..'adif!l : bhaa E' bhaavadI M irovecli
ABeD (aropayati Har ch)' aroedi KL; tuvara edi ElM 0 Har .1.. t ara edi
GHJ
11.1 accbarial!l AB,; acebariaIll eEl' avacchariya:.p. 0 ; aocariaI!l GHJKLM . aocari-
0 2 DEGHJKLM om ABC O u : hiE- k:hu IM' kkhu
o Mihavassa: after 'Jiima7!l pi M pi: vi M ; om L jSi. idi: AD'
jlinati 0
Il.2 -:tiravekkhadie : r,tirapelckbadae EGHJ ' J?irapekkhidae I
1 l. 3 before sa'!lvaraTla'r!: vaste IM saI!l ara.t?lyyal:!l hi : om
MNO tat: etat M
12a tu : L before stan::a J 3: apica. EGHO
10 M alatlmiidhava 13a

Anuraga-pravadas tu vatsayol?- sarvalaukikal?- I

sreyan asmakam-evarp hi prataryau Raja;Nandanau //13 //
pasya-
Bahil). sarv) :akara-pravaJ?a;ramat:llyal!l vyavaharan
par)-abhyflha-sthanany api tanutarat:li sthagayati /
janaq1 vidvan sakalam
ta!astha};l svan arthan ca ca bhajate 1/ 14//
AVALOKITA.
mae vi teJ?a teJ?) ovaJ?J?aseJ?a Bhiirivasu-
Mahavo /
KAMANDAKI
kathitam eva no Malatl-dhatreyya La vailgikaya-
Bhuyo bhuyalf
bhavana-valabhI-tunga:vatayana-stha I
Kamatp. navam iva Ratir Malat! yad
lalita:lulitair angakais tamyat) iti 11151/
AVALOKITA.
I Uie vi
aIihidaq1, Lavailgiae ajja Mandaria-hatthe l?-ihidaq:l dava I

13a tu AEGKLMNO; ca BCDHIJ

c sreyan ABCDEI; sreyohy GHJMNO; sreyopy KL
14a prava-:ta ABCDMNO; E ; pragut:J.a GHIJKL Har; prat:J.aya Har V.1.
c jano I eka ... : evarp I atisaqIdhaya M 0
14.1 tumha ABET; tubma C? DGHJKLNO ; tuhmat:J.aI!l M bbal;lUlado ABCD; vaa-
t:J.1ido ... a ABCDLMNO (upanyasena Har ch);
EGHJ ; I, K
14.2 ria: raja M; om ?B; only in marg K Har Cal ch carladi : carijja'i
14.3 Kamandaki: k1imandika J eva: iva GH no : etat M; om ABE after
Lavangikayli : yatha I
l5a savidba: saciva I
b C
c yad: sa N
d lalita DGI1M HaT Kath; lulita ABC?EHKLNO Har Cal
15.1 before tlie: tadhaa I; tado MN; tahaa 0; tathayatba Har Cal ch; tatha / yatha Har
Kath ch tie: tile ElL; vi: om MNO Har ABCDMN (ut-
Har ch); E; GHJKL ; uvvea 10 ABCDIMNO
(vinodanam Har cb) ; EG HJK.L Mahava: maha vassa G IJ
pa"-i: prati E; ppa<;ti M after patjicchandaa1!l: cittapbalaammi 0
15.2 alidam B; C; M (abhilikhitam Har ch); alihia NO
after lihidam: GHJL; lavailgiae hattbe kidaql 0 ; om ABCDEIKMN
15.3 Act I 11

KA.MA OAKl
(vicintya) Lavangikaya aye Madha >-anucarah Kala-
kila kamayate I tad anena
tlrthena ghateta tat praticchandakam upodgbataya I 5
AVALOKITA.
mae Mahavo vi kodiihalarp: uppadia
pabhade aJ).uppesido -tattha kila Ma.laru
gamissadi, tado bhodu tti I
KA.MA DAKl
sadhu vatse sadhu / anena mat-priy)-abhiyogena smarayasi me
piirva SaudamanlID I 10
AVALOKITA.
Bhaavadi sa dani., Sodamanl. ahuna
. -
LSfllngiie: lavaitgiam ; me 0 ; aJter ajja ] ajja : om M ' ; aJrer Mandii-
riilhauhe 0 Mandiria: mandariae GLM hatthe: atthe GH?J '-:Uhida'!l:
M . 0 dava :java ABO' 10 tin C- om
15.3 after suvihitam: hi H aye AC" ae D' iUeg in B - ato EGHJLO ; om ]M
lcalaharp.sa};! EM
15.4 kila ABCD; om cett om BE
15. 5 GH] ; KL . om ABCDEIM 0 tat: .om I praticx.handakam:
praticchan<ial!t B upodgbitiya ABCDGUKM 0 ; upodgbiit.ena HLJcorr '
om E
after upodgmllaya: all mss insert:
madhavantikam upeyad ity abrupra
upey-d: upayad L; very faded, possibly upeyaye{tyabhl) B
This phrase is omitted in two of Bhandarkar's mss .' C and Ocorr
15.6 mae here ABCD; before pautta EGHIJKLM 0 Har before Miha.vo: ajja E
Maha.vo: madhavo C vi: pi D after v;: hi Har ch kodiihala: kudiibala B
palitta: pavutta K maat:la : maba Cl ' H ic
15.7 Maarand) ABCDEHOJcorr (makaranda Har ch) ' maan G1KLM nst
. : HIM Jcorr before pabhiide: ajja G pabbade: pabhave
D; pahade M ; pahode . iIIeg in H ppesido G ' pesido HJKL
kila : om EIMNO
15.8 after gamissadi: tti I / BO ' C: I;
K; L bbodu: hudi hodu L ; bhavi saw M' hoi . hodi 0
15.9 sicihu vatsesicihu : vatsesadhu EL ' sadll.U atse IM aoena: anena C mat:
O.ID E smirayasi: smarayasi DK ' marayati I e : mama . om M
15.10 piirva: paurva BD S damanim ABCDElKcorr·. saudaminIm GHJLM OK
1st
15.1 1 BIl..v.di EGHUKLM' om ABCD . bhaavaI 0 sa di . · E : MO '
sa GHJ Har cb; la KL ' om BeD odimllt:li scripsi'
AcorrBDIKcorr ; saudamiQ.i Al-tGHKI l 0 (saudamini Har ch " sodamini
 12 M ala tlmadha va 15.12

Siripavvade kavala-vvadarp. dharedi I

KAMANDAKI
punar iyaq1 vartUi? I
AVALOKITA
atthi ettha Ifaarle maha:masaq.a-ppadese Karala Ifama CamuIf4a l
KAMANDAKI
15 asti, ya kila eti
AVALOKITA.
ta111 khu Siripavvadado aadassa ratti-vihari:r:o r,tadidur):araIfIfa-
vasino
. sahaassa munda-dharino
. . . Aghoraghanta:namadheassa
.. - . ante-
vasiIfi maha:ppahava J?ama aacchadi
- tado ial11 paiittl I
KAMANDAKI
20 sarvarp. hi sarp.bhavyate II

CJLM; om E ahul.la CGHJKLN; ABO ; om EIMO Har ch sadida Y

:

sadi M; sad ita C; sadid(acchana) I

Y ac,cbaria ABDKcofT" acchana
CEGHIKlstJO; accaria LM; illeg in N maota: mamtra B
15 .12 ppabiivii : pahava B; ppabhiiva EGHI Siri : sin ?M; se k8l'ala ACDE
(kapala Har ch) ; kavala B; kiivalia GHKLMN ; kavali I ; kavaliarp. 0 nadam:
BKMO
15. 14 ettha: etha E l.Iaarie : q.aare HJ; I).aarie M samas3.l)a L; smas3.9-a
I ppadese: de se N Karali: kaJala B; karala L nama: nama EHL
15.15 asti: om E ya: sa KL; om M kila : khalu Har before vividha: vicitra
AB CD jiva : om C
15.16 ABCDINO ; tahil!1 EGHJ (tatra Har ch)· ?atta L; tassil11 M kbu ACG
HJKLMN; kkhu BDEO siri: suri N aadassa : agadassa IK ; agadassa L raffi
ido [0 ; ettha M ?N; om Hari ch before fJadidura : tassa H (ta ya Har
Cal ch); tissa I adi ABCD ; anati Har ch; om E
AD; diiramasaq.a MN; 10
15.17 sahaassa ABDGIO ; sadhakassa C; siidhaassa EKL; sahakassa HJ· sahasikassa
M; sahasiassa N Aghoragha L; oima-
dbeassa : namadheyassa C; na.maheassa KMN ; om Har ch
15.18 B maha: maha EIKL ppahavi BCDIKLM 0; ppabhava
AEGHJ l.Iama om Har ch a (accbadi) ABCDIM 0 ; sama EGHJKL
acchadi : gacchadi ACI; acchai" MN
15.19 paiitti: pavuttl ?ACDK; pa ?vatti B
15.20 hi ABCELO ; lost in D ; om GHJMN (Sauda)manyil;l ADIKcorr;
BELOKIst ; minya C; minyarp. GHJMN
15.21 Act I 13

AVALOKITA
dava edir?-a I Bhaa adi e 0 vi ahaaro Maha a a bala:
mittaI!l Maarando MadaantiaIp. jal
samuvvahadi tarp pi Mahavassa bhodi /
KAMA DAK!
niyukt» aiva hi maya. tatrn tal-priya akhl Buddharaksita /
AVALOKITA.
suvihidaql Bhaavarue I 25
KAMA OAKI
tad Madha upalabhya MaiatLm e a
pasy ava 4/
(ity ubhe
KAMA DAKI
(vicintya) tan nipUI).3J!l ni
diitl-kalpas tantrayitavyah I ar atha 30
Saraj-jyotsna kantaq1 kumudam iva nandayatu sa

15.21 diva : tava C; dfu;1iI!l 0 B 811vadii : bbaa ad! M - om E 0 : 0 KLO

balamittal!1 : bfllamitto GHJ - om E
15.22 ABDHlJKL ' G - bahiryiI'!l E' M 0
... om I Madaanti81!1 : om CE(I)K; madaantiiiIp GO jai: jadi C '
om ECI)
15.23 samuvvahadi: samudabadi G ' samuvvahai MO pi: taf!1piI).ama GHJ '
ta:qlvi MN; takkbu 0 ABCD - E; dudlaI'!l GHJK ; ·L ·
M N' 0 before piatrt: la D aft r pia kida:ql EGHJ'
K; krtam Har ch Ibbodi : hodi Bl; boi M
15.24 bi AB CD ; sa M; om cett talra here ABCDEI ' after sakhi GHJ ' before mayii
KLM 0 tat ACDGHJKL; tvat I ' om BE . sa 0 tat ...Buddharaksita:
om M priyasakhi : after E
15.25 Bbaavadie : bhaavadie C after Bham'adie: kadam GHJKL
15.26 Kamandaki ... vay ya adha a (I 19'.13) : folio no 6 of H . contammg this
passage, is lost after KiJmanLiakf: icintya G lad: om EJ
15.28 ity ubbe ABCnG icJO' ity ElM' ubbe KL; om
15.29 Kimandaki: om M before tan nipor,- I!l: tatra I tan : iti ; om EM
E; }. om L
15.30 ABCDEGJM 0 Har Kalh' ntrayitavyaQ. IKL Har Ca!
before sarvarthii: /I u bhe 11 K
16a nandayatu : vandayatu G
 14 M iilatfmiidhava 16b

bhavatu sa ca yuva/
varlyan anyonya-pravaq.a :guf)a-nirmaI;1a-nipuI?-0
vidhatur vyapara4 phalatu ca manojiias ca bhavatu // 16/1
(iti
If 1/

(tata4 praviSciti gfhIta...;.citr ):::opakaraJ?a4

KALAHAMSAKAH
. .
kahim. dfmi
. tulida:- Maaraddha valeva:riiva:::vibbham)-
avakkhitta: I?aha: Mahavarp. pekkhe? /
(parikramya) parissanto )mhi, jave idha u.ijaJ?e muhuttaam,
visamia q.aha:Mahavaql / (pravisy>
opavisab)
(tatal). pravisati Makaranda1;t)

16b NO ; krtapu1)as I' lost in C

c variyiin: garlyan IM HaT ABDN ; praguJ?a CEGUKLMO Har
gUJ?i GJl st
16.1 iti : itiparikramya I; ubhe 0
16.2 MNO
16. 3 praviSati: pravisya N; om M E; citra-
M D ABC
(D)EIK; G1LMNO
16.4 (2nd) AD; G1MO; kala BCK; 2 ErN; om at end of leaf
L folio 5 of B, commencing with the word dO',};, is badly torn , and many of its
readings are lost dit;ti ACDEI; lost in B; GJKMNO; L after
dii'}i: taf!1 CIK tulida ACDEKLlmarg: tulia MNO; calida l' om GJ(but in
chaya of G); lost in B(H) avaleva ruva ACDMN; avaleariia K; avalevarua O'
lost in B; (a)riiavaleva E; (a)Iiiiivalevariiva L; (a)rua Gsic (but avalepa riipa in
chaya); (ii)rua J; (ii)a1)uriivabbuva I vibbhama: vibhrama I; bibama J
16.5 avakkhitta: iikkhitta K Haf Katb ch) biaa: hidaa AD
AD; r:t{.lamaha N KM; CL ' O'
om N pekkhe ABCDIMO; pekkhissarp EGJKL;
16.6 parissanto )mhi: om C mbi: om L before java: tad Har ch java: dava
El ; jaba M; om N; jaiva (yllvat in chayfl) G idha ACDE; iba BGJKMN ;
imassiIp L; ettba 0 mubuttaal!l: KLMNO (muhurtam Har cb)
16.7 visamia ACDEIK; vesamia GJ; visamia L; vissamia MNO ACDI
(nandanam Har Cal ch); E (sanatham Har kath ch)' sahaaI!l GJK ;
J?aIp L; sabaaral!l MNO .... a&a: om G1K Har Katb ch; lost in C; niitham Har
Cal ch before pravisya: iti EGJKO; om ABCDILM praviSya:
mya EL
[6 ..10 Acti 15

MAKARA DAH
kathitam Avalokitaya atha Makarand)-6dyanam gato Madhava 10
iti / bhavatu, gacchami / (parikram > avalokya ca) a
vayasya ita ev) abbivartate / (niriipya) asya tu
Gamanam sunya sariram a:£!l
svasitam - n eta! sya.1 l' kiln anyad ato hhav3./
bbramati bhuvane Kandarp>-ajfia. vilcari ca yauvanaqI
lalita'madhuras tie te ca dhirntiun l/ 17 //

(tataQ. pravisati Mfldha

MADHAVAH
(svagatam)
Tarn vibhavya
katham ap'] vyapavartate me!
vijitya maYM!l. itnivarya dhruryam
unmathya eva l/ 18 /1
ascaryam!
Yad vismaya-stimjtam bharvam
ananda-mandam amrta-pLavanad iv) ,abhut /
tat-saqmidhau. tad adhuna madlyam
angara-cumbitam iva vyathamanam aste // 19 1/

16.10 2nd) Makarandal,lt : 2 EIKL; om before A alokiloJlii : e GJ ' me(ava) EK.·

me(va) L yathi.: om M 0 aranda ACE' madana DGJKLMN'
manmathai 0.; lost in B
16.1] bbavatu : bb.agavati before gocchiImi : tatraiva EGJKLO' taUa M pari
... . ca: om M 8\'8.' 0 . a: G ca: om 0 ACDEIJL O·
M?B; om G "a GKL; om EMO pnyavaya-
after obhivortale E
16.12 niriipya: om CE ' lost in B i l l : b. E
ITh Dl' GK eta. syi. : eta al 8tO ACIM 0 atho
ED; ho EGJKL
d lalita.: ) ti: haranti 11
17. 1yathi om M ' yathoktivastho
17.2 (2nd) 2 .E KL· om G ic] ,ra,gIL : ni' a ya O ' om Cl
18a mokhim : mukhi KL acD-lII. ABDEJoorr; CGIK 011 t (? Har) .;
(mukhl)ruciraI:!l L ¥i ' -""a :vilokya. . bha. L
d manthara vivekam: mandharavi eSa:m
J9b mlJldam; sandram I 8lD!I11: amrta GU abbOt : a It E
d vyathaminam: kvathamanam 0
 16 M alatlmiuiha VG 19.1

MAKARANDAH
sakhe Madha va - ita itaq. /

katharp, priyavayasyo me Makarandalf /

MAKARANDAJ:I
(upasrtya) sakhe Madhava tapati Gharmarpsu9 /
tad asminn udyane muhflrtam upavisava4 /
MADHAVAH
5 yatha rocate vayasyaya /
KALAHA¥SAKAI:I
Maaranda-sahaaro jjeva bala:baiiD-
Mahavo / ta darpsemi maaq.a-veaJ!a-visuranta:
attaI?-0 se / aha va vlsama:
sokkharp. dava al!ubhavadu /

19.1 ... me om N after upasrtya M

sakhe: om M ita G
19.2 Madhavab .•. Miidhava : om M after Madhavah: parikramya
IJO; G; pari KL; om ABCDE(M )
priya : om K me: mama 0
19.3 upasrtya: om ABCD(M) Madhava: om tapal)aQ.
EIJKL
19.4 before lad asminn : L, with cate for ce Bband' B Bh
19.5 ... vayasyiya: om ACKM, I rocate BDO' abhirocate E' abhi-
rucitam GJL, after vayasyiiya 0 vayasyaya: priyavayasyaya EO before
ityubhavupavisataQ. GJO; ityupavisataQ. I; ubba.vupa
LN; om BDE,ACKM
19.6 om ABCDM CEGIJKL; kahaf:!l BDM 0 ; lost in A
sahaaro: sahacaro J ima ABCD EIKLN; ido GsicJ; ia:J:!1 M ; idaf!l 0 jjeva
BDEL ; yyeva AI; yevva C; jjevva GJ ; jevva K ; evva MNO bala baul> E;
bill ABDGIJNO (bala Har ch); baUl K; balavadav L; (for M; 10 t
in C
19.7 C; G karedi: karodi D ; karei Mabavo:
EINO after tii: ki D; kiq'l GJl t after dalflsemi: se IKL
(asya Har ch) before veafJii: bal!a E , visuraola
ADEIJK, (with khidyamana in marg) G; vi uranta B; visuranta Clst vijjhuranta
Ceorr; L; kkhijjita M ; viddhararptaq:t ; 0
19_8 before suhii: locana Har ch J. avayan Har Ca1 v.l.; avabe ,
aahan Har Katb v.I. se ABCDGJMNO ; seattal).o E; attal)o IK (atma·
Har ch); L aba vii: adhava C; ahavo L after aha vii: mahavo
K; N visima: visama LN; vissama M ; vissama 0
19_9 ABCDI; lahedu before clava E; al!ubhodu GJL; KMNO
L9 .10 Act I 17

,A R DAH
tad asy> ai a ta ad uccbva ita:kusuma- e ara -ka _aya':"ltal): 10
amoda-va a kaocanara:padapa y> adha tad upa iSa a1). /
(tatha kurutal;t)
A AR 0 H
vayasya Madba ' a ad artita:
mahotsav>-abtlirama:Kamade ):6d ana- atra -pratini rttam
anyad(am iva bha antam a adhara ami I api nama manag a atirno 15
Ratiramaq.a-bal?-a-gocaram ? I
ADHA H
(salajjam adho..;.mukhas
MAKARAND H
(vibasya) tat hm :pur,tqarlkaQ th-to) i? /
jantu. u ca as tamas» a -rte. u
visvasya dhatari Panune' are ca/
pra iddha-.: ibha khalu cittajanma -
ma lajjaya ta a cid apahnutir bhut /I._O //
DHA AH
vayasya na katha ami?- 'ruyatam l gato )ham Avalokita-
Kamadev >-a atanam / ita tata1? parikramya
19.1 0 Madha K ai ti dI : tyeta d tad : om M(
uccb asita : ujj aladavira1a
19.11 visita : adbi a ita G iki- -ncana K p-dap Y : tarupada a
adhastid : adha La d) E. '/or upavUiimh: La ad EGJK
19.12 before lafha: madha ama arandau E- ubb u J
19'.13 before vaJ'as a: ilia afreT 'a: KL: e ta a[ GJO: etaat H
after anganii: ja.na GHIJKlO
19.14 Kimade,'a: madana GHJ pntm': abhini GIU; ni ABD Httam: artta-
manam E
19.15 in: EHIJM ; e a ABCDK ' om GLO pi n- mao - : api am
19.16 gocaram : gocaratam K
19.17 Madb vab ... 'til takaran ' fGHJK.LO · om ABCDI 1 saiailam
EKLO ' Jajja a GHJ
A

19.18 villas)'a.: om ; unnam "I: '"

DOl D ta : namra l O b fore
mukha: mugdha IM 0 Har : rlkam _ " ) -: GHJ
20a before paSya EGHI1 CIII ABeD rK
MNO ; rajas EGHJL
b satnaI!l M ca : pi E
20.2 lkamuk. ·: lcuWh before ir L: tatraca EGHJ- om ABCDl
M 0 after parikram '0: a L; a O}'3 before parikramyo
 18 M iilatfmiidhava 20.3

ca, parisramad ullasita :madir »:::am oda : madhura : parimaD-

:manohar >:
5 > ailgar:ta-bhuvo bala:bakulasy> alavala-
parisare sthita4/ tasya ca yadfcchaya nirantara :nipatitani kusumany
aday) adaya srajam abhinirmatum
arabdhavan asmi / anatararp ca iva devasya makara:ketor
jagad-vijaya-vaijayantika nirgatya garbha-bhavanad ujjvala;vidagdha:
10 mugdha:- vii mahanu-
bhava---=.prakftir ka >pi tata ev> agatavatI /
Sa adhidevata va.
saundarya-sara-samudaya-niketanarp. va l
tasya4 sakhe niyatam indu;sudha;m!l?ala;
karar:tam abhiin, Madanas ca vedha4 /121 II
atha praf!.ayinlbhir anucar'ibhir avirala:kusuma-sarp.cay)-avacaya:
ma-dohadinlbhir abhyarthyamana, tarn eva bala:bakula:padap)-
6ddesam agatavafi / tasyas ca kasminn api mahabhaga-.Janmani
bahu :divas)-opaciyamanam iva manmatha-vyatha-vikaram

20.3 ca : om EMNO pariSramiid: parikram ad G J madhura: before madira M;

after madira N
20.4 I; H sangalad ABD; saillruiad C; sammilad E;
sakalamilad GHlJKLN Har; sakalamilindad M' sakalakalamilad 0 mukuJa:
bakula BH
20.5 iibbarat:'a: abharaq.asya MN ramaro-iyasya: ramal)lya EMN ABO
KL ; angana CGHIJ; udyana E; ,ankaq.a MNO biila: om H bakuJasya:
bakulamukulasya H; bakulapadapasya CMN
20.6 after parisare : eva A yadrcchayi nirantara : yad!,ccbaniraDtara:qt I
tini: patitani E; vikasitani CIKLO ; patitanivikasitani N before kusumiini:
padapa L kusumini: (after adaya) KMN
20.7 iidiiyidiya ABD ; adaya CEGHlJKMNO ; om L raeaoi : viracana GHlJK
20.8 asmi: om EIMNO ca: tu K; om DELN iva: on B devasya: before
samcarinl MN ketor ABCDEGHIJ; ketanasya KLMNO
20.9 nir: vinir M garbba: om GJlst ujjvaJa : ujjvalita M
20.10 mugdha : om EN; mukha L biila : om GHJ viracana : racana ABDEN
vibhiivita ... parijana: om K kumiri: kaumara GHJ
A
20.11 D, tatra MO agatavati: abhigatavat'i N
21a nidher: vidher I vii: iva I
c sudhii: kala IMNO
21.1 after atha: sa GHJKLN avirala ...dohadinibbir : om MNO after avirala:
nipatita E om E
21.2 Iila: om BE dohadinibbir: dohadanibhir BL ev.a : evaca. K
21.3 agatavafi: agata ADI ; gata N; alanlq-tavafi 0 kasminn api: kasmi:qtScidapi
GHJ mabiibhiga ABCDEGHIJ ; mahabhagadheya EKLMNO Har
21.4 manam iva: mana EK manma.t ba: madana E vikaram: adhikaram E
 21.5 ACli 19

5 upalabdhavan asmi / yat:al?

katham api kriyasu /

kalayati ca or
abhina va :kantai:I kapolal;t //22//
sa punar mama amrta-vartir
lva atisay) :anandam utpadayanfi ayaskfmta:mar:ti- 'alak»
eva loha :dhatum aiicita afi I bahuna -
asanaya, tasyam
asaktam etad
prayaQ. ca vidadha aSubha:q1 ca
bhagavati HhavitavyaV) alva 1/23/1
MAKARA DAH
vayasya nehas ca nimitta-sa c) eti
eta t / pasya -
padarthan ko )pi hetur-
na khalu bahir :upadbin
vikasati hi patailgasy) oday,e
dravati ca hima...;.raSm3 udgate candra-kantah. I/241/
tatas tatal?? /
MADHA AH
tatas ca tatra

21.5 upalabdhavin ABDG ' EHUKL . 0 Har 10 tine

22a mrdita: malita I ; milita L
b kriy.asu : C
d ccheda: bheda N ant . ABCEKLM - kii.nta D ', taotif:t 0 ; GHlJ
22.1 punar: om M . 0 ; ca E pr:atbama : om M 0 dJtriau.: sandariana ABDt
darSanB ABCDGHJJ : darSaoat EKL O ' darSana artir:. artika" 0
22.2 caksusor: caksuso K.L atiSaya AOGHJ · niratiSaya B' atiSayam CE ' niraliSa am
IKLMNO inaodam mpicla , fi : anandayant"i B, - clayanfi: upapa-
dayantI 0; udbbarayanli E . ": om E
22.3 iucita".fi ABD; aiic:chitavati C' IKL- EGHJCmarg;
M 0 before bahuna: sarvallia KL · afrer bahunii 10'
om ABCDEGHJM I

23b apeks.ita: M
23.1 vayasya.: om M be/or snehru: madha a GHIJK..LM 0
24a M
b srayante: srayanti AB
24.1 tatas M
24.2 tatra: om

6
 20 M iilatfmadhava 25a

atha 'so >yam' it> lrayitva

sa-t>ratyabhijiiam iva mam avalokya, /
sakhi:janena
muktas smita :sudba-madhura!:l //25 //
MAKARANDAH
(svagatam) kathru:p., pratyabhijiia )pi nama /
M AD HAV AH
api ca salilam
avaftkam uttrasta:KalahaIp-sa-vibbhram) :abbirama:carar;ta:::
rasit>-anubaddha:
5 Bbartr-
darike vardhamahe , yad atr) aiva ko >pi kasy> .api vallabbas
Hi mam aitgufi-vilaseo) /
MAKARANDAH
hanta, prag:anuragasy) /
KALAHAMSAKAH
. .
itthl-kadha /
MAKARANDAH
10 tatas /
25a itirayitva.: itivanama M NO, ?Acorr ; atlvanama I
c bbiY8 : meva IMNO
d ABeD; tada cett
25. I svagatllm: om EKLN
25 . 2api ca ABCD ; alha cett afler utliila : datta KL l'alayii : om(vaukam) Hsic
25 .3 uttrasta: samuttrasta IKL after uttrasra: matta EGHIJLO ; om ABCDKM
ha.f!1sa ABeD
25.4 ral!ara:J?Zyamana MO maiijira : after manju EIKLM
Harrasita: siiijita OHJ ; (sic) M baddba ABD Har Kath; baudha
C; viddha EGHUKMNO Har Ca] ; vidbna L
25 .5 after kaliipa: kala GHIJKL ; om ABCDEM 0 Har rar:taral!at
M ; jhar:tat Har pratini : pari KL v!is: vrtta L
25.6 vardhimahe: vardbase BDKAcorrko >pi : after kasyapi E kasyapi: kasyaapi
KMO; tasyapi N vaJlabhas ACDKLMNO· om EGHU ; B
25. 7 ill ; om CE after anguli: darn EGHJKL vilasena :
vinyasena ABD
25.8 after svagatam GHJKLO bant:a : om [ after hama: siicito L
mabatah. :. mabii K " samudbhedab. M
udbhedllh:
25 .9 after srutva. L ; 0 k . : katbaIp LO ;. om
B; M om E afler WJubandhifJI: khu M ittbi
ABD l; itthia MNO; itthHi C; itlhijarya K ; iLthiana EGHJL ( lrijana Har ch)
kad.ba CGHIJKL; kaba ABDMO .; !catha E " kaho N
25.1 0 ... om C tatas (ata" : lL
26a Act I 21

Atr) antare kim api vag-vibhav>-ativ.rtta...;.

vaicitryam ullasita...;.vibhramam utpal) I
tad b hiiri...;.sattvika:- vikaram apasta
acaryaka.ql vijayi manmatham avir asit /j 26 /1
tatas ca
Stimita ·vikasitanam uJlasad:- bhrfl : La tan am.
pranta-vistara-bhajam j
pratinayana-nipate cid akuiicitallarp
vividham aham abhuvaI!l patram aIokitanam l127 11
taiS ca
Alasa :valita ;mugdha ·snigdha
adhika :vikasad :antar-: vismaya -smera...;. taraiQ. /
hrdayam me
apahrmm apaviddhaI9 pHam unmiilita:ql call28//
evam ahaJ:!l tu tasyal?-
saIl.lnidhina vidheyllqto >pi pari-
plavatvam atmano prak.:prayuktasya
damno a grathitavan eva / tato milita:
vetra va ra ...;pari var3.q1 gaja :vadhiim
aruhya margam indu..;.vadana >laqllqtavafi I tada )pi
Yantya muhur :valita...;.kandharam ananaI!l tad
vahantya /

26a ativrtta: ativarti M

b ayata I
d vijayi : vijaya BD ; kimapi
26.1 after tata.i ca: tas E
27a rikasita : vilasita nipite : ruplHaI!1 I
27.1 tais ca: tatasca M 0
28a ABDEHKLMO Har· nispanda CHsic Jmarg; G ; illeg in Jlst·
is difficult to distinguish from in OK and ewan mss vismaa: vismita E
milataii D ; militatp L
28 .1 evam : om IKLM 0 tu : om BCDE · 10 t in A rak!1i ABCD · om cett
28.2 after rasena : prayel.la L sal!JDi .. i AB DIK O · abhisamdbina EGH1L
28.3 >patinotu: paoihnotu GHUL . tasya ABCD · prastutasya cett
ABCDHUmarg· lcusuma [K · om EGJM 0
28.4 damno : dbamno Gl . at -: yada e a :asmi . om E milita :
vividha [ . om M 0
28.5 SastJa: om E 0 UfII: dhara Kt om C· M pan.
ABCDO ; IL · parivrttal!l K · pari ad EGHJ
28.6 .flruhya : avaruhya ABD - . m : om L tad- AB DGH1KL · taya E·
om]M 0 >pi ADD ' hi CKL ; ca EGHJ ; om JM 0
22 M iilatlmiidhava 29c

digdho >mrtena ca ca a
nikhata iva me hrday,e 1129 II
tatal:t prabhrti
sakala:vacananam
punar janmany asminn yo na gatavan l
viveka-pradh upacita :maha: moha -gahano
ko )py antar ja4ayati ca ca kurute 113011
apl ca
Pariocheda-vyaktir bhavati na )pi
bhavaty abhyaste )pi atatbabhava-virasam I
na hima:sarasi va candramasi va
mano bhramati ca kim apy alikhati ca /131 //
KALAHAMSAKAH
. ..
dadham khu eso kae vi avahado l avi nama Maiadi ijeva sa
bhavel
MAKARANDAH
(svagatam) aho / tat suhrdam? I
atba va
Ma mumuhat khalu bhavantam Ananyajanma
ma te marunasa :vikara-ghana matir bhflt I
- nanY ilia nirarthakam eva, yasro.a t
Kamas ca nava:yauvanam cal132 11
(prakasam) api vayasyena vidite tad-anvaya;namani? /
29d oikbata : vikhlHa M hrdayarp.
29.1 vidhi:i.narp M
30a H; karaI).anam N
b padarp. N
d antar: antal!l C kurute: tanute I
30.1 api ca... iilikhati ca: om I
31a oa: before bhavati EMNO
b atatbii: ayatha HM bbiiva: bhavi G
31.1 dadham
. . BeDElL ; Lost in.
. A; didham
' . GHJM . dndham . . drdham. 0 kbu:
kkhu CEO; illeg in K eso: esa C ; after kCielli CE kie vi : kaevi EG HIJ ·
ldiepi 0 bado: harido MO Miiladi: maLadi CM 0 jj,erva ADEKL ;
jeva B,; yyeva Cl; jevva G HJO evva M
31.3 before mahao L .8n,g.8 .: 0 ; illeg in M
priyasuhrdam E
32c nirartbakam : nirartham E ; vikarthakam B yasmit : yasmin CIM 10
32.1 before api: vayasya EO v.a yasyena: before .l ad ABD · om EO ridite: viditai a
B 'o amaol: namrii GJ ; oiimani. M
32.2 Act I 23

MADHAVAH
sakhe sruyatam I atha eva
mahata4 sakhi-kadambakad vilambya bala:
bakula -kusum)-a vacaya - nedi yasi b hii tva prar:tamya kusum>
aplq.a-vyajena mam evam uktavatI / ' Mahabhaga
ramaq."iya val? sarpniveSaJ? kutiihalini ca no Bhartr-
darika vartate / tasya ayam. abbina 0 vyaparaq. /
tad bhavatu krtarthata vaidagdhyasya I pha1atu
/ asadayatu arasa e· a
maharghatflm iti I 10
MAKARANDAH
aho vaidagdhyam . /
MADHAVAH
taya ca mad-anuyuktay» akhyatam iyam
prasutir Malatl nama ca prasada-bhfunir Bbartr-darikaya
dhatreyika Lavangika nam) eti l

32.2 aroba-:ta : adhirohat;la I'

32.3 tat:aJ? ABCDM ' . om E -: stri KL kadambaUd: ka-
dam bad aoyatami: ekatam a [ rilambya : a alamb a I ' om . before
anyatama ABCD bila ABCDKLO ' om EGHlJ
32.4 bakuJa: om ElM kDSUlD8.. .• . ya.: om GHJ a aea a : apaca a M .
apacaya 0 before krame1Ji1: ajena I; pra M after pra'!amya: ca ABD
32.5 evam: om BDEM ; 10 tin AC I
32.6 vab: te KL ' om M GHJKL ; om ABCDIM O' ku ume.u E
ca: om . cas an M DO. : om I
32.7 vartate: om KL tasyi 8y.am ADD : tasya C · tadas am E; as) am
I; tasyam GHJl 0: la iiJ:!ltv K. afrer abhino\'o : al!l 1 vicitra
BD ; om E "yapara : a aharah l
32.8 after phalatu : ca IKL before nirmiil)a : guJ?a Kl
lM 0
32.9 EGHJO ; la t in . om BeDIUM isida)latu: samasadayatu
EIKL 0 sar : om E ea ABCDIO; EGHJKLM before
Bhartr : [la EM a at moana : alambana GHJ
32.10 iti : om
32.] 1 before vaidagdhyam : maha I
32.12 anuyuktaya : anayuktaya DCL : anurakta - 1: anllktaya K akhyatam AB D
E . samakb atam GHJKLO ' cakhyatam . evamiikh alam lamat 'a :
ailgarajamatya BbDri asob. .. 8bfiri asGr ( _.16): om and add in marg
32.13 MaLafi: rnalatni BD am : nama 0 al ler aht1J!2 ca : la AD
dirikiyi . here AB (mar · DGHJO ' before prasiida El KL'
32.14 dbatl'eyiki: dhatre 1 M
 24 M lzlatfmiulhavQ 32.15

KALAHAMSAKAH
. .
15 J?ama Maladi tti ! / vilasidaq:l khu
bhaavada / amhehirp. /
MAKARANDAH
amatya:Bhurivasor atmaj» ety aparyaptir bahumanasya / api
ca / Malafi Malat» hi modate bhagavatl Kamandaki / ca kila
Nandanaya Raja prarthayata iti sruyate /
MADHAVAH
20 taya c) aham anubadhyamanas bakula-malam atmanaq.
uttarya dattavan / asau punar drsa Malatl-
mukh)-avalokana-vihastata tarn eva
bahu manyamana 'mahan ayaI!l prasada' iti grh"itavati /
anantar3f!1 ca yatra-bhanga-pracalitasya paura :janasya
25 samkulena tasyam a.gato )smi /
MAKARANDAH
vayasya Malatyam api sneha-darSanat etat / yo )pi
hj prag:anuraga-pravrddhas tasya4

32.15 avi N ... Hi: om M khu ABDIL; om EGJM 0; kkhu C(marg)

HK; kbalu Rar ch
32.16 bhaavadi: om GIN GHJKLM ; devve,?a ABC(marg)DEO ; divve,?a
[ (a)baJ?ena I after auhe1}a : a )0 before jida'!': ta H
32.17 after svagatam M atmaji .: prasutir M api ca: om
32.18 MiJati .Mitati : malatI I after modate: bi ACD bUgavati : om J
before ca: kldca E; svagatam Bhand's N kila: om E
32.19 Raja here ABeD ; before Nandanilya cett prirtbayata: yacata M (ta iti :
(te)iti D; (te)ti BE after sriiyale : ; prakasam tata talai:t M
32.20 anubadhyamiDas ABCDIKMNO; anurudhya.rnanas EHIJlst· abbyarthya-
manas GJcorr om E
32.21 uttirya ABCD ; avatarya ceU after dattm1iin: eva I asau: sa I abld:
anabhi E
32.22 mukba: mukhakamala I av.: vi M ; a "ihastati ABeD' vihastataya cetl
before vi!ama: ca asama EVirtata: racita N bhigil!l
bbaga. C; tAnam N bbigil!l tim: even m s which usually employ the class
nasal give anusvara here; bbagantam Bbandarkar's edition
32.23 after iti: L; vyah[tya 0 pta: pratigrbila AM I . ' CO
32.24 ca: tu KL bhanga: prasanga K; bhailgaprasailga E paora : pauranaigama
HUMNO .; paurailgana KL
32.25 CK; antaritayarp E before ligalo: abam E
32.26 Milatyim CDGHJ ?Slst; lost in A; malatya(api}1 EIKLM OBcorr soeIIa :
sasneha E after suiliffam: eva. MN yo )pi : yo MN
32.27 Id: om I cibna: M ; om EO aJllo·iga ABeD; om cett pravrddbls
32.28 ACl.l 25

so )pi iti vyaktam / etat tu na

jnayate, kva taya vayasya iti I na maha-
kumaryo )nyatr) ,asakta..;.cetaso bbutva >nyatra 30
ragir;tyo bhavanti./ api ca

tasyas tvayi prag:annra.ga-cihnam /

'kasy) ,a pi ko )p) ill nivedilaJ:!l ca
dbatreyikayas v,acaS ca /f1311
KALAHAMS
. AKAH.
(upas!1ya) ca / darSayati)
UBHAU

MAKARAND AH
Kalabamsaka ken> aitan Madha vasya praticchandakam
abhilikhitam ? I
KALAHAMSAKAH
. .
jen,.a jjeva se a vahadaJ:i!t I 5

ABCDGJ; EKL; prabaddlia1? 10; M; H;

praj endhaJ:? tay •. : om EL
32.28 I 0 Haf' om E !i ll: eva EMNryaktam:
pratyamuknam E; ,o m M after lIyaktam: etat UKL; evaitat EGJO ,; om
ABCDIMN
32.29 after kva: punar E Koorr
32.30 . bhagadheyajanmano M iryo,: om M
aayatta : ekatra I isakta : avasa.k:ta [ . aua cetaso: manaso GHO (2od)
aayatra .A BCDEGHJ ; parab'a lKLMNO
33b clbaam DEHIJK.LM 0.; lio,gam BCG .H ar - lost in A
c lk asyipi : lcasy3.Sca M ea: yad K
d be/or,e dhiilrey,ikayas: madba [; IriJ:!lca 0 Hac;
CMN
33.1 citla:f!l E ea : ,a. El ; ADD ' cit:ra.I!l1 C be/ore iti I:MO
cUral!l dariay,ati: om B ci.tnlm: ADKLM . . bere ,o m C; citrapbaldam. EG
HI10 bejore ,dursayati: pra GHJ
33.2 ubbau om l
33.3 KalDal!lSlka ABCD1K.LO Ha.r Kath' lcalah8f!l5a EGHJN; om M et:an.:
Midlutyasya: miidhava L pralittlumdak.. prati-
bimbam GHIJO; rupanl MN ·, lost in A
33.4 abIU CGHJKLMO· ,a BD . . om El ' lost lin A
33.5 je'::'l tieva : H· [ Deft AD ' Jew O'yyeva C ' om EO ' jevw.
 26 M iilatlmiuihava 33 .6

MAKARANDAH
api Malatya? /
KALAHAMSAKAH
· .
ad ha im /
MADHAVAH
vayasya Makaranda prasanna...J'rayas te
MAKARA DAR
Kalahaf!1saka lruto )sv) adhigamai?-? /
KALAHAMSAKAH
· .
10 mae dava Mandaria-hatthado -tae vi Lavangia-saa ado /
MAKARA DAB
atha kim aha Mandarika Madhav)-a.lekhya-prayojanaq:t
/
KALAHAMSAKAH
· .
ti /
MAKARANDAB
va yasya Madha va sarva tha samasvasihi /
Ya kaumudl nayanayor sujanma

GJKL; evva M; ? N ava: api Har Katb ch ABCDEIKL (hatam

Har Cal. ch); GHJM 0 Har Kath ch)
33.6 Makarandab : madha I api : apmama El
33.7 adha : aha BM; atha HJ
33.8 Makaranda : om E prasanna : pratipanna E ; om L GHJKL
after praptil;a M
33 .9 ABCGIKO ; DEHJ; om L before kuto : satyat'll
IL adhi: abhi K after te M
33.10 Maka J .. ..... hi manye / gbarma
(I 37 a) :folio 9 uJ B, containing Ihis passage, is 10sI mae DGHJKL; mama CEIM ;
maba 0 ; lost in A diva : om KL Mandirii: ma.ndariae GH1JM
tthido: ?hatthadi J' atthlldo EM; v': om ADM Lavailgiii : Lavangjae
ACDHN saisido: batthesamasadido D?C ' hatthesamasadida A ; hatthado E
33.11 atba : om ACD ' kalahaf!lsakathaya Mad1lav : madhavasya ACD
iJekhya: a1ekhyena MN ' lekhye C afler C
33.13 GHJKL scripsi ; (a)tti CDE[ ; M O·
(o)tti GHJKL; lost in A(B)
33.14 Miidhava: om E sanatbii : om M samasvasihi : twice M
34a yi: sa AD
 ...

34b ACll 27

tasya bhavfm api /

tat prat i akhe na hi aqlSayo ) ti
yasmin Vidhi' ca Madanas ca
ca bha ate ikara-hetu tad atr) ai a
Malatl /
MADH VAH
yad vaya ya a I likhan) sakhe Makaranda
Vararp tira at] d[Sor udgamarp.
tat- stambham abh eti gatram /
svidyann ayam a irat) :otkampa-loD..;.anguIikal?-
pal,lir lekba- nataraf!1 vartate - kirp. karomi? 1/35//
tatba >pi vyavasito ) roi l cimd abhilikhya dar 'ayati)
MAKARA .DAH
(vilokya) upapanna la ad atrabha ato )bh.i. anga};t /
(sakautukam) katbam acirlen) ai a nirma a likhitai?; 1
(vacayati)

b tasyi: yasya E' tasyiir!l K Oni a : manohara bandha : Labdha M . 0

d ACDGru ; kfta EIKL o ogau IM
34.1 G ?nst rflpi: svarupas after ca: satatra M before
likhy.atiim: taval E- al · abbi 0
34.2 Milafi : om M
34.3 rucita : matam L after rucilJJm: te I in E ; Aiti K L
before likhan :
tad upanaya citra artikas ca I Man upanayati I Madha
GHJLMO; om ACDEIK T

ya: upanamaya H a . . .. ell : citra. a

M Vlu1ikiS : aniS L a : kalaham b L oa ti : nama ati H
instead of the abo e I has citraphaJaka7?rgrh"va
likhan ACDGHJ o · ity)a1ikhan E iti)lilcban K; Likhati L ; aJikban M
before sakhe: sakhedam 0 aranda: ma arandaka C
35a [LMO · ud,gam udgato MO · madgato
b Ja. : M
c sridyao: khjdyan L a. nayanaro ,'b3to: iralo GH; ikalo J
d GHJ taril!l CDELO- lost in AB · GHUKM
Subhasita
35.1 api : o m v y.a ito: vya ahilo : 3ivabito after >smi : iri E cirid:
A

ciraya abh- : a KL darSa)' tii : pradarSa} ti GHJO

35.2 rilokya : M; ta a.d am: latra atra: om E . ang
MNO
35.3 ev.: om M . likhita . : E afrer . • hi El
35.4vicayati: om GJKM - 10 l in
 28 M iilatlmlulhava 36a

Jagati jayinas te te bhava

santy ev) anye mano madayanti ye /
mama tu yad iyaq:t yata loke vilocana-candrika
janmany ekal;1 sa eva mabotsava'Q. //36 //
(pravisya atvara)
MANDARIKA.
KalahaI!1saa 2, pad )-aJ?usaret:la uvaladdho )si / salajjam)
kadhaql, te vi mahaI?-ubhava idha jjeva / (upasrlya) pary.amami /
UBHAU
Mandarike, ih) asyaffim /
MANDARIKA
5 (upavisya) KalahaJ11saa, uvat:lehi me cittaphalaaql /
KALAHAMSAKAH
. .
(grhltva) get:lha /
MA DARIKA
(vilokya) keI).a ettha Maladi alihida? /

36b ye: me N
c vilocaoa : vilokana K
d ebb: asmin N
36.1 sahara ACDEI ; satvara.I!l KLO ; om GHJM
36.2 after Mandiirikii: 2 KL ; word repeated C Kalwf!lS8i ACDEIL (kala-
haq:tsaka Har ch) ' kalahamsaa GHJKO ; corakalahaJ:!lS:l M;
2 ACDEGsicJ; word repealed H ; om IKLM 0 pada ACDO; pada EHIJ;
paa KL; cia Gsic ; paa MN uva: ua EGHJ; om KLM 0 Har Ca} ch before
madhavamakarandau EGHJO; ubhau ; madha amakarandaI!l after
vilokya L; om ACDIKM vilokya .I KL
36.3 kahaq:t AMNO te ACDGJ 0 Har ch ' ete HL ; ede IK ; om E ; de M
vi: om E mahat:Jubbava ADIMO; mahal;lUbhaa EGHJK ; mahal).uhiiva C ;
mahabhaa L idha. ,ijeva: before mahii E ".db : ida HJeorr ; ettha M ,0
jjeva ADEKL; yyeva Cl; jjevva GHJ ; 'evva MO upas!1Ya : om E
mimi : pat;lamami E ; praI?amati CGHJ
36.4 ilia CDGHJO ; EIKLMN ; lost in AB, isyatam : agamyatam 10
36.5 upav··ya upasrtya 0 before KalahaJflsaii: re AD AOBL
Har ch)' C KO ' kalabaJ!lsa GHJM after
KalahalflSaa: 2 GsicHsicJ u a: ua E ' upa H me : om M 0
36.6 g!bitvi : om MNO I; . one ill ·gible s lIabi.? E edam
EGHJKLO; imaqI ACDIM ; after eda1!1 : from here to the end of Act I ,
f has a newer leaf. no. 13. substituted/or the original. from fhe corrected form of
which it was probably copied
36.7 before kena EIC Harcb); kalabamsa then an erased
36.8 29

KALAHAMSAKAH
. .
jo Malacfie /
MA DA.RIKA
vmnanam Paa.· aiI?-o 1/
MAKARA DAH
Mandarike, yad atra vastun esa te vallabhal;J. kathayati - 10 .
api tatba tat? /
MA DARIKA.
Mababhaa adha i£!l /
MAKARA DAH
kva punar Malati Madha arp prag ./
MA DARIKA.
Lavailgia tti /
MAKARANDAH
vayasya nanv amatya-bbavan>-asanna:rathyay» aiva bahuSah 15
upapannam etat /

syn.) K ; kalah8.I!lsaa CGHJ after Kef!.a: OH E

after va GHI0 Ha r cb ettha GHJKLMO· ilia AD ' idba CE · ittha
I.. om before kef!LJ L i :ahi M' ahJ L· om AD Ha r cb ; fo t in C.
36.8 . .. . Miladie: om HJ after jo: iicvva cr · eva Har Kath ch)' Jcva
G; jevv.a 0 ; yevva I ; M (e am Har Cal cb); evva . om ADEHKL
EGUM 0 Har Kath cb); HK.L; jal?--
ACD (yannimitla:J:!lca Hac CaJ b) after Miiladfe:
vll!odal?alptti 0
36.9 HJ da . ida.: u daf!1 ida AD ' M' uddarp ida O·
laddha N di .. ADEJ ' CGHIK . dinim L· om MO before vii)·
I?ia IK.L (nija Har cb i . . : L· K
O· C· palJ?o
36.10 . ' . -1l om J K b ifore Mandfrrike: sak:bi esa:
ayarp ACD
36.11 ap' : apinama E· om L tathi ta : tathai tat AD tattathii (}. tatsatyam E
36.1 2 Mahibbia: om E a i I: ahat im AD' tamtahli I · tau.aha M· tahataha
taha 0 (tathB. Har Cal cb
36. 13 punar : om E prig : om H M
36 .. 4 before ada HJ: jaba I 'l'idia . :aaana . E·
vadaaJ?i ga: gata HI: gade K 0; game
36.15 v.ayasy.a : om M .a.mat}'a : mala.u E e : om LKM bahuSab: om K
36.16 cariv e: cariivahe DL
 30 Malat'imiuihava 36.17

MANDARIKA
marp mahabhaa, java edaI!1 bhaavado devassa
Maal?-assa vilasidaqI piasahie Lavangiae t?ivedemi /
MAKARA DAB
etad bhavatyal? /
MANDARIKA.
20 (citra-bhaJ?l4arp. g!"hitva
MAKARANDAH
vayasya bhagav3.n ala:qlkaroti
madbyam ahnas, tad ehi saqlstyayam eva pravisava4 /
'I City uttbaya parikramatal?)
MADHAVAH
evarp hi man ye -
Gharm> :funbho-visara-vivartanair idanlm
mugdh> parijana /
tat pratar:vihita:vlcitra:pattra;lekha-
vaidaghyarp. jahati kapola-kurikumani //37//
aplca

36.17 L mannadu M m om CKMO mahibhaa

ACDL; EGHJK Har cb); mabfu:tubhavo M'
maha')ubao N; maha,)ubhao 0 edal!l: eaI!1 G ; om CM del' : devvassa.
ADEIO ; deassa GK
36.18 Maal.lassa: om KLN ; maaQassaa ADO ril ida ACD ' ucaridaq:l EG 10
(sucaritam Har ch) ' sucariaJ:!l HI ' caridaI:!l K ; carial!l L ' M ' aariarJl.
pia ... vedemi: nivedemilavailgiaepiasahie E same : sakhi e H.!I
36.19 . .. om L bbavatyii .: bhavatya EK
36.20 Mandirika : om M citra CDGHJ 0 10 [in A(BL);
EIKM before ·utthaya K nirgata HJ; ni. krantah M
36.21 1'8yasya.: om CG kharatara ... madbyam a ' as : madhyahnovartate]M .
madhyahno)tivartate 0 kharalara : kh ara KL after kira'!o : JKL
bbagavan: om E didhitir : rasir E
36.22 madhyam ahnas: madbyahnam E ayam : sa.t!l tyayanam K ; sandbya-
yam M praviSaval;t ACDIM ; gliccha EGHJKLO
36.23 ity G ; ftiti AC ; Aiti ity E ' ubha v . om HIJKLMO tram Kramanti I
36.24 hi : om EGNO
37a gbarma: sveda E
b parijana : parisara G ira : van undarl : undaribhih G HI
c vihita : likhita lekhi : rekba
37. 1 after api ca : sasprham El
38a Act I 31

Unmllan:mukula-karala:kunda:=:koSa-
praScyotad :ghana:makaranda-gandha-bandho /
tarn nat>..;.angim
aLiilgam pavana mama PrS) angam angam l13811
MAKARA DAH
Abhibanti hanta, katham Ma.dha
sukumara..;.kayam ana SmaraJ;t /
acirenavaikrta:
. . . .' . i arta-daruoah
. ...
kalabh3J!1 i a 1/39/1
tad atra bhagavati Kiunandaki na1;l SaraJ?lam /
MADHAVAH
ascaryam!-
Pasyami tarn ita itaS ca puras ca paScad
an tar bahih parita evavivartamanam I
udbuddha :kanak> abja-nibhal!l vahanfim
asanga-tiryag:apa vaktram 1/4011
vayasya mama hi. saqtprati
Prasarati parimathi ko)p. deha-dahas
tirayati /
bibhrad a
jvaiati hfdayam antas tanma ca dhatte 1/41 /1
. iti sa e)
'bakula-vlthl nama
Ilprathamo
38a koSa : BDE Har .l. ' gu ha ID: kosat L
b pra : C Scyota CIOEcorr: ' tad BDLEL (. otad GHJKM ; lost in
A ghaua : ana G : garoha · ; BD
c pracala vi: pracalita
38.1 om G afrer Makaranda1J: 0
39d pa
39.1 tad atu .: talra IKL Hac a an: bha t'i H
39.2 before ascaryam: svagatam EGHUKLM O · om ADen - . c:aryam: om M
4Oa. ita illiS : tata 0 ICI! ' . 1.) : pllrata' EG 0
b antar: (e'. .' : . _ EKLO
c "abantim: abantam G
d isaitga BDM ' asailgi? C; vyasanga 0 ; - ' ta EGHlJK.L utita: arjita 0
40.1 be/ore vayasya: prakaSam EGHU 0 ; om AB D a : om ElM
mama hi om
41a ayam: aham E
b J
c folio 10 of F here begins ra a: ranika M i am gitra .
a CFGUL 0 corr
 \

ACT 11

pravisatas
EKA
sahi saI!lgldaa-sala-parisare tumam kim pI
mantaanti asi? /

DVITIYA

sahi kila Mahava-piavaasseJ?a saalo ijeva

5 Maarand>-ujjana-vuttanto
. Bhaavadle nivedido
. I tado Bhatti-dariam
.' ...
Bhaavadie paiitti-I;timittaq! Avaloida I mae
vi tae kadhidarp. jadha Lavangia..;.bidia vivitte tb I

41.1 iti: om N be/ore bakula: maLat1madbave K bakula Vithi oima : om J M

bakula: balm J vltbi: vethI HJ after )nka}.l : ACF ; samapta iti B
pr .1 after pravisatas : ca G
pr.2 eki: prathama 0 sahi BCDFGJO; haJa EHIKL Har ch ; om M .; lost in A
BCDEF; GHJ ; saT!lgida IK 0; S3J!lgidaa L; saI!lglta M
Avaloidi: avaloia GJN; avalokia H bidii ABCDEF; dudia. GHJKO; duia
IN; dudla L; dula M ABCDEGIKLO; tuvaQl I; bhaavadi M .;
before mantaanti G11st; om CFHJcorr pi: kiJ!l EGKL llst; kit;l vi M
after kirr pi: 2 ABCF
pr.3 isi: as. MNO
pr.4 sahi: 0 a/rer kila B Mihava: miihavassa E'
madhava F pia : ppia MO Maarandet;la : om M jjeva ABCDFKL ; jeva
GJ ; jea H; om ElM 0
pr.5 Maarand> EKL; maal? BCDGHIJM 0 (madana Har cb) ' lost in A
ojjat:ta IM vuttanto: vuttanto HI be/ore 1040 : prathama / tadokirp / dvitiya
KL, (ki1!l om) E tado: om B; tato M DKL
dariaam H
pr.6 G ; di!hu H ; J Bhaa\' die: tae 0 ; om p -tti:
vaiitti N; ppaiitti 0 AvaJoida: avaloia I L ppesidi : ppesita
H; pesidll [ ; ppesia 1; ppesia N
pr.7 vi: pi G kadbidal!J CEFKLO; kahidaJ!l ABCDGHUM' kabiaQ1 jadbi
CEFG H IJKO; jaha ABD ; jaha M ' jatha t · aha bidii BDEFCmarg '
duwa G H IJKO; dudia L; duiii M ; ; 10 t in A ' om Cl t ivitte: om F
Bhatti: bhatta CD KL dirii : diirikii 1 vattadi : attadi CF; vadadi L '
vatUi 'ni: ti H ; om G
pr.. 8 Act 11 33
PRATHAMA
sahi Lavangia kbu k,e sara-kusumair? a . tti. Maarand)-
ujjaJ?ado jjeva aada - ta S3.f!lpatta? I
DVllTIYA
adha iI!l / taql khu para.v aqantijjeva hatthe to
U ' ari:almdaaI!l aman14ha I

PRATHAMA
niinam tassa vll?-odedi /
DVITjyA

kudo se asaso. / ajja sa

adibbfuniJ!l kbu gado me abbiJ?iveso bhavissadi / kaJfup

pr.S before sahi:. I' taI:!J lkbu : k.khu BCEFKO kusumaim: ku umai
Ch;lOmi : I ; hil,!.omi :aa ABeDF' maam EGHUKLM 0.
(madana Har ch)
pr_9 jje : GHJ ? lie ABCDF' yyeva. I- evva M - jevv,a
0 ; om EKL 'O HJ ) - ABCDEF ' IG lU L - J?aagada 1- 0 -
,a m ' om ta •• om M fa
kiiica c- F - ti . ltinnu O' kim Mar h 0
after sarrrpadarr:. yye a] sall!lpatta : patta A8CDF prapta Har cb)
pr. IQ adha ,il!l: abaim BDM L Ik hu : k bu BCEK.O pm :
aM 0 \'Ilda.nti D' B' E', HsicJ'
vadaoti j- L- pa4anfi . MnuA' C- F- vutlaJ¥ K -
vat'e ; 0' patanfim Har ch li a . BD EFL; yyeva Cl;. yyevva G;
jevva HI0; jjevva K' evva M eUii ABCDFIN; ; ia E-
gebo.ia G' HJO; geQhia KL pa , "ddha:M' 0
pr_11 after siddha: sesa E B .. ' : HKt Uvari,: uari EL ' upan M
illow _ ABDFK (ldindakam Hat ch - alidclaru:!l ', alind:aa.£!l BGHlJL-
H' alinda.qJ iO·· alinda - talam Har ch .1_
pr.U G after f'O.ssa : mabava E - Lavaitgiakbu Ibbat',assa:
bhaassa EKL' bavassa 10 sa. _ : om M ka · ie CEFlKO; kadha e GH]-
kathae L; k.ahae ABDM afta.': ananam GHJLM 0
ODGHUKLO ' vinodemti ACEf' , ; vinodiaasa emitti
pr. 13 nisvasya BEG[O - -. ya L; om aft ' ku.do: khu M
isiso : iisaho . aaso 0 ap : om ABCDF
pr _1 4 adi: a1 blaiimi . : bhiime ; 1 : kkhu BEl( 0 gado
ABCDFGHU' omEKL 0; befoTekhu f · lost , but appar,e ntly inserted after
tile C lie: after F • - ABeD] - abi !EFHKLM O-hi G
bllavissadi ABCDf'GHU - ,g;amissadli EK.LM 10 Har ch) after
issadi: tti [HUll kalli __ lie"'.: KLO' .
 34 M iilatlmiidhava pr.IS

15 karat;lado Maharao abbhatthanto amaccena

/
PRATHAMA.
ti? /
DVITIYA.
pabhavadi lllassa Maharao' tti / ta jado
amaranam kbu sallam Malarue Mahav)-anurao tti takkemi /
PRATHAMA.
20 avi n,ama Bbaavadi kiql pi ,e ttha bhaavadittaJ?aJ!l dalP-saissadi I
DVITIYA.
ai gaccbamha I
(iti
// //

pravlsati Malafi Lavailgika ca)

MA.LATI
sahi tado 2? /
kaleevva M kallil!! kalli ABD ; GHJ; I; kalyo (1) Har ch
jjeva ABDF ; eva CGHJ; ca El ; om Har cb before lfandalJGSsa : tassa E
pr.lS kiranido:
. karanena
. . El; kalanado . M attil:
. .bhaLta
. . DGJKL diria: .
GH abbbatthanto ABCDF ; patthaanto EKM ; patthayanto GHJO'
petthanto I; patthanto LN; prartbayan Har ch afrer a 8
pr.16 vi93UO l; vilP:lavido
pr.17 ti K; kinto AF ; kitti BCDEGHJ ; ILM; kiI!lvia 0
pr.18 Bhand' DO bba'f.di ABCDFI; ha.v adi EGHJKLMO'
havai N AD ; E (oija Har ch); j . assa: E
ta jiido EGHJKL: tado ABCDF ; Hat" cb' tadojado I ' ado M 0
pr. 19 khu : kkhu BFKO ; before iimaralJ!ll!1 M ; om EL sall , . .•• ma-
ladle mahavar:turao hiaasalla!:!l M saD_I!! ABDFGJ ; lost in C·
EJKLMNO' hiaesalla!:!l H Miladie here ABDFO ; lost in C; before sallarrr
EGHIJKLN(M) Har ch before Iti: hodi M; Har ch
pr.20 avi: api E; abhi I pi; vikipi H; M; kiI!J ' ; om E ettIla : e HJ;
before kjrr pi MNO ; before daf!1Saissadi IKL avllcli.: bhaavadi EO; bhavadi
GJlst after da,!,saissadi: tti CF
pr.21 ai : ayi GJ baddha: bandha ] hefor,e ehi: sabi 0 gacchamha BGHU;
tti K; om ACDEFLMNO Har ch
pr.22 iti: om N before parikramya KL
0.1 alter sotkatJ1.ha E sotk.. : before Lavangika A BCDF
0.2 (2nd)MiJati: om GHJ .E; om JKM 0 2: word repeated
HJMO; om
0.3 Act Il 35

LAV GIKA
tado tena mahanubbaverui uvanid,a me tarn ba ill a -mala I (ity
arpayati)
MALATI
(grrutva, sahi ekka:pasa-visama: 5
pac.tibaddha khu iarp. I
LA ' A' GIKA
ettba dfmi aramaq1aLt.aJ?e rumat:!l ccia a arajjhasi I
M LATI
kadham via? /
LA A' GmKA.
jeJ?a so duvva:samal).;ango tadha vihatthlkado I
, ALAT-
piasahi La.vangie sa adha )si I 10
LA A ' GIKA
sahi ka ettha I 0 saaJ'!1
piasahle vi manda:marud)-u

0.3 before (ado: saki M ' -,'e . • ,: El - Ita erpl . haena 0 nidi :
H - I)ida : after iaf!J' I ' om ill ': om. E - esa K baila :
bahula GHJ ity : om GL
0.4 before arpayati: maIam EO upayati : samarpa ti EH]
0.5 before g!"hilCi 0 . ar .ya : oirfJpya 0 sabi : om E ek.ka:
eka BGHJ pisa : passa OHI ' passa L' - HK 1E 4' : ppaq.i M
baddbi : paddba L; bandba
0.6 Ilhu ACDFGH ilL ' kkhu UEK ' om iam : esa GHJKL
0.7 d --:rl BOI ;
-h Har cb . 101 in a : om HI
BDFO ' I ccia AD; cia CF ' 'a B: iieva
EL;jjevvaGHJ; k:ila l;je raijbasi : rall - [ . raddba iCHJMO
0.8 CEFIKO ' aharp ABDGHJLM . E ' iva A
0.9 duni ABCDEFM 0 Har .1. - muddha HU mugdba Har ch) ' muddha-
duvva KL ' muddh-uccb - G - ABDFK.O· tath- eEL' taM. GHI - raha
JMN 'ihatthj : ialthi 1)0 - vilaltha G ' bhihatthe ] ado : kido M 0
0.10 piasabi.: sabi MO' om £ - :vvada CH .
savvaha GIM :, savvathli l. liD: sam ' .8 M sili : Ula L
0.] 1 Lava. .. nadi: om ettha : om GHJ' ittba before Icii I : naou H
so: om GJ ABD - pi H r cb - . CEFHKL " om GJO
0.12 piasa1Ue: om GJ ¥i AB DF; om EGHHKL ' 0 Hac ell minJd>;
marua(pa FL 1 I I eUa ABDE - od dal H ' u ellanta Bhand AD; pa -
 36 M iilatfmiidhava 0..13

pa4am ) :araddha:baii})::-3.vali::-viraaq.) :avadesa-sarp.jamida .

viuharantehim loanehim viambhamana .: vimhaa-tthimida:
15 dlha :bhUlada-vi4ambid): ar:tanga::-
avaloaanto paccakkhlkado ijeva /
MALATI
(Lavangikal!l piaIp me pia ahi - kil!l tava tassa
sahavia jjeva te jaq.assa ippalambhaittaka
viHisa, adu jadha piasahl saJTlbhavedi? /
LAVANGlKA
20 (vihasya, sasuyam iva) tumam pI kim sahavena jjeva ta sim

vella CF; (a)pabnabhu GJ; (a)pabala I ' (a) pahlattha K ' (a paLbatilia L ; (a)
ppaalida 0 ; (a) ppaalia M; (a)paaJia ; paryasta Har Ca! ch; paryanta Har Kath. ch
papbulla CFGsic; paphula HJ; papulla E ; pappbulla. ILM; papphullaa K'
ppaphulla 0; praphulla Har Kath ch; phulla Har Cal ch; om ABD
CEF .; N; M; 1 b ila baiilamii.la GHJ
sambhamida E; I; saq:ljamaJ?a 0; saamal)a balimodia
GKM; balamodida BCDF ; balamodi EHLOJcorr Har; baHimodha I ' veLa
• • J

lost in A
0.14 vitthiiridehirp M ;
B; CF; D ; 10 t in A ; before avaloaanto E
bhamiil.l8i: I ' viambamaI?a J . vijambbamaJ?a M rimhaa: iambbaa
B; viamha D; vimbaba K ; viplaa G peranta: perantebirp C; om L
0.15 pariattal.!-a BGHIJKL; ADM O' pariYatta£,la CE; parivatthaQ.a F
yiliisa: vilaa J HIJ' ( ilas)uUa ia MO ; ( ilasa)-
ullasida. N blriiladi : bhiilaa M' bhumia I' bhu 0 G IJ K LF marg '
vilambida E; H ; vibbavida ABCD ' vibbavia M ; vihavia. 0; om FIst.
sirailga: M
0.16 vibbbama: u GHJK GHJ; viatthaf!l M '
viaddhaf!1 N an: 0 MNO ThefirslleajoJ Fhere end loaoto BElLO ;
loanto ACDHJMN; ]oa K bejorepaccakkhf: tue HL hdo: kido GHJMO;
lost in A jjel'a BDEL ; eva C; jevva GHJO; yyeva I; jjevva K; evva M
0.17 parigrhya C Bmarg ?AIst me ABCD; ammo GHJL; am
E Harch; am IO;ama KM :piasahi : piarpsabi C after snhj: E ; ama .
ko ] tiiva ABCD ; dava ceu t.assa : dassa I after lassa: mahaQ.u-
bhavassa GH}; mahaq.ubnaassa L; mahanubha a a Har ch
0.18 sallavia: sahavili C jjeva ABDEGJKL' yyeva Cl'ijea H' ev a M ' . jevva 0
te ABCDIMO; om EGHJKL m · utta : muhuttaJ'!l GHJ
GH}; haino MNO lam · aittaki ABeD; lambhaiuaa EGHJLM 0;
lambhaaittaka J; lambharp llftaa K
0. 19 .adu lLM Har v.l.; adhava C; abava ABDGHJ' atha va Har ch ' adha E; bbodu K;.
boadu · ; ahaa 0 jadhi : jaha IJKM ; jaha L ; jaha ; 10 t in C; after pia ahi M
bbavedi.: bha vemmai N
0.20 vibasya: om B; lost in A tuma. H ; I pi : vi JLM . .
kim:
0.21 Ace l/ 37

avasare nacca ida ) i? /

, Al.ATl
vihasya) hurp. tado 2? I
LA A GIK
tado antaride ta Mandariae
gharaql uvagada >mhi I lae khu pabllade hattb"ikada.t11
asi / 25
MALATI
?I
. -
LAVA GIKA
tarn khu Mahav)-anucaro Kalabamsao nama kamedi -sa la sa
• .. • &

tti I tado Mandaria saqlvutta /

ALATI
(svagatam) teI)avi taI!1
attar,lO pahuassa bha i sadi I (prakasam) sahi de 30
/
ABDE ' om cett sahi.l'e':la : 1 ii a ABDE' yye a Cl ' jjevva H ;
jevva GJO; evva M . om KL
0.21 avasare : osare M a : om L rpgida. . : S3.qlglaJ.'!l G ; 0;
M naccividi
. : naccidii
. 0 i : (da)a' i I aft r (is;: bhaavada-
vammabeJ;la E
0.22 salajjarp : after lVihasJ'a E 'fihas)'a : om KLM om HJ ' bUql-
piasabi
, , E tado 2 AB DEUL.- tadotado GHMO; lado K ; sahitado
0.23 tado: om M om E attlUDi . : vattamat;la l; L; vutta-
M jaHa AB D BirlibKath p74; EGHIJ . jaJ?1ljatta Q .
jat;la KL ; M . ulelJ- : sanlcuJe C: saJ!1 l' HI
tassirp before anraride I after G HI
0.24 gbararp: garaf!l J ovag da .. : aamhi E ova : upa l ' a a KL gads
mhi: gamhi B; adamhi ; gada thu A.CDIL ; kkhu BEK ' om GHJM 0
before pabhlu/e : ajja E .. - de : hiide M «hi: hatthe EG 0 : atth"i I
kadarp : kidaq:l MO
0.27 tal!l L kbo: kkhu BE .O' bu H ; a aQuaro M 0
0 L D : om EGHJKL kimedi : kamei si : 0
GHJK ' om M ; e L - .. tti : om E
0.28 daf!l di HJ after radIJ : me edii : edaitfiya after
vediii : same I ; me O· mesa G; mama HJ irii : after E
0.29 teJ:?api H ' terya i (KO : . M' T hamsaena
. . : ham. ena
. M
tarp: om M OdD .: padicchandal!l. 0
0.30 pahoassa ABCD ; I)ahassa EGHUKL (nath ya Har ch) ; 0
daI"!'lsiat!l saIli : om C dinil AB DEI' diil)il:!l GHJK. 0;
LM d : Le H
0.31 after pia ".1 : I)i edial!l M
 38 Ma/at,imiulhava 032
. -
LAVANG[KA
edam khu samUividassa tassa samtava-ka.nno dullaha:manorah>-
avesa :- :citta htha
pa<;liochandaarp. / darSayati)
MALATI
35 aho dar;n me biaassa
jen,a evam.. pi vippa.Iambho tti
akkharair!I pi / (vacayati)
('Jagati jayinas te te bhava' purv) :6ktal!l
(sanandam) Mahabhaa khu de vaanam
40 mahuradae ! darp.sa1)am..
ca ! khu taG ammakao jao tumaI!l
0.32 kbu: kkhu BKO ; om E after khu: tam I SSJ'!1tavidassa BCDE ; lost in A ;
saf!ldavidassa GHIJKL ; santapiassa ; after kiiri1JfJ E; om 0 tassa EIKO'
syllables erased D; om BGHJLM ; lost in AC GHIJK
LMNO; lost in A kari,:,o BCDGHU ; aril)o EKLM 0
0.33 dajjbanta CDE ;9ajjanta ABIM ; G K' bhaijanta HJ ; dajjhanta L ;
0 ; illegible in N dtta ABCDIO; citta sa EG HJKLM kkbal;la
ABCDEIO ; GHJKLMN J?ivaittaa G ' M
tuha: tuma D
0.34 pa L 0 before iti EGMJLMO
0.35 KL drarp. ABCDGHJK' citr,aql. IM; om ELO
BCDEI; lost in A; GH.JK O· LM after da!); pi O' vi
HJLMN meEGHlJMN;ajterhiaassaKLO ;om BD ;lo [inAC
0.36 BCG?Dlst Har cb); aJ?asaI!lgo KO carr' al?a arigha ];
L; lost in A ; al?3.s3:so EM O' 3l?a!'ando H ; a1?asandho J jena ... •
pi : om G jal:!l C ABOIKL; CHJ; EG
M 0 pi: vi M CEGHIJM ; iisasar:te ABD' asasaJ?a KL·
asasar:t a 0 vippalambbo: viiambbo M; vippalambha E ambbfo'em]: tak-
kemi E; M ; sal:!lbhaViadi 0 '; sal!lbbavedi HI
0.37 before kadha'!l: nirvarqya I kadham CEK; kahaQl ABD : HJ·
I; adba 0 ; L Ha r ch ; aba M pi : akkhara I pi :
vi N; pia M befo.re viicayati: iti G ' samskrtam a.'ritya ¥scayati.: om Q.
samskrtamasritya M
0.38 jagati ... ABCDEG1L · jagati. ... kaladaya4 HO ; jagatijayinalf M .
the whole sloka I K ity adi ABCDEM O · iti GHJL' om IK. pUr oktarn
ABCDO ; s[okam L ; om EGHUKM patbati ABeD ' a GHJO ' om
EIKLMN
0.39 Mahabbiia: mahabhaga M ' om sariaI!l HH.. ; sarasaf!1 r kln.ll
kkhu BEKO de : om
0.40 mahura: madhura CEL ; muhura B afler mahuradae : lakkhladi KL
Har ch) ACD ; om B ' cett lalLkila. .•.
om L DGHIJKL o· ADCEM
0.4 1 samtiva ABCDO; anUipa E ' sa:I!lda.va GHIJKM 'CB ABeD ; a EHLMO '
0.42 ACll! 39

na pekkhanti va hiaa sa pabba anti I

LAVA ' GIKA
sahi pi de I?-atthi asaso . I
MALATI
sahi I
LA A' GIKA
jassa bandha1!-al!l va kailk,elli-pallaval!l 45
parikkhia i 0 vi janavido
bhaavada assa /
ALATI
. tassa mahanubhfi
kusalam. dam . vas a bhodu - mama una
.
suduUaho asaso / (sa ram) viesado ajja pia ahi I

avi K; om GJ B,EIM 0 k.bu. ACDGHUM ; kkhu

BEKO am akio ABCDE' ammaao I' Har; kannaao GHJK'
itthiao MO ' idiao jao : om B t u • . : I
0.42 ':la: om IK(L} pek.k banti: pekkha anti Gl' pek.khallldi M after pekkhDnli:
avinama OHJ' apiJ?ama E att.a .o i ABCDEIM Q .
GH1KL biaassa: hiae b-e/or,e auaJ'}o E ,c /ter hi.aa5sa: va. M ' vase I p a.:
ppa L bbulnti: ABCDHL' ha oti EGUM 0 ' havaboqlti K after
bhavanti: iti roditi EGHJKL ' tuC; 10 t in A sahii ••• isiso : om I
0.43 sahl: om C; after om CM e BCD£HLM .
GJK' jevvaJ"!l 0 ; lost in AI pi : i de: te J: om G ; after 1J.atthi ELM
0.44 sahl : om 0 kadba.r!J kah3.J:!l ABD' M '
0.45 beforejassa:sahi I sakhi Har ch C- kara.I?eJ?3 I' kalal,liido
M ; kara.l,lad(u) Hsic after kar;a,!ado: M 0 uU:badida ABCD'
ukkhadia IKL ' ukkhalida E ' G ?,J' H ' uk-
khal?gia M ; uttuq,ia 0 bandha [ ,fa ABCD!; via
EGH,IKL ' vvi M ' om 0 la.' elli ABCDL; kailk:illi EK' KailkeliGsicH 0 ;
kiilkeli J ; kailila I; ailkeli pallalT
. pallava I
, : after palla via'O'
hiaamdharaamt'i
. . M
0.46 kilimmanta AEJ · kiLamanta B ' . inta D ' kili5aI!lta G ' H;
I; KO ' kiLammanta L ' tilata M '!dam t Har ch nmnilia : l,l0maJiya
G J' J?a amaIjii H ; miilia I lJefore pari: lrusumauheJ?a M pari : pa4i IL;
panC ilL - iACE' kkhijja iD' kkhiBdchijjasi L· hia i]M O' hlyasiGHJ·
hiyase Har ch; Iaklchla i K , " sopi K
0.47 bbaavadi : om H amm ,
BCDEM · 10 t in A' mammahena . GHUKL 0
"!!llay I ADDE' C' assa. GHIJKLMO diisaha : dussaha I
after tt] IJO; ti. M ' om ABCDEGHL
0.48 after Malali : sabb.ayam E before kusala,?,: sa.bi EO dini ABCDEl'
GHJK' LM ; clava 0 bhi · : bhaassa AKL bbodu: hodu
LMN mama : maha '
0.49 suACDIO ; 10 tin B ; om EGHJKLM . Harch isiso : asabo nun :
 40 Mii/at"imildhava la

Mano-r.agas iva visarpaty avirataTI,l,

pramathI nirdhumaql jvalati. pavaka iva /
hinasti jvara iva gariyan ita ita -
na mam prabhavati na c>amba na bhavaH // 1//
LAVA °GIKA
evaI!l jjeva paccakkha:sakkha-dair:to parokkha :dukkha-dusaha
honti / avi a /
savisesa:samiddha :hudavahaanta-.J)unna. . :can d):::6daa nikkEtruna:
..
kama-vavara-saI!lsaldajivida. de sar1r)-avattha, tassa jjeva
5 savisesa:da:rp.sa1?-a ajja tti ettha kifl.1 I
ill piasahi duHaha:mal?oraha-pha.laJ"!1 jiva-laassa garu):
om L visesado .0 0 • sabi: om MNO after sah;: EGHlJK
LMNO
1a fagas: rogas MNO Har ti [0 M · lost in C i.va :
C; vyathayati visarpaty : visarpann CM 0 SUbha.ita ; i. a · BC
b nirdhumo EKL?I; nirdhflma
c pratyailga BM gariyan: ganan ' gUJyiin ita ito : ganya-
nittito B ita ito: ata ita 0
d maID: . ma B tratum. tatas: tatastnltum. GHJ
1.1 evam ABCDG icHIJO ; evvaf!! KLM ; eva E; o m i j e a ADHL · yyeva Cl;
jeva BE · jevva GJ ; iievva K .; om M . edam 0 (etat Bar ch) paccakkba :
N dayil)o K dukkhadilsaba ABCDGIKM 0;
dussaha HJL ; dii ahaasaariJ?o E FlorB96 BhalJd's A BirLibKalh p. 74 marg
1.2 before sajja1}a: a I samagama :. samaama O · samabama M aYi a : apia
HJ afler avi a: piasahi MNO "idau:,a: E .;varaiar:rn after
viidiia'!a : antara EGHIJKLMN Har ch ; antarida 0
1.3 ACDI; EGHJKLM 0 (darSanena Har ch)· 10 tin B
savisesa : suvi I ; su M ; vi N; om 0 ; Mar Kath ch amiddha. buda-
vahiianta: muddha C samiddba : ?mudamida E bud81 IJKLMO hua
ABCDEGH ; huta N pU':' ':I8 ABCDKM 0 - G;. put;tt;tima
EHIJL cando : ando CL od'ali EIKLM 0 ; odaya GH) · odaa sa C·.
odaado AB ; odayado D
1.4 after kiima: ] vavara: ryapara I aida : sayida K before jlvidii:
dukkba M after jfvida: di sad i L jje"a AOEL ; jevva GHJO ; .i:jevva K '
yyeva Cl ;evva M · eva N· lost in GHJ ; sampada I ;
sampada!:!l M N
1.5 savisesa : visesa L; visasa I . . san E
before damsolnii: . na
da msa . :.damsanena
. "
MN · daqlsat;tado 0 after da'!'sa'!ii : bhavia EOH KL (bbiH vii. Har cb) · .mu-
huttaam D ajja : om MN asi : 5af!Itappa B: santappla i M tti :
into H ; ti L ettba here ABCD· after kim EGHIJKL O· om M
1.6 ta : om E ; api D ; a via B after la: ettha M pia aM: sah i B :s aJiha
salaa I ; saJahi J ; siliha 0 AD
radha 0 jiv.a BDGHIJL; jia ACEKM 0 garui: gurus. I ; garugaa H '
gar'ia N
1.7 Act I1 41

anuraa-sarasa :mahabhaa: aUaha-samagamo tti ettikam jaqtami j

MALATI
sahi daida..;.Malacfi-ji ide a diL l (sasram) aha
va / aham.jjeva araJ!!l pal.oanti dukkha-va atthavida:dhjrauaJ?>
hiaeJ?a dura: duvviI?-aa- 10
lahul ettha avarajjhami j tadba vi piasahi 1
Ivalatu gagane ratrau ratra.v Sas"i
dahatu va paret:la I
mama tu tato janany
kulam na tv e ) ay,am. jano na ca j'lvitam 1/2/1
LAVA' GIKA.
(svagatam) ettha ko u ao . /
(nepatb )'-a rdha

1. 7 sarasa A BCDQ Har cb ' sarisa ElK ' sarisal!l GHJL ; sari 0 . sansaI!l M
mahibhia : mahal;Jubhaa GHJL : mababha .aa [ samigtmo : samaamo GJM
o ettik8f!1i ABCD ' cetl ABCDE ' GHJKL;
IMN ' janiIDo 0 ; Har h
1.8 sahi : om GH] d ida: dayida B ; daia lK jiride: ji ida l
G HJ ' 0 sisram: om Eaha ,'a ADEGHUKL;
adhava BCM ' 0
1.9 ijeva ABDEH ; yyeV3. Cl ; je GJLO' jj,e ; eva paloanti
ABeD KL ' paloaant1 EG Hl; vilaanta I' ']oaannpa]aanta M palaanta. 0
dnUba: om MO "8 ABCDB'0; ·ava GHJItL ·, paqi t:thivida.:
M; ida .0 dhlra: vim G
1.10 ttharrtbher:ta [ d- ... 'wn ita: diirlkida 0 dUra:
lVilafJianta lK.. vilavijjalta G - vivilaIjja J- viliijanta Bhand sBh; viltanta M ;
vivajjida ABO ' vidda.v ia C ' 'ambbanm L; vigala H- viJam-
bantt ; iIlyamana. Har ch lajj;atta . - ADD; G .' K'
lajjaltel?a M ; om EHIL . lajja J • .:. EH
1.11 lahuj : GHJ ; L' - lost in B a'Wara,:ijhimi AB
CDEK ; avaraddbahmi 8J, mmi); avaddllahi G' rajjha.mi I; avaraj:ami L;
avarajhammi ; a. arajbahmi '0 fai CIKLO; taha ABDEH' taba M' ;
tadfl G J r i: p i I afler piasaJri: ElM . bbuyal!:t-
GHJ KLO
la g.agane: gag3l?e CE; nagare H
b ABeD ' I 0 - vidhIi yati EGHJ
c SJigbya5 tato: talaQ:'lagh 0 E
d
2.. etdta : iuha I da . ', A..B DE ' GHU o· cianlml M ' 10 t in B
U".o : Ov,a o I
2.2 before neparhya : atha Kl.O thYII: naipathya 0 iJ'idha : ?adha J ;
ava I
 42 M iiiat.lmiitllul va 2.3

PRATIHARI
esa dal!i bhaavadl Kamandal - /
UBHE
kiIp. Bhaava<fi? /
PRATIHARi
5 Bhatti-dariam
"'
datthum aada /
"".

UBHE
tado kiIp. vilambladi? /
PRATIHARI

MALATI
(citrarn acchadayati)
LAVANGIKA.
(svagatam) susamahidarp khu /
10 praviSati Kamandakl Avalokita ca)
KAMA DAKl
sadhu sakhe Bhurivaso sadhu I prabbavati nijasya kanyaka:
janasya Mabaraja ity ubhaya:lok)-aviruddbam uttaram upanyastam I
api ca / adya Manmath)-odyana-vrtlantena bhagavato Vidher apy

2.3 Pratihiri : pratihan M ; written twice C dini ABCD · 'G J ; om

EHIKLMNO HaT ch bhaaudi : bhavacfi E: bhaa ai M Kimandai: ka.-
mandakl BJ after Kiimanda,: avaloida a '
2.4 after ubhe: M; sakautukaJ!l 0 kim : kiq'lu£!l K L Rbaavadi :
bhavadi M
2.5 B ?DK.L; 0 dan aql GJ ABCDKLM;
EGHIINO iad- : agada HIKL
2.6 ubbe: lavangika M tado kiI!ttado . 0 vilambiadi : vilam-
baditti I; vilambedi M; v[lambiadi
2.7 Pratihiri: after JM
2.8 ciRam: i BGHJ ; pra E IKL ; om ACDM 0
2.9 svagatam : litmagatam om M - ABIKM 0 ; usamihidar;t
CDHJL; EG khu : kkhu EKO I · java . lost in
C
2.11 (ht) sidhll: om I salhe: om GJK ij)la: l1ija K.L vith erasure E;
janasya M kmyaki : kanya G
2. 12 IoU : loka E uttaram: vacanam KL ; om M
2.13 api ca I : EO Manmatba : madana L bb gaY. 10. ..
tu.: om GJlst apy EIKLMNO ; om ABCDHJco rr
2.14 Act 1I 43

anukiilatam adhigaccham i I baku l>-avan .· citraphalaka -vy at ikar a -

tu karn ap adbhuta:pramodam uJlasayati j 15
itaretar)-anurago hi dara-kannar:n mangalam I gItas c)
ayam artho )ngirasa - a mana' anubandhas
tasyam iti I
A ALOKlTA
esa Maladl j
K AMA OAK!
(ni rvarnya) 20
Nilcimaq:l sarasa:kadal1-garbha: ubhaga
'a'ina i a netr>-otsava-kari /
ava tham apanna madana-dahan>-6ddaha- idhuram
nat? kal at;ll rama ati kampa ati ca /13/!
apl ca
ananaql
dadha ti manobara taratvam agata I
jane paribhraman
lalito vidhir vijayate hi

2.14 aoukiilatim : anllkillam BD after anukulalam: ap HJcorr adhi: a a

ABDJ atra : victtra B pl131 a : phalakas aD ' pnaLa I ''Yatikara: om
N
2.15 sal!lvidbinakal!l AB DHKL OJcorr' ElM tu kam :
kautukam Bband' .ACDO tu ABCDHI OJCOIT ; ca E . om KL I k.am IIPY :
kimapy KLMO' om d uti ABCDIK' GHJLO' adbhuta-
taram M' om E
2.16 itaretan : itarepara b 10re anuriigo: guf.la' L maogalam: (m)angam
H IKJco rr ; (m)angalam B
2.17 >Dgirasi : om ABCDI ,i ABCDEI ; van Bhand A' om GHJ K LM 0
B' ragas) E ; cak.ll.O nubal!lcihas K anubandbas
ACDGIKL; anubandha . ragas E' anuragas H ' nibandhas O'
N
2.18 - rddhlr
"-
: samrddhir
'
l' siddhih. Haf" iKath
2.\9 Avalokiti : prati GHJ (before ,£Si : bhaavadi [ esi : EGHJ -
esasa I
2.20 be/ore nirvar1)ya: KL
3c uddiha : uddiima
d nail : na C ABeDI Subh - . ita
3.1 api ca: om J
4a ABD Har' durbala FlorB96
c bbnunan AB ?D EKM O · bbramal I L ' bbrama.rp.\ I a) GI ' pburat;)l(la) HJ
 44 MalatTmiuiha a 4.l

niyatam anaya priya- am.a gamo )oubhiiyate /

tatha hy
N'lvl-band h >-occh vasanarn) adba ra dor -
svedas, ;akekara I
gatra-stambhal?, stana:mukulayor prakampo,
murchana cetana ca // 51/
(upasarpati)
LAVA' G]KA
calayati)
U BHE

MALATI
Bhaavadi vandami /
KAMA DAKi
5 Mahabhage samThita-phalasya bbuyah j
LAVA ' GIKA.
/ ettha uvavisaduBhaavadi /
SARVAH
(upavisanti)
MALATI
kusala:rp Bhaavad'ie? j

4.1 before .n iyatam: nirupya BD before M; k!13 GHJ

samiig8lmo : sailgamo E
4.2 om N
Sa adbara : ?sitbila C B; 0
b svedas : khedas OJ madbora : mukula KLM Jmarg taram AD Bhand s
A m:ra B ; mugdbam oett
d pulaka : om E nicayo cetanica: [
S. . before upasarpati: ity EGHJO sarpati : C
5.2 calayati: calayitva GHJ KL
5.3 lL
SA! after Miilati: drstva I Bbaavadi: bhaga adi H
5.5 before mahii: vatse I Mabibbige samihi1a.: IM·
amihita : 3.b himata 0 pIutIasya : pbala
KLO bhUyat 0
5.6 after Layangikii: bbaavadi M suribidal!l ettha:. ettba 1isaJ;Ie £
0; edal!l pavillaI!l M ettha .. .. Bbu. di : om MO
ettha GHIJKL; om ABO' In'a: upa. 1
5.7 before iti 1 .. . Bbundie (Jmarg): om J
5.9 Act If 45

KAMA DAKI
kUSalam i a .1
LAVA GIK
(svagatam) patth.avat;Jla kbu esa ka aqa-l?ia4aa sa l (prakasam) 10
garua:ba ha -tthambha-mantba rida
jjeva / ta dini uv ea-karanam
bhavissadi ? /
KA. A DAKi
nanv ayam eva ciraclvara- iruddhah f
LA A GIKA
kadha:ql via? I I5
KA A DAKi
ayi. tvam api najana i?-
Idam Iba Madana , a jaitram astratpL
sahaja :vilasa-nibandhanaIfl sariram I
anucita:vara-sarptpra yoga-socYa:I!l
bba vi; at) iti 116/1
MALATj

LA - A' GIKA
atthi edam - aodana sa padivanna
.." .

5.9 asya EG HIM ' ni as ABCDIKI O · om L

5.10 u ADHIL . kkhu B,EGJKMO' om C esi : om J ka . kavata . 0
C
5.1 I garua : ruaa Gsic' garu 0 : babya H ' bababbara M' iUeg in J
tdwo'bha.- 'mantlwida: mal!ladbaviada1!l tharid : mantharia M
pari GHIKL ' E ' parUna '; vi 0 laggall,ligg '!' : lagl@l!l C
ABDE1K.M O· L' GHJ
5.12 at;larisa'!l GH' ?at;larissaI!l J; li '. BDEl ; e a.
AC] ; jevv,a OHIK.O · la b ifore BhulH'adie : ajja M Bllaavadie :
bhavad"ie E ; bllaa adi B /01 .1 of J b gins here ABCDH'
GHJK O' darum . . LM ea.: u I kin.n. : kalanam LM
5.13 bbarissacti : ?ha. issadi E: bha i t i J. bba issai
5.14 eivara : cT arasya I
5..15 CEIKV . IBDH1M O· Gsic; katham Har cb
5.16 ayii: om E tn api : om KL k.i . : om HJ jinisi : etsi E
6c S8ll!Jprayoga : sampradana M
6.1 v.a icittya . AKO ' icityaI;l CDGHJL ' i imyaf!l! E ' 1 ?8
6.2 atthi : L eclaf!l! C' ABCD O · narenda
 46 M ii/atimiuihava 6.3

Maladi tti saalo jugucchadi /

MALATl
(svagatam) uvaharikada >mhi Raino taderya? /
KAMA DAKI
5 ascaryam: /
katham idam upakrantam ?-a.tha va
kuto /
tv yad uta rPater
suHi-danan mitraqI bhavatu sa hi no andana' iti //7//
MALATl
(svagatam) Ra> -aradhanam. khu tadassa bahumadam. na una
Maladi /
LAVA ' GIKA
jadha Bhaa vadie / al}l}adha tassirp. vare
duddaqlsaq.e adikkanta:jovvan,o tti kiql ti n,a amaccen,a? /

EGHIJKLM . vaani , : vaano

, G1Ist AB DGJ M . ' EHKL '
rodhina [0 before /'fanda1}flSsa: amacceqa HKUmarg ; after andafJllSsa E
GHIKLJcorr .; patta JLst
6.3 Miladi: maladi HIMOJcorr ' maLati Jlst Har ch ; maJadin.J ttj : ti HI .
after saalo : eva G HJ juguccbadi BDGHJ ?L ' jugucchedi Aer' juucchedi E '
juguchadi K ; juucchai M juvuccai ; jugucchai 0
6.4 Mala., ,tade-;ta : om G MiJati : Lava L svagatam : om IKL
CEIKLO; kahaql ABDHl M u a : ua E bari : naral!' M
ABCEHIL ' kida DJKMNO tateq.a HJ
6,5 iScaryam : ascaryam 2 G; ,a scaryamascaryam H
7d bha\'atu: bhava ti a bi DO : sahito I ' sacivo K ; sahivo L; sablla an M NO
ilL iva Iiti 1/
7.1 svagatam: om lL Rij: riiya B ' para I Har CaJ ACDl'
rahanam celt khu:: kkbu BEKO bahum AB DGHJKL;
ElM ; guru 0
7.3 ABCDEI ; evva:I!1 GHJKL- om 0 jadhi CE'G HIJO ' jaha
ABDKL; jaha M before Bhaavadie: : bhaadie
G ; bhagavadJe J. bhaaval be/ore ii1!f1tl0'!l : pia biJ'llpadi m , :
aQanti M; aQavei N ABDM 0 ; GJ
vare: after duddarrsafJe E dud : duBOGHIJ Q'
damsano GH]
7.4 dudd8l!JSan.e" .jovvan.o: al?e AD;
8 ; jovaJ'.lo GH1M '. CBKLO ' juvvaJ'.le I 'tti AeOKL ' om
EG lJMNO; erased H MO ' kinti AHK ' k itti BCDGUL; kirf1 E
viiridal!l': vicanarp. N
7.5 Act 11 47

MALATI
(svagatam) ha hada >mhi sam.U atthid>...;:aI,lattha 5
I
LA A' G1KA
t.a pasida Bhaa vadi parittaadha imado jivida:ma[al?-ado
lava.vi esa duhida.iie a I
KA
DAKl
ayi sarale . kim atra bhaga sakyam? I prabha ati
janayita dai ca! ya ca kila KauSiki Sak.llntala to
Pun1ra cakama i akhyana-vida I

-Vasavadatta ,c a Sruptjay,aya rajfie pitra pradattam atm,a nam Udaya-

Daya prayacchad iti-tad api it
eva /
priyaya suh.rde sacivaya karyad

7.5 sl'8.gatam: atmagatmn B i : om AC before samu a: tada samuva

ABCDGHJiC o · samupa EM' samaw I ' samupavva .. i ABGHJ;
CDEIKMO ' L'
7.7 ti.: om GJ p_ lda: pasida2 GH - prasida2 J ' afier Bhaavadi EGHJ
Bhaavadi: bbaga ab J ' bbaa vadi M Ita Cl ' ttaaha AD ' ttaaru B ;
ttahi EGHJJ(' tahl t, tLaahi _ ,ttasahi . ttaehi 0 before imiido: adha .oJ;
ajja. H imidD: C; eUo M jivida : ji anta ]MO ' jivilliI!l pia :
vIa sabim. : sahlm- GHlLO
7.8ta'i'ri: tavapi GHJ ; 'w ha\ri 10 ; M ; after esii 0. esa: esa M
du'bidi CIKL' duhida ABO- duhldia duhita 0 ; duma M' dukhi<ia
jjeva ABDE ' ne a Cl . je GBJ ' jj,e . K - jjava L ; evva M 0
7.'9 ABDEIO' bbaga .a tya CL . bb.avatya GHIKM after bha-
ga ... "mayava K ABI' pm D' priiyasa C·
EKLM 0; hi GHJ
7.10 before tad OJ; lad H ea : om 0
7.11 afler urvaSiva GHJ' urvaSIca E; urvas'1 after M
A PuriiranlSl I!l : pauravaii C ' pura aii. A' paura aI!l-
purura vaS:aJ:!l ] cakama. it} : cakameit)' LKLO: cacakamataiti M' caurva-
siity al.- y,i nnida .: ,a kbyaoamidam
7..12 ,c a: om G ja naya ; afrer I'iijife Opndattam ABCDI.K·
dattam. LM . praUam 0 ' daltapi E' datta' GH1 itminam : affer Udaya-
niiya 13
7.13 pri.y acdlad : prayaochat{ B after il,: adi EGUJ L O· adica 1 tad
om GJM sihasa.li:aIpam ABeD l O ' siihasabbasam sabasahbasam lL '
sahasikyam GHJ ity: om GJ d .,' an AB DM 0' d .. avyakalyam
El; (eva) K ' GHl' eva L
7.14 'e n: etat GHJ' e ca I' om E after em : 'a KL;
sarvatha El MO
 48 Mlllatlmiidhava 8b

dattv» bhavatu nirvrtiman amatyaJ:t /

durdarsanena ghatatam iyam apy anena
virnala kal» eva // 8//
MALATI
(sasram) ha tada pi mama ti savvadha
/
AVALOKITA
ciraidarp Bhaavadie / bhaI?ami asattha...;.saliro mahabhaa.:.
Mahavo tti /
KAMA DAKI
5 gamyate / vatse anujanThi IDam /
LAVA' GIKA
Qanantikam) sahi Maladi Bhaavam-saa ado ta sa
mahaI?ubhavassa uggamaI.!l jaJ?amo /
MALATI
sahi atthi me kodiihalarp /

8b nirv!"1:i: nirvfttj DI
c IL apy : it C
8.1 sasram : om M before ha rluia: vagatam EKM 0 I
pi: vi M ; om E Dima here ABCDKO ' ajiermama EGHI1LM mama :
maha MN ; om L Har ch e ti L . e anti ABDE ; e acti C; evvaCfl tti H..
yyevatti I.; evvaq:tti GJKMO ' say adlJii : avvaba ABMO ' saha ·
8.2 bboa : bhoga GHIJ ; B; bhoamia K ABCDEI;
GHJKLM 0
8.3 ciraidaf!l ABCD Bhaa\'adie ...sahi Miladi (8.6): Om I
BbaavadJe: bhaavatya H ; bbaga a.tya J "ba : saltha KM 0 before
maha : so GH ; sa J mabibbia ACDEL' mahabhflvo B,; mababhao GHJM
NO
8.4 Mabave: om BM ' mflhao C
8.5 v,a tse: om HJ anu : nu AL' )n u 0 a/ler miim: gamanaya. GH]
8.6 Miladi : om E sampadi A ; sapadi Bbaa,n di : bhaavadie
MNO; before sampaooJ?1 M
8.7 mabinubbivassa ABCDHLM ' mahabhaassa EK ' mabaQubhaassa GI ;
mahflbhagassa J ; mahaQuhaa sa 0 ; mahflQunavassa uggamal!' : uggad-
L ; uggal)aCfl I ABCDHM ' r GHKLO ; J'
janemo N
8.8 after Malarf: apavarya L ; talhaiva KL Har sahi : sakbj H ' piasahi K
attbi : after me M kodiihalam : BR] '
8.9 Aclll 49
LAVA ' GIKA
(prakaSam) ko e 0 Miha 0 nama ja sa Bhaa am saneha-
garuaQI dbaredi . I 10
KAMA DAKl
aprastaviki mahary e. a katha I
LA A . GIKA.
tadba: vi aikkhadu Bhaa am, pasadarp karedu /
KAMA DAK!
sruyatam / a tiidarbh).ftdhipater samasta:dhu rya:
De arato nama am
,a tma-satIrth pit» ai a te janati 15
yas ca ca I api ca
. etamanair
praIq-li.· vdas]tiinaf!l stbanam firjas alanam I

g.9 Lal'angikii.: om G i prakiSam : prakaSakliI!l L before ko: bbaa adi 0 .

bhagavadi M IDadha 0 C' mahanubba 0 M Dama : Damo C'
f:lamfl N ' om E jassa.: joa:I!l G j3.r!l H ' jaaI!l J M . ja sa.k ide E
bhaavadi : bhaga.v adi J after bhaat:adi: e M : e . aJ:!lt neha. ABCDG
HI ; ineba EIKL 0
8.1 0 :g arual!l ABCDEIK.LM 0; HJ: uruam G atnm8am ACDEIK'
GHJ' BLM 0
8.U aprastiriki ABCEHIO' aprastavim ,. ,a prasta I K; aprasmvanlya M' apra-
st.avanaya ; aprasta ..rild DGL a/ ler katha: k.haJu C
8. 12' tadbini El K ; taha i ABDGJ ' tatha. CHL' aha M; taba'vi 0 iikkbadu
ABCD ' aakkhadu E ' ak.khedu G ; acakkbedu HT akkhedu I' acak.khadu KO '
cakkhadu L ;. acak hia M be/or Bhaavadi: me K ' be/ore karedu L
yam ad! L pasidall !l.: ppasadAl!l EL nedu : kall"Ou A ' karedi B
8. 13 Sriiyat.im: om M after asli: lkila E adhl,p ter ABCDEIMO ' .adhipasy.a
narapater GHJL ' ,a dhipasyanaganpater K ' ,a dhipalemarapater am aty a 't.l .:
mantn M oefore samasta: sa G la. ABDGHJ; samagra CEI KL
MNO ; pr3i.Sasta Har dhu.r]ra : om lKM 0 Har
8_14 before p.rakiuJl!a: EGHlJKl..M 0 Har cakra : om 0 be/or,e
DevaralO : sri E after J'am : ha)
8.15 om • .Ima, ABeD . cetl safutbYllil!l:
samartbyat MNO pitai : pi18 le : om J
8. 16 yaS ca ABCD ; yosau ceu i.driaS : yadrSa tadrSaS KL ca A.BeD ·
ceti ,celt
'93 syetamiaair : svetimanair I
b a-akrti ABCDEM ' suk!1a GHUKl 0
50 Mala tfmadha va 9c

ketanaql
katham api tad(al?- sarpbba anti //9//
MALATI
(apavarya) sahi taql khu Bhaavadie savvada
tado /
LAVA · GIKA
sahi kila vijj»-agamo kado tti bbaI?-anti /
KAMA DAKl
Tata udaya-girer iv) aika eva
kalavan /
iha jagati mahotsavasya hetur
nayanavatam udiyaya
LAVA · GIKA
(janantikam) sabi avi I?-ama Mahavo bhave? I
KAMA DAKI
asau api vinirgatya bhavanad
ih) ayata4 sarp.praty avikala:Sarac-candra /

cakaUta : atulita E; atulata L;

d katham api: kathamiva 0 mim : mi n CM bha anti L
9. iapavirya ABCOGJ · ; om EHIKLMO sahl : om ABDO
ede G· edaf!1 I khu ACDGHJJL : kkhu BEKO 8baavame
ABCDMNO ; bhaavadi EGHlJKL bhaga an Har cb ·g ahida: ghahlda
HJcorr ; gahida L ; ABCEGJO ;
KLMN v dii : savvaha M
9.2 tado: tato HJ ; tado L sumaredi : sumaradi GIO: umaraddi L· umariedi
9.3 before sahi: tathaiva E kila : khu GI ; kkhu '? Jcorr afrer kiJa : bbaavadie-
gurusaa ado MO ; bhaavadietitthisa.asado agamo AB D · ahigamo
EMNO; adbigamo GHlJKL · Har ch kado : lUdo HJKMO ·
kif!1 N tti: om ve idodil)o E; saf!1 vedino J ; K;
vedijar:'o L ; vedino Har cb after \.rj ABD · pa C bbat;lanti
ABCD ; mantayati E; mantenti GIJ ' mantra at.e H· man tedi KL; mantaanti
M 0 ; mantrayante Hac Ca) ch · mantrayant i Har Kalh ch
1Oa , _Mibavo bhave? / Kiima: om B ea :
c mabotsava ya : manotsavasya D
10. 1 janantikam: apavarya ahil: om H M an: api before: Miihallo:
sau D Milba.vo: mahao C ; havo · before bhall : 0 CL
ila betob 'ABO ; EGHIJKL · san M ; ·iiSabbih 0 bh anad:
N
b M
 lle Aa /l 51

yad-aloka- thane bbavati puram

ku aLayita--= alii anam iva /fI 111
atra bala: uhrda Makarandena saha idyam aDviksikIm
adhigacchati / sa Madha 0 nama I
MALATI
(sananciaI!l janantikam) sahi La ailgie I
LA A' GIKA.
sahi kudo va ajjia parijadassa uggamo? I
KAMA DA I
aho aI!lprati hi 5
nidra.:mudrarp. madana-kalaha-ccheda-sulabham
a vapt) I
saudhanam alaghu. u ghanatam
asau saqldhya-sailkha--db anir anibbrtaQ khe icarati // 12//
vatse sth! atam /
(ity utti .

c unmida: uddama
11 .1 atra : atraca E ' tatraca ; radatra M Makarandena:
makarandakena ABD : om E in " -im: anvik ilelm ABDE ;
anvildm L
11.2 adbigaccbaH, ABCDH Uaorr ' adhiJe EGIM O?J1 l esa: eva DL
after nflma : ' iti ABC 30
11.3 iinandam : om ABeD umulgie: om KL Har ch om E aJter
suda'!2 : ta GHsic.lmarg ; lUe no · rva a Har ch ' la I ' om ABCDEJIstM
before Lavangikii: kahaql mahaulapp udo so mahiibbiio ; kadhaql maha-
kuJappabba 0 vi 0 maba bbao 0
11.4 a/ler uJI'angikii: jananti am 1 0 befor ahi: tatnai a Har: tae a G;
tadhajje a l &hi : hi I ifier ahi: talbai a r kodo "a : kudo GIL ;
kudo e mahodahml!J : EJ I l; mahoahil!l IG . I
vajjia: ujjia L jida A DHJl 10: ja E: adassa B · jadasa. C; iia a OK '
?iijaa sa 1: jiit a uggamo : i: aamo L after uggamo : tti
EH JKL: atthi M
11. 5 be/or KiimaJldaki : nepalhy . it hadbvanil? H}KLO Kiimandakj : om J
bi : om KL
12a har-m G}j OfT ulabbam : u hagarn If
b a"ipta : upatta M 0 ut ampanam 0
12.1 vatse IhJiyalim ElM 0; od I1kuaf!1 lbi 'amm G ic;
HJK; AB D ' uHi . .nama 1 afler thiyala11l: 1
12,2 ity : om M ACDGIOJ on: E' BH LM 11 t

8
 52 Malatlmiidhava 12.3

MALATI
(apavarya) kadhal!1, uvaharIkada >mhi tader:ta? / par)-
afahanam
. . khu tadassa garuam.. na. uI;la Maladi / (sasram) ha tada
5 tumaI!l pi mama eVaql ti savvadha jidaql
(sanandam) maha:kula':ppabhavo vi so Mahabhao. /
subhanidam
. . piasahie, <kudo va mahodahim.. va.ijia - parijadassa
uggamoT tti / avi q.ama vi pekkhis
LAVA' GIKA.
A valoide ido, edina samkamanena odaramha /

12.3 apavarya: E ..• pekk' er. III 3.4- 7. For con enience
of comparison, a different reading by the same ms at that point is appended here
(italicised in brackets).)
... (N): om CEGHIJKL ; kahaI!l ABDMO
(ILN); om ( e ) un: ua E kada :kida KMO(GH)" kadii ( J ) tidena:
J(H) para CGI Har Cal ch ' raa eeU (C)
]2.4 ( C) : aradhal?aJ:!l COl ; J k'bu : BEKO(C) la·
dassa: after garua,!, ABCDE(L) gIll'U8I!1ABCDEGIKLM ( HJ)' ( L );
bahumadat;l HJ' bahumanam (1); garuaraq:t ( B) ' garu 0 MaLam ( J ):
malati J sisram: om HM (E)
12.5 toms,!, : tuvaf!1 GI pi : vi M ; om ( E ) : om M ; af ter mama GIM) '
J;liima B mama: maha ( M ); om B( E ) Har Cal cb ti rip i; evanti
evatti BCDO]; eV3.I!lttj EHsic ' J' K ( M ) ; (mam aivamiti L'
evvati M saVYadhi.: savvaha ABDO ; savvada H' om M bboa: bboga
GHIJ ( E) HIKLMO
12.6 before siinandam: 'rutva (E) sinand'am ( M ) : om M (ABCD) kadbam .-
CE(GHJ) ; ABCDHIJ(KL)M O' om KL(M) k.ola : ula BEM
( A Cl) ppabbavo ABeD' ppahavo HIJKLO ( E ) ' pabavo ( H ) G ' ppasiido
EMN; sambhavo ( ABCDIKL ) . i ABCDOHUcorr- om EKLM (GH!)' hi
J1st so mahibhio: om ( KL ) so ( ABCDM) : om lM ; ABeD
mabibbao E(D): ABCD' mabanubhao ( £ )
12.7 su: MNO(GHJKmarg ) after bJwIJida'!l: ca ( / ) rue : sahi B
after saMe : lavailgiae (1) kudo ( G); tado G ( IH ) : (E ) '
ahirp G 1; om ( G); dadhi H ajjia: u.uia L pari ( KL ) : pari K L jidassa
(GJ) : adassa BI;jaassa E ; aa sa GKL( lM);jatassa MJI t;jaha a J2nd
12.8 uggamo: udaggamo ( H ) before ui: bodi M 111: om 0 i:
pUl;laravi ( E); ( M ) ; vuJ;lovi M tal!l here ABCDE ( M )' om HJ ' after
av; fJiima GIKLM O ( H ) Har Ca! chpekkh' pekkbe 0 ; pekkhise
(H)
12 .9 Lavangika : avalokita 0 vsloid : bhaa adi I: o m 0 ido : ido KL '
ita itab Har ch' om BE ? _ be ore edinii : ehi GHIJ edit:Ji : d r:ta E :
ABeD ; E ' ' aJ:!lja ar:tel)a G ; f!1ja
HIMNOJmarg Har ch); KIll t odaramha.: odara-
vamha C; osaramha GI.; odaremba L ' a adarabma
12.10 Acrll 53

KAMA DAK!
(apavarya sadhu samprati maya uu.a tha » a1 a Maiat"iql prati 10
laghllkrto tatha hi
Vare )nyasmin pitari icikitsa ca janita
pura:vrtt)-6dgarair api ca kathita karya-pada I I
yad abhijanato 3C ca gUl)3tal,1
prasangad vatsas >ety atha khalu vidheya4 1/13/1
, iti ni. sarve)

"dha ala nama

lId ifi

12. IO apavary8: a all a E; om or sadJm : avalokite t ma) - : before

M alatlm A an
12. 11 B D : diitit nt , ) E: utl\'!'!l )a GH JKL;
laghu ' !1 tatba hi B DEL ;

13a are : jane ABD ah : tu G ' pi L

b udgarair : udghatair 0
c tutyi'l I!l tanmaharm am EHKU l l Har
janalo : janito : j aw B
d kbalu : idhi EH Ut t
13 . . before ni, a Kt. sane: b j or BD
13.2 before dhavala : malatimadha\'e : iti maLatimadha e 0 db nama :
om GHl1M grbo: E
 ACT III

pravisati Buddharak.ita)
BUDDHARAKSIT A
Avaloide 2, avi jaI?-asi kahif!1 Bhaavad1 tti? I
(pravisya)
AVALOKITA
Buddharakkhide pamuddha >si? / ko via kalo BbaavadJe
5 pll?-"avada-velaq1 vajjia /
BUDDHARAKSIT A
huIp.. tumam pUr:Ia patthida )si? /
AVALOKITA
khu Bhaavadle Mahava-saa al!uppesida !
ca Bhaavame tassa KusumaaraI!l

pr. 1 pravi' ati praviSya HJO

pr.2 (2nd) om ABeD ,; _ EG1KL before Al'aloide : alii·
HJM ; parikramyakase KL Anloide: avaloie G] after A\'aloid:
2 AB CD ; repeated O· akiiseido2 GI avi : om l.; a. ifolama K ja,?i j :
jiina i H kahi kaJ!lhi E after kalll·'!1 : gada EHJ Bhaava.di: bhaa-
vadl HO ; bhagavadi ] ; bhaabhadi G
pr.3 before prav;sya: BD
pr.4 after Avalokitii : 2 GI before Buddharakkhid : upa rt a HJKL raKkb[de :
hide D ; rak. ite HJ ; rakk hie M biql C: 'i41 i GO · kim pi I;
M; om E pamuddha : pabbhanba ; pa umaria 0; sumarida M
)si:omGIMO ko :omJ ,·ia : iEK 0:. i L: pi H ar thch;picaHar'
Ca] ch kalo : alo 0 Bbaa.vadie : bhaga adle j
pr. 5 vads: vaa· ; pal)a M; elaf!l H ajjja: ujj ia ABCL;
ujjhia D: vi ajjia M 0 maLadit"!l HJ 0; maJadi.1
anu J ADEKLO ; GHJM ; I
pr.6 after maraJ?e G E· om J toma£!! : ruhaql ';
G1 ADGf; kbu · ; UI:ta ceH kahim : kahi E patthjdisi :
gayaa i G; gadaa i I
pr.7 A"alokitil : om J ; avia hu: kkhu B KO Ma u : madha a G
saya L; Bhand' Bh pp idi: p ida I·
ppeslii GH ; IJ
pr-8ea : a H KLM NO Bbaavadie AB DG HJ . tae K ; om 1t 0 I : om
ABeD ; be/ore Bhaavadie: Har ch b fore Sal!Jk.ara : jadha KL ; jaha I ;yalha
Har ch hara AB DEL ghara K ; pura GHJ ; ura IMO - IJ1b ddha _. :
sambandhi M iaram oamll : aa r £ 0
pr. 9 AcelIf 55

uijar:taarp gadua kujjaa -I}. iuiij a -peranta -ra tu -: tti I

gado a ta ttha Mflha vo / 10
B DDHARAKSITA
kirp. tahiql? I
A ALOKITA
ajja kasaIfa-caiidda i Hi tabiI!1 Bhaa adie saIDa.I11 Malacfi
Sarp.kara-haraql gami sadi -tado e kila addhadi tti
a:hattha-ku urn) -§. uddisia
Lavailgia-.:bidiaI!1 Bhaa. am
jje a Ku 15
tti I pUIfa patthida?

pr.9 ABD; uijar:'aql tt ' ujjaa AB DE: kujj GlJKL 1 ; kunja 0;

kujjaba H ,?lUlljat : uDJa HJ: unja I peranta : pe 'a citt hasu
AB DEKL ; u{ti) GL I: iohehi 0
pr. I Oa: om lilhs' 0: mahao
pr.ll after Budd}rarak,ilo: a loide GH] 10 : a\'aloie 1 kif!l kimnimittarp
o AB D ; kirti El: kiHi kilti G i H i J ; LM before
tahi'!': Maba 0 GHUM BD: tattha EGHI1LM after
(ahi,?l: bhaa aruemah oar:'upP ido E:. ido GHIJ : Mftha 0 K:
Maha o ,:!appe ido L miU\a\'o gadho ; m BCDO
pr.12 before ajja: tattha 1 caiidd -: jaan ai l tahi ABCDG: tahi E;
H ; om UKLM 0 Har h tahil!l .. . tti: om K Bhaa"8.rue
ABeD ; Bh avadie a Bhand's 0; Bhaa adiEGHJL (bbagavaty.1
H ar ch); jananle [M: jaJ;laI.li 0 aha
pr.13 Sa om E bara ABCDL: GH lJ 0 a/rer gamis-
sadi: tti I (ili Har Katb cb)e\'H'!I : e "aIp GJL 10: om Hla : before
e"u,!r ElL obhagga11l 1 ; GJ; ':'H : sauhag-
gaC GH' qadi M : vaddhai : tti: ti GHJ
pr.14 de\'ada ... bhodu tti: om iJ2hana : clradhar;t H: arna J r;aimittarp. :
r;timittaarp K kusumi,'a: Iru umaa K cayaIp DE;
o uddisia : uddi ia GHJ
pr.IS LavaogiiL la aitgiti HJ bidiall!ll ABCDE: GI K LM d itiyaf!l H:
d iliyaf!1. J: dudla 0 1 tal dil!l : GHJ: malad'i 0: maladi j
Bhaavadi : bhaa adi IKL: bbaga\ di H' om 0 : ti M: tal!1 ABCDGJO ; om
EHIKLM jj "11 ABDH : eva El;je EI ;j GJL ;.ije\ K ; e va MO;
om E Kusumiar) : usuma ar H
pr.16 before tlt)a/ssadi E tli. . B DEGHU: om KLMO Har h
afler ui: -
[ado af.13.t'!l bbodu ui EGHJ L om ABCDI(
tado : om armonna
.. ... : annon . ... G da ' saI!ldal'!1 ar:'3I!l E
bbodu EGHJ; hodu K.L : Ilodi 0: bba i di M tU : liJ
turn a J!1 : tuV3.£.!l 1 puo ?B D ' una eH aft r patthi 0: i MO Har
Kath ch; i
 56 M alatlmiidhava pr. I?

BUDDHARAKSIT A
aham khu iieva patthidae piasahle Madaantiae
amantida / ta java Bhaavacfie pada-vandalfaD,l kadua jj;eva
gacchami /
AVALOK]TA
20 tumarp. khu Bbaavadle jassir? tattha ko vuttanto. /
BUDDHARAKSITA
mae khu Bhaavadie tasu tasu vi sambha-kadhasu iriso
tariso tti Maarandassa uvari piasahle arovido parokkh):
/ eso a se avi tal!l ti
AVALOKITA
sadhu Buddharakkhide sadhu /

pr.17 kbu ... vuttanto? / Buddba // (pr . 20 : om and add in marg C khu
ADGHIJLM ; kkhu BEKOCCmarg); ca Har ch B DEL;
GHUM 0; gharaf"!l K jjen B,oEL: y ea ACLje a GHJO :ije a K:
evva M patthidie : pa tthidadamhie E pi ahie Madaanlr e : om
(marg) sabie: sakhie D
pr. 18 amantidi: N ta jav. ABD (tadyavat Har ch)· tado EGHJKLO
C(marg): ?jado I ; ado M ; idoBbuuaJe: bbaga. adIe H; bhaavadi
... mae khu : (om and add in marg) A piida. EGsicHJMNO·
pada K ; om BDILA(marg)C(marg) Har ch jjeu DHsic · yyeva A(mug)C
(marg); iUeg in B ; jevva GJL · om El KM 0
pr.19 after gacchiimi: ti N
pr.20 after Avalokitii: buddharakkhie M ,[ kbu : kkhu BEKO '
api Har Kath ch .; om M Bhaa adie: before niutta E Har Katb ch be/ore
jassi1): sakbi Har Kath cb j tas itp K C(marg) pao paojat?-e
utta Gvuttanto : uttanto BGHJK. ; utanto
pr.21 mae : evaqt BCDA(marg) kbu ACDIL ; kkhu o,EK ;vi GHJO ; om M
ABCDE ;samade cett tisu tisu : tasu GJM ; taUf!1tasw:p.. E
ABCDGJLM ; visambha I ; i rambha H · vlsambba EKO
kadhisu CGHIKL; kahasu ABDM O · kathasu J; E iriso
ABDKLMNO ; ldiso CEGHJ ; ediso I
pr.22 tansa ABDKLMNO ;. tadiso CEGHIJ before Maarandassa: tassa GHl
'Uvari ABCDGHUM ; uari EKLO after sanie: madaantiae
taha MNO parokkbiia;aurio : paroltkboal).u riio HJ; here om M 0
pr. 23 after aIJuriio: tti [KL (iti Har cb) eso I : jaba ,0' ; jaba eVV8.I!l M •
ABCDEI ; om GHJKL se: (jaba)ase 0 H·
J avi : api J ; vi K L GJ t31!l: om. I
O · pekkhea(tti) ABeD ; El · pekkbiimi GHJK..LM
ti GJO ; om I; tti cett
pr.24 ABCDGHIJ· sahu EKLM 0 Bud
sidhu ABCDGHJ; sahu EKLM' O · om I
pr.25 A ct III

BUDDHARAKSIT A
ehi gacchamha /
iti n i. krante)
I/p ra
(pra is a)
KA A DAK[
Tatha maa-namra >pi maya alat y I
nlta katipa sakhi- isrambha- e a 'tarn 1/1 11
sarnprati hi
Vrajati irahe ai ilt pra idati saI?nidhau
rahasi rarnate pfitya. da dadaty anuvartate /
gamana- ama e Lagna nirudh a n irudhya maf!1
apadi 'apa thaiq. prat avrttir!l pran.am a ca yacate / /2//
idaf!1ca tatra sadhi prat · asa-nlbandhanam -
Sakuntal> i[Lhasa- Adan
pra tavitan an aJ>arair /
srutva
ciraya. cinlli- timita - tvam eh 1/3/1
tad adya uttaram upakrami.yami /
(nepathy>-abhimukham) atse ita I
pr.2S Buddharaksit.i : buddharakkhide GJI t · buddha Jcorr' om EM ehi :
taehi I
pr.26 iti : tti B ; ititi J ' om befo re parikram a KLO
0.1 pram)"a ABCDJ ; pra isa.tj kamandakl EKLMO' pravisya kamandald
GHl
le btip_ya : kathikatipa Cl J :i bena : ahobhib EM 0
d vi rambha : i . ra mbha EK
1.1 •• i ' : om K hi: ca GJ ' om ADL(K
2a ABCDO :vaicityaI!l EGHIKLM list - vaici?nty:al!lt Jco·r r
b ABCDEIKLO' vSCCLJ:!l GHJM
c IKLM O' kar;JtbaIagna WE ' BCGHJ nirudhya
oirudhya i 'l!I: GHJ ' 0
d sapathail;t BCG
2.1 iyal!l B tatrs : om M sidhiya . : 1
3a v.i din: om pnsf,i\ifin : prasta ayaty ADCDE ' prastavayan(anya) [
3.1 tad ... om M ' . i .mi ABCDGHUKL' e E;
krami.ye 0
3.2 nepatbya : .n aipatbya 0 aft er abhimukham : avalokya M 0 ita
1; L;
 58 M iilatfm&JJrava 3.3

pravisati Malat) La angika ca)

MALATi
kadham,
. uvaharikada >mbi Raino Uidena? I par)-arabanam. khu
' . '"

5 tadas a ry.a ul?-a Malaru I (sanandam

vi so Mababhao ? I piasahle, 'kudo a
mahodahim vajjia pfuijadas a uggamo.. tti I
LAVA ' GIKA
sahi eso kbu mahura :mahu:!ras>-oHolla :mafijan-ka ala.ry.a :keli-
kala:koila-kolahaD-akuhda: ahaara- caiicarla-
10 niara-valar>-uddalida:dala-karala:campa>-ahi maraJa'
i :kbalida:
it;ta :gamaQ>-ovaQlda : ea- -ara: uhabinduijjanta:.

3.3 pravisya J
3.4 beJoTe svagatam KM 0 . . ., oggamo tti : for Collation
see Act n 12.3-7. sambhavo is read heTe JOT ppabhavo . and two sentences oJ the
passage as given there are omilfed. here reads 'kaha'!l u"aharfkidahmiraillO-
tiidef}cty-adipurvoktame,'Q par.hati'. 0 here reads 'katham ityadi
purvOklaf!J PtI1.hati /'.
Hula ..• here, on 1,1 EM ' om ABCDGHlJKL a i
r;tima, • • here, only HIM; om AB DEGJKL)
3. sail): sahipekkha IKL sakhipa' apa'ya Har cb; om GHJM khu
ADGH[JL . ; kkhu BCEKM : om 0 beJore mahura: 0 ABCD mahura :
mahulaI ;om B mabu:mulrulaC;om 0 ):1a I ol)ollaABDEKLO '
ollola GHIJ; ; adda ola M; ollalla before manjari; maiiju E
kavala CIKL Har cb (but ka\! lana in omm
3.9 kala : kalakalakakala I koH : koila J a ter koila : uLa CE Jag bet-
ween koilaiila dasahaiira: a gap onl, 2 or 3 syJ/s, Ion olihaJi: kalakaLa
kalaba 0; om I(?C) ikulid GHJKO; aulida ABDE' lost in C
sankulidal; akulia L M' auITa ' aha.in :sabaaga G ; haara I
sihara iiqq1rya C: J :
0
3.10 qiar(u) K -.raw>ElM ; vvaiar GILO ; a aiar H' paabbar ABD ;
C3TaJ?U C; om K uddaUda : udda 1ia 0; udalia ; auJida L (aku lita Har
Katb cb) dua: dara EGKUJ t: dali Har Kath cb campai :
campaya 0; campaka HI - dhi GHU ; - D ; abi BEKIl 0
manobaro
. AGHUKLO ; manaharo
. CEM; manoraho
. 80 ; m oorahamrohanani-
. ..

3.11 beJore jaha,!Q: GIJKL: maf!! .la H

pariJ?aha rya
ABDO; CIKM ; i nhuJa E : lsamdhu la
thula HJ' L kkhalida : khalida L. kalid G} : kh Ii . H: kkh li
(ul)ullasida 0
3.12 .. . oval,lida : om HJ ABDEM calana CGIKlO
3.13 Act III 59

0 tumaql pa ri sa
adi Kusumaar) :ujjaI?a-ma.rudo - la pa i mha I
(parikram a pra iSa 15

pra. isati adha

DHA AH
hanta paragata BhagavaH I i am hi mama
Avirbha anti prathamaJ!l p ri a
socchvasam antahkaranam
. . . karoti I
saf!1tapa-dagdbas a
. purastad acira:prabh» e a //4/1
a Malaty api
i\'caryam! utpala...;.d(o adan ) :amal>:endu-
mama muhllf elya /
jatyena candra-ma1)in» e a manobhava ya
sam,dharyatedra amayo mana a
atara Malati f
Jvala ati manobba >-agnirp. mada ati h. da al!l

ABCDKL Har Kaih h: I:!l - G ; san laQa 10 ; ii raqA EM

sambhara Har Cal cb but saiicara in comm m om M 0
ova: opa L- uvya G a BDE 0 . sed a CGHlIn slara: slbara BD ;
seara ubi BDM 0 : udha iEGHUK ; udha L bindoijjan"
ABCDEIKL ' bindujjala GHJ ' bindujataa M' . biDdujojjanta 0
3.13 muddha: om C ; muddhe ] andacanda . iam- (i.e.
J?ii misplaced) E anda : cauda I E)M O· om H idal ... om T
sidala ABCDG' sHaJa HI ' sihala K ' -ala ELM 0 ppbal!lSO ADEGHKL '
BCJMO' pphari 0
3.14 ssaadi ABCDKLO' ssajadi GJ ' ssru;tadi H ' ssaai E ' sajjai M ' sacaI after
ssaadi: pia kusumiar: usumaur M irudo: maruo after la:
ettha N pavisa I . upavisamha D - navisamha. E ' parikkamamo M ; pavi -
sahma 0
3.15 before parikramya : iti KL pr.: upa El ' om C
3.17 (2nd) CILMO · om ABDGHJ ; EK arsam: 'o m M palii:
upa after Bluzgavafi: abbimukhamapadita i mama : mamahi M
4.1 e [L - a K. api : e a Cl
5b muIJur: punar
c jityena: ja4yena L ' artyea M manobhaf a ABeD: mahidharasya cett
d S8l!ldbiryate : sar;tvaryate G . saocaryate HU Har dhru ama 0
5.1 after sQ'!Iprati: hi EGHJ ramaI?Iyatara B after MalatF:
tathiihi BDAcorr
6a jvalayaa: jvalatit i D l'igni f!l:. bha bhagnirp. E
 60 Miilatimadhava 6c

k!1arthayati I
ila a:lali0:ala air
MALAT}
ahi ima Up kujjaa-l!iufije ku a aciI!amha /
MADHAVAH
Prathama :priya.:=:vacana-sarp.· fa a-sphurat.-..:
pulakena amprati ma a ) alambyate /
ghana-raji-niitana -: pa amuk. al)a-
1/7II
LAVA ' GIKA
karemha /
(pu .p)-a aca am nata ata'l?-)
MAoHAVAH
aparimey) :a Scaryam Bhaga I
MALATI
sahi ido vi avara Im a acil)amo? /
KAMA DAKI
5 pari. vajya) ayi irama! i sa1!1jata I tatha hi

c parimrdi.a.: parimalita Har Ca) an : ABCDEK ' aJim ; a.vali GHULMO

d lalita. ABCDGL ; iulita HlJKM O ?E Ha.r itasail': aJ kair G
6. 1 sabi : om M kujjaa ABDI ; kuijal C; Icujja EGHJKLM ; jaI;la ; k.uiija '0
I.'iuiije : L cil.'amha BCDGHJ ' A;
cil;lUmha EMO; K; ci'?l?amma L ;
7apratbama: prathamal!l BK priyi : priyapriya S8.J:!1stava GHJ
b avalambyate ABCDEM ; vidambyate GHIJKLO
c riji: jaLa C niitaoa : n uta B ' nartana vayas
EIMO ' samucchvasat ABCDGHJKL '
d EIKLMO ; kar:ta ABCD; prati GHJ ; om baddh : buddha L
ACDEGHIJ ; kugmalaBKL 0
7.1 sahi : om KL Har cb evam. : evvam. GJLM 0 karemha: karubma. H·
Icarobma J; karemma L' karahma M
7.2 before iti E' ubhe a apacayaI'!1 · : apacaY3f!1 0
7.3 Midbaval:J : om I before apar; : abo BD - sadbu
bhavatyah C
7.4 Malafi: lava ABCD sahi ABDEMO ; om CGHIJKLM Har ch ido vi:
ido ido C; ido 2 ABO' ido E ; idopi H a uassi AB DH ; ava GJ'
lKL (anya min Ha r ch) if!!. M ; a arllil!l 0'. om E na :
apa N ABCD; cir:tamha EGHJ . cit:'omha I ; K;
MO after cilJamo: idoido 0
7.5 ayi: api GH Har Kath . om 0 rirams: cirama GJ ; . irama irnma
8a ACE III 61

Skhalayatiacan[mi angam
janayati mukha :candr)-odbhasinab. eda-bindun I
mukula ati ca netr'e - sarvatha ubhru lcheda
tvayi vila ati tul allabh>-alokanena 1/8/1
MALATl
(lajja te)
LA A' G1KA
ohanam Bhaa adie 3t!lattan,l /
ADHA AH
hrda I
KAMA DAKI
tad asyatam I ki£!l cid akh atu-=kama ) mi I
SARVAH
(upavisanti 5
KA A DAK]
(Malatyas cibukam unnama a)' fl?1u vicitram subbage I
MALATI
avahida )mhi I
KA A IDAKI
asti ta ad ekada pra katbita e a maya MadlIa ):

virama2E ABCD: jata EIKl o · om. GHJ ta.t ha hi BDL ?C '

om AEIKM 0 ; GH] ' lost in C
8a vacaniai ABCD .· vacanamle cett snl l : fat), ABBIM O · . af!1srayaty
CEGHJKL
b udl)bisinat:- : GHJI' udbhasi E
d vilasati : vasa'tihi M tuJy-.. . I: nityal:!l. H
8.1 O · salajjaI!JI MID
8.2 lavailgiki. (lmarg): om J . :1 _. • • • _ am daki: om] ·sohana :
sobhanal!ll (written over _omething) D aft.er · khu M Bba -
vadie a Rar cb. H
8.3 b.rday.a B
8.4 tad: iha C ; , .. om ABD aft er k i1!lcid: akhyeyaql GHUKMO
ikbyitu: a.bhidbatu E
8. 5 om GBH
8.6 cibukam: cubukam Sf .• • anhidi)m . : om H 'tTicitram: citram
BDLMN hum : om E
8.7 before avahitlil : bhaa di B
8.8 etadi : HJl t pnsa ' gab. : pmsangat L Im ayi : before kum[ual}
GH] ; om BIKL Mi yjl miidhaoab GH'
 62 M iilatimiidha va 8.9

kumaro, yas tvam iva mamaklna ya manaso

lO bandhanam J
LAVA ' GIKA.
sumaramo J
KAMA DAKl
sa khalu a at durmanaya-
paravan iva sarIr>-6patapena /
Yad indclv praI).ayini jane va na bhajate
vyanakty tad ayam atidhlro >pi vi .amam /
api c>
vahati ca bhavati //9//
LAVA ' GIKA
evaql pt ta sim avasare Bhaa adim tuvadiantie A aloidae
asi /
KAMA DAKI
yavad Malaty ev asya manmatb>-6nmatha-hetur iti !
mam) api sa eva /
Anubhavam vadan>:endur upagaman
niyatam yad asya mahatmana4 /

8.9 after kumilro: nama KL mimakinasya : mamaklna GH ; mamaklya ya MO

8.10 'baodhaoaDI ABCDKLO ; nibandhanarpEGHIlM
8.11 sumarimo : sumanasoparamal?- I
8. 12 Kimandaki : om J divasit : om M
8.13 upatipeoa : santapena I after r{ipena : tathahj EL
9b gahanam E
c madhuram : vadhuram B
d HUO
9.1 pi L e ABDE ' etaf!1]' GHJKLMNO; etad
Har ch pi : vi M Bbaavadi I!I : bhaa vadi t!l CHJO ' bbaavadi G ; bbaava.-
hin J tuvaraaofie ABGO ; tuvarayanlie D .' tllara antie C; tuvaravenfie E;
tuvaraantie HJM . tuvarpra aantie I' turaaI!ltle KL
9.2 udidul!l : udiritaD.l HJ ; M isil: aSl . ah. M
after {is;: jadhaasatthasariromahuotti GHJ L 0
jadbi GHJO' jaba M ; om L asattba HJL ' assa.ttha GM 0
Mihavo : madhavo HJ
9.3 after y ii vad: 1; aham afler la. an K.L · ta.vadasya 1 asya:
here om ] unmitha ABCDEKL ; sanmpa OHJ - unmada IM 0
9.4 before mama: tavan after nuzmiipi: hi GHJ a/ler niscayah : kutah
lOa aDubbaval!1 : anugamaf!l H - ..
b eva BEL ; e. A
c Act III 63

ksubhitam
,
utkalika-taralam manah "

paya iva stimitasya

MADHAVAH
aho aho / atha
va
sahajas ca bodhaQ.
pragalbhyam abb ca. val).i /
pratibhana aU am -
ete gUI?-3.l) kriyasu 1111.//
KAMA DAKi
yatas ten a Jlvitad udvijamanena apt na kim cm na
kriyate / asau hi
Dhatte mukulini baJa:cute
marge gatraI!l va ob
dava-preml?'a sarasa
tarn yan m yati bah uSoIDrtya e candra-padan 11 12//
MADHAVAH
anya ev) ayam katha-prakaro IJhagavatya
subhasita I
MALATI
(svagatam) dukkararn, karediJ
c tarn otkaliki ... ( 12.25) : folio 18 of B is lost utkaliki:
utkalita. C
d M
10.1 ACDGHJO ' ElKLM Har before ma/umvii: mayi N
mualbi ; mahalya CL arohaQe H; aropeQa yatnaa:a :
OH' buddhiJ:? Latha ' i I Amarg): tatharu DE ' om A
1la CKLM OAcorr' DE ?AIst · GHIJ
b gu-:ai: J
c inurodbal:l: anurodha M ; EG ?Alst · analarodha
d bbwvaUvam: EL' bbanata yam a/ler hhimal'atlvam: ca' 0
dugbil:l : ACD Jag
11 .1 yatas APEILMNO . tatas GHJ ' atas K k:i cia Da: na I ; om GHJ
11.2 asau hI : tathiibi MNO
12a ACDI; raJ?at EGHIKL 0
c diva ACDEH [MO' daha G J K L " ini : C pattramitra (Jmarg) ;
padmapattra GIl st iatuiyas : iintarlyas M ' antarlya
12.1 MidUn ...... Bbagavatyi .: om M 0 ayam ACDEGHU ' om KLM 0
Bbapv.tyil,l ; L .. . ACD; om cett
L2.3 before dukkara'!' : adi EK.LO ' ati GHJ ' evvaf!l M ; eV8J!l dukkaral?J :
 64 Malatzmadhava 12.4

KAMA DAKI
tad evatp. - kadacid apy atr)
5 apari - :purvas - tapasVi, yato )dhuna sakyam anena maranam
apy anubhavitum /
MALATI
Uanantikam) sahi karaJ?ado tassa savva:lo>-alaqIkara:
bhfida...;.suhaga:jammalahassa kir¥ piasankantie Bhaavadie bhldavida
>mhi / ta d3.J?i ettha paq.ivajjissarp. ? /
MADHAVAH
10 anukampito )smi /
LAVANG1KA
BhaavadI evam:vadinl tti aikkhjadi / amhanam pI

GHJ; dukkha raJ!l 0 before kar,edi: sa GHJ karedi : karei N

after karedi: so M

12.4 I; E prakftya: om AD kmnaraJ.t: om ADM apy

atra I; anyatra EGHJLN ; apyanyatra KMO ; anyatrapy ACD
12 .5 E after lapasvl:
kumarastapyataiti M yato: tato E .; tadA
• om H L
12.6 apy: om L
12.7 sahi: piasabi GHJ ; om KM ataJ?o H ; mama E kiraniido
EGHJKLNO ; ACD ; 1.; M tassa: om MO
savva : sarva H ; macca 10 ; mai'ija loa : loka
L ; fl lanikarat:la N
12.8 bbiidasuhagajammalIlhassa: bhiidassa EKLM 0 bbiida ACDI · bhlidassa
OHJ sohaga GHJ ; suha AD; om Cl. jamma : jjamma. G· mma J
lihassa AOI ; Iflbhassa C; lliessapi G ; lli.hassapi HJ pi : ki:qlvi MN;
ki£!lpiat:latthal:!l AD ; kampisii.haS3I!'l E ; kamapyanartham. Har cb iisaDlantie
GHJKLO; t:llvedaaotle ADE (nivedayantya Rar ch) · asaitkaoti elM
Bhaavadie: om CILMNO
bhldiividiJ >mhi ACDEGHJ.; bhtdaviamhi lK ; bh'i:,idaammi l ;.
M ; bhudaviamhi . bhidavi O ' bM .ita mi Har ch
12.9 after >mhi: N ta : IM . GHJO
ADEI?C ; K· dan'il!t L ; om GHIM 0 ettba: ittba I ; om
ALMNO vaiiissaf!l: vajissal'!l H ; vajjisaql 0 1· vajjasadi M ; vajji sadi N
after vajjissa'!l:. tti MNO
12. 10 D .; l ACDElM O ' -am. GHJKL after
kampito )asmi: bhag· vatya , Bhand' ACONBh
12.1 I after Lavangikii : pralcisam I Bha.8 vadi: bhaa adi K
evvaf11 M ; el'!l N; jevvaJ:!l 0 0 t1i: kiJ:!l N before
.aikkhradi:J:?aI!l E iikkliiadi AD· a.i kkhja:ii C· aakkhla.di. EO · acakkhiadi
GHJL ; akkhiadi IK; acakkiadi M ; aakkhiadi pi : vi M ; om G ajler
pi: piasahi E CGJKV 1
 12.13 Act III 65

tassa jjeva
bahuso anu bhiida :damsana bhavia ra vi-ki ran)-a.liddha :muddha:
a- oba-vibhavid> ,eaJ?a-)hiaara:
ramar;tlfl vi dummedi - J?> abhir;tandadi kelikaHio 15
kamalaan ta: kanta: hattha diase gamedi /
avi a viasia:.si):aravinda-maa.randa-nisanda-sundarena dara.:dalida:
kunda; bha
peranta-marudel!a uttammadi /
ca jatUi-diase 20
via Karnassa
12.12 asa Grace i : rattha HL muh : om tassa :
maral)asassa . iUeg in A jj a ADEL ' yyeva C ; eva r· jaivva GJ ' jevva H '
evva MN ; jjevva KO
12.13 baboso : om AD al,lu: anu GJ'qu K bbii.d a: ho ,
l)af!1 HI; KL ,i1 : bbaviatp A ral'i: rai EHK lk.irall,la:
ara M 0 iliddha ADlJ . a ali9-9-ha E ' GKL; H' M'
0 ; lost in C
12.1 4 w;aalil,ll ACD ; kamalini GJ ' cetl ana"a.: avayava GHIJ ' avaa D'
aavaava N vibbi"idi ADiEHKLO ;.· ibavida C]· bbavida G ; bha idi\ ida J'
vihavia M' via afterGIJanga: E' Ta K "aara AD ' adhiaclara
GJ ; dhiadara KL' adhiaarabhi C ; E ' dbikaara H' Cl?- a ea 10;
vaiara M ; (,?3.vla ' adhika Harch
12.1 5 ramar,tijja n( 0 ri: a ler paria,!Q'!I K; om jal).atp
HL dummedii ACDEKL ' dOmeD. Har; duma edi GHJ' dlinedi. r MO;
donei : nabh' Gl . Ifahi E . sdi : nandadi GJ ' H.
I?-anda B ' kel.i.kalio CE' kalaJilao GHIKL ' ka1ililao IMO
(kalakrida Har cb); kalika1calao D ' kalakoilalruladam .
12.16 before ,a la D ; kilaDla ar ant A'C DKL . kilimmanta E'
kum ilayatta Har; kamaIayaota GJ ; amalayaua Har . .1.' roila anta H' ma"
laanta 1 (maHlyat Har cb)' milaanta 0 kanl-a ACDE ; OlD GHIJKL 0
before palhattha : paUava 0 palbattha ACD'?EGUK; paryattba H' palLattha
LMO ; payyattba ,di ACDI' diahaf!l EHJ ; G' diasaJ!l KL '
diahai M (di asani H ar h)' di . - 0 gamed.i : gam i
12.17 a: ca H riasiasii' ia idasia C- ia ia D ' v'a icla E ' i ia GIJKMO '
vikasia H ' jviasia L: . viasiiiral'uuun iipli ,,' in marg 0 C maaNloda: befor
biruJu E : I?-isandal?i D' J?i nda M' dara: data G 11 1 t;
om EHIOJcorr dali : dalia 0
12. 18 lumcla: kumuda kundJuniaocb : ku umainda ] mahu: om 1
doba : saudaha D "a . >: bhaaI) E' bbavan I HJ
12.19 D' marudeq.a i E' uttammadi: uttamedi
G; ut1amadi HI; uttammai uttamoliadi 0
12.20 jal!l ca. ACDGHlJ' E' n ; if ; ca 0
jas i.q:J K jalti:. om O ' jana G i L diase A DEGHU' diahe
KLMO ; iahe l. pa : I' vab udaa: mahiisa abbUde
Gsic' mabusa abbfile J A. . m busa. aa D .' mabusava
HILO; mahusavamaha K ADGJK.L . . om CEHl .0
12.21 ... . a: pa9-iaI?-J?3 H' adianna GJ ' pavutla K rif . ADGLM 0;

.I.
 66 Miilatlmadhava 12.22

tassa al?-llru):3I?Ura)-3q.ubandha-

ullasida
25 tthambha-manthar):avaava-paqliagga: ea ':'pulaa 'ukkampa-sundaram
paroppar)-a samasadidatpt-"
tado pahudi avise a:dusaha: viarn bhaman)'uddama:darunam dasa·
ar:tubhavantI viva
bala :kamalir:t1 parnmaadi /

ruassa CEK; riipassa HJ; ruaruvassa afler rUl"QS a: bhaa ado HIKLMO
(bhagavataJ? Har ch)" assabhaa ado GJ Kam : kamade a HI; mam-
maissa M; maal)a sa 0 ; om ia here CD; ifter Kiimas a EGlJKLMO
Har ch; om HN kama: learna sa El (" I?ia KL; om CD kin: ,ara L;
om CEHIMO arif}o KL
12.22 before fassa: bhaapadomammahassa ia ,after lassa: se a 0 abbiriimam
aouriia: om M 0
"
ibbi : abi AD "
anorii: om K
12.23 mabagghavida ACIK " mahaggha D; mabaggbIkida EGHJLMO; mabaggbatida
jovnoa: J HI viapvada: paqipada. GHJ;
M;
12.24 jiira ida CDIKAl t Har; duravida E; Icupita AcorrCmarg; kbedita GHJ;
khijjarpda L; jaijarida M; calida ; santappa 0 tilta: dbanta tu arant :
tuaranta tavaraota Hac v.I.; (citt)udbharanta 0; a atarat Har cb ko-
diihalal!1: koduhallam I; koduhal(oll) • (ull) 0; koLah I uH) before
ullasida: sam KL Har cb aiih ACDK ; jjasa IL- sajasasa E- saddhasa.
GH ; saddbasa JM; saddhasa£!l 0
12.25 tthambha :ttha I avaava :ava avaHLavaya oG;avaapa I gga:lagna
D sea : seda ACD afler sea: bindu M pulaa _ " . om and add
in marg J polaa " : 0; pulaa H; pula 0) I; pulak(o J(marg ok ampa :
kampa M om M 0 (with sandhi)
12.26 HIM 0; illeg in J{marg) i : '?piasabl J marg
GHJ aft piasahie EGHI JKL Harch paroppara ACDK'
parappara EGHIJLMi ; pampphara 0 - : ACD ;
101]aa E iisiididaJ:!1 : iiditaI!l H ; M
12.27 pahudi : ppabudi KM diisaha : du saha ] after dUsaha: aasa EKmarg;
"iidiibasa L ; maal].a MO ; . om ACDGHUKI t viambb in)
ACGHJL ; DE ; [KM 0 : before
diirul}a1"(l : deaadaha E : deha L with (folio 19 of B begins
daruna HJ
12.28 vipiikaq.t GHJ 81;1u :allu 1: acdi. G . 2vanfi: havanfi EK ;
bonti M 0 mubutta ABDGJ "mubuttametta CEH[KL; mubuttaI!t O ' om
M sal!lpatta : sapanna G H .. do ABCDEL; cando
GHJKM O ; dandoI vivaABD;viaCIKM O,l;via
vva(after E,L
12-:29 kamalini GU ' kumad iJ?i D ; ia . ABCDEL;
parimaadi GJ; parimalaadi H' pavvaadi 10' pa-mmaad i K ; parimilaadi M;
milaadi
 12_30 Act 111 67

tadha vi a 30
samagama I!ibbhara: saW >-asara-siccamfu?-a vva moo U;U sidalaadi tti
jal!ami / jel)a papphUIanta
vanti-kanti-savisesa:sohidam nirantar>:ullasida...;pulaa:pamhala:
lsi:visama-
l!ipphanda;manda:tara}-uttaI?-3;ma iJ?a r
aviraD :canda;leha-
uvvahanti via44ha:sahaan-
a bhodi /
ca / uddama
12.30 tadhivi EGU' taha i ABDHKL; tathavi C; taha i M . taha 0 a: om
EKLM etta : meta G' meUAI!l 0 AClKLO' illihida
DEHM ; GJ- faded in n _'vrotta ABE; C; D'
I?Unaaanta (sic) GJ; I LM 0 (nirmayat Har ch)' K; om R le
vallaha: before 7)immiianta I
12.31 samigama: samaama HM 0; samagam3.rambha GJK a: nihara B
""a: ABCDI' EGHIKM' L 0 bejore medifJi· gimha-
vasana E medin1 ACDI ' mediniwa GHJ' meilli Kl:. O?iB' medinevva £.
mediI)lvia M ',daliadi GUlO; sialaadi ABCDEKM . siatadi H '
12.32 pphuranta ABCDEKL Q. pphurida GHUM before kanta
KL dasana H IICchalta: ujjalanta M ; ucchalia 0; ucchalad
HL mottii: mortaka H - muttia KO; mattia L', mottia
12.33 vanti ABDE; (a)vaIi GRIll Har ch; panti M 0- om] ti: kantikanti
A; kinti M sobid. : J; sohiaIp . sobid.a 0 . llasida: oUa ida [.
ullasia M pamhala : B
12.34 before kavola: kanta GJ' kanta KL ka 0" :. kapota J . Gola C a l!1 ta-
da: sandada MO; santata H I't:b u . : Havaa H; bindUI!ll- K;
M; thava " Mar; 0 !si: isa H; lSi L visama ABCDO ;
visasama J; visasama
- ; visima M- viasiam . '
isama K: . ia EGHJL
1235 AB DEO; I; GHJM - Qisanda t· K
manda: mandara ; om H ti.ra u ABeD' t.ari 1 - tar EKLO tar
(ottana) Har cb)' GI' tarak(o) HJcorr atti: om
ma D; 1 after mtJSi.r!o: maJ!lsala 0 aUliaobl: mu-
kulaanla H; muulaanta lM - gholaanta . ppUal!l: M
12.36 BD ; ucchaJida C: I{. ?ukriara G sea: om
seda C after bindu: sandc,hasuha BD ' :undala G
ABCD 0; lall$ GHJKl.· M; [- illeg in E 'nItta B DE:
pana A; paWlrya GHL Qa\ 10 na\'a Har b): K: om 1.
cauda: anda I; Kl
12.37 IDSJ?a EM muddh : afre.r muha BCD . om E _.dariam- andam
GJ onahanti: uvahanu G . abanfi E viaddha L- i. D;
viadha
- H?J: vidaddha .. I
12.38 citta: sattha E saI!LS3)'d.a GHJ lloaW'a Cl - kumar'i AB
korama E; kumara komari GJK.L; kaumara H ': hodi ILMO:hoi
12.39 ca: a E asi maUha : i iavyasikara L - : mauha M' maauha

9
 68 M ii/a tlmiidhava 12 ..40

40 candamani-hara-dharinl paura:kappfira-pura-savi esa -: si ira:candana-::

rasa -cchad»-asara -niar'a-danturida :.baia:- tta- am vahan): .
adi :va tuvaranta :sahaarl-sattha-viraid );a val?i:da
jaladda-saal?le manda U.£?Ifidda raal!lo gamedi J pi uvaladdha..,;,
ryidda: suha a pajjharida
45 tharatharaanta:plvar) :oru-mUla-vasa-vi
ukkhubbhaota :hia)-antar)-uttUliga:t;llsasa-vi am):usa anla :pam:hala:

niurumba
. AEILMO ; niarumba
. BD.; .niurubba
. C; niu
. ramba
. K ; niara . Gl ; niarani.
' "
-
kuramba H ; t:\uuruba N cumbia M paiitta : pasutta KM
01: ni ; M
12.40 paiira : paiida N kappiira: kapura GH1 ; J?ikappura D pun ABCDEH1'
om GJKLMNO
12.41 H; cchaa A asa.-a: H before ,}iara: slara 0 din-
turida : dantuvida H ;' om M ; danturia kadafi : kaan B vatta ABCDEK '
patta GHIJM ; L; dala 0 before sarr l'iihalJ1l : MO'
japada N
12.42 vivira: vvavara M tuvaraota: t uranta H sattha: sahattba CD; sattha I ;
sat.ta H an ABCDHI .; ova EKLM 0 (o pa Har cb); ucca G ' uccha J
!".li ta H; N before kamaliT}l: rota H daLa . .. jadhasatfie j1 i ( 15.15 :
fo lio 14 of A is tom and only the fir t half of each line is preserved.
12.43 jaJaddi CEGHJLMNO; jaladdha I; jaladde K ; om ABD om IM . 0 ;
after Ul}l}iddlI C manu ADD ; om cett ul)l)iddadae EK;
H; I; aunnldryel?a Har ch; al?idda GJ afler ulJIJiddii : evva
MNO ' (saalfie C) raal,llo: rajanlo [. L' raal?io gamed]: gamayedi
I; gamavedi K ; gamei N CEIJL; G ; kabarp ABDHKM 0
pi ABCDGIJO ; via E ; vi HKLM Ilva: ua E; upa IL Laddha : ladda H
12.44 suba: om MO a ABCDM' a . ea GHITKL Har; seda E; om 0 psj-
jharida CEKL; pajjharia A ; pajjarida I; dhajjba ri B; pappburida GHJ ' pak-
khalia M ; pakkharia . 0; illeg in D ; pajjhara Har pia
AC ?DEGHJMN ; ccalal?a. B; pada IKLO BCDEHKLMO;
10 t in A; uttaruanta G; ovvaranta l ' odvanta Har ch; uvvaminta J . ulLa ia
12.45 tbaratbaraaota BDGHILN; tharatharaamaQ3 J; tharaharaanta CEK: thara-
harayanta Har ; tharatharaanta M ; dbaradharnanta 0 mii1a : mala I asa
IK ; vasa BCD (vaSa Har cb)' lost in A' om EL; va l)a GJ ' par "va H ' passa M;
pasa 0 Har "isal!1vadHla : i9hilia Rar Cal adida CEl L ; adida BOO;
lost in A ; vadi GHJ' K ; vadia M ; vadita Harch B DEGJKLM;
nlvi H ; f;llvl 10; 10 t in A;
12.46 ukkhubbhaota ... b80dha-:ti : om L uJtkhubbbanta AO: ukkhubhaI!lta C ;
ukkhuqanta D ; ?ukkbaq:anta B ; ukkhumbhal1ta E ; urakumbhanta G ; utthadii-
halia H' ukkat:\qa I ; H arch; ?uralcubbha J .
KM(om L); ukkhubhianta biaantar: hiaaantar 1 Uttung8 AB ; uttaranga
GH1KMO Har ; uttanga C?DE ; utt.a rarigi I I}issasa M \ 1" am):

vi amasam GK ; sam J ; vasasam I Har ch - asanta ACDKM O ' ulla anta

EG HJ ; ?ucchasa I ; faded in B after Usasanta : pu laa M 0 pamhal: pam-
mala J
12.47 69
anta:bhua jhatti
paqiboha-vela- i ajjid ): vvigga ada-
saanijja-samjada sa ambhama :sahi:aJ?-a-paatta-
:muccha ::'v iccb ea -samaa - ida :diba: sasa-.:sesajivida 50
kimkadavva-IDuq.ha - dae pa4ham ):6 auhida :ryia :ji
devva -duvvila id }·o alambha ambarisaq1
karedi I
la pekkha Bhaa adi imesu da a la
paripelavesu angesu darul}-am iambhida sa kecciram ku asana- 55

12.47 beJorepaohar >: paolaA-patta ; 10 tinB but probably no room) o'n ci :opari
GHJ BC DKO ' I)ihittada GJ ; Hi ' I'
M ' lo l in A ' Har ch ' ,uanta : H: om BeD bbua:
blmja M I di : laa CEGHI ar,e ndal)apa4ivinciha
a M E
12.48 BDEGHJ; paqibuddbadi I: paqioha C: 10 t in A ' paqibodha IKlM
i I pa41boha 0 visajid HJ : . jji M 0 m igga
BCDJ ; uvveggaE ;uvvlt:tt:taGHK;u\ .v\; l:odivggaL'apangaM;a nga 0;
lost in A il:lhid : D: H; M: pata Har cb , om
GIJOK I t ]: G : nir.ijiita Har cb
] 2.49 EGHJ all r J ends miLanta:
milarpda G; m'ila nta veal)- ABeD bahidaarp
jal)a HM: om 10 Har ch putts : paartt:ta C ; pauUi O ' apatta E ;
payatta G
12.50 paq.,pal'!l)a J : om H ar cb mu chi : muddhavea 'ricdlea
BEGHIK 0 ; lccheda CDL: vi he 'da : 10 t in A sal!lgard : sangali I:
gatia 0: saq:I ida M:
12. 51kidavva: kaa E K ; kada vva H : kada da M
HI ; miiqharp M O p ):. qbuma E: pu"bama 1 ,6 vatthida BD '
opatthida Ccorr; (a) pauhida EGILCl t : a paHhida H: (a tthida K: 10 t in A ;
(a)patthia M; Ca ppaththta : (a 0 ; a pnirthita Har ch p,;da :
jivia M . G
12.52 duvviJasid) : du ilasid Bl ' du '1 i 0 Pi in : amhir· m:
amharisa Gl; ammari J:!l H', sahl .0 ' hi ,
12.53 H: karedi : karodi G; karei
12.54 tit: om 0 Bhaa adi: pekkhadubhaa adi AEGHIKL (pre
bbagavat'i Har ch)' i.m : im uI!l E' imesuvi
N lli laaJ?l?-a JK G ; bbii riigba B
12.55 pari: pa<;ti L pela CDE'G ' pela I, pesalesu BM . ela esu HKLO·
lost in A angesu : El AB. DHO Har cb; daJUJ?8 cett
iambhidassa G JLO' iarp . b b ida H: viamb id ABCDEK ;
M ; viambhia sa _ettira . ACDEMO Har; ke?cir:a.J:!l B ; kiyaccira1'!l G:
HIK ; kiacciraI!l L ' ka lraI!l after kecciraJ?1: tassa KL (tasya
Har cb) a EH
 70 Mala.tfm.adh:a'va 12.56

d!a vammahassa, kadhatp. va edair!t ramal?a-kelika.laha-kov>-avaraa-

paIla vida: Kerali::ka vola :komal> :uvveUa: him ba:canda::candim ».-
uddima vibhavari-muhail!l ime a ullasida:
duddha::rasi::pura :dha vaD -; :gaaJ?>-::ailgana
60 parimalida -: -baha]a >-upplla- .
-: :malaa:-marud >-uddhiimavida-= disa-=muha
bbavissanti piasahie tti /
KA.MANDAKI
nanu Lavangike-
Yadi >nuraga-bandhah.
sphu!am etad dill I
12.56 vammabassa EM; vamhahassa ABcn· mammahassa HlKL O · mamiibassa G
after vammahassa: havissadi K· bha\'issadi L kab3J:!l ABDM .0
va BeD; lost in A; vii Bhand' D; ,a EGK ; ca HILMO Bar ch BCD.;
lost in A; imiii:ql ceU kovova: kova BD; rUvova H
12.57 paUarida : paUavia MNO kerali: klrarrE UV1IeUa BDKO; 10 t in A; uvvela
CM; uvvejjala ?nta E; avv.ela G- ovvala 1·' od.velad H; od . eUad Har cb; uvvellanta
LN bimba BCD; lost mA; vimalacetl Icanda: om HM candimuddima
CDE; lost in A; cand.iuddama 8'0; candioddama GLM . candikoddama HI·
candia K (candrika Har cb)
12.58 dalida: dalia M D; timir,a valani Rar
om E vibbivari vihavarii EKM '0 afler gamedi gamei I
12.59 duddha : dugdba H rasi ABCDIKLO· sindbu EH· dbara GM ujjala:
ajjala GL ; H joQha D ; .ijol?-ba B,] after jO'Jhii :jala M pa:
ppa KN kkhilida: kkbahda ]; klbalia M 0 BCEL:
maaI?angat;la GH; [0 - KM ; nabhooga-
nab H3r ch ; lost in A
12.60 milida KO; milia K· ; 0 baD-
la: um B; om O· baiilamuuIa H; bauli M pasaranta H- riim-
maranta I; K; 0 parimaD: parimall G up-
pita ABeD; upplqa EMN; apphala [- uggara GK.L (odgara Har cb); upphaJa
H; '0 after uppUa : saa]a 0
12.6] M 0 aJter SQI?1 aJa,!a: masil}'3 GHKLMI ; masana
I; Har ch EKLM -
ABeD; maJ:!lsaJayamaJ?a G after matrlsalaanla: ma '0 uddbiiIQivida
ABCEG: uddbumayida HM; uddhumavida IL· a,cthiima ida K· uddhovia
uddhusaria 0; illeg in D ; iidlunata Har cb before disii: dasa HIM 0; daba
EKL; daSa Har cb disi: dihii L
12.62 vasanta: om MNO be/ore piasahie M G
pariJ?ama KLM ' 0 Har eaI cb before aTJartha : Qa
I kiriI.Jo:aril?-o M bha . ti: K; bba isanti I-
honti MNOtti: om GM 0
12_63 nanu BCDGI; vatse 0; om EHKLM I; 10 t in A La aiigike: om GM
Bc Act III 71

-iti nanditam apy a astha a)a

hrdayarp. vidaryate me /l131J
ADHA AH
sthane hr1-1a 0 Bhaga at I aho .-
.
Prakrti-lalitam etat saukumar )- :aika :sa
. mm
vapur ayam api sat
cahta:malaya: ·a.V-6ddhfita...;.cuta=pra
katham ayam api kaJaS caru:candr}:a - atamsah/l14//
. .
LA A 'GlK
ca bhodu Bb.aavadi,e f taJ:p. ca Mahava-
pa4icchandaa-sru;tahaaI!l cittapllalaal!l- alat tan)
apanlya) esa vi tasa jje a sa:hattha-viraida tti kanthl-a alambida
baiila -m8Ja jividaJ:!1 piasabJe tti I

AoH AH
5
Jitam iha bhu ane tvaya ad asya4

I3c nanditum I i . : syaQ. • C · ad db[) G' as M

d daryate BCDEH I KO.; lost iR A' diryate GLM I

13.1 before sthime: aho after sllJlcn : eva GHIKL" ca hrIliso BCEHI '
hrdallaso D ' ullaso G; hrda od ego KL ' abhyulliiso - byullaso 0- 10 l in A
before aho: kama OKL . om BCDEHIO- 10 l in alto: abo K
14 b binab:
.,
b iiRa
- B
c calita: valita G' lalita " cut.: clima 1 pns D E- 10 t in AB
d bbiisai;l G
14.1 ca:aM bbodu:hoduM 0 o (etatHarch)-
EHl Cat ABCDIKl. - a H ,. om EG 0
14.2 pa4ic,c baodaa : 0 (prati banda Har Cal ch aka. . AD-
C; EGIKL 0; H - 10 t in B phalu . :
AG?C before Miilalyiil): itidariau C , D
malafi G; om H; dacSayi
l4.3 after apanrj'a : dariayati KL I- esasa vi: pi H; a CD- om B
jjeva BOEHL ' yyeva Cl ' .ue K' M; le G - jevva 0 ttha: batta. G
raida: ram KL' raida H - raide I 't ti: iu H - om -: G
lambidi: lambida H - lam bia .; lambioi Ham- lh h
14.4 oarpH]K.L(ji namHarcb '10
O' Ji i<la alambina E ' arer piasah. E Hi: iti bakua) G icM
om HI, O before MiidhawJiJ: G 0
14.5 om H
ISa iba: iva I
 72 M lilat'imiidhava IS.1

sakhi bakul>-avali vallabha )si jata /

:bisa
stana-parit:taha-vilasa:::vaijayanti //15//
(NEPATHYE)

SARVE

(PUNAR NEPATHYE)
are re, eso khu jovvat:t)-
arambha-sam bharida :du vvisah) :-amarisa: rosa -vaiara -balamodia:-
5 viha4id); uggha4ida :loba
l).ia :lmi-vilas)-uvveUa: bahaD;uttunga:-lai1giila-via4a:- Yea:::
ra:::vejaa: vejaan till
c bisa: C CEM. D ; lost in
HI; kaJ?gapiit;l4umugdha GKLNO; . . _ mugdha Har
d vaijayanti': vaijayanti EL
15.1 nepatbye : naipathye 0
15.2 before akarfJayanti: sasambhramam E
15.3 punar: om AD are re CEHI; arare AD ; lost in B ; areare GO; rere KLMN
Har ch bara ACDE; pura G ; ura HIMNO; ghara K ; ghahara L; lost in B adhi-
ACD; lost in B; 01 ; vasit;to HMNO
vadi: janavadha I; L; jiit;tavada M ; jaJ?a kbu DHLM; kkhu
BCEGKO ; om IN; lost in A after khu : so BeD beforejovvo1JQ :. y;tava HI
jobhaJ?a B
15.4 afteriirambha: gavva KL sambharida E;. bbarida MO; bharia. N
imarisa: ama B; amarasa I rosa: om K vaiara : vattiara B; vvaiyara G ;
vvadikara H ; vyatikara I ; vaiarar:p. K modia KM; mo4ida ABeD ; m04i
EGLO; H; m04a m04ia. N
15.5 andalia H' via rid I; vihay;t4id K.
H; 0 siilkbali: om AHl, MNO
paq.ibaddha E (pratibaddha HaT ch); baddha G
khala D;.khala. B; siilkbila E be!orepat!ibhai1ga: J;lirohaAHI. EGKL(nirodha
Har ch); om BCD, MNO M
15.6 0; saligalida BCDIKM (saligalita Harch) · sangaliasiitkhalo N;
sankalida AEG; H .; S3J!lgulida L nija H; Qiiil N; om 0 uv-
vellababal> : perantavel E; parya ?ntodvelladbahal> Har ch uvvella BOO;
uvvela CH; lost. in. A; uvvelanta G ; ovvela I; uvvellanta KL; ukkbela M; uvvaJi
N babaD uttuoga: velahalottunga I; H; vallahatuilga MNO
laitgiiJa: lfulgiila OHI via.,.: viaha K yea ,ejaa BCD;
lost in. A; om. cett "ea BC; via D
15.7 D; parivatta*B ; variattana C vira D ; om C ; .Iost (but required by
space) in Bvejaa CD; lost in B ,ejaantii:vaijaantika CH; vaija.a ntia KL;
15 ..8 Act III 73
avakkamia tak:khal}a-saanha:kavalid)
anea :atthi-khanda-
:kara mUha: 10
kandaro :dfu-wia:ca
anea: nara; turanga-jangaD-uggira-bharida :gala:guha.:gabbha-

abhoa -bhesavida ;vidda vid) jat.'a;J?ivaho kathora:

vaijaantia cOin· lOSl in AB ' viIambidadambar E;

v:i4ambar G' viq.ambru;ta4aJnbar H'. MO; vidambaQamar Har ch ;
vinamadarul} BooKL (<44Rmara Bar ch)' Cl st ·
u4amara Ccorr; uddama EM . oddama HI; om a · lost in A
15.8 sarin.: om E m . ado EGKLM .0; maado BO - ma4hado C Har '
H ;miiliido 1;mabado Har v. 1. - iUeg in A khal}arpt E sa. (.lb.
ABCDE· sataql}a G· HLO' sata1!-ha sadasa.fi.lgba K ' M;
asaf?l}a kavalida : kalida H· bvaEa M
15.9 .!.Iea : Oi)l}ia L inua: avaavaava r· avaa after majjha: tthida 0
HI ; attbi MO .... . : khru;t4.3i1!-3i G 0 ; M
om N
15.10 EKLD; C; D; G ; ka-
H; 1; M; ; lost in AB;
Har be/ore kara: d.a.q:lta GK kan.vltta: .k:a.r npatta GMO;
om N km.ru",a: G; H t; 8; D; om K; lost in A
iUeg in 1 karila: Ura1a 0 kudaro,: ,a ndaro E
15.11 p.. M' . 0 viambh3il}udd-
ama M .0 I.Iigghida: om ABD; '¥?).ia4.ia C nlI}a B; N
cape4a BM ; I' bha.ved G;
HKI Har; am04-ida ABO' amodia M' ,amooi O ' amo(3iI}ea) et;
Har Kath; camakkbida AD; ,c amalk.ia.Har caJ; caklcamida B; cakkida.E;
kavalida GH' pa4ida n· parimilia M' pamahida O' om om M
D&ra : om 0
15.12 after ruranga: ma E.; Bhand B' gaa. Kaggir:I: ugg31a. CGH
(udgata Har Cal); 0 a.g 8n 0.' : bharia 'p : om M
15.13 gbaggharoralli.: ghagbaro / jbattipaphu1la B; gbaghara M' N
gbagghara CDEGK' gagga.r a HO ' gaggala I; om L ; lost in A oralli CEHKL'
oriili 0 ; oUi G' oraHa I ' ullasiaralli 0 be/ore gall>: paphuIla O(B)'
lost. in A g.U>:gaJ [M I ' gill C; galla H EGK.lJO Raf; ura 80;
iJ1U?A C; Jost in A · H ; Ura.raJ?3. ]. M; sadda: saddba C;
om [ sandabbha: sandabba. l ' ..rambba KL' sadambba
1'illllo.: M' . 0
15. 14 bbesavida CD; lost in A ' faded in. B.;, bhlsavida E; bhisavida bblsia.
N; bhesavia 0.' M M; p8.1!-attha N vi
EKLO ' ,?i DGHIM Har" lost in. ADC dditida OKW' davida A; ?dravia
Har Kath - lost in BC' CIa sesa) E' ddaviddirada G' I;!!hivia MN Hac
Cal vida H ItDvallo·: G; C ka40ra I
 74 Miilatimadhava 15.15

15 J?ahara: kappar>-orampa -I?-iddaa-: darida :jantu -gatta -paii tta: ra tta-

karedi / la
rakkhadha 2 jadbasattie ti /
(pravisya)
.BUDDHARAKSIT A
parittaadha 2! / esa piasahi amacca: . andaJ?assa
20 Madaantia edet:la dunha:saddiileJ?a a:paria1?-a
abhiddaViadi /
MALATI
Lavaitgie, abo pamado 2! /
15.15 r:taha CIMNkapparorampa CE· kapparatampa ABD ' kapparak-
kamama G; kapparakkamal)a HL?K (kupparakramar:ta Har ch) ; kapparakka-
Kcorr; kapparapahara I; . kapparorappha O' om
M H; om M dirida ACDKL ; vidanda BH; darijjantu(jantu)
E; daiida G ; kanta.r ida I; darida?adhia M; ;
aturia 0; karttita Har ch jantu: om gatta paiitta: gadavaranta I'
gatt8.vailgaranta. N; gattauvaropari.uttaranta 0 gatta ABDG (gatra Har ch)'
gattavar:-a C; gattavaro E; gadavayaa. H; gattavaava KLM paiitta EGHIKL
M; paria C; parimutta AD; marimutta B
l5.16 kaddamida CDEH; lost in AB ; kadamia G ; kaddamiddha l' kaddamia KMNO',
kkadamia L vabo: paho GMN' vana K saddiilo: sadiilo G before
Kaanla: kuvia Bhand's ADC Kaanta BCDEGKL' kadanta HIO' kidanta
MN ; lost in A Iilayidal!'. HIK kar,ed.i: lcarodi G' karei
before rakkhadJuJ: pari INO; pa M
15.17 rakkbadba CEKO ; rakkhaha BDMN ; rakkhada GHIL: lost. ill A 2 BCDE'
repeated H jadbisatfie : before li EH - om G .; lost in A ', jadhasakti(ti) H
jad.bi: jaM BD ; jaha MN ; jada J satfie BeDEIK- satti LM ; sattI 0
l5. l7 before mama BD' lost in AC piasahle E ; madaantiae G ; piasabie
madaantiae H; appa. K; altano MN; attanam 0 ; om I jividam: . .. bahinii
(15.19): om L ti A'D(H)K; (da)ni BCI' GM'
(satfie)tti E; om OiL).
15.18 before pravisya: HI
15 .19 before sambhranta MNO afler BuddharaJqitii: 2 // K
before parittaadha: satriisam HIK ttiadha CEIKMO; ttaaha ADN' ttaa-
dhaIp. H; ttaada G; 10 tin B 2 ACDEHM . lost in B; om GI; repeated MO
esi: om K so C pia: pia N sabi: sahi N amacea: om N
. N CK; MO;
15.20 ABCDH; EKLM 0 ; om Gl H
H I?i IM (ni Har Cat cb ; om G 0 ada: hada C ; hida
LM viddivida EHI KL;.viddavida ACD; lost in B; viddavia GMNO asesa
ACDEH (a.sesa Har Kath ch); om GIKLM 0 Har Cat ch; 10 t in B
15.21 abbi: am EGN ddaviadi ABCDIO (druyate Har ch).; havladi EKL- bliYladi
G; bhiiViadi H; bhaviadi M ; I

15.22 before Lavangie: saw M Lavailgie: lavailgikeEH; lavailgi G ; om 0 aho:

15.23 Act III 7S

MADHAVAH
(utthaya) kv) asau 2. /
MAL TI
s agatam) ammo e 0 VJj ettha jje a! /
MADHA AH
(svagatam) hanta avan asmi yad aham atarkit):opanata: 2-
darSan)-611asitaJocallaya )naya
AviraIam iva damna
snapita iva ca dugdha-srotasa I
kavalita iva Iq1snas pharitena
prasabham am ar . e a // L6/1
B, DDHARAKSIT A
Mahabhaa ujjaQ-a-bahira:raccha-muhe I
MADHA AH
parikramati)
KAMA DAKI
vatsa 2 ikramas a I
om N ppamado E ' aho ; amado 2 ACD' tti HI· om cett
15.23 before ulthiiya: sasambhramam. ADE' sahasa: %ABCDEHIL' om GKM;
repeated 0
15.24 after Malatf: madha aqtdffiva. GHIKl' 0 AEIKL; sab.a-
rsam CDGHM O' faded in B sidhnsam ACDEIKL' sasadh asam
GHMNO; lost in B after siidhrasanr: ca GHM . otkampaI!lca. 0 sva-
gatam ACDGH · om E ; atmagatam IKL 0 - ]0 tin B ammo ACD; 10 t
in B; ammahe EHKM 0 Har ch' amhahe GK vi: om Kl after "i:
mahabbao E tdla jj "at: i the I BeD O ' idha E· ilia OH;
ihattho KL ilia Har h De,'a ABDEHL ; yy va C· evva M . jjevva GO
15.25 sl'agatup: iitmagal\am B' om I 11: ahamtu ab: a. am C
atarlUta : atarka I Data: upa ABC· upapanna E
15.26 da:rSana: dar "ita u1la.sita' · )1i ADGHK' lost in B' ullasitaya CM ;
uUasitaya EILO It i : om G
16a stanza 16: two halves in releT order 0 ariralam : avirala A cIj i:
naddhah. GH Il d b:
. damna GH' baddbah . ABL
b srotasi: srotasa. AC rota.siiJ!l EK nirbIaare . : nirgllanena a· K
c krtsDaS : AC -: G' eksana H
d ADEIM; 10 t in B' meghena CGHKLO Har i a: e C
a

16.1 .Mabibbia: mahiibhiiga iH after MaMbhiJa : es.o

bahi HL; bahi 1; babia M ; du ara ra -: 'r attha KL : muba
16.2 .. " tvarit parikrimanti .65: om 0
16.3 vatsa: valsaaL 2 ABCn· repe,ared K· om EGHIL a amattam CDGH '
 76 M iilat'imiidhava 16.4

MALATI
Lavailgie, haddhl 2! khu jado /
SARVAH
5 (tvaritam parikramanti)
MADHAVAH
(sablbhatsam) ahaha!
Sarp.sakta ;vivartiV :antra'!:jala-
vyakIrl!a ;sphurad ;apa /
kIlala -vya tikara-gul pha
pracaf?qyaJ!l vahati nakh>..;.ayudhasya //1 7//
aho pramada4 2! - tad n> atidura: kram>-agata
paso4 kanyaka /
SARVAH
ha Madaantie! /
KAMANDAKI ' MADHAVAU

tad-avapatitad
kuto )pi Makaranda etya sahas» alva madhye sthital).! I

lost inB; .1' apramattobhiitva .E KL ViknmasYIl : parikramasva E

after I'ikrdmasva :'iti C
16 .4 after Malatf: janantikam EGHL Lavangje: Lavangike H; sahilavailgie E;
aJter haddhl G baddbi: hadhik H ; haddru K 2 ABCDEGHIKL; (om
M 0) beJore samsao: sarTra L khu ADHI; kkhu DCEG; om KL
16.5 parikramanti ABDEKL; madhavamanugacchanti CGHJ
16.6 Miidhavaf.l: om I before sabibharsam: KLO sabiblu.. am:
b'ibhatsam K; sasaqlbhramalp Oa&aha.: ahahai:r ; om E
17b 1: apravrtta M ; B; apavakta Bar (but apa.v rtta v.l.)
ABCDELNO; G?K' dal?"a H · IM
c beJore gulpha: jala [
d G vabati: vadati H;, dahati oalbi.: naca N
17. 1 abo : om HIMO pramadaf.l: om MO 1 ACDHI; lost in B; om EGKLN.
MO tad evarp oatidiira artillai:r 10 t in. B; E;
GHIKLM 0 e am AD; etao C agstii BeD-
agatal} AN; gata EGHIKLMO Har
L7.3 hi: om L
17.4 ABCD; EHIKLM 0; G
18a tad: ca G ava: bhuvi G;. abbi KL adhi: ava H gatii: krm Har v.1.
sambhramat MN; 0 )pi: bi
18b.1 Act III 77
mT RAH
sadhu Mahabhaa sadhu. /
KAMA DAKl· DHA AU
(sabhayam)
pasuna hato ' a UT asau krta' c) amuna-
ITARAH
2! /
KAMA DAKI· MAoHAVA

prativibudhya sa pramathitas ca / / 18//

ITARAI:I
I
KAMA' DAK!
(sakiitam)
sam.bhranta:
Madayantika-)va]ambitas tamyat) i a vatsome Makaranda4. /
ITARAH
haddhl 2! ga4ha :ppahara -dae kilimmadi Mahabhao I 5

1Sb.1 itaril;t: ] - malatm sacihu ABCDGHI' sahu EKLNO'

M mahibhia : mahabhaga. H idhu ABCDGH1' sahu EKL
NO; sabumahabhaa M
18b.2 Kimands1C -dhavau ... prath·i buddh a sa : om I ilD odakl Madb:avau:
madha vah 0 saMlayam : om M
lSc ca p.suni: paraSuRa H asau flliS cim i ABCDM O· om EGHIKL
18c.! ... • om 2 BDHAmarg' repeal d . om CEGL OAlst
lSc.2 Kimancbtl M- • ,a D. • . ujjids .: om 0 Kimandili idha au:
L
18d prati.ribudhya ACD' lost in 8 ; alham E' om GH]Kl(M 0 ) bo-
clhya AC; buddh a D sa O ' salt C
18.1 after sanandam K.L '., "i ABCDEIK: sahu G' om L'
H ABCDIKL' H ' panib.adam E duj-
jida'l!I: amangalam I afler dujjiidar!l : piaqlsamvuuaJ!ll ADD -
vuttaf!l C
18.2 KimandalU: I bt:lwn: me r m.: ,a gbra EH na-
khara: nakha EHM nil a: nisrta HL 1;It: oirvaha KL' 0
l8.3 CEHK' ADIL·.10 l in B'. oihita G ; M 0 Har before
khac!ga: vasal): G a L niScala : KL
sanli'bIUiota: L
78 M a/atfmiidhava 18.6

MADHAVAl:I ,
katham, pramugdha eva? / tad Bhagavati paritrayasva 2 /
KAMANDAKI
atikataro )si vatsa-nanv ehi tavat pasyamal}. /
(iti sarve)

nama
// )nkaq. /1

18.4avalambitas: lambitas E; avalambas G' hastavalambita N i,'a: om KM

me: om MN' before vatso EHIO AC
18.5 baddhi: haddhl KMNO 2 ACDEGHKL; repeated MO' om LN Har ch ,
•
lost in B before gii4Jta: atikatarohi G ppa ACDEGKM 0 ; pa H1L;
lost in B biiradiie: harodal;li E;. haridae H ; baradae 1 lilimmadi ACDEKL
Har; lost in B; kalimadi G ; klimadi H; kilammadi [MO' kilammaI before
mahiihhiio: tti HI mabibbio: L' lost up 10 bhave B after
mahiibhiio: maarando E

18.6 after eva: vayasyo y

B before lad: kamandakil!lprati GHlKLO' om ABeD

EMN tad ABCDEGHI ; om KLM 0 pari: om K.L 2 ABCDEHIL;
om GLMNO after paritriiy asya 2: HIM 0 ;. before pari GKL' om
ABCDE
18.7 atikitaro : kataro I vatsa: before ,atiJeataro H; om IM Danv ebi tivat:
tadehitavat KL; vatsal!l N ACDGMO; EHIK.L;
pasyava N ; 10 t in B
18.8 before parikramya KO after sarve ABeD before
Samkaragrho niima: malatimadhave: K; iti M' itimalat'imiidha e 0 Sam-
0; om GHILM AnCDE;
soka K ABCD; EK after ahkaiJ : GL
 ACT IV
(tatah p ravisato Malau' ada ntikabh am avalambitau
Madhava .Makarandau sambhrantaS ca KamandakI'
la an,gika ··
MADAY ANTIKA
pas'ida Bhaavadi / parittaasu
I 5
ITARAH
haddhl 2! eUha pekkhida aI¥ . /
KAM DAKl
(ubhau kamaJ;lq.aDfidakena iktva) nanu bha atyal:t paV-
ancalair vatsall vijayadbvam I
MALATY,.;.ADAYAI:I
(tatha kurvaoti)

0.1 praviSato: pravisati H MUm ABeD' madayanti.lca cet!. Madayanti-

kabbyiJD ABCD; la angikabh am. GHIKL; la ailgika E' mal3:tibhyam MNO
after avalambilau: pramugclliau EGIKMO' lost in B
0.2 Madha a. akarandau ABeD GHl' makarandamadhavau EKLM 0 Ma-
karandau : m aka ran dakau C sambbrinC ' ca : sambbranm KLM Ki-
mandaki La.l '8ogiki: buddharak.¥ta M
0.3 LaIVailgiki ABCD 0; malatl cett K;
malatTca L' a alokita.ca M
0.4 after Bhaalladi: pasida AD ttiasu CO' ttaa B' ttahi EKL- tt.aa sa GHI ;
Uaehl M ' ttaabi . twbi 0 after pariuaasu: 2 K ' r pealed MO nimitta:
l)imitt3J1l MO aid : H' saI!1saidaIll I
0.5 pvidlll'!ll: om. G ; ji idav
i. MJCDE' H.' i Kl'
GM O' ipanna Har ch: om I b fore cu;w: cb'
om AB EGH1M 0 (,jlvida anu ] ampiQcaJ'!l C' faded
in A mahanublla G ' mahanubha aI!l H
0.6 baddhi : baddhi MO 2 ABCDEGHKL' r 'P ated MO.' om Har ch
GHIKM o· ABCDE' Q ' ittha [.
H ; om GKLM ·amh 'I!I: a rer pekkhidal' Q pek.k.b.idavval!l:
pekkhidantam H
0.7 Kamandak'i : om ubhao: om ,G H odak a: jalena E ik.1vi: ab hi-
L; pari . icya M before nanu: k.alam nanu: tatra GH blta-
bha alyaQ. L ABCD Q. EGHKL ' pa-
taiicalaih IY

0.8 vatsau: ta . om KMO ' aft r 'ija 'adhvam GH 'f"jayadhnm ABCDEMO'

v1jayata GH ; vljayantuIKl
 80 Mlllatfmadhava 0.10

MAKARA ND'AJ:I
10 (asvasy) avalokya ca) vayasy> atikatara, kim etat ?-nanu
svastha ev) asmi /
MADAYANTIKA
ammahe!

MALATI
(Madhavasya latate hastam dattva) ditthift va44emi I nam
. .
15 Mahftbhao tti I
MADHAVAH
(asvasya) vayasya sahasika, ehy ehi / (ity aiingati)
KAMANDAKI
(ubhau sirasy aghraya) )smi /
ITARAH
piam. 2 no
. samvuttam
. ./
SARVAH

0.10 Makarandab: kama N iisvasy.a ABCDE; samasvasya cet1 ava: ¥lava.;

vi GH ca: om MO Aati ACDEGI ; lost in B; -ati HMNO; om KL 0-
tara kimetat· kiitarastvemetat Gsic titan ABCDIO; katarosi EKLMN; ki-
tarastvam H nanu: nakhalu C
0. 11 sYastba: sustha ABeD
0.1 2 om MNO ammue: amme E; ambahe GNO; amhahaJ!ll; ahmah-
me M dil,li ABCDEl; GHKM ; dal?il!Jt L; diva 0 Maanada:
maarandena L
0.13 GH KLMNO
0.14 laliite : after hasta1?1 I datt"i: krtva M beforediUhiii: sahilavailgi.e KL;
mababbaa Telang ACD ; vannemi B ; va9c;thasi ELO (varddhase Har
cb); vac;tc;thavasi G; H·vaddbami I;vanam KM; vaddhasi L?N
om I
O.tS before pac!ival}'!-a: L- sa M ... l.I8ceal;'O:
pratibuddbaeva Har Cal ch G Ce8I;1O: celaf?o H;
veaJ}o L Mahibbio: mah8Qubhavo G; mababhagamakarando H; mabi-
bhaamaarando L; Har ch
0.16 .i Svasya: samasvasya GH ; K ; om Ifayasya: om L ity:"ity
E; iti- I; om ABCGN before al;ngati: makaraDda GH; mm iJi • •ti:
, almgayati ACD; M
0. 17 after ubhau: vatsau ABCD sirasy : sira y B jilfita. ABCDGKL; jivad
EHIMNO
0'.18 2 ACD; repeated BKL; om EGHIMNO Hac cb uU8I!l BM; putta N
0.19 sanil:!: sarve IMNO ltar!am: ABDCcorr
0.20 Ac/IV 81

BUDDHARAKSIT A
(janantikam) sahi Madaantie so jjeva eso I 20
MADAYA IKA
mae eso Maha 0 , aat!l pi so tti I
BUDDHARAKSIT A
avi /
MADAYA IKA.
,
hu tumharislo honti I {Madhavam
avalokya) sabi Maladie vi ramar,no maha,?-ubhave
ppavado I eva paSyati) 25
KAMANDAKl
(svagatam) hi Mada antika 'Makarandayor
daivad adya / (praicasam) atsa Makaranda
punar tasminn avasare

0.20 sabi ADCDGHM O ' bata EIL Har' K so ACDEGHBcorr; eso

]KLMNOB lstHarch JJe aA.BDEL· eva.CI·evvaG ; jeva H ;iievva. KO;
om Meso ABCDGHM ' so EUCL 0 Hac ch
0.21 after MadayantikiJ: sa.hi o· tathaiva K jii.Qido ElKM
Har Kath cb) after E' yyeva.l : jje a K.:, jevva L- evva GHMNO'
eva Har ch after mae:jadba ]0; jaM KL' jaha GH atha Har ch eso :
so Ccorr esa HKL; om G ibal-o: madhavo pi:
vi MN I
0.22 before av;: sabi G avi: pia G ; al KL vidiul . ABCDEKMO' aini. GHL?
.

aN
0.23 hu ABCDEGHL ; hi 1KMO ADD' ambanse C; HIKLO
Har ch)' E.; G'· M ' aniharisesu .
before pakkha: 0 BCDEGHKO' A' viidiJiibo I;
LM ' va.hinl0
0.24 wi: om C ABCDElLM' OH' KO; om
before alJuriia L ; before lD)uraa 0 after ral1UJl'!io: ije\ra E
iha OH Har ch mUi GHlM' mahabhiie ABCD; E;
K . mabinubha.ve Har ch' maha.bbae L' om 0 anuria:
raga GH ; L
0.25 pparido: H ' ppahival!: O ' ppa I after ppa\'iido: tti EM
punar . • .. pUyati: om G iti. ABCOO: punar EHIKL; OlD. eva: om I
sasoebam ABCDM O' prbam EGHIKL paiyati: avalokayati KL
0.26 s"agatllD.: om C hi: om. EH dayutiki akaraDclayor: makaranda.-
madayantikayor K
0.27 dai." id adya : adyadaivat E . afrer eJarSccrram darSaJlam
GHKL
0.28 tasmia A BCDE ' GHKL 0 ; avasare) I;
M ji•• AB OH ' jiva.m.a E - jivita GIKM O· L
 82 M aiatimiuJhava 0.29

bhagavata Daivena I
MAKARANDAl:I
30 ady> aham antamagara eva k3.1!lcid varttam upasrutya
Madhavasya citt)-odvegam adhikam aSaukamanas tvaritam
parapatann eva
sarduD-avaskanda-gocara-gatam imam abbijata:kanyakfun
abhyupapannavan /
MALATI;MADHAVAU

KAMANDAKI
(svagatam) vf1tena khalu MaIatl-pra<ianena bhavitavyam I
(prakasam) vatsa Madhava, vardhito >si - so >yam
avasaraq. priti-dayasya I
MADHAVAH
Bhagavati iyaIp. hi
Yad vyala - ta :suhrt -
saujanyad vihitavati mam /
tral,la: I).a Gsic hetor ABCDGHMO; betur EIKL
0.29 bhagavata Daivena : bhagavata L; daivena E; before Maooyantikaajter
Daive7U1: ilia tvam 0
0.30 adya: atha K nagare: nagaram M
0.31 Madhavasya: madhava. Badhikam: om K i: adbi tvaritam:
tvaritataram MO
0.32 vrttantah.:
. . om E
0.33 gocara gatAm: H; G ; gocara.:p. M ; gocaram 0
imim CGHIMNO; etam KL; om ABDE
0.34 abbyupapannavan : upalabdhavan E after pannaviin: asmi EGHLM; om
ABCDIKNO
0.35 vimriatab:
. . vimrsatah
. . . ABCDE
0.36 pravrttena K khaJu: om E iilati: om E pnulanena:
danena ,oH
0.37 vatsa: va ya ya N ; om G adhava: om M before vardhilo: di .. yasuhrd-
buddbya L Bhand's AB CD : G H.
0; ABCDEIK . om M vardhito: varjito G ABCDO'
malatyas(tad) ElK; malatya GHLM so)yam ABCOGHM 0 ; tad E;
tadayam KL
0.38 dayasya: danasya KM
0.39 Bbagavati : om M hi : om M 0
la vyala: vyaghra K ra.,ita : pramoba : pramoda Klst dag-
dhaqa ABeD ; mugdharp c tt
b saujaoyad: M . yathaf!l: ranam A
 le Act lV 83
tat kamaql prabhavati piirr;tapatra-vrttya
mama ca ca //1//
LAVA - G1KA
paqicchido kbu t;lo piasahie pasado I
MA DA Y ANTIKA
(svagatam) jal?-adi mahllbhao garua -ramaJ?-iarp. mantidU4l /
MAL TI
(svagatam) I?ama aarandena
. uvvea-lalranam
- -
udam
bha vissadi ? /
MADHA AH
vayasya ka. punar mam> §dhik> :5dvega- artta / 5
(pra i'.ya)
PUR
vatse Madayaotike bbrata re jya an amatya: andanaJ?
samadiSati-adya ParameS asmad-bhavanam agaty> amatya:
Bhurivasor upari viSvasam asmasu ca prasadam
svayam eva Milatl pratipadita - tad ehi saqlbha va ya valf pramodam 10
iti /

c piir _ pitn: piin;tayapi ]

patraJ:!l I
1.1 GH - pariccbido 1; K; pa4ichido LO' illeg in
M; ADHILM - kkhu BCEGKO before '!o: se
.al!l: ay3J:!It [ BCDEIKL 0; pas3.0 GHM
1.2 sngatam: jananti am - om L ji _- di: B- ja!,tasi D - janadi G
after iOrJ,1Jdi: hu i io,ABCD- mahabbaga E - mababhaadheo GHIKL
o Har ch)- M' mahar).uhao
jano G- om after jal)0: avasare L K. ABCDEGH · gurulU!l J-
om KLM 0 rama ('8 ABCIKM- ramal?-la D - ratDa:J?iyam EH'
G; 0 ; om L
1.3 svagatam: atmagatam B[ - a: danim
ABeD- (after G nea: uvvega 1 M 0
1.4 bbavissadi: bavissadi M - bha eO
1.5 _.. virtti: om 0 'a: om ABEHist after vega:
hetur HI K · hetu C
1.7 after 2K tike: om . : om. L
1.8 S3J!ldiSati K -ya: om EGKLM 0
1.9 before prasiidam: L : anugraham. 0
LlD eva: om ila,-: after praripiidita HIli WI: dad B -
GHLO- bha B pnuD : pramodayaA I· prasadam.
M 0

10
 84 M llJatimiulhava 1.12

MAKARANDAJ:I
vayasya, sa vartta I
MALATI;MADHAVAU

MADA Y ANTIKA
sahi Maladi tumaf!l khu
15 saha pahudi - piasahI bahiJ?ia - sampadaq1
gharassa jada )si /
KAMANDAKj
bhadre Madayantike, vardhase bhratur Malafi-labhena /
MADA Y ANTIKA
aslsa-pasadeq.a / sahi Lavailgie, bharida manoraha
/ .
LAVANGIKA
20 sahi amhanam ti mantida I

1.12 vayasya: om M si: EH1KL

\.l3 A; vaicityan BCD; ?vaicintyan D ; GHIKLMNO
1.14 after malatim EIMO; before KL; om ABCDGH
ABCGHMN; almgya DEIKL; 0 Miladi: om 0 tumal!':
I kbu ADEGHKLMN; kkhu BCEO elka: eka I
nagara H; om ABO ABCDIKL (nivasena. Hac ch) · oadhivaseJ:?a GB;
MNO; EL
1.15 saha: om CM NO GHI; N kilado EM;.
kilanado GKL pahudi: vahudi ; om KL after pahudi: me GHIKL
Har cb; t:lo E afler piaSahl: asi EIKL (aslr Har cb); H ; om ABCDGMNQ
E; I; MN ; 0 after bahi1)w: a
CEILNO (ca Har ch); via. M; asi Gsic Hsic after sampada'r/: Ul)A GHKLMO
J>unar Har cb); om ABCDEl ABCDEG; me H; M O·
om L Har ch; before ma'!4a1Jllrr I; beforejiidii K
1.16 gbarassa: ghara M; afler ABeD beforejadiI: sahi G ; (J?o K)
1.11 bhadre ABCDGHM ;vatse ElKL 0 Madayantike: madaantike B' om M
om CNO lihbeua: lambhena. C
1.18 before bhaavadi EH afrer tumhii'!fl1!l: 1 i.sisi ABD;
aslsa C; asisa El; GH;. K ; asiso LO·asisa.ql M' ase N pa-
Cl bbaridi ABCDIMO; bharita H; it N ' GK.;
pbalia L; phali (dB. omitted between pag,es) E me GH
manoraho D; manoraha Gl
1.19 ABCD); labena EGLMNO; labhena H ' labhet:'a K
1.20 sahi: EM ti CMNO; pi ABCDEGHKL (api Har .Kath ch); vi 1; aplti Har
Ca1 ch before manlidaVYa'r: atthi KL; GHKmarg; etat Har ch;
1.21 Act TV 85

MADA Y ANTIKA.
sahi Buddharakkhide mahflsa vaI!l vemha /
BUDDHARAKSrrA.
sahi ehi gacchamha /

LAVA' GIKA
(japantikam) Bhaavadi, jadha hiaantara-bharid) ;uvvaranta:
. . doLa.vida:.
vimha)':, ananda-sundaram - dhirattanam
.. .. manahara.
. 25
palhatthanti kandahda
sacchaha ka4akkha-n.ikkheva -tadha

sa I; om ABCDEM 0 mantidavval!l: H ' manti (followed by

space) 1

1.21 sabi ABDG HO; em L; om CEIKMN Har ch Boddbarakkhide: buddharak-

khie N ABCD; E; GHK ' 1- daIJ.U!l L; ehidava M;
N ; ehi 0 before mahWtU Q'!1: vivaha: GH1KL Har cb ; om ABCDE
I

MNO mahiisa".. CGHLM01E; mahossaval!l [. mahussaD,l K ; mabo-

N; ABD : C; bha aa 0 G
1.22 Buddha ..• gaccltlmhit : om. CEM 0 chi ABDH ; taehi I; om GKL Harch
gacdtamhl : gacchebma L
1.23 ABeDI ; EGHKLO' N; om M
1.24 Bhaandi: bbaavai N jl - CEI0 ' jaha M . jaha ABDGHKL before
hiaa: ,ede EGHJKL.; om ABCDM 0 Iliautan ABD' hiaa cett bIwi-
duvn: omitted belweenpages Gsic bbarid): bhari Im'uanta ABCDE;
ti'atta G; uvvaratta H ; ovvara?nta. I ; M ' uvvimata ; uvvahanta 0
1.25 sundara. ABCDEGH ; sundara.IKL 0 ; M , sundar(i) Har ,cb)
livida ABeDI ; andolavida E ' andolita. Har ch ; dolaanta andolianta L;
gbolaota M; gholavia N ' gboliida 0 ABCD' E;
dhiratta L; 'G ; H;
N ; dehaperanta I; dhirapera.nta KMO (druraparyanta Har
ABCDEM ;. GHHCLO
1.26 palIIattbaati ABCDEK;. palhaochanti G; papphulanti H" papphumnti 1; pal-
bacchaqtti L ' paatthatpti M ; ullasati pallatthanti
H . maaran<iaaI,lClD.l ABCD • ABCD ;,dalida EGIKL
0 ; dalia M ; daJita Har cb . om H ........... ?BCDGm ;
AEKMO; niluppala l; r;tiloppaJa. diata: om MO
1.27 sacdaabi ABCDE; sacchaa GHL- saccboba I." sa(ca:ret madc)cha K; maqIsa-
Iacchavio MO; t...,.",,: di;hi ElNO Har cb);
diWut M aikkbe i ABCD' viWeviEGHlKL- sa.tp.bhedi M; saccbeda
saqt.bbeA 0 ; Har Ca! cb;, Har Kath Ch
t.dbi CEO' taha ABDHIKL ' taha G ABCIM .0 ; takkemi
EGRKL (tacUayimi Har cb); om D . : ma:J?ohara K ·VYIItta
CILO ; DDK' AEGH' M'
 86 Mfilatfmiulhava 1.28

eCte tti /
KAMANDAKI
(vihasya) nanv imau IDanaSaql muhur pramoham
30 anubhavatah / tatha hi
Isat :tiryag etat
cid arecita...;.bhru I
antar :mod>-anu bha va -masfl!a:-srasta ': pa
sarpsaty aciram anayor
PURUSAH
vatse ita itaq. /
MADAY ANTIKA
sahi Buddharakkhide avi mae pUf?O vi disihidi esa jlvida-ppadal
/
BUDDHARAKSIT A
jadi devvaql aJ?ufllarp. bhavissadi I
(iti

1.28 sal!lbandha: samaama MO ; vallahasamaama ede: eda CO' e ; 10 t in M

1.29 vibasya (Dmarg); om ABCEMDlst nan": nann¥K before manasal?1:
vilokanena GHIKL; manasa ; om ABCDEMO muhur muhur
IL; om EMNO pramobam D ' (muhurrpramoham C' pramodam ABEGH ;
mohanam IKLO Har; moham M ; sacchayamohanasamagamamahot avam
2a valita.: valana KLMO; calana N lruiicita EL ' kOf?>ita
b lulitam(B): lalitam ACDIMillecita ABCDEGK; flkuiicita HILMNO Har
bbru : bhrti B; G
c masp;ta ABCDEIK; GHLM 0 srasta ABCDIM O ?E; tambha
GH; stambha KL n:is.hmpa: ABD
2.1 vatse: om N ita: I; om N ita C ; 2 E
2.2 after Madaya7llika: janantikam M; apavarya :sahl : om G Buddha-
rakkhide: buddbarakkhie avi: om M e ADD' f?>a.ma CEGH' om
IKLMNOHarch 0; om Har Kath ch afterpuno vi: dava KL
before disihidi: pekkhidavvo E' prek . ilavy.a Ha.r Kath cb QlSihidi E ; disidihi
A ; disihadi BeD ; dis'iadi GH ; dasih'idi [; disaai K ; disai 1MO; dissiadi esa
EIKMO; eso AL; asau B; aso D'!ost in C' sa GH; om jivida:jia E p
CEHKLMNO; pa BI; om ADG dii: do CL; dayl G
2.3 before pU1J4arfa: pabuddha I after L
2.4 jam ACHIMO; adi B; yadi D; jai EOll; .ayi de 81!l: 0 ;
divvam GH' daivam 0
.. , .
aDu,ulam bb.a1issadi : anumassadi M;anuaulaissa. N ;
4 4> .. •

anuiilaissadi 0 af?>uulatp. L after bhavissadi: tti G;

ti L
2.5 om E iti AHDGHl · om C(E)KLMO ABDGH'
3a Act I 87

MADHAVAH
(apavarya)
Cirad asa:tantus trutatu bisini-sutrn:bbiduro
mahan adhi-vyadhir nim ,a dhir idan:iql prasaratu I
ni.rvy.ajam. rajatu ma i paripla a:d.hura
Vidhi4 bhavatu lqtalqt as ca Madana4 //3//
atha va
Samana.:premaQaI!l janam prarthitavato
Vidhau mama samucit» pari.J?atili, /
tatha )py asmin pravigalas.
prabha1'!1 adanam antar dahati maID //4//
KAMANDAKl
(janantikam) e am atidurmana ' pl4ayati marp vat80,
vatsa ca Malafi nirasa P!"cchami tavad
mantam I api bhavan yatha. Bhiirivasur ev)
Malatffi.l dasyat> iti.? /
M.AOHAVAH
(salajjam) nahi 2. / 5

C' ni.lcrwnanti I ' ni. ; . ni .kramati O '

\

KL

3a bisin1 : C ; bisam bhidmlQi EGHKLM' O· madhuro ABeD ; idhuro

I
b idbj : adhir CL y- dhir: vyadhi B, niravadhir: nira adhim D
c nirvyijal!l B ; ACOGH '
EIKLM 0 dhuri: dhurnrp GH' dhuro I
d arthyarp ?l
4b samuciti : samudita BG .Dlst
c pravi: prati Cl; pari E
4.1 janintikam: om HK' agatam LM an : om 0 mi'l!l: me D - after "alSO L
4.2 before vatsii: Illadha 0 IQ ca A.BCDEGHMO· after Malatl [KL Mi-
Iafi: ,o m '0 om AB.' after nirosii E after pril1)W: M be-
fore pfcchiimi: pralkasam Oll' prakasam/ atsamadhava
4.3 before api: prakasam HI . 0 api : ath . madhaathakimlc3. yadli:
tatha K' om EGH om L abb ABCDEQH ' a ma-am
after Miluufm IK(L) 0 L omits whar would haw! been -masmabhya1?1dasya-
4.4 iti: om EKL
4.5 salajj : mala (maiati C salajjaml madha ABeD 2 ACEKL'
repeated G HIMO' om BD
 88 M alatimiulhava 4.6

KA.MANDAKI
na tarhi prag:avasthayal;t parihTyate I
MAKARANDAJ:I
Bhagavati datta:piirv» ety asankyate I
KAMA DAKI
janami khalu varttam / idarp. ta vat prasiddham eva yatha.
Nandanaya Maiatif!l Bhurivasur nfPam uktavan
10 'prabhavati nijasya kanyaka:janasya Maharaja' iti!
MAKARANDAH
astyetat J
KAMANDAKI
adya tu rajfi» aivaMalati datt» eti sampraty e a
aveditam / tad vatsa vyavahara-tantrfU?i
ayatanta
15 iti J sa ca Bhiirivasor vag anrt) :atmik» aiva - na khalu MalatI
Maharajasya kanya-pradane hi prama.J?aIl1 iti

4.6 DB tubi: tarhi N parihiyate ACDM ; pariblyase EGHIKLO .; paribhUyate

B GH Bbagavad ... tat ki m atn) (7.12): folio
24 of B is lost Bbagavati: om NO datta : adatta L; anya I iSaDkyate:
asailkate LM
4.8 jinimi CEKLMNO ; janasi ADHI ?G khalu tam ACD; EKLNO;
taI!luakhalu GH; khalutatratvaJ:!l I; tAql M la at ACDEGH I ; tu KL'
tuUivat MO pea : apra N ; supra 0
4.9 przrthyamanaql M DqJ8ID ACD E ; nrvatim GHIKL
MO ; before Bhurivasur EN before ukravan : evarp. HI after uktO\I[m :
yatha KL
4. 10 oijasya ACDNO; nija EGHIKLM kanyaki: kanya
4.12 adya lu AE; anyacca C ; adya.nya.ccatu D; adya.caGHIKLO; adya M n'J a :
om M; after svayam eva N eVil: om 0 Mi.lafi: after daua KL; om E
sampraty eva ACDHILM 0 ; after E ; om GK
4.1 3 aveditam : niveditam E vik : vakya AD ; hfdi, G after
baJ:!ldhanani L antaral)i GH ' mantrar:ti
4.l4 vici: L : raja N ' afler helavo I aftervacica GH vyavasthil,t: vya·
vasthita . IKL ... iti: om E CGH; AD?[
corr; sarvaq1ca K . sarvaftca ?lI st ; sarvet!l L ; sarvatha M 0 JanIDam :
ja.nananca AD; vacananam KL iyatant.e : paryantA(iti) AD ; ayatana(iti)
Gsic; ayattam KL
4. 15 lti ADG; iti CH ; om IKLM 0 ig an!1i : vakya [ aorta: amrta K;
ft DE itmiki : atmaka ADEKC I t; om L e " . : iva AM MUati:
after Maharajasya KL; ofter kanyakiJ M 0
4.16 before Mahiirajasya: nija GH befo re kanyaka : nija lKLMO : nija N
4.17 ActW 89
na dharm)' acarasya - tasmad vivelctavyam
etat / katha£!l ca vatsa- mam manyase? / paSya-
Ma vaI!1 api nama tad bhut
yad tvayi va viSaitkyam /
tat sarvatha sailgamanaya yatnab
api maya vidheyw, //5//
MAKARA DAH
sarva£!l yujyamanam adiSyate I apl ca
Da yii vii sneho va Bba,gavati nije>smiii_siSu :jan.e
sa.qlsarad viratam api d:ravayah /
alas ca pravrajya-sulabha:samay):acara-vimukhaq.
prasaktas te yatna4 - prabhavati punar dai vam aparam //6//
(EPATHYE)
bhaavadi Kamandai esa ghettaq.a
aacchadha tti /
KAMANDAKl
vatse 2/

kanyaki : kanya L afler kanyakii:. E Ib ayi : kanyaka LM . om H

pradine : dine KL bi ACDE' ca Hlll 0; om GM

4.17 Da ACD; nai af!l celt acansya ya.. : E acuasya

A,C D; aeam GHIKLM . acarya. 0 a .: G tasmid : tad.
vivektavyam AD- vikarttavyam C ' viveaktavyat(etat) E; G'
H; ]. aimarSitavyam KL; avasthitam M 0
4.18 etat : evatat L; evaitat ' ca.: cid M .;, cava G ...tSII: om H a u n : ava I
paSya : om ; vihasya 0
Sa EGIKLM 0 ; va ACDH
d .atyayena ACDEI; vya)fena GHKLM 0
5.1 saoao.t: before M . om Kl.O - .. L
6b cittao.t: celO L
c ataS: tataS a · samayi: samayasulabha K samayi: samuda GH[
vimukha K
6.1 oepatbye: naipathye 0 bhaal'adi: bhagavadi H; bhaavai Kimandai:
om 0 esi: sa I; om 0 E before
jadba IL (yallba Bar cb . tadha K ACDIK.LO·
E; gehia G; gheThuna H ' M
6.2 turidal!1: M a/re, 1'IlTida'!l: iha 0 iaoclaa ADE' aacchadi 00;
agacchadi. HI; aacchadu KL; aacche MO- aachcha. tili: om 1
6.3 vatse: after M. 2 ADlL' lost in G; om EGHICM 0
 90 M alafimiidhava 6.4

SARVE
(utthaya parikramanti)
MALATI·MADHAVAU
5 avalokayata4)
MADHAVAH
etavatl Madhavasya Malatya arnarp. loka-yatra . / aho
nu khalu
Suhfd iva
prathamam anukiHatam j
punar akat:l4a :vi va rtana -darur;tal:t
Vidhir manaso rujam //7//
MALATI
(apavarya) Mahanubhava naan)-anandaara ettiam diW10 )si l
LAVA · GIKA
haddhl 2! jje a pia ah"i aro ida arnaccena
Malad"i /

6.4 sarve . . . kramaoti : om L sane: IMO; uttba a parikriunanti:

uttisthanti K
6.5 aouragam : anuragau G afler anuriigam:. anyonyam KL
alokayata4 EL
6.6 after svagatam KLM katham GH afteretiivat/: hi
AHJ; ti C; om DEGKLM 0 Midba,asya: om HI ; after Miilazyii sama,?l KL
samal!l: I· sama N before aho: nirvede G Bbo ... nanu
bhoh N
6.7 nu : om L
7a pradal!l M 0 rasim: rasfld GH daruna C pari .. .
K. ACOGM O· pr
EHIL
7. 1 apavarya: svagatam KL; janantikam !VI mahi,?u'b biva ACD · mahanubhaa
G; N; mababbaa EHIKLMO (rnahlibhaga Har ch)
ACDE; loa£.la GHIKLM 0 (Iocana Har ch il;landaara A DEM;
I; GHKLNO
7.2 baddbl: haddht KM .2 om 1 Har Kath ch; rep ated 0
Har Cal ch; lost in C s.a rira: om I after sa'?f aa'?f: esa M jjeva DEL;
yyeva Cl; evva GM; jeva H· jjevva K; eva ' ; jevva O· iUeg in A piasalii:
mepiasaru after iirovidii E; mepriyasa hI Har Ca] ch iroYidi: samarovida GH·
arovida I· aroidli L
Y

7.3 Maladi ACDGH ; om ElKLM 0

7.4 ActlV 91

ALATI
dal?i me jlvida-tal)ha.e / ca
tadassa I a
darur:ta:samarambba-sari 0 I ettha u alahami manda-
bhaio,.l, kaI!l va asaral)3 sarao,.aI:!l paqi ajjami? I
LAVA· GIKA
sahi ido 2 /
(iti ni. kramanti
MADHA H
(svagatam) nunam a asana:matram etan !adha a a ahaja: 10
sneha-katara karoti Bhagavati I od egam sarp.s.a
)smi I tat kim atra karta am? I iti icintya na khalu
maha:marpsa-vikrayad anyad upa pa' ami / (prakasam)

7.4 after Malatl: svagatam K ACDEI· GHK. o· after me

L me: om ACD Har cb tag 8. ACDEIO ; tlt:lhae GHKLM after
phalatrJ: sasram CH ca ACDJO: a EHM· m GKL· da a
7.5 I; after radas a KM apalikal a.ql Har ch)
after liidasa: vi L A.CDE> padi HI : pari GKL· MO.;
GIMO; ocb.ido ACO· do E· H; ido L· a ADERt;
om GKLM .0 Harch· lost i:n C dUQ-qha H; dagdha Harch·
om KM 0 denassa: de a.ssa lM ? ; dai assa 0
7.6 before diirulJa: adi GH diru . a : M riso : pari 0 M ; om . 1
before kaJ?1: la El MO : a ler euhn E ,e rrh: ittha HI: om
KLM 0 Har ch ,'a: uva CGH ; uii E lafJimi DEHUCL" labhami AC·
lambbami GM 0
7.7 G · bba.a M · bhagya Har ch kiqi : E
7.8 sahi: om. IN 2 ACDEHIKl · upeared MO ; om. G
7.9 id: om CGsicM 0 ' . - anti ADEGHI ; oj .kramati C: kamandakya-
KL · parikriunati ; p . ramanti 0
7. 10 as"isa:na : asvasana CH . a' asa E: as a na G · sam _. a ana I matram etan :
para A ; 0 : etalt -I(; e aitam GH · e 'atan Midhavasya:
before karolj 0
7. 11 katm: utarata. A ; karata c: rHaratan D · ardranrda it 0 Bhgavati:
before karot; I beJore sarrriayi{a: h ntasarvatha. GH O· haota EKL·
sarvatha I
7. I 2 sa . D ' sambhfl.to E: S3.f!1, arto 0 tat ... karta am: om
L alra ABCDEGH· iha [. idanlm Kt ; om M 0 itii ABCDEGH · om
IKLMNO
7.13 anyad ABCDGHKMO' anyatkiiicid j. anyam EL upi.y intaram A..BCD
EIKMO; upayam GHL
92 M iilafimiidhava 7.14

vayasya Makaranda apl bhavan utkanthate Madayantikaya? /

MAKARANDAH
atha kim /
Tan me yat
alokya marp. /
trast) :aika: ha yana: kuraIiga :vilola
:unrta-sarp.valitair //8//
M AOHAVAH
sulabh» aiva / api ca
Pramathya kravy)-adaI!l maraJ?!a-samaye
labdhva lava katbam iv) anyatra ramatam? I
tatha ca nayanayos
tvayi vyakta :sneha-stimita:ramaJ?iyaS ciram abhiit //9//
MAKARA DAH
tad Para;Sindhu-sa1!lgamam avagahya nagarim eva
pravisa /
(utthaya
MADHAVAH
ayam asau ya
J ala -nibiqita: vastra natabh

7.14 Makaranda : om I Madaysntikayi ACD?B ; EGHIKLO .·

madayantikayiil!l MN
Sb ABeD; uttariyacett
c trastaika: sta traika E
kurailga: om E; after vilola
d ha: apaL
S. I sulAbbaiva: nadurlabba M 0 Buddharaksi1i: H1MN
om MNO; after suJabhaiva [
9b lkatham Ivi: kimatbava [
c ta.thi ca: tathapi ABD "Yapin.: vyapaTa C Da)'uiyi: vadanaya EKL
d vydta: vyaktaQ. CN; vyakt:al!l D sneba: MO stimita: stimira G
9.1 DEGHKN ; om ABCMO; makaranda (with no punctuation) I
lad: om E Piri: varada M; parada SindhOI: om M
ABCDI; saI!l bbedamcett Dag,u im 'e a: Ilaganuneva H; om L ' purim 1
9.3 before utthiiya: ubhau uttIIiya. om M krimata
kramya KL
9.4 M 0.; om IKL ,.,.atibra. : KL
C
lOa vyuta: L
10.1 Act IV 93

/
rucira :kanaka:::-kumbba :srimadj3. bhoga :tunga :-
astikabhir
(iti

ratbya-paribbramo nama
/ /caturtho //

lOb bbiimib. : bbOmi CK soina: snata 0 utthit.i " 'b : C'

udgatabhiQ D
c abboga: a,bhogi C
10.1 iti: om N Iliskrint ABCDEK- sarve GHILMO
10.2 radlyi paribbramo - I : om GHIM ratbyi ibhr:amo, ABeD ,' railiya,.
parikramo E ' sardulllSaI!lbluamo K; sardULllvibhramo LO after :
C
 ACT V

pravisaty aka.sa-yfmena :6jjvala KapaIakUJ?4ala)

KAPALAKU DALA
Sad-adhika :dasa :nacfi-cakra-madhya-sthit> :atmfl
hrdi ya4 /
a vicali ta sadhakair mrgyamflJ?a4
sa jayati saktibhil) Sakti-natha4 //1 //
iyam idanim aham
hrt:padma-madhy)--6ditam
pasyanti laya-vasadatmanam abhya.g ata / .,
nadinam
. . jaga ta h. pane) :am .rV-akarsanad
uda ya -kramena . .
agr,e
api ca
//2//
Ullola; skhali ta: kapala : kantha ,::,mala-

paryaptarp mayi aI!l

sarp.dhatte ega4 //3//
tatha. hi
pracalati nibi4a:granthi-baddho )pi
paru /
dhunoti vayur guiijann
//4//
O.l ujjvali ABDEGHIKL; C · ujj al 0 Jag (2nd) Kapila.
2 EK ; om elL
1bbrdi vi: hrdaya N tad ya . : sadhakanam
c L
1.1 idanjm abam ABCDMNO ' abamidanim EGHI Kl.
2a aity. ABCEHIKO' nityaJ"!l DGL Har I
d nabbo: bhuvo GH HaT Har .1.)
2.1 apica: om ] MN
3a oIlola: udvrtta IM 0 HaT
d t.aJa: talaJ"!l L
3. 1 tatbihi: om N
4a pracalati (D) : pracalita ABCI t bad: naddbo KL' bandho M 0
c aurdhvaJ:!l Sa".: ' iva G - j : kuiijan gaI!ljann K
d uttaJa C; 0 ABCDEl' patata GH ; pamkim
IKM 0 Har
4.1 Act V 95

(puro )valokya, gandbam agbraya) idaI!1 ca tat

taiD-akta ;paribb Dyamaoa: rasona.-rasa.- gandbibhi ' ,c ita -dhiimair
adhasmd vibbavitasya mahatai:t SmaSana ya nedi al;1 KaraD)-ayatanam
yatra paryavasita:mantra::: ad ban as > asmad-guror
ajiiaya adya maya I 5
ca me gUruq.3 - a e Kapalakur:tqale adya bhaga .
prag:upa a..cital!l stii:ratoam upabarta am i yad atr)
aiva nagare viditam a ta iti f tad icinomi / (sakautukam avalokya)
tat ko >yarn gambhlra' madbur>:akrtir
- 10
Kuvalaya-dala:' ,a mo )py dadhat paridhiisarnqi
lalita 'vik$ srUnan mrganka.:nibh> I
harati vina vamo yasya prakasita
pravigaJad..;.a p3J?·f //5/1
(niriipya) sa Kimandakl-subrt-putro

4.1 puro )vaio ya: a1okyac:a r· parikram .a aJokya L - om CK puro)

A, puroa(va.) D; adbo E ' atha M; om DOH O(CK au.lokya.: ilokya
after iighraya GH gandham i . 1- )ra: om Cl after aghrii 'a: ca E
ca tat: tat GH; ta at KL
4.2 uta: abbyakta G' om L pari: om J .i_ amina : aj amana G ' bharjya-
maoa 01 '. mrj.ylllJl[na L rasa ABCDIKO' ni . om EGHLM
4.3 adbastad: purasud KL . i't:asya: vibhavyaman&Sya GH ·m.sanasya
ABDE ; cett nediya C
4.4 yatn : tatra E' arm M afrer 'arm: ca GH si. anasya: syadbanasya [
a E
4.5 E fi.: before piijii HI . . om. sa.
L
4.6 ca: hi CM 0 me : om I
MNO after adya: maya
4.7 before priig: maya I ' attanmaya Yd
ABD; tad CElKLM Q . tacca GH
4.8 eva: omI vidit m / lad: om l " d n : 'C'itam H Har .1. - la:
liste L tad: tatad . tatta B 'lad -: om 0 after vicinomi:
Ilitiparihamyall I after HI : agre& IK • alokya: vil.o ya £N
4_9 gamblUra madh : atigambblramadlbura KLM O· 3timadh.uragambbIra 1
L k :tabkllli 1_ ABCD- tapalakuntaJ.al? [. EHKL 0;
kuntala G; M
4.10 s.naSinam: K.L
5a paridbiisaral!1: L Har .I.
b nIl.m ABCDEO Ja Har .f.; GHl t
c - . : sahasam L
d praYi : pari E Wo: lulan E ' vatan 1 ji . BeDE Har
5.1 beforeniriqJ a : Dipu,?af.!l' E after niriipya: a e IK ' ·a e M;
96 Miilatimiidhava 5.2

Madhava1?- 1 tat kim anena? I bbavatu samThitarp.

sa1!lpadayami I ca I ta.t ha
hi
Vyomnas tapiccha-gucch>-avalibhir iva tamo-vaHarTbhir vriyante
prfmta-vrtya payasi vasumatl niitane majjat> Iva I
vatya -saq1 vega - g:- vi ta ta: vala yi ta :sphI ta -: dhtlm ya.:prak
prarambhe >pi triyama tarut:tayati nijarp
(iti
I

(tatah. pravisati yatha

' -nirdisto
. . Madhavah)
.,
MADHAVAH
(sasamsam)
Prem>-ardrab praJ?aya-sprSa.l? paricayad udga4ha...;.rag):::odayas
tas ta mugdha..;.d(o nisarga-madhuras ce.ta bhaveyur mayi /
yasv bahya:karaI!a-vyapara-rodhI k.aJ?ad
api bhavat ananda- andro 1/7//
apl ca

om L priyasuhrt EM mahimi om HI mi
sasya: M
5.2 pal)ayita GKM ; paI?ita o · B tadbhavatu E bha-
va.tu: here om E ; yatha. MN
5.3 sa'!lpidayimi : sadhayami before v;galita: vilokya GH ca: om L .
lost in C (but with praya1! ( ic»
5.4 sa'!lprati : om EM 0
6a my-ante: srayante N · bhriyante G ?
b V!fYi BGsicHsicK lMO· atya ; a A DEl Subha ita niitan : nartane

c sa'!lvega: vitaea: ?v:ratati ] . after valnyita K

d nija BE B ' nitamanam L
6.1 iti ABCDEM ; parikramya GHKL ' i- [ . om 0 nis-
kreti: niskrante B
6.2 iti 0 vi . a : vi M
6.4 (2nd) 2 ElK· om Gsic l .: savajiiam G
7a premardrra M
b madhuriS: madbura M
c rodhl: rodhi N
d AIDlst
7.t api ca ACDEM lKL; om BGH
8a Act V 97

Avimukta:mad:::grathita:::kesa.r):::a an-
V:
sa ta adhivasa -subhag) :arpi ta stan am /
api iniveSiV...;.anana4
priyaya tad-anga-parivfttim apnuyam //8//
a tha va / idam eva ta at prartha e-
Sarpbhuy) ,e va sukhani cetasi paraH.l bhiimanam atanvate
yatr) aloka-path)-a atarilfi ratiql prasnauti netr)-otsa al) /
yad baI>:endu-kal»-.Qda ad a sarair iv)
tat pasyeyam bhQ 0 )pi tasya mukham
//9//
yat sat yam adhuna am,darSanam. n) eti s a.l po )pi na /
mama hi satisaya:.praktan):opalambha-saQlbbaviv...;.atmajanmanaq.
anavarala:prabodhal pram ' amanas lad-
pratyay)-antarair atiraskrta:pra ' abalf pri atama-m.rti-pratyay)-
tanmayl karory antar:vrtti-sa.riipyata.' caitanyam / 5
tatha hi
Lin» eva pratibimbiO) e .3 likhit» e ) otkirJ?a...;.riip» e a. ca

8a .vimukt. ABCDEIO Har ' atimukta CHKL ' ; apicaru G mad GHKLMO;
mud I; san A: H, D ; 'rsu atimukta a gratbita: valita. M
b st. am: stanah 0
c inm• . : ananaqt GH
d ling. : anka HIL pariV!1d . : parivartam HIKL; parivittim G ' pari artim M
8.1 affer athiJ lIa: duretavadetat LMO' duretavadetavat. e a t.i at : eta . at M '
tavat N' eva KL
9a saqlbhu aiva D10
b pratariJ?i G - a I uti ABCDEO; prapnoti G ;
prastauti H1KLM
c bilend : kalendu uday- d. ABO Jag udu C ' ucca ad EGHIK
LMO: uccayam a a : iva K' apa 0
9.1 be/ore yat: alba a 0 i : om L be/ore tat GHKL ; 'ha
E ' om ABCHIM 0 . darSana . " M ' 0. Telang, naiti I: sandar-
ABeD' ti E· GH; SlU!ldarSanan
nasti K: sa:rp.darSanenati L ) p. . GHL ; pi comK Telang; or"" AB 0
9.2 after mama hi: samprati GKl. 0: before mama hi sitlSay : m ABeD &
Da.SarUpa ad IV 19 be/Qre priikrantl : madaradbakularilh 8f!)pii akalanu-
H l upalambha IK -
atmanah M 0.
9.3 -, E : pra:fiyamana KL tad :
tattad K 'i' d!W .: isad!Sa EGH[](L ' sadfSa.i.Q.
9.4 l priyat i: pri -
9.5 tanmayi ABeD ; tanma atvamiva J: mnma antar vrtti EGH I K L:
pravrtti ABeD ' fiti 0 DaSariip
98 M iilatfmiidhava lOb

pratyupt» eva ca ev)antar:nikhaV> eva ca I

sa nas cetasi kilit» eva vi'ikhais GetobbuvaJ;t paficabhis
cinta -samta
. ti :tan -nibida:-syU
. t» eva lagna priya 1/ 101/
(NEPATHYE)
(kalakalat,t)
MADHAVAH
aho samprati
smasanasya raudrata! / asmin hi
Paryanta -pra tirodhi :medura:-
tamal;t 1
kela kilakila saIpIDadad
kurvate / nLI/
bhavatv aghosayami
'.
tavat l bilo bhob. Smasana:uiketanah
- '"
!
A: ' astra ta:n i rvyajaI!1 pu )-&pakalpitam I
viknyate idam 1/ 12/1
(NEPATHYE)
)

lOb lepa : lekha G ; sara DasaIiipa gha:.iten : nikbitna: nibbateva

c Cetobbuvab: . sitobhuvah.
10.2 Madhavab: om after akart?ya MO ai' ': abonu I' om
om GH; ita:stataq M pragal ', in : pragalbhata GHl. ; pra-
vrttamana M ; vardhamana ; pra arttamana 0 nikiiyasya.: nikarasya MO
ABCDMO; mahatl EGHIKL.
10.3 smaSanasya: smasana ya GHKLM 0 . I: LatlCll
11a pratirodbi : pratirodba GH?lIst HaT (pratirodhi Har v.l.) caya: ghana
KM 0 ; payas Har v.1.
b para : parama N abhoga : abhogi ABeD
c kilakila: kilikila HKO
d ABCHKLDcorr- E; GIMNODl t
sam I
11.1 bbavatu . . . om E 0 bha\'alu: tadidaf!1 M a g . y.ami :abha-
.ayami L ta at : om M; tavaa L before bho uccair KL
bbo bbobho IL ; bhogaq G nile: -.: G H' L
11.2 ABCDHIM 0 ; EGKL
12a aSastra: sV8Sastra 0 puts oin aj BCD 0 ; pfitamavyajam GHIKM
Har; Har .1.
b upakaipitam : 1
d idam: ili GKL
12. 1 before nepathye: punar EO; (art,er oepatbye) M
 12.2 Act 99
M AoHAVAH
(a.karr:tya) aye katham e a sarvatalf
samuccarad :uttala: vetala-mukta :tumul>: avyakta :kalakaD-.akulaQ.
pracalita iv) avirbhavad smasana-
, ascaryam!
rk
a- -:
ita ita dha adbhir ak"iryate /
°na ana :bhru nabho
. ka.·dirgha -: a pusam ulka. :mukhana
mukhaif? //13//
apl ca
Etat piitana-cakram ak.rama :krta :gra )-ardba:muktair vrkan
utpusnat panto nrmamsa-vighasair adardaram krandatah /
ak:tata:
snayu-gran tbi -ghan): asth j::paiija rajarat : kalikalam..alokyate / / 14//
(samantad avalokya ihasya ca) abo pisa'c anam! I
ete hi
Tata'Pfthu:rasan)-6gram a ya:gartam
dadhati vidarya ikin:talOtrgha -: I
lalad

12.2 Midhavab: om AD BD ; om cell L

12.3 samuccarad ABCDEG 0 ; samujjalad ; samuocalad HIKL; uccalad Har
vetala. mokta : HIK Har ; etala E: em la uLamukta GL; om ABCDM 0
avyakta : vyalcta IM
12 .4 pra : pra i ABD cali'ta i : calath-a ,'ad : om H before bhfita:
prabhUta l' bhuri I
12.4 ascar am : a."caryam _ GHK rep aced0

IJa rkva A8CD 0 ; · rk i. HI'!G ic; fila EKLM

b M 0 ita ieo: (ata ilo 0 ikiryate : akri ate D ;
apfiryate E
c nikiS : ikaSa G ; E
14a gra a : asa Subha.ita
b Ulp . ulphullat G - darda , ' BD 0 0 ubh- .ita ; agha.-gharam
CEGHIKL HaT
c dagbna : dagdba G " tae.. : \ ' ,'aktatah G
14. 1 ayaJok a : alokya E: vilolcya 0 BD ca CEHIO: om
GKLM(ABU prakiral:- :
14.2 ele hi : tatbahi ; ; om
15a tata tatprthu B: prthmara
b vidirya : vi ftya CGH ilk irl I ABCDE Har- ° vi ama GHIKM Har .1.;
vi'u .ka 0: vidirJ?81 L
c lalad B DEM ; galad 0: calad GHlKL
11
100 Mal'atimiulhava 15d

dyutim iva dagdha:puraJ?a:rohiJ?anam //15//

(parikramya) hanta, bibhatsam agrato vartate. /
Utkrty) otkrtya pra tham am , atha Pfth):u.c chopha-

sphlk piJ?q) ugra..;piitiini

jagdhva /

karankad
anka-sthad asthi-samstham api kravyam
avyagrarn atti // 16/1
api ca
preta-
kayan
krstva arpsakta..;.dhuman api kur:tapa-bhujo bhuyaslbhyas
citabhyah l
utpakva:sraqlsc.maqlsaqi pracalam ubhayataq
arad
ete udayinjr pibanti /1 17/1
(vihasya) aho pi '8, canam! I taiha hi
l

Antrail:1 kalpita strl-hasta :rakt>: 6tpa]a :

diva ABCDE]KN ; iha GHLMO ABDK; rohiUi:nfUn

Har v.1.
15.1 paribamya : parikramyavalokyaca ; parikramyavalokya 0 ; om M IN-
bbatsam: atibibhatsam M 0 afler bTbharsam : eva GHK :a grato : agre
GHK ; om L vartatle: om GH before stanza 16 : tathahj E
16a ABD atba : api GH 'ucclIopba ABCG H :
?utsaupha D ; ucchobha ]; utsedha ELM : uccbraya O· uchuna K
b al!lSa : aqt'a ABCD; anga E M . pindan B
piitini: putina G ; gandhini H j dagdhva G ..
c .a tta: ala. B; anta D ; E ; ata L: auta M; ayatta Har .1. sni)", antra:
paryasta E Har v.1. :a ntra: anla 'I; .antra MO nelra BDG; netriit I
rsDk.ah:. kaitkah. I Har v.1.
d astbi: arika ] S3.f!lstba 0 Subha)ta
17a asthi ABD; D Jag pari':l man : parigalan MN
kayaD :kayat Bband' 0 (with dbfimad for dhuman)
M; a a ha M 0
A

b a 0
c pracalam ABCD ; praca1ad ceU :i irid : .a dav I
d ABCDEKLO · a G; HI; 10 t in M· ni. hu.ya
17.1 pisacinam E· om Cl ; piSacangananam L catbihi AB OH . om cett
18a MO basta rakta: ha taratna H : ratnaha la utpa'I'a:
utpalai B; E
b Act V tOI

vyakt) pinah a sarasa hrt :pul!q.anka: I

etal;1 S3.f!1bhiiya pibant
asthi-sneha :suraI!l // 18//
(parikramya. 4ASa trapiH ), et :adi lcathaJ:!l drag ati-
prasanta . :vibhI .ika::: p rakarair pi' acail;1. I
aho / ( anirvedam) vi ardhitas c) ai. a smasana-
/ tatha hi khalv i purata e a

kran dat:phera /
an tah :sIrna: karaIika -karka ra - :kiilamkasa :
a Sarit 1/ 19 1/
EPATHYE)
ha tada ha I?-ikkarut;la 0 daqi de
i ajjadi./
b vyakta:kanta E - Cl ' . KL ; saha.s3. ABDEGH 0 Subha ita
c kuiakuma : kardama
d ABCHIM ; ura.q DEGK.L 0 :k - : kalapa G
pnti : M
18. 1 parikramy.: om M after parikramya:
o punr: om E ; before 0 ASasInp - . ': ABCDKL' a.saslra-
putamiti E ; 3Sa trapiitamaV) -jamiti GH' aSastrety M: vaSastraputeti 0
icli ABD . om cett drig ABCDKL ; om nama GHIM 0 ati ABKM
0 ; iti CD; g)gati L; om EGHI
18.2 raSinta : PraSanfal:!l ABO' om M vi -.iki :
E prakirair : vitirair . -' : BDK · jbagity I
I ·· -cai . :
18.3 rve lilO - nib. tl tiipiSacanatn
GHKL before wrinedam :
HI vhardhitiS ABeD vivrtaS E · vicitaS GHLM o· idita' IK esa:
eva NO saneata. ABOE O · C- samantat GH' mamtat K '
L' sarval? : piSaca K
18 .4 hi : om IM purata: agra
] 9a gbiitkira : putUraalgita : ; S8.J!l vellita argita 0 ;
saIp. vallita. SUbba. ita Har
b can : om E : 4atkrta K :
c M' (bltrti
sir .• : klrJ?A I 0 karkua : karpara . paiijara. t tara1!
ABDEGHLM 0 ; pa lK .. Cl
19.1 oepatbye : naipatbye 0 I ) - : hahadamhi G · hihadambihii. (2nd)
- ABCD· om oett 'eso : om - __ ABCDE' GHIKM 0 ;
L de : om CGl nui AB DOH 0 ElKL
D' G
19.2 u ayaraJ?al'!l D ; u ,a arano G ' uvaarana K ja,?-o: om C
 102 M alatimiuihava 20a

MADHAVAH
(sakiitam akart:tya)
Nadas tavad vikala:kurarl-kiijita:snigdha ':'13ra'
citt>-akarsl paricita iva . eh I
bhramati vih alat angam angarp
deha-stambhal;l skhalayati kim etat .//20/1
Karal»-ayatanac c> ayam uccaran
vibhavyate - nanu sthanam tad idrsam J/_l //
bhavatu, pasyami / (iti parikramati)
praviSato dev)-arcana-vyagrau
Malatl ca)
MALATI
ha tada nikkaruna, eso dani de narinda-citt> -arahan)-6vaaranam
5 jar.lO vivajjadi'j ha amba hada )si devva-duvvlaside'I;la'/
ha mama
beforejano: vi L; a M vivajjadi ABCDm . vivajjaf GHKO ' va ajjai L ; vipajjai
MN
20a kujita: krandita 0
b iva: ita 11 t itah Icorr
c vibvaJaty: vijvalaty G
d deba : gatra M 0 Slambhalr G K L a J a.y ati gatil!J: kba-
ABCD; E
21b UCcaTan : uccarat ABDKl Har (0 also but apparently by mi
rasvati read ucca ran) ABCDEIMO: karul?o GHKL
IdrSim EILMNO; idrSam AB DGHK.
21.1 before bhavatu: lad E iti EGHILO' om AB DKM parikrimati: om
BGM
21.2 de¥ircaua: devatabhyarcana I
21.3 ca: before Malatl ABDI ' om C
21.4 hi ticla ... vinjjadi : batadetipl1rvavat L ; hatadet aM nikkarnna
(Arnarg) : I)isama CHAlst .; D ; b1i1).ikkarut;lahaQisama D de :
teidanlm Har Kath ch ABCDE ' I 0 ' om GHK de : om
ACDGH O' BEIK DI -
arahal?ovaaral?o CG; K .
21.5 om D vivajjadi ABCDE ; i ajjaI GH KO ; vi pajjadi I ; ipajjai
GHKL (snehamaya Har ch) ' E; I ; maIp. ir?eha
; tumampi ABD; om CMO hiae : hiaa G dena CGHKLO' dew M .
divva I; ABDE du : om C ' du
21.6 Maladi: malat! E m u : maia A ; mai D' gada E; mia I ji\tide : jl ie M
before mama: ha ADD mama : maha M GL :sa-
ba",ekka: saha ekka B ; sadhal)ekka C ; a I sub.: pautta E' mukka
L' om 0 saala : sahala I ; sakala
21.7 Act 103

Bhaavadi >si dukkbaI!1 I ha piasahi La angle

aha1!l de a.rp.vutta I
MAD'H AVAH
hanta, s» aiv) eyarp ' / samprati nirastae a
deha4 / tad aham api nam) ainaq. 1'1 sam bhava ye 1 10
parikramati)
KAPALIKAU
devi Camunde namas te I

nyaiicat.karpara
sthiti /
pataJa-pratimaUa:galla-vi
vande nandita: i akta..,;.rddbi val;l kriqitam
/122/1
apt ca
Pracatita:kari:::lq1ti-paryanta-cancan:oakh)-agbata-bbinn) :
re ota-Ji at:kapaD-avafi-

21.7 B .. wadi : bhaavai M after bluu:n'Odi: kamaodae 1 ' kamaodai M drassa :

after jOI}iividasi E SlD, AB D ' om [ Iba : ha L
21 .8 ABCD ; sa EL; i GH.' i il?aa asara
sivil)aavaa ara M ' : ham M de : le GL Har cb' before
aham A BCDEO
21.9 banta : om CGI .1 an i : om t 0 ni: had-
E before sarttprati: hanta GH . pnd . . .
Asn· natrasaodebaf? E be ore m
2L10 tad: om CE GHKLO' om ABCDEl • HKMO Har '
bha atu ABCD ' apmiimabhavatv E; apiWn G' ainam (en.aI!l) I' eva l ' om '
enil!! EGHl - etam KL ' hen: om ABeD 0 ti . : 1'i a ant:'ir!l] after
jivanti.!!'!: eva CM 0 - D- enam B sa -.n . e GHKL; sambha-
veyeyam I ' sambha .ayami BCOEM 0 be ore IvariIG'!1: "iti E
ta l!l : satvararn E' 0' tval!'t
2U2 KipiJibo ... Dam e : om I alikau D,' kapatalcuJ?qala- -
0 e : mm tine; namastenamaste 0
22a : Di umbba ACI 0 HaC' mbllramlll: nir'bhara GHIKL Hac
b rigaJad.: 11 'calad ABO ; i,galal · C- sdliti : thitib IM
d naodita : andi la . tani\ ktal!'tava
am AD
238 nda CE I-
otaj [, Scala. GHK '
 104 Miilatimiuihava 23b

svasad:asita:bhujailga-bhog)
phullat
o4q.amara :vyasta :vistari /
jvalad :anala :piSailga: tunga: -bbim) :6ttamanga-
bhrami-prastut> digC::bhagam uttun.ga:
)-3dd.h uti tara:::gar:t am /

auandi
vas tal?-9aval!l devi bhuyad ca hr. ca //23//
(ity
MAOHAVAH
dhik /
'"

pap):arambhavator mrg» iva vrkayor bhIrur gata gocaram /

s»eyal!l Bhiirivasor Vasor iva suta mukhe vartate -
ha. dhik ani$m! ko VidheQ
1/24//
KAPALAKUND1\LA
Tal!l bhadre smara )tra yas !av) abhiid -

23b otpbila ABCDEl ; (a)spllara GHKLN ; aspha.la MO pba .i : phat;l8V,aIi C

plga L go: H vistiri: vi sla ra. G
ABCDIO ; EGHKLM
lam H
23c tunga ABDIO Mar v.I.; C ; oetra EGHKLM Har ocb .8: 0;
lost in A ; Ccorr ABCDEO · sanna G.K; (a .opa IHmargsic Har v.l. ;
sa!a L; bbara. MN uttnilga I
om Hsic S!ilga ABCDEINO ; GHKL ; baddba M uddbuti GH1M
0 ; uddhiita ABCDEKL
23d lVetila: om N tiIa KlMN Har .1. ; cola ABCD · rola. E· oada GH; hasa 1
Har ; rava 0 (sphu) . .. hsta 318 · folio 2 J lost in A
yan : hrn B BCniMNO ; EGH KL EH·
G; 0 oa . : IM
23.1 ity: om BCDE a ' .Y••• . G
23.2 after MMhavalJ: vilokya 10 dhik BeDIO ; badhik: EGHK L M ; om pra-
pramadapra:madam C D ; om
24a BCDMNO ; H; I· GKL?E
candala CE
b irambbuator: arambhakayor L
c mukhe : vaSe N
d L 110 »)'a .: I idher B
v

25a KapiJakuJ;ldaJi. MNO, tapaJa CG, kapa DEK, kanalakuf!l L · kipalikau B,;
25b Act 105

adya tvarnyali K[tantal;1 /

MALATI
ha, daia Mahava paraloa-gado i umarida 0
hu so u arado jassa allaho sumaredi /
KAPALAKU DALA.
hanta, Madhav)-anurakt» e af!'l tapasvinl /
AGHORAGHANTAH
(Sastram udyamya)
bbaga ati mantra-sadb.an}-artham
bhajas a piijam 112511
DH AH
(sahas» opa ft ' a Malati£!l ' a) duratman,
apehi / pratihato) i kapal" :apasada . /
ALATI
(sahasa vilokya parittaadu 2 aha bhao ! I Madha vam
,a lingati)

kapalikau HI la . BeD .O · am EGHllUL a'itd: yad M

b adya : DE
25b.1 hi : om GH Har Kalh cb O · de Cl Har ch· devva BDE·
GH 11: madhava I ' . : om OHI ; after jm;w M
25b.2 b : G . H : uparado I aIlabo : vallabho D
after jllf.lO L wnaradi ILO· ' umarei
25b.3 kapaJ · \I I t a : tham M before lapasvini: varaki L
after lapus in!: bha atuyadastutadastu nata.!?-paJ"aC!lvilambitena E
25b.4 Sastram. Y )la: om L ' 4gam BeDE before (Amu1Jt!e:
yadastutadastuvyapadayami 'G HL
25c sidba:nirtham BCDEGHK ' - dhanada
d Ib hjasY,a : L
25.1 after stanza 25: itibaotum· h ti E; itihantumupa -nUb L
... - ' a.i / .-- m L .' a : om G ilati: om
IM 0 '., : lK -
OH , ' GH
: duratman, D· d1l:riltmann CK
25.2 llipi1iki,p asada :

25.3 . a ole. HILMO parit-

tiadu : pariu.ayadu -8 2 DEK· repeated DO Bar ' cb ' om GHI -. Har
Kath ch before iJahQ -0: GH a/ru aMbluio: mwa 0 G·
mAha H it' : om GK
 106 Mala t'imadhava 25.5

MADHAVAI:l
Mahabhage na bhetavyam 2/
Marana-samaye
so )yam sakha pura eva te /
sutanu visrj) asav iha
phalam anubhavaty ugrarp. pratipa:vipakinalJ //26//
AGHORAGHA TAH
ka papa )smakam /
KAPALAKU ·DALA
sa ev) ayam Bhagavan asyah sneha-bbilmih Kamandakl-suhrt-
• • I •

putro /
MADHAVAH
(sasram) Mahabhage kim etat ? I
MALATI
5 (cirad asvasya) aharp pi put;ta
- uvari :alinade pasutta, iha vibuddha tti / tumhe una kahirn? /
MAOHAVAH
(salajjam)

25.5 2 BDEIK ; repealed MO; om CGHL

26a tyalctiSailka .: E· a L tyakti BCD[KM O·
mukta GH asaitka 10 · BCDGHK ; M praJipa :
pratapa EGHL oirargala CJKNO; BDEGHL ; M
d bbavaty : bhavatv E ugra . : etat E ; I
26.1 ka: om I pipo: papoyam" JM
26.2 Bhagavan: here BCD · before sa EGHIKLMO ; om .ayam BCDEGHK '
om ILMNO Kimandakl putro : om pri a uhf! M
26.3 mal1lsa M paw:aiyiti: pa!?Ayita GHIKNO madha-
vonama E ; afler putro I
26.4 sisram : om B
26.5 cirid : om CIK before aham: mahabbaa LM ·0 abal!ll pi
om EGHIK Har cb; folio 28 of F here begins 1kil!i pi BDL; c·
F; M· vi N · 0 M: om. ett1ka
E ,etti a . CDEF G ' ettiaf!l cett
CDF; BEL; d1lva GHK lava! Har ch . I; M . pUJ?o 0
26.6 unri : uari EKL ; upari N iliDdae BCDF ; aJindae EH] . alinde 0; alindaam
G KL; alidaI!levva M pa : ppa H ; om ' : idba E vi CDEFI; pa
BHK.; pa<!i GLM 0 bud Hi .: bujhjbami K Hi BCDF · mmi [ . mbi
EGHLMNO ; (a) mi Har ch kaIai . : kahaq:t 0
26.7 sabjj_ : om I before stanza 1: paye B.; lost in. C
27a A t 107

Tvat-pir:ti :pa.nkaja-parigraha-dhan ajanma

bhiiyasam ity abhini eSa-kadarth amanab I
bhramyan a pareta-bhiima '
ikaIl!ya bhiru ruditani ta > agato ) mi 1/27//
MALATI
apavar a ae mama karanado ede appa-
paribbbamanti. /
A.DHA AH
aho nu khalu bho tad etat ka.}{ataIi af'!l nama I hi
Rahos candra-kalam i ) anana-carlrp. daiat samasadya me
dasyor asya ad pr'e asim I
atailkad vika1aI11 drutam.. ik. visma at
krodbena j muda ikasitaf!l artatam ?//28 /1
AGHORAGHANTAH
arare, :4imbha
Vyaghr >-aghrata :m f,gl-kry»-akula :mrga-n ya ena
papa prapto )si me gocaram I
so) hal!l prag bha at» arva bbuta-jananun rdhnomi khaqg)-ahati-

//29//
27a pit;li : pada F db:a:n!'. : PUQ 0
27.1 sahusam BCDF · om cett BDEFGHKL 0. ; s agatam Cl
aeBCD ;baddlUH'omcett I. 0 ma-
ma : ma M · maha tira . -do: I.' aJter
jjeva EH ; jje . K : e MO ; eVVllQl G ' e f"!l l : 10 tine ede : before
paribbhamami M ; om L 11i BDFGK ' pi H: 10 t in C ; om E]LM 0 Har ch
27.2 qirapekkba HIO· l:rira _kho l ; Har ch pari :
om E tJi BeD O ' bbamanti EH' kk,a mantl GI kramanti Har
cb) ; kkamadi L ' 10 l in F
27 .3 ID ima : om L ; C sal ' '' : tathabi CF
28a samisidya.: samagatya BCDF
b sama.y ad L
c i •• ilkid : akrandad I
d vartatim : vartate M
28.1 arare El ; arere B: are CDF " rere GHKL : ' reare 0
29a igbrita : aghata D 1'QCe. : B
b pipa : papat:t 'goc:a.ram :goca.ra1?
c ] . . .. omi . mrnmomi
d vyast.: cchinna L BCDEF Har Kalh; pragbbara GH1KLM 0
HaT Cal . - BDHILO; niyandina CEF' ni andina G' 01.-
K
 108 Miiiatimlulhava 29.1

MADHAVAH
duratman
Asaram tribhuvanam
bandhava:janam /
jana-nayana-nirmaJ?aID
jagaj katham as] // 30//
api ca, re papa
Pranayi :sakhl-salila -: parihasa :!ras)-adhiga tair
api tfunyati yat /
vadhaya tatra tava Sastram
patatu sirasy iv)
AGHORAGHANTAH
.,
duratman prahara 2 / nanv ayan.t na bhavasi /
MALATJ
paslda, sah.asia khu aal!l hadaso / ta paritmaha
man.t, f?iattladu imado aQ.attha-saq:tsaado I
KAPALAKU ,DALA.
Bhagavann apramatto bhiitva vyapadaya /
- "
. TAU
5 (Malati;Kapalakuf?q.aJe prati) ayi bblru
29.1 before duratman : arere B' . a0 p -.a'!4a BDEFM O · c·
GKL; H; I CHKL
30d vidhatu L vya,asit viva G
30.1 repipa : om I re : arare E; rere 0 pipa : .
31a praJ?aya GHM saIiJa : sale1a G · om F
b sirisa : sanra I
c vadhaya: vidbaya B tatra : tata B ; om •
d patatu: patanti I UJ?ga [
31.1 before durii/man: duritma : a/rer praluJra _ L ' in both places H
2 BCDEFIK ; repeated GHMO ; om L nu : om L L
31 .2 after pasida: 2 BD sihasia : saa ia I : after ,!aha FL !:.lad.ha · EF
.a/ter T}aha: paslda GH (pr.a slda Har cb) ' DGHJKLM · kkhu B FO' a
om E a.I!l I' eso M 0 hadiso : hata 0 H
parittiaha om BCDEF Ja g "
uaadu M ; Wiasu 0
31.3 Di CGH; oipa E; pa:t;li L . ffi.do CDEFIL' attidu B; attladu OH'
vvattiadu K ;vattiadu M . attia 0 attha GH -do:

31.4 kapaJika G ' kapalika H · kapa I apramatto : pramatto 1

vyapidaya: I ; vyapada ava L
31.5 ayi: atha M
32a Act V 109

nidhehi bata e. a
va kada cid api kena cid an abha i 1

pramadaf? .//3211
EPATHYE

S R E
(akart?-ayan ti)
(PU AR ' EPATHYE)
bbo bho MaJaty-an iyam amat a:
Bhurivasum asvasayanly ap,ratihata..;pratijiia Bhagavatl Kamandaki
vW, samadiSati / parya atam idaJ!l Ka.ral»-a atanam / 5
N) anyasya karm> aitad
na Karal»-Opaharac ca phalaman ' ad ibha ate //33/1
KAP'ALAKU DALA
Bhaga van
AGHORAGHA AB
samprati akaSag !

32a bat. esa : hata ,e va H (e . pa , irp. : Jo{io __ of A here b gins

c satpgara : iidana GHK ; qilirti -dhi i : ibha ita B kfita:
k,oti M
32. J before kalakalal): mahan B kdakal I;t, , ,punlll' 'Depa ye : om E
32.2 :s ane - AB DFIKLM O · rva H ti : L
32.3 punar adlye GHKNO ; oe ath}'e B ; o m A.OFIL ( E) : lost in C 'bbo bbo:
bho2 BD; bho G?A ; bboi?- H . · 10 tin C ' om M faJaty . _,
om Man,. . B fGHIK ' an . 0 ; an inah El 0
.- B DGK ' HI: saini EL · om ) : om H
32.4 Bbiir,iv : vasubbutim 'G . tijili : apratijiia L apratibata.:
pratillati i; su K tj- - . B DFGHI K L ; rajiia E: pTajiiaca ,ur M;
matir . gatir 0 ; pr:aj'ftagatir Bhand CD g." ti : om L
32,5 va : om 0 -_ . 0 : samuddiSati I befor;e par ava: sarvataq E
afler atOm : 2ta dE: iti (I T id. AB DEF· etat GHIKL
M 0. after Kariila 'atanam : drutam GHKL before a hora : kapaJa-
/1 AB DE
33a ;aghora : ,agtJora AD
b afrer etad: ' khalu 3nu;Ja da rur:ta GHM 0
d before l'ibhli 'aI, : bha, · , li aft r iti
33.1 before Bhagavan : bho HL : m E eo e parJ a\'a :
ABDELO ; om CFGHIK
33.2 -' t. : hi E· M pat ABD ; paUrll, ya- cett avak:iSab
AB OF ; ayama E; a GHI L I 0
 110 M iilatimildhava 33.3

MALATI
ha tada, ha Bhaavadi! /
MIDHAVAH
bhavatu, vidhaya tat-
5 ev) ainaIp. duratmanarr,t vyapadayami /(Malatlm
kapalikav prerayan parikramati)
MADHA'1>; AGHORAGHA. TAU
(anyonyam uddisya) papa
Ka!hor) :asthi-granthi-vyatikara -khaqa tkara

niratailkal}. iva nipatann

asir sapadi lavaSas le vikiratu //3411
(iti sarve)

'smasana-parikramo llama
/ /paficamo )nka4 / /

33.3 after Bhaavadi : parittaahiparittAahi 0

33.4 bbavatu: om M bindha"a jaM ABCDF ;. hamdhava ceu bindhava j ....
sama(ja) : folio 28 of F here ends samija samaje E ; samasthiiJ!:t N ·
I ; samajastbitatll L MalarUD : enam 0 pj-
dhiiya : sthita1!l E vidhiya : nidhaya B before {at : tatas L tat 5aJQa_
barn eva : om 0
33.5 eva ABCDGHK ; om EilM 0 om BCDIO om
LMN Milatim : E anyatra N
33.6 kapilikav om EKM 0 ipilikiy ACD ; npaJika. B' lcapalitkim.
GI' kapalikiim HL aDyatar;. ABCOGHl ; om L(EKM 0 prerayaa:
E; lrurvan I parikrimati / Midh.."igJJongba . .:au: taumiidha a-
E krimati .. . (34a): om L
33.7 uddiSYIl: samuddisya M pipa: I .; arerepapa 0 ; om. M
34a ... Miladi tti (VI 3.3):foJio 3/ of B is lost CD; lost in A
(B); E Har ; GH KL· kbanat 1. M 0
bkhara : A ; after ils lacunn L vyuparamar;.: L
c niratankaf!l M ;. niratanka IN Dipa....
ACDEM 0 ; pra arann GIst ; isarann HKGmarg ' vilasann IL Har
d gitral!l : gatraJ1l2 D.; r rildratu : iharatu AD
34.l iti: om N before parihamyal/ I
34.2 before imasiina: malatImadha e K · . nmalatimadhave H ' itimiilatImidhave 0
smaSiDa •• .>nkaJ;l: pal'!lcam0f!lKaQ · L
sm-sinaparimmo nima ACD' Smasana EHO ' SmaSanllJ!lnima
GK ; om IM
 ACT VI

praviSati
KAPALAKUNDALA
a.h duratman Malati-nimitta-vinipatit>...;Jismad-guro Madhava:
hataka! ahaq:l tvaya tasminn avasare nighnaty api
str» ity avajiiata I (sakrodham) tad avasyam Kapala-
vi.1asitam I 5
kutas tasya bhujanga-s.atror
yasminn sad» aiva l
jagarti
kotir bhujangl? 1/1 11
(NEPATHYE)
He rftjanas carama...;.vayasam ajoaya
bhiimideva1;t
mana :vacana-mi.v ahais
pratyasannas
ya vac ca sambandhino na para.patalilti ta vad vatsaya Malatya

0.1 'pr:niSati Kapildu: . pra,rj ' ya ACOO

0.2 (lad) HM AeDO ' 2 EG1Kl ' om a ADL;
NO ' 10 t in O(B) nimitta GHIKL; nitta. E' nimitte . ACOMO
vinipitita CILMO ' nipatita AD ' " - padita EGH K
0.3 .I lataka : c.- om L "ayi: [ ayabaql after a,'asare ACD abam .:
abatp.ca l. tvayi : before sr,iG a asare: smivasare E asminn:
asminn M aiAlayall!l aigbaaty , ': om M aig....ty E 0 ; nighoata
ghnaty I · nighnatp.ty KL ' ACD
O.4tad .,uyam .. ., apa bya I 7.n : a lacuna the length of one folio becween
those now numb red 16 and J exists in D. bIaa ..·.Y ' : bbavasi I Kapila-
E .0 '&: kopa K rilasitam ACO 10 t in
BD).; vijrmbhitam EGHKl . fa asitam ] . phalam
I b yasm.inn am liDol: yatranubandha.n u I

d E nij G
2a be : bho EL
cc:itra1p : hi.: lala I cacaaa: racana H ohabaiS: ni ahaS I
GHI
2. I yivac ... pataatii: nayavatsambandhinapar:apanti C yi c 'ca EHlKLMO '
yavat AGN(C aa: DU ; om paripa ti.: samapalanti ;. a .yanti
GK 'atsayi: vatsaya K ; a/ler Malar 'a: saha EGHL
 112 M tilalimiitihava 2.2

avighna: mangaHiya gantavyam, ity adiSanti

Bhagavatl-nidesa-vartino - tatha
anuyfHriko jana iti /
KAPALAKU DALA
5 bhavatv ito MalatI-vivaha-parikarma-satvara:pratIhara-sata-
sarpkulat pradesad apakramya praty abhini-
bhavami /
(iti
/ /

10 praviSati
KALAHAMSAKAH
. .
ary.atto >mhi sa_Maarandena
J?aha :Mahavery.a, jaJ?ahi clava patitta Maladi Ijav.a tti I
ill java nam
. . anandalssam
. .. /

2.2 a.vighna mangaHiya : OlD I glLotavyam: gantam. A ; HI ' gamya-

tarn N ity : om A
2.3 njdeSa vartino)matya kamandald M .0 befor.e lalhiJ: an acca LMO
tathll ElL; tada A ; tata. c- tal. GHK ; om M o U,bita : I!lw.hita GK
vise.a K ; om L
2.4 a?A ;
GK anuyiitriko ACHllM ; .a nuyalriko EGK 0 id. EGHl.KMNO; om
ACL
2.5 ito: iti I parikarma : kanna GL ·p:natihant : pratiban A' 10 t in qBD);
praflhara M sata : jana
2.6 . amkulat : samakulat £ pradeSad : dciad J
2.7 bbavami: prayami J
2.8 iti: ACE) L
2.9 vi.kambbai? M
2. 10 tata pra iSati pra i' ya CM b. : kalahamsah
'.
LM 0
2.11 (2nd) Kalahal!lSakal:l H. oba,!,sal:l) 0 : 2 EGIKL GIKLO'
ACEM ; H J?::hara I dev.a di : de am HO gabbba
harB.: gihagabbha Egabbba : gavva IG ; garbba I ; ghara GH K.L
MO ; f-'haraa I; pbura attina O ' uhia thid H'
1; K. L ; lhila HaT ch M&ha" _
mahavapa G. altir:ta} K. L ;.madha . -
aka'avarttinamakarandeoa Har cb aar: C
2.12 AEH ' maba I: ; 0 ;
om veQa in marg) C , before jii'Jahi: jaha G HK ( atha Har ch)
GHNO ; jahi L dan : om jatt- : elto HMO : ito 1 Har ch'
ido N AEGM O · HI ; himuharp KL ; bhimukham Har
ch; lost in C(BD) Maj·adi : malati C ' mala] i tti AE; 10 t in BD)'
vetti GHIKLM 0
2.13 java : dava M om OH ic i I)anda'i aJ:p G:
I)andayj saf!1 H; aQanda i I' . K ; illeg in .
3a Act VI 113

praviSato Madha a ' Makarandau)

MADHA AH
pratham):a alokana-dinad arabh a i
sneha-viceJitair nita ya param /
ady> antal;i khalu sarvatba.) ya madan >-a ,a sa-prabandha ya me
a Bhaga.vati-nitir viparyetu V3. 1/3//
MAKARA DAH
vayasyakatbaI!1 hi Bhaga sumedhaso n"itir /

naha dittbia i - paiitta khu

Maladi tti J
MADHAVAH
api satyam ? I
MAKARA DAH
sakhe kim p!CCha i. I na ke pra v!ita 5
pratyasann3. ca vartate / tatha hi-
Asmakam eka: pada e a marud-
Jlmuta-jala-ra it>.:anukrtir

apakaroti 1/4/1
3a. dinid ACEGHIK. I 0 a alok diva ad L' a aloka i 3Isad N
GH1KLM ' i taribnic ACE ; vi 0
b lJl!ga ACIO - parim : M
c ayasa , , b )'a EGHIKlM a asa rasarva AC 0
d viidadbifu '11- : vidadhiitume G
3.1 \,aY8S)'a: om I hi CGHKL; om AHM 0 umedhaso : samedhii M
samedba 0 nim : Sailctir M . sa tir O ' iUg in C \iparYe!!yati : iparya-
K
3.2 upasrtya: om K E: lI1aha.va addha i H'
vaddbaseI AHIM . Ikhu CEKO ' hi GL jatti CEK ' Ho GHMO '
illeg in I' om L; vitto ID) . . G' K(L) '
bbimukham Har cb
Miladl Hi : miiladi M ,0 litleIL: malaw after khu ACE
3.4 M idha "11-. : folio 32 of B here begins a i : apinama GHIKL satyam :
malati K
3.5 Makaranda1b. : om 1 : om BO afrer dadhiinah: Ai a GHK pra-
vrtti: ; om B
3.6 praty: om ca: om tatIbiihi : om
4a eka pade: ekapadaro GH
b jala: brnda
d grew!].a: srn B
 114 M lllatimildhava 4.1

tad ehi, /
(tatha kurvanti)
KALAHAM. SAKAH.
pekkha 2 / ime dava uppad,ida

5 gaal}
vahanta mangaD-adavatta-J?ivaha / disanti a savilasa:dalida
v14ia -piirida :kavola -maJ?4aD-abhoa-sarahasadara: kkhalida :mahura:-
viviha:raaJ?)-alailkara-kiraI)-

4.1 ABCKLMO; EGIN; H

4.2 tUrl'anti : hi G
4.3 t:\iha : t:ladha CE; t:laha 2 K 2: ABCEGHL ; repeated MO · om IK N Har ch
ime : ido GH CL ; uppadida AB ; uppbalida E · GHKNO ;
uppai'a IM
4.4 ibhirima: abirama EMO saniiral?apellal? 0 uvvella ABe O ;
uveIla EL ; ovela G; ovvila H; uvvila [ ; ovvella K ; uvvelita M; ovvellia ka.-
daJii: kaalia N tarlui .. .
M
4.5 J vara BGHIL ; ara E; om ACKMNO ud-
I; (ra)kUl;J9a E 1
4.6 vahauta BEKL; uvvahanta I; vaha.nti CO; vahanto GMN ; uvvabanto H · A bas
the strokes of both ; and cl maiagaladnatta : maiagaJa
AB CO ; dhavala EGHIKL Har ch ; inailgaladhavala M adavatta : atapatta I;
adapatta MO AC disaDti a O · disanti ABEGHKL; im-
aodisanti C ; disante I; cfisanti / idoa M ; disantia / N· Rar cb da-
lida AHI (dalita Har Cal ch) ; valida BC ; kavalida EO.· dalia G · cavvida K·
kava1idacavvida L; kavalia M ; kavaIita Har Kath ch t.mboIa ABCKL·
tamboli E; tarpboli G ; tambiila HMNO; tambUla 1
4.7 HK ; G; I; ve4ia L - om ABCEMNO piirida : piirita L -
puna NO kavola: kapola HM · ka ?ola C B ibhoa :
avoga I sarahasadara B ; sarasa A; sarahasa C· vaiara EGHIKM (vyatikara
Har ch) ; gaiveara L ; 0 kkhalida :k.khavida AB ; (r)ukkhahda G'
kkbalia MO ; vvalia N mabura: madhura G ; muhu H ; muhura L
4.8 uggida ABCGHKO ; uggla ELM ; ogglal· ugg1 baddha EGHKL- baddho
I ; om ABCMNO
4.9 B ; vilambida E · 0 mahinda : mabenda IM
cava kbanda: t:lu N civ.a : caba H; capa lM om ELM( Har cb;
erased in K vicches AGHKM ; cchea B; viccbeda CE lL ; om 0 vi\,-
cburida : cchurida ABC ; vicchuria GO C
4.10 ABC El ; H · thalehiJ:!:t H ; thalehily G ; KMNO ;
L virasundari : davavilasir:u N kad..... GHIKM ; AL 0 .;
B ; kaambehif!! CE ajjbisidio A BCE I M ; ajjhasia G· aijasidao H ;
addhasilio K ; ajjhasiao LNO boa.. : kk ao. ita N
 4.U Act VI 115

alehim. varas'.lDdari-kadambaehim. ajjilasidao kananta:.kan.

.
, .a .a-=kinkini-
. 10
j
MADHAVA AKARA DAU

MAKARA DAH
ramani ab khat amat a:Bhuri asor vibbutaym. !
tat ha hi -
Prenkhad: bhiiri:mayij ra:::mecaka.::nibbair
i arti.bhir i a prante.u pary,avrtab.- I
vyakt>...;;akhaI?"ala:::kannukaiva bha ant
prastara-stbagita ]v > otir- itanair 1/'5/1
KALAHAMSAKAH
. .
sa. ambham> a.uid>:
ujjala: kaqaa ettalada-parikkhitta:
durado jj:e a pa.rian.o j esa a bahala .:
aralta : muha-mullala: gbolanta

4.11 nl.lida ABCM ' rar:'Ul 0 ; jab EGHKL: jalarasida 1 ' -,larnsita Har Kath cb);
om .: Har Cat. cb jha. j CELO ; BGH ?IM '
K EL· kkariQio after j/lailkiiri-
'G H kanu:lio K.L ; om Har Kalhb.
4. 12 Miidhava . akarandao: tau BC ; ubhanE : tauca 0 sakautukam : sakulam M
4.13 A8CE ' GHK' I LM 0
4.1 4 tatbi hi : om
Sa ma.yiira ABCEl. 0: mayiikha GH]K Har ln ibhair EHIK o,. ca.y air
A8GLM · 10 t ine E: I ; 101011 / erased and
44i1lO .in mOl"g K .
b
SOl after saswnbbramam I kadha EKl. ; kah3.J!l . BGHIM .
om 0 an . I. BeEr . anea GHKL 0 pal;li: a4i L
5.2 ujjala : ajjalaf!l G ; ,0jjaJ H . ujjalanla M kal.lu : anaka om H;
erased K kat ABCE ; kaladhau GHK - vibbanga I.; kaIahaiia L ;
kaladboa . kaladtuluda 0 ; mi .o,g in. . ilb atb O· atta K ;
paitkapattafikida A · pacta. ida B - palm C] . pailkaraida E ·· panb GHL · om
M . 'antarataragha"ia . R ar ch . "tta : citta LM 0 ladi :
1aa. CK Ilkhitt:ar: . ,tJta IQ ' thitta L
5.3 E';aida raia MO · om G - _0 : durado De AB EL ' . 'e .. C] · jevva G ·
jjevva HK · eMO ; om afto jj "a : seGK.L Harch) samdlido:
samnbido HI ' siddo M ' r '0 ; Har ch a : aa L ; om Iba-
baJa : om L
5.4 .afrer sindura : renu I rio : ..ago " Oft: opa GHK : C; om L '
Jag I . B·, mabora om cetl after

12
 116 Malatlmiidhava 5..5

5 kareq.u:raal!iqt alailkarentI ido jjeva

kodiihal )·ummuha :samattha:-loa-d"isanta;maq.ahara paI?-4ura;
parikkhama pa4hama :canda-Ieha vahanti
ci antaraql pasarida Maladi /
MAKARANDAH
vayasya pasya 2-
Jyam
kalita...;.kusuma baD) ev) antar lata /
vahati ca var)...;.aroha ram vivaha :mahotsava-
sri yam udayin1m ca vyanakti mano·rujam //6//
katharp., gaja /
MADHAVAH
(sanandam) katham, avaHrya
samam pravrtt » aiva /
pravisati MaJatl Kamandaki Lavailgika ca)
gholanta: kanta EHILM ; kananta G K ' kaficana Har ch l)ak-
khetta G
5.5 abbarat;l8 : aharaJ?a ABEL ELN ; dharanim GHI
kiiret;lu raanim: om L kareoti ACEKN' karanti BILMO ; karandl GH
before ido: E jjeva ABEL- yyeva Cl; jevva G' jjevva HK ; ev a MO
5.6 kodiibal): koiihal M; koauhal N ummuha ABCK; om m uha. G ; onmuha
HI; upphullamuha EN ; uppuUamuha O · uphullamuru M ; (a)muha L
disanta : dissanta MO; dIsanto ABCEGK 0 ; mal)obara HM·.
rnal)ubara IL AKL 0 ;. GHI ; BCE; ppal?qura
M after palJtjura : raa C
5.7 deha: muha L after sohii: vihavia,!atp.g a MO, (vibha iO) padhama:
puqhama M ; paqhamuggaa K ' L canda : al!lda L lebii-
lehiivvasiam A ; lehiivvasirisam B leha: reha E vibbbamam:
vihbhama I vahanti : uvvahanti A; uvahanti B ' vahati .
5.8 ci: kiiicia B; GK ' L ; hrp i before pasaridii: pariana-
mal).q alado M pasa:ridS .: parisarida H ; pasand.'\ I; pavida ; p:-. :;aria' 0
Miilacfi HLMNO ; maladl.tti ABCEGIK
5_9 2 ABCIL ; repeated KMO ' om EGH
6b kusuma ... lata.: kusumevantavantarlata i
c vahati: vadati G
d udbbl1tatp MNO
6.2 beJore avatirya: iyam E before Lm'Qngikiihhy iim: malat] GHJLM
6-3 samam itab: . sammllita. N samam: saha L ' om. GK itab. : itaeva EL',-

ita M pravarttataiva C- E ; pra rttal? L '

pravrttaca M; prav.rttaivapriya 0
6.4 pravisati: pravi:ianti 0 Malatl, ., . ca : L Miila.t i here ABCEM;
after Kiimandakf IKLNO ; afrer Lallangika GH
 6.5 Aa Vi il7

KAMA D KI
(sahar. am apa arya I

Vidhata bhadram no itaratu manojnaya vidhae

vidheya ur de parama:rama£?i pariI).atim /
k!"tartha pri a: )-6pa amane
krt phalatu "j atatis ca bbavatu /f7 //
vtALATI
(svagatam ket:la UI;t3 U aeI).a maral?-a-I).i ar:ta a
antaral1l a.J!l? I pi
ti bhodi I
L GIKA
(svagatarn . adikilasida khu pia hi a1!Uliila: /
(pravj" a p$La a:hasta) 5
PRATIHARI
amacco Bhaa adim bhaqadi-edeJ?a
vivaha-f.levaccbeI).a de ada-purado alamkarida a aladi tti /
6.5 apavary8l : iHmagatam GHK
7a no: no bhadra:r:p BGHK
c kftirthi : krtarthl L suhrd aparyop e: ubifdiyatnairabbimatail1 0
apatya: amatya H qP. c: upayamanat]
d prayatnat:s : pra a K ·i. at- " : 'i adayi E
7.1 s.v agatam : atmagatam 0,; om L om Har Katb cb ul'iet:'a: nae,?a
E; uvii 1; L; sampodan,t El _!\adal:!l : sampattaf!1 I '
before o,!ubhalli sa,!r 0 : Qi 0
al"!l : sam ha a i . H : sarnasadais.sru:p ; saI!l 0
before morO,!Q,!1 : aba a pi : .. ' f efore manda: mama 0 manila:
roaM bha dbe.a . . CEGH L . AB' bbaae MO ; dasae T
7 .3 ahl : abhi CG K 'b : om BK Ha r Kath ch duUah. : du ta am L bbodi
A E' bhoi B ; hodi GHIKLO ; Doi
7.4 kilisidi ABC ; ilamiq3. El- KO: kiIammadi G ; kilamati 1· kili ida L; kilfunia
M ' lesida ; klamita Har cb hu CGBlt ; kkhuB,EKO om
L HI: aJ:luaula m AB 'ppalam . ·palam·
bheqa M
7.5 pra v ' ·ya : Li 0 .:aI a BCE Q' G;
HKcorr; I: ?pe!iHaka K I t : L
7.6 Pratmiri : pratihin : tw ice GHO : pratihari 2 E L amacco : after
Bhaavadin.r M 0 Bb , "'adi!p B.EG : baa C ; bbaa adi H,IKMO
(but bhaga afim in baya rH : haa adi L; baa 'aj edi
BGH ; bha:ryai ,ede ABCE : cert 81: El '
L 1)8 : CEI : a 1Ji e idena
7.7 viviba: viaha G H D .• : GH' H: bena 1

12A
 118 M iilatfmiidhava 7.8

KA.MANDAKI
yuktam aha/ mangalikam tat sthanam, ito darsaya /
PRATIHARI
edaI!l dava edaql ca uttarlaql vann):
10 aqIsuaI!l, ime a savvangia ime mdttifl-hara, edam
candaf?aI!l at /
KAMANDAKI
(apavarya) hi vatsa:Makarandam
Madayantika / (prakaSam grh'itva) bhavaty evam ucyatam amatyal? /
PRATIHARI

devadi: devadae M (devatayah Har ch) before alam: savisesam 0 &Jam-

kiridavvi: alankaridavva ELMO?N tti : ti H
7.8 yuktam: ?siiktam E i b a ABCEMNO ; lihamatyal). GHIKLmingaJikam:
mangalikasya M after mangalikam: hi EHINO tat ABELN ; etat
GHIKMO; lost in C sthinam : om E ito ABMNO ; ate EGHKL; lost in
C; yato I
7.9 eVaJ!l G; L diva : om G ekka B ; ekkaf!1 AC; (lost in D);
dhavala EGIKLMN Haf ch ; H; om 0 ABCKLO;
E; G; H' IMN
colaql L; celaarp K; ualaJ1l 0 ; om EMN ... om 0 ca
ABCLN; a EGHl; om K; vi M C?EIL; uttarta ABGKMN (uttarlya
Har ch); om H(O) ACM ; BIN ; EH'
G; K; L
7.10 a GHKLN; avare AC ; vavare B ; om EIMO savvangii i ALM . savvangia
BCGIK; vassangia E; savvailgia H ' savvangi1:'a 0 ABEILMNO '
GHK ; C sal!ljoi: G ime ABCGKMNO -
eso E; me H; ima I; a(ca) L; aaf!1 Bhand ABeD after ime: a EGHK: ca
LM ; a N; om ABCIO mottia : mutti a G' munia HIN bua: haro EL
EGHKMNO; ime B; I' om ACL after edarrz: a E
7.11 candaJ;la ABC sita E ; vasia. AB' vasida C' sira G Har cb);
esacasida H ; asida I; siri K ; edaJ'!1sita M ; eda ida ; 0 ; om L apl-
laf!l a E; aViq.atti AB; CM; GH ; I' K
(api4aiica. Har Kath ch); LO; api4anti ; apJq.ah Har Cal ch
7.12 apav-arya: atmagatam GK; svagatam HO' folio 17 of D here begins hi : om
GHMN vatsa: IMNO GM .; ala-
H
7.13 NO ; nandanaQ M prakiSam : om N ; after gfhi1va MO
ptvi: om ABCD bbavaty ABD ' om C ; bhavatv cett evam ABDGH
MN ; ev.amity CKLO ; evameva E' ,emity I
A

-:. 14 Pratmari : after M before tatbeti L ' taha / iti 0

7.15 119

KAMA DAKI
Lavangike praviSa tvam abhyantaraI!l v,a tsaya saha j 15
LAVA G[KA
Bhaavadi uI;lli j
KAMANDAKI
aham api tavad vlvikte prasastyaIp sastratal;l
/ (iti
MALATi
>mhi saI!lvutta j
LAVA ' GIKA
devada.-mandira-duvaraJ.!l 1 20

MAKARA DAH
vayasya itah /
tatha

7.15 praviSa:praviSya G tnm.: tv B' om M after l'atsayii : malatya 0

7.16 before Bhaavadi: adba CHIL- aha AD ' om BEGKM.o Bwum
M ' kahaqlbhaavadi 0 Bbuvadi : bhaavadie K·
bhaavai N om C(MO) ' U¥I!l before Bhaal',a di IkwlI!I: om C
7.17 tivad CGHIK' om EL' after l'ia'ikle 0 vmkte: om. ABD ' before
ye L ABD; 10 t in C
EGHKN ' lMO nlniDim : ralna priSastyam: pn'iSastyam
BD' after siistratal} ABeD om H
7.18 BCDM' AK. · . pan1c:,i, , e EGHILO m : om
after iti: 0
7.19 before kadhaf!f : sva,gatam ELO ' atmagatam ka . EGHlK ' 0;
om ABCDLM La aiagii : lavangika H ,p a.,iviri : pari ara EGK;
LO )0 'S3J:!lvutlimhi EGK D-l!Indti : S3J!lutta B
7.20 Lav.a ilgiki : om [ ida . ABCDEIO ' edam GHKLM de adi: deva L
mandira: madira B ' maodirarp 1 duYira:J!I : dual'3f!l GHK after :
tipavisamha OH ; tiebipa isamha I ; tipavi -adu K tatpraviSyatam Bar cb) '
pavisadupiasabi: M 0
7.21 before pra"isatal) : iti ulbbau BE ' ma[au / caha 0 malati
praviSati M
7.22 ".yuy•.: om OHM ' a as AI.. • irita wir:au BCDEHI; apavaritau
GKLO' antaritab M Sa:rin : Sarau A ... pasya M ·0
7.23 before talha: ubbau M
 120 Mala tfmlidh ava 7.24

LAVANGIKA
sahi aam anga-dio, imao kusuma-maHio I
MALATI
25 tado I
LAVANGIKA
sahi pal?-i-ggahaf;1a-manga})-arambhe
devadao piiehi tti ambae at:tuppesida >si /
- -
MALATI
sahi kisa da1)i
pUI?-0 pUJ?o mamma-cchea-dusaham
30 manda-=-bhail)iq1 dummesi? / .
LAVANGIKA
al si vattu.:kama? /
MALATI
Jaf!1 dani dullah> :ahiJ?ivesl

7.24 sahi: om MN aa'!l GHKL (ayam Har ch); ABCD · e 0 EtO ; ime M
rao EG IKLO ; raarp. ABCD ; rao H ; raa MN ima.o: Una GH : imaif!1 L ; om I
kusuma maIao : kusumaim L' kusumao M maliio: malae G H
7.25 kim : im E
7.26 sahi: om LM mangala : om EL arambhe : samae E kaUii .... a :
(?Ia)sahassa E
7.27 devadao: devadam M piiehi ABCDE' puihi 1: a cce hi GHK . : piijehi LO;
plljaye(ti) M a",uppesida: CHIM ;' ape ida G ; idii. si:
sim H
7.28 sahi ABCD(sakhi Har ch) ; anirvedam HI ; s agatam MO ; om EGKL kisa:
kl MN da ....i ABCDE; daI?1m L ' daI?ir!:t cett befo re de\lva : duvvara GK
devva: sadevvasa M vilasa : vilasida E; i1a ia 0 ; iHisa
7.29 before l'Jijjhiivida: I?-iddara M' ,?ibbhara O. jihflvida ABCD1K ; ddhavida
G; ?jjll.rida E ; jhavida H' ddaddha L ; ddalida M ' 0 ; illeg in :. jjhavia
Har Cal; jjavita Har Kath CO (manasa Har Cal ch);
mar:tasaI!l N pUI,lo pUI,l0 : pUJ?o GLM after pr..f}o: vi ELM mamma
cchea : I?ivveda L cchea ABDI O ; ccheda CEGHKM
7.30 ABDM ; EGHKL ; C 0; bhai I ; bhagya Har ch after
bhiii'Ji'rl: ma.:ql ABDM ; om CEGHIK 0 ; before mandabhiiit!ir!, L dummesi
ADK; diimedi B ; dummavesi E' dllmavesi L ; G; dummia i C ; dumla i
H; diimiasi I; duvatavesi M: diimijjami 0 : af!ldavemi N ' dumijje Har Cal;
uddamijjami Har Kath
7.31 aiCMO; ayi I · avi ABD; adha E ; aha KL ; sahi GH : om kil!l : K; om L
si.: after kiimii GHMN' om K ; pi 0
7.32 NO ; om M dal.li ABDE · lost in C ; L' GHIKM ,Q
7,33 ACI I 121

jat:'0 mantedi /
MAKARA DAH
sakhe srutarn? /
MAoHA AH
srutam a amtosa [u h.rda a a / 3S
MALATi
(Lavangikarp.pari,vaj a) aparam>:attha-bahiq..i piasahi La angle
esa dat:'i de piasahi maraJ?e niggama:
irllqha: i sa.m bha- pari sa-a patthedi-jadi
de aham anuvattanla ta.do roam hiaefla dharaaanH
: -; )-ekka :mailgalam, M[hava: siriIfo 40
muh> aI)..anda-ma paloesi / (iti roditi)

dullaha.: du saha H ahi : abbi CM I!-i" i ABeD: t:li iELO ; ni esa

GHM ; I; I?i esia K dant : adaota G : ada Har Kalb ch bhi-
adheo : bhftaheo M
7.33 mantedi : mantei
7.34 srutam: ' n1ya.tam L . iq:l ' rulam 0
7.35 Madha ab : om H efore 'rutam: khe A andD skip to akhe Makaranda
(7.42). anto . G: ato L tu : Ca LL before hrdayasya:
me ya: hfda ' all K
7.36 ta BCEH] MO; hi G' ha K Bar ch ; om L Ibabil';li BCGHl. · EK '
o
7.37 B ; om E(AD ; <lava I ; L'
0; BH] before mara'!e :
put;lovi E \lattami-:ti BCEr · GH KO: adamat;l3 L ; iUeg in M
'r ,iggama : KL; nirmm ita Har Ca! cb." om Har Kath ch
7,38 ovaara 'EGH ' 0 aaro a BKL: ovaaro C ; G ; opaara L; om IM 0
viru'.iba CEGH ' "u B ; ·u ?I' . 0 ;
Har ch B ; ham ha H : ..iisambha CEG1KLO
parissaia patthedi : paI).aambhidhe -. : ssajm G' sajjai H ; sajjia KM
before patthedi: piasahiI:!J E ; K rttbedi: pacchedi GL' pacbei K ;
a bbhatthedi MO j di BHI : jai CEGL 0: jayi K' jci
7,39 de after E ab '. : om L 8 EO' GHI' K'
L' 8 . : hima I hiae-;aa BILMO'
hidaena C ' hiae. EG H K ti dharayanti EG ' dbaranti H " dharenti

7.40 SOb.aggB : sobbagga I. . - : lacclU K elb : iklrn. G: 0 ' alia

mailgala : Har .1. iha ,a.: madha C: mahava sirino :
siri KO; sira M ' sili
7.41 (a al!1daI!1 K . : • m [ B
paloesi BCEIK ; paloasi G ' paJoddadi H: al i L : puloebi ?a 'aloe u
(a aJakaya Har ch iti : tu G
 L22 M iilatfmiidhava 7.42

MADHAVAI:I
vayasya Makaranda
MHinasya jlva:kusumasya vikasanani
samtarpanani sakaD :endriya-mohallani /
y ) -aika:-rasa yanani
maya)py adhigatani vaco:)mft,.a ni //8//
MALATI
jadha a tassa jivida-ppadaiJ?o sUJ?ia
tappamaJ?assa taIp. sanra:raar:aqt I?-a parihjadi jadha
a pi marp. uddisia so jal?-o sambharat:ta;sat;lkadha.:
parisesaI!l kai>-antare I?a si<:lhiledi, tadha karesi / evam
5 jjeva piasaru Maladi sakama bhodi /

7.42 vayasya: sakhe ABD

Ra vikasanani: vikasaniini ABDL; vikasakii.ni C
c rasiyanani : I
S.l after Ma/aIT: sasram ABD jadhii a ta.ssa: jamadhava sa [ jadhi CEH·
jaha ABDGKL;jaha MNO a ABCDGK ; om EHLM 0 jivida
om L ppa: pa H hah;lO G; dayil)o HIK ABDO '
avasldantIJ!1 C; K; avasidatti EILM Har; avasidetti GHN
mam G
8.2 ta I (tat Har Kath ch); om DMNO ; lost in B tadhi eEl ; tahii ADGH
KL; taha MNO ; lost on B CEGL aJ?al!l
ABG H; M :Qa : om 1 biadi: h1abhi G' biadi N jadhi CEH
jaha ABDGK; jaha M; om NO
8.3 a CGHIKM; om ABDELNO pi: vi DM . api H .; om BG m8J!l uddisi9 : om
M uddisia: uddisi H BCDEIKL; A; G'
H; M ; samaria N' Osal!lkadhi
CEHIKL; 'sailkaha ABO GMNO
8.4 H; I' pariggaheqavi 0 kili: kiti D'lcala I
ADC, DHI Har ch; om here EG; K; L; M ; l).arya 0
loa loajatta before kiiJantare N loa : loarr I ABCD ' jattam
EGKLMO; H; atta I before sUjhiledi: DHI, KLM EG (na
ch); om here ABC'LO sic!-h.ilikarodi G ; ihll.edi H ; N
tadbi CEGK; tahii ABDHIL ; taha M 0 karesi ABCDEGHIK ; karesu
LMO; karebi N evam : GKM 0
8.5 jjeva ABDE; yyeva CI;jevva GKLO ; jeva H ; vi M; om before oiasahi: de
MO piasahi: piasalii N; piasabie CL de ABD ; pasiidado Bhand's D
(prasadat Har ch); saasado EGHIKL; om CM ' 0 MiJadi: malatI
after bhodi E ; after sakiimil N ; om BCG sakimi ABDE ; C·
aqahasakama M ; sakiimakidii O ' kadanhll GIKL; kidattha H bbodi :
hodi INO; hoi M ' du L, bhodu Bhand's B
8.6 Act VI 123

MAKARA DAH
hanta, atikarunam. prastutam I
MA..oHAVAH
airasya-katara..;.dh.i 0
srutva ca manobaTa.rfl ca /
vatsalya ;moha-paridevitam ud ahami
clnta - ca mahotsa ca.//9/ /
LAVA ' GIKA.
ai, de amangaiaI!l 1 ado vi uI?-issarp /
MALATj
sahi khll oa una Maladi I
LAVA GIKA.
kim ti. bhodi'! I
MALATI
(atmanaIp nirdisya) jelJ.a
jivavia tetta lfa imam. 5

8.6 lumta: banta Al pliaStut I: vartate EHIl

9a nairasya: airagya G B
d vasada ABL ; aSaida CD
9.1 aj CGB; avi ABD ;a i ElK· om JLM 0 befor pia ahi E :
sahi 0 ABCDE: GHIKM 0: om L · after de de: I;
om M Har Kath cb am ngalall !l EGH]KLM 0 ; aa!!lamailgaiaC'llado
ABD, amangala(Qado) C, (aU rour without punctuation) afrer ama;1galm!,:
0 Qaido E: I;laado to · ado ,rj : pi H · om 0
atvararp: adhiadaraJ:!l EL; adhi ad3l11lJ!l l ; arai!l M· before
SWJissaJ?1: L
9.2sahi adhik.am Har ch , hi (G mar : om E'G b u DGHILM ;
kkbu BCEKO lOa UIl Milam : I
9.3 before Ici,?l ti : sabj M ti. KO· kinl, - C ; k:itti BDE · kime vam GHI..
(kimevam Harcb)· om I . after ti : edatp. E bbocti : bodj GHIKO: hoi M r
9.4 atminal!' oirdiSya.: om M! 0 nirdiS)·a : uddi 'ya E e':la I; om ABD
ADDEHLK marg· om CGIM ,0 1st Rar ch , '.: ni G
9.5 -I!I : om ADD sa . CEIKMNO· om GHL(ABD)
EGH: C· [K . MO;
L ji"i iaABnHI O-jia -a EKL · ji\favilG;loslin ett:a.
AB ; ettar:tij .jj avakalaf!1 D : K: ettiakalal!l M ' om CEGHI L 0
Har ch ·sam , da:- ADD I· samp dam una K · l cuna in M ; om CEGH L 0
Har cb CIJLO · ABD .· GH' KM .· ; om E
 124 MiiJatimiidhava 9 .6

>mhi / sampauaJ!l
maI)oraho me ettio jjeva, jarp tassa para-kenfttaJ?eJ?a aI;la varaddharp
attanaam pariccaemi tti / ta paoal!e piasahI me
bhodu / (iti patati)
MAKARA DAH
10 s» sIma snehasya
LAVA' GIK.A
sarp.jfiay» ahvayati)
MAKARA DAH
vayasya upasrtya Lavangika-sthane /
MADHAVAH
vayasya paravan asmi sadhvasena /
MAKARANDAH
iyam eva abhyudayfmam I

9.6 bibhaccbarambham IKM ; blbhatsarambhaf!1 CGHL; blhaccbarp. ABD ; bTbhat-

sa rp. E ; N' blbhacchamarambbam 0 ABCDO; cell
9.7 meABDIM ' maha K: mamaGH ;before mal'}orallO
E (mama HaT cb); om ?CLNO ettio ABDEM O' eso CGKL HaT ch);
ettako I ; om H jjeva ABDEL ; yyeva Cl ' jevva GH ' jjevva K ; evva MNO
jal!l : om ABCD tassa: after keratta'Jef}a C after fossa: devassa HILN
(devasya Har ch) ; O' om ABO, CEGKM
om ABD para. kera CG; paraki EKL; parakira HI ; parakeraa MO; saparia
N ; kera Har M O' L
9.8 om C pariccaemi ABCDE; G'
HIKL; M; sarp 0 tti :
om GKMN la: ai M ' om NOimassil!1: eda MO; after
paoalJe vi Esabi: sahl N me : om L ap9J'i: avari CO; avira BD
panthini G ; CO
9.9 bbodu ACDEG; hodu CHIKLM 0 in : t e G ' om H
9.10 ABCDEIM 0 ; Madha. GHKL Slm3 nehas. a GHIKL
MNO; ABCD ; neha Ima -
nehasya E snebasya: syaq L
rnasnehasya E snehasy.a : L
9.11 before hasta BOO abavayati ABCDHIM 0: vyabarati EK;
vyavaharati G ; samahvayati L
9. 12 vayasya : (after upasrtya) HI ' om L om EM La,'angiti:
L
9.13 after vayasy.a AB DL ; om EGHIK
MNO
9.14 prakrtir : bhumir N
9.15 Act VI 125

MADH AH
(svairarp. La angika- thane ti .. hati 1

MALATI
sahi karehi me aJ?uiiladae pa adaI!l /
MA.DHA AH
Sarale sahasa-ragal!l parihara mufica aI!lrambham /
vlrasam virah )-a asam sodhum la ' a cittam me I/ l01/
ALATI
alailghaJ?ijjo de Maladi-pcu:-amo/
MADHAVAH
va bhru::-am i :a asa -kariJ?i '1 /
kamaql kuru ar)...:.arohe - dehi me parirambhaI?am /l l1 1/
MALATI
kadhal1l mhi? / (utthaya) iaD,l ,a lmgami /
tu, bah )-uppIlet;ta piasahle a I?-a
labbhadi / (aJingya sanandam) sabi :kamala-=-gabbba:
9.15 svairam :, s asthobhut a a fer upa ft a HI Lanitgiki : la-
vailgikii L
9.16 before karehi: me E ka.rehi : aresu 0: a (er p 0 meAB D ;
om cett ar;tuUladae : a,:!ukUlaciae GH: aryuauladae after
prakrtam
lOb before sQ'!lrambham: C
d C:, L ta\'a : bata Har (ta a .1.)
10.1 after Malat/ : sa hi EH ; sahisabi G ; sahilavailgie 0 a,langbar:.tijjo ABCD
GHKM 0 : alangbal)l E: alanghi 1: a L de : om MaJadi :
malad'ie ] L ppat;lamo GO; 'Pas;tama L a (er
EGHIK L' om ABCDM ' 0
Ila vi : tvam KL
b kirini. : karinl
.
11.1 saIlarsam : om L kadba,£!:'l EHl; ABDGK 0:. om L ; 10 t in C

om] ia'!l : i aJ'!l GHK

- iliitgimi :
-.
GH
.--
ABCDEM 0: anuuraliida GL: anul!ahida HI: anulr2al:iida K utthiya :
.

11.2 b:l ABCDI ; us;ta EGH LM . 0; punar Har . h biibuppUe-:ta : ab a-

pigeI;la H AC DE' B ; upilaI?e I; K:
G uppTlaI?el)a L ' : ; 0; Har Ca]
ch ; utplgene Har Katb cb . ' ddha'!l : om E 0 pi ble EGHK . 0 ;
asahle I ' before biihupplle1J.G L: om ABeD ABC DO : apac-
chimaI!l lEG HK : paccirn.aJ!t I : vaccimal"!l M ' om l: in
11 .3 labbbadi Iabbadi B . labhai GH: labhyei l ' labhemi K' lahe(ity) L;
labhiadi M ; labbiadi . lambbai 0 b fore iililig 'a: ity L ; madha am ka-
om
 126 Malatlm[uJhava 11.4

pamha10 jjeva de paripphaJ'!1so / (sasram) ca maUli-

5 nivesid) :anjafi mama vaaf?er:ta viJ?f?avesi taql - l!a mae manda...;.
bhainle·-edassa sada vatta fla -lacchl-vi la.sa
muha:anda-maIf9alassa de sarpbhavido cirarp
loana-mahusavo / muha:maJ?orahehiffl ca
/
10 gamida a vafarp
sah(ana I pi adivahida a cand )-adava;malaa:

11.4 a.J?ariso G ; I?ariso L jjeva ABDEH; yyeva c· ijev a GKL· evva

MNO; om J de pari scripsi; aijadepari ABCD ; desarlra E; deajjal).irv
arira G ; edima1"!l aria HM 0 (teadya
nirvvapayatimarpsaiira Har ch) ; r:tivvavedimarp arira [ ; de ajjani a.v edime
K ; J.livvavedidesanra L B befor
ca : sahi MNO ca ABCDE · kiqlca GIKLO Har ch; kil'fl8
MN ; om H maiiJi BCDEGHK. L; mahuli A ; miili L m01i M ; mauli 0
Har ch
) 1.5 ABCDEHI; vir:ti GKLMNO (vini Har ch) vesida: ve ia [M vesida H;
hia O · lost in C mama : maha LM vit:Jt l?avesi: D · vil).a ve i G;
vinryavesa H; LMO; vil)-I).aveihi H be/ore
I"}a: jadha 0; jaha M Da: nahi N· om M mae : maha
11.6 bhaae M edassa ABDEI (etasya Har Cal cb)· tassa C (tasya Har
Kath ch); om GHKLMNO ACO · BD ' viasanta ELM ;
papphulla GK ; H; 1 sadavatta ABDEH; saUCi-
vatta 1; sadapatta M ; saapatta 0; mal)abara C· om GKL Har ch
ka: H ; om MO
) 1.7 before.muha: pUJ?rya E; janasya Har Kath ch anda andassa E
anda : canda GHIO?N de : om LO bbi\'ido : bhavi B; bhavida D ; bhavito
L; 0 ciraJ!l : om IN
) 1.8 viloaJ?a E; loaryassa G ; H; after mahiisQl'o L mahlisa-
vo : mahiisao BC ; mahossavo I muba: mudba CElL ; ?muha. B ma-
I ca ABDE ; a L ; lost in C; evva 0; om GHIKM
Har ch avirada: aviraa BM ; aryavarada H ; viraha 0
AC; vijimbha I; vihaaqlbba K ; vilabbba M ; vilubba
II .9 uvvea: ovvega H; dukkhavea M; dukkha vai : vval 0 iUV
uvattamaJ?a G ; ovvattamal)a H ABCDEHIK; dhariaql GLM 0
hiaau(gamida) D
1l.10 gamidia ABCDEl ;gamiaa GHKLO ; gamia M· om . before sarira 0 viram
varaI!1 L· viiraq1Vara dliisaharambha : dfi haa a MO; om I
dummavida ABDE · dumavida CGHK Har: duma ia IL: (aa 0 adavida M;
diinavira N: sandavia 0
ILl) sabi: sahi M before sarIra: maba M· (gamiaa 0 ) s81!lta i ACDE·;
iUeg in B· santapii I ' saqldava GHKM 0 ; sal:lldhava L kadb8J!l CEHK;
AMNO; kahi BD ; kathaJ!l GL ;(santapa)kadam(hi) I pi ABCDHO;
hi I ; vi EGHKLMN a : om GIM 0 Har ch candida a : candllhava G·
candadapa (M ; after miiruda M 0 maJaa : maya 1
11.12 Act VI 127

maruda-..:ppamuha >mhi
tti I tae vi piasahi sa ada. sumaridavva >mhi / esa a Mahava:
siri-hattha-l)llnm3.9a-maf?ahara baiila-maJa.
piasahie savvadha hiael)a tti l 15
uttarya Madhavasya myasyanfi sahasa )pasrtya sasadhvas>-
otkampat;l na!ayati)
MADHAVAH
(apavarya) hanta
Ekikrtas tvaci nisikta i ) ,a vapld a
)naya me /
ka rpura .hira· ban:- candana .candrakanta':::
.Saivala . adi: varga4 1/1i /1

11.12 ppamuhi EGHKLM .; pamuha C ; pamu.b.ehirp ABO; ppa I· ppahudi

Har ch) ; ppabudlo 0. parampar- : paramparao 0 ; parnmparaa M
ACDO ; ul?a BGHKL :. om [ EGLM . nirakasa
Har ch mbi : om L EM
11.13 ACDEH icM ; sarputta B · S8I!lvatte G i· sru:p. vutta I ;
vutte KLNO tti : t j GL ; mhi E · hmitti M asmjni Har Kath ch); om 1
be ABCDEH ' tue G IKLM · tae . tuha 0 ri: pi AD ' om CE 0. Har ch
sabi: sabi ABCD ; sah:te E ''nidi : sawadha EK ' savvaM. M ; sarvvailia
Har cb suma.rid.alYVi : sam81ridavva A ° umaridavva 1, mhi: nti
A; tli BCD ; om M •.: vi IM.
11.14 siri ABCDGHIKM ' E o in 0; om L ttbaI ABDGHM; sahattha
CIKLO (svahasta Har cb); saha E o samandha maqohara
GIL ; 0 'b1I - . : bahula G .C Miladi : maladie C· maladi-
jivida GHK ' jivida L ID. ' .: esa GK nivvi
° H
It . IS after piasah'ie : vi M ' om GH . - CEKL;
savvadi AGHO (sarvvada Har Kath. cb)· savvaha IN : savvaha M· om BD
hiae. ABDEJMO; hiae HK.L (brdaye Har cb); 10 t in C· om G after
a0 -ra .- - ABCDEGH · ro o· Kt-
M tti: I iti M· ca : om 0 afrer ha MO ·
before Madhavasya 0
11.16 uUi:rya ABCD · avatarya EL· apanIya GM IK · unmuc 0
EO ; hrdaye GK y , 0 : nya yanti M ; vin asyanta C
upasf!Ya GH ; ABCD· ' - dhva cetl
IUS apavirya : om B la : hantahanta CD; om IM
12a - · .ikta: GI ; nisakta E u . pi")'• .: a ABO
b nirbbugn. CEGIKlM O · nirbhiona ABDH A ?BCDEGH . kud-
mala KLMO ; I
c hiTa: han K tint. : kanti D
d nisyanda GK . E Sal"ala: Sevala HI; Saiva L
128 M alat'imiulhava 12.1

MA.LATI
aho, Lavangiae Malad"i vippaladdba /
MADHAVAH
ayi sva :citta-vedana:matra-vedini para-vyatha-)nabhijiie, tyam
upalabhyase /
U ddama
saJ?kalpa .:..vedanani /

va maya >pi na dinany ativahitani? // 13/1

LAVANGIKA.
sahi jjeva uvaladdha )si /
KALAHAMSAKAH
. .
ah 0 sarasa: ramaJ.lla da vidh3.I).a ssa '! /
MAKARANDAH
Mahabhage evam etat /
vatsal» eti katham apy avalambit> :a.t ma
jano >yam iyato divasan /-
abaddha-.:kailkaI!a:kara-praJ.laya:.p rasadam
asadya na1J.datu ciraya, phalantu kamah //14 //
12 .1 after Ma/all: svagatam LO vippaJaddbi LM .; vippaladdhatti ABCDE
(vipralabdht:ti Har Kath ch); vippalambhappasado GHK (vipralambhaprasadah
Har Cal ch); I;
pa1ambhopaiitto 0
12.2 ayi avi K ; om I sva:a.tma GK citta: cintana M; cinta N vedini.:
nivadini G ; nivedini HIL vyatbii: vyasana MN iyam: idam GHIK
12.3 upalabbyase: upalapsyase N
l3b saf!lkrama N vinodita : nivedita K
c soeba.: prapti E avalambita: avilambita E jivitini: jivanani N
d ka N p i oa dinioy: nadivasany MN .
13.1 uva: ua E; upa H jjef. scripsi, (jevva) G, (jjevva) K ; lam-
E (lambhan'iye Har ch) ; H?I ; L;
ABDMO ; lambbil?ijja C; N uva: ua E; upa I laddbi:
ddha. A ; laa. N
13.2 abo: om IN sarasa: rasa G IiliID3IJ?Iya H; M .; N
ABCD ; E· GKLMNO; sam-
vidanassa HI
13.3 after elat: katham I
14b N
c ibaddblt: alabdha H pral;1aya: H; L
d andatu: madyatu GH
14.1 Act VI 129

LAVA ·GIKA
Mahflbhaa hiae -: sahasio aaI!l jalfo
via.redi? I
M.ALATI
haddhl 21 I pi esa u
(pravisya)
K.AMA OAK!
putri katare kim etat. ! 5
M.ALATI
(kampamana Kamandakim alingati)
KAMA DAK!
(tasyas cibukam unnamayya)
Puras tad anumanaso )nanya..J)ara-ta,
tanu-glanir yasya tvayi samabhavad yatra ca tava /
yuvfl so preyan ilia suvadane mufica.jaqatal:!l-
Vidhatur vilasatu,. sakamo )stu Madanaq. /115//

14.1 Mahibbia EGH KMO · ABD 0 a CL . I

C· apa"i IL · appani E K · saangaha OH
sihasio ABCDK· sahasa H ; sahaso cett a DH jano )
before ki'!J : ta K
14.2 ABCDE .; cett ABDK, M Har cb ; abharaqe C,O ;
E. GHL ; I· kare EM 0 viiredi: viaredu
G; vicaredu H.. vianadi E · viarei K ; iiidi L; via riadi. 0
14.3 after Ma/at; : s agatam GHK 0 baddhi 2: hahadamhi GKL · hahadamhi H ;
bahatasmi Har ch· haddbihadamhi I ; om haddhi ABCDE{I . baddhl MO
2 ABDE · rep.eatedOO ; om M ammaki ABCDE Har ammaha.Hsic1 kaJ?a2
o

G· kannaa KLM . kulaitthl 0 b fo re irodtiha'!1: EHL .; om ABCD

GIKMO kil!l pi : om G . kif!l i M: be/ore W 'Q 0 esi : C;.
M ABCDH L.· di E· u adi adi GsicK ;. adi I·
uvadisai M · u 0

0 upanya ti Har Cat ch ; upanas ati Har Kath ch

14.5 Kim8lllciakJ : kamandaki 2 K> (twice 'G putri katare . , . hi amba (15.6):
here om M (see n.1. 'readings are included here.)
kitare : kaparau
14.6 kampamini : krandamiina K
14.7 tasyiS : malatyas GHKl.M· ?asya · I unnamayya: unamya B before
stanza /5 : vatse
1Sa punS: para · C ?]; pura GH
b tanu: tano I gJio.ir : jyanir 0 Har Kath · ?dyan ir I ; . d anir Har Cal · illeg in
E ca 1. a : tavaca K
 130 M iilatim&Jhava 15.1

LAVANGIKA
Bhaavadi kasana-caiiddasl-raani-masana::samcara-nivvadida:
visama -: va vasaa -:
sahaso sahasio khu eso I tado piasahi ukkampida /
MAKARANDAH
(svagatam) siidhu Lavangike sadhu / avasare khalv anurag);
5 opakarayor garlyasor /
MALATI
ha tada, ha amba ! /
KAMANDAKI
vatsa Madhava /
MADHAVAH
ajiiapaya /
KAMANDAKI
iyam
10 aitguler amatya:Bhiirivasor Malatl

15.1 Bhaavadi: bhaavai N kasana:

. kassana
. I caiiddasi ABDKO ; cauddasi
GHMN ; caiiddasle L ; om CEI Har cb raan.iGHN ; raaf;1ie L ; rall;1i M
G ; smas3.f.ia I ; samasaf;1a L ; mabamasaI;la NO
I ABCD ; va9ia I 0.; vahida EGH' K ; vattida L;
vania M ; pii<;lha N
IS.2 vavasia: vyaasaa I; vvavasaa L ; vavasao M ' sahasa N ; vvavasao 0
ABCEHMNO ; D; G?I ; vvavida KL om No
pas8I;l<;li I; pakhal]<;ia K before pasa'!t!a N ; om EGHLMO
doddaf!lsa M ; O' om before siihaso: bhua-
danda 0
15.3 sihaso : om GHKL khu GHILMN ; kkhu ABCDEKO tado ABCD; ado
cell after tatio: me H; kkhume 0 Ukkamidi: kampicia K
IS.4 kamandaki 0 svagatam.: atmagatam 8 ; om GH (2nd)
sidbu : om CM avasare: sthane M 0 khall' ... k.irayor: khahlpakara-
nura.g ayor E ; khalvanuragailkaryayor I ' kalpanaraganuragayor N
15.5 gariyasor: gariaso D ; ganyan E
IS.6 after Millatl: svagatam NO
15 .9 before iyam: sasram E after aSesa : bhuvane Lmarg ; ma(?sa) C si-
maotamastak6: samantako K uttaJ!lsaka ABCD pariga : pad-
maraga N raji AB CD . om cett
IS.1O ailguler ... kim i. (15.14): om (lea ing etc.) N
eka : ekam EG H ipatyaratnam: apatya.I'!1 IM Malati: mala Hnama E '
om GH bbagavat.a : om I
15.11 Act VI 131

Vedhasa Manmathena ca maya ca

diyate / (iti roditi)
MAKARA DAH
hi nas tarhi Bhagavati-pada-prasadena /
MADHAVAH
tat kim iti Bhagavaty-ananam? I
KAMA DAKl
(clyar)ancalena netre parimrjya) vijiiapayami 15
M.ADHAVAH
Dany ajiiapaya /
KAMA DAKI
Parinati-raman1yah pritayas tvad:vidhanam
I • • _

aham api tava many.a hetubhis taiS ca tais ca /

tas iha tata parastat
paricaya sarvatha ma // 16//
(iti padayol;l patitum icchati)
M ADHAV AH
(varayaD) abo v.atsalyad atikramati

15.11 ABD, L · om cett sa. yoga (Cmarg): yoga C· om L; B here ends

(1st) ca CEHIK ; om ADGLM
15.12 diyate : prad'iyat:e L itiroditi: om DIMO . madha.? asti E
1.5. 13 makaranda." [ hi ACDHIO'. om EGKLM( nas : (after
tarhi) EL before ,.arhi: HI pida ACDEO; om GHIKLM(N)
15.14 om K. tat : om E in : iva K Bhagav.a ty inanam AD ;
E ' bbaga atya CG HIKL; ananaI!1bhaga atyiil? M 0
15,15 dura: clra H M 'eim L iIicaJeo a.: an.cena E ' netre: locane E ' baspam L
pari ACDGHLO .; pm EIKM · "IJDIiPJlyUDJ.: atsaldmapi MO: atsa N lka-
Iyi-:tin am : M after kal 'ii1Jinam: aktukamasmi MO ; kimapivak-
tukamasmi N
15.16 om I IWIV: om M .r-pa.ya: aji'iapayatvevabbagavafi 0
X.imaada.k:i: om [
163 tnd: tad H Har Kalh.
b aham: vayam
c satvaf!1 [ parasti1 : pura tal!l( 1: purastat Har Ca!
d karu-;tibbyil!l AD ; CM 0 HaT" W· EGHKL
16. 1 iti .. . icchati : ,Qm 0 li ti : om GHK .) - patitum.:praJ;lantum
1; nantum M
16.2 rirayan: dharayan AE · nivarayan L ; om M 0 00 : om H atikrimati:
atikramati I ; ati L
132 M alatlmlulhava 17a

MAKARA DAH
Bhagavati
eti, iti,
eti, eti /
ekaikam eva hi vaslkaralfatp. gariyo -
evam iyam ity atha bravlmi ? //1 7//
KAMANDAKI
vatsa Madhava /
MADHAVAH
ajiiapaya /
KAMANDAKI
vatse Malati /
LAVANGIKA.
Bhaavadi /
KAMA DAKl
Preyo bandhuta va samagra,
sarve sarp.hata, jlvitan;t va /
bharta, dharma-darns ca pwp.sam -
ity anyonyaql vatsayor jiiatam astu // 18//
MAKARANDAH
atha kim /
LAVANGIK.A
jadha tumhe alfavedha /

17a Heini: . harin) . D

h nirvyu.,..a: nirvy11ha I sauhrdaya D bbari : mayi"
Har
17.1 after stanza 17: M has : Kilmandakl / valsa Madha va j mlulhovah / iijfliipaya /
Kamandak'i / svfkrriimiyam / Ma/atl / haddhi ahmahme
uval}'!-asadi / Kamandaki/ purr; katare ... and the whole of the pas age omilled
above, all in addition 10 what now fo lio s.
17.2 ijifipaya: ajoapayatu I
17.3 Kima ·... Bhaa.vadi : om Milafi : malafi M· malatilavangike GIK'
malatilavail.gike H Lavaitgiki ACDE : mala(i LMO ; ubhe GHIK Bar
18b ACDE ; sevadhir GHIKL Har : saq:tpado M 0 vi : ca KLN
18.2 jaclbi : jaha ADGKO ' jaba M CEGHKLO; al?aveha ADN;
Tal?avedu I; aQ.avettha M
18.3 Ace VI 133

KAMA OAKI
vatsa Makaranda, anen> aiva vaivahilena Malati-nepathyen)
pravartasva / (iti
arpayati) 5
M AKA RA DAH I

yath» ajiUipayati Bhagavafi I yavad itaS citra-javanikam

antardhaya dharayami / (tatha karoti)
M AD HAVAH
Bbagavati, by etad vayasyasya j
- -
KAMANDAKI
kas tvam asya.I!l cintayam. /
M AD HAVAH
Bhagavaty eva janati I 10
(pra isya)
MAKARA DAH
(vihasya) vayasya Malaty asml I

18.3 Kimandaki: om C before anena: tvam GHIKL' om ACDEM 0 eva:

om GIN vaivihikeoa : om EMO Mila.n: om G H apaviritll . .. pra-
vmuva : apavaraya a 0
]8.4 apavirita ACDE ' t· GHKL- MN
Telang (atmanam) I ana a) M (at-
". pm. artasva ACDE' parir;la atmanam GKL' pari.v arta-
H in ... tathi. karoti: om DAlst · iJlegihl in marg of A
iti: om Cl (A D), CEfK.M 0 .A.marg" GH '
L
18.6 yatbi : yad GHLM, 0 ijiipayati Bhagavati GHKMO' ajiHipayati CEl ?A"
(marg); ajfiapayasi 1 javanikim CHILO; yamanikam E Har ; javanikayam
GK ; yavanikayam M' ya anikam
18.7 antardhiya: antarva l' l before tathfJ karoti:
grllltva M ; 0. gdai b.roti CGHIKM . om ELO after
ralhii kal'oli : K E'· 0
18.8 Bhagavati : om ADN be/one 0012111 : sulabha CIL " ulabbamapi EO· subha-
mapi N ' sulabhamapivacanam GHK ' om ADM lham anartha ADEM 0 "
babvanarthakaI!l C' bahu GHK ; bah IL before amkatam:
etadati 1 y etad ACDEMO' tad ; om GHI'KL
IS.9 before kas: GHKL
IS.IO evaIpC3 I ' om GHM eva: om ElL
IS.[2 AD ; M vihasya ACDGI0· viha-
san Hn· sasmitam M - om E after viJrasJa : ca ACOvayasya : om M
after asmi: ADE
 134 M a/atimildhava 18.13

SARVE
sasmitam ca pasyanti)
MADHAVAH
Bhagavati, k[ta...;puq.ya eva Nandapo, yaq priyam
15
KAMANDAKI
vatsau Malati;Madhavau , ito nirgatya gamyatam
udvaha-mangaD-artham asmad-viharikaya4 paScad /
saq:tvihitarp. tatra vaivahikal11 dravya-jatam Avalokitya / bhiiya.s ca
Gadh) :6tkantha: kathora :-kerala -gand ) :a vapandu :cchadais
tarn" burr -pa ina:- -: puga: d;mnal?- /

bhagal). preyo vidhasyanti yam

//19//
yatas tatr) aiva yavat
stha ta vyam /

18.13 sasmit8'!1 ca ACnO .; sakautuka rnitaiica E · I·

savismayaf!lsakautuka£!1 N; savismayaf!1 M ; sakautukam GHK ; sa ismayarp.ca
L
18.14 before pari$vajya: makarand3f!1 E . M after sopa-
hasam L eva: GH ya'" (N): M· yat 0 priyam priya-
ACDEMO. (without api) N
18.1 5 idrSil!' IL; GHK C ; varayi.yati L
18.16 ita: iti I gahanena : gahane GH · gahanaI!lna L gamyatim: after udyana-
0
18.17 udviiha. mangalartham: om 0 artham.: nimittam Easmad: tatra M
E vityam ACDEL ; GHIKN ;
M; 0
18.18 sal!'vi: L; suvi HMO ; saI!1Di hitaq / GH before tatra:
hi ACE after ta/ra : eva HL · vaivabika LN · (after
jatam) E drnya : man gala G H after A valokitayii : bhavati . sarvcu:p
sampaditamaste GHIKL bbiiyaiS ,c a apica N
19b phalina ACDEL ?K ; phalita GH1M 0 vyiruunra: vyanaddha K
c kakkoli ACDEI Har kankofi GHKL- takkoIT MO ? ACD?LM;
bhuvo EGHIKO
d mitulunga: matulanga EMN · matulinga GK vidhayal;t I preyo
ADNO ; prltitp M ; sreyo CEGHKL?I
19.1 yatas ACD ; talas L ; atas MO ; om E' gatva GIK ; gatvaca H Makaraoda
Madayantiki : madayan tikamakaranda IL .O yivat: be/ore Makaranda M
19.3 Act VI 135

M AnHAVAH
hi ity
bhavati /
KALAHAMSAKAH. .
pi r:to bbavissadi I 5
KAMANDAKI
ev) atra. I
LAVA · GIKA.
sudaf11 piasahle. '
KA.MA DAKl
vatsa Makaranda bbadr,e La vangike ita itaf? I
MALATI
sahi tae vi ganta vvaJ? ?
LAVA· GIKA
(vibasya) kbu amhe ettha uvvaramo I to
(iti Kamandald·Lavangik.a;Makarandfil?)

19.3 om GHK EGHILM .; C·

ADK· ataJ'!l O · om • hi: om ACDMNO ka-
kalyena D ity ACDIL ; ENO· GH ;
u(daya. in marg) K· M
19.4 bbavati : bhagavat a M; bba atu
19.5 G· ACDGHLM· E· eVaf!lIK;
evva N· O ' 'e am Har ch pi : vi M; om N om GK Harcb
ACD' edarp E ; before fJO M· om GHIKL 0 Har ch bbavissadi :
havissadi K. . bba vissai
19.6 Kimandakl ACDEKM . GHIO· madba L after
atra MO el'a (Cmarg): om CM 0 atra:
om LNO I
19.7 piasable : piasabie before sudum
19.8 vatsa Makaranda : after Lavangike 1 Lavailgike : om K ita itaQ
CLMO pra. isam3Q K ' om AD · lost in C
19.9 sabi:sahilavaogie GHK tH ACDEI ; tue GHKLM 0
G
19.10 kbu : kkhu CEKO · om M ambe: amhi I.' vaam L-amha ; om ACD et-
tba: ittha I· om M uvvarimo ACDE ' uvaramo K' tu arama (iti) GH -
tvariimo I ; tuvaramo L· a.sa:riimo M · pasar3mo . 0 after
uvvariimo: tti C
19.11iti: om CMN LavaDgiki ACDE
136 M aiatlmiulhava 19.12

MADHAVAH
ayam idan'im ahaIJ1
AmUla:kantakita: komala :biihu :nalam
I
asyal;l kareI?a karam akalayami kantam
arakta:pankajam iva 1/20/ /
(iti

'corika.- vivaho llama

19.12 abaJ?l: before idiinfm EG HIKL

20d 0
20.1 iti: om N ACDEM ; GHIKL 0
20.2 before corikii: H; miilat'imadhave K · iti malatimadhave
o corikiviviibo nama: om IM coriki vivibo EGH; caurikavi aho LO·
Jepagrho ACD ; malat1svayarpvaro K
 ACT VII

praviSati
BUDDHARAKSIT A
ammahe,
amacca:Bhurivasu-mandire Bhaavadl-
khemer:ta govaido Maarando I ajja amhe
u aga.da. / tado Bhaa adi . aucchia gada S
avasadhaqt j aaqt. ca I?-a a:
padoso
khu kam inim
pr. I (Amarg): om AD praviSa.t i: pravi' ya ACD
pr.2 (2nd) 2 EIKL ; om ACD ammabe: amhahe GMNO;
amhae J i1'..I1:& : IM atsa E; nevattha GH KL -
1- 10 t in C laccliii: la.cctU AD · lachi EK
pr.3 kada ACDE - kida GHIKL - om MO a att.a : om Bhaavadi : bha-
avadie IM ; illeg in L
pr. 4 vaa!?a : om MO om M .. ACD ; EGHl;
KLM ; ; 0- Har ch before khe-
meJ'!'l: ettha E kbemeI;la : C- before Manrando 0 ; om A
viido : goavido C; govavido AD - govayido IK Maarando : makaranda
H after Maarando : itinrt ati GHIK ajja.: ajjaca A ; annaticaajja C;
ajjanca D: aha M : ammahe I ; arnhepi L; vaaJ!l ; amhalliIp. 0 im-
af!1 : om LMO
pr. 5 uugada : uagada E:. adhagada I- upagada L ; uvagaa - uvagao 0 tado:
after iipucchia M ; tauha ith tado after Bhaa adi K iocchia ACDE;
auchia GK: aucchia. H ; apucchia IL 0; apucchia M gadi:
after ava' 0
pr. 6 CEGHLK; ADL ' M- I)lavasadhaql
0 ,a _ : anoan E ' ca: a MN ubii: vadhii CG
gbara EG H KM ; giha L -grha Har h: ara ADI ; om C ppa : pa I raida :
raidaa ACD - rata ka.ta : ala CK;
pr_7 md- va : om ADI paiitti. ACDEL (pravrtti Har Katb ch)- pamatta GHIK ;
ppamatta M; pramatta. Har CaJ cb - metta. 0 ; om pajji.: payya HI be-
fore pad()so: eso L 'padoso : pao 0 GHI I)u H iilaissadi :
kiilaissadi G ; kula issadi H after oissadi: ajja EILM 0; om ACDGHK
':'0 : om GH
pr_8 vllva:vyava i ; vvava L; viva M ACOrn - kkhu EKL- a - ca 0 -
om GM tuvaranta - 0 : tu varaoto ACD I l l ' · ___ kimednm : om
M CH - om GIKNO Har ch ; after kamedUf!l
E - eel: kamendUI!l D - kamedu E before sapiida: bahuso GIll
Har , b) - bahusa H

\3A
 138 M a/atimtuJhava pr.lO

abbhatthia baUimoC;iia abhiddavanto

10 Maarandena nitthuram padihado jamada / so a adhiadara:velakkha;

'I?a mama sampadaqt tae komftra:bandha'ie

ti pa9il)f,laql vasa-bhaval?-ado f.liggado
tti edif,la pasangel)a Madaantiaql al)ia Maarandef,la samam
15 / (iti
/ /pra vesakal:t/ /
(tatal:t pravisati sayya-gato Makarandal:t, Lavangika ca)

pr.9 pads: vada GH ACE ; DIKNO ' GH ;

bandhanam Har ch; L; M abbbattbia : abbhathia E '
abhatthia I; abbhatthia M ACDKMO; E; pUI?0vi GHIL ;
N CGKMNO ; moq.ida AD ; moq.i(abi) E ; modia H; moQie I'
moq.iena L abhiddavanto : N abhi ACDHIKMO;
abi AGL ddavanto : dovanto I
pr. 10 ahibado N; abh ibado 0 jimidi: jamado ACD after jiimiidii:
E before so: tado GH so : sa HLN aHIKLMO; om ACDEGN
adhiadara velakkba rosa HL; a dbiavelakk:harosa G ; via vilakkharosa E; adhia-
aravesa ACD; vias3rptarosavesa K; rosavellakkha M; trivalaqtkhiasavesa N ·
velakkha(Tosa) 0; om I HaT ch
pr . 11 rosa kkhalantak..kbara saro : om 0 kkhalanta ... oru nna : Om E kkbalanta
ACDHIKM (skhalat Har ch); kkbalantaa GL ; om (EO) akkbara saro
1 (Jag); akkharasuro H; Har ch' akkharo ACDGKLM' om N(EO)
rosa ACD;
K; M ; mandharavaal?aparundido-
N rosa GIL (Jag) ; rosaryibbharo HO sal!lsukkbido-
scripsi ; Jag (glossing variant. 'khulungitam as'mau-
nam') ; dukkhidomada GL ; H ; udankidorul)a I ;
0; ?orugra Har Cal' Har Kath
pr .12 papphuranta AEHIMO ; ppapphuranta L' pphuranta G ; p hu raI11ta K ' pap-
phullanta C ; pamharanta D ; gbaraJ"!lta ACDHIKM . 0 ;
l?aaryo EGL mama ACDE; me celt om ACD tae
ACDEI ; tue GHKL ; imae M 0 bandlla'ie : bandha'ie CE: bandhakTe l'
va9q.hale M ; paqtq.biie N
pr. 13 pa : va K; ppa L GLMO ; (an)ti AN' (a)tti CDE ; tti HIK sa-
CIK; savaha D ; AEGHLNO ; sapahaI!l M
GKMN ; H; ADLO ; padir;tl?aql. CEI L?E
l?iggado: K ; viI;lI;logado G
pr.14 tti: ta. MNO M ACDEGHIKL ; al?ia M' 0
maarandaer;t.a C samaf!1 ACDE ; om MO ; aha. GHIKL
pr.15 om EGH Har Kath ch ACM 0; jai sami(tti) D ' E'
GL; jojayissaf!1 H' ,. ojai arp K' Har ch iti: tti
D ; before 0 before n4kriintii : parikramya GHK
nislcrantab DE pr. 16 pr.aveS8kal;l : om ACD
0.1 bejore malative .o GH : malatlveSo L after Makarandaf} : upa-
GHI K ca here l, ACDELM o· before Lava;lglka GHK
0.2 Act VII 139

MAKARA DAH
Lavangike apl nama Buddharaksita-samkranta Bhagavat1-nHir
/
LAVA · GIKA
ko sal11deho Mahabhaassa? I bahuJ?a - jadba esa maOJlra-
saddo sUI?-ladi, tadha jal?-ami tet;ta vavadeserya aI,lida Buddharakkhidae 5
Madaantia tti / ta uttarD-ovarido tti /
MAKARA. DAH
(tatha karoti)
(tatah.- pravisati Madayantilca ca)
MADAYA TIKA
sahi jjeva pariko ido me bhftda flladte? /
BUDDHARAKSIT A
aba il1l / 10
ADAYANTJKA
aho I ta ehi vama...;.slla- ttanam Mfllame
nibbhachamha f

0.2 Bhaga\'ati : om G
0.3 ADGHJKM 0 ; ' Iparye ati C · na iparye. atina a E' a iparyayi.yati
L
0.4 ko : ittha I ; MO b fo re fai1il : ettba KL: attatuba M bhiassa :
bhiiga sa GM ' I).ubhava sa L ; r:'ubfwa sa : nubba a ya Har Kath ch
kiiica ACD jadhi. CEI ' jcaha. OL : om GK ' jada H ; jaha M 0 esa
CEGHKMO ; eso ADILM before maiijTra: maiiju E
0.5 sUI;tiadi : ul).tadi GH . om 0 Har car ch radba El; lo tin C ; taM ADKL '
taba GHM 0 takkemi EGHK er:'att:r:'a E (tenatena Har
ch) ; [ an : vvaa HL ; vya a I ' ava M ACDEGHKLM ;
anlda 10
0.6 Madaamia ACDEKM ' madaantie GHL ' madaantia 0 I tti : om 1 ut-
tarloarido a apando ovarido AD ' 0 aridasa.rlro E' iIleg in ;
o avarido IL ' a a arido GHKMO sutta ACDEKM O · pasuna GHIL
lakkher;ta ACDEMO ;. lakkhaJ)o GHL 'lakkho IK Har b);
tti ACDE ' 1; cett
0.7 before .talha : badbam 0
0.8 praviSati : pra 0 :Jada)'antiki : affer Buddharak )ta GHM Bud.-
ca.: buddharak,ite Ojjeva DEL ' e a C ' je a GKO ; jeva H ·
eva I . cvva M par· : om KL ovido : kasido ] !me : om M
0.10 aha ADM O ' adha cett ll!l : i GM
0.11 abo . .. om .aho : om I: ahoaho L
AD ' twice M before la: mada C: ama ilae E after eM: GH \'a-
 140 Millatfm '!dhava 0.13

BUDDHARAKSIT A
/
15
MADA Y ANTIKA
sahi Lavangie janladi pasutta de piasahJ: tti? /
LAVANGIKA.
ehi sahi ma bodhehi - esa dummat;taanti jjeva
lsi maI?-I?-ul!1 uiihia pasutta tti ado sat;tia£!l idba jjeva
uvavisa/
MADAY ANTIKA
20 (tatha krtva) dummaJ?aadi iaql /

Maladie: maladievamasllaq1 M ACD ; silam E;

cett Miladie ADM ; malamae C ' cett before 'Ji: 'm I
ADE ; C; G1KL' I).ibbhat-
themha H ; M; 0
0,13 before pari : iti EGHKM; om ACDILO(N)
0.14 idam: . edam. EGK (etat Har ch)' emarn. H bbavanam
. . : bhavanaduvaram
. . L
(bhavaradvaram Har ch) after bhava'!a'r!: tasabipravisamha H; taehipa-
visamha I ; pavisadupiasahi / madayantika / taha 0
0. ]5 before praviSatah: iti E; ubhe GHM ; itiubhe L
0.16 beforesahi: vilokya I sahi ... Lavailgika: [ piasabi ACDK;
piasahle M ; piasahe N ; piasahi L, EGHO tti ACDKN ; t:Javetti E ' ti L; vetti
M ; om GHO
0.17 ehi sw mi 'Dam : imaJ'!ll).a N ebi sahi AD; sabiehi GHM' sahi CEKLO;
ehi I ; om Har ch et:JaJ:!l EHI bodhehi EHLM' bohesi AD; bodhesi
C ; vedhehi G ; bodhayisami I ; bodhaissasi K ' bohehi NO'
Har Cal ch; Har Kath ch before esii: jado GL' om (Hsic)
after esii : hi H jjeva : om C ; before pasutta E ADE ; GH;
I; KMNO; idal).i1!l L jjeva ADE ; jevva GK: iievva HL ;
eva (. om MNO(C)
0.18 isi ACDEMNO ; lsa GL ; esa H ; om IK ujjhia ACDEL;
vaia G ; H; I; K; MO; om N Har ch
pasutta tti ACDEK ; pasutteti GM; pasuttaiti H; pasuuitti I; pasuttetti LNO
ado ADEMNO ; tado GHIKL Har ch) ' illeg through alteration C sa-
C ; seqia N; here om M idba CGKL; ilia AD; 2E; ida H; ido
10; edaI!l M; illeg in N jje"a ADEH ; yyeva Cl ; jevva GO' jjevva KC om M '
illeg in N 0 .; ACE;. D ;.
te G ; saaI?iaddhante H ; I; saa1;llarp.te K' L; 'saaQaj-
jarp.tesaQiarp. M ; N; saaquddbante Bhaod's 0
0. 19 'o"a: ua E ; upa N visa: visi A; visasi D ; sisama M
0.20 before dummal)iiadi : sahl HI ; sahikadharp L; om ACDEGKMNO after

..
0.21 ACl VII 141

LAVANGIKA
kadham la<;laham
via44ha ;mahur> c) akadar3fl.l de
asadia piasahi dummaJ?aissadi? I
MADAY ANTIKA
Buddharakkhide pekkha, uvalabbhamo /
BUDDHARAKSIT A
vavippa<ftvaJ!l / 25
MADAYANTIKA
via? /
A
tava bhatt3 ettha laiia:

dumma'!iiadi: G' K" M . vii o· katham Har ch iam :

om G ; after iilil L
0.21 kadh8J!l CEIKL- ,c ett an: na A vabu : vadhu G vissa
LMN' visa ADGH] " Visa CEKO (rissa mbho E;
H ACDEKL G' HO' r · jaJ:iia M'
N 'adabam CGIKLMO' ladaha ADE Har cb " lataha H ; allaham N
0.22 via.,.,..
ACEiKMO · DL·· viaddha G " viNddha H . eandha N; before
M ADI' CEO Har ch); (a)
GHK.L; M· N after iJbhasilJarrr: sasiI.1e-
K de scripsi' AD?C' I;
cabhrataram Har CaI ,c h ; EGK" catebhrata.r am
Har K.atll ch; abhadaf'3f!lde H;. debhadaraql N' M;
0
0.23 Oidia ACDE .· pavia GHIK (prapya Har ch)" samasadia LMNO pia-
sabi: mepiasahi (after MNO before durnmalJaissadi:
ADEGHK (03 Har ch)' om ClLM 0 after dumma'!.iiissadi: tti AI:?
0.24 before Buddha: sahi E BuddItarakkhide here ACDE; after pekkha GHIKL
MNO lfar ch) pekkha : pekkha2 E' hUJ!lpekkha M;
viapekkha N v i : pippa [ ACDI' EKMO " devaI!l GH;
L' be/one u 'a: amhevi H; aJPhme L uvi: ua EL- upa H;
vipi [ labhhimo eR- lahamo AD'. lambbTamo GHLO ' labhiamo l ' l3J!lbhij-
jamo K ; laddhamhi M' laddba,!,hma
0.25 be/ore vippaif"JlIa'!J: ,evv8J!l ACD' div3J!l EGIKO' dev3J!l H' diaf!1
L · divaf!1 M ' di Ti EGHMO" ACD . (vana. Har ch); K' om. L
om LM •• ACDI " EGKO' devan.t H ; di a after
vippatfivarr:r: va C
0.26 bdbam . CEHIKL- kaham . ADM O ' katham , G via: Viva AD
0.27 jam •
div. : jantava ACD" naha
..
cal... : calano
. . .
H le.. calana
•
IMO'Ii carana
Har cb pa4io GH ' (a I' K " (a)f.13do MO ;
 142 Malatfm[J(lhava 0.28

doseI?-a eso uvalambhat:tijjo / jal11 pi :vahii-viruddha:

rahas)-:::ovakkama-kkhalaJ:?a-velakkha -vicchaq ida
30 taJ:?assa bhaduJ:?o de vaa-gadal11 pi amhe tti /
ca / hi
tas tv prasabham upakramyamat:tal? sadya4
bhavanti' / evaql kila kamasutta-ara
mantenti /
LAVANGIKA
35 (sasram) ghare ghare ammakao purisa uvvahanti, t:J.a a ko vi
kula-
pabhavami tti vaa pajjaledi / ede khu de

Har ch after padido: vi L ACDEM ' ma':lido GHIK

LNO

0.28 a/terdoseIJa: ry<:l. ACD, after jaT}o EMNO; omGHIKL ova: ua EL· I jam:
om N pi ahi AD ; piabhi C ; pi 0 ; capiasahi El; pipiasabi GL· piasahi HKM'N
vahu: vadhii C
0.29 rahaso: rabhaso C; sahaso EK; raaso I; sarabasa 0 kkhaJat:l8: KN
velakkba: velagga 0 ; om N ccbaqqida EO· cchaqia GIK; cchandia
H ; bbhadia N mabanubbava : mahanubhiia K
0.30 vaa GKO ; EN ; aadaf!1 ACD · vagaam H· ?vaggaarp I; vayagaarp
M kif!J:karpA ;ki MN pi:viLMN apari:ap-
paqi M ; appadi N G· 0 deq.a MN;
teryavi K ambe tti ACD ; tumhetti EGHIL (yijyamiti Har ch) ; ja\liaditum-
heuvaladdhatti K ; ja\liadikiavaraddhakihmetti
vaatti N; vianadikeahmetti 0 ; amme Har V.I.
0.31 before kil!" ca: M, (after kU;t ca) N ca: kifici E hi :
om N
0.32 tv: ca GHIKL 8nadhigata : nadhigata I om A
0.33 HIK after N;
0 bhavanti GHIKLM ; bbavantIty(evam) ACDEN; (va)iti 0
evam: evvam MO kima: dhama l i r a : aro GHK · om
0.34 maotenti ADI ; mantedi C GHK; amaJ):enti E ; ma:q1taamt i L· iimaryanti MO?N
0.35 ghare ghare GHIKMNO ; ghare2 ACDEL ammakao ADEL 0 ; ammaka C ·
ka,?l)aao GK ; kulakaJ):ryakao HM ; ammantaao I purisa here ACD · before
ammakcLO cett; purusa MN uVl'ahaoti: mahonti a ACDG HKO ; om
EILMN after ko vi: kulakumaraT!1jaJ):af!1 M ·
0.36 lajja after AeDN · ?prasahiJ):arp E·
paradhil)af!1 GH; J' K; M; 0
raddha MO muddha : om ACD [aqa D; om ElM 0 Har ch
C kula kumari here om M
0.37 kumirl: kumaria EGHIK (kumarika Har cb) ADEGHK(M . anam
CILO pabhavimi C; paribhavami AD; pahavami EGHIKLMNO tti:
(m)Tti HI ede: e I kbu ADGHIM . kkhu CEKLO ; de : ndemi G ; om E
0.38 Act VII 143

hiaa -salla-::nikkheva :samb h arijj an ta :diisaha para-ghara-

J?ivasa-veragga-karir.;to maba:paribhava. • kade itthia-jamma-
jugucchanti bandha v,a / 40
MADAY ANTIKA
Buddharakkhide adidummavida via Lavangia / aVl mahanto
ko vi me v,M .-)varaho kado '? I
BUDDHARAKSIT A
adha Up. / tae komara:bandhale
ti /
MADAY ANTIKA
(kan;lau pidhaya) ano adikkamo ! I aho pamado! I sahi La vangie , 45

0.38 biu . .. kkhev.i : before: rnahii M biaa : ] imaraf:lli ACDEHM ;

G.Kt 0 Har cb; I sam: sa ; om K Har cb bbarij-
janta : smarijja nta H ; bariijanl3 I; arijjanta L' bharijjanto . marijjaota 0
dusahi : sudiisaha ACD ; du saba H; dusaha para ACDEGHO ; om I;
iUeg in K ; padi L · pari M; am
0.39 '{asa vera,gga.: viragga I CD' arir:1O EO
paribb:n.a: parihava EGHK kade ACD; kide EMNO
itthiii : I; L
0.40 El - Lavaq:l H ju,gncchano. 'C GHKNO; juuccb.auti ADEL ;
jugussanti I ;juicchati M bandbavi ACDEGHKLM' bandhava4I .; bandha-
vii. O ' jJleg in
0.41 before Bu.ddharakkhide: sahi MO dummivida ADKL- dummida C' dfimiiida
EG; diimayita H; ?dumavida I Har' diimia MO· dua via ACD?I; om E;
piasahi GHKLM 0 (pri aakh"i Hac cb) .a n AD Q. ayi C; adi EIKL
(ati Har cb): aviati M ; om GH after maJranro : khu GH ' kkhu L
0.42 me AD ; C· El; G ; mebhli·
H LM (mebhratra Mar ch after kado O ' debbadur:ta K' N
va8varioo El ' aa aradho CL' a arabo DGHKO' avaradho A ;
M · apariiho fiar cb kado: kido KM 0 ; okado L
0.43adba aha iJ!l I M. 0 afi,er ,adha i'!1: Mada1 sabikeri 0 I Buddha E (kesa-
ri 0) L; sud.a.:qlkhuamhebif!ljaha GHK (,rutaJ!lkbal I yathli Har cb);
sudaI!lca 11 [. M; sudaJ!le .amamhehiI!ljaha N;
om ACDO mama : maha GL " me MO sampadaf!J : afrer tae E; om 0
her,e ACDEL' before mama GHIKM 0 (na Har ch)komira.: kumara N
ban.dbaije A ?OG KO; bandbaie CE l ' barndbakie M; N
I
0.44 LM 0: (,an)ti AC (a ui DE' tti HK' G; (o)tti 1 after
ti : M
N, (sasa and without tti) 0
0.45 pidIJiya : om l adikkamo : twice M adi: ati H; adhi I' ai N
·pamado: ppaJIllido EGHL; ppamao I; th ice M sahi: sakhi H
144 Malatimildhava 0.46

asamaUna >mhi de tadhfl vi

pabhavami tti pi mantalssaq1 I
LAVANGIKA.
sfldhlno de ja[.lo I
MADA Y ANTIKA.
cinhadu jjeva mama bhaduno dussllada ca I
tumhehiq11riso vi je[.la bhatta 50
tti l [.la a tumhe imassa aq.ahijad):akkhar)-adhikkhev) -ovalambha-
durnmaq.assassa jarp. taql [.la a[.ladha I
LAVANGIKA.
kadhaql va asantaaI!1 pi I?-ama jaI?amo? I
0.46 asamatthi mhi: asamattha N de: om E after muha'!J : vi HI ' pi L ; api Rar
ch here ACDEL' before de GHM ' before muha'?T IK ; om NO
ACDLMNO ; EGHIK (darsayiturn Har cb) tadbi
CEKL ' tatha G; taha. ADH ; taha 1M 0 afler tadhii vi : a E
0.47 pabbavami ACDO; pabavami EGHIKMN ' ppahavami L pi: AD '
. CN; om M
kimvi mantaissam. GKLM ; amantissam . ACD' mantissam.EO, ,.
mantayissa H; mantayisse I
0.48 EKMO
0.49 H; I; Har ch jjeva ADEH ; yyeva Cl' jevva
G; jjevva KL ; dava MNO mama: maha LMN apari ACDEGHIK ;
avari LO ; M; KL 0 ca ACDE
KMO ; a GHIL ; om N
0.50 ... eso a: om L om I afrer lwnhehi'!l: vi
KMN ; pi 0 'iroo ADKNO ; ldiso CEGHIM vi: )pi E before sam-
pada'!l: eso N after K jadbi CE ; jatha I ; jaha ADGHK ;
jaha MNO M; N; 0 jeoa ... tti:
om N jado ElK (yato HaT ch)' jaha GH
0.51 a ACDGHIO ; 1).ahu E' na KN ' om M (L) imassa : ea sa E; tas a N
after imassa: itthiarya . E ; . L GHKM ' a1).ak-
khara ACDE; anabhijakkhara I' anabhijaakkhara L; anahijakkhara ; ana-
bhijadakkhara O' ad.bilddlevo EGH ' akkhevo AD ' iikKheo C ;
I ; akkhevo K ; ahikkbevo LMNO ; Har ch ovalambha
sassa : valambhassadussahassa I ; ovaiambba sa EGKLM 0 Jambhasya Har
ch ova : opa ACD
0.52 AD' CH ' (dussahassa I ; om EG KLMNO)
(M) : om IKLNO i':lsdha CEG ' AD ; H ' a1).Jdha I;
K; LO ; ja':laha M ;
0.53 before kadha'!J: ahme 0 kad.ham: kahaf!l ADM 0 after ahme
M; amhahe N vi pi ACD ; E ; vaagadamna
G; HK ' I; L; .M'
N; 0 ; asantal'!l Telang; vaggatamapina Rar cb ji-:timo
ACDKMNO ; al?amo E; GHL ; I
0.54 Act VII 145

MADA Y ANTIKA
dar:ti Mahave kiI!l pi kila Malarue
asi, savva:loassa gado pavado / 55
tarp khu viambhadi / ta piasahi jadha esa bhattut:J.o avakkh>-
abhiJ?iveso J?iravasesarp. hiaado uddharladi tadha kareha / aJ?r;tadha
maha:dosa tti jan,idam bhodi I khu ammakao
dummaventi hiaarp: "irisado durabhisangado tti / ma
bhaJ?aha Madaantiae kadhidat;l ti I 60
LAVA ' G IKA
al asavadhane alia:ppavada-mohide avehi / J?a tae saha

diJ;li ACDE ' ILM 0; om GHK mabi ...ubbave : mahabhaadhee

GHK (mahabhagadhe e Har ch) Mihau : om I p': vi LMN kila :
lcira G; lcisa . here om E Miladie : (after mettaal:!l) E
0.55 vii ACDMO; ara 1 ; taIa L ; tarn EGHIK Har ch mettaal!l: mettakarp
G ; melakaIp. H ; ]; 0 isi : asI M tabil!l : tassir!l O '
tti HL ; ttiattha 1 after rahi,?,, : kila E adi : adhi 01 ' ai pa"ildo: ppa-
vado EGHL pa V30 J
0,56 tam". viambbadii: om khu ACDG HIM ; kkhu EKLO edam :
K (evam Har ch) viambbadi ADGLO ' viamhadi CEK .; viambadi H;
vidambhaahi I' imbhai M after viamhhadi: tti E before la: jaha M t8 :
ka ; om HI jadhi: jaha GHK: jada I ; jaha O ' here om M esa: eso IN;
se 0 :l"akk.b8i ACDGO ' EL ' adhikkheva HI ' a K ; vekkba
MN
0.57 abbil.'i ACDGH ; EIKLM 0 f:l.irnxsesam: eso I uddbarladi:
uddhanadi K; uddhMiadi M' uddbarijjadi tadbi. : t.ahii ADK ' taha M 0
kareba ADN ; karedha CELO' karesi GHK ' karadharp l' ka.rehi M aooadhi :
aqQaql G ' M
0.58 mida G ; mahanto M ' mahaqlvaico dosa ACD' do 0 EGHILMO'
ppamado K ; pamado . Har ch before eti: 0 EK Har ch)
jal?-do G' jal.lide ; bhaJ?idaqt K bbodi ACD ; bhodu EGHKLO;
hodu IM ' homa . bhavatu Har ch ADHIKL ' EGO;
C- daru1?ao M; darul?-3su ADHl ' kkhu CEGLO; om KMN
ammakio HMO ; ammaka E ' ammakasu AD . ammakaosu C ' amakkao G'
m; kat?l.lakao K ' L
0.59 dummiv ti L ; dumma edi ADE ; dumma etti C ; duma edi G ' dllmavinti H;
diimavetti t· dlima enti K ' dumavaanti M ' dUl?aveyi ; diimaanti 0
irisido . . ,. tti : Lo t in M irisido· GKO; ldisado C: iri 0 AH ; jrisa D;
idisT E ' Tdisa ] . ldiso L ' Har ch dur:abbi : durahi ADI saogido :
sailga EH Har ch ; sailgI I; sarpdhi l... mi ... ti: om GH
0.60 A O· C· D' bhaI?issadha EKL, bhal?-issa I ; bhaJ?wi
M before kadhidaJr!: AD ' J.?a 0 (na Har ch) kadhidal!J. ti K (datti) C,
(danti) E, L ' kahidatti AD, (da.rpu) , (danti) . kahiditti I ; kathidat:pti
o
0.61 ai : om M asiv dhiDe alia ACD ; asavahanealialO*- E ' asam baddhaloa
 146 MalatimiuJhava 0.62

MADAY ANTIKA
sahi paslda 2 / aha vft J?a tumhe phu9aql bhaJ?idao /
kim
. ca amhe . saccakam jjeva Mahav)-ekkamaa.Jlva:::-loam. Maladim .
65 na jft1?-amo? / ke1?-a va kaC;ihora:kedai-gabbha.:vibbham) :avaava-
do bballa -nivvadida
. . -:sundarattanam . . sa visesa: Maha va -sa:-ha ttha-
nimma vida :ba ii I):::-ftva n-rai'da ):::-a valam ba :metta
Maladle, Mfthavassa a pabhada-canda-ma1?-9aO:ava.j""4ura;
parikkhama: I)a vibha / ca,
70 tad:diase Kusumaar)-ujja1?-a-peranta-raccha-muha-samagame sa-
GHIKMNO (asambaddha]oka Harch); asiivadhiit;lea L ppa-
vada EGHIKLMO ; paviida ACD ; ppamada mobide : mohie 1; ppamo-
hide K ",a : I?ahi L ; before mant;ssa'?1 M tae ACDEI ; tue GHKLMNO
after saha: kimpi HK ; kirp G ; kif!1v1 L
0.62 ACDE ; jampissarp GK ; H ; mantayisse [; L-
MNO; Har cb
0.63 Madayantika : N pasida : ppaslda GL 2 ADEGKL;
twice H; om CINO?M Har ch aba va ADGHIKLMO; adbava CE; aba
om KLMN ACDI ; GH' phuq.ak:-
K ; apphuqaf!l L ; M; puq.bamaa ; 0 bba",idio:
bhaI?anno E ; bhat:lihiivo I' abhal?ieiao K before ci((hadha: ta E cit-
CEGHKL; ADMNO ; I
0.64 ca: ha E; kil!la N ; om M amhe : H ' om OK Harch
ACDGHIKL ; saccam EMNO .ueva ACDEH ; jevva GKLO' yyeva I ; eva
M ; evva N ekkamaa: aikamaa H ; ekka EK; ekkamaya ] . ekka M; (a)maa
NO jiva loa,!, ACD ; jia1ocal!l EGIL ; jivaloa H' jividaloaJ!l K ; M;
NO malacfi N after Miiladirrr: kkhu E;. khu H; khaii
L
0.65 CEHIKL (na Rar Cat ch) ; om ADGMNO Har Kath cb
ACDMNO; al}funo EK; GHL ; al?iIDo AD?L ; katbora
CEGHIKNO; akatbora . M kedaf CMN ; keai EIKO' ketai G · H ,·
kedaa ADL avaava: (a)dhavala I
0.66 dobballa: dobballi GH; dubbala M ACD ' I?ivvattia EL' I?ivvaddhia
G; HI; M? . ,?ivva9ia 0 (sund ....)ttaoam:
savisesa ACD ; ttanasavisesam
. . E ('lvasavisesam. Har ch); ttanavisesam GHKLN',
ttaI?a visesa I; MO MilIava : maha va!!l I
0.67 Qimmsvida ACD' Qimmavida IMO ; EL : iI}immida GHKraida:
viraida ELNO ; viralaa M avalamba : E Har ' a alambha
GH JivaQarp GH
0.68 before Miiladie: piasahie M pabbida : pahada EM ; ppabbada GH
canda canda AD ; anda C aval,14ura CDEKL ' ava A-
ava£,lq.ura G:ba.raQguTa H1 ' apaQ.gura M?O
0.69 ramat;Lia : ramaQ.ijja MO da£!lsa(Qa) [ pari-
bhavidaql E; IMO ki,!, ca : a N
0.70 tad: MNO d.iase: diahe KMNO ' diasaha. K.usumiar): lrusu-
miikar HI I new: ratthii H ; racha. K samigame:
samaame HMN savibbbam> : ssavibbhama(u) I
0.71 Act VlI 147

vibbham >:uUasida :kodfiha1>-upphulla ·pansar)::uvvella :tnfita-sa vilasa;

masuta:-sarp.caral?-a-caru :taraa - iraanta
sa vv >: fLdar )::ovadesa -1) imma vida :vea44ha-muddha-: sundara mae I!a
nin1vida. imflnam d itthi-sambbeda ? I kim ca mama bhaduno · dana-
75
milaanta :deha::soha.nam uvvattamana:miilam via na lakkhidam
- .. • 0 0 _ • •

hiaaql ? / kiq1 ca, mae a pi /

LAVA · GIKA
dat;I i I
O.71u1lasida: uUasia M IkodObal .. .. 0 kodUhalu,P""
pbutla ACDEGH ; kodiihaJlahaUampbaJia ] - koduhaluppbullidii K ; kuduhalap-
pbu[a L ; kouha!appulla M ; om . .. . ph.alapphaliya Har parisaruvveUa
AD· C; Tdang·
I; K Har; EGHL ; om M viJasa EGHL
0.72 C S8l!lcaral,la ci.ru tirai : sancaruttararn<l* A; saiicara-
caruta.raya D · :STa.c:aruttaraffiraa C saJ!lcan.1,la GHIKL· M(AD) ;
sal!lcalal).a EO· iQiddha ciJU: om tHai : daraa I after tiiraa:
viadariri.anta 1IibbIt M· virianta.:
raanta A · virnyamal).a D ,,'iibbhami: vvima G EGHILO ;
(a)l)oanga ACDK ACDI - EG ; H·
K; L ; smgacaana M· aya . sang'iaaria 0
0.73 sanidaro : ACDMO · S3vw.do N ; savva.ii:ro EGHL ; savviiaro [K ovadesa:
ovisesa I ACDL· [Jimmavida E· GHM · E;limmida 10 ·
K; bejor,e veat!4ha: 0 veaddba E ; viaddha
ADGHIKL · vea44hi CO ; veaddba M· vaili94ba N suDdali AD· ilieg
thro.ugh a/ler;aJ.ion 'C · MNO; mahura cett beforre mae: piasahaari E
mae: tue GH ; before MN; before 1Jirin'idii H after mae: vi LO
om I
0.74 1 [ ; om ACDsamhlledi :
sambbea GHL; l ; 'W"bbhama K ca.: k.fqia KLMN mama:
maha M ; om N I

0 ..75 before vivaha. K. Pl'Uia ACD.· ubbbaria. G .; ubbharida HK.L

(udbhfla Har ch); obbhada [ - uocbalida E·. M ; ??uvau.a N; uttar.a.ng
(uvvea) 0 - . : om 0 iea: (a}vea H ; ovea ]K; uvvea MO - uvea N
ni.D. ADEGKN · vvaiara LM 0 ; vaiaf3.D.1 CH] AD· C;
santavia E· (r)uggarida GK; garida H ; gaita I- (r uddivida L· om MNO ;
angarita H ar ch
0.76 miliaata : malaanta G EGHIM · CKL ' DNO; soha
A K· M mfilabandha-
J.l.ilI!l GKLO .· om H w.:
om ACDH '(m)iva I before '!Q: GHKM
lakkhida . : lakkhido I·· lallh.ia.f!l M
0.77 ca: LMN - ti.qlva K e ACDGLI .; maeeNampi E.;. maeedall.lpi
H ; edampime]' K - maedaJp M; m.e 0 pi vii AD - pi CLO ; vi GHIK
M ; om api Har cb ' : smaridaml· sumaridavvam G
0.78 before kiF!' : sahi 0 diJni ACDEI: GHKLM ,0 avaral?l :
visum a ridam. M
 148 M iilatlmiidhava 0.79

MADAY ANTIKA
jam tassa mama cea t:t a-
80 :pia Maladle Bhaa vadi - vaat:t )>;:ovat:tI,lasa-
sambodhidena
. .. hiaam
. ca Jividam.. ca Mahavena . paritosia-Uanena . .
:sahase / aha Lavail gie, tae jjeva bhaI?-idarp.
'pa<;ticchido khu piasahle aaq1 pasado' tti /
LAVANGIKA
kadamo mahabhao tti t:ta sumarida >mhi /
MADAY ANTIKA
85 sahi sumara tassiqt diase viruddha -: sa vad >-ovada va-

0.79 Madayantika: om I t:al:!tkhu ACD mama: maha M ; om N (Ma-

hi)r:tubhivassa: I;lubhaassa EK ; nubhavassa G' I;luhllvassa H ; I;luhavassa N
HI ; EK
0.80 lambha ACEHJO ; lambhi D ; paqilambhaGKLN; M s;aivedikie
ACD; nivediae cett Bbaandi: bhaavadie CMO viaddha MN
·uvaI;lI;liise1).a MO
0.81 C ; sambohidena AD ; EGHIKL (bodhitena Har ch);
MO ; codiel?a N ca ACDIO ; a EN ; om GH KLM Har ch jividam:
j'ivicup ADGHM ca ACDIO ; a EGHKLMN piritosia: paritosia G;
piiritosa I; paridosia EN; pariosia M ttaI;la AC (tva Har ch) ;
D; G ; ttel?a L
0.82 saal!lgiha sabase GK ; saaf!lgahasasahase H ; ACDE ; saangahe IM·
L; NO (svayangrahe Har ch) H
aha GHIKMO Har v.l. ; adha E; ahava AD ; adhava C ; ayi I ; ahaa L ; ahava N ;
cl Har CaJ ch ; am Har Kath ch ; alam Har v.l . before tae : L tae
ACDE ; ta I ; tuya G ; tue HKLMNO iieva ADEH ; yyeva Cl ; jjevva GK ;
evvaqt L ; M ; vi N ; evva 0 I
0.83 pa4icchidal:!l H; I ; iUeg in N khu ADGHN ; kkhu
CEKLO; a M; om I after khu: EGHlKLMNO (na4 Har ch) puido:
0.84 before kadamo: sahi CEGHlKL (sakhi Har cb) ' om ADM 0 kadamo:
kadhamo G ; kadhama H before mahiibhiio : so GHIKO (asau Har ch)
mabibbio CGHL ; mahabhaa A ; mahaa D ' mahat;tubhavo El M ;
K ; maha,!uhao NO; Har ch. tU : om MN O ACO ; vi
cett (sumari)dambi ACD' daJ!lviamae EK' G L 0 ; dal:!lviame HI
«(smr)tamivame Har ch); doviamae M
0.85 sabi : om CGH SWDara: summarehi MO after sumara: 2 EKL ; (repeated)
o after tassi,!, : evva M diase ACDGHI .· diahe EKMNO ; avasare L
viruddha viruddha ACD ' via4a EGHIKM
Har; L ; viar,a 0 beforedut,t,ha: (deleted) E si-
vadovadiva: saddUlapahara E ; saddiilava.vaa 0 ovadiva ACD ' avadesakaIa
GHKL; adesakliJa I ; (a)vaa M ; N ; vinipata Har cb.
0.86 Act VI! 149

goara-gada, j'iivida-ppadaiI?-a
pivara: bhua :tth am bha :sahaarena sambhavida :niklcarana:-bandha vena
kadua .
)!?hi j jeI).a man,Isal;
uttaqa; :jajjarida :jav»-.apiqa- 90
karur:lli-.J>ar,e I}a mama. kade visahido

0.86 goara ACDE ' goaTal!l GHlK.MNO· L ga.d i: gaa M tulagga

EMN?I (tulagra. Hat cb) ' AD' olagga C ' a alagga GH ; ,?uggabek-
kasulagga K ; takkala L ; mubutta 0 appears to bave read
tulagga) pride _. : ACDLM 0 samnihida GHI
K .; jaJabindusarpsaida E befor;e Jivide'JD : r.tia E.;. nija H jivida
EGHIKL - om ACDMO
0.87 pivan CDEGK M; piam ALO' pi'3. H ; om I; .i am N bbua : bhuja E ttha-
mbba IK.', ACDLM ; tthambha. EGHO sambhividi
ACDN ; sambbavidA EGHK ; sambhavia MO - om It. Har ch bandhavena.:
bandhaveQ,a I ; K
0,88 DEK ek.kaUa AD' ekkella C ' ekka EGHLMNO' aika. I Har
Kath ch ; aikka K ' aikaki Har Ca) cb sin: sare N uvahira: Aavahara M'
uvaraba C; uvahare
0.89 parilakkhidi: rakkhida AeD Har ch)' parirakkhida ] mbi: mha N
jeJ;la ... darida : vibatta 1- 0. je'.18. a EGKLMN ; jeI?a H .; om ACD
(10) AD, OGN- K ' dtq.hatara H - dJnba L ; via.s anta E;
om MOO) Har CR EGH .', L' om ACDKMN(IO) Har ch
vidi:rida EGHL' darida ACD ' om. KM mamsal>:
, marnsal
. HI
0,90 I ; uttala K Har cb 'Vattba ACDEGKMN; vavaccha H;
vakkho [ , vakkha LO ACDK . EL' G' tthala-
H ' lanchar.te,?aI ; MN ' tilialujjalida 0 ; silia lalaii-
chanena Har ch ja(l.banl. Har ch) ' EGH[L;
KO ;jagaq.a N' om M before javiJ:. dilta E ja.v i: japa IN' mutta MO
ipi4a : CD;. aVi A ' (a)lada M ' 0 before hiirirJa: ruhira E
0.91 hirioi:dharinaCGH N pareDaACD.; dhanenaM Q' AemanenaE'
,?-a G; H' I Har cb) '
KL lDlama : maha M tJ de CEGHIKL.; kadena AD; k ide MNO
visahido .. .. saddilla: om C - ahahiaabhumibbaobhara
N risahidoEGHK - visahida [L' M Harch ' om AOO(C
H ;,?-iumbaa A ; Qiumha D' Qisumbhanta E ' aq.anta GKL ' nipatat Har ch;
aQissamya.m8.Q..a I ; khuppanta O' .om M(C ' . nisumbhata Har v_I. dan.-
tur.ida scripsi; da:pturia G' E .' daria H - darida. l ; daria K ' LM ;
om ADO(CN):. atid.fPla Mar cb
0,92 saddDla .: saaJa 0 , a:l,laha E' G ACGK. ;. paghada E ;
Qilia H; sihli L' Qilia M ' N' O .' .om Dlvajja: v.a iibaO paiijara
ppahiro: paJijaro C iijan EGHK 0.' om ADILM ppabiiro EGHIKN '
paharo AD.; ppahara LM,o after ppahiiro: 5amasadido AD mirido(A) :
mario M .; 9m D ,I : om. ACD; evva N so : om G[KN dus K
 150 M alatlmiulhava 0.93

saddiila-naha-nihada:vajja-paiijara-ppaharo -marido a so duttha:

savada tti /
LAVANGIKA
Maarando! /
MADAY ANTIKA
95 (sanandam) sahi bhat;tasi? /
. -
LAVANGIKA
t;taql bhat;tami, Maarando tti! / Sanram asya4 sPfSaufi
- samskrtam asritya)
Vayaql tatha nama yath» vadamy?
ayarp. tv akasmad vikala4 katha-)ntare /
kadamba-goD-akrtim
visuddha;mugdha4 kula-kanyaka:janah? //1 //
MADA Y ANTIKA
(salajjam) sahi kisa maql uvahasasi? / bhaI?-ami, vimhaventi
tarisassa kadanta-kavalida:jantu-
jlvida -baIamo4ia: -: Qvaa

0.93 sivada : saddUla E; sapada I ; sasavada M ; om N tti : om MO after It;:

E
0.94 om E afrer Maarando: tti E (priyasakhi Har ch)
0.95 sahi ACDO; piasahi EGHIKLN (priyasakhi Har cb) ; om M
EGH Har ch bbanisi:
. . I
banasi
0.96 GH ; I after tti L after tti: mada kamavi.
E EIKMNO ; A ; smitaqt
D; CGHL sprSano: sPrSanfi MN
0.97 iSritya (D): om AC
la vayal!' : ahaIp ACDKL yatbittba EGHIKO; ya.tharthakam AC;
yathatham D ; yadatthakiIp L; yadarthakiIp M ; yatbatrakaIp N
d mugdha H ; I kola: kbalu ]
1.1 salajjam: om C after sahi: avehiavebi M ku : kiIptti G; kitti H ' kisa MN
ova: ua EL basasi: hassi D' hasi M vimhiveati AD ; viambhaventi E ;
nivvavedi
.. GL Har vJ .; nivvadevedi
. H ; nivvavooa
. I ' nivvaaamli
. . K ; uvveaamti .
MN ; uvveaadi 0 ; om C ; suddhayati Har cb
1.2 ADEK ; maIp GHLN ; om CIMO Har ch tadisassa CEL
J?-irapelckha I vava ACDEHIKN ; ivava G; vvava LMO sii-
DO : sayyino H kadanta ACDIO ; kaanta .E MN; kidanta GHKL kavalida
ianto ACD ; kavaliijanta EGIKLMO ; kavaIijanta H ; kavaIia N ; kavatrkriya-
mal?-a Har ch
1.3 mo4ia CGLM; mogida AD ; m<$ EIKNO ; m04iii H before paccii'!AWJ.U:
1.4 Act VII 15t

I).ama:::ggahaI?a tadha a so tae vi

moha- 5
bhfuni-vigalid> :asi:lanhi-nittbambha-
dhlra:dharida:sarira:::bharo paccakkhlkado jjeva Madaantia-
MahabhIto tti /
vikaran
BUDDHARAKSIT A
pi de safirel?-a / 10

?kaaE ' jlvida (here and before H l:lul?Jl : I garuo

ACDEKLM O' guruaro OH ' guruvo I CE ' sankaha AD
MNO ; sankadhasu GHKl (Saokathasu Har cb) ' saDkadMsvavi I
1.4 before f}Qma : mota ggaba . EOHILMO
Har ch) ; K • : H' pini O ' om I Gfter
ca E; ,a GHL tadhi. .. .. om N tadbi CE; taha
ADGHIK; tatha L ' taha MO a: ca l ' om EHMO(N) so : om 0 tae
ACOEI.; tue GHKLMO Yi: before tae I. I;
MO ppa : pa CDI
1.5 irambba: ala.t:!tbha 0 vimbri,ida ACGH ' vimhavida D ; vimbhaarida E ;
?vimbarida. J; vibbhamavida KL- vialia M' vimmarl:vida 0 sarira: sanrado
I; sarlrasailgo 0 galida: galida MO. 's ea saliIuppilo: om ADO sea:
seda CH uppilo: opUo H; opJilo I ' ?upi4o M ; lost in C mob.: muhu M
1.6 . . iIuta ACDEGHIK; maiilaanta. L; muulanta. M' milanta 0 J?0tta
A AEGHL ; DKMO · I; pala (after
its long omission) N jualo: jua:l?o N vigalida ACO' vialia EG K . vikalita H ;
vilaia [ ; vialida L ; viJ?ihida M ' vilasida NO' vilaggida Bhand's B
ACEO ; D[ ' G' HK ' ]a<13. L M' Har ch
ACO ; O ' v*-hanbha EGHKLM Har ch) vi4ambi I ;
(fl)vatthambhia N
1.7 dIiir1a dIIirida: om N in.: dh'irada E ; om L befo.re dhiirida: pari OK
dbirida : dbaria HIKM sarirablliro EGHKL - sa:riro ACD' saiirasaro IMNO
lHo: kido MN De. ADE - yyeva Cl ' jevva GO ' jeva H'jjevva KL' evva MN
1.8 M .etb.: before ,!imitla MN' om EL
GHM' E· C · vicch.ittia [ . KL ; vib-
bbavia viocbaq4iaO beforemalulggha: maha OHKO Har ch jha loo:
Jivati 1; Jlvio, M ; jivido N ji". ADLO' 'pa CEGHK Mahibbio : mahabhavo
C; mahabhaa G ; mahabhago H' mclhabbaa .. om E tti: om E
1.9 before sveda: iti E' mamdara L sna": svedadi GHKN vikiri.o: vikaraJ¥
.oH
1.10 after Buddharalgila : PrSanti M, (asya ... saJaj-
jam: aisajjasaslle 1 before ,'a')QSitiaJ?t: sahi GH (sakhi Har v.1. ch); sahisad-
dhasasarirdcitpva K ' M ; assatiliasarlrepiasabi 0 ; api
sadhvasaSarlre Hac ch avasida . . .. av ' : om aedaI!lsi-
M; pi de ACDE(ap' le Har v.l. ch)' vvade GHK ; piasable
 152 Malatfmiu:lhava 1.t1

MADA Y ANTIKA
(salajjam) piasahi, avehi / ubbhiI?f.1a >mhi sahavasif.11e vissambha-
kadhae /
LAVANGIKA
sahi Madaantie amhe vi jal}amo / ta. paslda, virama
va vadesado / ehi, vissam bha -ga b bhiI;La :kadha ->r;t u bandha -sarisaqI
15 cinhamha /
BUDDHARAKSIT A
sohanam Lavangia bhar;tadi /
MADAY ANTIKA
duve vi tumhe piasahlo /
LAVANGIKA.
. jadi ta kadhehi kadharp r;tU de kala gacchadi tti /

L; om MN(O) sarirena: om N afrer sarire1Ja: piasah1e E' piasahieavedi-

am H
l.ll salaijam: om ACD(I) piasahi : sahi HM (sakhi Har v.1. ch); om avehi:
apehi E; avehi2 L AD ; uvvi1).a G; L ; uvvinna-
davvit:la I ; M mm : hma 0 ( maq Har ch) abavisinje:
C; 01;11 M ; sahavasa Harch v.I. after viisi1';lie: piasahIemaladie MN '
mala die 0 vissambba kadhie scripsi ' Visamhadae EKL (visrambhattaya Har
ch v.I.); kadhae C; v1sambhanharaQl I ; GH; om ADMNO ;visra-
bdhataya Har ch
Lt3 Madaantie: om I amhe : H ; abamhe I vi: om N
AD ACDEILM O ' GK ; janemi H ti:
om ACDK Har ch
1.14 vavadesado CEKNO' vadesado A ; vadesodo D : vvavade ado GL; vvavasaado
H; Uivadesado I; paradosado M: upadeSiit Har ch; apadesat Har ch v.l. vis,.
sambba ADM; visambha CElL Vlsambha GHKgabbbil;Ul ACDI'
gabbhif?a E; gabbha GHL; gabbhida K ; gabbhidiie M; gabbhia 0; om N k...
dha CEL; kaba GHIKO; kahae Mat;lubandha GHIL ' bandha. ACD Har
ch; bandhel)a E ; om KM 0 savi esa 0 ; om M
1.15 suham : suha. D I after ciuhamha : tti E
1.16 before soha1)aJ?1: sahi MO Lavaogii (M): lavailgiaebha!?-idal!lO
1.17 duve vi tumhe ACD ; vidheambi EGHIKLO - viheamhi M . vidheyasmi Har ch
sampada,!,: N · samp3aJ:!l 0 after sampadarr: hi I piasahlo ACD;
piasahiQaQl E-O (priyasakhTnam Har ch)
1.18 jadi ACDI; jai EGHKLM 0 ,e ul!l ACDE; 1: ,evval!l GHKLMNO
ta: om M kadbehi CElL ; kahehikaham ADGHKMNO DU :

kJchu E; om N
1.19 ACT Vll 153

MADAYA IKA.
nisamehi, piasahi I mama Buddharakkhida-pakkhavada-
jjeva jal}e bharid ):uvvaranta.-:koduhaD ;ukkaJ?!ha: 20
manoraham hiaam asi I tado vihi-nioa-nivvutta:damsana bhavia

viratta :jivia sarp.bhavia >mhi I iamhi> :apuvva ;savv) -:

hudavah)-uddama:dusah):aasa-dummar;taanta..;pariat;t3. paccasa-
25

1_19 Madayantiki: om nisimebj : J?i samaa I - amehi L after '}isiimehi :

me N IIl8m : maha M - om afcer mama : da a GK M - hi HIO Har ch ;
ppiasahi L pakkha :pada CH vida : pada CH
1.20 ppaccaeJ?a M before jjeva : GKL - pa4humaI!l E-
pa9hama HI- M 0- pratbamam Har ch jjeva ADEH;
yyeva Cl; jevva GKL - jjevva L - eva M -evva after jOlJe:
anuraoaviatassimjane L- anu.r3omaha adibhfunigadotaha M bbarld): avira-
la'bharid E - HSic I- MO.- om uvv,uanta: ultapanta.G; odbha-
ranta H ; I H- here also I -
o
1.21 GKLO, (manoratham) Hcbaya ; ACDEHM-
I ; madhararp bef ore hiaarrr : me H hiaa [ asi: asI M tado:
tadotado H - ado vihi ADHKM I - vidhi CEGILO I-
1?-ajia before IJivvut la : cira K nivvutta: niutta C - L?I-
vutta H ; M ; duvvutla 0 da 'Ba:
. . . ana
samdam . K bhavia:
bhavi D - a 0 ; om M
1.22 al.1aoga : aasa aitga MO - aasaI.Jailga ; om AD dukkha: dussaqIgakha M;
om K ACDE - sanda id GKL- 0 H - saq:tdav IM 0
ACD - C EK: G- okva4-
anta H; I; L ; q.ajjanta M ; NO - Har
ch citta : om C
1.23 viratta ACD ; J - viba4anta cett pvii samhbivia mbi/ viamhiipuv-
l1a scripsi, (avuvva) L - jiviasambhaviamhi/ saviamhidaha A. (sa.v iamhi lost)
C, (samviamhi) D- pvidaviambbiauvva E -
GK - Jldattha.viqambiapuvva H - jiviasarighavijambhiapuvva. I (jivitasailgha-
vijrmbhitapiirvva Har Kath cb) - jivia.saJ:!l:saduravilambhiapuvva M ; jivia-
saduraviambhiapuvva - 0- (ilJeg in Rar Cal ch)
pajjaUda Gsic HIK - jalada A- jalida CD- sa:qlvalida E .- sazpjalia M -
N; S3nkalida 0
1.24 before huda: maaQa ELM 0 - GK - om ACDHI buD GHIK. ; hua
ACDELMNO uddim : uddaha E - uddamadaha MO
1.25 vimokkha: mokkha 0 -visakha.1 metta : mitta G- marta 0 suJaba : sulabba J
maccu ADI- miccu CGKMO - marana EL - maoca H - mitthu nivv8na:
I

J?ivvah3J?a A ' ryi 8J?aba D pacpnia : G - pa4iul)a H - pa4ia ula

A

1.26 I - vaal?3 L ACOIKLMO - raid E ; a-

vaJ4it H ;
pandhi ana CGIKLM · esa ADEO (a eSa Har ch - avega H vai :
 154 Malatlmiidhava 1.26

vaat;la -va44hid >:ayea -va'iara - Jl va -loa -pariva tta.I!l

anubhavaml /
. samkappa;sivit:ta)-antaresu a maI?-0rah)-ummada-mohida
via tal!1 jaI].3q1 j tadha a piasahi uvvii"ba:
30 vimhaa-visankhal> -: uvvena ;vittha ranta: tnala :netta pundana -tandav >-
ca,
kavalid>
kkhalida; gambhlra :bharadi _ :::vivaraf!1 'pie Madaantie'
tti vaharadi I
vvaiL Java ADHIM 0; jla CEKLO; .ilia G loa : I (lokam Har ch);
loka 0 ACDEGH' parivuttarp M ; NO; parivatta-
miva- I
1.27 bbavami : bhaI).ami K ; homi M ; havami afcerbhal,liimi : mandabhaiJij' H;
I
1.28 sankampa CDIN sivil;laantar,esu : M ; sivlt;laeSu 0
EGKL; ACD; sivi9a H; suva'Qaa I antaresu : E
a: ca G; om IN ma.DO : M ummada : ommada I; omada M mo-
bida: mohita H
1.29 via C; viva A; va 0 ; a H1K; om EGLMNO Har Kaili ch G
tadha a K; taha AD' jadha C ; tadhii vi E; sopi G; tahaa H; tabaa vi I;
sacavi L; tado M; taMa N; taha 0 pia: (taha)via D sabi : sah1 GN
after sabi: so E ACDIKNO; muhutta EHL ; mahatta G· om M
uvvudba
. ACDK; nivviidha
. ' . EHL' nivfldba
., G ; udvanda . 1; ududha
. MO; vidudha
.
N
1.30 vimhaa : vitthaa G; vimmaa I visaitkhaD CDM ; visaI'!1khul A ; 0;
visaqIthul EGIL ; vidasthul H; K; N; viSaI!l?skul HaT ch
unella : a vela G ; odvela J. ovvela M ; uvvela · ; illeg in E vittharanta: vit.-
tharattba [; vitthariperanta M' ittharidaperanta I; N;
ratta'Qi'u!a(letta) H ; AD ; rakta E Har ch ' lo]a'!lta G ; 10la K; lalida L;
ratta 0 ; om CM t:letta : potta G ' (I).ar:ta)letta H MN
0 ; **lE-vvea<;lamara M :
tandav HI
1.31 AC ; D; EGH' obboqaJ:!l I; upp'iqaqambara K·
uddarp.qa L ; ;u Har ACDElN; pairii4ha K;
pparii9ha GHLMO mair,e a ACDGHIKM ' merea EL; meria N; mairea 0
mada ACDEGHN .; dappa I; maa KL ; om MO ACDE; ghum-
GH ; 1; dappaIp KMO; ghul?T?iarp. L;
pakkhiranta N after ghummiraf!l : ia GHL (iva Har ch) ; om ACDEIKMN
GHIKLM ; om ACDENO jjhiedi ACDEL Har ; jjhiiadi GIK; jjaadi
H; iihaemi M; ?iihaei N ;cchaami 0 after jjhiiedi: EGHL; om ACDIK
MNO ca: a LMN
1. 32 kavalida: ka valia MN gbosa: ghoseT?a E ; ghorn I ; om M after ghagghara:
1.33 kkhalida: kkhalia bbilradi GHIKLO ; taradhlrarav ADE; taraniva.
bharal MN bbarlda : bhavia N pie (C) : mapie H;. piasabipie AE; piasahie
D; priyasakhi Har ch
1.34 before ui: ehi GHL Har ch before vaharadi : ID3J:!l EM ; after viiharadi L
baradi: hara i MN
 1.35 Act VII 155

adha a papph]..lrauta :paohar )-uccalad 35

paribha sasam bham) ;llttarangi ;dhamadhamaanta maql
samuttiisedi / sahasa tak:khru;ta-kaq.hora:
kamala bahu )-ovarida-.Jlaohar):::uggamrup.
vihaq.anta :vihala:mebala;vaiaa
pi S2-vv):adara-paatta- 40

1.35 adha a GHKL' avia El ; aba(va) M O' om ACD papphuraDta GH L'

paribhavanta AD ; paribhamanta C' pasaranta E: paba atti I; puhamta (with
erasures) K ; vaharantopaba antovia M ; vapaba antovia . vaharanto O'
pahavantaka Har paoharoccalad L; paoocad A ; paoccha(u} C- pauocca(u)
D ; paoharucchailga(u) E; paoba:ra.kk.halad GH ; kampa(u) [. pavo (followed
by erasure and harochatlu in marg) K ; kopuocaJid M . kovuvvutt 0 ; om N Har ch
otta.n a CEIKMO' uttartaa AD' uttanat;l ua GHL; uttaricca N a
avalambha H' eat:la E
1.36 ACDGL ' pariha eI;la E' para ha HK' parabhaver;ta I ; paraha a
MO' parahar;tava . parabbavena Har ch sasambham> ...
om I sasambham> : sam HO ' M uttaraitgi ADGL '
uttaranga CKM 0 Har cb; uttuilga E ; uvvaranta H ,. (Kmarg): om
ACDKMO Har ch ' after uuiisedi I
1.37 sam : om ACDE utti.sedi: uttasayadj H' uttasadi [. uttasei MN
sahasa : sahasa M li.satjjjd.) . •• visajjisaria visajjid) EK;
vivajjid ACD ' visajji GILMO ' visaijit(a) H a . ACO ' E;
aqlSua.J!l(ppa G ; pa) H ' asam 0) I ; K:
L' aI!lsuha(ppa) M' asub(ova} O' anantaraeva Har Kath ch
A

ACO ; osaranta E' GL' M;. pasarida H ; opasaria I ;

avasarida K ' O' apa? yatam Har Kath ch kbal;Ut: L
ACE ' kakoFa D ' bq.ora I; GHKLMNO
1.38 kamala ): M ; komala-
0 0 irida AD' ovvarida C' El . avavaria GLO ;
apavaria H ; avavarida M paohar): pavobar K ' vaohar M
H[
1.39 vihadanta: vihalanta AE vihala CGM' viula AD , viviha E' viala H; vihula [;
viada KL' vallaha . om 0 mebali ataa : mehallaa I (a)vaava AC
«(a) vayava Har cb); (a)vaavaava D ACD ' £-0
ADM- 0 ' plvaroru CEHIK? Harch' plvanlru GL
ppaqi A
1.40 v.i ppa.,.u ACD ; vippadiva EGHKLMO:. vippadIpa I idinim CEGHL'
A' w .d im D' K' M; vihia 0 ;
varttinim Har ch pi : om M 0 after pi: GHL savvidara ACD ;
savvaara I' savvaaFa EKM sarvvaura Har cb)' acdiara. GHL; suvaarn N sav-
vapaara 0 paatta : C; paotta I
1.41 nlvvattida ... lita: garuobama M oinattida. ACDE' nivvattia GLM .
H ; nibattaa I ' K utta : om M ' opa HI ; a va0
pbamsik:ada: parisida 1 , ACD ; parusi EGHIKLMO
- Har
Kath cb) ' HarCa cb cb ACDEO; I (C)· kida GHKL; k.ia M
A' (a C· hia a.saa.I!l D ' hiaa L

14
 156 M iilafimiidhava 1.41

u bahu:-daJ?j):::a - :-9 piasahi

parii<;tha: saddiila:::ka<;thora:kararuh :patt)::: a
415 vacchatthala-J?-ipphura: q.lsaha£!l
kadua 'savea:vihuda:mattha)-aviddha:kabarl-q.ihitta:kiua-pariggab)-
ovaggid) :,muh)::avaava -sa -: echanda!:vilasa vida..;.
viaddha
.. . .-: vaina
. . :kamalo vama :ganda-miil
... .. )-ovari n ihitta :papph uranta;

1.42 EKNO; I; M ; siddba C ; iddba ADGRL palhat-

tha ACDEGKL; pahlatta H; palhat;ta I ; pahroala MO ; pupaqiliala loana.:
10 M; viloaqa N vibbavid): vihavid KM ; vihavi H ; vibbavi I
1.43 uvabasia ACOKMNO; IDllJ11uvahasadi GHIL (mamupahasati Rar ch) ' uaha-
sadimal!l E biula I ; diul.la L ; M;
avedana I; avedhana LN; aveddha M ; avettha 0 niccettha HKO ' nie-
ehettha IM ; nicetta N; nivaddha A.'O ; nividdba'C '
•• • • • .
' . . .
GL .o -

midam. EHIK; .' nikhadidam

. . o AD ; niadhidam
..o . C ' niantidam
.. • GL ; nivvattiam
• • MNO
1.44 kal;lhora AOE ; ka!bora GIKLM ; H ; om C 0 orampa.CDE ; orappa
GK; H ; (rub)apa I ; L ; (a)vvaha.ra M ' (a)ppahara
N ; orappha 0 N patta: danta ACD ; vatta E an-
n ACDIN; avaIl EGHKLMO
1.45 uttaIa H; ottala I before vaccha : via M vaocba: vakkha 0. «ha-
la lost in M ACDI; EKL 0. ;
H; G : om N H; M;
saannahasabasam
. . N
1.46 kadua: adua M kadua siVel.: kadapasadaQangaql. ACD savea.: saveba H
vibuds ... viIasivids.: om L viboda ACOI ; vidbua EH · vihua GKMNO
ma«haa: matthaka I av.iddhll: abaddba GH ; a vviddha M ACDE ;
I; GR ; I?ihida KL ; viI?ihitta N pari: om I
1.47 ovaggid) ACDEG ; avaggid H; ovakka K ; (a )vaggid M ; ovaggam N ; aaggid 0 ;
om I; oaggita HaT ullllimida ACD ; uqqam.ia EHM · 0 ; ullasida G ; (ggah)
I; K N avaava: avaave M
saccbanda : N vilasavida ACDE ; via G' Vlasa H; visaria I ;
vihasida K ; vilasa MN; viIasia 0 ; vikasita Har ch.
1.48 viaddha D; I; om 0 ; kavoIa EHIK
kapola GL Har ch miilovari. CDK Bha nd's BC' A; miilaeira
EGHLNO Har cb; mii.laeiravi I; miilecira M ADEGKO ; Qihatta eN;
nihia M; nihida HIL papplturanta : vippuria M ; vipphuranta NO
1.49 Puojida: HIKMNiibllra: adara G om C
AD ; samugga E; samuggama GO ; samuggaa HK ; samuggaka I;
samuggata L ; samagga M; magga N ;. samukta Har Cat ch; samudagaka Har
Kath cb maoo . AD!; mana . EKMN' manu . GHLO afler manohara
. :
kara L D; mpassa I ubbbamirida uddbuma·
vida E; uddhumavia H; oddha [; ubbhamavia. K' uddhua M' N;
(a)pulai'a 0
1.49 Act VII 157

punj id) :-c1ha ra :saqlpu4a -: -l!ibbhar )-: ub b hama vida :

:anga-visama: - 50
manthara:bhamantaJoar:tarp. pi pi
vavasao marp abbhatthedi f?iama tti piasahi samakkhaI!l ca
ar:tubhavia jhaui Vi mandabhainl
vibhavemi Jiva-Ioam ti /
LAVA - GIKA.
(vihasya) sahi Madaantie aikkhehi / avi avasare 55
sil!eha;vibbham)-ummlsa:hasa-viasanta.:Buddnarakkhida:::loaq.a-
J?,iriividarp. pariaI}ado gova de saaJ?ijja-

1.50 I uUasida : u Ua ia ACDM sajjhasa: sadvasa G' sajjasa

H ; saddhasa M ioga A ' anga C' ' al).anda EGHIKLMO
(ananda Har ch) alat;l& ACDE ' I'
GHLM 0 (sambhramavalana Har ch) ' K
1.51 bbamanta : f)b a vanta D' bhamanta CM C ; ceaqaqt IMNO
(cetanam Har ch) JdJ!l pi kil?' pi ADGHIKO ' kimpi 2 CE ' kiJ:?pi L ' MN ;
kima pi Har ch ACDEH ; du vviQaya I ; duvvil)Tda GKLO; duv-
inida M aQuriia EK' aQuriipa
1.52 ma.m: om M after GHlL (anabhyarthanlyam Har
ch)' K ' om ACDEM 0 (abbba)tt:bedi CEGIKLMO ; ttbadi
?AD' ttadi H - tthei tti. ACD ' M- ; 0;
om EGHIKL Har ch piasahi: piasahl 0 ca ACD ;
sa vvarp 1- samak.kharp M ' savva.rp cett
1.53 after a1J.ubhavia: tado GHIL jbBtti : j lta9iti G ' om I after j /!alti: paq.i-
buddha K M arano a G EIKMNO '
sa.J?1).ihidaf!1 AD' GHL ; 10 t in C \i : om C after vi : imaI!l
1.54 vibbivemi : vivahemi I - sal9bha vemi K ' vihii emi M jiva HIM 'jia ACDE
G KLO GLMO ' (a n)ti A - (a)tti CDI ; (lU!l)tti EHK - om.
1.55 vibasya: om M s a h i • .. om G H ; qhuqam
I' puq.amarp M ' puq.harp iikkhehi AD '. ailc hesi C ' aakkhehi E ; acak-
khevahi H ' akkhe i 1 Har .1. - acakkhehi KLO ; acakkhe uhi M ; aakkhiasu N
avi CDK 0 ; faded in A ; adha EHL ; aha J' om M ' atha Har ch avasare:
osare M
1.56 sit;leha : E "ibamumm-rsa : iM 0 vibbbam) :
?mbhabbbam C' vim.ba 0) K. ummisa AOOH ; immisa C' ummIla E ; omIsa
I ; ommissa. K - ussa Lviasanta : vianta AD 10
1.57 I;liru ida HI after vi.o go ACD ;
go aQijj8.J!l EG KLM : H I: il1eg in ; go;u:tijjal!l 0 de
de Qiamba mUlaql GL ' deQiambassa
K' iiaal!lt M ' om de : om Hl( ACDH
10; l)iasal)a E masilliaJ!l ACD: E ' ma H (maculakam Har
Kath cb)- ma lilaJ'!1 L masiiraarp. 0 masurakam B ar Ca! b)
saaQiiiaqt I ; saat;iia M ; 0
 158 Ma/atlmiidhava 1.58

va bhodi J?:a va tti /

MADA Y ANTIKA.
ai, asaqIbaddha :parihasa.:.slle avehi /
BUDDHARAKSIT A
60 sahi Madaantie Maladi-piasahi iarp. jjeva Idisaim mantidum
jaq.adi j
MADAYANTIKA
sahi ma khu evatp uvahasa /
BUDDHARAKSIT A
sahi Madaantie pucchissaf!1 dan.i de ci jadi I}a me vIsasa-
bhailgatp karesi /
MADAYANTIKA
6S sahi, vel pan.aa-bhangeJ?la jen,:a
evarp. mantesi? / piasabi, Lavaitgiae sahasampadaf!1 mama

1.58 paccbada: vaccbada MN vi ACEH ; vaqavova D ; vaqavaddaq:I GL-

K ; paqava I - ; bhodi ACDEGHL -.
hodi [KO; bohi M- boi N kh!l: vii M ; om vi to ACDEI ; vetli GHKL
MNO
1.59 ai: ayi IK safila I; u alittha 0 paribasa : parivada GL;
padihasa K avehi: apehi ; om I
1.60 sahi: om MN Mad'a aotie : OlD E Maladi : maladie ADK Har
cb); malal N sahi : saht HK ia'!l ACDEMO; pia1!l : om GHIKL
Har ch jjeva ADEH ; yyeva Cl .; jevva G: jje\lva K ; kkhu L: e a MO; Om
idisaim CEGffiM; lri air!t ADO : "iri arr- K ' ediiiiiie a L ; 'iri arya mann-
ADEGL; manteduI!'l HIK ; om CM 0
1.61 D ; jal}ai MN
1.62 sahi : om EMO khu ACOHK . kkhu EGLMO ; iJLeg in [ after khu:2
ACD evaap ADEH [K ; evvarp GLM 0 ; om C Maladhp: maladi HIN ;
maladiql C ova: ua EL bass.: hasadi I
1_63 sabi: om N before pucchissal?l: pU ':'0 i E pucchi sa H-
1; bharyi sal1l G; dal.li ACDE; cett
de : afler kirrrci L ; om MNO ci ACD ; kiiicij 0- kampi E; kimpi HIKLO-
kif!1vi M ; kim api Har ch jadi AeOG HI - jai EKLM 0 !.la : before
karesi HIKL (na Har ch) me: om Kw &sa: vi asa H; vis asa I ; vi asa M .
1.64 karesi: karomhi I
1.65 Maday.aotika : om · abi : om CIM 0 kim ADEMO- kada ; om CHI
Harch; here om GL, K v.ii CD?A ; om i cett
pal.laa: MN before kada: ki1!l Gl kada : kida 0 ; kaa M ava-
raho: avaradho QGL ; iiparao I before aa'!l: kif!1kkhu K ; khalu Har ch
1.66 eval'!1 ACDEGHL ; yyevaJ:!l I ; eaq:l K ; evvaq:l MO ; veevvaha . maQt,esi :
1.68 Act VIl 159

BUDDHARAKSIT A.
jadi de kadhal!l pi Maarando odaradi
tado tae kflda ?/
MADA Y ANTIKA..
ekkekk):a vaa a-I).lsaitga "lagga "I?-iccale loaq.e I).ivva / 70
BUDDHARAKSIT A
aha so vammaha-balakkarido tumaI!1
va Purisottamo karedi ka
ta"do /
MADAYANTIKA.
klsa ettiarp. asasedba /
bhana i E bef ore pia alii : m da antika here and ahow! M pia ahi : ahi
tual}11: b fo re ampad '!I E l..a 'sngia ba ACDGL ; lavangiae a-
maf!1 E: la angiaa HIK 1. 0 lavailgi aea Har ch mama A D; ma I; me cett
1.6 Buddhara' .ita: om befor j adi : jale\ ,(takabehi) 0
jadi ACDGHI; jai EKLM 0 pi : kahae kadbam : kaham
ADMO pi A DElO ' vi GHKLM pol.'o vi: puryopi H; pUJ?o M: om C
dal!! daf!1 ryal'!' M C ; vadaf!1 G: H: pahal'!1
TO; paochaqt I; l: ADEK b fore odnradi: pUl)ovi here
and above K 0 : a G : ava lM daradi : taradi IK ; aradi E ; tare M:
1.69 tado: tacla M kil!l : after tae CL be ACDEIL; tue GHKM 0
I. 70 ekkekka: ek keka GH: ekkakka KM; ekek.ka I: eka avaava: a aa [ ;
ama8 a M; avaapa afler a,'aa,'a: M EGHKL'
':Ii san ka AD' anga CO ; I: sagga ' anga lagga : omO
: ACD, (cirel}a) K .; M
nil'Vi\'aissaql : qijjha ai 5af!1 AD ; C; ryi apavi se ] after
o;s. O'!7: tadohiaarrt
1.. 71 Buddharaksitii : om be ore aha: ahi G L ab ADlH : adha CEO;
jaiGl ;ahajaiK:om M afrer 0: "GKL mmahaCE " amhahaAD'
mammatha [ ; mammaba GH KL 0 balakkirido: balatkarido HI before
kondappa: jai a/ler jafJo1} il?l : C· a D
1.72 Cl : A' D' EGHKL' MO
ya E ' here om ACD ' ia cen Purisottamo : puri 0 D" puru ottamaI!l I'
purusottamo M 0 af!Jgiha saba ACD " saapgB.ha EGHL' saangabeqasa-
ha IKM 0 tiri-:UJ!lI : c: E : [ karedi: karodi G'
karei M a : aft r rado EGHIKL Har h: ruelcirp after lado
1.73 tado: tada M GHIKLM ' I 0; pavattl D ' paiitti C?A '
devaiitti E; pa4ivai'i ida, ·arp
l. 74 }'a: ni' asya CL .11· 0 k-: kisa : kiJ:!r after kf a : tue MO'
Ell ' mama Har Cal ch ettia l!II : CG' advitiyamalram Har Kath
ch - asedb CEIK ' a - ha. D;aase iGH;asae iL" ,a a e
," asasiahmi 0 - Har CaI h; a:va ata Rar Kath ch mam here
ACDGHI (mam Har Kath ch ; ,a fter kisa EKL ; om M 0
 160 Miilatimiulhava 1.75

BUDDHARAKSIT A
75 sahi kadhehi /
. -
LAVA GIKA
sahi kadhidaI!l jjeva hia >-a.vea-suaebim ,cfiba :l!lsa /
MADAYA TIKA
sahi ka aharp imassa ijeva attaI)aarp. pal!ikadua saddUla-
kavalado ka99hidassa tassa jjeva kerakassa sanra sa ? I
LAVA GIKA
80 sansam mahaIfubhavadae /
BUDDHARAKS IT A
sumaresi edam /
MADAYA TIKA
ta<;fiadi / ta. java

1.75 sahi : om N before kadhehi: tah a i GH kadhebi .. . ilada / ahi: om L

kadhehi E ; kahebi AGHKM 0 ; kahihi 0" kadehi f ; 10 tin C afrer kadhehi :
2E
1.76 sahj EHIKMNO ; om ACOG Har Kath ch CEGHK; kahid3f!l
ADIMNO jjeva ADEH · yyeva CI;jevva GKO; evva M ana CHI 0 ;
avega E ; aye a ADGKM uaehil!l : fiiehiJTl AD : a E ; uahirp [ .
sucaehif!l H ; sfJaehi!!l M dihs : dla G ,:,isi a E" sa-
sehim [
1.77 sabi : omN jjevaADE " yyevaCI"jevvaGHO "jje va KL ; evvaM at-
attal?a'"!l KMNO before saddula: GHL addiila : sad-
dula H ; miccu MNO
1. 78 kavaliido: kavalanado Q ACDE : kanhida a 0 ; sa
M ; kanhia sa G L ; kac:tq ia sa HI ? ; a hiassa K ta iie 11: om M jje'"a
ADEL ; yyeva Cl ; jevva GHQ ; jje a K : e a before keraka a: para M;
kidepara N kerakassa ACD; keraassa EMO : keka ra sa GH " kara sa 1; kaa-
rissa. K; kekariassa L; kerassa lillia 3 : saliraa a IKO Har Ca \
1.79 I
1.80 before sumaresi: sahi M 0 sumllresi ACDEIK " usumareha i G ; suma-
rebasi HL ; sumarehi M 0 ACDM I: eda.f!l aal)af!l.
EG HKL HaT ch)
1.8l AEGIKL " DH ; M 0 ; om C duma : dudia AC ;
duhi D ; bidia E ; duvvia N before IJiu!iii: pabara GHK ; jama L; ama M;
janma Har Kath ch ; 0111 ACDEI 0 r:tata G ; I)adika H ; KL·
om I viccbeda: ccheda L after LO : uao ; liaopama ra
M ?tanadi E ; tamaraadi M ; tac!T di after liicfiadi: ciraJTl
bhar:tiapaditivicchedamuvaruqhaplc!Iadi 1 tijiva : Uida a ?ACM: larp. a a D
1.82 before sapiida M a:tibb:'accbia : a C sa : om ACD pada :
1.82 Act Vll 161

J?ibbhacchia va abbhatthia Maladie

uvari a[fuiilai" sal!l / (ity utthatum iccbati)
MAKARA DAH
(mukham udgharya haste
MADAYA TIKA
sahi Maladi ibuddha >si? / (ilo kya, am) 85
amma! jjeva pi aq.adi I
MAKARA DAH
ildiram
utkampita:stana-bharasya na madh a:bhaga4 1
itthaf!1 t a » aiva :prasa<iaJ?
-nirv!1i .u sarpstuta 1/2//
LAVA ' GIKA.
(Madayantika-mukbam unnamayya saI!lskrtam asritya)
Preyam sa
supta ;pramatta.;janam etad amatya-vcima j
krtajilatay» aiva bhadram
ehi

paa ACD: ada EK ACEK ' DGHILM 0 i

ACDGILMO ; (o)ea E' a H ' OlD K abbbatthia :abbhathia G' abbhacchia C
1.83 uvari : upari G ; uvaria G ' uari L iitafisal!l ElKLMO' ACD ; ru-
laissru;t GH; aulai saf!l ity : om ACDEKO uttgitum : uttbayagantum
GH
1.84 udgbilty.a : ra 0 lb aste ACELMO ; om D ' hastena G: tena
ba tamasya HIK
1.85 after Ma/adi : kirp M. 0 ,,,iboddhi AOEI; buddha C; iuddha GHL ; pa-
buddba KO ; paqubuddha M M 0
1.86 ammo : abmo MO ; aho L; at:La [ jje a ADEL ; yye a Cl;
jevvaGH KO ' e aM:e a iM ;
kirp before GHLMO M : attadi]
2a om H 1tikirarn ACDIKM 0 ; vi GHL: odhum E
b utkampita ACDG ' HIKM 0; EL bharasya :
na : bi E
d DI?K ssrr- ta : S3r!l kfta KOesa : eva ADI
2.1 Lavailgiki ACDGHKL : bUGdha E ,0; om I . ada ... . unnamay_ a : om
M samskrtam - ' !iitya EGHM 0 ; om ACDIK ; before Madayantikii L
3a ea]
b veSma: asma I
c bhadram : kamam
d utk.ipya D ; utlc. . epa C mani : tarn M ebi : eva I
 162 Malatfmtulhavn 3. I

MADAY ANTIKA
sahi Buddharakkhide, amhehirp. /
BUDDHARAKSIT
. A .
jjeva Maladi /
MADAYA TIKA
Ma.ladl? /
BUDDHARAKSIT A
adha / ca, tumarp. bhaqasi - ( ka aharp. imas a '
5
MADAYA TIKA
(asrUl)i patayati)
BUDDHARAKSIT A
Mahabhaa khu a piasahle I
MAKARA DAH
Ady) vijitaf!1 eva maya, kim anyad?
ady> otsava4 phalavato mama yauvanasya /
yasya prasada-sumukhena amuddhrt»
devena bandhava:dhura makara.. ;.d hvajena //4//
3.1 sahi: om K 0 kahil1l : kahehirp 1; om G (but with k:va in margin); ka . tha D
after kahin:t : ul) a EHIKL : G: M 0: om A D : punaT HaT ch
amhebil!' a bmaI!1 hiJ:!lgata am G
3. 2 Jiba a MaJalfi : om jahi yahirp jj ,'a. A DE L;
yyeva Cl· jevva GHO ; a K:e a M
3.3 r:-ivvutta EMO ; ADGHKL : utta C; I)i. uqha [
3.4 adha:ahaA:i:>M 0 beforea'.l,:w/?I:mada antika H
anam G ca : a HM turna 1'!1 : tuvamaf!1 A: tuva'"!l ] : tuJ'!l
bhat;tami HL im : ta AD : ga chana I C: ima teqajevvaattii1)3.Jll
pal)lkadua 0
3.5 A D Har· om GHIKLM 0 om K
3.6 Mada .•. iPiasabie : om 1
3.7 Buddharaksita : om L Mabilbhaa : mababhaga H ; mabat:lubha a ACD
OH, L Har ch k.bu G HK . kkhu ELO : om A D
attaJ;laaIp. ACDEKL ; M 0 : atta GH (a tma Har ch beJorepiasahie :
M " pa4ivajjasu ; ajha ua 0 abie : sabl M
4a after ati'ayam GHL: K adya : aty(u) K iji-
tarn: vitatam
c L " amudhfta(tthaf!1} C; ama?ddhna(tthaJ!l) D ; ilIeg inA: amu?n-
vate E ; mamoddbf"te GH ; sama pite I ; samarpile KO : ma arpite M; unirmite
EGHLM 0
d devena: daivena AD
401 Acr VII 163

tad anena areq.a nirgatya sadhayamal?- I

parikram an ti)
MAKARA DAB
aho a-ta raja-marga ya! / apl ca
samprati
Prasadanam upari valabhi-tunga -:
bhrantv» a /
maJy)-,amodi muhur ra:- karpura
vayur ylinam abhina a: yanakti //5//
(iti sarve)

'vasa-grbo nama
// saptamo )ukat}. 11

4.1 anena : etena K pak oa : 1 Har Cal nirgarya: om before

samThital!l EGHL sadha. ampada £
4.2 before nibhrta'!l: iti EHlK: sarve : m ACDGLMO nibhrtam : nindatam
D ; satvaraq:l pari : upa kriimanti ?AEGH IKL : kramati CDMO
4.3 om ACDE ni lth.inl EO; ni°ltha amayanil). M
O

nis I; om GHL (EO) -raEGHIKLMO ; sampata AD 0 ssa-

?ilghata C a p · cs samprati ACDK; apisamprati I· tailiahisamprati EGH;
sampratihi LM 0
5a valabbi : vadabhm CD iHeg in A
0 lUnga : jaIa M 0
b bbrintv- G HK : bhrant avptal). ACEL: bh ra nta DI Har: pra pta-
modaQ M 10 parit;Jat.a : parigata M amsxi.ra: ambhara EHI gar-
bhab. : bbarah. E
c miilya : prajya G upa : apa G ita : hita AD sphara : thana M
d vayur : ato MO abbin a: a himata ET ,0 Har Cal
Sol iti: om
5.2 before vasa grho: malalImadhave 0: rlmalatlmadha\lel).a!akapravare H; iti
ma]atimadha\fe 0 \78 g!ito natna ACDE: mada onama KL:
nandanavipraJambhonama om GHIM
5.3 after )nka!J: G· ' rlgat:\-
0- anamah I
 ACT VIII

(tatal?- pravisati A alokita)

AVALOKITA
vandida mae Bhaavadi I la java
Maladl;Mahava-saasaql jjeva gacchami / (parikramya) ede te
J?ivvattida...;.gimha ias ):::3. dlbia -ta4a -sila -dalaJ'!l
5 aiaqlkarenti / (iti
/ /pra veSaka4 / /

pravisata Malatl'Madhavau Avalokita ca)

MADHAVAH
(sanandam) vartate hi manmatha-prau4hima-suhrdo nisl thasya
/ tatha hi
The whole of the pra vesaka i omilted by M
pr. I ptaviSati: pra i' ya ACD
pr.2 (2nd) Avalokita: 2 EGIKL ' om ACD . T ih- a : (a)va a K ' it asahado
I,liatta CDEI; lost in A; GHK ; ' I?iutta LO' nivrtta Har ch
Bbaavadi : bhaavai afler l1Jae 0 java : om I
pr.3 Mahava: madhava DGH sas saa arp CG ; aka af!11 jjeva ADE;
om cett gaccbami : vaccami H ; gacchambj 10 after parikramya: /ava-
Iokyaca H Cava) IK ; ·agrato ilok a 0 ede: ete H : edea. 1 te ACD; de
GHIL; hi E ; om K; kbumaladimahava ; kkhumalaimaha a 0
pr.4 I,livvattidagimba : E I,li vattida ACDLO; J].ikkattida G;
n.ivattida H; n.ivattia I ; qivutta K; J].iutta . nirvvartita Har Kath ch' nivrtta Rar
Cal ch gimha: gamhi ldiasa ACDH KO; diaha GIL ; divasa E maj-
jal,l3: mahal)a G; ma jjal)aemaladiesaha H a EIN' 0
pLS karenti ACDEKL o· karodi G; karedi H ' karanti I before iti: 13 java
jjeva paqivalaissam GHIL 0 jaya GHl;
yava I; om NO I: H; om GL 0 jj a H' yyeva I;
om GLNO Dya GIO; upa HLN sappa ,-Yasantp pa4i¥ilaissa. H'
I ; sappissa£!l GL ; sappami 0
iti ... pr:aveSakal.l : om N(M) iti EGLO' itiparikramya HK; parikramanliti:
om ACD
pr.6 om ACD(M )
0.1 O· :w; C after MiilatfMiMha\'au IM 0
Avalokita ca: om I
0.2 after svagatam HI K snandam: om K artat : ardhate M
hi : om G ACD : prau4ha EGHKLM priya 1: prauqhi 0
nisithasya ... prakprakasa., (lb): om G niSlthasya: ni'lthinlnatba ya KM.
(nayaicasya)
la Act Vllf 165

Dalayati ipaq.4u
timira-nikaram udyann aindaval;1 prak 1
viyati pavana- egad ketaklnaI!1
pracali.ta iva sandro maJcarandalt. padigab. 1111/
(svagatam) tat katharp vama. Malafim upavartaye ? 1
bhavatv tavat l (prakaSam) priye Miilati
-: s'itaHim
vijiiapayami 1 tat kim animittam anyath » ai a S3.I!lbba ayasi roam? I
iscyotante kaban-bindavo ya ad ete
yavan stana:mukula . or n) ardra :bba. jahati /
yavat sandra 'pratata:pulak >-odbheda aty anga:ya
tavad itara sakrd apy praslda 1/2/1
ayi
Jivayann iva amuqha..;.sadhvasa- eda:::bindur
a rpyatam 1
adbL
bahur aindava:mayfikha-cumb"ta: andi:candramaf?i-hara..:
1/3//

I alar. : taa. ACD

c ketakinim: . kitaklnam . G
d pracaJita : pracalita A; abhina va 0 miiJkaraod C; manda-
mandaI!l EKL
1. 1 sv.a gatam: om IK after kalha,?l: h.i H M-Iafilm : om K
1.2 bbavan: bbavaty M tiut : om K before pralyagra: prailiamam
chayas !aval kanaka prabhas tad anu virahottamyat taovi !tapola tata
dYUti1? 11 prabhavati punar ksamaQ mukhe sarasa
visinl cbeda cbavir K
1.3 ElM ; 1 atnlbha 'alIm : a rabhaga Mim D ; bhaga
G ' bhavatim LM ' 10 t in om praSantaye ]
after iiinlaye : 0 ; kacid
1.4 vijliip yami: abh.yartbaye M : katham CE .after kim: ity CGIKL
MO ; iva H' befor animiltam: adya GH "ttaJn ACDGH' nityam
IKLO; om EM en: om M bbivayasi: bhavayami CEGI mim here
ADE " before sl1J!lblul - KL 0; before anyathii M' om CGRI
2a niScyotanle DE1LMO' DaScyotante A ; niscotante CGHK
b madh arp I nirdra : ardra. H
c pratata ACDEGKL;pratanu HI 0
d EKL
2. 1 before ay; : apica E afler ayi: malati 0 niranurodhe : niranu kro .e 0
3a adbvasa : sa adh \la sal!l "raya idb .: sadh a C
c cumbita: cumbana I
d syandi : yanda IK
 166 M aiatlmadhava 3.1

atha va dure tavad etat / katham aUipa-sarp.vibbagasy) apy

abhajanam aham /
Dagdha:ql ciraya
tu parirabbya vapur na nama /
amatta :kokila-ruta-vyathita tu
adya pibatu viicam //4//
AVALOKITA
(upasrtya) ai jaI!l muhutta...;.mett>-antarida...;.
Mahava vi dummaantl mama purado ciraadi ajjaiitto - avi
q.ama alra ajja visumarida...;.
nimesa:viggham
. . avaloantl evam
. bhanissam,
. . taha bbanissam .... biun>:
.
5 aveC;iha-parirambhe.qa sa:qlbbavals ti tassa de aam
pariI?-amo? /

3. 1 tavad: tava(etat) C etat : evata t D ' eta adetavat N ; etatkathaJ1l katharp) C

saJ!l AD spy abhajanam : apadrarn 1
3.2 ayam : om K AD ; om C L ; ja noceU
4b tu : na C vapur : punar D oa nama : C
c tu: om A h rdyany K
d kinnara "aeam : K
4.1 upas!1ya : om CMNO ai: ayi ElK a : om ADG r:tivvaha,:,a : aM
HI diir:ti ACDEl Har ; cen before muhuua : 1?isi C metta
ADEHKL ' om CGIM 0 Har cb 8I'!arida: antaria KLMO ; amarita
4.2 mahav3: maha.ve K ?E (madhave H ar Kath ch) vi ACDM 0 ; om EGHIKL
Har ch dummaaoti ACD · cett mama: mamo I ; maha
GKLMN purado: pu.rao bbaqanti .asi HI ; bha.t?asi GL
ciraadi ACKL; cira.y adi D; ciraadi EGI 0 ; ciraati H; cinlai M ajja: ayya Cl
4.3 aJter avi ':lama : pUT,lovi E: t1puJ?o M airii ACD' EO; keccireI)a GL;
kicciref,la H ; I ; kecciraxp K ' acirado M . kiyatacire f,la Har ch be-
fore pekkhissQ'!I : de M ; taf!1 0 pekkbissa'!l CEGHKL ; ? ekkhis al!l D;
lost in A ' pekkhi e I ' pekkhe MO ajja CD ; 10 t in A chaddida
AD ; lost in C ; cchi99ia E ; ccha9ia GH ; ccbaddia MO?1; sajjia K' L
sajjhasa: saddha a GH; addha a£!l O' sajjha ar;:t . savvi M ,7isnmarida:
visumaria GLM
4.4 (.'imesa: T,limme a Cl ' om O· "iggbaql : vignaI!l H; vibbhamarp l a v a
ACDEKO ; a GHL ; vi I ' 0 M loanti ADEM · ]oantarl C ; 10aanU GHK
LO ; loaanle 1 e a ACDEH1 ; evvaJ'!l GLMO ; jjevva K ; om bha-
nissam: om M taba bhat:J' AD ' taM sa.rr O ' om CEGHIKL
MN Har ch biu(.'ii ACDEHK: biuJ?A G ; J?iur:lll [ ; LO ' duuJ;lia M
4.5 EHKM ; araddha AD ; arambha C ' a)ve4ha G ' av'i9ha I'
(a)bhua pari : vari M bhavaisslII!J ACDLO; bhiiissa:ql E' bbavaemi
G; bhavayissam'i (ti) H ; bhllvayisa [. bhavaasi K ; bhavemi M; bbavaye Hac ch
(wr)ti LNO; (an)ti AD' (a)ttj Cl' E ; (i)tti GM ; (i)ti H' om K lassa:
4.7 Act VIII 167

MALATI
(satyasu yam iva pa' yati)
MAoHAVAH
(apavarya) aho Bhagavatl-pradhan) :anteva in a1). ar ato...;.
vaidagdhyam I (prakasam)
priye, sat yam eva Avalokita vadati? j 10
MA.LATI
(tiryab calayati)
MADHAVAH
sapita )si Lavangika;)vaLokita or Jlvitena adi vaca na kathayasi /
MALATI
ahaI!lk..if!1 pi -City ardhokte lajjarp.
MA.DHAVAH
aho anavasit> :artha-mantharasya acasas caruta. / (sahasa
niriipya) Avalokite kim etat? I 15
kapolal?-

tissa (?for E ; L8. H · om I Har cb ; before aat?t M de: om HIKMNO

Har ch sa paUI!l: [: M afrer aat?! GL; om C
4..7 Mila.o ... Avalokiti ",.elIti?: om L sityasuyam ACD ; sa u am cett
4.8 apavirya ACDO' aunagalam EK; agatam GHILM Bbag.a afi : bha-
ga M 0 ,p . dhana : pradhana I
4.9 mukha l' mu.kha ; illeg in D : E' ar;t GK;
M ntna : om K saJ:!lskaraqaJ:!l GK ; .koSaQ M pr:a-
kiSam: om [
4.10 before priye: api G ; ayi H ·ye: po emalati I ' aye . om ACD e,'.
ACD ; om cett. Aulo ' ita: a G; after \'adati I
4.ll tirYBo El L' riryag ACDGH ; om KM 0
4.12 Madbavat;a: om J after siipitii >5;: samamevama a I: mama EGH lM 0
Lavaogikaalokitayor : a alokit.ala angika 0 '(ca) 0 after Lal'ailgiklH'aloki-
layor: ca EGHKM 0 y di : after "iicii E i l e i here ACDE; after na
GUlL; om. KM 0 ka, yasi: atba ati 0; 10 t in C
4.13 GL ' q.a pi AD ' O; kin iaqtpi C- kinci El; kirp. i
GLM ; H after jaq.ami EGHIKLM ; 0 ; om ACD
,i ty : ACDGH K
4.14 abo: om DIK m itharas)· : om K . : acasahsarvata' K ca·
ruta . ,. . niriipya.: c8.rutal!lnirupya I ; carutanirup I'll K
5a vim ala . : AD
 168 M alat "imadha va 5b

sapadi- rajata yasmin /

iva pipasur
indur nivesita...;.rnayiikha :mp).ala 1/ //
AVALOKITA
sahi kim dani ucchalida:bah >-upplla-manthararp. rodi i? /
MALATI
sahi keccira111 piasahie La vangiae asaJ'!1t:lidhar:ta
at:lubhavissaf!1 ? / paiitti-Iambho . i e dullaho tti /
MADHAVAH
Avalokite, kim nama ? /
AVALOKITA
5 tuha jjeva e a Lavailgiaq:I sambharia tae
pautti-J?imittarp. uttammadi /
MADHAVAH
nanv idan"im eva maya tatra Kalahal1lsaka4 pre . praccbanam
upagamya Nandan )-avasa-pravrttim upalabhasv> eti j (sasaIp!sam)
Avalokite api nama phalodarka eva

b rajata : majjata GH esa: e a ADL

5.1 Avalokita : apavar ajanantikaT!1 sahi : sakhi I kim : ko M
ACDE ; dal?iJTI cett Dcchalida : ucchalita G: u alia M; bahula
pila : H uppila CGLO ' up"iq.a AD' E: H:
upllam 1; uppiqa K.1 M . Harch om HIMN
Har ch ; E rodi i : roiadi I; rodia* M' rodiad i ; rodial 0 ; kad-
dhasesi E; rudyate Har ch
5.2 Malati : om after Malan: janantikam L kecciral!l: keciraT!l D ; kicci-
ram HI sah1e : ahl H ' sahlm La\laogiae : om Har ch
sanni H hal?-a EIKM 0
5.·3 navis5aJ:!l paUtti : pavutti KM lambbo: laho MO se'
before tii E ; om M Hi: om o · hoditti M
5.5 toha : tuhu G jjel'a ADEH' yye a I; .ije a GKL: evva M : je a 0; om
savadha : savaha ADI ; om M 0 e aH
, , , tile : La vailgiae amllbuia.: urnaria KL: sabmaria 0; . am bhavian
(tae) I tile : tile G
5.6 paiitti: pavutti KM; pailttiHiha 0 uttammadi: uttamadi H; utUimadm L; ut.
tammai 0
5.7 after eva : hi CGHILM ma a. tatra: maya 0: tatramaya after Ka/aha,?1. akah
K ; om h3J!1 M pr K before
pracchannam: gacchat af!l M 0
5.8 aviisa a a am A lh'asa : a a atha M ; a a atha£!l I ' a a am K )
asankam I:. om
5.9 Aval.o kite: om C phala : aphala ELM ,eva : eV3ryl N
5.l1 Act VIII 169

MadayantikaIp. prati syat I IQ

AVALOKITA
Mahflbhaa paqhama£!l.lie a addUla-J:tahar
Maarandassa moha-viraroa:mahu a am nivedaantie Bhaavame
lfiutteJ:ta bha vada Maladie pasadikadaI!l I jal
ko vi tassa jje a Madaantia-lambheJ?a addhavedi ta
daf?i tassa paritosiam, bhavi ad.? If 15
M AnHAVAH
anuyokta yam anuyukto )smi / (hrdayam a alokya) iyam asti
Malati-pra thama -: darsan)-abhi. ailga Kfuna -kanan)-
prasa a-mala f
Preml!a mad-grathit» et.i a priyasakhl-hast>-Opanlta )naya.

5.11 after A I'lIlok Uii: kudo Ildeho GH: ' udo arp.dehoma banubha a a L maba :
maya H bbaa : bhaga K CEGKL; 01· 10 l in A:
H· '0 ; M jjen ADEHL ; yye a Cl ;
jivva G · jev a KO ' e\ a saddiiJa : .ddiiha I I)aharappahara
L ; ,?aharappaharam alnl!lkhid rip i; iilutpkhita sa . alukkhia sa
0 ; alihida sa A; alihada aD; alaT!l ida sa EGH[KL TeLang (alailkrtasya Har
cb); ahia a M ; ucchia sa
5.12 virama mabiisa al!lt : vicchedarp. iccbeaq:l ; icchea 0 virama ACDl:
virama EGHL Har ch: viraha K ACDEGKL: (m)usa H
Har ch): (m) a I edaanfie LM . pial)i ediae
o Bbaavadie ",i : om D (apparently b accident) Bbaal'adie : bhaa am EO
5.13 [. J?ivUlteQa K sa 8l!l: E ; samuj(ji M
biul!lt : after pasiid:rkadaJrt GH kadal!l ACDK· kidaqt EG HL . kadhaq:l I ;
kiarp. M; kaaql 0 before ja': sampad3q:l E: la M ; 0 jai: jadi
GH ; jadhi 1
5.14 ko vi: before Madaantib 0 blssa ACDEM O ' tumam GL ' om HlK Har ch
Lassa M . beforeja. here om EO jjel1,a ACDEL · je.v vaGK·
jjevva H: yyeva I ; evva O · om Har Kath ch lambeQa H '
M i edi: vaddha edi H ; L ti ACD· tado E;
tadha G; tassa HIKM 0 ta ya Har ch); ta s.as.a sa L
5.15 ACDE · cett tas:sa ACDEG: here om H1KLM 0 pan:
pari CE tosill!l: d0S3aI:!l1 bha' di : bat di CO· havissadi K' bhavis-
sai N after bhalllissadi: ui CDI
5.16 after agatam C aou.'okta\'yam GHILM 0 ; ana a aktam
ACD ; anaya uktam E ; ana anu 0 ta, am K
5.17 darSana : f bh· .n nga : abhi . aoga o aksinab : ak in!
E; sak.i!)aq:l M
5.18 0 lu. - C
6a mad : yad A y- : a M 011- ) n ya CEGHi lO ; niretiya A: ni ?t a a
D ; nHeti vii M
b yugma ACD ; kumbha cetr kutm la .CDEGHI udmala KLMO afrer
d a a
 170 M iilatfmiidhava 6c

sarp.prapte tv atha pa.t;ti-p1:4ana :vidhau marp. praty

ya mayy eva Lavailgik.» ety avagate
AVALOKIT A
sahi Maladi vallaha khu de ia:qI baiila-mala I jado avahida
bhavesi, ma sahasa jjeva para-hattha-gada bhavlssadi I
.M ALATl
piasahl me uvatlisadi /
AVALOKITA
kadharp., pada-saddo /
MADHAVAH
5 (nepathy)-abhimukham a alokya) ay,e
MALATI
din:hia. va""haha /
MADHAVAH
priyatame, pnyaf!1 /
kaJ?the dadati)
c tv : py M atba: ayi I mal!' praty : amprat I
d ya mayy el'a : mayyevatha M ' yamayyety(a .a lokitet avagate : adbilq-te M
ACDEGHKM O ' dayi [L ACDGH KM ., , . ELO
6.1 Ms.' adi: om 0 kbu ACDGH IL ; kkbu EKMO ' om ial!1 : imaql C'
esa K .; om M jado CDI 0 (yatah Har Cat ch) A· jada M · tado EGHKL'
atah Har Kath ch
6.2 bbavesi ACDE ; bhava GHIKl ' avaloa i M; puloe u ; puJoesi 0 ma ...
bhavissadi tti : om M 0 ma : om KL ; alha Har ch CDE; danim
cett ; after esii K before saha a : esa GHKL : om ACDE] sabasa: saba G
jjeva ADEL; yyeva Cl' (saba)jevva G ; (saha )ai a .H . ijevva K bbanssadi:
havissadi K ; bhavis asi AD after bhavis adi: tti GHIL
... .. disadi : sahi marp u abasa i M 0 before piasahi E after
kbu I piasah'i me ACDL' mepia am GH I ' pia abt K (priyasakhi: Hat
ch); mepiarp E ul'a : ua E ' upa I disadi : di a i EL
CEGHKL ' kahaI!l ADMO ; sabi I ; om Har Ca! cb, kattam Har
Kath ch before pada : meuagadapiasahljado E pads: paa E ; paa(sado) I '
vada N after sadtio: via EGHI KM 0 (iva Har cb)' vi L after via:.
sunladi E
6.5 avalokya: AC DE aye : ae barp
AD ; va9qhadha C ; a44hasi EIKLM 0; G · addbasi H;
varddhase Har ch before Madaantiii : maaranda sa E lamb labet;ta
KMNO .
6.7 before par4vajya: malatll"!l 1; K om G priyatame
ACDE; priyaJP. GHIKLMO ; om rual,l : naiti E; before 2nd priyarr' M
before bakuiamaiam: atarya GL' kat;t1hiidavatarya H ' iti M
after bakulamaliim: E
 6.8 Act Vll! 171

AVA LOKITA
khu Bhaavacfie saI!lbha'/ar:ra:bharo Buddharakkhida.e I
MALATI
ammahe piasahl Lavailgia vi dlsadi j IQ

(pravisya saI!1 bhran talf- KaJaharp saka . Mada yan tika .

LAVA ' GIKA

parittaadu 2 Mahabhao ! I addha:magge khuIfaara-rakkhia:
duppuris)-abhioo Maarandassa jado - tado tak:kala-milidena
saha amhe tti I 15

KALAHAMSAKAH
. .
jadha pi mahanto kalaalo sudo

6.8 before ka!JI.he: malatyal). E ' tasyai I kantbe ACDEIK . om GHLM

6.9 I?ivii<;iho L ' I?i, u<;lha kbu ACDGHIL ' kkhu EKO:. om M
Bbaa adie : bhaa am 1 0 bhiro : bharo I ; om Buddharakkbidae :
buddbarakkhiae M
6.10 om K ammahe : .a mhahe 'G LO ; 1; o m M ; a
Har ch before pia: '0 ah. : s a h l yi : pi L ; om 1M 0 H ar
ch di adi ACDE1L ' <fi adai GH ; msaI L 0: m ast M utti . tbati ACDL ;
iti arveutti. E' sarveutti. GHI ' MO; om K
6. 11 praviSya ACDL. EG; HM O ' ta-
I ' tata1:tpra K ACD, EG:
K.t.; HIO ; M
6.12 ACD EGKL' lavangUcaca HIM . lavailgika)buddharak.itaca 0
6.13 Lavangikii EG 10; K : om ACDHL parittiado : parittaraadu G ;
paritayadu(paritta3tu) H 2 ACDEG1KL ; repeared HMO ' om Har ch
addba magge : adhamago G khu A DIGH M; klthu CEK L: e a O ' om
AD : 1)3a : 11 rakkhla ACIM ; rakkhika D: rakkhi EGHLO
Har ch)' vara K ' rakkhida
6.14 duppurisi ACO' E Har ch : purisa GHKL: purusa] O ' purusaihiq:l. M
00 : ogo I' joo 0 jado ACDKO ; jao E; jado G; jadojado H : I I jado
(tado) I 'saJ'!ljao L ' S3J!ljado M tado : om M ' OBar cb
6. 15 saha ACDIO ; EM ; ahida GHL; om K Har cb after alto: tado
ACD amhe (C : om AD p idilo (C). ppesidaa AD ' idiiho I: ppe ida
M rti.: .om M 0
6.1 6 Kalahal!l akal:J : om jadha: jaha. AD: jada G ; jaha HM T aggado
ACD ; etlo EK ; ido GHLO ; ino ] . atto : ita Har cb mu a COG K :
bimuha E ; bh imuba. H ' bhimuham t; racchamuha L ' muham MO: bhimukha
Har ch ACDEGL ' (a)gadehiI!:t HK: ubbagadehiI!I i ; M;
. pavuttebiJ!1 0 p' COO - om E HIKLM H ar ch ' i G

15
 172 M iilafimll/lhava 6.17

tadha takkemi al?-I!e vi parakkaa uvagada tti /

MALATY;AVALOKITE
haddhi 2! / samarp ijeva uval!ado /
MADHAVAH
sakhi Madayantike, svagatam ehy., anugrh1tam asmad-grhaIp.
20 bhavatya / nanu sa ev) asau - kim ity asvastha bhavatya ekakino
bahubhir abhiyoga iti? / yat hIp cid etad vayasyasya /
Harer atula :vikrama ya -1alasa l?- sahase
sa eva bhavati sakha /
:kar$-kotara-skhalita :dana-tamr)
d vi peSvara -sthit> :asthi-dalan>-aika-: viralJ. karaQ / J7 /I
tad aham api vikrfmta;putaql

mahanto: H (ayodhana; Har ch ; aboar:'a I ; om M 0 kalaalo :

kalakalo HM; kal)akalo 1 before sudo: ia M here ACDEG ;
after gadehi't' HIL ; om KM 0 Har ch
6. 17 tadba CEGK L ; taha ADH ; ladol.aha. I· taha M .O takk'emi.: jar:tamo 0
AD ; aJ?1?o I ; cett vi ADGJKLM . pi CEHO para ... tti: ·
M; upaaraI!1parakka mal)alTl etti
0 parak.kaa AD ; CEl ; parekkabalam
G ; parakkeabalaf!1 H ; paracakkaJ"!1 K ; parekkaf!1bala.J!1 L · parakyabalam H ·r
Cal cb; Har Katb ch UY3 CHIKL ; ua ADEG gadS ADI ;
gado C ; gadaf"!l EGHKL (gatam Har ch
6.'18 Malaty Avalokite: mala / a aloide EK baddhl : baddbi KL 0; baddh I
2 ACDEGHKL; repeated MO · om I . amakalam E jje,·.a
ADH ; yyeva Cl ; jevva K ; jje a L ; evva MO; om E bari ): pahari . u)
AD ; pahari (0) I; harisa(ii) E Dnea : evvega H · 0 vegga I
saf!1bheo M ; sambhavo J ; sambboga Har ch uagado E.: u agado
K ; om C
6. 19 akbi :sahiC; priyasakhiE ebyACD ; eh ehi GHL ;omEIKM 0 bifore
anu: apy 0
6.20 a evasau : om lMNO sa: esa C before kim : tat EGHL kiln .. bba
[KO · a thabha antubha vat ah M kim ity
ACDL ; kim EGH ACD IKM 0 ); bha arf EHL· bhagavati G
ekakino ... va.y asyasya: om H ekai(ino : ekakina K · ekakinopi M
6.21 yat : na IKM before stanza 7: pa ' apaSya M
7a barer: arer lalasai:t sabase ACDEGH ; IflJasa yahave I LM 0
b ruba: E
c ADGHK · sphurat CEILM 0 tamra A D ; ikta cett
d siral:t thitasthi : M ; siro thital"}9-a !hita : lrum J
7.1 tad : tathapy M ; om K l'iJuanta. ACDE: ikrantap[ulaql G L;
H ; vikrantiyuktarp K ; ikrantiputaJ!l 0 ; ikrantibhOtaJ"!1
priya : om MN A here ends after prathamaJ!l K
7.2 Ac" VIII 173

pratyanantar'i-bhavami / (iti parikramya saha

AVALOKITA'LAVA'
a vi 1?ama a.1?ahada ede /
MALATI
sahl0 Buddharakkhida ')valoidao, turidam gadua Bhaavarue 5
kadhedha / tumaI!l pi Lavailgie, turidarp vll?-I?-avehi
ajjauttarp. 'jadi dava amhe tado appamatta
parikkamedha' tti /
(
MALATI
haddht 2 ! na anladi kadham Lavangia vi cir.a adi / bhodu / 10

7.2 anaotari CEHKM 0: anantaro Gl..; I: avanti D bba-

"imi: om D iti: om DIKM saba : om
7.4 Lavangika EHKO' buddharak,itala COG (ilgikaca)
M; la vangike 1 ; rak. ita H ' rak. ita ' ca K aft r ovi 1;1iima :
ede HI 81,labadi C ; aI!ihada D; a,?,ahada HGL ; HIO ' akkhada K'
M; . Har ch om 0 I,liattissanti
DGHO ' CE: l?i attissanti I ; unissanti K ' L; atta-
aI!lti M ; : niartti. ante Har h lede : ete M' here om HI bbi.-
vii: bhaa EK ; a G ; bha H; I
7.S after Malatl: sasmiLaI:!1 sahio CDGHLO ; sahi"o EIKM • Buddharak·
khida : reversed 1\ irh A. CDG H aJ'oida : a aJokida EH turidam:
turial:!1 DEKM Ogadus.: om Bhavadie : afrer l'lIttantam E imam
7.6 •.. kadhedha : om CDEHIKO' edaq:t GLM vuttanta . :
uttantaqt C kadb CE' kabeba. D ' kahedlIa G; kabedha H'
I; KMO (ni edayata Har ch) L tu val!l HI pi
CD' i E 'vipia:sahi GLM ; pipiasakbi I . piasahi KN H(bu t with a pi included
in cbaya)' pipiasahi O· apipriyasakhi Har ch turidam GKL; EO '
tu ridal!l tu ridarp. H . tu ridarp. turiaql I' sa tta M ; om CD' tva ritarp. tva ri 1:aJ::!l
Har ch
-
7.7 a autlaJ:!l 1; a ler Lol'Dngie CnGH jadi CGHIL: adi D' jai
EKM 0 da\'s : om kampaniio CDEKO' kampaqia GH: (a'!u
a 1; kampaJ?ijjao M : kampa1?io appamattii : apamatta Cl; ap-
pamaltal!l K
7. pari kamedha. El K' parik kameha D ; pa rikkamadha G L ' parikkamadha H '
parankamoha : parikkamehi 0: 10 t in to (Hchaya : om EH after
Iti : la arp. / ja!:!1piasahia1)a\'editti H : an . taha 0
7.9 before ili EHKO om I, here m L aft r Ili, -
la angikavalokitabuddharak. GH: a alokitabuddharak. itala a -
l)gika apakrantaJ:t L: om CDEK 0 I
7. 10 haddbi : haddhi MO; m K 2. DEGHL r peared 0 : om L K Har h
 174 Mala lim cl'{lhava 7..] 1

piasahi Madaantie, Lavaitgial!l I

(parikramati)
MADA Y ANTI KA
(satankam) phuridaI!l khu me V3m3J1.1 I
(upavisati)
15 (pravisya)
KAPALAKU DALA.
pape, 2! /
MALAT}
(satrasam) ha. ajjautta !-(ity ardhokte vak-stambhaIp
KAPALAKUNDALA
(sa_krodba:::hasam) nauv akranda 2 /

EGIKLO ; jal:,.iadi C ; at:Jlvadi D: aryiyadi H; M kadham

CEGHL ; I ; kaharp. KM 0 ; ka1E D l.av.a ngia vi ciraadi D:. Lavangi-
ii viraddi C; La vangiaciraadiUi E ; ettili velagamiadutti GHIKL iyatJ eHigamyata-
miti Har ch); veJagamladuui M ; veiagamIadirti 'velaganiiadutti 0 bbodu :
hodu MN
7.11 piasahi .. " DE,. ryiuttantir!l.) C: -
piasah"fe Javailgiae avaloaanu GH]KLM 0
(Har ch)
piasable La.vangiae : pia abIe angam
GHLO ; K; p M; avaloa-
anti GHL ; ava]oanti IK' oloan tt M fO cittb" I
7. L2 be/ore pari: iti EHM parikramati: parihalilJanti 0 ; om C
7.13 Madayantika satailkal!' : ma I takaf!1 M Madayaotika. CDEGHIKL ; om
o Bhand's N COEGHIKL: (takarp M;) 0 ; om
be/ore phuridatfl: kahaI!l M 0 phuridaf!J : M ; puridaf!l. khu
COG H K LM ' k khu EO; om I I Har ch me : om C vama m ,'ameduena
scripsi: M : vamamavama Jag Har Katb ch;
I ; vamedaref.la . GH L ; ametara D ; varna lima E; viima CK ;
avama 0; viiffia (?for> ama) Har Cal ch loanen GHIKLMO ; naanena
• • • 4

CDEN
7.14 be/ore upa: iti K ; iti ama ntakam
7.16 kapaiakut:lclala GK 2 DEHKL ; repeared MO ; om CGI
:.17 be/ore salriisam: vilokya M satTasam : abha am L ba : om I aiis :
ayya I uUa : putta H ardbokte: ardbokle na CK .; om M O ,'ak :
om K stambbarn:. tam bhanam.
7.18 sakrodhabiisam EGHIKO; D: om C' akrodhaba · L;
a krodhaq1 a ha M 2 EGHI K L : aki"anda .= akranda 0: om CD:
illeg .in M
8a ACI VIII 175

Tvad-vatsaJal;t kva sa tapasvi:janasya hanta?

patir asau tvam /
syen)-avapata-cakita vana-vartik» eva
cirat kavalikfta)si //8//
tad yavacchrl:parvatam upaniya lavaSo lavaSa nik!"tya
karomi I (iti Malatya saha
MADAYANTIKA
pi jje a aJ?ugamissaL!1 1 (parikramyaj sahi Maladi! /
(pravisya)
LAVA GIKA
sahi Madaantie LavaIigia khu / 5
MADAYA[KA
avi taeMahabhao? I
LAVA ' GIKA
I?-ahi 2 / so Un jjeva sUJ?ia
8a ,'atsalab, : aUabhah. K sa : nu KlM 0
b rak .atu : rak.itu c- r irul"!1
c vaoa : na a EK 0 ; nanu 'anike\'3 : c rei eva G
d kif!! : t an : nek .a e I; prek .ya e K
8,1 tad CDE : om cetr upan1i.. R IKM 0 : uttir.a D : upel a E: upagamya
GHL ' upani a I v ' la\" DG: lava ' H 'la a' L: la aso asa E'
parvat.ama taketila I :parva'stila' K 'tila ' tila ' o a)M;tilasa tila'aN'
tila'a' a'O enim : m K oi4t a :ni, aG: K:(o)k:t a M ;
Om CDE after _1
.2 It ; rnal'3.l:'im OIT; DO : E Mi.-
latya alia CDL malat 78.sam rp EGH; malat'imakr. a ]: maJafi-
mada a K 0" kranta : ni ' rantah
8.3 kaharp , pi : i HM ; om' MiJad:il!l: miiladiJ!l GH M ' maJadi N
jjeva CEHL ' D ; yyeva I' jevva OK ' e a M 'om 0 Har Kath ch
gamisalp C before par; : iLi H 'uttba a lK . ': sakhi. ] . om M
8.4 MiJad:i: maladi D
8.5 Lavailgiki : la aligika2 GK sa.hi : om GHI Maduntie: j umps from
madtJanti to kkhelll.ll'm·iddJuJ ( . ) .0 aba.J;tkhula.vailgia I
khu : k.khu EKO
8.6 avi: api . om E - rido: bba '0 tae CDEI; tue GHKM 0 Ma-
bibhio : maharao . mahanubhao 0
8,7 l?Jlhi 2 CDGHK ; I}cabil}cahi M ',?ahi El so I : om K khu CDGHI
MN ' kkhu EO ar:tiggamido : bahirara.o cbamubado E '
I YiC;lo :avaro a. 'a arona 0 ido : 'l?issaI!lpado
C jje DEH ' jeva C " jevva GKO ' eva (. e a M k.aluJal!Ji :
G ' kalalcalam MO
 176 MaJatfmiuJhavQ 8..8
"
sadhikkhevam dura :nikkhev>-aviddha :viad):- oru :danda-nibbharam
padhavia pav*ho / tado >mhi
10 sun,.ami a ghare ghare guo/-an,.uraa-kadarassa pora:loassaha Mahava
ba ba Maaranda,. ha sahasia!' tti paridevaJ?ao / Maharao
vi kila sun,.ia samjada...;.
macchar> ; adhikkhevo tak palkka:: n,.ivaho
cand>-adaven,.a pekkhadi tti mantladi /
M ADAYANTIK A
15 ha hada >mhi mandabhainI! /
8.8 diira t;1ikkbevi Bband' s BC adhikkheva C 'adbikkheva DGH;
sahikkhevodiiravikkbeva E; savakkhepa I (savak,epa Har ch) " duraryikkheva K ;
lost in L ; savalevadiiraqikkheva M ; savaJevadurru:tikkhitta (pada) N ' savak-
0 ividd.ba EMO · CD; (kkbev)avaviddha
GHKL ; (kkhep)apaviddha I Har ch; vialoru E ;
viasoru N dat;1,,"a: doddanda E CE O?D; GHK.
LM Har ch) ; I
8.9 padbivia: pauavia MN: om E N· 0
CD tado : ido K I;liatta CEGHL' I?ivatta D '
IKN ; 0 ; lost in M
8.10 su[)emi 0 ; a: om CO· iOSl in M ghare gbare : ghare2
EL kidarassa ... mabibbia : om I kidarassa Bhand's G; kaarassa C ;
katarassa D; cett pora : paiira EH· paura K hi : om Har
cb Mibav8 here DEKL(MO) ; I?adha C- mahavamahava H ' after mahiibhiia
GN
8.11 (2od) ha CD ; om EGHK LN, MO(I) Har ch mahibbii.a: mandabhaa C ; om
MO(£) (3rd) hi: om ENO (4th) hi D· om CEGHIKLM 0 Har ch
sibasia tti.: sabasikatti I ; sahasie M EH ILMO .; deaJ:?ao D · lost
in C ; devaf?a G ; K.; devvadao ; devanai? Ha! CaI ch· de anam Har
Kath ch Mabirio: mahiirajo H; om C
8.12 vi : pi H ; om DN, C kila : kilimmadi K ; kim{matto) n - om before
manli: GL maoti CEGHIKL (maotri Har ch) ; matto D ; om MNO
Bhand's BC Telang (dhia duhita ' Jag) · CD - duhittaQaqIt
E; GHKL ; J; vabuparil?aa M ; N·
0' Har (duhitroq ch) C; om N
jida: D ; jata I K· jaa M; jaR 0
8.13 iidhikkbevo EGL ; adhikkheo C· adhiklchoho D ; H · aveso I ; avea K'
aveo Harch) visajjida CDEGL· visajjia HIKM 0
CDK ; paharisia E ; pauqha GH ; L ;al?ea MO ' om I Har ch before
piiikka: pia CD piiiklca CDEGH IKO· paiekka L; paai M · paralcka
padati Har ch t;1ivaho : J)ivvaho CD
8.14 adavedaQaQa 0 ; ata eQ,3 1; ada e L· soils siblllll.:
sohidasiudha M' ohaf!'lsa sold DIKO; sodha EGL · sauha C · saudha H
M; 44h ido pe adi: pekkhidi L; pekkhai maotiadi :
mantaadi M ; mantiadi N
8.15 Madayantiki ... sahi: om mbi : mha E
8.16 Act III 177

LAVA GIKA
sahi, M.aLaru .I
MADAYANTIKA
sa kbu jje a de maggaIp avaloidul!l pasarida /
paccbado q.a a tal!! pekkhami I avi J?ama ujjar;ta-gahaq.e
paqattha. bhave ? I
LAVA' GIKA
sahi turidrup I
adikadara me piasahi / atthi 2(
sabasa r:'Ia karedi/ pari.k ramantyau)
sabi Maladi bhat:tami saw MaLadi. ni l (itas

8.16 sahl : om M it.di : maladi G afreT kahiJ!l : attadi H varttate Har ch ;

vatthadi I ' adadi L
8. 17 Madayantikj : madha si. u: om ; saha. ?for sabi) E ' sakhisakha.Lu Har
ch UI CDGHIK ' k.hu 0 pa . a.: E' M;
. 0 i l . DEL ' om Cl ; jevva GKO' m)eva H ;
evv.a M de : om CD al'. : 0 '0 I asaridi: pa.utta E' pasaria M

8.18 tal!! : t&l!l D' (before MN ; om C

avi Di h ; miiQama 0 (maoama Har Kath cb) ;
om M before ujjoTJO: L jji. . E
ga a, CDGHIKLM ' gahaJ;lopa . gahaJ?af!l 0
8.19 CDH ' pa EGIKL 0 ue : have K
8.20 La. ' j; i .: om . : a ; sahimaladiparikramatisahi I turidam :
turia!!l E M . : hma H ' 1 adi : a E ; ati H ;
a i Im (Hcbiya): om DEHsi sa - : sahi l a . '.. kar,edi CD
Shand BO al 0 Bhand' E after the fonowing ariant ,: -
u a anatib:idfl i:m Un. a asare sa na dbaredl attanam HIK EGL M 0
CHar ch)
H nhida) ,upa na Lbitft Har ch ; E;
u G; (v.ti th e in marg) K' L;
vi . . upa 0 . iI 8"8-
sue : osare M si. E O : a JK oa sa Har ch) ' GH icL dbi-
redi arei 0 : aredi i:redi : daredi I
GH]L ; EK
8.21 bbavida .I . i . C ' jaI!l r:'a bhavida sahasa D ' bha idavvarp
sahasa Bhand BE ' im · iql a asare Bhand's 0 before Ivarita.J?l:
ubhe K Har ' la ailg' amada.y antike 0 ; ubhe after parikriImantyau L' om
CDEGHM I turila . . . . I ' (ubhe)

8.22 Miladi : maladi2 EG: maladimaIadi H .. MiI di: om H Har ch

i: OL 0 ": om GL it : talaS CD parikra-
paribh 0
 178 Mala tfmadha va 8.23

(praviSya
KA LAHM:fSAKAl:f
d*hia kusalef?a amhe I hlmaI)-ahe
25 pekkhami via vimala;I?irantar):uddhllda:dhoda:taravari-dhara-
pa<;iiphalida mada-fila -
kalida
via visankl1aD :ovadida:
idda> : amanda:- - -kkh a"h a -viha la :paqij oha- .

8.23 CDGHL; EIMNO ; om. K

8.24 Gl.. before dit.{hiii: M; N
ambe: hi M; hmi 0 (asmi Har ch) ; om vil?iggada I ; M;
N; 0 Har ch) duggamido:
M DEGLO· C· sangara Hsic· saggama I;
K; N before hrmiinahe : HIK
8.25 via: va C; vaa G; a HI ; vianta M · vimala CD· cett od-
dhiida dboda: uddhiiantatU11ga M · utta ; uddhuvantuttaranga 0 od-
dhiida CDEHK· uddhfita. G ; oddhua I ; uddhaa L ; Odbhlita Har ch dboda
COE; dbatfda G; dha"u H · dhoa IK; dhauta L taravin CDEGHIK; dara-
van L; karavaJa MO· keravala .
8.26 paC:liphalida GHKLMG (pratiphalita HaT ch) ; pamhalida CD· papphulida E;.
I· paqikkhalia N canda: nkada . om M uiiala
ujjalida C; ujjali D; ojjala I; (a)iialanta M ; (a)ja1Ji 0 GHL HaT;
E; ?vara 1; birpqurilla K; piiijaria M ; pii'ijari ; piDjaribhav3l?'asila
0; om CD
8.27 kaUda GHIKMO; valida CD ; ?lrulida E ; kavalida L; hlia. N Kimavila:
kamapala 10; karavala via4a: om K bbua: M ividdba:
K bala: dala H; bala 1 li : leha H (reW Har v.I. ch)
vibalid) scripsi; vihallid L; vihalita one ms of Jag (viccburita in the other); vidalid
CD; vial E; vilalid G; viralid(o) HI; virillid K Har; vik.attha,?ataralid M· ka-
datthataralia(ii) N; 0
8.28 unelin CD; uvvellida EGL; odvellada H ; ovvaUida I; uvell(ul) K· uvvella M ·
uvvela N; uvvellia 0 before Ka./inda: K · taranga MO ; om CDEGH
ILN Kalinda: OlD G taw: GL · EM 0 sotta
DEGKMNO; sota HIL; lost in C samkulam
. D<; Uulamm(iva) C · ssaniam . .
I; cett via scripsj· iva CD ; via9]la G· KL ; am EMIM 0
Har ch visiIllkbal EO C; ovahjda D; avalida E'
uppaqida GL; uppadida H; avapadida t uppbalida K; ovalaa M· uvvaia N .·
avapadia 0
8.29 t;liddayamanda GH· niddaya I ; 0 vai: vat LO
kkboba: lckhobha LMO; (r)ukkboha vihala CEH; mm D ; viala GKL;
vilaha I; vi1aa M; ; 0 ; vihvala Har ch EGH·
paqijjoha J; K · paq.ioha L- om CDM 0'
8.30 pari CDEGHL; K (prati HaT ch); paq.in.i M 0; vi I
8.30 Act V/lf 179

parivattan.)-uggada 30
sumarami a
jaijarida:paftjar)-oaJlla:suhaq.a-hatth)-avalutta:vivih):auh}-

sahasaI!l M ahaval!l I
aho . sodha-sihar>-antarido 35
samama: aHa .): vaWU! K· M uggada :
oggaa H ; oggata I · g . anga . ) HI' 0 ava-
&sa EG H LM O ' ovasa C · avasa D a ,vasa I; ovaasa K· oasa
CIO; D ; osattaWinta E; G· H;
K · vlsadatta L; viasanta M · . vikasita Har ch
8.31 pirakka DH?E (parakya Har ch) ; parekka CGL· parakkea I; piikk:a KO· paai
M;paiI¥ bala GHL sam- I sum-
manum. ". . - . __ . :
hattha visamova rattapaikkamag-
hava.f!!1 /C (sumarami is altered
from sumarasi. The gap after balamu· at the end of a line, but onI one syllable
in. length)· sumaramm la irli. vaj jajajjaridapadjare
suhaqaviatthovalattavivihauhovaruddhasesa ?rahal?ihadaha
hatthimuhalesariuccba:nna 7] la)visumaovaran ta
D a : a i K· om (C) (aasirasi D)
bbisal!-a : K up: bhuavaija:
8.32 jajjarid.a : jaijaria . after paiijara M O(N) panjar:a: om oaJb 1 Har,
(=apasrta.) Jag· EK· GH ' apa cfda L; pallattha MO" vip-
paladdha. (D)DGHKL . subbaq.a subhaq.oru I bat-
daiva'lutta : mukka .. : sattba KMO al'. utta (C)EGHL (a)vilutta
[. {a)pamulli K · (a)vimutta . a vimukka o.. ovalattl. D)
8.33 ovand • (D)L' 0 araddha E · oparudda H ic · opbaruddha I· opamadda GK;
avamadda M ; ·ovamadda palita Hac ,c h D <AIL (a)sesa E·
(a sarosaria G ' (a)samosaria : (madda osaria M ; (madd osaria 0 ri
(D)EHL · riva l ' om GK MO . " (D EH MO ; ser:Lia GK· saJ?r:'a 1;
1. afler . HI (daua HaT ch , DHILMO Har;
visatna E · viasa
Y : J?1ara:J:!l OK ."asUa] · apasara HM · avassara L;
{am)saraGK. ;ova ara. (0. O · visama saranta E rrik.b Har· paikka (CD)
EO ; H· parikb. ]. \'3irill.a KMO ' parekkavivikka L· vikkama sa m-
ca... : C)G "
8.34 . (CD)S" · "da O · HO· I#mmivida I·
K (ni.v arttita Har cb) · avida L and M · I?immavia visama: visara L
before sahasmra': samara GHKL- (CD ElM 0 rfoha (D GHIO '
(C)EL · ryahaJl1 J( Har cb)
8.35 0; aI?uriiho 1 : narendassa El diini CDEI·
. . GHKLM 0
danim a : soba or 0 sihari : sici I antarido odionlil
..
scripsi; antaridodinna H : "antaritahdatta · H cba a" anta ?radodinna C · an-
D· E· G ; antaridadinna I ·
L; M" .
0; Har cb ..
 180 M iilatimiidhava 8.36

u vanlda: Maha va;- Maaranda -muha -: cand)ahimuhall,l varal1l varaql

kalaalado abhianam jania nivvaUida:
garua:- ph uranta ':'veiakkha:::masi- -
40 mailida:muhe
- Bhurivasu' Nandane
. . mahur> :6vannasena . . . . 'kiln.dani.
bhuan)-abhoa-bhusanehim mahanubhavehim ahiana 'damsana;gun)-
tti pa4ibodhia .

8.36 vil}ao : vil?l?a vo G ; H ; vil?ava vo I ovasa L pari D

samida: samida EO; samia M VU-o.hs
karase N viroha: virodha CK ' om HI ; viroho 0 uva':lida:
saI"!l kalita E sa!:!llcadho G L . ommekkaras M ; somekkara 0 0
8.37 GHK ; COL ' I ' (o)uvat:l1a MO' (
Mihava .. • 0 mu-
bacaDdihimuhal!l I; KM .; muhacande GH; muhaando E;
suhaqa CD ; muhadaiam, L ; mukhacandraQ! Har ch before varatrl: avaloia
M; puloia N vavara C ' vavara 0
8.38 SSl!lcirida DH ; sancari C; saiicaria G; pasarida EKL; pasaria [. paria M; varn
N; 0 ; prasarita Har cb CDEG KL ; !)isiddha H ; saqiddha [.
!)ia MNO loa MNO kalaalido CD ' kalakalo NO?M;
ado EHL ; kalaalJ1saado G ; K ; kalabar;tsakiH
Har cb elK; D ; abhijal?am. EHNO' GM;
L jar;tia Qi: om D E' C; vattido D .;
vatida G; Qivvadia H ; J?-ivattia I; Qivvattia K; Qivatada L: 0; om MN
8.39 mahaggba garua: om MNO after mahaggha: mabapiiii K guua EH ;
garuo CD; I ; gurua GKL MlumaQao C ; om D ;
miiQo K; M , qiattia)pburanta CDIMO
(sphurat Har Cal cb) ; paranta N; papphuranta EGRKL (prasphurat Har Kath
cb) maccbua: matsara C ; maccharonmiocha H .; maccharomissa I' ... um-
meccha Har Cat velakkha GKLO ; veUak.kha EH .' vailak.kha I ; vella.k-
khamarisa M; om CD masi CDGHIK ' maSi ELM 0 ; masa
8.40 mailida C; mam D; mal.it?-ida EL' ma.a lida G ; mailia HK; maliia I' maladamu-
ulial?ia M; NO m e : m ulchi I afrer muhe: a CD!
. .
nam L maburo : madburo C ; muhuro L ; madhllravaano . EKO Id·...
kidikiq1 G CDE' GHIKLM 0
8.41 bhuvaQ3 CIM; bhuvala EGHILM ;
C; D; KO mabi . D •.. da .. . :
jehiql N DGHIKLMO ' C ; om E
M ahla-:m D; 'abbijana' Jag' Qava CHIO (nava Har ch);
ahi4ava EK; ahijana L; G daJ!lS8l,1Jl : om D om G
8.42 ahi DEGLM ; abhi HIK 0 ; (aDu Har ch) jamadu-
CEG; (after mahal?ubbavehif!1!) M ' om L .a pari: ,a vari D' lost in C'
?I?apari E ; saparil; K doso CDEGM ' osa H; oso I ; toso KL 0
before tti: bhoi C; bhl10 0 ; bhOdo E pa.,i : pari DE bodhi.: bohia
OKNO ; dosia E gado: gao HM ' gamo
8.43 Act HI 181

raa j
ime Mahava;Maaranda aacchanti / pi Bhaavarue lIDam
J?ivedemi / (iti n(kranta1?) 4
pra isato Madhava . Makarandau)
MAKARANDAH
aho nirvyajam iirjitam. tejal?!
tatha hi
s.aJ!lca. a-dalat..;.kaiLkalam
prag viran aparatra acchidya /
udvelad :ghana -: saI!lkhy> :
6dadher
purastad
abhut jj9j/
MADHA AH
nanv anuSaya-sthanam etat / paS · a-
Ady) aiv) ni'ith) -otsave
yair madhu/

8.43 .lJbbantara l , : avvantar;u;t G Ir H : rao 1

8.44 after ime : i GHJL api Har ch)' at 0 bar di: maarando C; maaranda
(w.ith the owel ign for 0 al 0 riuen I iaccbaoti DEGH.; aachadi C;
agadi tti I ' aad3I!lLi . L: aa etti MI ; aada ; aadertija a 0; agata iti
Har ch pi : , ' : vi HK ; hi [ imam : om E
8.4S vuttanta . : uttaDtarp OGKM . ',edemi: t:timedemi C ; I?j edime I ; edeh-
mi M ; ij iiapayani Har Cat h ; katha ami Ha.r Kath ch iti GHILMO ; tti
CDEK ' om EH icIKl. . DG ; ni,k.rantaqka-
lahamsah
8.47 ma.d ha 'C D E G , ' re hM atiSiyi: atisayino
E; atisaya K - .jita : C
8.48 t3thi b' : om I
9a dalat: galal H ; valat L unnadgbanat
b prig : (o)drag I a tu CE ' api tra 0: anuparya GHIKl. 0; anupatya
M iee ia: ucchid a
c ndveJat CGHIL ; udvea E ' ud\1ellat DK. 0 Har ghana.:'har-a HIL ruD-
CDE 0 ; GK ' H L 0
CD: akin:tas a ,c ett - , yob : saqlghodadher O · C;
paScada?tba D
d d i : ega HI pa . gba
9.1 Midha a. : mak.a CDEG ... eta1: om C b fore nanv: aya ya
M 0 Ii : asatam D ; anusa.dheyam. E ' q.ara?'ndasandhanam
I . ya: anuS3iyana L ' atiSa)!a . _. 'a: om CD
lOa jala kita : Did' m : nimesa. H
182 M iilatfmlulhava lOe

eva bhavad-bhuj):argala-guru:vyapara-rugn) :3sthibhir

gatrais te kathayanty asara-vidhurful prayeJ?a saJ'!lsaril).al? / / 10//
tu saujanyam asya nqJater, yad aparadhinor
anaparaddhayor iva nau / tad ehi
adhuna
kathyamanam / tatha ca
Kathayati tvayi sasmita:.Malati-
valita /
vadana:pailkajam ullasita:trapa-
sakhj
ayam asav udyana-vata4 /

c bhavad: om Nvyipica: vyaghiHa M rugnll CD · bb.agna cett

d vidhurin : vidhuram. I sa msiri
. nab
. . : samsaritam
,. I
10.1 saojanyam asya nrpater: narapatera yasaujanyaitp K ; asyanarapatersaujanyarp
M COl; narapater EGHKLMNO aparadhinor CDEGHL· 53-
paradbayor IK; aparaddbayor MNOafter aparadhinor: apy GHKLMO;
apyavayar J
10.2 anaparaddhayor CDO · anaparadbayor OH ; niraparadham I · niraparadhayor
KL ; om EMN iva: om M nau CDEGHM- avayoh KL(I)· here om I;
om NO C; D; MO;
N; krtaprasadam ElL : saf!1pratal!1 G ; H ·krte -
prasadan(a) K Ell - K before ,lad eM:
maka K
10.3 Malati; I; mfdatya M after eva MO adhoni.: om 0
-Maday.antikii. IL vistuatab:
after kathyam{mam E
10.4 before kathyamiinam: EK kathyaminam , .. paryikolatvid
itas tataf:1 (11.4): om CD (resuming with : prastiiyatmanam atrabahyodyanaga-
hanevinodayava itiparikramatal?-) lat · yamioam katbyama-
E an.
10.; srot:um iochami 'G HL ; KM tadli ca GH;
manyeca K; manyetathaca L ; om EIMNO before stanza J J : the passage
below is given .in the following form by i:
parilcramya II kathaf!1 siinya ivii.mI pradcia\t. Maka II vayasya niinam asmad
vyatikarodvega paryakulatvad paribhramantya atmanam atraivod-
yana gahane vinodayanti tad dli II Madha 11
(stanza 11).
Similarly in Telang: puro)valokya I •unya ivfuni pradeSii1?- 1
I Sanka avayoi?- vyakulalvaditastato bb.ra-
maotyasta vinodayanti I ( tanza I I)
I1 b valita IKLNO?E; calita GH M lola : GH
c trapi GHILO Har ; E ; bhru mat K ; bhru tat M ; bhyuya N
11.1 after stanza 11 : I ; (ili parikriimatai.t GH L) ayam asjv udyina
11.2 Act V/lf 18 3

(pra viSa
MIDHAVAH
katham siinya i ) aml /
M AKARAND AH
vayasya, niinam asmad- . atikar>-od ega-paryakula-tvad itas
tataq. paribhramantyaatmanam atr) aJV) 6dyana·gahane vinodayantyo 5
tad ehi pasya /
(iti
LAVA -
sahi Maladi / sahasa) alokya) pU1?-0 vi aJ?aha Mahaq.u-
bhava rusanti /
MADHA A'MAKARANDAU
bhavatyau kva MaIati? / 10
"-'Bb M 0 here EK ' beloM', after bhav4)'anri GHL ' asavudya-
I (fbe 1e idence oflM 0 as to po itioo is ambiguous ttuougb omi sion
or lranspo it ion of the intervening passage.
11.2 EK ' O' itiparikramat:ru;. GHL: (Mada. antika) I ;

11.3 Midha .. .. ' . mkram.ata .: om 0: before slarua 11 r

EGHL ; om KO . - yi GH I ; ' unya EK: un 0 L i imi (I Telang);
ime H ' G. E: e K : om L b " ore pradeiiil!: dirghika KL pra-
H (r : pra eSaQ G ' pradeS!}:l EKL
11.4 vayas, a : om E ,'),.ri an.: atire a K
11.5 paribfR anty.a .: pra lii (after long omt ion CO bhra-
maofi(a) E- klfualarptya (a L .tni odyina : atrababyodyana CD) ,in&-
day tyo '. anti GHL' ( inodayava(iti CD ' inoda ati E ' vinodayanti I) ;
anti K
11.6 tlld •• - pfiyin .: om D) p ' ,iva . GHKL(I)' prai'ii.vaJ} E
11.7 itiparikrima · . CD' ubhau praviSar.a.q. GH ; ublla upraviSa pa rikra-
L' K ; om £(1 0)
11.8 avaogiki . Ida . ,e GHKL 0 ; la madaantie C' madayantikala ail-
gike DEIM , twice) 0; Lavarp I mada Har h ejor,e sahi: ehi D Miladi:
maladil K ' maLaatmaJad"i : maladisahimaladl 0 before sahasa: mada
after ahasa: tau L a ' alo ' ) B: vilokya GHl!.. 1ri: M'
om E a/rer f1U1!o' \'i : ede GH KL a . i H]' CD; aparikkkida-
deba E' GL' al;laM M; om 0: anaya Har CaI cb ; abatau Har Kath.
ch Mahi . - i D :b mahaDubha Har CaJ ch, mahanubha \laU
Har Kath ch)' c- EKO ' mababhaa G' (ba)bbaa R ;
mahail L ' rn.a.haJ?ubhao
11.10 Midha aMH.a. : malcarandamadha u IK ' maka L a/ler Makarandau
pra I madha l e; I madha ' I D l'atyau : bbad re CDE '
184 M fllatfmfldhava 11.11

UBHE
kudo Maladi? pada-saddet:la amhe vippaladdhao mandabhaiJ?lo /
MADHAVAH
bhavatyau, katham api sahasradh» eva vidlryate no.
h!dayam-atalt abhidhiyatam /
Mama hi praty
dravati hrdayam antar, bhrasyat) IV> intar atma /
sphurati ca mama vamam, etac ca
vacanam iha bhavatyoq.-sarvatha ha hatD )srni jj12//
MADAY ANTIKA
esa khu ido q.iggade Mahat:lubhave Avaloidatp. BuddharakkhidaqI
ca Bhaavam-saasaI!1 visajjia, vil}l).avehi

om MN after kva: sa GHK LO ; Aasau M after Ma/at!: ha (again) I

11.11 kudo Ma/adi: kudo N; om 0 before pada: / mada I 0; maladi M ambo

GHL; mhi C; amhi 0 ; avam I' om EKMNO (vippaJa)d 80: ddharnbi K'
ddhiia N; ddhamma 0 mandabbiil,iio here EGHMN ; before vippa ILO
(mandabhii.g inyau Har ch); om CDK
11.12 before bhavatyau: he 0 katbam api : katbamapi CD' E;
kathatp M sabasradheva CDH' sahasradhaiva EGILO' sarvadaiva M; om
KN vhrrryate CD; ate KM vidhvaJ:!lsate EGHILO Har 00:
mama K ; me N' iva O ' om IM
11.13 ata 10; L; om
12a aib buddher: aivabuddhi C
b dravati CDK ' E' bbrSam ayam anu GHIL'
aviratam anu MNO aow bhrasyafivi Bhand's BCE; an ta3l:syafiva. C; anta
?ddhasyativa 0; antastrasyativa K ; baddhotkampaev.a GHLM ?E' bandhot-
kampaeva INO iintar : antrer D' atmar atma) E
c ca mama CDEHIO ; cakhalu GLM; bikhalu K ; mamahi · vimam: pa¥..am
K ca : lli I amarp K
diha: api IN bato>smi: Folio 44 of F. which is badly .com at the right hand side
here begins.
12.1 esiCD;tadataeE · tadaPGMLHarch otadoIK · taeM 0 ' uDGHI '
.kkbu CEFLMO' om K ido : tado 0 ,?iggade : ryiggame 1 mmi-
mababha.e E ; e Avaloidal!' ca
KMO, (dam a) GH ; avaloidabuddharakk.hidao C , (rakkhidabiqJ.) D ; buddharak-
khide // avaloidaf!1ca I; Ft a) E; bud-
; valakimilca Har ch
12 .2 before Bhaavadf: ubhe GL 8haavadi: bhaavadie H1K visajjia : pesia
KN appamada : appamatta CD ; appamadi I after a El' ca L
Har CaJ ch viz:.avehi GH; I ; after ajjauuQ11} K 0
12.3 ajja: ayya CHI ti: uttamidiabhaQia I GL; (a)tti C ; (an)ti D ·
12.3 Act VIlI ]85

ajjaiittal11 ti La angla ida I tado ooae

aggado pasarida / pacchado a pekkhami / tado
ettha ja a tumbe dirrha tti / 5
ADHA AH
ha priye MaJati-
Kim api kim api an e mangalebh 0 ad.anyad-
viramatu parmasa' paryut uko >smi /
kalayasi " kalito - allabbe dehi
bhramati antar vih a1aI!l nirda a >si // 13//
UBHE
ha piasahi gada ) i? I
AKARA DAR
kim ity av]jna a aikla ram a alambyate? /

EHM; (itti K. 0: 0 t in F Lauilgii: iavangiaa G·

1 : om E; lost in F p ' -: ppe la HI t do: om CDFHI after
tatio: uttammamana EFGHKL OuttamyamanaHarcb); uttapyamal?a I
edi CFGK.L; esae D · etae E " me O ' om HI before p$ C;
pa ?da D a aloidD : loido ; 01 idllJ:!l o· om G
12.4 aggado : agado H b fore pasaridii: viJoidUl!l OH pasaridi: parigada. H·
pariggada I" : p ria 0 1 ccbi.do CEFGO" pacbado HKL;
pacchado D· I ; pacci. M· paccau.la ab . . CDEFHM O· amhe
GKL ; om I EGHILO na ca HarCaI cb ; CDFKM (na Har Katb
cb) tea. : La before . om C pe i i CDEFHIM O· peillamo
GKL la 0: ado L amhevi G
12.5 ettba: ittha H] . om after errlu:r: ja VB. G : .ya l vitJava: vicaran-
E; viqa C;
0 FGlLM; H· vi4apa vi4amba
K· CD); E b 10re ici: ja D)EKL ;
G· viciaiql FH· i .1" O· om ji1'll CDEfHIM .
dava O· tava with j'aPQaboYe GKL ."" . DM · ti) CH· diWte GKL O·
aada E ' 10 tin F - 1 tti : ti G(eH) ; om I
12.6 : i .: afler priye E
13a (211 ) kim api : 2 E ; manasi FRI
c lkaJayasi .. . J b . : kalama '!dhuraman I ala kalaya i OH
d ati : j alati E
13.1 ubbe ... gad- i : om after piilSahi: maladi El kahim ••• " kva i C
gadisi EGH[KLO; i DF · e · agada i
13.2 avi : a a 8. . a h re CDEKO?FI t; b 10r ;C[lnl ir}' GHILMFcorr; om
nilda -yam : aibl am G " kai I l;kle'am lambyt : lamb ase M·
lambase 0
86 Miilatlm[ulhava 13.3

MADHAVAH
sakhe tvam 1pi na janasi
tasyaq. /
MAKARA DAH
asty etat / tu Bhagavatl-pada-miila-gamanam apy asailke /
tad ehi, tatra Hlvat /
UBHE
pi saqlbhavladi /
MADHAVAH
evam nam) astu /
(parikraman ti)
MAKARA OAR
(vicintya, svagatam)
Yata bhaved BhagavatI-bhavanall,1 sakhl no,
jlvanty ath) na v» et atisailkito )smi /
prayeIJ.a blmdhava ;priya -sa£!lgam)...;.adi
saudamanl-sphuran,a:caiicalam eva saukhyam //14//
(iti sarve)

/ /a$mo )ilka4 ! /
13.3 om CFM · before (yam api K ; afrer na D adhava: om CF
tiyis: dusthitayas CD; EO
13.5 astyetat: Hvaitat F pida milia : pada H ' pala L spy : om ). upa is-
ailke CDF; asailKate M ; asailkyate EGHIKLO
13.6 tad ... om E tatra : after laval FLM paSyimal.t CDO?F;
pasyavai;l GHIKL ; MN
13 .7 edaJ:!l KMNO (idam Har ch) pi EGIKO ; pia CDF; vi HLM ; om N
sambbiivladi: sambhavi'adi CM · sambha aadi G ; mbhaveaddi H ' sambha-
veadi I ; bhavtadi N
13.8 Madba ... astu: om M namistu : evana tu E ; e\laI!lnamabha vatu K:
evambhavatu NO
13.9 before pari: sarve HI K : iti M parikramaoti : parikramati ; om GL
13.10 vicintya: om M svagatam : atmagatam K
14a bhaved : nutad HI?F no : 0 GH
b jivanty : Jlvaty DEK 0 : athe .yatl CDKM ' ; EH]L
Fcorr ; G; F1 t iUeg atj CDF ' abhi EKMO·(ti)vi GH; upa IL ; alba
N
d saodiimanl CDFHKcorr ; audaminl EGIL OKI t C1Uicalam : saJ!lcalam
L
14.1 iti: om N
14.2 before *=*lafivasad iti apahara,:,o F; GL;
malat'imadhave II H· itimalafimadha emalatyapaharonama 0
 ACT IX

la pr:a vi' ati Saudamanl)

SAUDAMA 1
)smi Saudamani bhaga · atal?- Sn-parvatad utpatya Padma-
vatim Cl tatraMalati- SaI!l tuta:pradda-darsan>-
tya parit) aj a saha
saila :kantara-pra paribhramato Madha a y) adhuna >ntikam 5
anuprayami j bho tatha )ham utpatita atha giri;nagara;
grama 'sarid 'arary a- atilcara ca . u. a
# I (paScad vilokya)
sadhu adbu-
Padma.vatI imala :vari-visala :Sindhu'
Para: arit :parikara-cchaLato bibharti I
uttunga :saudha'
i ) fmmrik.am ll l ll
apl ca

o.1 praviSati : pra i' ya CF be/ore SaudiunanI: akasayiinena E SaudimllDi

CDIK ' saudfunini EFGHLM 0
0.2 Saudimaru ... (2nd audim -: om D aodimmi scripsi' saudamini HMO'
2 EGIKL; om CF, (D (2nd) a dimaru crK.: S3t'ldanI L' saudamjnl
EFGHM 0 utpatya DGL Rar; upetya. CEFHIKO' uddhftya M
0.3 Itpasrt)'a DEFGHKL I; 10; u'rupat.ya C; upasrita Bband s G
before farm: ca I before saJ!tltula: madha a ya CDFK pradeSa : praveSa

0.4 1If!l tyan8J!l C' satp: tya M' S3.rfl

saba : afte K b ' d dro . i : ; C ' om M
0.5 Sail. km1inl: Sailantam kintin : tantira G; katbakakantara L
praY< 'am CFM 0 , GHl. ; pradeSam Dl, EK pari Ito GHL ;
EK ' om CDFl f 0 Midha · .. EGHILMO: pravrttim K ; here
om CDF be!oreadhwtii:upal bh "fK; ·upa.'rutyciM· upasrtya" adhu-
ni: om E antikam EGHIL; tadan . am CDFKM 0
0.6 anupra : upa [ ; pm afterarwprayiuni: iti CDF' parikramya GHL bbos:
bhobho I ' bhobhos titi: patita G : M;. (yatha ")
om lL ' . F): 'eva . om C girl : om 1
O. 7 cak. I . . 'p)'at 0.): prati . yate : \'iJ:o-
kya : avalokya I
0.8 sillb sillbDl CDFGH' sadhu HKL' om M 0.
1b parikara: vyatikara EH
d F): tan ' - : antariksam CEF
1.1 api ea : anyatoilo 0: om J
 188 M iiiatimizdhllva la

S» vibhati Laval?a lalit )....;.6 rmi'::panktir

abhr)-agame janapada-pramadaya yasyalf /
go :garbhiJ?I-priya :nav):-olapa-mala-bhari:
bhavanti //2//
(anyato vilokya) ayam asau Sindho r darita.. ;.rasa;::talas tata.-
prapata4
Yatratya esa tumula:dhvanir
gam bhira; n·utana:-ghana-stanita /

Heramba-kaJ?tba-rasita-pratimanam e i //3//
etas candan> ;asvakam.a·;karlra ;pa!ala...:priiya :taru-gahanaq.
pariJ?ata:malura-,:mrabhayo }raJ?:ya-giri-bh.umaya4 smarayanti
taruna :kadamba;jambu-van)-avanaddh} :andhakara::guru: nilruiija-
gam bhlra; gadgad): odgara :GodavarI-mukharita :mekhala-
5 bhuvo I ca Madhumati;Sindhu-
saf!1bheda-pavano bhagavan Bhavani-patir
2a LayaDa.: varada MN Ialita.: valita HIK ; calita
c bbiri: hari MN
d avalayo : avanayo I Ibllavanti CDEFIKLO Har ; vibhanti GH; vibhati M
2.1 .a nyato vilokya: here om OvilokYIl CDFL ; alok a. EGHIKM before
ayam: ahaha / I ayamasau CDF ; EGHIL ' sae . a bhagavatyah
KMNO rasi taJas: prayala D talas: tala EFI?C .
2.2 E .; om NO
3a tumuJa : tumulo C; lost in F
c oikuiija: kuiija I CFGHI K; vij fD1bhamail:ta DELM ; vijrm-
N; vijrmbha1)ena 0
3.1 after etas : ca EGC caoduasu : candaoa vanasva E · (folio 44 of F ends with
candanasvaka ?rka) Urlra C · karala D : keSaratamala E ; k:esarakadali G;
karaiijakesarakadall H; karanja J; K; kesarakadan L
sanI. MNO [KMNO' lost in C priy. : praya I tuu:
rurugaru L
3.2 phalita M ; N girl: om GHLMO SIIlUItyuti CDn;
smayanti I; smarayanti EGHMNO
3.3 before larw:w: khalu EGLO .;. H; I; K ; khaluta-
run M; tin N :varaQa H ; om I .; varuI?B Har after lartUJ(.l: tamiUa. E
kadamba: om K UBi : khata avabaddha I ; apanaddba 0
andhakira: andhakaraka D ; {A)k:ant.aran gurul: gurugiri M
3.4 before gambhira: guojad EGHIL 0 Har.; guiija M g blUr.: gabbira GHL ;
om I glldgada CDGHJKM 0; ga.h vara EL Har afrer udgiira: ghoragbo..
N after Godavari: nwa KN mUkbarita . • . viSit.:
keka(then erased) DriSila : vimsa mekhali ... Ibhiidbari : erased in E
3.6 apauru?dbIya G
3. 7 M; ?suQQl!J E befor;e p.rQ1)tl11Jya: vataskandaiipa.viSyagitaga
I
4a Act .1 189

Suvafl?abindur ity akhyayate 1

Jaya deva bhuvana-bhavana
jaya bhaga ann akhila: ara-da nigama-nidbe I
jaya rucira:candra-.:· ekhara
jaya Madan>-antaka. ja > adi-guro l/4/1
(gagana-gamanam abhinI a)
Ayam abbina · a:megha-syamaD..;.6ttunga: sanur

vitarati BrhadaSma prltim

apl ca
Dadhati kubara-bbajam atra bhalliika: yiinam
i styanam ambillqUm i I
styli at,e saUakinam
ibha-<ialita -: vikirt;la 116//
katham. I,., tailia byatra sampratt
kftamalam
tir>-asmantaka-' imbi.<umbana..;.mukha I
datyfihais tiniSasya nifiya
virun-niqa-kapota::kiijitam anukrandanty

4a jay a : jayajaya throughout tanza d va : sakaLa K; om bbuvana:

bhagavan bbi.\ · : pa na
4b akhila CDEGIKO ; nikhiia H L f U a da CDGHIO ; om EKLMN
d idi: paramadi I; adide 0 garo : D
4.1 gagana gamanam O ' udgayagamanam. I ; gamanam CEGHKLM 0
Se oida:
,
nna K aM : 0] . vartma DH1' lost in C
d sumabi -n 1· 0
S.lapi ,c a: om M 0
6c asta H
d ibba : ada G ; abhi L ' 'ir vi 1rna . CDEM:
G HI KL 0 Ha ..
6.1 before iirdhvama Joq EK : ,a pi ta i I y: om a1:ra : om
KM 0
!ca'marya 1: K; ;
o kftamiJam : krlamu1am .
b cumbana CDL 0 Subha,ita ' umbiLa EGHIKM Har.; cumbina Jag Bhand's A
mokbi: para 8pal.: HI I
c tiniSasya : timiSasya. 0 ' timitasya . : skande G
d kujitam : . H t..tk , - I . CDHIM O· kuk-
kubhab, EGKL Subbasita , Har
190 M iilatimiidhava 1.1

tad bhavatu, Madha va . Makaranda v ev) ya tha yra

sadhayami J (iti
J 1/
tata4 pravisati ..:Madha 0 Makaranda4)
MAKARA DAH
5 (sakaruI;la:rp. ni4svasya)
Na yatra pratyasam anlllpatati no va rahayati
ceta4 pravisati ca moh):andhatamasam /
akim.cit pasava iva vayam aho
vidhatur vamatvad vipadi parivartamaha ime //8//
fADHAVAH
ha priye Maiati kv) ,a si? / katham avijiiata..;.tattvam
jhagiti priye )pasrta. >si? / nanv prasida sa£;lbhavaya mam /
ve kim asi mayy avatsaHi?
nanu so )ham eva yam anandayat pura /
sva yam agrbHa :kankaq:as
tava mii.rtiman iva mahotsaval?- //9//
(cirarp. fuditva) vayasya Makaranda punar jagati
7.1 bbavatu: ya van E e a CDGHILM . om EKO
tba: om M
7.2 sadhayami: sambhavayami G ; sampada,ami HI; ayami K iti :
iti CDKLN
7.3 M;
7.4 pravisati ., .. pra.viSatomfldha vamakarandau GH 0
va'lambita Midbavo Makaranda . l E ; mak.arandakantba ... vaLam bitomadhavah. D ·
madhavamakarandasca CM ' madhaomakarandaSca IKL
7.5 (2od) 2 E ; om K ; after G nil;! CDEGI ' ni HKLM 0
8a oa.: sapatati: pat ita L ' bbavati 0
b prati CDEGHIL ; pravi KMO ca DEOHKL: tu OM 0 tamasam.:
tamase K
c H ; tasya L
8.1 after sasram • Iba : ha k.\'asi : k asik a i.l jiiata tattvam:
jiiatam E; jiialattvaq.I 1 0
8.2 jbagiti COl ; EGHKJ,JO; jha(Fl ; akandad M priye ) pJlSfti CD;
paryavasita EGHIL Har' prakriiI!lta K' apakrfmta M .; apa rta 0 prasida :
om L
9a asi: iti N
c svayam a: ayamud EK ilamaniya : ramaJ?l a.
9.1 ciral:!l ruditvi DEK ; om cett Makaranda: om L jagati : after n hasya
G ; omCDE
9.2 Ace 1 191

tadrsaJ? snehasya
Sarasa:kusuma.,:echayair angair ananga-maha:j aras
ciram a virat> :cmma tbi pta t] _k ..aI,la /
t!f?am iva tataJ;t mano taya
kim ato yat //1 0//
apt ca
Mayi ad i pur,a
vikala manna<eheda-vyatha-vidhurair iva /
smarasi? tailia vyatanod asav
aham api yatha. )bhuva'!1 If] il/
(savegam) aho nu khabl
Dalati hrdayaf!J. dvidha tu na bhidyate
vahati kayo mohaql na m uii ca ti cetanam /
jvalayati t.anfim antar dahai?: karoti na bhasmasat
praharah vidhir marma--cchedi na Jrr.ntati jivitam 1/1 2//
MAKARANDAH
vayasya niravagrahaJ:!1 dahati daivam iva dlirul!o vivas an
ca te sanr)-avastha I tad as parisare muburtam
asyatam / atra hi.
Unnala :bala : kamaD-akara-makar:anda-
I
9.2 tidrSal;a CDE; tavataJ? 'G HIKLMO; tavat a/reI' sambhalloh
. . : kutah. E;
sakhedam K
lOa kusuma: ku chs. air CD; cett
b prati M
c manaQ tays : lalha G
d apara I!l ato : apiparato M 'b ra: priya I
It a "'i aha : iha D ,'idheb: -dbau 0
b EKM ' O · G
c marasi : s a ita 'G L ' sarasa ebikijtam . : nehiitkrt . am
.
d min : sammadab CMO
11.1 savegam: od egam K ' ; sa ,e dam L a.I : om 0
12a (dlaJs)n foUo 46 of F here begins dalan calatihrda e I
d. i i. : tatha [ tu lna : oalu DEKL Subhasita
b vabati(F) : rajati CO ceta:oim : \!edaoam 0
c J,'alaati : jvalayalica
12.1. vayasya CDFGLM' ayasyamadba a iEHIKO : om before niravagrahaJ?'l:
devanasaba. M on agrah . . : nim agraha da.) dabatil: om L dai-
l'am iu : daaiva ' : here om M i.v a ., .. ,ri 8S\' iin: asmiin CF after
vil'asvan: asman G(CF)
12 .2 parisare : M
192 M iilatimiulhavQ 13c

(parikram y) o pavi Sa tal?-)

MAKARANDAH
(svagatam) bhavatvevam. tavad / (prakasam) vayasya
Madhava
Etasmin mada-kala:mallikaksa-paksa-
v \. ·
vyadhuta ;sphurad",;,uru /
-paripa tan);odgam)-an tarale
drsyantam avira hi ta sriyo vibhagal;t / / 14//
MADHAVAH
(sotkampam
MAKARANDAH
katham, apratipatti-sunyam utthay>
(ni4svasy> otthaya ca) sakhe praslda / pasya 2
Vanjra-prasavarr nikuiija-saritam asakta",;,vasam. payaJ?,
ca yiithika-sumanasam uijrmbhitarp. jalakail;t /
girer alambya saniin ital;t
va- vidhau meghair vitiinayyate / / 15//
apl ca

12.3 ana hi : om E
13c CDEFIMNO ' i . at i GHKL K ".rta-
CDEFLM ; vartamana GHIK 0 Har
13 .1 beforeparikramya: iti K ; madha l/ yathahabhaviio ! iti DE
13.2 svagatam: om CFIL prat_ GHKMO, L ; om CFI, DEN
13.3 vayasya Midhn.: vayasya I ; om N
14a ]; mallikakhya CDE Bar Kath [
b s.phDud: CDG
c udgama: udbhava. I
d dfSyantim: pasyantam N nirahita sriyo : kuvalayin o bhuvo DE
14.1 sotkampam CD; sodvegam EGHIL . savegam KMOF(?corr)
\4.2 apratipatti DGH) Har ; apratipattireva CFO ; pratipatti EKM · . aprati L
ny • .: .. sfmyataJ:l M
101.3 nisvasya HLMO · om ca: om MNG sakhe : vayasya E
proid. : pras'ida2 E ; prasidaprasida M paSy.l DFGHJKL ; pasya CMN;
pasyapasya 0 ; om E
1.5c kusuma 1 itab : itat L
d 0 . UiDiyyate DEFLO Subhiisita' vitaniiyate
GHIM ; K' lost in C
16a Act IX 193

Jrm bha -jarjara:4imba-4a.mbara-ghana:srlmat...;.kadamba:drumal?

Sai1>-abhoga-bhuvo bhavanti kadambinl-syamaliiJ? 1
udyat :kandala -kanta :ketaka-bhrtah kacchah sarit-srotasam
1/16//
M AoHAVAH
sakhe pasyami - tu durruoka:rama1?'JyaJ? sampraty
giri.-hhiimaya}:l./ tat kim etat. / (sasram) atha va kim anyat? /
UtphulD :arjuna ':' sarja-vasi ta :.vahat :paurastya:"jhaiijhamaru t-
preilkhola-skhaliV--.:endraru1a'!Sakala:srugdh)
praptas ta ete )dhuna
gharm) 'am bh 0- vigam) ··agama vasarai:t 1/17//
ha priy,e Malati.
Tarut:ta :tama.la :nTIa -: bahuD :onnamad...;.ambudb ariiJ?
/
katham a valokayeyam adhuna barihetimafir
mada-kala kalrubhaQ? //1 8/1
na!ayati)
MAKARA DAR
ko )py ayam dasa-vipakal;l samprnti vayasyasya I

16a ju:ju. : jbar-jhara bimba ] . M

c .k ardak.liDtII : kundalatanta rbII: N sarit: pari N
d ivir gandha CDFO Har' avirgandhi 1- . avirbhuta EGH
K.L Silindra CDFHI ' ' wndbra fEGKLMN Har ; silindhra 0
16.1 sakbe : kathanna D ; bhavatu E dIuiIoka : duravalob.E
16.2 gin : om EM 0 alba vi kim oyat : om
17a marut : anila tK
17b skhalita : skhalad(i
c ele : e a M
17.1 hi : om C ;. om(with caret. mark) F
18a buul.: babala 0 Ha r
b samira . : samira 0 • • COOK' a adhrta E - avadhuta F ?HILM
dhotaghan:a 0
cam·: matl CM
d GHt ; ritah Har . .1.
IS.1. bejor,e soka: iti I ' DB M
18.2 11:0 )py .a.yam CDF)' koyam OH ; kop EK ,0 ' kopi M ' kopaya(foltowed by an
erasure) L .1i : (erasure ti (erasure L ' om M D'
E; SUlpmti : sampratihi CF' .after "ayasyasya MO :
om GK ofter \'o)'a )Ias) a : artate K . '(sampratl vartate M
 194 M alatlm[uJhava 18.3

(sasram) maya punar vajrayamaJ?ena kila vinoda4 prarabdhaq. j

evaJTl ca aiva no prati
5 pratyasa j (sabhayaJTl vilokya) pramugdha eva? (akase)
Malati 2, kim aparam niranukrosa) si? I

Apahastita:bandhave tvaya sahasam asya /

tad ih) anaparadhini priye sakhi ko
kramaq.? //19//
katham, ady) api n) 6cchvasiti / hanta )smi /
Matar matar dalati deha-bandha4
manye jagad, aviratajvalam antar jvalami /
sldann andhe tamasi vidhuro majjat) IV) antar atma
moha4 sthagayati - kathaI?1 karomi?
//20//
kastam bhoh. kastam!
..
Bandhuta-hrdaya-kaumudI'!maho Malati-nayana-mugdha:
candrama4 /

18.3 sisram:om L punar: kilapunar L; kila N; before maya CF before vajrii.o:

ajanata 0 vajriyamal,lena: vajramayena IMNO kUa CDFMO; kiyad E ;
om GHIK; here om LN vinociab: vinodanam EMN prirabdhah CDF;
Aarabdham E; GHIKLO; prarabdbam MN
18.4 oibSvasya: nisvasya EKLMO; om N eva: iva KM Miidhav81!l prati: I
Bhand's ABhCE ; madhavaql GHKL ; madhava DEN; madhavasya CFMO
18.5 after pramugdha eva: vayasyab GHL ikaSe: akasedr tva D ' om CEMNO
18.6 before Miilati : sakhi DEK Malati 2 CDEFGHL ; IKM; ma1atimalati
NO K' va M a i: om D
19a bandhave (F): C ' bandhavan D t aya : folio 46 of ft here ends
b asya K' M; N; .taya 0
d ujjhita"': ujjhita KNO; ujjhi L
19.1 chvasita: cbvasati KMN hanta .. . matar dalati: erased in E after >smi:
daivena GHI
20a sral!lsate CD; dhvaI11sate EGHIKLO Har ; saf!1srate M' dahyate N baodhah:
dahah N
b avirata: a virala N Har
d ILMNKcorr Har ; visvan CEG; visvag D ' visvam HO katham :
kima I
20.1 bho ... : om N (2nd) om M
21 a hrdaya: nayana N
b mugdba: bala HI; KL
21e Act IX 195

so )yam adya Makaranda-nandano praITyate

/ /21 //
ha vayasya Madhava
. candana-raso drsi
Gatresu . sarad>:endur
ananda e a hrda ye mama yas tvam 1
tvam nikama :kamarnyam akat?4a eva
kalena jivitam iv) oddharata hate >smi //22/1
(spfSan)
itara
atidaruJ?a dehi me giram 1
sahacaram anurakta:cetasam
akaranda katharp na manyase? //23//
MADHAVAH

MAKARANDAH
(socchvasam) ayam acira:dhauta:.rajapaWi:rucira ':'mliqlsala-.:
ochavir nava:jaladharas toya-S-kar)-asaref:la me jivayatiJ
yad ta va t I
MADHAVAH
tat kim atra ipine karomi? / (vilolcya) 5
sadhu sadhu-
Phala-bbara-pariJ?ama-syama:jambCi-nikuiija-

c nandano : nandako M
d pr:aIiyate: pratiyate 0
21.1 vayasya: pri avayasya 0
22a Siradendu : saradindu
d fmtam ivoddbarati: Jlvimadhiya'1lharata K
22.1 before sp(an: I ; gatrama yasal!l GHL a 0
23 .2 soccbvasam: sakamocch asam K bef ore dhaLlta: aocha i M :
raja anti ] ; M
23.3 : 'lkarefJO E 'ikara DEGHIKM o · "ikara L me : om E
ayasyam.: priya a asyam C 0 ji 'syati : j'i a attti C; a ati K MNO' .
after iisiire,!a M '
23.4 yad CDGHIL ; am E ayam 0: m K : om M u.ccbl'asital:!l tavat: uc-
r.h a ita an D l DIKL uccbva ita EGHO
23.5 :JflerMiuiha1'al}:sa egaodK kimCDEH ;kamGIKLO - kimi a · pri-
ya: priyayadiita L; om 1 akaraq:t H
23.6 sidhul sidh CDMO' saclliu2 EGHL: sadhu lK
196 Miilatfmiidhava 24b

skhalita:tanu:tarangam uttareJ?a sravantim /

upari prauqha :tapiccha :nIlaq.
srayati sikharam adrer nutanas toya-vaha4 //24 //
(sarabhasam utthaya, unmukhaq.
Kaccit saumya priya:sahacari vidyud aliilgati tvam
avirbhuta:praJ?aya-sumukhas cataka vii bhajante /
paurastyo va sukhayati mamt
bibhrat surapati-dhanu r tanoti//25//
(akafJ?ya) pratirava-bharita:kandar)-anandit) ..
mam anumanyate /
yavad abhyarthaye I bhagavan jImuta
Daivat pasyer jagati vicarann icchaya ced
asvasy> adau tad anu kathayer Madhava-stham avastham /
asa:tantur na ca kathayata )tyantam
katham api karoty sa ekaq. //26//
aye anyataq. saqlcarami /
(parikramati)
MAKARANDAH
(sakutam) katham, idanlm unmad):oparagaeva Madhav) :endum
24b tarangim : tarailgim D srayanti.m: sravantl C ; sravar:tavanti D
c vighatamana KNO Subhasita ; lost in M t.i piccba: tapiiiccha
o Har Kath
24.1 sarabbasam: sarasam D ; sarabhasem E unmukhab : om N
. 25a sabaearl: sahacaram K
b sumukbis : subhagas MN vii : (s)tvaq:I. K
d KLMNO ; viSvag DEG ; CHI bibbrat : dnclm M ?N la-
tanoti DEGKLMNO ; CH; I
25.1 om EL CD Har ; aye EGHIL; KMNO kandari:
mandara D utkantba
.. : utkanthita
.. MNO
25 .2 CDGHIL ; KMNO ; om E kekinubandhini: kiin-
ten a KMO ; om N mandra (0 ); dhvanina KN ; mandrasadh-
vanina M
25.3 after yiivad : enam IN bbagavan: bhagavYin D jimiita : j'imiitanatba M
26a jagati : yajati D vicaraon : sabhavan I H ar iccbaya mat priyil!l:
malatiql INO
b Midbava stbiim CDMNO; madhaviyam EGHIKL Har
d karoty : bhavaty K eva GN Har ; evam H
26.1 aye: kathaql E; ayatp. HI tad: bbavatv D ; om C anyatal;a : anyatra
GKLN Har; anyam H samcarimi: anusarami H ; anusarpcaramiti L ;
pracar.ami N
26.2 before parikriimati: iti GHI(L)
26.3 sikiitam CDEGHIL; sodvegaI!l KMNO idimim: om EN lIDIIlidl)pa (I):
26 ..4 Act IX 197

askandati / ha lata ha amba ha Bhagavati paritrayasva / pasya

Madha vasya avasthfun / 5
M AD HAV AH
dhik 2! I
kantir,
drSa1?- /
lawu namratvam iti pramathya
vibhakta vipine priya me //27/ /
ha priyo MaIati ! I
M AKA RAND AH
Suhrdi gut?a-nivase preyasi prfu?;a-nathe
katbam api saha:J>iI!lsu:::krlqana-prau4ha-.:sakhye /
dadhane
hata.: hrdaya vidirya. tvaf!1 dvidha na prayasi,] 1/28//
MADHAVAH
kha]u vedhaso jagati /
bhavatv tavat / ayam bhfldar);

unma.daiipa 0; H en. CDKMNO ; iva GHl ' om EL

26.4 ... Bbpqti : bbagavatil ' paritriyasva : trayasva D' paritrayata
L' paritrayadhvam afrer lrii as\'a: 2 EGH1' om CDKLt-1NO puya
... avasdti- : om N
26..5 Midltavasya CBGHILO ' miidbaw O· madhaviyam K' madhavastham M
26.6 dhik : biidlhik GH plUlida . 2 DE ; pramadapramada C' GHIKL
MO'
27a lodhra : rodhra GHI killlir: antim GH
b I ' dfSau GHI N
CDKMO ; gat« E - yalaJ:!l after GHIL
d GL Ip riyi me: priy.ismin GHI ' mamapriya L
27.1 hi: he H' om D after MiJLa,i: itimurcchati D Bhand's A
28b .pi DEGHL - iha. CKMO- iva I pi. : DEL Har kridana.:
lcrldini. [
c K '. mantar E
d vidirya: viSirya GlLM Ha!
28.1 after MadJra aIJ :asvasyotthaya D Bhand's A -
athava. E
uIlkiriCDE ' anukarahcett jagati Iter,e CDI, ;afterkhalu EHIMN; om GKO
vedlaaso : vidhi E after nirrndtJa : E
28.2 DE; prakaSam GHL; here KMNO; om Cl
here om KM 0 .. - : bbOOhara G
198 Miilatimiidhava 28.3

sattvan vijiiapayami-te maf!1 muhurtam avadhana-

/
sarv) kula-vadhur
ihasthair drsta
., va, viditam atba va )syah. kim abhavat? /
tasya4 suhrdo - yatra
pragalbha.-:vyaparas carati hrdi . mugdhas ca / /29/1
kastam bhoi:t
Kekabhir tirayati taJ?4avad
kantam antal?:pramodad abhisarati mada-bhranta-=-taras cakora4/
. kapola:rp. churayati rajasa kausumena
karn yace? yatra tatra dhruvam ana vasara -grasta ev) arthi-
bhaval:t //30//
ayarp. ca
Dantacchad)-aruI?-ima-raiijita-=-kanta:-dantam
unnamya cumbati priyaya4 /

:da4inla-=kanti vaktraIJ). //31 //

aye kart / katham, atr) apy
ana /
28 .3 E; N sattvsn : sarvan ILN te CDEGHILO·
om KMN CDEILO; m1 GH ; before anug,:h'!ontu KMN muhdrtam:
muhiirtamatro(va) E avadhina dinena : avadhanena GHLN
28.4 after anugrluJantu: GHKLMNO
29b atha : iha GL ; api H ; iva I
c vayo: yato I N
d N
29 .1 (2nd) M ; om N
30a tirayati : sthagayati N MO
b pramodad : pramadad I; pramodam 0 tins: caras E ; riHas N
c kapola E; kapolau L churayati: chagayati E
d katp M yatra: tatra N grasta: vyasta E
30.1 before ayarr' ca: anyato >valokya C.8 : apica CD
31 a kiintadantam: kiimadaqttam K ; dantakiintam M ; kantidaotam N
b unnamya: unnayya C ; unnamya 0
c kimpilyaka GHIKLMNO ; kampillyaka C ; kiimpillaka E HaT Kath · lost in D
pili : M
d pakiirur:-a: pakantara EM sphurita O?N diirul?8 K
31 .1 aye CD; H; EGIL; ayeayatpca KM NO priyatama skandha viSrinta
CDE,GHL ; om IKMNO CEGHL· D after
lKMNO, GHL Har (skandha:
skanda H N) after kar; : yavadupasarpami I katham:
om 0 atrilpi : apyatra G ; asyapyatra H; apyasya I
A A
32a Act IX i99

dantasya likhan
allladibhir vijayan /
nava:SallakI-kisalayair kalpayan
dhanyo paricaya-pragalbhyam abhyasyati/ /32/ /
aYal!l tu
N) antar vartayati dhvanatsu amandram
n) asannat blOti kavalan avarjitaiJ;t /
dana -jyfmi -dIn)
nuna.qJ. stamberamas tamyati / /33 //
alam anen) ayasitena I (anyato )vaIokya) sananda:sahacari-
samaka Ilf yam ana.;madhura;gambhIra aparo
)pi pratyagra:vikasita:kadamba.:
:amoda-bahala
5

32a C DEGH IN ?M ' KLO

c SaUdi CDEGHL Har ' saUakl H IKMNO lisaJa : kiSala CDE
d vaoya: matta L paricaya : paricaya E prigaJbbyam: prarambham MNO
32,1 before anyatovalokya' GHM . anyatovilokya KO. tu KMO,
CDEIL ' omGH
33a. na : om I amandram : anandam C
b na : ca O ' om I kualiD : kavalany I
c dina.: .asa.
33 .1 before alam : tad GHK after anena : mama K ' api L iyisitena : yacitena
EL ' aya. ona anyato ) a101cya CDIK ' anyataScavalokya H ' om EGLM 0
before sadaram HK. ' sanandam N before sahacari: grha K
gab [ . om I garjita: om
33 .3 )pi COEKM ' om GHIL 0 matt. : om I varga COMO ; yiitha EGHIK
L pila . : palakaJ? M
33.4 CD ; sampata EK Har ' GH[L ; MNO surabhi:
surabhir ; om M sit1la : nirgata baItala saD.Jgalita: om MN babal.
CHIKLO ' bula n ' bah.ula E' baJa. G sal!llJlita CDEIKO' GHL
medura.
33.5 DHIKLNO' C' oisyanda. EG Bar ; M
kardama. CDMN' O· E Telang;
GHL ' (at. beginning of fresh line) mitaJ?kar$J?sam
I; K ' karddamitakata:Qsam Bar IIddalita kamalini:
uddalinl D uddalita.: uddanda ; valita Har before kamalini : jaratka·
saya DiEHMNO ' GL Mar' I; K ; lost in C
vipra EKLMo. ; vi D .' pra GHlN Har ' ***pm C
33,6 pIU1!I8: om EK.MNO t ..... : bmaladala E ; om MN after kesara: sarasarasa
M om L . . . lUIIa ka.at.:tandala- 0;. om CiEMN.ilkuram
D'EHK.L 0' C ' aiLkuramanoharam 0' ailkuranavahat I I;
aniruraprakaram M
 200 M iiZatimiidhava 33.7

ana vara ta :pravrtta :kamanlya:-tala taI?-4a va -pracala: kart;la -jarjarita:

jala-taranga-vitata...;.niharam saro >vagahya
kriq.ati/ bhavatv tavad enam / mahabhaga naga-pate,
10 khalv asi-kanta->nuvrtti-caturyam apy asti
sapavadaqt tu /
LIl»-otkhata :mrI?-ala-kaI?-4a -kavala sarp.
-vasitasya pa yaso -sarp.kranta /
sekal:t sIkariI?-a kareI?-a punar
na snehad anarala...;.nala :nalinI -pattr):a tapatraI!1 dhrtam //34//
katham, vrajati I hanta, mii4ha ev> asmi
yo >smin vanecare vayasya:Makarand)-ocita.ql vyavaharami / ha
pnyavayasya
Dhig ucchvasita-vaisasam mama yad ittham ekakino,
dhig eva ramaJ?Iyataqt tvad-anubhava-bhavad I
tvaya saha na yas taya ca divaso> pi sa

33.7 kamaniya: after tiindava N tilla: om DM pracala : pracalita N; om GHK

here CDEIKLMO; before lala GHN jarjarita: jajerita G' jharjharita
N
33.8 beforejala: nava K; tarala M jala: om N tarailga: tanga G nibiram:
niharasam IL; nlhararpsam GH kurara: kusarasa I IlvagibYIl: vigahya
E
33.9 CDKMNO; viharati EGHIL tiv.d eoam ED; lost in C·
a GHLMN; 1; K; enama 0
33.1 0 kantarpprati E
33.11 tu CDKMNO; sapavadam EG ; L ; sava-
krandam HI
34a kat:J.,.a : om D cchedesu:
b DEO; CGHIKLMN puskara CDE
c DEGHIMNO; CKL
d oa: tat I anaraJa: anaviila I
34 .1 before karham: vilokya HI; nirupya Bhand's BO avadwral)ii C
vlrasa1!l MN mildha: mugdha E .
34.2 yo: yoyam(a) E ; yad(a) KO vanecare GHIL; vanacare DKM 0; vane CE
after care: nage M vayasya :. priya K ; om E Makaraodocitam: maka-
randavirahito E be/ore vyavahariimi: na CD vyanharimi CDGHKO;
viharami E ; vyaharami ILMN ha: he N
34.3 after vayasya: makaranda KM 0
35b dhig eva ... D Bhand's ABCE, (vina for rte) C, (tad for tvad) G: -
dhig eva ramaJ?iya vastv anubhavan vrtha I EH1KLMNO
dhhig eva HIL; virodha E; virodhi KN; MO anubbavin HKL;
anubhavad IMNO; anubhavarp E vrtbi EHIKLN' yatha MO
C 08 yas .aya ca: taya na sa 0 oa : before saha ] yas taya ca: yatiyotra
35d Act IX 201

dhig aparatra ya jayate// 35 //

MAKARANDAH
aye unmada-moh>-antarito }pi m3i:p prati kutas cid vyafijanat
prabuddha ev> asya sahaja:sneba- / tad asarp.nihitam eva
manyate I (pural.t sthitva parSva-cara eva te Makarando
mandabha.gyah !
MADHAVAH
priyavayasya ajasva mam / priyarp. 5
prati >smi / (iti miirchati)
AKARANDAH
jlviV-esvaram / (vilokya
sakarunam)
.. ha. kastam
.., . avirbbuta_:mat:parisvang)::,otkantha
. .. eva
tat kftam idanim asa:vyasanena / sarvatha.
n) asti me vayasya iti yukt.aJ;t / ha vayasya 10

EG ; ati. opi H ; yatiyatra L )'8 CIK(O ?D: yarp. M taya CKMN(O)

?D ; tatha I ca Dl . na K pi sa Gl L ' pi i CO· trapi E' trasa H;
sa i . saha db", _3ccha. tsa ? aql D
d oda : pramob.a 1 0 trsnik- m:
. trsnika
. .. I .a jayate:
KO ' kamanuse
35.] aye : om p':om E -l!lprat 'CDK O;mal!lprat
EL ; maI!lprat avika ataJ:t G· pra H ' pratya
.1 kot ' dd,: omL 'aiijuit: vyanjaka.t HIL
35.2 prabu : prntibuddha E saIIaj8 : sa Hi L after sa1flskiiraIJ:
I e"8: om E
35.3 HO: om L pirSva cara: par ' a E before Makarando: sa
MO
35.5 after Miidhol"aJ.l : samii] kya 0 be ore pri '0: ha K . 1 0 after l'ayasya:
makara nda 0 sambb- aya : a ler par4t'ajas\'a K . om M
r :. aja L a ler tu GH1KLM . 0; om CDE
35.6 • . ... lilokya nira: eva (two lines mi in!!; I
N samntto j, CDGHKLO; 0 pari'ranto mi I
,iti - ,cb t"i: om K 0 -iti CEGH [ ; in DL mUrcbati EGHIL; mur-
ohitab CD
35.7 E mla: }i a- is ·ars. : Ham L vilokya: om M
35.8 k am.: katham : tustam. katham eva : esa D
35.9 tat: om E krtam idin'im : atra kim K sarvathi
sarvathai EGHIL ; om .
35.10 : mena ti GH \' }'asya : po a a ya EKM iti
a yu 0: ltiyu ta. D rer : iti CD nyasya: priya-
vayasya K
202 Miilatfmiidhava 36c

Yat hrdayena nityam

abaddha:vepathu vina >pi nimitta-yogat 1
tvad-vya:pado gaI?ayata bhayam anvabhavi
tat sarvam ekapada eva mama prasfmtam 113611
sakhe ta ev> atikranta muhurtas, tatha--=vidham apl
bhavantam cetayamanam anubhutavan asmi 1 idanlq:l tu
Bharaq. kayo, vajra-klla4
sl1nya, I
kalo prati tvat-prayal).e
sant)--=alokaQ sarvato jIva-Iokaq. 1/37//
(vicintya) tat kirp nu khalu maya
bhavitavyam ity ato jlvami? / bhavatv asmad giri-sikharat Pata1a-
nipatya Madhavasya mara£?>-agresaro bhavami /
parikramya, nivrty) avalokya ca) bhoq.
Tad etad asit>:6tpala-.:dyuti sarlram-asminn abhun
mam) api dr4ha--=p14anair api na tfPtir almganaiq. 1
yad ullasita--=vismaya bata nipItavatyaq. pura

36c tvad vyapado: tvayyapado 1KM 0 ga gal)ayato G L bbayam:

svayam CMO
d pr.sintam: prasantal). M; N
36.1 sakhe ... atikranta: athavaparatoniskran ta sakbe: om L varam: om I
ta eva: tavanta eva IK api: eva E ; om M
36.2 before IQlhiividham KMN cetayaminam: cetanyayamanam D; cetya-
manam K anubbiitavan asmi: anubhiitatvat 0 asmi: aham G L tu:
tumama KNO; mama M
37a CGHILO ; DEMN ; K
b CM
c kalo: kamo M mam prati : samprati K praya':le : prahal)e CD
d sarvato: sampratatrl C ; sarvatha I
37.1 vicintya: om C tat: om astamaya : asta K may a here BGKM;
after bhavitavyam H ; after khalu L· om CEINO
37.2 ity: om H atojivami CDEMNO ; j'ivami IK ; om GHL bhavatv CDEHI;
tad NO; om GKLM asmad DNO; GHIL; tasmad KM ; om CE;
akasmad Bhand's 0 before giri: uttUliga GL giri: om M sikbarat:
sikhat H MNO
37.3 nipatya: om N Madhavasya : G HI L MN . caral!a K;
om CDEO suo: sari E before kirr'cit: iti EHI ; vicintya G kil!lcit
parikramya: om KMN
37.4 bhob om N
38a abhiin: K
b mama: may a D api CD1KN · ati EGHLMO Har piqitair 0
c vismaya bata: illeg in M vismaya: yjsmayo D · K· ?vibhrama M;
 38.1 Act IX 203

na va :praq.a ya-vibhram>-akulita: / / 38 / /
ascaryam ! tanav acarame vayasi tavato gUl?-a-samuhasya
katham iv> ,a bhot? I 's akhe Madhava
ca kalabhir indur amalo yaw ca Rahor
ca ghanaghano ca vayor javat /
nirvrttaS ca phalegrahir ·druma-vwo dagdhaS ca dav>-agnina-
gataS cajagat:a4 praptaSca m!1yor va:sarn//39//
tat >hamenam eVaI!1:gatam api vayasyam / arthitaS c>
anena sarp.praty ev) ayam / ha. vayasya vimala:
vidya-nidhe guq.a-guro Kamandakl·
Makarand>-anandana candra:mukha Madhava, ayam atra te janmany
pascim):avastha-pfarthito /
sakhe samprati muhurtam api Makarando jlvaO iti m» aivaI!l

visma lid 0 bata ni: atanu 0 bata : madhu '

38.1 ascaryam : asca r amasca ryam . han ta tanav a : eka t ra ?5 a?da D

ekasyi . CKL 0 ; ekatra" (D) I ; ekasyaAE ; etasyatp GHM tani" GHKLMNO ;
om CEI ac.arame GHIKLO(?D)· carame q?D)· acamare E · om MN va-
yasi: om M tanto : eta ato EM •.. gu J?asya sa-
E samObasya CD· samahara ya cett
38.2 iva: om M akbe idhava: vayasya madba a O ' om K
39a CDHI ' EGKLM 0 ca : s a(kalabhir) K
bviyor : atya M
c nirvrttaS :aiija la ' phalegrahir : phalegrabi D · phalegrhi C
d ca: (gato )hi G jagata:qt M uSam: mukham CDE
39.1 tat: ta at I · latah K : om M ) CD; ham E· tavad GHIKMO ; tad
L· ta vadenam e tam. p.: e'lal!lgat:a:tp. M ; om vayasyam :
priya ayasyam .0 ardtit.s : pra.rthitaS EGHL
39.2 eviyam : a am e a"I KM ayasya: priyavayasya 0 vimala: E
39.3 loidbe : idbe L eforeguJJO: ha G : maha H gu9a guro: KM ;
om E before Mo la tl: ha EKO svaYa:l!lvara M before
Kamandaki: ha K
39.4 (Makaranda nandana . .• akaranda I - 0 : om leaving makarandabahu) D
anandana C; anandi E: (a nandana GsicHsicIL: anaoda KMNO ; (a(orn) D)
caudra mu 11 CGHIL; mukhacandra E · candra KO ; mugdhacandra M
afTa: om te: om .0 janmany : om M
39.5 apaSci.ma . GHILO ; apaScimopi C ' .a(paScima) K· om EMN avastha : a vastham
o prirthito : pralhita 'ca E ; prapiro H
39.6 sakhe: om K prati: om E Makuudo, here CEGH[N ; before
muh rutam api DKLMO pUB : jlvit:aJi!ldharayati E in: om L maivam
IDaiYama? O· lost in M mai. CEHK :. G'
mava I ; mai a L 0
before stanza 4fJ: kutaf? MO

)7
 204 M iiJatlmluihava 40a

A janmanaq. saha :nivasi-taya may» aiva

matuq. payodhara-payo )pi nipiya /
tVaI!l pur:t4anka...;.mukha bandbutaya nirastam
eko pibas) ity ayuktam //40 //
vimucya parikramya ca) iyam adhastat Pataiavatl /
bhagavaty apage
Priyasya suh!do yatra, mama tatr> aiva /
bhiiyad-anyatra bhfiyo >pi bhiiyasam
(iti patitum icchati)
(pravisya)
SAUDAMANI
(sahasa varayitva) vatsa sahasena /
MAKARANDAH
(vilokya) amba! ka >si tvam? kim-artham tvaya.
5 ?/
SAUDAMANI
Makaranda4? /

40a nivasitaya: nivasataya D maya: sada K

b payo •.. nipiya: rasopisamoniPltaq I
c tat M nirastam CDEIKMNO ; visr¥.am GHL
d nivapa: nivasa L
40. 1 vimucya: vilokya E parikramya ca : om EKM 0 after Parala vall:
bhagavatl E
40.2 bhagavaty apage CDGKMNO ; bhagavatiapage H ; bhagavaIinamaste2 E'
bhagavangaurlpate I; bh<lvangaurlpate bhagavatyapage L
41 b mama tatraiva: ta traivamama EG H
c bhiiyad .. . bhiiyo pi: bhiiyada**Canyatra C anyatra DE ; GHKM
NO; amutra IL Har
41 .1 iti: om COl
41.3 Saudamani CDHl ; saudaminl EGKLMNO after Saudiimanf: 2 GK 53-
has:' here CDE; saha I ; after pravisya GHIKLMO before viiray itvii :
makarandarp. HIM varayitva: dhatayitva D ; om N vatsa 2 EGHIL ;
repeated 0; vatsa CDKM CDGHKMO ; E' IL ;
krlarn krtam. N
. '

41.4 viJokya: om MO amba kasi GHIK ' L ; ayekasi ; arhakasi O '

kasitvaf!l CD; E kim artham DEKM 0 ; kim CGHIL aham
tvaya: KM ; tvaya N
41.6 kil!J om M om K (M ); here om CDO
api KMO (1st) C·
man D; 0
41.7 Act IX 205

MAKARA DAH
muiica sa ev> asmi I
SAUDAMANI
vatsa yoginy asmi ca dharayami / (iti
darsayati)
MAKARA DAH
sakarUJ?am) arye api jivati Malati? / 10
SAuoAMA I
atha kim I api ca vatsa kim Madba vasya, yad
vyavasito )s) ity akam pi ta. )smi /
MAKARANDAH
arye tam pramugdham eva vairagyat parityajy) /
tad ehi /
15
M ADHAV AI:I
(asvasya) aye asvasita ev) ismi ken) api/ (vicintya) nun am asy)

41.7 muiica: muiicaL GH asmi : asmin C?M; E' after

mandabhagyaiJ: bhaga atikat arp E
41.8 Saudamani : om D ,'a a : om E iti O;lti DEGM' after mii/am H'
om CIKL
41.9 after miiliiJ?1: ca K: ltl H)
41.10 Makanmdabsoocb . asam. : om 0 soccb - CE . soccbva-
GHIKL ; occh asarp. MO ; D afTer akarunam:
ca arye: om CKM 0
41.1 1 atba ... ntsa: ji I athamadha aJ.1k a C- ji ati akal atba
I kva ( D athll kim: kathakim E api ca : om KM 0 kim
... akampita ) mi (D): tat kiikid vya a atTtimanye C aty : ity G
after ani¥.aJ?1: asturp I
41 .12 ity : tad M befor iikampitii: bhIta GL' bhit (a) I akampitil EGIKL'
a.'ailkitii. D ; kampita H ; ulkampita MO' akampiro
41.13 arye : bhaga ari CD ' om I tarn tad I; K' om 0
pramugdham : mugdham. CDK' pramugdhatamam] pariryajyii : pari*k .ya D
41.14 before lad ehi : sauda M ebi: eta ' M tvarita:rp. C· tvaritameva
D sambb- S8.J!lbba a L
41.15 before ,varjtam : iu GH ' om CDE]KLM 0 ....·aritarp om L
tvaricarp : tvaritataral'!l MO; om CD L) upasarpata4
41.16 .. '. before bhagamn paurastya pal'ana (41.20) KMNO
asvasya: sama' va ya El aye : om C is asita CDE; pratibodhita cett
eva: lva CEMO' om G asmj k -pi: kenasmi E vicintya : om EN
 206 MiiiatimluJhava 41.17

ayam abhinava prabhaiijanasy>

-.:asmad:::a vastho vyaparaJ? 1
MAKARANDAJ:l
punalf pratyapanna:cetano vayasyal?- 1
SAUDA.MANI
20 (vilokya) sarp.vadaty ubhayor sarIr)-akara4 1
MA.DHAVAH
bhagavan paurastya pavana
Bhramaya jaladan ambbo-.:garbhan, pramodaya catakan,
kalaya ketakan 1
jane labdhva vinodayati vyatham,
puna4 vidhaya kim Ihase? 1/42//
MAKARANDAH
niinam anen) akhila:jantu-jlvanena matariSvana krtam idaql
va yasyasya /
41.17 asyayam: om E abbinava : na va M 0 flDJ uta jala bindu G HIL ' JUnuta
jala CDE; jaladharakarya K ' jaladhara MN; jaladharadharasara 0
om MN prabbaiijanasya : pavanasya M
41. J8 ana 0 asmad : mad E
41.19 om D before vilokya GHMN ; om CDEIKLO pu-
om M pratyapanna: pra tyasanna E ; prati.pan na LM cetano:
cetanome E ; cetasoname I
41.20 vilokya: om EMN ubhayor : anayor KMN
41.21 pavana: vayo N
42a catakiin : kokilan COl
b kalaya: madaya EO kathorasu N
d ihase : ThasT I
42.1 nunam .. . vayasyasya COEK: -
su krtam akhila jantu jTvanena matarisvana / GH1LMNO
sUkffam GLMNO ; suvrttam HI before akhila : anena MNO(CDEK) ;
om GHIL akbila GHIL ; sakala MNO janlU : loka M jil'anena:
Jlvitena I matariSvana: matarisvanam G
akhila DEK; akila C jantu CE ; jana K ' om D matariSv8na CDE ; pa-
vanena K CDK; asya E
42.2 DK ; C ; Jlvitarp E vayasyasya CD ; madhavasya K;
om E
before
apica etekaitakadhulisatlrabhaju .
vyalolalaka vyajopa bh u ktananal) /
k imcon n id
vya i 1301) / MN
kaitaka M; ketaka dbiiJi M' siici N ; siina Bhand s N
42.3 AcllX 207

M AnHAYAH
deva vayo talha) -pi bhavantam. ev,a pIiirthaye j
Vikasa t:
saha vaha mama priya yataI! /
atha vii tad-aoga-parivasa-sitalaf!1
mayi cid arpaya, bhavan hi. me gatiJ? //43//

SAUDAMANI
1malv abhijiian}-arpar;tasy) avasaralfJ (Madhavasy)
aiijalau bakula-malam,
MADHAYAH
(vilokya, s) katham sa )smad-
viracita priyatama -stan}-6dvaha-durLalita...;.mfirtir ananga-mandir)- 5
angana-bakula-prasava-m.aJa.?'/ (nirupya) kaI! / tathii
hi sa ev) ayam

42.3 Madbll'fah: om bbagaan EM ,'syo : M ta-

thipi: tatbapitu [ - om CD M t!,TR EGH]KLMN - eVaJ!l CDEO
43a oikurumba: nikuramba K paq:l'suna OE - p3J:!:tsubhiq. 0
b \'aba mama : E . oayamama L· ca.baraOle MO
c atba"i : apiva HIKL tad : mad pari iisa: parivarta K; paribasa L ;
parirambha
d mayi: maya G arpa.y a: traya IKLO Har hb817in bit: MNO
43.1 a .•ital? M
43 .2susamihita samlhital? GL abhijro iinasya E; abhi-
A

jiiana K Midha asy, CD - ity E ' om GH rKLM 0

43.3 anjalao : om bakola CDEIM O· om GHKL CD.; arpayati
EM ; muiicati GAl KLO
43.4 vilokya CDE' sahasa.vilokya I; om GHK.LMO sikiita vismaya.
GI; CD ; sakiita isma 31!l E ' saicilta i H-
KM . L-
0 ,affer ca. M 0 'katbam: n· kiln K iyam.:
om sa CnGH KLO ; iHeg in M ; om El asmad viraciti: mat CD
43.5 priyatama: priyatama a G ; preyasyal;i 0 od ilia CDGHLMO; utsanga E;
unnaba IK Har · ud ahana aruuiga mandiTingana: ananganeviracitii I
aDailg,a : om
43.6 angana : anganabbo 0 E ; GL ; ankat;la M 0 bakuJa: bakulasya E;
balrulapiidapa M ' 0 prasa a DGHKL- ku uma IM 0; om CE before
nirupya: amyail 0 ; saJIl. ak. ' ; sasamyan M ofter niriipya: GHL;
om CDElKM 0 aft er Q'?ld haJ} : saevas at,Jt E I'athi hi : om NO
43.7 sa .•. here om E e\'ayam : evam D
208 M alatfmiidhava 44a
Mugdh> :endu:sundara:tadiya:mukh>-avaloka-
heta -viSpikhala :kutiihala-nihnava ya 1
)pi Lavailgikayas
tosam .
. . tailina' visama:grathito )pi 114411
utthaya) priye Malati,
(sakopam iva) aye mad-avastha-)nabhijfie
Prayant) iva sutanu, iva
jvalant> IV> ailgani, prasarati samantad iva 1
tvara-prastavo na khalu parihasasya
tad anand3J11 vitara, mayi ma bhiir
(sarvato sa'1irvedam) kuto )tra Malat!? 1 (upavisya
bakula-malam uddisya) ayi bakula-male
asil
priyasakhi yada
deh)-oddaha :vyathana-guravo 1
tasmin kale kuvalaya-=.drsas eva
abhavan
ya)
Ananda-misra 1
ga4h):anuraga-rasavanti taw tada ca 1

44c racano GHILO Har ; racito CDEKMN

d gratbito >pi: grathitaika E ; grathitova I ; grathitona K ; grathitovi MNO
44.1 N priye: M; N Milati
L; malatlf1l N ; malatimalati / 0 vilokya N
44.2 sakopam: N aye EGH?D ; ayi CIKLMO ; om N before mad :
priye GHL
45a sutanu: sudanu E; tadanu M
c parihiisasya: paritapasya N
d bhiir : bhiid KN
45 .1 >valokya E ; vilokya 0 )tra : om M upavisya CDEGHK' om
ILMNO
45.2 bakula ... uddisya(Omarg): om CD miJiim : llvalTm G uddisya : pra ti
MNO ayi ... om MNO priyi : om E
45.3 CDK ; El; yatastat GH ; tat L
46a yada : muhur D
b deboddaba: dahodvasa L ; ?dahoddllha M vyatbana CDEHIL ' vyasana
GKMNO unmiitba: unmada EIN
d tvaritam CDE abbavan: abhan E
47a ananda miSra: anandanani MNO
b tada tads: tathatathll N
47c Act IX 209

mama ca
smarami tava tani. gatagatani l147/1
(hrdaye nidhaya murchati)
MAKARA DAH
(upaspya vIjayan)sakhe samasvasihi 2 /
MADHAVAH
(asvasya) Makaranda na pasyasi. 1 kuto )pi sahas» aiva
Malafi-sneha-svahastasya tat kathal!l manyase?-kim etad
iti 1 5
MAKARANDAH
vayasya iyam a.rya yog)-esvan asya Malaty-abhijiianasy)
opanetri /
M A..DHAVAH
(vilokya, arye prasida kathaya-jivati
me priyatama Malafi? I
SAUDAMANl
vatsa nanu samasvasihi / jivati sa / 10

c CDEM; 1ulkanani [ 0 Har: GH Triv' lJ: neho>*tani K '

akarini L
d gatigatini : samagatani L ; gataniHloi M
47 .1 before iti EGH ; om CDI.KLM 0 hrdaye: brdi E nidbaya :
nida a G Immchati : miichitab E
47 .2 upas!1'ya :omL \'ijayan :Ji a anI 2CDEHIKL'repeatedMO;omGN
47 .3 iSvasya : ama'vas a E ; om IK akaranda GHILNO' vayasyamakaranda
CD ' sakhe E ' aya a KM kutopi.: om H sabasain: om EO
47.4 MiJatiso.eha s 'abastasya malati abastasya 0 ; malatisvabasta KN; ma-
latisnebasarvasvahasta I; malatisnehasyahasta GHL;
hatastasya CD ; malatl.snehasam.vacianasya E;
no Bhand s 0 libUljI: labhat:a.1? D bdaall!l --i-e: kathayatvama-
dy.ame H CDlKNO; E .; katbayantu G; LM
Idm etatl CDEKLMNO· mtaetad GH; (manyase)/ manyasetad I
47.6 vayasya : sakhel : vaya yamadha a 0 ; om EMN yogeSvaii CDGHKO;
yogIS art EILM . asya : om E .
47.7 upaaetri :¥upaoctri C' netii E
47 .8 ,'ilokya : om KM sakautukam L aiijaliI!l-
baddhva. KMO prasida: praslda2 OK kadaya:. KM; before
priy atama M be/orej7vali: api E ' 10
47.9 me : before jiVQli CD priyatami: pral?eSvarl 0 MiJatl CDE; om cett
47.10 vatu : bhadra GHL nuu CDGL; j'ivati E' om HIKMNO samiS-
 210 Maiatimiu:lhava 47.11

MADHAV A;MAKARANDAU
(samucchvasya) arye yady tat kathaya sarvatah ka esa
vrt:Hinta iti /
SAUDAMANI
pura kila Karal»-ayatane Malafim upaharann
Madhavena /
MADHAVAH
15 (savegam) arye virama 2-vijiiato
M AKA RAND AH
sakhe ka iva? /
MADHAVAH
sakhe kim anyat? - sakama eti /
MAKARANDAH
arye apy evam? /
SAunAMANl
evarp. yatha viditaf!l vatsena /
MAKARANDAH
20 bhoh kastam!

vasihi : samasvasihi2 I; repeated MO j.uti: 0 ; here om E

sa: om N CDGIKO ; EHLM ; before so E
47 .11 samucchvasya DEGHLO ; C ; ucchvasya I; samasvasya KN;
lost in M arye : om L yady tat: om N tat EGHIO ; om CDKL
M (N) om HI ka : sa D ; katham I afcer N
47.12 iti : om LM
47 .13 before puro: asti NO kila EGHL ; om CDIKMNO .MalatUn upabarano:
om NO ups: a KM after hnran: eva L ; ava G
after po'}ir K
47.14 ko)pi N EIKL ; kapala CDMO ; karavala GH .Mi-
dbavcna: om 0 •.. sivegam : lost in M
47.15 savegam : om E virama 2 EH]; viramavirama CGMNO ; viramati?yo D;
virama KL vijiiito DIL ; (after C; ji'iato EGHKMNO
after vijfioto: EGHIKL
47. 16 ka iva ... sakhe : om D ka : sa E.
47.17 om N sakbe: om IK(D) sakimi : sakopa I iti.: om K.N
47. 18 om N after el/am : etat I
47.19 yatha: yatha EM; GH H
47.20 bboh• kastam
.0 CDEIL; kastambhoh
... . .. KM ; kastambhohkastam
•• . . .0 • GHO
48a Act IX 211

Kumud)-akarena Sarad-indu -candrika

yaili ya /
tad astu-katamas tv vidhir
yad ilila:megha-vitatir vyayfiyujat? //48 //
MADHAVAH
ha priye Malati, atibibhatsam .a panna )si /
Katham iva tada )bbavas tva.J:!l kamala.-:mukhi
-grasta l
i
utpata :dhUma lekh>-akriint» eva kala SaSadharasya? //49 //
bhagavati
eva hi tad ada.r a-lalanIyam
ma. putanatvam. sivatatir edhi I
naisargiki kusumasya siddba
murdhni sthitir na a vat.a<Ianani / J50 / /
SAUDAMA I
vatsa alam avegena /
asau sa l
1» tatra yadi tat-paripanthini //51 //
UBHAU
(praJ?-amya) atiprasannam arya-padaiJ? / tat kathaya ka. punas

48b gu: . iya : IM

d ritatirtyay- .j 1t : vitatimap M ¥itatir EGHKL ; vi?hutir C; vitat'ir 0;
I; vitatim O() vy: ny CD; tv on
48.1 katham GH' om ati: om 01 apanna : E
49a b · i a: kathamapi CDE Har ta - : lathe.
c ikri :le a : aklanleva L' ahante ]
d sm.dhar:asya : SaSaiLbsya D
49.1 bIlaguati : bhavati GO
50a lad icbl'a: tadapravi C ' tadatava M lilani)'UD.: C
b i : ma.:p G i ElK.LM Q . putana COGH upagil:t : E;
adhigas 1 Sivat:itir Har.l. ' i atitir: si"9ata vir I
edbi : eva CD
c aaisugiki : naisarginl - : iddhir C
d _ air CD' musalair KMO' kusumair 1: EGRL a atadaDiai:
abhitaditani
50.1 vatsa : om C .0 ala . : alamalam
5 t b ati: iti GH iva. GHM
eft :
C lUll: ma . : abhavi.yad D
51.1 - i: madhavamakarandau 0 an : yadi KO:. iliyadi tat : tathapi CD;
212 Mlilatfmiidhava 51.2

tvam asmakam /
SAUDAMANI
jfiasyathaq. khalv etat / (utthaya) iyam idanlm aham
Guru-carya;tapas;tantra;mantra;yog>-abhiyoga-jam /
imam siddhim atanomi sivaya //52 //
(iti sa_Madhava
1fAKARANDAH
ascaryam!
Vyatikara iva bhlmas tamaso vaidyutas ca
udbhuya /
(vilokya, sabhayam)
katham, iha na vayasyas?-tat kiro etat?
(vicintya) kim anyat? -
prabhavati hi mahimna svena yog>-esvar» iyam //53 //
(sa vitarkam) kim a yam artho >nartha? iti saI!1pramugdho )smi /
apl ca-
Astoka :vismayam :vrttam
nah /

om N kathaya ... tvam: kathayam C ; kathayakatbam E kathaya : katha

o punas: om K(CE)
51.2 tvam : om D(CE) after t vam: iyarn M eka C DIKM 0 ; aryya E · evam-
vidha G . H· akararya L after iti 0 "
51.3 I ; jilasyasi / CD; jiiasyat,e EMO ; jnasyatha GHKN ; jfiasyataq. L
khalv etat : svalpenaitat G ; kaJena N uttbiiya : om EL idinim: beiore
iyam I; after aham L
52a carya: caryas C
b mantra yoga: mantrasiddhy MN
c GHIKO ; L; CE Har ; MN
siddhim: vidyarn LMN
52. t iti: om CILMN samadbavii : samadhava DI st; sasamadhava Dcorr
52.2 ascaryam CDGIKN ; ascaryam2 EL ; repeated HMO
53b .1 vilokya : om H sabhayam : savisrnayam E; om H
53c vayasyas: vayasya DI etat : etad(vi) CIM kim aoyat : om M
kim anyat: om M
d yogeSvari DGHO ; yogHvari CEIKLMN
53 .1 before kim : tat El kim : katham EN after 'va D
mugdho GHIL ; saq1mugdho CD· pramugdbo E· amprati mu4ho KMNO
53.2 api ca: om N
54a apasmrta: IMO ; upa IDrta KN vrttam : bhiitam E
b jarjaraf!1 naJ:l : ja rjha
54c Act IX 213

eka - -;
ananda;soka-sabaJa- tvam upaiti oetaq. //54 //
tad atra kantara-gahane sab) asmad-vargeJ?-a Bhaga-
vafim tasya. vrttantam kathayami /
(it]
// navamo >ilka1?- //

ceka: esa M pnunobam : pra bodham M

d upaiti : upeti M
54_1 tad. atra : tatra 0 saha : sahasa ith saba after argeJ:,la)
C ' vimanasam 0- K ; pr.ati L
54.2 CEGHIL ; upet a D- anu rtya KO ; upa ftya M ; anu rtya
EHIL ' tayor G ; ,after enaf?1 K:. om. CDM 0 en3J1:l G ; eVaJ!l 0;
idal!lgatva C kathayami : ni edayiimi CE; kathayiim(eti) G
54.3 iti!: Iti CHKL (G niskrintab EGHIO; niskrantah sarvve C ; niskrantAh
sarve DM . ni .k:riintal;l l KL- ' . "
54.4 bejor,e nallamo >iIk.alJ: unmattamadna oniima EL; itimalat an G;
srl(iti O)malatImadha e maJaty.a n HO ; maJafimadhave K; om
CDIM after >nkalJ.: I
 ACT X

pravisati Kamandaki Madayantika Lavatigika ca)

KAMANDAKI
ha vatse Malati kv> asi ?-dehi
me prativacanam /
A pratimuhurta
tava samprati tani tani /
caru;madhuraJ?i ca
dahanti ca vidarayanti//l//
api ca putri
virajat: \
katipaya:komala /
smarami
skhalad ;asamaiijasa ;mugdhajalpitaJ!1 te //2//
ITARE
ha piasahi suppasanna:muha:anda-sundari kabim ko va
sarirassa de jhatti

0.1 Madayantikii: after Lavangikii GHL

0.2 before hii: sakaruJ;lam GHKL ; sakaruJ;lasram I; Bhand's
ABEO; om CDEMNO ha: om I mad 0; mada-
C; mada(then a caret D; EHIKLM;
madaIarpkarakariDi GN kvisi: kvapi G
0.3 prativacanam: priyavacanam DMN
la a ... IK Har pratilDllllirta:
prabhrtimugdha E; N mobiirta GHLMO(EN);

c cam: cati M
CD(IK)
ca samsmrtini:
. .
1.1 before api ca: akiise r Bhand's AE
2a rudita: rue ita N
susamskrtani
. . .
potri: om E
N

b CDEGHIN; KLMO
d mugdha: mafiju 0
2.1 itare: GEN; madayantikalavangike HI after itare: sasramakiSe HI;
om CDEGKLMNO hi : om K Har Kath ch piasah.i: sahi K; om 0
supasaryrya IN moba anda: muhacanda HO -si CDEJI{M
NO; gadasi GHL vii: om K
2.2 before sirlsa: sarirassa C sirisa kusuma sukUIDirBSSa: om KMNO kIn--
om L(KMNO) sukumirassa CHIL; sukumara DG; lrusumassa E __
rirassa DEGHIL; sarlraassa K; MNo.; here om C de CDGH
2.3 Act X 215

ekkalliae / ha maha bhaa Mahava uvatthid>;

atthamida-.:mahiisavo de jiva-Ioo saI!lvutto /
KAMANDAKI
ha vatsau 5
Abhinava:raga;raso
Lavali;Llvailgayor iva niyati :maha:vatyaya //3//
LAVANGIKA.
(savegam) hadasa vaiiamaa savvaha >si hiaa / (iti
hrdayamahatya patati)
MADA YANTIKA
sahi Lavangie. pi da va samassasa I
LAVANGIKA.
made karomi? va

iEGL; divvaduvvir!aa H· devaduvvit;laa I ; devvaduvviliisa MO;

devadurvinaya B ar ch
2.3 pa.l?atnO L ekkaDiie CD KL . ekalliae E· ekkalioe G ; ekkaliae HI;
eUaii N; elliliaeelliil?ie M· _ekka?iae 0 E; uvagado
K:. M; uvaado hi: om Cl Har ch uva •. .• mabiisa.vo: udiattha-
miahahiisa vo N lo va: ua E tthida CGHKL· tthia DO ; Uhida E ; ttida I;
tthida M
2.4 attbamida : attamida H· atthamia O( . atthamaa M de : om K jiva
CDIKMO; jia EGHL loo: loa M
2.5 after Kamandakf: GUlL ; om CDEKMNO vatsau: vatse
CG; vatsaIniilatlmiidbavau M
3a om G
d aiyati : viyali E CEM .· vib.itaJ? DJ· GHKLNO
3.1sivegam CEIKNO· · sagevam D; sod egam. GHLM hadasa: haa.sa C ;
hadasa vajjamaha MN after I'ajjamaa: hiaa EKLMNO;
om CD · here om GH) savvabi :savvadha CR.· om N nisamso )si:
I}asasahi N o· E hiaa I iti: om
CD hin here Bhand s ABCE · hadahidaa G ; hadahiaa H· siaa J; (om CD);
here om EKLMNO iCi: om EI(CD)
3.3 after Madayanti/cQ: sasram GHIK sahi : om KMNO after Lavangie:
lava mada E CDEGKL O · kkhar:ta HIM metta-
DGH ; mettam CEM . mattakam. I · mettaaJ:!l KL · O· matrakam
Har Cal ch ; miitram Har Kath ch pi CDHIKO· vi M · om EGLN sa-
massasa : samiissasa H · samassassa
3.4 ide EO ; mae CD· madaantie KM·sahi GHIL (sakhi Rar cb) kim:
nakim
. . M k.aromi CEGIKM O · karemi DHL dadba
"
CDHK· didha
EGILMNO CDHIK (pratibaddha Har ch); E;
 216 Malatlmadhava 3.5

5 na mam pariccaadi I
KAMANDAKI
vatse Malati prabhrti vallabha te Lavailgika I tat kim
n) anukampase? I hi
UjjavaJ> :alokaya snigdha tvaya tyakta na rajate /
malimasa-:mukhi vartih. pradipa -sikha ya yatha Ii41/
katham. ca kalyani, . . parityajasi? I nanv akarune
.Kamandaldm ..
aiva te pragmjikrtany angani j
Stanya-tyagat prabhrti sumukhl danta-pancalik» eva
krlqa-yogaf!1 tad anu vinayarp. prapita vardhita ca I
gUI?-avati vare sthapita tvarp. may» aiva
sneho matul:t ten a yuktas tav) apt I15//
(savaiklavyam) candra-.:mukhi samprati nirasa )smi /
Akarana:smera-manohar) :ananah
-.:gaura -: /
tav) aIika-sayi parivrtta-.:bhagyaya
maya na tanayaq.

9ibaddha G; vaJ?ibaddha L ; 0; ?M?N

... pariccaadi: i N va: DEG [K ; vva C ; via HL- om
MO(N)
3.5 jlviarp. IM I?aa I ; after ma'?1 K ma D ?K· after paricca-
adi M HaT ch) ccaadi: vvaadi G· ccajai Hsic ; ccaai K MO
3.6 Malati: om E EN ; ajanma D vallabbi :
vallabhatama K; vallabhatara MNO
3.7 after kim: enlim GHL ; etam K ; om CDEIM 0 ujjibiina : (kim)a N va-
varakintfll N
4b tvaya .. . rajate: sobhatenatvayavina K rajate: sobhate E(K)
c mukhi: mukha D ; vat! I
4.1 before katha'r/: tat KMN ca: om E kaiyal)ini EK pari:
api J naov: nanj G ; om N
4.2 civara: sar"ira H; clvaraiicala ?M eva: iva C ; (I)a)eva J angaoi : angakani
El
5a tyagat: nyasat CMO Har sumukhi: sumukhe G paiicalika CDEH Har ;
pai'icalika GIKLMNO iva : ii.di MO · N
c C sthapita: yojitii I ; prapita
d CD ; rnayisamadhikatf cett mayi : mama K teoa: (9)
sneha C yuktas tavapi: vihantum M tavapi : tathapi KHaT·
tavasi N
5.1 before candramukhi: ha KMNO caodra mukhi : afrer samprali M
6a smera: sneha GO ; "ahvana Har v.I.
c sayi: gam"i C
d tanaya CKLN
6.1 Act X 217

LAVA GIKA
Bhaavadi paslda, ahamhi samatthii
t:a imado giri-kandarado I?'ivvucia
tadha a me Bhaavadi asisa£!l pasadikaredu jeq.a jammantare vi dava
I
KAMA DAK}
nanu Lavaogike. Kamandakya )pi na khalv ata4 param. vatsa- 5
viyogena jivitavyam samancci c> ayam avayol;t/ ca
kannat:taI!l bhecUid yadi na syan, na nama tat /
tu parityage p)-6paSam phalam 1/7//
LAVA GIKA.
jadha tumhe edha j
6.1 Lal'8ngika : mada Bllaal'8di: ajter pasida I paslda: ppaE'!da E ajler
pasfda: 2 EL Qahambi samattha C ' D' EO ;
asamatthamhi G H1 ; asamattamhi l ' r:tasukkamhi K ; r:tissahahmi M ; asahaf!1hi
; nasahiismi Har ch b"fore saI:!lvutta E
PaaIll 0 ji\ridm C:. jlvaduvvahaQ.e DE; jividuvvaha1].asahase1].a HI
(jivitodvaltanasaha ena Har Cal ch) (..ii adu) G (jiviu) L' K;
M' JlvidaI!lpahIir:te ; ji iuvvahar:te 0; J'ivitoe.v abanenasahasena
Har Kath ch
,6.2 la CDEG ; H1KM (sahamHarch) ' taharp L ; taahamp 0 imido:
imao J giri hod ado: om M kaodarido CDE (kandarat Har Kath cb)'
iharado G HL ; kandharao J. varado K (varat Har Ca! ch); pavvatado N ;
ppapat.ado 0 attsr;J8J:!l: KM '0 dhu-:tia : dhl1nia EGKM
J;UVYUda : ea E; HM ; I ' t;tavvad a bbavissam: havis-
sam. K ' hoissam.
6.3 tadhi ... pekkhissam: om 0 before tatiJJa: la GKLM tadhR. EHI'
tatha CHar Katbch: taba DGL ; taM KM: tattaya Har Cal cbame I; ca me
C; me aD; mama E; me GKL Har Ca) cb · a H . M' asmakam Hat Kath
cb iisisaJ:!l CDGH1KL ; aSI a E ; Mpasadi CDHI (prasadi
Har Katb ch)' pasadciql E · om GKLM Har Ca1 ch jadha E vi:
)pi E ; dbi I' vvi K di,'a CDGH] KL · om. E ' after piasahi1!Z M
6.4sahim : salt! 1
6.5 Kimandali .... "edha (7.1 om M 0
1
: nanu : om E Kip
mandakya GHIKL - kamaodalcy (a) CDE Da : om I kbab CDEl; om
GHKL ·,s tsi : la a E
6.6 viyogena : viyoge CD ji ,itavyam GHIKL· Jlvati CE; J'ivanti D samanaS
... ivayof:! : om 1 saminas CEGHL: sama' K ?D yog.al;t CDGHKL'
E' egalf Bhand s AE ki. ca : mamapikhaJu HI' om E
7a ] karmal)o CD
b yadi na yit GHlKL; ii.1I: C ; ehinas ad E' (d D na
nama tat 1: *flayasat? D: E' GHL' nasos-
KI Bhand ' G
d L
7.1 jadhi adha C- jaha DGH ; jabii K ina't'edha:
. anaha
. 0 before ut-
 218 Miiiatimiulhava 7.2
KAMANDAKI
sadayam) vatse Madayantike I
MADAYANTIKA
at?-avedha? / aggesan hohi tti avahida >mhiJ
LAVANGIKA
sahi pasTda, virama etto / ma khu
5 visumaresi /
MADA YANTIKA
(sakopam iva) avehi -I?a )mhi de vasaJ!lvada /
KAMANDAKI
hanta varakya /
MADA Y ANTIKA.
(svagatam) I?aha Maaranda I?amo 2 de I
LAVANGIKA.
bhaavadi Kamandal aam jjeva Madhumadi-sotta-samdania:
I • . _

ity EL CGHIL ; DEK; prapadatmanamksep.

N; 0; here
om (cf. following) M
7.2 Madayantikiim sadayam D ; E ; mada-
Cl ; GHKLNO;
M vatse: om N
7.3 om EM CEGHIKL; 00 ; M; N
aggesari bohi: aggohi G, aggeho H (but agresarlhhava in chaya of both) 81-
gesari : aggesaro I bobi CDEKL; ho I; hohimi M ; hommi N; hodu 0
avabidamhi E ; bhavidamhi CD ; taavahidamhi GL ; avahidamhi HJKMNO
(avahitasmi Har ch)
7.4 sahi: om K pasada : pas'ida 2 L mama : viramavirama K; virama2 E
etto CGKLMNO ; eWi. 0 ; eWido E; ido I ; lost in H ; ita (atmavyapapidanit)
Hchaya CDI ; E; GHKLMO; atta N (iitma
Har ch) vahido DMO ; vadhado CE ; vavadal?ado GHKI (vyapadanat Har
cb); I; ppahariido N mi khD CD; makkhu E; ma GHK.LM
Har ch ; ?mii I ; N; maa 0 eqa.J!l K; IDaJ!l N
7.S visumaresi : visumarehi MO ; sumarehi N
7.6 Madayantikil ... patitum iccbanti (7.12): immediately after stanza 8 M sa-
kopam: N iva: om H avebi: apehi M l?aamhi GHL
vasa M vadi CDEGL ; gada HIKMN ; ga.a 0
7.7 banta : after niscitarr I ; om E before niseitam: atmavadhe GHK ; (a)ltma-
vadho L vyavasilaJ!l KMNO varikyi : I
7.8 niha
. DHIKMNO ; nadha
. CEGL .
D8DlO 1 de CD ; namo de 2 K;. namodena-
' .
mode G ; IMNO (namaste Har ch) ; EHL
7.9 bhaavadi:bhaavaiO KimaodaiCDE ; omcett •• jjey.
7.10 Act X 219

pavitti:mehalo mahlhara-vidanko / 10
KAMA DAK]
krtam idanIm prastuV-antarayeJ?a /
SARVAH
(patitum icchanti)
(NEPA THY E)
ascaryam ascaryam !
Vyatikara iva bhimas tamaso vaidyutas ca
udbhuya /
KAMA DAKI
(viJokya,
katham, iha mama vatsas? - tat kim etat?
(pravisya)
MAKARANDAH
kim anyat?-
prabhavati hi mahimna svena yog)-esvar» iyam //8//
(NEPATHYE)
jana-saf!1 m ardo vartate!
MaJaty-apayam adhigamya virakta
l

DE ; yyeva Cl ; jevva GHKL ' levva M 0 .Madhumadi: mahumadi KMNO -

sotta : sotah H ; soda.s (s)J CDMN; saQldanida EGHIKL; sarppaa
O ' sandarita Har ch
7. 10 mahibara DEHKL ' mahlara elM; mahihara O ' somasibara N ; mahidhara 0
vilanko E.; l MO ' vi9anto
7. ]] k:.!tam: alam 0 idUi'!l : i<ia.rp I
7.13 iScaryam iScaryam CDMO ' iiScaryam 2 GHIL ; ascaryam EKN
8b upahata : upahita D udbbiita HIM
8b.! Kimandaki : om. I wolfa: sahasa.vilokya M . om K
CDGHO ; E' K 11; sadbhiitabarsam
L;
8c iha : i a ] M Im ama : nanu M va&sas: atsau 0
d yogeSvui DGHO ' yoglSvarl CEIKLM .
8.1 nepatbye : pu.narnepathye HM CO , kat ham ceU ati: ihaE; nu
M' om samvu C' vad<ili. MO' vimardaQ. N vartate:
K.M ; O'
9a adhigamya : adigatya G ' a agamya. ' . Hl ; cittaQ. K
b COl ; H .' 'cajivite!?u EGL.; cajivileca KMNO
220 Miilatfmiidhava 9c

niscitya vahni-patanaya
abhyeti Bhiirivasur ity adhuna //9//
MADAY ANTIKA.;LAV A NGIKE
jhatti jhatti
KAMANDAKI ;MAKARANDAU
- ha dhik / ascaryam 2!
Kim ayam asi-patra;candana::::rasa::::cchap>::::asara-yugapad:
/
anala-sphulinga-kalila4 kim ayam anabhr"4 // 10//
Sarpjlvan) /
adya vidhI ravi;sasadhara-mayiikha-saf!lvalanam anukurute / / 11 //
(NEPATHYE)
ha tada virama 2! l1sua )mhi de vaaJ?a /
d aabyeti: abhetya ,M hatasmal:t DLN; hatosmi EG
9, 1 Madayantikit Lavailgike DGHLNO ; mada / lavangike CEK ; mada /l sahi
lavangie 1; madayantilrn / lavailgie M beforejhatti: ahmahe GL .; ammahe H ;
N jbatti : jhagi H ; om 1 Miladi: malati CD Mibavinam:
mlidhavanam CEIK ... ihatti : E ; das-
sanobbhudaradhatti I mabiisao CD; budao G ; bbhudao HKLMNO (abhy-
udayal:t Har ch) jbatti (Gsie): jhagiti H H'
ahidamca L
9.2 (Kimandakl Ma)karandau:folio 54 of F here begins after Makarandau:
khedau J; K om KMN hi dbik CDFGH
IL; EMN; om KO i.Scaryam 2 DFGHL ; ascaryam CEIMN;
ascaryam 0; om K
lOa ayam : idam CF; om M
b ccbati: cchato E bilrs: asarayor IM
c anala: dahana H CDFKNO; kalitaf.1 EGI Har ; kavalitaf.1 H '
IM
d ayam: idam IM anabhra IL' anabhraJ:!l M
IM
lla before stanza 11: apiea 0 C; om K
b before iiloka : imam K M
e vidbi ravi C?Flst ; vidh'ira (Sani in marg) vi D ; vidhirdana E; vidhirasani GHI
KMNO Feorr Har ; vidhirasami L
d saIpvalam H ; Manu: avi N; om M
11.1 virama 2 CDEFGHIKL.; repeated MO Bar cb; virama N before iisuamhi:
damsan GHILFcorr (darSan Har ch) ; om CDEKMNO usuambi CFGIKLO ;
D; E' (I?)osuamhi H; usiamhi M' ausasudamhi N ;
Otsukasmi Har ch de: om K kaaaala MNO ; va-
anakamalassa CF, GHIL; D;
m'alassa E: K before pasida: ta I; tat Hch
11.2 Act X 221

paslda maI!1 / mama karaf:lado samattha:Loalo)::

antarala-vikkhambha :mailgaia-::padiva :
pariccaasi :/ mae ut;la tumhe
tti asi / 5
KAMANDAKI
ha vatse !
Janm>-antarad iva katham api labdha )si yavad) ayam

uparaga iva Sasi-kalam vikalayitum upasthito )narthal). 1112//

ITARE
ha piasahi . /
pravisatimugdham,. dharayan
MADHAVAH
kastam bboh. kastam.!
. .• ,

pravasaI!l katham apy atjtya

11 .2 pasida : pasldalEK DKMNO afterkadlram:
ca EGLMNO ' a H - om CDFIK kira':lido GHKLO ' karaqa CF ;
El ; 0 samattlaa CDEGILMNO ; samatta FHK
loiIolUltnila.: Loao.tarala 0 - loalanura E ; loaotarala G ; loaloa M
11.3 vikkbamt)ba CDFHM 0 - GL - vikkhamba I ; vikkbada Bhand's
AD ' om EK I.limmala •.. Ibbiida'l!J : nimmalakamangalapa"ihii<iaJ:!:l N ek-
bUa E ' ( l)ekkal.la F ; (l)ekkatta C ; kella D ; (l)ekka GLMO ' kuleka H ; kulaika
I Har cb' kulekka K ailgala : om K pa CDF ; ppa cett diva : di H;
dipa M - om I
11.4 attao.am GHMNO lajjie C: agaI!idalajja D;
EGHIKLF corr (anaryaya Rar ch) ; alaijae NO; M ; FLst illeg kkosi:
kkosae KN
11.5 tti : ti GL' vi I ' om K.MN isi: pari.<:"Qtta K?l'l' parissabbhavida
M samblliYidaIl!lEFGHL · sambnavida(si) D ; sambhavida
I isi CFHW ' (a)si D - asI G - (a:}igi I' om E(KMN); H here ends
12a jaoma : janana M kathaJ!l . om E
b api: iva K yiyad : tavad K I upariga iva SaSikalil!J: /aparaii-
paragaSc3indrakalamiva I
d vikalayitum DEFNO - vikalayatum C ; va)k.alayitum I · kavalayitum GKLM Har
upasthito : utthito I
12.1 itare CIKMO' itam D - EGL ' om . lost in F ' lava Har hi piasalti :
om
12.2 CDGILM 0 - EFK
12.3 (lDd) FLMO ' 2 CEGt( · om DJ k"l!I
CF ; om
13a CDF ' E
 222 Malatimadhava l3b

yata anyath» aiva /

ko nama pak)-abhimukhasya jantur
dvaraJ?i daivasya pidha turn /1 13//
MAKARANDAH
sakhe, atba sa yogirii ha?
MADHAVAH
Sri:parvatad ih) satvaram tay» aiva saha I
na pasyami // 14/1
KAMANDAKI
Mababhage, paritrayasva - kim-artham antarhita
)si? I
LAV ANGIKA;MADAY ANTIKE
sahi Maladi, bhaI?-ami sahi Maladi tti / (sotkampam)
Bhaavadi, parittaahi 2! / se I
5 ha amacca ha piasahi, duve vi tumhe paroppar>-avasaJ?assa
ja.da/
b yiti: jata E
c jaDtur ELMNO Jag ; jantor CDFGIK Har
d daivasya : devasya I
13 .1 before sakhe: sahasopasrtyamadhavaf!lprati GILFmarg; sahasopasftya K ;
om CDEMNOF l st sakbe: sakhemadhava E ; vyasya M ; om KN O atha:
om M si yogini kva: sakvayoginl K ; kvasayoginl M ; tvasauyoginl N
kvasayogesvan 0
14a iha ... sUa : M ; ihagatant3.manuyato)smi
N satvaram apatam E ; iha.h3J1lsutvaramupagatam / I ;
K; CD ; F con ;
ihabhavadambarapiitas G ; ihiibhavadavapatas L ; ihavamanvayatau 0 ; Fist
iIleg
c vacanad: vacananiid L ; vacana- N
d antaritaf!l E ; antaraf!l IN oa: E
14.l Kimandakj Makarandau : N before Mahiibhiige: sapral).ayamakiiSe
GKL; om CDEFIMNO 1; om E paritriyasva: asvasya
K pari CDFIMNO ; om EG(K)L after triiyasva : 2 E om DE
kim artbam: kim I ; kimity MNO
14.3 Lavailgiki .MadayaDtike: lava I madayantike Cl; mada 11 lavarigie K ; ma-
dayantikaIavarigike MNO sabi .Miladi : sahimalai NO ; om EK
G bhaq.asi L ; bhariamo O?N sabi : om EGN .MiJadi :
malai NO after tli: sahimaladi E
14.4 ttiibi DO; ttaasu CF ; ttiihi EGL ; ttaadha I; ttaehi K ; ttaadu M ; ttaahi N·
trayasva Har ch :1 DEIL?K; om CGMNO Har ch ein : CF
sasa K ; l).issasa M ; om N COGI ; L;
EKMNO; ilIeg in F ; nisphuram HaT ch
14.5 amacea: amba N duve: duvve C; duva I paroppara CFGIKL ; paropara
14.7 Act X 223

KAMANDAKJ
ha vatse Maiati! /
MAD HAVAH
ha priye! /
MAKARANDAH
hapriyasakhi! I
SARVE
(moham upagamya punal). [abhante) 10
KAMANDAKl
tat km etat? / iv)imbudad ambu-nivaha4
pariskhalann asman I
MADHAVAH
(socchvasam) aye pratyasanna--=.cetana Malafi / tatha by
Bhavati
api ca nija:prakrti-sthitam /
tad anu murccha.-cchedat virajate
parigatam iva prarambhe) hna4 sri ya sarasrruham /11 5//

D' parappara EM O ' paraspara Har ch kiranam: kalanam MN

14.6 jidi: jata. G ' jadal!l K ; jaii MO
14.7 ba: 'Om I vatse MiJati (FcoIT): vatsamadhava C?Flst after Ma/ati:
hamadhava E
14.8 ba priye .. .. sakN.: hapri asakbi L ; hapriyasakhyah / hapiasahi N priye :
priyemalati K
14.9 Mabrandat;.: itare 0 ; ('Om L priyasakbi: piasabi O(N)
14. 10 before san'e : iti GL upa: upa KL om K before labhante: ca
L. 0
14. 11 after Knmandakl : tU'db amavalokya Bkand's ABEO tal: om KMN ' etat
CDEFMNO' G[KL Vipi.9'aminid. CDF' (y}aparyamaniid M; parya-
manad EGIKL 0 ; utpa!yamanad Har ivO>mbudad M ' iva-
mbudadiva E
14. 12 skhalann: skhann DI asmiD: mam M prit:'Byati CDEINO;
F(?corr) GKLM
14.13 soocbvisam : saharsam G prafyisanna CDm . pratyapanna FGKLMO
hy : tv G
15a 5vasa(F,c orr : ·uccbvasa CD?Flst
IIIlIliha : C " (a)nii.sa EL ' (a)nasa G F(?corr)GIKLMNO ;
prapafica C ; prasanna D HaT Katb ' prakampiE
b api ca :athaca 0 ca. prak!'t.i CD ?Flst·
prak!1aU cett
c ccbedit : bhedat C 'ucchedat I virijate: viraj ito O ' virajite MN
224 M iiiat'imiuihava 16a

(NEPATHYE)
AvigaJ?ayya DrPa£!l
natam agni-caye patan /
sapadi Bhiirivasur vinivartito
mama gira guru sarpmada ;visma / / 16 / /
MADHAVA;.MAKARANDAU
(urdhvam avalokya, Bhagavati vardhase-
Sa yogin» iyam adhuna. vighatitajalada ) bhyupaity
a /
jaiada-jaD-asaram atisete // 17 II
KAMANDAKI
pri ya.qt 2 /
MALATI
d*hia cirassa paLCujjivida >mhi I
KAMANDAKI
ca) ehy ehi putri /
MALATI
kadhaf!1, Bhaavadl! / (padayoq. patati)

16a avagal).ayya GL
b agni ca ye CDEFIKMNO ; agn imukbe G ; agnimudbri L patao : patat
c vartito: vartate GL
16.1 Midhava Makarandau : madbavab N . : saharsau E· harsam
sabarsam . IM·
.,
om KN
17a yogiJiiyam adhuni CDF; yOglsvariyamagre E; yogin"iSvarlyam Gl · yoginyam-
barato I; yoginlyamatiraya KMNO
b jalada: jalada va M ayam : (ti)no KM 0
c amrtajala: folio 54 of F here ends
d atiSete: adhisete J ;
17.1 after Kamandakf : GL priyal!l __ .. patati / kamandaki : om M
2 CD ; E; GL - I;
K; 0
17.2 Malati: I ,c irassa CDILO; pia sa G · cira E ; om K Har ch
paccuijivida: paccagadajivida E mbi : mhe I ; hma L
17.3 ca CD ; ElK O · GL
before ehy : malatiqIprati IK before putri: me GI after putr; : ma:ati G ;
kataremalati L ; om CDEIKNO
17.4 kadham Bhaavadi: om C EGIL · DK 0 before
iti EGLN ' om CDIKO patatj CDE ; nipatati GIKLO
17.5 Act X 225

KAMA DAKI
(utthapy) alingya murdhn · ,a gbraya)
Jiva jlvita- amaya debi Jlvatu suhrj :janas ca te I
ailgakais putri mam ca
jlvaya lit 8 1/
1ADHAVAH
vayasya Makaranda sampraty upadeyo Madhavasya Jlva-1okal?
I
MAKARA DAH
evam etat /
ITARE
piasahi maq.orah)-antarida sambhavehi amhe
parissan geq.a / 5
MALAT]
ha piasahi! I
UBHE
(fllmgataq.)
KAMA DAKI
vatsau kim etat? I

17.5 utthi,pya : uUhaya DG itingya : almgati I ' vyaliilgya N miirdhny

CIKLMO ; mllrddhan D; murddbnica" E; murdhna G iighraya : upa-
ghraya KM . after iighrii '0: ca K 0
L8a samaya : same>tha C
b ii,'atu : j1 iw C ' }i a ya 0 ja ' : janal!l 0 te : me L
d DEKL : priyasak..b1' 10: pri asakbi (with h in erted) G
18. L Makaranu: om i a a: madhava E' madha ya G
18.3 afleT el'ant etal: leas Ildehai?- I
18.4 itare CDIK]MO ' EG pitiShi : sahi E manoraha D
antaridat CD ; ii*<layidaIp E ; G; atirittha I; atiritta K ; atikkada L ;
3.d iklcanta ?M; aikk8J!lta : adiritta 0; atirikta Har ch d l!l
El amb : amhehi G .g CEKLO ' DGI ;
M;
1.6 aJ(erha : edha I 0 sakh <UIlHarch); ahio
M
18.7 COElK ' aIingati GlM 0
l8.8 a1sau: at5e I' , tsaumadha amakarandau.
 226 Miilatimildhava 18.9

MAKARANDA;MADHAVAU
Bhagavati
KapalakuI?-4ala-kopa -durjata-janit> /
vayam krcchran nirbandhad aryaya >naya //19//
KAMANDAKI
katham, etat? /
LAVANGIKA ;MADAY ANTIKE
aho put?-arutta:daruI?-assa
/
(pravisya)
SAUDA.MANI
5 bhagavati Kamandaki sa esa vas cirantano )ntevasl janaJ?

KAMANDAKI
aye bhadra Saudamaru! /
MADHAVA;MAKARANDAU
katham, Bhagavatya.4 adya sisya
Saudaman1? / yata!} sarvam adhuna I

18.9 Makaranda.Midhavau CDK; madhavamakarandau EGILO · ubhau M ; maciha /

kimanyat N Bha.gavati : om G
19a kopa: loka M
b durjata: om L D
c abby: apy DN ... anays: krcchradaryayetyavadharyatam M
19. 1 after katham: yuvayor D; yuvayoranayor E vadha : vadha ; iUeg in M · om
G
19.2 LavaiIgika Madayantike: lavaIp /madayantike C- madayantikalavangike GL·
lava Har abo: om N D; C ; accaru. E;
G KLM NO; I rama ':lijjaa I!' CD· Tamar:t ijjalif!l G . ramaI?ijja
EIN; KMO ; ramajjaalp. L; ramar:tlyam Har ch
19.4 praviSya: tata,?-pravisati 1
19 .5 Saudiimaol CDI; saudaminI EGKL 0 afler Saudiimani: sauda C ; 2 IK
before bhagavati: upasrtya GKL; om COEIM 0 Kamaodaki: kamandakI
C; om N sa: om N vaS: yas I ; O· om ciraotano: cirantana
Cnte) EN antevisi CDIO ; antevasi EKMN · anfivasl G ; (before prar:'amati) L
19.7 aye: ayi I bbadrii: bhadram / M Saudamani COl ; saudamini cett
19.8 before katham: savismayam GKL KMO ; om pata ...
sisya : patini E pata : patana I adya CDIM· adya GKNO · agra L
19.9 Saudiimani CIDcorr; saudamini Dlst cett yatal;t CDErKM O· tat GL
adhuna : C · adya K
20a Act X 227

KAMANDAKl
Ehy ehi
cirad asi hanta /
labdha..])ramodam api oandaya me sariram
aliilgya sauhrda-nidhe virama pnu;tamat //20 //
apl ca
Vandya tvam eva
/
yasyah pura:paricaya-pratibaddha:bijam
udbhUta :bhliri: phala-SaJi vij!IDbhitam //21 //
MADA Y ANTIKA:
sa ajja SodamaJ?I . /
MALATI
baqhar.p. / imii,e kbu
avasadha:q:t Bhaavadi-
samasasida )mhi / k:iJ::!l ca
ih> savve tumhe vi / 5
20a eby eb.i : ehtni G . iiri jana : bbfin u K. om L
b sa iri ciri : sam bllavini tvamaciriid I
0 cirad asi bants : ciratvami-
ha i E
c labdha CD' datta EGI LM 0 Hac pO : abhi GM nandaya: Jlvaya K
21a 8: 0
b ati : .a pi CG' adhi D
c prarib ddha : pra tibuddha C- pratirodhi M' pratibandha 0 bijam: jlvam I
d udiifa. bb -': atyadbhutaika E rij!!Ulbhit . os'" E' vijrmbhate O·
vijrmbhitena CD Har vij!IDbbate at Har.l.· ijrmbhit.a.I!lte GIKL
21.1 Mada.y tin CO · laVBf!1. /J K ; madayantikalavailgikecett iaf!l
-: i.ma E alii : a - Cl? ? " a K Sodimal.'i 0 ;saudamaui Cl ' soda-
GKM .; ELO' .udimini Har ch
21.2 om e 0 ie : imii G CD: kkhu EGKLO; om IM Bha.-
avadi : bhaa adi M' bhaavame ' bbaavaI 0 samban : Divvi esabaddha
K ; I)tivvi esaJ:!lbaddha : pakkhe or pekkba [ vadinie:
vadae K.M · padae ; - eQa 0
21.3 Kava)a : apala 0 . GIK.L· a aSahim C ' a a Q O'
avasam E o avasamaham M : ua EK M after 'fia :
tattba E B d:i : bhaavaI o · om after Bhaavadi: ineha Bhaod' s
CG
21.4 ."vvisesa.: I)tivvisesa C : om : samiissasida K ' samasiid ida
G o asasida IM ; samasasia 0 t ki ca : kirma LM
0 i aD: avaIl KN'
avaUyam E 0-
- on i : cihionana
• • • 0-.. C ' sabhinoalla
. . .. GKL
21. 5 ihigattii , CD ' E° K' GILD'
ihaaaccaa . iliaaa?c;:c ° EGLO: saham C ; samvarida D ;
 228 M ala tlmiidha va 21.6

ITARE
suppasaJ?J?a no bhaavam /
MADHAVA;MAKARANDAU
aho nu khalu bho4! /
Api cintamaJ?iS cinta:pariSramam /
idam tv akrtakam manye krtam ascaryam aryaya.j/22//
I • • ..

SAUDAMANI
(svagatam) hanta lajjayati roam atyanta:saujanyam /
(prakasam) Bhagavati etat fajua
Padmavat»-HvareJ?a Bhiirivasoq abhilikhya patram
Madhavasya / (Iekham arpayati)
KAMANDAKI
5 (grhitva vacayati)-
dhuri sthitavati ca tvayi
pratyasta:vyasane mahlyasi paraql prito )smi jamatari /
ten) Madayantika. )dya prltyai tava preyase
mitraya ya )smabhir utsrjyate' I/23//
sandharidi(tti) I; saI!lbbavida K; dhliriii M; sa:qtdhiiriii. N tumhe vi COGl;
tumhe E; tti I (iti Har ch) ; tumhe after savve KNO; tumhe be/ore savve M
21.6 before icare: tiiesiijividappadairyTsaudam iryl K itare CDKLO' itanil:). EMN;
itara G; madayantikiilavangike I uppa aryii G ' upasaJ?l)ii
IL no: om GK
21.7 Miidhava Makarandau DEGILO ; makarandamadhavau C' madha K ; ma-
M ; makararp N
22c akrtakam manye CD ; akrtamanyena EIKO ; acintit:aI:!lmanye GLM Har
22.1 svagatam: atmagatam K banta lajjayati: I CD haota:
om N before aty: praty CDE M 0
22.2 prakasam: om C Bbagavati: om etat : om G after etar: tu L
abhinanditena: abhiramena C ; ananditena E
22.3 E' prathamam K abbilikbya : iilikhya KM
22.4 before lekham: iti E arpayati : amarpayati E
22.S Kiimandaki: madha K; 0 grbih'a: om G ,'acayati : om G
after viicayati:-
svasty astu val:). / paramesvaraQ samajiHlpayati yatha GIKL
GIl ; ca K yathi Il; om GK
23a stbitavati: sthitimati E CD' EGIKLM 0 anvaye ca:
anvayepi K ; anvavaye M 0
b pratyasta : pradh vasta K vyasane : vasa E prito smi : pnta ma C ' pritiil:).s-
maD
c adya: ca E; api NO?M; lost in C tava: vate E ; bha at K preyase : preya 0
K
d ya CD; py(a) cett
23.1 Act X 229

KAMA DAKI
(Madhavam uddisya, va.tsa srutam? /
MADHAVAH
srutam - idanim sarvata.4 krtarilio )sm i/

ettahe avagad.aJ:!l hiaassa asailka:sallarp. /

LAVA GIKA
ahavassa phalida /
AKARA DAR
katham Aval.okita Buddharnksita
. KalahamsakaS
. ca durata eva 5

23.1 Kimaodaki DE ,0; kamaJ!l saharsam K; om CGILM C DEL ;

om GIM • 0; h re om K ,atsa : om M srutam CDEGKLM ;
'rU)'3tfun I; 0
23 .2 Midha •••sarvahl ,: idiirum I madha M Madha,'ab : om G after
Miidhol'aiJ: 0 after idanlrrr: ca GL CDGIO ; arva L;
om EK M
23 .3 sall, . : agadam M (i for hi) N
ettiihe COG; E; ittahe ]; K ' edampidava 0 M ; om L
DE(M . a C vyapagatam Har ch)' I;
GKL; 0 here DEGsiclO?c- before hiaassa GsicKL a ailki :
asaIDsa L
23.4 LavaiJgiki : om G afcer khu I Ma ansss. DEKMO ;
madha assa C: GL (maladiea) 1 Cnmadha a amala-
tyaSca. Har cb lidi : puna 0 ; puna after sampadaJ?1 M
manaraha
. M' manoraho
. I

23.5 Makaranda .: k:.ama EK ; madha M atham .•. CDEM 0 ;

Ihe following in G1KL Har:-
puro a10lc a I ·alham saha pm-
nr nla ita J tata.Q pm j' ata
A alokit3ibuddharak.ile ca / krt ii sarve
upa rtYa prati I jaa bhaavadi Madha-
val!l pratit / jaa Manava
puro atok:ya GIL ; om K . .. . ca: om G saha :
before KaJahaJ!lSakena K oda l ; om IK before
eLe' Kl :abbigaochataq I K ; yatha-
]. L afrer Kal.alzan:lsakai ca: 2 1 nrttam.
Gt; Kl 'e Gl: before Kiif1tllJUiakim 1: om K upasrtYa
sapra : om pntit KL ' G' PraI? am ati I ja.
Il: jaal G:. om K Har bija KL' .ua G ; 1 GJ ' rpvviihat:le
K; L be/or; j aa: jaajaa mamaba malad! allaha makarand3J!l-
prati jaa maaranda santa ?bbhudae jaa
saudamal?i iti madhavaI:!lpra ti 1 jaa : ajja K naodaoa:
I ad . GKL ' ddbase [
 230 M iilatlmiidhava 23.6

samuditan asman tatr) aiva nftyanti /

SARVE
pasyanti)
LAVANGIKA
ko ·va imassiql vva:ppaara :mahusave J?a J?accadi ? /
KA.MANDAKI
evam etat / asti va kutaS cid evarpbhfitam adbhutam vicitra;
10 /
SAUDA.MANI
idam atra yad amatya:Bhiirivasu;Devaratayos
cirat piifJ?o >yam /
MALATI
(svagatam) via? /
MAKARANDA ;MADHAVAU
(sakautukam) Bbagavati anyatha. anyatha

0 Ka1ahamsakaS:
. kalaham. a ' M after
ca: mandii.rikii.ca N dilrata eva DE · C· diiratal;1 M 0
23 .6 sanuditan : samuditanam C asmao : before samudiliin E tatraiva : om M
nirbharam : om N; nirbharam after nrtyanti M nrtYanti CDEMN ;
0; nrtyanta ita evagacchanti Teiang
23.7 sarve CDEGIKLNO; sarve )pi M M
23.8 vit: om MN M · e oas i sampiirida savva ppaara :
om MNO sampiirida C DGIL: ampadal:!1 E ; pt1rida K ppaara : paara El
mahusave: muhllsave G · mahossave I· mahUsa M om M Har Kath ch
CDE ; !)accal NO· !)aucchai M;; G: pahasadil
itinrtyati I ; sar:tandotti K ; pariha a L· pari-
hiisasat;lpl1r"r:tI?obhavati Har ch
23.9 asti vii: astu K kutaS cid: kutracid E· lruta{evam) K ; kvacid 0
bh iitam : evarp. bhuta G I ; evam KL adbhuta EK· adbhuta C;
bha L ; atyan ta 0 ; om DG I M vicitra : MN ; citra 0 after \';-
citra: arambhaparyavasana I
23 . fo I ; om M . maha: om MN
23. 11 riima",.yakam CDENO· M; ramaf}lyam /1 I ; atararn GKL
amatya CDEKMN ; amatyayor G1LO
23 .12 cirat: om E piirl}o : sarp.pii1'Qo MNO aya : om E itaretara: itaretaram(a) N
CDEO ; sambandbatma GL ' sambandha IKMN
manorathah G ; manoratham M
23.13 svagatam: M ElK; katham C; kahaq1 DGLM 0 "ia: vi
G
23.14 Makaraoda Miidbavan CD; rnakarandal? M; kamaJ!l . madhavamakarandau
23.15 Act X 231

vacanam / 15
LAVA G]KA.
Uanantikam) Bhaavadi ti paq.ivajjidavvarp.. /
KAMA DAK!
(svagatam)
opagrahaJ khalu ayam / {prakasam) vatsau, na
khalv anyatha vastu -vrUam ! 's ravak) -avasthayam asmat;
SaudamanJ-samak .a!p vrtt» eyam anayo4 pratijfta-yad avasyam 20
avabhyam kartavya iti I pradha..na -kopas
tv ev3.r!l parihrtaJ?!
MALATI
aho I
MADHAVA,'MAKARA ' DAU
ascaryam. jayanti mahatfmt /

cett 8bag tJi : om EM anyatbB \' astu orn M

COE' vrttam cett after I taJI:nyailia C afrer anyarhii: Ga G-: eva L
23.15 \la il"yiyic. : vacanaparyayah. Har iryiyi . : aryaya M
23.16 Lavangik- : a a10 Bhas\'sdi : bba.ga adi C ; abababhaavadi M' om
bhaa ai 0 ti ?O: lcitti CE .D· GIKL (kim Har cb); ka iva M
p M ; paq.ipajjaha / bhaavaie N
23 . L7 agatam: orn Cl ml dhen CUEKM ' 0 ; sambandhat GL' sambandha I
23 ..18 pntyasu: M s.Dk- _: G vatsau :
omGMN
23.l9ah : om lE : om M D?C after w:ttam:
MN- 0 Srivllka :?sravaI;1a
o
23.2n SandimuI C- saudamini OEGIKLM 0 Har DEKLNO(M);
com· M CD' anayorvrtteyam
EGIL; cWcltayOrvrtteyam K' vrtkyam M; tayomivrtteyam ; anayorbhuriva-
0 '1 ' . Uyam CD'yal[ E', avasyam cett before
iil'abhyam: paraspa.ram DE ' (om C)
23 .21 01 ._ - ,: prndhiiDa.£!l G; K
23.22 after Ri ElM
23.23 Malati : ava before Gho : s agalaJ:!t E ': abmo MO ; ahme N
23.24 Midha a Mala " ' . : maikaranciamadha au before iiScar am: aho E
ja.y anti : janayanti M ' 0 be/or, maharam: khalu 0 malratiim: ja atam C
a is:a : CD " padi E' a
GL; 1 Har ; K'
vadinyah M' . apisa£!l 0; .. Bband's C
kaJyii . 8 CDE . ot Gsi l ' 0 lK' M' 0
natay 1:- : K
 232 M iilatfmiidhava 23.25.

KAMANDAKI
25 vatsa Madhava
Yat prag eva manorathair vf1:am abhut
tat pUI).yair mad-upakramaiS ca kleso >pi mac-
/
ca samagamo >pi vihitas tvat-preyasa4 kantaya,
samprltau tad apy
ucyatam //24//
MADHAVAH
atal;l param api priyam asti? / tatha >p> idam astu -
santu sukftino vidhvasta-.:pap)-.:6daya,
paripalayantu dharme sarvada I
kale jalamucaQ santu praj a-pu,?,yato ,
ghana

(iti sarve)
1/ daSamo //
23.25 vatsa Miidbava CDEGIKLO' vatsa M' vatse
24b tat : tvat N pUI?-yat G I IdeS<. )pi :
D?C ; klesaisca M
c samagamo )pi: samagamasca CDEN; 0
d Nandanau: (followed by a blank) E kiiryam CDEK; sreya
GsicIL; preyas M 0
24.1 DE, G JKL ; om CM NO after sahar pra,?-aman I bhagavati IK .
pra,?-aman / bhagavatijiiiinavijnananidbeguro GL ; om CDEM 0 before
kim MN; na I ata api : om be/ore tathiipi: kamaJ:!l
GL after aSlu : bhagavatiprasadat I ; bharatavakyam M 0 ; om CDEGKL
before stanza 25 : C taoz.a 25 CDEGIKL;
the following stanza in M NO:-
I
tusantif!1sarva 1/
sivamastu NO; M jagatiif!1 MO ; jagata4 niratii MO;
nitara N dosab . . NO' dosah
. . M 'iintim. M . naSam
. 0 sarvatra NO·)

sarvo)pi M sukm bbavatu O' M; ukh'i

bhavatu N
25a vidbvasta: E pipo(dayi): the lasl folio of E numhered 59 here
ends papodaya CDGK ; papoccaya I ; papodayo L
c mucaJ:t : bhuva9 G praji CDrK ; GL
d gbana baddha: punariddha K baddha CDGIL Jag ; bandhu Bhand's CEOBh
Har putra K
25.1 after stanza 25: kiima evametat I; kamanda1d 11 evamastu KO iti
sane: here om C before dtJiamo )nkalJ : mruatimadhave K ; malatimadbave
malat'ipraptir nama L; om CDGIMNO dtiamo here om C (For
the colophons of CDGIKLMN, see section 2 of the Introduction.)
 (For con enien , (he Engli b Lrao Lations often extend be ond that portion
of the text a tuaJI quoted .)

p.CT 11
Stanza 1 A curiou light i thrown on the que tion of tbe order of the fir 1 two tanzas
by the opening remark of Hari hara, who read stanza _ before tanza 1 :

tha rupak)-- dih a"'i a d) -abhidhana aD candra:pad)-8.nkita d ada ' a..;pada

ada a nandi rarta /» eO Bharat>..;.adi:muni-samprada am anuvi-
dadhano a .-karaJ?ena pada: ' abda a ibhakt ..;.an ta:
'Iok:a=tun i la .a d aivirlh 'at prathamaql 'loken) ad na
vlkrt a, dvitiya: idha-S3J!lgraha ) api eti ' Ioka)-antaraql ni
aha j eli
(A above in the Cal uua ms, ex ept d ada ' padl a ith in margin:
as above in the Kathmandu m . ccept ' ak.I a and ra ('.
a)cita a. for
vflcita a.)
The phrase rupakadau. the future an. the fact that api ca is t he first
phrase in th play to be o mmemoo on, nd abo eaU the fact that Harihara thi nk:
api ca wortb}' of comment. force one to on lude that in the text before him, al-
though tanza I t od after tanza _, tama 1 \1,fas prefaced b api ca. H e explains
that while the lanza is in one sen e, Bha abhu ti provi.des
against a ecoDd interpretaLion of Bharata precept (pada in the en e of pada),
by using the phrase api ca to point to the fact that another tanza i to foHow the
first, ince two tanzasprovide a otal of eight quarters or pada . Harihara was no
doubt collien to e pound th text as he found it but it i hardl conceivable that
this i indeed tbe te I whi h Bha abbilti intended. See Introduction, sect. 7.

Stanza 1 = ubha ila

Ib oasa;g ra ran:dhram: nasayai:t agram nasagram tasya rnndhram eems, despite t he
commentator difficulti , me imple ana'} is. \ here elephants are concerned
the difference beh. een na a and oa.sagra is exceptionaU pronounced.
le - iiEaplu;:JN 0 ' asta i' va 'so that the uni er i per aded with
t he ha ing' obtain upp Lt from C " 'hkh, though damag d, bO\l . clear traces
of several of the r u' it leue . The hange' appar. nU due to th fe ling that
Siva ougbt not to be m.entioned in a erse upposedly in honour of GaI,leSa but it i
not an elltird bapp one: the tanza becom incoh reot. if mention of the eau e
of the hole disturban ,lh a. i uppre ed.
before tanza 2 0 inser- th phrase nandyant iilradlltarah. Thi seem . to have been a
deliberate attempt. to ma e the prologue accord with the more elaborate aJTange-
menlS known to the saslra whi b ara at! quotes as saying that tbe
sutradbara and his companion are followed b another called the thapaka and
that one nand! j foUowed b another during the' thapana . It i e ident ho e er
that the prdiminarie bad been e mucb implilied b Bhaabbiiti' ' lime.
234 Notes 12

Stanza 2 = 44.
stanzas 2A and 2B The first of these two stanzas is found only in the Southern mss,
and its claims are not very strong. There are several such stanzas of mysterious
origin in the Southern recension, notably their final stanza of the play. The second
is more widely attested and almost certainly by Bhavabhiiti. I uspecl tbat it formed
the original second benedictory stanza: see Introduction sect. 7.
2.2 before udita (i) GJKLMNO have something like 'alam a phrase which
copyists might introduce even if it were not there ; (ii) DEIGJKLO have sometning
like 'purovalokya / aye', which is omitted by ACMN (D . it will be remembered,
does not side at the start of the play with 'revised text' mss). There is thus some
authority for supposing that Bhavabbiiti wrote the latter pbrase originally and
later cancelled it - a small piece of evidence that he was revising the play for
performance at a different time of day.
stanza 3 See Introduction sect. 7.
3d resembles UR III 49d 'tvayi vitaratu bhadram bhiiyase mangalaya'.
3.1 Three of the best mss give the word as and this form hould perhaps
be accepted, though it is to be noted that I also has for below.

3.5 The entry of the Sfitradbira's assistant

1. The sentence 'adisto smi .. '

Over this sentence the mss divide into three main groups :
i) MNO and Bhand's Bh read it immediat,ely after 'tat kim ... bharatah?'
i) GJL read it immediately before. .
iii) ACDEII\ completely omit the phrase.
iv) One ms (BanSktUniv 73668) reads it where I have placed it.
(By a curious quirk, group iu is quite unrepresented among the previously
published variants, although. it is of extremely wide distribution. In addition to
ACDEIK, the following mss omit the sentence: l.O .895a; 1.0.1890' FlorB96;
BOR! DesCat158; ASBCalcutta 9245; BirLibKath.p. BISM Poona 53/ 52ka;
BanSktUnit 41290.)
If we reave aside the South.eru. recensioD for discussion below, tbe version of group
iii is undoubtedly preferable to that of since the inclusion of this sentence in the
Siitradhara's speecb weakens the cogency and dramatic effect of his e)lchanges
with his assistant, which depend on the pretence that the Sutradbarn. does not
know the requirements of the To mention therefore that he has discussed
the performance with it is a needless clouding of the issue. Obviously if it is genuine,
the sentence should form part of the assistant's opening speech, as it does in the
one IllS of group iv. In point of sense, this seems to me as ifieproa.c hable as version
iii. The word need not imply tbat the has charged the assistant
personally with responsibility for the production, m.ereJy that, speaking de huut
en bas, it has communicated through him its desire for a new it. should
be Doted that the assistant is not saying merely that the expects a play (a
superfluous piece of information), but that it is demanding some hitherto unper.
formed prakarQ1}a, which to everyone's difficulties.
Direct support for this version comes only from this one ms, which belongs to
the same general type of recension as K. But the real ms authority lies in the fact
 12 Notes 235
that this readingsccms to Wlderlie the vagaries of the Southern mss in their version
of the dialogue up to stanza 5 which is discussed below. Indeed we can press the
Southern mss. into direct suppon.by ,eltpressmg their evidence differently, and saying
that they read the sentence, nota/ter tat .. . but immediately before the
sentence tat etc.
It is debatable whether this crux is connected with the question of revision. It
does certainly seem po.ssible that GJL represent Bbavabhuti's original version,
and that he saw that. tllis was unsatisfactory. It may then be that he cancelled the
sentence, as in ACDEIK or it may be that be sought to transpose it and that the
omission is an erroneousreswt of the transposition. Because omission is no more
than negative evidence, I have decided to print tbe sentence in tbe text.

2. The acceptability of the Southern ersion

The Southern mss gi ea quite different account of the opening exchanges between
the Slitradbaraand his assistant. Such radical divergences in the actual sense of a
scene are rare in this play. This first instance might be treated as a test. case for the
trustworthiness of the Southern ·mss and Et is therefore worthwhile to separate
the two types of evidence and to judge first b intrinsic criteria before considering
extrinsic questions of textual transmission.
The two versions may be analysed as follows. with numbers attached to the
rougbl}-corr,e sponditlgelements of each version .:-

orthern Version
SUTRADHARA : (1. the preliminaries are completed and everyone
is here. (element 4 is usually placed here or omitted: The Assembly is asking for
a (2)1So why do the actors delay? (3) p'ARIPARSVIKA entering:
Bhava, « 4) possible int.ended position of 4) (5) We can find no play of the qualities
which the Assembly prescribes. (6) SurRA :. (71) What do Their Honours
want? (8) The ATA recit.es stanza 4 (9) SurRA: [ remember! (10) NATA:
Bhiva, wbat. (11) SiJTRA : There is a poet caUed Bhavabhuti .... .
Southern Version
SVTRADHARA : (I the preliminaries are completed a.nd everyone is
here. t2) So wby do t.he actors delay? (4 The Assembly is asking for a new play.
(5) So let both of us honour the Assembly with a play of the prescribed qualities.
(3) NATA entering: Bha 8,. (7) What do their HODOurs require? (8) The SUTRA-
DHARA recites 4 (10) ATA: Bhava in what play? (11) SOTRA: There
is a poet called Bhavabhilti . . .
Both versions make sense. In the first, the Sutradhara asks why the play is not
being performed.; his assistant replies that there is no play of the quali-
ties, which he lists' the Sutradhara then hits on Bha abhuti In. the second version
the Sfitradbam asks why DO play of the prescribed qualities is being pq-fonned;
his assistant asks wbat they are' the Siitradharatells him, and subsequentl identifies
Bhavabhuti as t.he poet to fit the hili.
For sense and dramatic point the first version. is p[lefera.b le .. At first sight. it might
seem that the stanza on poetX merit comes less appropriately from the Siltradhara's
assistant, but he is merely relaying the words of tlte Again the Sutra-
dbara s ignorance over the question of what play ought to be performed may strike
us as but this is a convention of prologues" gently mocked in the prologue
of the Sa,k untala.

\9
236 Notes I3

Against the second version, on the other hand, it may be urged: I) The repetition
of syntax and idea in 'All is ready: so why delay ... . The As embly is asking: so
let us do honour' falls rather flat. 2) The mention of without ex·
planation is less natural in a long speech than in the an wer to an urgent que tion.
3) It is less dramaticaUy effective that the person who lists the qualities should later
reveal who fits them, than that the listing of them should elicit from another the
thought of a poet to satisfy the conditions.
It might be suggested that Bhavabhutiwrote both versions at different times, in
which case the Southern version as the least effective would be the earlier. But thi
is unlikely in view of the close identity of phrasing in the two versions, where a
change of policy over the main sense of the scene would naturally uggest a freer
rewriting of the verbal details (it would also of course run counter to the general
evidence concerning two versions of the whole prologue discussed in the Intro·
duction). Even more impelling is the unlikelihood that an earlier version bawd
accidentally be so susceptible of a superior rearrangement. These la t points bring
us to the question of textual transmission .
3. The evidence of the mss
A clue as to the way in which the Southern version arose is given by the readings
of two mss:·
a)Cal Skt CoU 243 (nagari script)
(I) ... (2) tat k:im iti ate?/
(4) smi ... vinodayitavya itl/
(5) tat navagacehama it' (6)
(7)katame te tatra yan ...
b) Bhand'a N (Telugu script)
(1) .... vastavyo (2) tat kim (4) adisto >.mi vidvadvidagdha-
... vinodanlya. iti/ (5) tat prabandbam avagac·
(3) pravisya natalV bhava (7) katame te yan ...
We a.re fortunate to have the ,evidence of the fir t of these two mss, for here the
root of the whole infection shoVls itself in all its simplicity. It is nothing more than
the omission of phrase 3 (the ms goes on quite conventionally to follow the Nor·
them recension). All that the second ms has done beyond this is to restore phrase
to the text in place of phrase 6, and to emend a now meaningless na aga chama iti
to But in doing so, it has ero ed the borderline quite decisi ely to
join the Southern version (all that remains now is to substitute a more atisfactory
expression for the rather bald This DlS then proceed, like the other
Southern mss, to follow out the logic of its readings b ascribing tanza 4 to th
Siitradbara. But after stanza 4 it again has something of interest.:·
(10) bhava katamasmin (9) sutra/ vicint (10) ka
iva? (11) siitraf asti .. ..
lbis ms thus has the Northern version of phrases 9 and 10 (apart from the patent
corruption of omitting the ascription of the lea iva' to but preceded by
the Southern version of 10 which in other Southern mss has replaced them .
In these two mss therefore we seem to see the processes of corruption which
produce the Southern version still at work.. It .a ppears to me that they can be ex.
plained straightforwardly only on the supposition that the text on which the South-
I 3.6 Notes 237

em recension is based original] contained the elements 1-11 as ] have numbered

them.
3.6 Paripiisvikai)t After the first mention of him. the assistant is consistently referred
to as but it will be seen that the evidence for his beinggi en this other title
on Ills actual entry is extremely trong. a the switch from en to prathalIl.3. in the
pra eSaka of Act 11.
4.3 after half the mss have Very likel Berar was in fact
the area from which Bbavabhiiti came. But I omit the word to remind researchers
that the evidence here is not ab olutel conclusive. Ms alignment indeed would
suggest tba! Bha abhuti himself cancelled the word, but the omission may be
accidental.
4.5 Damha:ranimino Here again it. is nere to a oid the notion that the fonn of
Bha abbiiti s (antil na me i settled It is nOl mentioned in the UR. In the MY an
identical entence to this one is found. There 'Udumbara' is read b Todar Mall,
but none of h' mss ' e ceptionally old: among them the ariants udambara and
dumbara OCCW. A ms (L gi\ for 'Undura etc.' in MR VI 3. [(Hille-
brandt ed p.162.
6c utpatayate tu It seems tnat Bbayabbiiti ma originall have written utpatsyate) ti
in which case \\'e ha . e 'e idence that this tanza was in the earlier ersion of the
prologue. The replacement of ash hy tu is presumabl due to tylistic considerations
and not to increasing pessimi ID. It :is po ible that III was meant to be placed after
mama, as in the Southern JUSS. The reading asti is more logically con i tent with
th.e following line, but. t.bat fact in. itself· perfectl reconcileable with the three
po sibilities of its being Bba abhuti · earlier e ion. his later ersion or the work
of an interpolator.
Stanza 6 Subhasita 1731. er. UR ill 27 sa [lokah] e\'a jan.ati kim api'- ' tbe people
have some idea or other'.
stanza 6A See introduction sect. 7. Tbe reading of GU must presumabl be construed
as ' Wbat merit in thisork should be proclaimed as due to m own merits, when
m guru. is the aptly named Jnanaoidhi?'
7.1 tataJ:E kbaJu ' That ' b Your Honour has alread been rehearsing the whole
compan !' The reading of BD, tad e a in tbat very play' for tadai a, is tempting;
but the long diphthong is so easil lost that the authority for eva is no more than
moderat,e. Thi entenoe replaces a mu h longer pas age read in orne mss · see
Introduction eel. 7.
7.2 pl'8thama bbfunikiyiIO I cannot understand why this pas age bas attracted no
attenHon from commentators or editors. The ha e probably found the point of
tbe assistant s remarks more obvious than I do but surely not so obvious as to
require 00 du idalion. B)l a process of elimination J tbink I see tbJ answer, but it
seems a urpri ing one. From the assistanlfirst remark and the stage-direction
lat,er on we bo that. the utradhara immediately takes on the role of Kaman-
dakI The assi tant s question the.refore must mean. ' How will you be able 10 put
on the costume of the hero Madha a1' ow be een Kamandakj s exit at ] 16.1
and. Madhava first entry a! r 1.1 there are a few lines dwing which first Kala-
and thell Makar:a.nda make their entrance. The sutradhara s repl must
therefore mean that th.is interval will gi him time to change into Madbava's
co tume. But the obvious qu tiOD hich occurs is, what of the part of Karnan-
daki in the rest of the pla}f'? The utradhara cannot continue to play both roles
238 Notes I 7.7

because as one would expect of two of the chief characters in the drama, they are
several times on stage If the sfltradhara takes the hero's role throughout
the play, as he surely mmt; then the part of Kamandaki can only be taken over by
someone else. The interesting implication of this is that audience were not offended,
not merely when one actor took two roles (this often happens in our own theatre),
but also when the same role was divided between two actors .
In the light of this, if we look at the assistaot's original remark, a question arises
as to the exact meaoing of prathama/ prathama bhfunika. It has usually been
assumed to mean 'the role (of KamandakI), which as it happens is the first to occur
in the play'. But it seems it must rather mean the role of Kamandaki at her first
appearance'. In other words, he is saying 'at rehearsals you alone have been reading
Kamandaki's first scene'. For the word adhHin, which is construed with a locative,
see V 2.8H (also a Varttika to n 3.36).
7.7 Kalabal!JSaka This, rather tban KalahaJ!lsa, is the best attested form - elsewhere
(e.g. I 16.3 and 33.3) more than here.
7.12 .. . Here again it is possible to see the version of GHIJKL,
Tentei Kamandald and AvaJokita', as the earlier, alter;ed for a more logical con-
sistency with the special circumstances of the Prologue. It is also possible that the
omission of parikramya before prastavana by ABC is part of the same
correction, but the evidence of 0 aud 0 makes this less certain.
8.1 khu This and VI 15.2 are the only points in the play at which the Newari mss
unite in presenting the alternative form kkhu. It should be pointed out first of all
that in contrast to the particle jjeva, khu does not short.en a preceding long ,,-owel.
It is logical therefore to write it as khu after long vowels and anusvara. In tills play
it does not occur after a short vowel, except three times after no (I 11 . 1, IV 0 .23,
V 25b.2), where, despite Pischel 94, the evidence js each time overwhelmingly in
favour of the form hu. Nor do mss bear out Pischel's ruJe that the dipthongs
e and 0 are shortened before this particle. which is then to be written kkhu. Most
mss write one or the other form fairly consistently whatever the preceding letter.
BEKO regularly have kkhu (B in fact. using the conjunct it normally writes
for kkh), the rest khu. Only C employs both forms quite frequently. often in.
formity with Pischel. But it writeskhu after e or 0 (e.g. at 11 0.39, VIll 6.9, 8.7,
X 21,2) and kkhu after anusvara Or long vowel (e.g. at n pr.S pr. 10, III 3.4 (ef khu
at n 12.4), IV 1.14) often enough to cast doubt on the value of its evidence. I have
therefore adopted the fonn .khu universally (except in the case of I?a hu).
vikkbevO 'agitation'. The widespread va.riant cittavakkhevo is puzzling :
or does not seem to give any appropriate sense.
acchariam Cf ILl, 15 .11 and X 19.2. The mss are fairly consistently divided
in each case between cch and cc for this word. I follo\\' the general consensus of
ABCDEI.
1 See Introduction sect. 5.
8.2 This perfectly possible variant of danim is tbe form regularly given by
ABCEDEI.
attam - i.e. ..
8.4 ukkbadida or ukkhu9ida is for· utskf1a (Turner 1895).
9.1 niDi .Hean.. sihacaryam 'a comradeship of many regions, i.e. the spirit of inter-
national camaraderie which often grows up among fellow sojourners in a strange
Tbe insertions etc. may be no more than glosses.
I 9.3 Notes 239

9.3 yad This, dlereading of ABeD, binds the sentence neatly together.
10.1 kim ti The orthograpby of tti after anusvara is here complicated by thepossi·
bility, advanced by Johansson. and Konow (see Pischel 428), tbat. kitti may be for
·kidti. Th.e word occurs also at 11 pr.l?, 7.4 and V19.3. But although there is good
support for lcitti at each place, thems distribution is not radically different
that for other words - e.g. eVaI!l ti at 118.1 and 12.5, andjividaI!l ti at m 15.17.
The problem therefore is one and I cannot believe t hat Bhavabhuti can have
intended to reduce the nasalized owe1 bot:ore tti to a short simple vowel, for this is
also t he sandbi of lon,g simple "owell bef:ore tti - e.g. caiiddasl ui LD pr.12; vira'idi
tti 1II 14:3. The ,c onfusion has probably arisen from the orthographica1 similarity
of tti and DtL In most. cases nti is read by A. joined by one or two other mss, and
the tti of arious others has pro babl the same sourrce. ] follow the modem con·
vention in print.ing jividal!l. ti r atber than ji idan ti etc.
1.0.2 iroyedi The ed.iis of course equally possible.
13d pntiryau - i.,e. into believin,g that the marriage between Maiati and Madhava
is not Bbiiri asu's doing.
1.4a prava.;ta 'complianl I{Latin pronus) .. Cf 16c below.
etc. If we accept tbe evideo.Cie of EGHJ, the earlier reading was tupilia-
Bhat;tidado looks Iik'e an attempt to avoid the
repetition of Possibly therefore th.e foUo w.i ng omission of vaar:ta, though so
widespread, is uninle-ntionaJ and due to an accidental jump from to
15.1 Apparently altered fTom attaJ?o
15.5 apndpitiya The most obvious trans1ation of the words which here foUow in
our mss, Madhawntikam upeyad ity abhiprayalf. is 'i.e. sbou.ld reach Madhava'.
It would. be difficult lo de Lse any phr,ase which sounded more a gloss. Its
omission in two Bhandarkar s mss probabl rdlect.ed the same view rather than
a genuine tradition, but een so editorial exdsionseems the only ,oourse. The
unanimity- of the mss makes the hypothesis of a casual later intrusion unlikely :
one must assume ratber that this is a marginal cOoiment by Bhavabbuti himself
or by a dose coUeague-possibly made in tbe IC Ourse of revising the text (see
Introduction.:sect. 7 p.,52).
15.7 There is a startling . variety of names .£or lbe park where the
festival wasbeld. Where it is identified by the name of Kimadeva or Manmatha
(as ,at I 19.14, 11 2.13" In 8. '2, l2.21 and VIR s.n), the mss are fairly united in. tbeir
reading. But here and at [ L6. 10, Upr.5 and pr.8 they vary between Mada.na and
n
Matanmda. The levidence at pr.5 it dubiouswbetber Bhavabhiiti Intended
for somel1easoo. to substitute Makaranda f;or Madana. but 00 other bypothesis
makes any .sense at',alI, and so I have adopted the former rreadingio all four places.
I? .11 si. IIiIJIl apparently underlies 'the cormptions.. [' s sauc:limaJ?Isauda-
particularly significant. .'
....- ... acc:llbia The hiatus within the compound is unusual. Notetbe
retention of an original d (sadita) in form ..
15.22 jar: ElsewheR: the form jadi :s tcongly supported, jai tending to be read only by
EKLMNO. Heretbe evidence is all in :favour of jai.
15.23 . , . . . . the form .s i"eoby the NewiJi mss, is interesting. The bi- development
(Turner 6680) is not dsewhere quoted for Sauraseni. dUdIam (fume!" 64(2) is
of .
1.5.30 tatnytb.,all be made lIlY model.
240 Notes 116c

16c 'mutually inclinatory' - ef 14a. A \though pTa af?a i read

only by ABDN, the sense seems to require it even more clear! here i.han ill the
former stanza. In view of this fact and of the small ne of the change It does not
seem probable that revision is in question .
16.4 tulida Maaradhu etc.. 'who by a grace of form that matches Kama' pride ha
overthrown the dignity of Malatl's heart.'
Stanza 17 = 752.
aciram Harihara's gloss ' aticiram', indicates that be read . uciram'. [R.S.]
19.5 yathihocate vayasyiya The insertion of the direction 'upavisataJ:t' after or in tead
of this phrase is wrong. Makaranda's proposal is in general [erms and he does not
point out the tree they are to sit under until after aside.
19.6 kadham The representation of Skt th is extremely problematical. On k.atham
kathli and derivatives the TOSS divide elsewhere much as here: CE regularl how
db, with the erratic support of GHIJKL ' ABDMNO show h. Since dh is theo-
retically correct, I have given it preference. For some other word , e.g. natha, atha
(apart from atha kim), the evidence for h seems too strong to be overbalanced.
jjeva Wherever else this particle occurs, mss show much the same variants
irrespective of the preceding syllable - with the exception of K which tends to
write jjeva after short vowels and diphthongs jevva after an u ara: but the general
standard of K's Prakrit prevents one from placing mucb weight on this.
To some extent the particles khu and jjeva are io complemeolary distribution.
khu does not occur after short. vowels (exceptio bu). iieva occurs freq uently
after sbort vowels, but rarely after long vowels, aDd when it does so the long owel
is usually shortened: (cf VIII 6.2 sahasa iieva). At I 31.1 Maladi iieva. it is to be
observed that even those mss (B,GHJ) whkh write a single j have preserved the
short i. Rather than follow the very slight authority of K, I print in ariab.ly iieva.
As between v and vv, the evidence seems just in favoW' of the single consonant.
bila The majority reading, balujjat:tal'!l, eems to gi e poor en e,
and is presumably due to haplograpby. I tberefore follow E.
19.7 visUranta 'suffering'. Pischel does not discuss tbis (deft) word. (Hariharacom-
ments: [R.S.])
19.17 salajjam adhomukbM It may have been Bbavabhflti himself
who excised this, since Madbava's reacti.OD is conveyed in any case by Makaranda'
next words. Since it is no more than a stage-direction and one which does Dot
affect the sense, I have not thought it wortbwhile to remove it from the text.
20a ca yas is undoubtedly to be preferred: to rajas both because it an wets to the COr-
relative so) yam and because rajastamasa as a singuJar coil cti e would be ex-
tremely awkward.
20.9 vidagdha mugdha In stanza 37 MaHiti is mugdbaksI and ber atteodants idagadha,
and the distinction seems rele ant here. That she is a iruman, an unmarried girl
of good family, is shown both by her wearing the clothes of a child and b her baving
sophisticated maidservants to arrange them for her ..
Stanza 21 = 446.
Stanza 218 Cf UR I 24c 'parimrdita angakani'.
22.3 aocitavati 'pulled', the meaning given for the root anch cf C' readiog here) b
Turner 1099, where he remarks that the relationship of afl.c hati with aficati is not
clear.
Stanza 24 = UR VI 12.
125.6 Notes 241

25.6 ko)pi k:as. ) -api l'8Uabhas The ami ion of vaLlabbas is no doubt possible, but of
course the fact that the phrase used here i alluded to simpl by the words 'kasyapi
kopiti in 33<: below provides no d irect upport for this. It is conceivable t.bat
Bhavabhiiti added the word in the ourse of revision .
Stanza 28 = SUbha.ita 48 . Theiirst pada resembles R I Aa:
adh a-saqljata: hedar.
28.2 'pre en e' eems ier [0 interpret than abhisaJ:!ldbina. (,secret purpose
of the beart, int ntioo' - Kale).
Stanza 29 = ubh.a.ita 3.
Stanza 30 = Subha ita
Stanza 31 = u bha . ita
31 .1 dadh m Thi word 0 urs ID i tem form at 11 0.89 and X 3.4, with rather
evidence there tban here f r rh form (at X 3 ..4 all have
32d jrmbbiita gm:lo Bhand rkar' ommeDt that tbis phrase need not be taken with
navayauvana al 0, ' 0 ure: be appears to upply no predicate for navayau anam.
32.3 'woman the entourage' (see arti le in amskrita Ranga Annual VI,
Madras. 19 _). f. and especially kandhaHi aral,1.
3_.6 sumJ.nasim Lavaogika would in fa t have po en in Prakrit in which lan-
guage both (he pron un and the gen. pt arnbiguo Iy migbt refer to two people.
32.7 Ambiguou l ' for ku
32.18 ca kilat e.re. The' vaga.tam· hich one might le xpect. to precede this statement
i not found except in one of Bhandarlcar' rnss. It ma be that. Makaranda i
intended to produce th· fa t merel as an. tration of the respect in which
Malafi is beld nOl omething frustrating to Madha a's plans.
Stanz.a 33 I reading a igning the la t hne to Madha a, is interesting. Three 'cihna's
are thus adduoed b three different peopJe. But the ca after nivedit.am implies that
Makaranda himself has more to } and adba . . generally depicted as slow
to find reasons for hope. C iml>ly ma e . adbava inteJject Icin.l ca before
Makaraoda speaks the last line but lhis is of ourse e en more improbable.
33.l ca The ewari IOOaJ:!l might be a mi interpretation of a correction
ca ciH . But ilmight also bave arisen ou of a confusion with the fonowing
citram, and there seems no ad antage in tbe addition whm the t.age-direction
immediately ma es all lear both to a reader and to an audience.
34a Cf UR In 27b ·t umudi na ana or t am aJige.'
34.3 orne ID bere in ert a requ t b Madhava for writing materials. This is perfect 1
po ihle. but a little elaborate - and perhaps therefore represents Bha abbiiti s
earlier draft. It ' not in fa t leaf who' upp ed to be bolding the portrait at this
juncture. It hould be 0 rved, from 'be phra es citra-upakarM:\aJ at 16.3 and
a[6._ that y,rhat must be in question is not a mere portrait by
it elf but a complete lOt. in luding materia. , for executing a painting.
Stanza 3S = SUbhiil.ita 53.
35d 'fails ompletel in e ecution', The :reading weakens the oon-
truction of the olence b. making artate purely copulative.
36.2 ith phHi, f Pi bel 71.
pada A word in h original d seems to be retained: c! Vlll 6.4 and ] 1.11.
36.17 de.vassa de assa' a possible reading pro ided that with ADO we add a after
Maanassa.
Stanza 37 Bhandarlcar ' urel right in ayin,g that Madha a s mind must be on
242 Note-s. 138

MaIatT and not on her attendants· and that the paltraleKhas are on her own cheeks,
skilfully placed there by her maidservants. cr note on 20.9.
Stanza 38 = 754.
Stanzas 40 and 41 The Newari mss omit svagatam before stanza 40 and pralliam
before stanza 41, and it may well be that Bhavabhuti decided there was little point
in making Madhava recite one stan.z a to himself and the other aloud.
40d isaoga I take it that the reference is to stanza 29, and that M1Hati 's glance is
'tiryag :apavartita' towards Madhava, because of her attachment. to him. a Dushy-
anta's recollection (Sak n 13) of how SakuntaHi. lingers behind to look at him
'vivrtta..;.vadana. But A, which is tom, appears like C to have read asangi, of which
the meaning is not so obvious.
4lc ivarti ganam Bhandarkar objects to this reading, but it seems an odd phrase to
be an interpolation. I punctuate it as a bahuvnm : ' so that my limbs are restless'.
The reading iivartamanam on the other hand may well have been suggested by
vivartamanam in the preceding stanza.
41d tanmayatvam Cr. Kadambari (poona, p.141) and Sak VI 23 'tanmayena hrdayena'.
41.2 bakula vith1nama For this act at least most MSS are agreed on a title.

ACT II
pr.2 ekS She is subsequently called prathama. Cf in the proJogue.
In this case the distinction has. an obvious logical hasis.
pr.lO pariva,,"ann 'rushing up to her and grabbing her by the hand'. The readings
etc. would bave to mean simply 'as he was arriving' (parapat has
such a meaning at VI 2.1), but it is no doubt the shortening of the nominative vowel
before jjeva which has given rise to the confusion.
0.1 The placing of this word after Malati by the Newari lOSS is presumably
a mistake, since it wou-Id naturally qualify Lavangika in such a position.
0.7 ccia = caiva (Turner 4916). This the Newan reading seems remarkable enough
to be genuine. 00. the analogy of jjeva, I print the doubled. c of AD despite the
preceding anusvara.
0.9 vihatthik.ado Ms evidence favours the form kada ratber than kida whether com-
pounded as here or a separate word.
0.12 uvvella is for ·udvilna (Pischel 107). This word occur.> in five other passages of the
play (In 12.57, 15.6, VI 4.4. VU 0.71, 1.30; also uyveUira YID 8.28) and usuaUy
gives difficulty.
papbuJla Tu'tner 8694. The gemination of the ph if geuuine is no doubt by
analogy with utphulla, but is given here only by IKLM.
0.13 This word, found also at III 15.4, vn pr.9 and 1.3,. po es a confusing
problem. The unambiguously participal fonn -m<><;tida is hardly possible at VII
pr.9, where the word stands on i.ts own, and this casts doubt on the similar Newari
reading in the other passages. The choice seems to lie between iuterpretiug bala.-
m04ia as a vestigal gerund used both absolutely and as a stem form, and I"eading
-modi (as the stem of an abstract noun) except at vn pr.9, where one might follow
I's moqie or H's m <><;lia. Very hesitantly I have followed the former course, feeling
that the Newan m<><:iida must arise from a copyist's correction of m<><:tia, and
thus weighs the evidence in favour of this form.
II 0.14 otes 243

0.14 Ioar,l . Th.e ewan readings atthipatehir!J etc. are surprising. The word acchi-
means a shutting of the ,e es (Pische1 9). Such a word does not fit well with

riambba.miJ:uli ,etc. Ol an. immediard obvious oompound: it seems that pariat-

must refer to the movement of the eJ ebroK' at the ruba peranta of the eyes.
sarailga is here for ·amga.
0,18 sibirii Onty C hortem the final owel here, and so I have followed the majority
reading.
0.23 jatti 'of the returning proce sion', ja.I?a before after or instead
of jatla seems unnecessary,
0.27 si The reading S() ' mmtaken. and ould poillbe point of MaJati' next words.
0.32 samtiYidassasamtiva
. .. The forms . amdava
. et,e. would be rather ' urprising, and
it. may be noted that the mss are united on the form arptappasi at 1.5 below.
0.33 Turner ,6_ ites forms Oth and without initial retroflex.
0.36 Cf. asangho in VII 20.4 . According to CappeUer anflsailga
means 'unsteadines • un erraiDl .
0.40 a The e an sometim upported bothers alwa s give this variant
for una after anu ara.
0.41 ammaUo 'gir of good famil ' . This word, entirel distinct in meaning from
amba ' Mother occun; also at VI 14.3 VII o.r and 0,58.
0.45 va There igood evidence to uggest (haJ Bhavabbuti uses this fonn her'e and at
HI 12.56 and X 3.4 ,each t ime after and vva with shortening of the
preceding. owel. at m I. . t El here the taodard form is via.
kilimnumu cr. III 18.5. p' el. uggeslS emendation of this form passim
to kilissanta - but there eems 0 re on b . a im ilation of 0\ els hould not
take pLace. m. and 5 are orthograpllically similar in the mss but here in A and E at
least the is quite certainty mm and not ss.
0.47 Vamm I!I,UI = Manmatheua (Pischel -I ), though Pischel adds 'in SaurasenI
only mammadha ', ]t " ill be ' een bowever tbat no ms here has
la i a C reading m l have been pratha ab ( i .a rpano) - oddi different.
10 that of any other ms,
Stanza 1 = Subba . ita 10.
1.1 dakkba diisalIi. The re ding of E and ariollS other mss, would
avoid the awlcwardn . of m . g in one compound seem to answer diisahfl
in the other,
1.10 Yilaijjanta? = vil.ayyamana_ Some unu uaI form mu t underlie the confusion of
the ms . and probabl a form giving assonance with the foUowing la.ija.
2.13 V' ap The ap bas point - e en fate is 00 my side,
2.17 y.a sya. ete Cf. apa lambiya utra, I khandaID 20 00. Winternitz).
w.llere this sentence is quoted as tbe view 0 others ('it)' ,e ke' ), Kane History of
DhannaSastra ot n p.4 2 note poiots out that the Kamasutra III 1.14 quotes
the same ntence and ' itb the same .a scriplion. Conoei a Bha abhuti is quoting
direcU from. a wort: attributed to AIigira , This ' upported by the appearance
of the partjcle - here. and of anubandh in most mss., where Apastamba and
Vatsyayana have nibandh . . It should be noted ho e er that ABeD I omit the word
Ail gi ra sa.
StaJIa 3 = 116.
stanza .. Cf. UR H( 4 .
244 Notes I15b

5b tiram, the more interesting Newari reading, seems to have a good chance of beiog
Bhavabhfiti's own correction.
7.7 parittiiadba For some reason, when this word occurs it gives rise to extraordinary
confusion in the mss - cf. IV 0.4 and X 14.4. It seems impossible to determine th.e
intended form.
8d dbiima Apparently a .k:armadharaya - grahet:la'
sarasvat'i.
8.7 A similar division of the mss between and occurs at VU]
0.52,0.65 and 1.13. Possibly !berefore is Bhavabhuti's correction. of
8.S Here and at 11.4 Harihara :lgrees with K in reading tathaiva, which he interprets
as a stage-direction indicating that this line also is janantikam. (R.S.]
8.1 i iiikkhadu Turner 1074 - cf. Pali acikkhati. Pischel 492 confines the form.to Ardha
At III 12.1l and VII 1.55 similar confusion reigns as to the fonn of this
verb.
9b prakfti - i.e. nature had surpassed itself in producing them. The reading sulqta
would presumably refer to their own actions, in which case one would not expect
themselves to be described as the object of the manifestations of these,
9.1 apavirya Bhavabhuti's use of tbe words s agatam, janantikaDl and apavarya
deserves comment. svagatam marks a speech overheard only by the audience.
janantikam a speech privately addressed to another character which is unheard
by someone else (the only exception is IV 4.1 , where janantikam a ppears to be used
in the sense of svagatam, which is indeed read by LM mss unfortunately of no great
authority). apavarya is generally supposed to have the same sense as janantitam.
But in this play it is apparently so used onty twice, here and at rv 7.1. In seven other
instances (IT 12.3, 12.10, IV 2.6, VI 6.5, 7.12, IUS. VIR 4.8) it is more natura] to
suppose that the character is speakiog to himself; and at V 27.1, where all but th.ree
mss read apava.rya, we can scarcely suppese anything else, since Malan is oot
speaking to Miidhava, and the only others on the stage are and
KapalakuI?-4a1a! If we return to the two places in which apavarya seems to equal
janantikam., we find here that it is omitted by many mss; and that at IV 7.1, though
Malati uses a vocative, she Dlay very well not intend Mlidbava to hear her (be does
not indeed reply). If apavarya has a synonym, therefore, this would appear to be
svagatam and not janantikam. Whether there is in fact. a difference between apa-
to
varya and tbe more frequent svagatam. is difficult say: possibly the former implies
some conventional stage gesture, and means secretly - with precautions against
being heard'. It is perhaps going too far to assume that apa a.rya may never be
used in talking to another person, and so I accept it here on the authority of ABC-
DGJ, but with some hesitation.
Ila vidya seems to give more appropriate sense than There is
another reference to Madhava's intention of studying at I 9.5.
11.5 The stage direction sailkhadbvanil), not being widely attested, eems lo be an
interpolation. Since a stanza is devoted to describing the sound, it is perhaps more
artistic not also to reproduce it. mechanically.
12.1 sthiyatam The implication of leave-taking in the phrase makes the fo).
lowing stage direction ity perfectly natural but the presence of the
latter may explain the variants upon the former.
12.3-12.8 The mss evidence suggest that this passage is repeated almost identicaUy
at "Ill 3.4-3.7, but with omission of the sentences 'ha tada . .. and avi .. .' .
Il 12.3 Notes 245

There s3J!lbba 0 seems also to b.ave rle plaoed ppabha 0 , possibly by an oversight
for which Bhavabbuti himself was responsible.
12.3 This (with db for h) is the r,e ading of CGI her'e - cf. I at 7.1 and
of GI at III 3.4. The rle ading is a good one, and theJie seems a I"easonable chance
that here at least it is tbe genuine one easiL corrupted to
12.9 is evident! used herre in the sense of passage or stairway. The
variant may weU ha e a similar sense. [{"'would appear at any rate to be
some technical term connected with houses: Hariha:ra and Amara gloss it as
and it occurs t.wice in the Hari in the neighbourhood of the
word dhvaja" appar,entJy in the sense of 'sign post'.

A.C T III
pr.4 ko ria kilo ' How long is' it now that her Re erenae, the alms round apart, has
de oted. herself to Malali .' This eems the most natural {ran lation of the text as
it stands. The question. is complica ed by a similar passage in the Ratnavafi Act
ill (lioe three), where bowe er e . ery edition I have consulted reads ko vi and
not ko via - ko vi kiilo Uie aacchia gadae, 'it is sometime since she came and
went, a meaning which fitsery weU in the context there. Hereon the other band,
even if .a gainst tbebetter mss we were to adopt ko vi, the expression would not be
particularly suitable: something stf100ger is needed to j ustify pamuddhasi. If Bha va-
bhfiti by any chance was remembering the pbrase from the R atna all, therefore,
if eems that be ,a dapted it to h' O'l,!,m purp e. (Cr. Sak VI 4._ ..) (The chaya in
Har Cal ' kopi ca. could be a mi tron lalion of kovia. [R .S.]
pr.8 ban. gbara as. an. independent woId is fr,e queot in the play and retains
initiaJgb. But. after as here and at pd , pr.H and 15.3, and after deva-
dagabbba (VI Lll ), tbereis e idence for the form bara. This parallels the deve-
lopment of such a cpd as devaghara (Turner 6528).
pr. 11 The ariety of the ,a dditionsruch this phrasereoei. es suggests tbat
they may be no more thaniolerpolation .
pr.l2 . . . .vadie That Malati s mGther accompanied the party to the
temple we knGW from lV 6.1 and it eems right. that bolh he and KamandakT
should be mentioned here, asio ilie r,e ading of ABeD. iTovisionalLy I have adopted
their rie ading but it is possible that tbisis a marginal re ision by Bhavabhuti frGm
which t.he parli le' a, whiCh .one would naturall expect has been dropped (ef.
Introduction sect. 7).
pr.16 The ,a ddition of lhe pbr;ase (ado bhodu tti is a statement
of the obvious whlch Bhavabhuti ma.' have in revision.
pr.21 vissambba This form is correct. for Sauraseni (Pischel 64). Onl here is the
evidence strongly in its favour. but ms distribution being broadly similar elsewbere
(V1 1.38, VII 0.21 •. 1.14)1 1 have adopted it regularly_
iriso tUiso Elsewh.e re e -dence is more in fa our of the formidisa. But
tarisassa is at VU ] .2, and. it ma be lbe irisa sb.ould be Eiead here as a member
of lhe doublel.
pr.23 ti If the pekkhealti of ABCD is genuine. pekkhea is presumably an
atmanepada
246 Notes IIl2b

(Harihara's chaya. na v» eti', seems to be nonsense. [R.S .J)

2b dadilty The reading is uncertain. This is presumably daya from da 'give' -
'she makes me affectionate presents. vacaI!1 dadaty, though a minority reading
is perhaps more attractive.
3b prastavitan The Newari prastavayaty is presumma bly a corruption.
3.4-7 See note to II 12.3-8.
3.8 keli kala kala 'indistinct' (er. Turner 2949) is supported by Jagaddhara 's 'avyakta-
dhvana': i.e. their mouths were crammed with blossom. If howe er the reading
keiikalflo is adopted at 12.15, it might be better to assume the same word here
- kavalaJ;lli..,;,kelikala 'whose sport is the swallowing etc' .
3.12 sea The reading seda elsewhere (12.25, 12.36, 12.44, Vll 1.5) receives less support
than here.
3.15 It is not necessary to adopt the v.I. since the use of the
verb praviS is not confined to actual entry onto the stage (cf. VI 7.21 and VII 0.15).
6.1 avaciJ:Iamba Transference to IXtb class cf. Pischel 502.
7c 'the beauty of a kadamba on which buds form, the instant it is
sprinkled etc' . The samucchvasatprati of GHJ is dull, and the
of ABCD is not quite clear (1'whose drop-studded buds revive etc'). Neither has
the characteristic assonance of samuksanaksana.
.. . .
7d This rather than kuqmala is the spelling of almost all good mss (and
similarly at VI I2b etc.). Turner 3250 cites derivatives from both form ..
It is an inte'resting fact that while the 1st plural of the indicative is u ed
freely in Sanskrit to express a proposal, in SaurasenI this function i taken over
by the forms in -mha, while those in -mo are restricted to indicative use (cf. Pischel
455 and 470). The fact that ABCD here read may therefore be signi-
ficant. The same mss ascribe the speech to Lavailgika, which cannot however also
be right: in her mouth the speech can only be a proposal. requiring the imperative
avaciJ:tamha. If on the other hand the speech is MlUatl's, it reads fo r bener as a
question, and as such probably requires the indicative: it then becomes a mild
protest from MaJati at Lavangilrn's unfiagging energy: - 'My dear, are we now
going to pick flowers somewhere else as well?', thus provoking Kamandld' re-
action.
8a To judge from the Newarl mss, Bbavabbiiti's later version was vaca-
nani His earlier version appears to have been te foUowed
by either sraJ!lsayaty or In view of the fa.c t that s3J!1Srayaty is markedly
inferior in sense and at the same time very similar orthographically, I do not think
we can be sure that it is anything more than a corruption'.
8.1 lajjate ABD's salajjam is of course impossible (cf. (ntroduction sect. 13).
8.11 sumaramo A more convincing illustration of Bhavabhiiti's dry ense of humour
than some of the examples listed by Harshe pp 54--60.
9.2 jadhi asatt.ha etc. The widespread omission of this phrase makes it possible that
BhavabhUti excised it in the course of revision. On the other hand, without it
Lavangika. implies rather awkwardly that the whole of Kflmandakl's foregoing
description was contained in Avalokita's brief mention of Madhava at n 8.3.
9.3 unmitha 'rapture, excitement' (Turner 2120).
Stanza 10 The constructjon of this stanza is not. quite clear. One might at first sight
seek to construe yad with· sa eva niscayaQ. But it. seems simpler to begin the u bor-
dinate clause with yad and to construe asya Dot with anubba am
but with
III 10.1 Notes 247

10.1 mahattv atnab A urious phrase - apparentJ 'attempt t.o· advance

me to greatnes'.
12.4 apy atra. Thi , whi his r reading, mak a more interesting point than anyatra.
atra will mean 'in affairs of the bean', and the parenthesis becoms a ubtle attempt
to increase Malaff' interest and mpalh. PalaeographicaU speaking, apyatra
would be easil corrupted to an atra, and a correction in the margin might have
led to tbe reinsertion of apy before an atra (K 0) or after ACD).
12.8 bhi.di 'de An unu ual fOImation, which I cannot find discussed an whe.:::.
12.10 anuk.:a.mp·IO ) . Bhandarkar follow om of his mss in adding bbaga atya
here, but tb· gives of course the wrong sense.
12. 11 iikk.biadi Cf. n. .1
12.13 iliddba ' tou bed' Skt. ·aligdba from lih (Pi cbel 303). Hemacandra's den ation
belps to throw light on the ,'arian(S here. For aligdba as an alternant of
cf. mugdb mtiqba.
12.14 ahiaa.n. Cr. VD pr. 10. where A and D ha e dh. not as here h.
12.15 . Turner 6493 derives forms in dumm- from ·duman.
12.16 palhattha The attempt of Pis bel 2 5 to di t.inguisb pallattha = parya ta from
palhattha = praWasta receives 'even I upport than here at IV I. 6 and VII t,42.
12.17 a.v iaviasiasii A reading eems the m like! to und rlie the others. Both
vikasita and sita ought to change t to din' urn..s.en'i. But the ms evidence suggests
strong! that Bha bhlib acrifi ed dialect accuracy for the as onance of a iasi
with aviavi.
12.23 mahaggbavida Th' form:, though Dot mentioned b), Pischel is well attested i.n
PSM, andeems likely to ha been the true reading.
12.24 jura 'd 'angered, piqued' (fumer -259 .
sajjhasa For aJhvasa (Pischcl _99 .
12.26 paroppan Cf. X 14.5. Pischel 311 describes the form parappara as probably
fal e.
12.27 savisesa etc.. [t ' difficult to be certain of the on tru tion - ? quite unbearably
Increasing and unrestraine.d.I cruel' .
12.29 pammaadi. for pramla ati eems quite po ible although the form is Qat quoted
in PSM .
Cr. I 15.2. TIle e idence tor rather than t;tihida e er here but
there is quite trong er III 12.47 VII 1.46 1.4 ). di u es the form at para.
286 and suggests that it. equals either or b doubHng before an accented
owel (pischel 194 nihila. Against the first explanation may be urged the fact that
the modern derivati es ti ted by TJ rn r 7154 ha e all retained. the velar.
I adopt the ewan reading. It is difficult to understand how the word
t;timma:nta, glossed in editions as ninni amaJ?a, can. po ibly be a passi e form.
12.32 mottii anti The ewan reading, upported b . M 0 has the ad antage of
a onance with KaOO, mol1ia from maulrtilca bould be neuter. but the pre ent form
m.a weU be ell! to a conftation .·th muicta (muktika), iDee mo t ID read mottia-
barn at VI 7.10. In vie of this., the · uppo ition that tbe long a re ul from a wrongly
correct.ed mottia vali ' p ib · but no nece
12.36 ca.nda leb:i 'the moon crescent of t.er forehead urface'. The actual
phrase rp4li.la has urvived in GUjarat. 'niia, af . (Turner 10971 .
12.39 ,cumbida p freta Il.lisanda 'beginning lolio because ki ed.
12.44 pajjbaridA If ea is omitted, pajjh.arida mu t arry a similar ignifi anoe b it elf.
pajjharida 'dripping urner 512 .
248 Notes III l2.45

paa The evidence for this form is as strong here as it is for pact. at VII pr. 9.
uVYamanta must be intransitive here.
12.45 vasa, for parsva, may be the reading which underlines the variant: 'pina a
jaghanamar:t<;!anasya ekadeSe na svasthanabhiite' vall .
12.46 ukkbubbbanta fo r is more appropriate here than ariaots meaning
'plucked out' etc .
iisasanta for ut -sva at (Turner ) 866).
12.47 vevanta etc. ·the covering fold of her trembling lender arm '.
12.54 ta pekkha etc. It eems clear that the sentence hould run continuou ly down
to tti. The key word of the con truction are therefore a ... kiyac-
kuaHivasflOata., katham iva imflOi . .. mukbani ime ca ... anar-
thakarir:tah iti. The verb to be upplied with avasanati'! is bbavi-
A difficulty is that the word kusalava anata and expre
the notion in opposite ways: this 00 doubt is the reason for O 's na in front of
anartha - 'Consider, Reverence, how long the outcome can be fortunate and how
these nights can fail to be di astrou '. Or one might emend va to kadbaf!1
v1i-'how long it will be fortunate or (on the contrary) how disastrous these
nights will be'. But keeping the text as it stand, one must interpret kiyacciram to
mean specifically 'how little time ' - ' realise how little time it will stay fortunate
and how these nights will be disastrous: (Cf. kiyat 'just for a moment' in Subba-
14. 18.)
12.55 kecciram The form favoured by the ms both here and at VIII 5.2 (cr. al 0
VIII 4.3) is not di cussed by Pischel or mentioned in PSM.
12.56 vammabassa kadham va For these forms ef. n 0.44 and 0.43.
12.57 uneUa bimba ' whose orb has risen '. uvvella as at 1I 0. 12.
12.60 baula It is tempting to emend to maiila, or to interpret baUla as mukula (Turner
10146). Against the latter cour e, however, is the frequent occurrence of bakuJa
in this play as the name of a specific plant.
15c T he mugdha of many mss, which add little to the ense may
merely have supplied the loss of da.I?-<:ia or
15.6 The reading is uncertain. saI!lgalida lipped from h ' cage eems the
right word, but most mss read it in its stem form, which is very difficult to construe
with any of the immediately following substantive. I therefore adopt the nom g
termination of O.
vea vira vejaa Tbese .. ords are found only in the ewflrl mss, but
see m very likely to be genuine - The form of his bad awesome in th maje t
of the banner imitation terrifying to men through tbe whirling with terrible peed
of his taiL' The omission in other ms may be no more than aCCIdental.
15.11 'crushed'. This deS! word, apparently usuall pelt camaqhida,' full
attested in PSM.
15.13 ghaggharoraIli According to Jagaddhara uraHi is a dei word meaning 'gala-
garjita' . I have adopted this explanation since it fits in. ery well bere but I can find
no trace of the word elsewhere. urala is a Pkt development of udara (Turner \. 935)
but the final i would not easily be accounted for .
(Harihara glosses oralisabda as 'dirghamadhuro dhvanilf. [ R .S.])
'cheek filling. An unusual instance of doubleeli ion.
15 . 14 bhesavida This causative stem is mentioned in PSM, though nol discussed b
Pischel.
III 15.15 ales 249

15. 15 0rampa - i.e. a arampa , uning down' (Turner 11). The word occurs also a t
VII 1.44.
15.17 pdhisa.ttie jiyidam The ariety of genitiv found before ji idaqt uggests that
none is original and that the force of the eDtence i 'eve!)' man for himself. In fact
the word jadha attle ' a little awkward On any other interpretat.ion.
ti I preserve th ' on the almo t universal authori ty of the InS • but the function
of the word here i ob ure. It rops up in a imilarly m terious fashion elsewhere,
upported n t overwhelming! bur by a number of good ms.s , e.g. at VI 5.8 and
12.1.
Stanza]8 Tb ' . the version of AB D. will be een from the apparatus, other
mss pre em a different 'ler ion: -
va.yarp. ba.ta idu rata.Q, k.ram' gata pa' kanyaka .. .
katham tada\,apautad a
pur I
kUl0 ) pi 1ak rnda ab aiva thitah . ..
ca p ' una hataJ? ...
. .. pramatbilaS ca da.q1 .

This is the reading of EGHIKL(M 0 ): fo r the fourth pada tbe Southern ms

ub titute what' the third pada in the text ca pa 'una hato vya ur a au
Iq-taS camuna. In the uthem versi n re asau r fe 10 the tiger. whi h i
perhaps the first interpreta ion to pring la mind. whereas in the adopted text a au
. eems to be the ubject f both halaJ? and referring to Makaranda. A further
point rather against tbe ado pted er ion' then tbat \\e must up pi tena with
pramathitary as a ubjoct for prativibudhya although in this di jointed and dramatic
tyle that probabl matters little. One might interpret the text 0 that the tiger is
vyasuand then re jves (if Vi can take to mean jar a moment'), but thi
spoils the contrast between the at ahita of the third pada and the udden bappy
euding of the fourth.
Against the rejected ,'er ion ma r be urged its extreme baldnes . 'He has been
struck grievou 1), by the be t' is roUowed by 'And lh tiger is de [rO ed'. The
phrase . prati ibudhya d help to gi e an impr iOIl of a logical and
chronological equen of e eOls. FurtlIermore kathaJ'!l ... makes a natural
half verse: it is a.\ Icward to divide it betv.,een tbe econd and third padas. The last
con ideration iF pre ed lOO far would argue - gain t this being an in lance of
revision, and ugge:t that other readings are all corruptions of the ewan er ion.
On balance howe er it eems more probable that Bha abhuti originally vvrote tbe
stanza as it appears in EGH! L. and that feeling the need to make Mak.aranda
actions more intelligible be in ened the phra es' yasur a au Kfall camuna' (carele
of the ambiguity of the pronoun ) and prati ibudb a ( a) , - at the ame
time turning \\ bat had been the first pMa low a prose entence.

ACT I
0.22 saCCI 0.23 idiJ;tio The ms e idenoe ugges lrongl that Bbava-
bbuti does no di t.ingui h in Pra it between patinT and adinl.
0.30 antamagara 'in thi } cit. '. f. antarnagare in MR HI 24 (Hillebrand t' ed. p 90).
250 Notes IV 0.37

0.37 The evidence of 0 (and, from the other side, of MN) uggests lhat this
reading is not 'linked' with the omission of · [ as ume that it is to
be construed with priridayasya: the mss give no punctuation whether before or
after the word.
1.15a The omission of this in ABDK possibly due to error. The insertion of asi here
of after piasahi is possible, but does not seem neces ary .
1.18 Madayantika's response sounds rather bald without the Bhaavadi of EH, which
perhaps should be accepted despite its poOr authority.
isisa Fern a stem from (Pischel 411 ).
1.20 ti 'It should rather be said that it is our desires wh ich are fulfilled ' -
because Malat. will real.Ly end by marrying Madhava, although her s urface meaning
is ' because we will be connected with you'. It seems very probable that Lavailgilca'
reply is deliberately ambiguous, and ti makes the point neatly. The
reading pi might perhaps be interpreted in the same way, but its meaning
is more obscure: the most obvious translation of it would be 'This hould be said
(or, Should this be said 1) to us also' .
1.24 Dvvaranta 'surplus, overflowing' (Turner 2356). Bhavabhiiti uses this verb e eral
times: cf. VI 19.10, VU 0.74 and 1.20 (where the actual phrase bhariduvvaranta
recurs).
1.25 dolivida A causative formed from dolayate (Turner 6585). Most of the variants
would also be possible.
dolivida ' in such a way that firrnne is ha ken' .
1.26 palbatthaoti Cf. III 12.16. A denominative Cormed from the past participle.
kandalida The Newan reading is preferable, fo r the assonance with the fol-
lowing word .
It is difficult to decide whether this should be spelt with or
The ms evidence is of limited value : C for instance writes at IX 1.
1.27 sacchahi - given in PSM as equalling though not d iscu ed by PischeL
1.29 pramoham would be a very probable starting-point for the other two reading;
pramodam and mobanam. If pramoham is genuine it must bear the same meaning
as mohanam ('suratam' Jagaddbara), which otherwise is the reading to adopt.
3c nivyijam It is striking that there is the same variation between niTVyajam and
avyajarn at V 12a. It may conceivably be tbat Bhavabhuti came to prefer the form
nirvyaja to avyaja, and made a misinterpreted marginal correction at both places.
(nirvyaja is guaranteed by metre in MV IT 36.) The support of GH here however,
complicates such an explanation.
4 .8 jinimi It is frequently difficult to distinguish in the mss between m and s.
4.14 ' respective differences' .
etc. I do not understand the reading of A and 0 loo doubt of B also,
if it had survived) -
Stanza 7 er. UR IV 15.
7d 'bring<; as a sequel'; pTa increa es'.
7.14 Madayantikaya For with the gen., ef. UR VI 19.6.
Se Cf. UR HI 29a.
10.1 niskrintau Ms alignment here and at the end of Act VI rather ugge ts that
originally wrote sa.r ve in both pLaces, and sub equenU
altered this in the cause of greater accuracy.
 V 2a Notes 251

ACT V
2a nitya nyasta 'mystically touched, as a daily obligation'.
5b On the \I.t. cararya, Bhandarkar rightly points out that the notion of 'graceful
footsteps. is not ery appropriate in this context. This' possibl a correction by
Bhavabhiiti.
Stanza 6 = Subha .ita 93,
6b prinUl 'b. the o'llering of i edges earth seems to be drowning beneath an
influx of water' -in other words darkne approaches like the tumbling walers
of a ri er in pate. Vfti 'covering' is not a common word but the reading is made
fea ible by the presence immediately before it of vri ante. The V.t. rtt a I find
more difficult to tran lat - apparentl , 'by a ion of boundarie ': that is
to say, the limits of \; ibility progres jYely contract. But such a meaning for
vrttya' far from ob iou. At 1\' I it means 'as by way of Bet een readings so
orthographically imilar, ms authority anno of ourse count for too much. Indeed,
of the ms hieh read \'!it)ci here. it will be se n that COl read nirY!tti . u for nir-
fti u at VII _d, where the metre proves them fal e.
6d taruJ.Layati Apparently mature '. cf. Karpiira.mailjari. I 2(kq
7a 'zeigend, verrathend' P
8a avimukta mad grathita I foUow 0 in ombining the readings avi and mad, both of
which eem d irable: {he garland b in . woven by Madbava, he refuses to sur-
render it: this explains (he atata adhiva of th next tine. The reading atimukta
'be and pearl' j here forced and banaJ .
8b subbagirpEta 'pre ented delicately' -i.e. as not to crush the garland.
Stanza 9 = Subha. ita 075. Pada ab = MY Il 45ab.
9b prasnauti ' ) 'elds abundanti ' ; prastauti 'begin '.
9c udayiid Tb force of the cpd is no doubt collected from the cre oent of the new
moon ju t as it bas ri en' . The alternati kaloccaya 'a heap of cresc nts' would
not be an impo ible hyperbole, and may have been Bha abhuti' first er ion.
9.1 de 'In truth if 1 have no ight of her there is not e en the lightest
difference.' Tb ' . the readi ne in toto on 1 of M but' perbapi the best tart ing
point for tb ariant \ hi h ouJd well be based on mi readings of the
sanamneti of IM O. The two main altemati are tat- amdarianena as in GHL,
. b eeing her lhere would not be the slightest. differenoe, and the
of ABeD, ·the difference caused by eeing her would be ery slight.' [ follow
M in preserving the na found also in GHL: the alternative would be to read simply
svalpo is . '(he difference' extreme Light. s alpopj i' couLd onl mean
'although slight there is a differ nee as Tripurari it, but. thi goes against (he
conteJct. and the eOliment of tanza 10. Tripurari al 0 con tru satyam with
anam. but atsatyam is too ommon a phrase in itself to make this probable.
9.S antll "rhi because m inward mental process is of one form with her'.
pravrtti ould pres umab I. mean impl 'from a imilariry of operation'.
Tbe phrase is e 'dent based on a recollection of Yoga. Siitra I 4 'vrtti- arupyam
ita.ratra'. Bha abouti ould hardl therefore have changed antarvrtri to the ewan
pravrni. The Southern reading Y!1ti, in conformity with the sutra. is possible, but
may easily be someone else correction. At an rate Bha abbiiti appears to have
turned the Quotation to his own purposes : in tbe siitra, vrtti is ariipa not with the

20
252 Notes V 10

the perceived but with the perceiver - ' yunhane yas tad-a i 'i ta :
Vyasa.
Stanza 10 = 785.
l1a paryanta - i.e. of the p yres.
pratirodbi might also be taken separately as qualif ing
12a asastrapata nirvyajam 'genuine in nOl being purified by t he knife' . Commentat ors
are uncertain whether the flesh of those killed b the word is too good or too bad
for goblins. In the la Lter case, puta may be the p.p. of puy, so far atte ted o n l from
lexika. The presence of the word in the immedia t.e ontext sugge t.s
that puta may have a special application to goblins.
nirvyaJam - v.!. avyajam as at IV 3c.
Stabza 13 = 1531.
Stanza 14 = 1533.
14a gras a The 8vasa of give as Profe or Ingall points ut a
particularly good sense - 'half dropped because of their irregular panting'.
15b vikirna 'dishevelled'. The v. 1. i al 0 pas ible .
Stanza 16 = 1530.
17a Jagaddhara says that as ace pi i incorrect b Panini VU 1.75.
If such a c rit icism was known to Bhavabhuti, he ma ha e altered it to tbe a thi
of ABD - 'cooked by stewing in bones wbicb weat with heat'. The .1. asnah
gives poor sense.
17d 'having sucked out'.
18b sarasi This reading, commended by Bhandarkar. i now found in two good mss,
and I have adopted it. It has the advantage palaeographically of connecting the
two variants, both po or in en e, sirasaand sahasa.
Stanza 18 = 1532.
18.3vivardhita's The cemetery is cut off'. Tbis makes the refer'e nce to the river more
pointed: he can pursue them no further - ef. tarat-saI!lrodhi in 19c.
Stanza 19 = 1534. Pada a closely rle sembles UR U 28a.
20d skbalayati gatim The reading skhalatica is odd, since it lea es dehastam-
bhal? without construction. Conceivably Bhavabhiiti intended some other change
as well, which has been lost.
Stanza 21 The Newan reading; supported by various m , ucca rat and eeru
to be far from improving the verse. Both may have arisen from simple error.
Stanza 22= Subhasita 73.
23b utpbila ' the expansion due to pressllre'. But the Marathi descendant of this word
means 'excess' (Turner 1839), and such a meaning would also give good sense here:
'blossoming from the excessive pressure. The reading sphara would mean ' flowering
wide'.
23c tuJiga I print hesitantly the reading of A BDO, with upport from C
and 1. The important variant is netra £or twiga, which would identify Camunda
with Siva even more closely than the other attributes here given her. [f
is correct, I suspect tbe may hen: be used as an obscure ynonym
(metri gratia) for Cf. MW under ' a12'· (The of PUn;la a ras an
is unfortunately based on a most improbable present participle tungat.) jvalad
anala pisan.g a will then mean tawny as blazing fire' - i.e. the whirling of her lawn
locks is compared to the circle made by a whirling torch. the fore t of h igh
matted loc ks'.
V 23d Notes 253
uddirti 'scattered b the elevation/ waving of the banner' is more pointed than
uddhfita, pre umabl 'haken up and scattered .
23d tila 'clapping' must urel be right, both from ease and euphony. The cola of
ABeD, u ual meaning jacket is very odd.
25a There is Little to choose in dramat ic effectivene between haviog
recite the first balf of the tanza and the second,
and having them both recite the first half . with distracted. and
finishing OD his own. But the ldi.palikau of I immediately below
(25b.3) is urely wrong.
25c mantnl. sidhan) artbam 'indicated for m achie ement of magical power'.
25.1 "ama The point of the Locati... is tbat be goes on beltering her in one
arm. I accept the ama of BD (a po ible add,iti.on by Bhavabhiiti) - be would
certaini need to bis free.
26a I follow the of I and 0 here. The reference is quite ob iously to Malati's
speech at 25b. l . To describe himself as tyakt.a.Sa.nkah and is
pointless. I take praHipa as qualifying our own 10 e for whom was
freely publi hed b a peecb wbich renounced hesitation .
26.3 paJ:layitj - or both forms are po ible.
29d prighil.ra 'Bowing is not atte ted elsewhere, though praghara in this sense is
required (Turner 8484) to e plain later deri ati es. This reading seems preferable
to pragbbara, wb.ich occurs at V 19b to llle sense of ' lope but which here would
have to mean no more than. 'mass'.
Stanza 30 = 405. Pada resembl UR 11 3 .
Stanza 32c.d resembles MV n led.
32.5 It is quite possible that Bhavabbuti originall wrote a verse of which the first haJf
was ' parya at3.1l] eLat kariUa atanaIpi drutam. If 0 the elimination of
and ubstitution of ida.I!l for etat is a deliberate attempt to reduce the words to
pro e. Howe er the addition in ABO E, prru;ta ina.J:t, is odd: Aghora-
ghaIga is not acting out of love for Kapakw;ldala.
33.6 kapilika Some mss omit thi , or. ub titute kapaLikam for kapaJikau,
but Madbava ma be tak,eo to ba\ gained aJread a ps chofogical ascendancy
o er Aghoraghruga.
34a CL 5

ACT I
0.3 tvaya etc. Th an mss read ta m.inn avasa.re t p'i4yanty
api. Tbi sort of crux ' . parti ularl. difficult to deaJI with. The trivialit of tbe
change argues for rather than again t i being b ' the author himself. But pT4yanty
'oppre ing. injuring rather than nighnary 'attacking. trikingeems an odd word
to choose when it is the fulility 0 Kapalairu.l?<;ta.la s attack whicb is emphasised.
2.3 ta.t bi 'and introducing a furth instruction, is mucb the mo t satisfactory reading.
2.11 mhi It is extremet odd that so man m (including all extant Newari
mss) should [1ead hich can only tand for the fern. aji\apta asmj'.
(Cf. Pischel 85 end . .
bars Cf. note on ID pr.8
4.6 ,d isanCi. The particle ,Q: found only in CM . O. E en if it i omitted dls ant i
254 Notes VI4.7

must be construed with what follows : ajjbasidao cannot here be a main verb,
because the elephants must have been mounted earlier on and in another ·place.
dalida 'ground (by the teeth)" cf. Turner 6220. The v.I. kavalida 'made into
a mouthful' (d. Turner 2960) would also be possible.
4.7 ... 'wad', Turner 12045.
sarahasadara kkhalida 'violently obstructed'. At III 12.14 and VU pr.lO, where
the comparative suffix -dara may also be read, the text is similarly confused. The
v.I. va'iara 'union' is not here particularly appropriate.
Sa ....yiira mecaka nibhair The most obvious meaning of mecaka is ' eye on a pea-
tail', and mayiira rather than mayiikha is therefore the more probable
reaCiill'g. nibhair rather than cayair seems also desirable, partly because caya would
make bhuri otiose, but more importantly because a word expressing comparison
is badly needed, and is not easily supplied from the iva following vivartibhir. The
sense of the stanza is confused and awkward unless we take the first two com-
pounds as expressing similes for unmukha maJ?i jyotir vi tiin a ir, in the same way
that is given two fully-fledged similes in the second half of the stanza. In the
second cpd the simile is indicated by chaya 'possesseu of the lustre or,
and nibhair 'having the appearance or balances this. Like massed eyes of pea-
cocks' tails glittering, with all the lustre of flashing blue-jays' wings, seeming to
to shift and change, the radiated gleam of the jewels fiUs the sky to the horizon'.
Jagaddhara, very implausibly interprets bhuri as 'gold' and mecaka a 'lovely'
5.2 pailka patta The reading is uncertain, some mss giving either panka or patta alone.
But if pankapatta is correct, it presumably refers to gold and silver leaf made not
by beating out but by liquefying the metal.
(Harihara's chaya has which is glossed [R.S.])
5.4 has a lexical meaning ' pearl' ,and that may be one of its two
senses here. (Cf. the use of tarn. in I 27.)
7.9 uttaraim If the v.I. uttaria is correct, the meaning is presumably doth for the
upper garment; this being draped like a sari and not a tailored garment.
is here for vafl?ya (Turner ll345), which according to a gloss in the
can mean 'saffron', with which may be compared. a Gujarati
cognate of varJ?a (Turner 11338) meaning fragrant yellow powder rubbed on bride
on auspicious day before wedding.'
7.11 a A chaplet of white flowers may well have been the last item on
the list, but the mss do not yield a satisfactory reading, and their confusion is in-
explicable. api9a should be masculine, and iLis to be observed that of those mss
which read api<,\aq1 H prefixes esaca to the compound. The final tti of many m s
is not easy to explain. aplq.a as in the N ewari mss, might f1epresent the rnase.
plural, but the Newari while very attracti e paleo-
graphically, given curious sense: one would nardly expect Howers t.o be scented
with sandalwood!
7.24 anga rio The angariiam of ABeD is quite extraordinary, and it may
be that a further word giving the accusative a construction was marginally added
by Bhavabhuti but lost thereafter.
7.29 oijjbivida is for *nirjhapita (cf. Turner 5371).
7.37 n
It is difficult to decide rationally between It and for this verb, when
the mss their position over two lines bel.ow. Evidence is limited
concerning (VI 2.11), which might at any rate be in a different position to
the more directly verbal forms. is strongly attested at U pr.7 and VII t .86 ..
VI 7.39 Notes 255

In view of the fact tha all mss read u attamana at 11.9, I have adopted. vatta-
miil}a here.
7.39 hisef;ls 'ill our heart ' - as at 11.15.
7.41 paloesi From its cont'ext, this word hould ha e an exhortatory rather than an
indicati e force - as . hould karesi at 8,4 belo ; iI?-I?-avesi 11.5' sumaresi
VII 1.80; avahida bhavesi VIIi 6 .2, ma visumaresi X 7.5. At each place the
fonn in though not undisputed, is much the most probable r'e ading - with the
exception of VIH 6._ . here bhava is a possible .1. : e en there however bhavesi
is the reading of the ewan mss and of E.. In additioil kar esi at VII t.64 might be
thought to bave either indicative or potential force and it is a possible reading at
VD 0. 57 (as is bodhesi at VU 0.17) . The 2nd g of the optatie is not fOurld in Saura-
sen! (Piscbel 459)' for the imperati e beside the fonn kuru one would expect to
find either karesu or karehi. The termination -si hould be confined to the indicative.
Howe er the abo e eumples uggest that Bba\labhilti felt himselffree to use forms
ending in -esi in other than an indicatj e sense.
Stanza 8ah = UR I 36ab.
8.3 ·sambbaraJ:ls is here from as i ambharijjanta VU 0.38 and sambharia
Vlll 5.5. saqIbharida It 15.4 on t.be other hand is from
8.4antare [[ would be easy to mistake this for an and therefore
to insert r;ta again before and this seems to be what bas happen.ed.
9d a asada is also po ible .
9.5 etti This, or some phr,ase similar to it. seems very likely t.o
be original but its precise form ' not clear. I an find no word etta inPra krit, though
possibly some form or other of the pronominal base etad. is in question.
9.7 para kera. 'belonging to another' . k'e ra is from kat)'a (Turner 30 8). kerakassa as
a separate word occurs at VU 1.78.
9.10 simi snehas S The e an reading yukta snehasya is surprising.
It presumably means 'Miidha a is a fittin,g person to be loved. But Madhava has
done nothing in the immediate oontext to demonstrate this undoubted truth.
Makaranda' remark must be an admiring comment on the force of Malan's
passion. If the Ne an reading were something like tadpia4 snehas.ya rather than
plain snehas a it would be more appropriate, and again it may be that a revision
has not survi ed intact.
Stanzas 10 .and 11 All forms are ambiguously ,sanskrit and Prakrit. See Introduction
sec!. 8. The point of read by EGlllKL before tama 11 is not immediately
obvious' but if as tile ms aIignmem suggests to be possible) this represents Bha a-
bh uti s own earlier .ersion, Miidha a's joy is presumably from Malatl's accepting
him as La angika.
1 t.6 A deSi word!, blooming. not discussed b Pischel or mentioned in
Turner, but possibly deri ed from vya
11.9 . . er. biaam. UR IV 7.
1 L 13 tae is for tva a. Cf. VI 19.9, VU pr. 12, 0.61 0.82, ],,4, 1.69 VUI 8.6. The Prakrit:
equi · a]ent oftaya is tae.
123 i The words mu t urel be taken together - 'as if sprinkled
by her when she pres es against mc;her full breasts (in consequence) distorted.
The reading of ABO a apiq.an.i.rbhinna 'cleft by pressing against me is also aUrae-
tie, The possibility howe er of the latter s being a genuine re ision is made more
dubious by the dj agr;eement of Co
12.1vip,paJaddhi The addition of Hi in ABCDE is difficult to understand. The vippala-
256 Notes VI 13.1

mbhapJlasado of GHIK (perhaps supported by the reading; of and 0 ) would

have a similar meaning to aI}.uOJavippalambha at 7.4, but the sentiment here on
Malati's lips would be uncharacteristicallY bold, and seems to me quite intolerable
without also reading svagatam, which is hardly attested at all, and not by any of the
mss having this variant. With considerable dissatisfaction I therefore foUow LM.
13.1 jjen This particle seems to underlie the readinf$ of EGHIKL, and gives an
appropriate emphasis here - 'you are rebuked, and rightly so.'
l4c pranaya 'vivahakale grahaq.am' -Jagaddhara.
14.2 see.ms to mean here simply 'wearing' or 'putting on'.
15.1 'accomplished, put into effect' . Whatever the origin of this fonn (?from
nirvrta: see Turner 7392 nirvarati, and 7395 nirvartate) it functions as the equi-
valent of nirvartita. There is good authority for it here and at vn O.66.I?-ivvattida
is perhaps to be read at VU 1.41 and VIII pr. 4, 8.38.
15.9 riji 'coloured with streaks of pollen'. The assonance of ragarajirafijita, found only
in the Newan mss, is very much in Bhavabhiiti 's manner.
15.14 Bhagavaty imanam The bhagavatya of CGHIKL may be no more than a cqr-
ruption.
16d 'Continue to treat her with both intimacy and tenderness'. CIMNO s
'the tenderness of intimacy' is also good. I choose AD's reading as the
most likely to have been corrupted into the other two, particularly into EGHKL s
which is surely objectionable: the locative is a perverse case to use
here, especially when a locative already exists in suvadanayam, the presence of
which, on the other hand, would serve to encourage the corruption.
lTh 'vindicated, proved true' - Bhandarkar.
17.3-4 Milati/ Lavaligiki Again Lavailgika acts as MaIafi s . pokesman. Failure to
realize this led on the one hand to Malati for Lavangika in LMO, on the other to
MalatIlavatigike(ubhe) for Malati (Lavangika) in GHIK.. It is to be noted that the
mss are unanimous in assigning 18 .2 to Lavangika.
18b sevadbir 'treasury' seems a little better than the variant • sampado . ucces ' and
'put together' (which would qualify kamfil?, and ,echoes samagra in the
preceding line).
18.4 pravartasva 'set about getting yourself married. This seems
to be the underlying reading, except that the evidence is more in favour of atmfmam
than atmanal;l: but does oot usualJy take an accusati.ve. GKL'
manam looks like a simplification, especially since H puts pari artasva in front
of the same reading. ACDE's pravartasva is so bald it must surely be due to acci-
dental omission. In fact it is very suggestive that after pravartas a AD should
actually start a much longer lacuna (supplied in the margin of A). In upplyiog this,
the accidental omission of the first words, pariQayatmaoal:J. would be perfectly
natural.
18.6 javanikint antardhiya 'hiding myself behind the curtain'. Only GKM support
javanikayam. I can find no example elsewhere of the accu ati e after antardha
in this sense, but it is justifiable from tbe original sense of the verb - i.e. putting
the curtain between us .
18.8 baJtv anartba If the word sulabha is read it must qualif anartha, a
in elL: sulabham api qualifying etad is awkward. It is possible that ulabha :
bahv:anartham was Bhavabbuti's earlier version, and babv:aoartha·
his later. The fact that I reads etad immediately after anartham tends slightly
confirm this hypothesis.
 VI 18.14 ores 257

18.14 priyim . andana' a lu Icy man, to be getting u h a mistress '. The

evidence ugge ts that Bha abhuti later altered this to pri avayasyam
manasa muhiirtam api presumabl to be more explicit: priya-
va asyam, to indicate that it was reaUy Makaranda; manasa, that no love-making
could take place ; muhurtam api because the deception could not. last indefinitely.
Lf this is 0 we ma weU prefer the liyely simpli ity of his earlier version.
19c lad Con ei ably a or recti D in the interest of greater clarity since tad-
bbu 0 might be t k n nom pi, or hernati eI \ iihariJ?as be taken as a genitive
in agreement v.rith it.
19d preyo Bh andarkar poi.n out that this rather than 're 0 is th appropriate word
here according to the distin tion drawn in the If VI take into con-
sideration the alignm ot of mss at 0 at X -4d. it is possible to uspeet that Bba a -
bhiiti became av are of the inappropriaten of using 'reyas qftemporai advantage,
though in the later pas age the word repla in::; it is pre. as in the Southern recen-
ion, and karyam in the ewan.
19.3 in addition to m Ol.llI} union with Malati.
ity bba ati - that is what ou ha e declared in tell ing us to await the
arri a1 of Makaranda and Madayantika.
19.10 un'arimo 'we are de tfOp' - a 'i. amahe Harihara and Jagaddh ' a). Cr. note
on [V 1.22. Bhandar ar' not on this is confused: he rightJ mentions the meaning
'superfluous' bllta this 'comes to the me his earlier interpretation, , be
is not going a ay but left. beh ind. and Mi'dali herself is going awa with her lover' .
GHlL' 'c aramah' ho uni in orruption.
20.2 coriki liribo If the altemati\e title of ACD presumably 'house of
plaster' is Blta abhuti it.' nOI lear wby he should ha e ubstituted it, or whal
its ' ignificanoe is.

ACT VII
pr.6 ghra DI' adhu ara p umabl a dvanda,. 'bride and groom', is also
I
po sible.
pr.8 The omi ion in ame mss is presumabl accidental. The meaning of
the word h re appears [0 be 'belo ed or 'mislres "
pr.9 is for cf. 1.8_ and 11 7.5 . IT pr. 10.
is here ob iously a separate word.. er. note OD IT 0.13,
pr.lO so aete. The text is extremely onfused I foUow broadly the version of H, which
is also that of J agaddhara in ofar it can be determined, and (apart from what
is probabl an accidental omis: ion at the begioning) of I.
pr.ll dkharasaro(rosa) 'th ound of his LIable '. The assonance of aro ro a
makes the in lusion of the word am very probable.
denom,) 'dried up'; is for *a. arudita
(Pischel 566) 'on which tears ha fallen', I wonder whether here it might DOt
function as a ub tant] e '( hed) tears' but even a a participle it makes sen e -
'his tearful and qui ering ounlenanoe drying in. the fullness of bis anger'. The
ewan ms.s give omething quite different for this cpd; mantharapaehif!lsanki-
dfu?aa - po sib! a re ised version. but if so it to have been corrupted, Other
apparent corruptions are Ichuttanlcida Hand sudankida J. 0 reads 4hulukkhido,
258 Notes VII pr. 14

which PfiI1?asarasvati glosses as or and Jagaddhara knows a

variant 'khulungitam' equivalent to maunam.
(Harihara also gives 'maunam' as his gloss, but the corrupt state of both mss
at this point makes it impossible to determine his reading. [R.S.])
pr.14 is for aUlya: cf. aJ?ida for anita at 0.5 below. Pischel 81 does not allow this
shortening in SaurasenT.
U.18 addhante, presumably for ardhante, is cited in PSM to mean 'end portion' (cf.
Setubandha Yll 2). Bhandarkar reads uddhante 'at the upper end, but the u is
attested in few mss.
0.22 de This is very nearly the reading of O. 'slightly
shy' is a good addition but neither for sense nor sound would one wish in con-
sequence to sacrifice It is conceivable that Bhavabhiiti intended to add
and was mistakenly supposed to be cancelling
0.23 The reading J?a dummaJ?aissadi detracts just a little from the irony.
0.27 is from the present stem. would be the causative form.
0.28 The addition of Qa clearly spoils the sense, as Bhandarkar points
out.
pi ahi If this is the original reading, the appearance of piasahi in many mss is
not at all surprising.
0.29 is for vicchardita, but the evidence here and at 1.8 strongly favours
single At VID 4.3 on the other hand, the mss show a quite different alignment.
0.30 ambe It seems that .Bhavabhuti here improves on his original tumhe (EGHIKL)
by making politely identify berself with Madayantika, as Lavan-
gika does with Malatl in stanza I tat.ha nama .. .).
0.31 kusuma etc. Kamasiitra III 2.6. The editioD. in the KiiSi Sanskrit series reads
plain as do HIK here.
0.36 Iajja pasihanam - i.e. her modesty rightly to be seen as a positive virtue. laiia
is also possible.
0.42 vii,aribo seems preferable to plain avaraho : she is specifically asking what her
brother can have said.
0.43 Neither of the insertions before mama (that of EL bearing no resemblance to
that of GHIKMN) is an improvement. I follow the Newan mss and 0 in omitting
them.
0.46 can be derived from the stem daf:!1Sal given by Hemachandra: ef.
Pischel 554. is obviously also possible.
The Newan presumably represents a conditional, which
would be a very surprising formation, being rare even in Sanskrit. •
0.51 a •.. 'nor are you ignorant' . The double negative, as in ACDGH,
is quite appropriate. If one J?a is omitted, the sentence is best as a question.
'abuse in ignoble language' . 'un-
speakable' would also be possible.
uvilambba 'of his bad temper in censuring her'. The simple
uvalambhassa is sufficient, but leaves the origin of dummaQassassa unaccounted
for - possibly another example of revision by Bhavabhuti, but in that case one
supported both ry H and I, yet not by the Southern mss.
0.53 pi ' How then, must we know even what is not so r - i.e. since there
cannot be any foundation for Nandana's abuse, LavaJigika cannot be expected to
know what the foundation is. This the reading of the Newan mss and figur,es to
VII 0.55 Notes 259

some extent in the Southern recension. The principal ariant is 'vaca-gatam api
na jiinlmaQ , which appears to mean, ' How can we not know what is even expres-
sed in words?' That is to say andana has actuaU made the accusation. But it
does not seem that La angilca ought to say that she does know for Madayantika
ignores thi. in her reply and it does not fit in very ell with Lavailgika's indignant
outburst when M adB.yan tika. informs her of the accusation. It is just possible that
was meant to have the same significance as asantaam i.e. 'verbal, not
actual' and that Bha abhiiti altered the phrase because it was not clear.
sarasvaU reads (interpreted b. him as atmagatam) 'How can we know
what is in your mind, i.e. not et. told to us but knows the wants and
.
0.55 Yii Thi eems 10 be 8nagabbiiti revised version (cf. in
Sak. IV 5.6) replacing an original ta ram etla.aJ!l. The latter expression is used in
UR V 16.1: ' bbu asa: jivi-dharma yad rasamay'l kasya cit kva cit yatra
laukikfmam upacaras ,iira-maitrakal1} itil tarn. am ani-
am an anti I . contains the nation of love at
first sight: cf. in this plsy 0 1 3_.30.
0.56 bbat:bm.O Apparently attac.h ment to her husband s rival' -
or possibly, as a karmadharaya,attachment inimicable to her husband. Either
way the esa is alatf not ber busband s, and is the durabbisanga referred
to below.
0.58 amma.kio domminllo The ewfiriarnmaicasu dumma edi is puzzling and makes
DO sense.
0.63 'ouare not at present clearJ spoken. to'. Those who translate readings
suclt as to interpret as a future - ' you wil/not remain
inexplicitly addressed.
0.66 Cf. VI is. 1
O. 71 I mark: this word as corrupt, although it may be that bave here merely
a sense of unrecorded in the dictionaries. This is the Newari reading, closely
supported by and the text as known to Tripurari A glance at the apparatus will
show that it does not look like a corruption of any other reading.
might be adopted. but the eidence e erywbere else (cf. note on IT 0. 12) suggests
that Bhavabhuti uses uvveUa itself as a participle. My reason for suspecting that
may begenuioe .is that it crops up again below at 1.28 in a similar context
(mcluding the word but not placed immediately before it) read by a good
ms, I. which does not read it here. and by Tripuran SUn. the text of whose com-
meotary however is at this point unfortunately corrupt.ed The contexts require
that the word should signify sorue part of the face closely connected with the eye:
the only tra.ce I nave fo und of such a meaning is under Turner 7047 where Khowar
bru-na! is mentio.n ed as the bone above £be eyes ,a nd forehead between tbeeyes'.
but this is perhaps no more than a mild coincidence. A meaning such as 'eye-
lashes would fit both cont:exts fairly well. Cf. the verse 'smara . .. quoted in
Dhvanyaloka rH 4, which contains the line Lnayana :nalini-nal>-liIiitalp pibanti
I also 'na ana:nalinam iva vigalita-ll31am in Gitagovinda IV 14.)
0.73 a slcill born of Love the baUet-master's careful instruction'. A more
satisfactoty reading than the latter is an ,eaiY COrruptiOll.
0.75 viriliaJl!l I print the Newan version of this sentence. obstructed' means,
I suppose what we impty by the phrase missing a beat'. C's seems out
260 Notes VII 0.76

of place, and readings such as uggarida create a very ugly compound.

0.76 The insertion of seems to be due to the influence
of a similar phrase in UR IV 7. (er. note o.n VI 11.9.)
0.77 ' Besides, lam forgetting something else' . The reading
makes equally good sense: to say that one has forgotten a fact is to imply that Dne
has now remembered it. But Bhavabhiiti uses pi not vi in the sense of api after
anusvara, and so we we should have to adopt the reading of CLO not that
DfGHIKMN.
0.82 sibase It is difficult to decide whether the variants etc.
are true readings, Dr due merely to an accidental omissiDn of syllables.
0.85 viruddha etc. ' when I was in range of the threatening monster's heat ' - i.e. his
hot breath. This is the Newari version, which has an attractive assonance. GHIKL
have via4a dUHha savadavadesa kiHa gada ' fallen into the clutches Df
Death in the form of a fearful monster' which is also possible, and is perhaps
Bhavabhiiti's first version.
(Harihara glosses as 'vikruddha ', wbich suggests that he knew tbe reading
viruddha [R.S.))
0.86 tulagga Apparently a desl word meaning 'hazard' (?'balance' from tuJa). The
PSM lists two forms: tulagga ' kakaUiliya nyas ', and tulagga 'yad.fccha etc. In view
of the Newati either is possible here. I print this li.ne in the versiDn Df
GHIK - ' the preserver Df my life, putting his own life in jeopardy'. The Newarl
and Southern mss suggest merely 'present by chance'. This
might be a true revision, but it might equalJy be a simplification due to
standing, and the fact that changes its meaning rather suggests the latter
0.88 ellalIa ' sole' (Turner 2506). Bhavabhiiti may deliberately have substituted this
for ekka: cf. the note on X 11. 3, where a similar possibility exists.
0.89 ... I fDllow Bhan.darkar is interpreting this cpd as a
dharaya, although it seems awkward to put one instrumental sg DD a different
footing from the others, and would of course be impossible if the v.l. vacchatthala
lan.chaQeQa were to be adopted. bariQa (cf. VI 11 .6) is to. be distinguished from
dhariq.a (cf. I 15.17, III 12.40 and VI 5.5). The translation therefore appears to. be:
'surpassing a garland of cruelly tDm japa flowers by his lacerated chest etc:
ThDUgh da4ha is a minority reading, I have retained it since its
omission may be accidental .
0.91 I;lisudanta danturida The mss are in extreme disarray here. 1 choose a text which
has the advantage Df assonance. h seems cDnceivable that these two. words under-
lie at least the aberrations of the EGHIKL group, but certainly is Dbviously far
beyond one's group. If correct here, the word danturida must Df CDurse mean
'fanged' and not (as at III 12.41) filled',
0.96 The alignment of mss is unusual. FrDm the evidence .of A anu D" it
seems possible tbat Bhavabhiiti sought to change the te ' smitam .
la ACDKL's can hardly be right : Madayantika.'s accusations
directed not at Lavarigika, but at Mfllatl, with whom La ailgika identifies herself
(cf. note on VU 0.30 and VI 17.3 - 4). In fact ahaI!t evidently arose from attempts to
construe the pada as one sentence - thus AC ba.ve tatba nama yathartbakam
vadiimy, an obvious corruption.
1.1-4 vimbiventi ... 'My limbs are taken
by surprise, by YDur remembering, naming and talking about him'. The alternative
VII 1.2 Notes 261

version, as in GH. is equally possible: a edi .. . niimag-

gahana:q:l a.
1.2 uulida. jantu'an individual in. the jaws of death'.
1.5 sea sallloppilo The omission of this phrase eems ID have been accidental, and to
have led to further corrupti.on in O.
1.6 bhUmitrigaIida 'which bad unk into the earth' - i.e. under his weight.
lattbi 'stick' ( furner 10991).
1.11 vissam.l)ba bdbie This is suggested by the readings of CEKL, but the evidence
points somewhat to subsequent excision - possibl beca.use a similar phrase is
used two lines below.
1.17 dun ri tumbe ' ow both of ouare close friends! - because they both know
ber most intimat.esecreL This is the ewaii reading, and it seems to be an example
ofI'evi ion by Bba. abhiiti. The phrase duvevi tumhe recurs at X 14.5.
1.21 The .1. (ACOEHM) is an. example of an obvious cor-
ruption that is widespread..
1.22 'boili:ng up (rom ·utk: atba! €Turner 1741). It would perhaps be
better to write This word is to be distinguished from kaq.q.hidassa
(VU 1.78).
1.23 jivii . .. • ipulrv8 This is a ,o onfusmg crux. 1 prim the version of L,. the first half
of whioh is supported by the ' ewari reading. and the second balf by a variety of
mss. The repetition of t.besyDables viamhi at least is in Bhavabhuti's manner, and
may explain tbeparticiple in -ia instead of-id.a. will mean no more
tban 'made, rendered' . However the Newan saviamhidaha, of which I can make
no sense. is a worrying anomal.y.
1.29 the best .atltested reading seems to mean here 'arisen' or 'expanded',
1.30 riSlui",hal:. 'unfetteredlY. The word occu.rs also al VIn :8.2:8.
oil. er. note on 0.11.
1.31 ?'slIblimeJy,pJ'Oudly'. Tbis,. if correct, ,a ppears to be another form of
' raised, proud (ef. Turner 1.:833 <Citing upe4), which is pre-
sumably cognate with a. group uppelai raises' etc.. listed! in PSM.
:maire:a ....... It seems that Madayantika envisages Makarandaas
literally intoxicated., ,and tha1 the via. of GHL need! not be accepted.
saraswfi s comment is svapne maireya-pana-darianasya
sucaka- tvat'. She may eVeD in fact specifically be imagining her wedding night.
ghomminJ!l 'waveringly. This word.,fonned with. the adjectival suffix -ira, is
given in. PSM epbiraneWJa').
1.33bbindi The taradhifarava ,o f A(C)DE like a gloss rather than a oor-
rection. If accepted, it woulld 16ad rliva with a total of five epithets.
1..35 pappburuta 1be Newan lOSS seem to have been corrupted here.
I print the version ofL,whim is coherent and to which their readings may be
related. Thepres. part. in -ad rather than -anta given hy Gm... is surprising. but
is hinted at also in As paoccad.
].37 Yisajjida ',a band6ned' -because be will Dot let go of it. TheY.I .. vivajjida would
mean the same.
1.39 ·riJaala 'crook.ed., ,a wry' from. the rOOl bval. Is vi/;.U/a from a redllced grade of the
:S alllC root (cr. Turner 12031) is also possible, and might explain AD's viula. But
<Cf. VlU 8.21 and wbere there is evidence .for the forms vibalida and vihala.
thighs covered (vylivrta) by the created by my disar-
ranged girdle-string 'c oming loose'. This seems to replace an earlier versi.o n
262 Notes VII 1.41

danijjanta plvaroru. The Southern mss improbably combine with

vavac!-a.
1.41 pbarusikada For ph cr. Pische1208 .
1.42 The common v.1. is surprising, and must be a spontaneous
error. H in fact makes the same mistake at VII1 8.38.
'superflously' (Bhandarkar).
1.43 uvabasia Bhavabhuti would appear to have joined two sentences together, the
first one originally ending in uvahasadi.
is for (Turner 6677).
'helplessly confined'. The Newari
is puzzling. Can be connected with *khac!-a6 'stands ?is firm ([umer
3784)?
1.44oramps Cf. III 15.15.
pattivali A decoration by streaks or lines, cr. pattralekha I 37e. The Newan
dantavali must be a mere corruption.
1.45 i.e. contact was so close as to prevent palpitation.
1.46 kadua savea The Newari version of these words is kada pasada,l}angaI!l, pre-
sumably 'to whom love had done a favour', which seems so pointles as to be a
corruption rather tban an emendation.
savea .•• kamalo There is scope for varying interpretation of this cpd.
Against Bhandarkar and Kale, I assume that the bra is Mad.a yantika's, and the
mubivaava Makaranda's. She puts up a hand to teady her braid of hair, and as
he catches at it (pariggaha) the sudden movement jerks. his head up (ovaggida)and
he raises his eyebrows and gazes at her steadily - thus deliberately using his face
to amorous effect (vilasavida). Jagaddbara's gloss-or rather contradictory double
gloss-on ovaggida, lambitam', seems mistaken: ef. the Sanskrit
cpd,
l.46 ividdba 'tossed' - as at VIII 8.27
1.46 and 1.48 nfititta Cf. note on III 12.30
1.48 miilovari I print this on the authority of CD. A 's evidence however suggests
that the final version may have been meant to be - corrected
from an original kavolamulacira. .
1.49 abara 'The hollow bowl of his pursed lips' - a more effective reading
than aharasamuggama etc.
1.50 ullasida ... 'my eyes wandering lethargicaUy because of giddiness from
the painful whirling of limbs in which consternation shows forth'. This is the
Newan version. With for ailga, the word or
presumabJy refers to the motion of the eyes, thus making the cpd rather awkwardly
circular.
1.51 pi pi The effectiveness of this is heightened by the omission of al?abbhat-
which may well one of Bhavabhiitj's own corrections.
1.53 'like'. The of AD seems to be an error.
1.55 avi •. . DB vi tti ' At that point, discerned by the eye of glinting with
mirth mingled with fondness and confusion, has the matt.ress you lie on or the
material of the bedclothes to be hidden from the servants - or not. Whiche er
reading is adopted, the point must be the excitement of Madayantika's dream
produces physical traces ('ca.r ama ) -aedrik:f1am (mayiirakam)' is
Tripurari's comment) which require concealment. Most mss have something rather
similar to the text printed. GKL. however, for iisa.J:!.a ... Wo have varints on
VII 1.57 Notes 263

pacchada i.e., is the relevant part of your

body, as needing to be hidden, kept covered by the sheets or not? But modesty
might at any rate require this, and the phrase,?-iambassa looks rather like
a corruption or misinterpretation of masUliaI!l. For this reason, and because
the reading is confined to GKL, I doubt whether revision b Bhavabhuti is in
question. It does seem. to me however that the text might be improved by accepting
half of this reading, and amending vac:\O l'i to (i.e.
Lavangika is then asking whether Madayantika is careful to keep the incriminating
mattress covered up by the bedclothes. The prefix 0 for apa or ava., easily mistaken
for a nom. termination, often gi es trouble in the mss' and this version sharpens
Lavangika's teasing b giving it an air of ironjc concern.
1.57 I take this to mean a pillow or mattress large ,enough to support
the body as opposed to a pillow intended to rest the head on. The form. of the word
is uncertain. but it is apparently to be related to masurn lentil'. Turner cites the
forr:m masiirak:a and masUrika onl in meanings connected with 'pox, hut the
meaning ' pillow bolster' is attested ,elsewhere (cf. Mayrhofer s. .).
1.65 'at some other time (in addition to the betrayal you now envisage), cf.
punar I 30b.
vi here marks a 'rhetorical altematie' (er. va n 2b; kudo va n 11.4' astj
va X 23.9· also Kumarasambha a V 2).
1.70 ' unobstructed - i.e. moving freely 0 er - 'sar anga vyap'i Jagaddhara.
•.. These terminations ought to represent the masc ace pt (Pis-
chel 360), but are presumabl bere a urvi al of the Sanskrit neuter dual. The
Newan loat;ta would be an improbable accusative form for either masc or neuter
(cL Pischel 36,3 ) - with this reading is link,ed l?ijj.ha ywssaI!l, from nirdh yai like
above 131 (to be distinguisbed from ida 'burnt' at VI 7.29).
l.72 ForRllbninim (PischeJ 277).
va (for iva). It is odd that the ewan mss read this after
which is a phrase common to both sides of the comparison.
is an equall good reading.
1.73 course of action' is a omewhat better reading than pravrt·
'conduct ', and D 's pavattl points to the former rather than the latter.
1.78 bdclbidassa pulled' (Turner 2660 .
kerakassa For karyakasya., cr. VI 9.7.
1.8l dudia The reading dudia is supported by Bhandarkar, who
believes that otherwise the night is not represent,e d as sufficiently far advanced.
But the omission of pahara does not necessaril make the time earlier, $imply
vaguer- 'The drum for the end of the second (of an unspecified prahara)
is being beaten.
dudia For once. there is little evidence for the bidia.
2b utkampita The .1. wouJd do equally well
Stanza 3 The ascription of this tauza by some mss to may be due to
the fact that Mad.a yantika addresses the latter immediatel afterwards: but it is
natural for her on being urged on. by Lava.ngika:, to turn to her own. friend for
guidance.
4c There is a surprising degree of confusion 0 er this phrase. It seem
that Bhavabhuti may baYe replaced b
5b 'returned ·a fter wandering'. perhapssligbtly more natural than bhran-
or Ms alignment does not particularly revision.
264 Notes V1I5b

ACT VIII
as at VIII 8.9. The form t;liutta (Ill pr. 20, VU 0.82, VIII 5.13) is for
niyukta. At 7.11 the word pac.tit;Jiutti is not read by the mss which show -a- here.
pr.3 le as at I 36.3. The form de is elsewhere reserved for the second person pronoun
though after ede it would be possible as the demonstrative (pischel 425).
pr.S The remark ' ta java ... pa.la"issam' i a little artificial, and Bhavabhuti, growing
in confidence, mjght have decided to dispense with it.
pr.6 The omission of this by the NewaJi mss is evidently accidental since
they preserve Avalokita 's exit and immediate re-entry.
0.2 'friend to love's full growth (or impetuousness). A more In-
teresting reading than prauc.tha
Stanza 3 = UR I 34
4.3 a'ira Bhavabhiiti would appear 10 have written originally which must
presumably be interpreted as having exclamatory force- 'for how short a time!
(cf. III 12.55)
4.4 tam you were going to say this and you were going
to say that'. This pointed repetition, whether original or a later thought of Bhava-
bhiiti's, would obviously be extremely vulnerable to haplography. With eVal!l
alone, some expectation of following direct speech is created, which
may explain the variants below for
4.5 iveC;l.ha The Newa.ri araddha or arambha seems odd.
4.) 0 priye el'a The N ewar"i reading is atyam eva. But a vocat.ive seems more
natural , and I have kept it. Possibly Bba abbiitj indicated that at am hauld
be changed to satyameva, and priye was accidentally omitted in making th.e cor-
rection.
4.13 kim pi I follow the Newari omission of which certainly makes
Malatl's utterance more obviously 'ardhokta'.
Sa The malinai? of AD is in starting contradiction, although of course either
might be justified. has somewhat the less authority as an example of re-
vision, in that it is not supported by C.
5.2 L's janantikam seems to be an interpolation. It shouJd be noted that even without
it the speech is evidently intended to be unheard by Mlidha a.
5.9 pbalodarka Only ELM, mss of no special weight, give the obvious reading aphalo-
darka. sukhadarka 'whose outcome is happiness' is not an uncommon cpd, (e.g.
Manu IX 25, MBb In 155.9 and 282.42) but phaJodarka whose outcome i reward'
seems less natura1.
5.11 ilumkhidassa The PSM cites this word in the senses touched and 'burnt'. OnJ
the readings of C and 0 point to it, but the principle of difficilior potior eems here
to be appropriate.
5.12 Bbaavadie Contrary to one's first impression, this is not qualified b
anfie, and the minority reading Bha ad! is therefore tempting.
5.16 anuyoktavyam The Newari anllya vyaktam would appear to be a straight
of corruption due to transposition of'syllable : Madhava can. harcUy refer to
Avalokita in the third person (a fact apparently recognized by C' scribe, who added
the word svagatam).
6a upanitinayi Readings such as uparutetiya. must be corruptions due to the preceding
grathitetiya.
Vll1 6b oles 265

6b yugma The ewari reading is an impro ement on kumbha: there is little beauty
in comparing breasts lO pots and buds simultaneously.
6d The verb is att racted into tbe gender of the predicate. The .1. lcp.a has little
authority.
6.1 jado .... bhamsacU! A alokita is warning Mfllati to be the first with. her congrat-
ulation . The South.ern. reading. simply jado a,rahi<ia followed by sahi
u aba asi makes a diffefienl point: Malati is simply leased for her watchfulness,
which the peed of her congratulations ubsequentl confirms.
6.11 praviS.ya.... Lal'arigiki A minor but irritatingly difficult crux. ACDL omit the
final Lavarigika., SO that the following speech is assigned to all of them including
Since it includes the statemenl that they met this is
improbable. EG read as in the The only difficulty here is that we should expect
pra isaoli for pravis. a. HIK 0 bave in fact something of the kind, but
this leaves the widespread oocurence of praviSya unexplained, and furthermore
they mostly have pravi ' an poiDlJessl making
the only per OD to be agitated.
6.17 ¥i pi.rak.k i Other readings ucb as parakka are possible' but after
pi rather than vii wiU be pecessary.
7c spbu!&t ' splitting open " The !a assonance makes this a more probable reading than
spburat 'quivering.
timra Elepbant hick: when wet bas a different olour and sheen. tamm is there-
{ore a more imaginative \ . ord than i la. and \·ery po sibLy a orrection b Bhava-
bhiili.
7.1 rikcinta P£'iesumabt "boldJ. and brightl . The expression is slightly odd,
but the evidence fOIl' at least is '. ery strong. Pun;lasarasvati glosses vikranti-
putaJ:!l as suddhaJl!l'.
7.4 is presumably with the negative prefix aJ?a- (Pischel 71). is
'unharmed. (Cf.. 1 L8.) [R.S.]
7.9 On! Gm... enumer.ate individuall , tbose withdrawing.
7.10 'e tc. I print this speech as it ,appealS in CDE. The other mss bave
kadbaJ!1 ettia ell! gamiadu ttil bbodul piasahle La angLae pa4iJ?.iuttimag-
avaloaanti rt is reasonable to suppose as usual that CDE give
the revised ersion: anxiety m1er La\rangika's dela gives MalatI a more natura!
and compeUing l1ea5on for wandering of[ and she does so in CDE' version without
ignoring Madayantika a considerable improvement). It. has howe . er the drawback
that the audiena:: is taken straight from La.vaJigika exit to the supposition that
she has been gone for some time.
7. 13 ,etc. There is very little authority for assigning this peech to M.ala.ti,
as Bhandarkarwisaes lo do. lie argu.es that upa visati should refer to the same
person as parikramati, but this does no seem necessary. pariu.a mati gets Malati
away from Madayantika, and upavisati lemphasizes the fad Mada antika lays
put. On Bbandarkar' readings Madayantika's presence is ignored throughout
this cene, wbich would be rather odd. And pa.ri.kramati becomes unidomatic. and
must be cbanged 10 parikramya see Introduction sect 13)1.
h. win be seen that the ariety of readings here is con-
siderable. There is good evidena:: both for me fonn amedara and for a. double
occurrence of the stiem vama, and for thi reason I propose the abo e. The point
of the remark is that in. the case of women the right eye ( . ametara) is. inauspicious
(vama).
266 Notes VIII 8..8

8.8 etc. The evidence is confusing. It is po ibJy accidental that K and

L do not support the text (or alternatively read sadhikkhevo like E). The omission
of in CDGHI may also be an accident due to hapJography. The
evidence of MNO suggests however that we should read sadhikkheva in its stem
form. I have rejected this because it gives poor sense : either sadhikkhevo or sadhi-
'shouting insults', seems necessary.
aviddha 'swinging with wide stride . avinha ma be a corruption of t his con-
sequent upon the loss of a. a aviddha does not eern to have an
appropriate sense.
8.10 ltiidarassa 'made anxious by their sympathy for virtue' - an improvement upon
the more colourless
8.12 The variants suggest that a rare fonn or deSi word for 'daughters' is in
question here. dhili. is such a word, and since it (or d hia) eerns to have been read
by Jagaddhara as well as by one or two nagan mss, I have adopted it. dhla is men-
tioned in Pischel 148. The more strictly Sauraseni fonn might be right,
but is not attested here by any ms. The Newan reading is As a form of
duhitr. this can hardly be justified. It is presumably however for dhiirta: 'hearing
how his rogues of ministers had been cheated'. This gives a more obvious meaning
to vippalambha, which on the majority reading must here mean ' eduction', but
it makes an interjected per anal comment of Lavangik.a and involve
her in surprisingly strong language. That Bhavabhiiti wrote both versions is most
improbable: verbal corruption in one direction or the other seems to be in
And on balance some fonn of duhiq- appears the more ukely tarring-point.
8.13 after poqha CD's pia does not seem very appropriate, and is no
good.
8.18 a Cf. 12.3-4 where these statements are repeated. DK read a here but
not there; E reads it there but not here. With the reading a it is of course necessary
to supply pasarida - ' later I did the same my elf, but witho ut seeing her'. This is
in fact exactly what happened, and I have ad opted this reading. The omissjon of a
in the mss seems rather haphazard, and it is improbable that it should have been
interpolated in what would otherwise te a very short and syntactically simple
sentence. Bhandarkar objects to the above interpretation, but only because he reads
pacchade amhe below, and it will there be seen that the Latter is a minority reading.
8. I 9 'lost' - a more striking word than (C does however falsely
substitute for at IX 54.1).
8.20 etc. Presumably 'There is nothi ng fate may not suddenJy do . The
reading is uncertain. This may be Bhavabhflti's later version, but the reading it
replaces is also in some doubt. HI and M 0 suggest ome reference to
i.e. alone in a wood at night she will feel frightened ; EGL. with K ambiguous,
imply 'upasthitanartha'.
8.21 parikrimantyau This clearly implies that the following words are spoken by
Madayantika as weU as Lavailgika. but only KLO explicitly so assign them. We
seem to have an extension of the practice (cf. Introduction eet. 13) whereby joint
action following upon a speech and involving the last speaker is noL given an explicit
assignment word.
8.26 'reflected'. I cannot make sense here of the Newan pamhalida.
vidurilla A deSi word which Harihara, Jagaddhara and the chiiya of H gloss
as The southern mss on the otber hand, if their readings represent an
 VIII 8.27 Notes 267

old glo on the ame word. make it refer to the colour conferred on the soldiers by
the reflected moon-light. The PSM lists a word ratnavaJa'.
Newan mss omit the \l ord.
8.27 vibalida ' sporti el. pulled awry by his plough'. On the authority of one rns of
Jagaddbara commentary 1 propose this reading, which both makes sense and i
appropriatel assonant. It eerns q uite lik,el to underlie the other readings (in
Newan script d and h are ery similar). If it is original, the onl, problem is why
the mss have made such heavy weather of it.
8.28 uvveltint er. Pischel 107.
sotta For srotas (Pischel 91 .
ova«;lida For a apatila. which many of the other readings also represent.
8.30 'blo oming' - i.e. preading. The word occurs also at VI 11 .6.
8.31 sumari . etc. One of the mo t bafDing cruces in the pia . The evidenoe is so con-.
fused that it is impo ib1e e en to ay with complete oertainty whether a revised
version is in question or Dot If there is sudl ,a revised ersion, it is most nearly
represented by C (see apparatus with faim echoes in E and in GKM 0 , while
the earlier version is represented b HU... which I follow in the text. D would also
represent. the revised ersioll, but is in a peciaJ position in that it retains the other
version 0 " the ke phrase ivihauha . .. avasara. following this wtb
etc., rough] as in C. The fact that the first $ylLable of this second phrase in D is
ha whioh would be the first syllable requiring aJteration in changing vivibauha
etc into ( ?t,a) da etc., very trongly suggests the incorporation of a
marginal correction. Earlier, the fact that C umarami is altered from sumarasi
shows that in orne respects D is the more reliable, iDee it gives in full the words
sullUll'm a a.sirisi, which obviously underlie C' reading also. But I can make little
sense of this apparent corrected ersion. The mentioD of elephants (hatthi) appears
totally out of place. a aluua ought urety to qualify auha (cf. 9b,
acchid a, and a similar notion at ID 18a) - llnle indeed Cs viviha is a mistake
for i ibauha, and D's ha thus represents a replacement of the ho of vivmauho.
There is aJso the curious fact that the of EHIL CD) and the osari-
of GKM 0 find a phrase of oddly intermediate appearance in CD's
muhaJesa riuccha:I?J?a. If this is more than a coin idence it suggests deep-seated
corruption rather than a difference of recension. E also has a trace of CD's reading,
with vi amao aranta in pLaoe of viaQihrasara.
8.32 oaRs ' reeling because of frames shattered by the thunderbolt of his dreadful
arm . oalla' for ·apacalya (Pischel), and as a substanti e it can mean 'defect' or
't£emhling'. Among the adjectival meanings. assigned to it in PSM is 'jiskl
nimllit hon ab. Other meanings gi en are 'paryasta' and (fol oaUaa) "vipra-
Labdha', which indicate ery plainly the basis of the Southern readings.
8.33 uvaruddhise:sariu The u a.uladda (am) 0 aria of GKM 0, 'put to flight by
h.arassing with weapons etc. is well enough in itself. But the Southern mss then
presef\ which duplicates 0 aria inelegantly. GK terminate the com-
pound quite pIaus.ibly with G proceeds with sarapaikkamagga,
K with saravairikkamagga. sar:a. would presumably mean 'the flower (of the
opposing force)', but it is a rather improbable coincidence that these ame syllables
should form part of a quite ditrereru reading, avasara.
palrikka 'emptied. by the escaping far and wide uf all the eneru forces etc '.
1 suggest this form (for Pischel 566) .r ather than vaIrikka, as probably

21
268 Notes VIII 8.35

underlying L's parikka, and as a possible starting-point for the v. I. paikka.

8.35 antarido odinna 'The nom. stbitaJ? or show that even in the compound
antarita is to be taken as an adjective of raja' - Bhandarkar. Unless tfie
can be reg2rded as also stemming from Bbavabhiiti tbey cannot of course po sibly
be taken to show anything of the kind. But Bhandarkar is urely r:ght neverthele
in saying that it is the king who is antar.da. He himself combines the word in a very
clumsy compound with what follow, while interpreting the readings of OH as
antarido plus diJ:tl?-a(hir:tr:ta) (as does the chaya of H). Sut 'given' is bardl
the right word, and does not eem to exist. Since both antarido for antarital:!
and for (cf. II 12.9 and VII 1.68) appear to be needed, I propose
the above reading.
8.36 Here again, strangely enough, a reading ( CDL)
suppresses a badly needed nominative termination .
8.37 I's reading is a good one, and easily corrupted to the mu ha-
of KMN. It gives a better construction than the muhacande (ace pi)
of GH. The reading of CD at this point suhadavavari would app ar to be a cor-
ruption rather than an alternative version.
8.38 kalaadildo Here on the other hand CD may have preserved the truth alone.
'Learning of their antecedents as a result of the disturbance i perhaps rather bald,
but it makes a more interesting point than kalahaf!1 a.a do, and avoid the awkward-
ness of having KalahaI!1saka refer to himself quite needles I in the tbird per on .
The kalakalo of Southern mss gives the reading some indirect upport.
8.40 mailida A denominative form. from maila 'black' (Pi chel 5 9).
8.41 which is supported by Jagaddhara, makes the best point : '
pleasing in respect of their family, their looks, and their per onal merit',
8.47 Four mss, CDEG, write mlidha here and maka below. In the case
of G this is particularly surprising: the effect is to ascribe not only stanza 10 but
also stanza 11 to Makaranda. The tale to be told in stanza II mu t be how Mada-
yantika inadvertently declares her passion in Makaranda's hearing, and tbe person
to tell it must be the one who was there, Malcar:anda. kalhnati tvayi therefore must
be addressed to Makaranda and spoken by Mlidhava. (For some reason K quite
gratuitously also ascribes the stanza to Makaranda .) CD omits stanza 11 (see
below), and E's reading here may be copied from their recension. But this apart
it is appropriate that the greater sensibility of tanza 10 bould be displayed b
Madhava rather than Makaranda (significantly CDE alter or omit the phrase
anusaya-sthanam). If a deUberate correct ion is in question here, it is difficult to
see the reason for it.
Stanza 9a resembles MY I 34a.
9b aparatra CE's reading gives excellent sense and is a great impro ement on the
vulgate anupatya. The latter is weak and unnecessary after whereas
aparatra supplements very desirably the meaning ofvikramantaQ . (Cr. J agaddhara'
'itaratra' .)
9c ' trunk'. 'head' wouJd also be possible.
10.2 Tin a conciJiatory fashion. upasa1!lvada exists orne-
followed by MW, gives wrong reference), and upa hould
also be possible. The reading obviously is very uncertain, but this word may at
least underlie the Southern upasadana, whicb in itself is not very appropriate
gloss makes good sense but is not well-founded).
VIII iO.3 - 11. Notes 269
krtaprasadam ' acceptable. but leaves tbeonfu ion unexplained.
10.3-11.8 llstaratal;1 et:c.: -
This passage is read in futi only in EK.. GHL and I. CD omit most of it; MNO have
an overlapping but not coterminous omission. r ersion is fairl obviously unsatis-
factory in that tanza 11 appears in arbitrary isolation instead of where it mu t belong,
immediately after the sentence on the ame topic. (ad ehi etc. GHL
differ from EK principaU in placing the entence ayam asa later, before
lad ehi paS a (and re ersing tbe tage-direction pravi and I doubt
if this can be right. Th earlier portion of the act takes place be ide a dlrghika. Thi
appears to be within the confines oftheud (cf. 8.8),
of which the udyana-gahana a} 0 forms a part. Miidhava and Makaranda are therefore
repr,e sented as returning to Lbe (11.1) disco ering that the open ground
which includes the dirghik.a. (KL here add this word) where the left the gids is now
deserted (11.3), and deciding to arch (he ud ana-gahana (11.4-6).
For these reasons m (ext foLIo K.. and I con ider other versions in relation to it:-
CD The ewart mss omil tanza 11 and some of the following dialogue (see appara-
tus on lOA). It eem improbable that !.his i a deliberate correction. Rather a lacuna
has re ulted from skipping from (10.3 to itastatal! 01.4). Thi would leave
a quite incomprehen ible paribhramantya atmanam atraivodyanaga-
bane vinodayanryo (or vinoda anu) lad ehi paS a a.l? The changes ofeD
repair the sense with reasonable economy : lO give an object. paribhramantya
becomes prastu a·: udyanagahane becom pre umabl to make
it more probable that the bould be p ing the place on their way back; and r.ecause
the 3rd pI. erb has no u bjed paS a no reference and lad ehi already occurs in the
sentence, the remaining ords are telescoped into The result is not im-
plau ible. BUl the p im or tbe ,e arlier eatence i poilt b the 10 of lama 11 and it
is odd to begin planning a stroll in ODe particular place while the ha e yet to go to
another place to rejoin !:heir companions. I therefore judge this lacuna to be accidental
though evidentJy ancient.
E follows K.,. but incorporates before tanza I1 a different ersion of the Newiiri
correction (S!"Il anla for paribhramantya atm.anam atraiva). E here shows itself very
clearly to be a conflated ms. It i evidentl ba ed on the same reading as
kaJahllJ!lsakentJ ath amanam It preserves kathyam-
mam. and adds the ewari reading beginning with vistaratal) afler it (omitting vistara-
befor,e). This i no doubt wh we have for pra ruya, since the latter sit
ill with either learn amanam or the instr. (found here only in EK, though
read before harana by IL).
MNO imply omit 11.3-7 Madha/ kalham . . . This is cOf\ceivably
accidentaL. a kip from to then interpreted as
quatifying La ailgikamada antlke but that cannot be right since the two girls have
been there all the time.
r has the same omission as M 0 but in ens the pas age ioappropriatel (cf. above)
before stanza 11. The Southern text known to an adeva who continues Tripuriiri's
commentary) does the ith a few further smaU alteration in the transpoed
passage. I.
GUL .Because the omission or tran position of the above-mentioned passage
(11.3-7) accounts so well for the readings both of I and of M 0, I su pect that it may
270 Notes VIII 11.5

also underlie the less fundamental variations in order shown by GHL. (For reasons
stated above. I do not think GHL' order can be or iginal.) We have to imagine a m
containing MNO's version, i.e. jumping without pause from 11.2 to 11.8
Lavangikamadayantike. Lines 3-7 must be added in the margin (as they obviously were
in I's ancestor). and because such marginal additions have to be written in whatever
marginal spaces are available, confusion as to how tbey are to be incorporated into the
text easily arises. Here, I think:, line 7. itiparikramataq, mistakenly appeared to precede
lines 3-6 (indeed in I's version, it may be noted, as well as after 3-6 there
is parikramya before). If all this were incorporated immediately after tanza 11, the end
of the passage would run tad ehi asav To reverse the two
sentences becomes an obvious correction, and the passage then runs as in GHL.
The question arises of relating all these variants to the hypothesis of two recensioDS.
For reasons given above [ do not think tbat the lacuna in CD is directly significant
from this point of view. The omission of 11.3-7 is more interesting. Since none of the
alternative positions for tbe passage is satisfactory, it is excision or addition by the
author which would be in question. Of the two the evidence is all for the latter. There
is no reason why Bbavabhuti should reject the passage. On tbe contrary it is dramaticaUy
very effective that they should find the place they left empty, think that the girls are
strolling in the shrubbery, and there come upon two of them searching for the third.
On the otber hand aU this may very weU be an improvement on his first draft, in. which
they simply arrive at the garden, enter and come upon the two girls (who have emerged
froru the shrubbery at the sound of their footsteps), Ms evidence supports the inter-
pretation: everything suggests marginal upplementation of tbe text. It hould be not d
that EK are not necessariJy on a difi'er'e nt footing from GHL, I, MNO simply because
they give the full text in the right order. AJJ these mss may derive from a single source,
a first draft ms with the extra material added in tbis margin.
The evidence of the Newiri mss does not conflict with this suppo itioD. CD's cor-
ruption stems firmly from what would be on this theory the revised version of the text.
The position of tbe Southern text is more cunous. Instead of aligning itself as 0 often
with the Newari, it appears to present the pure early version. This might however be
explicable on the hypothesis advances before, tbat the Southern recension is based on
the revised text deliberately supplemented by comparison with the earlier version. If
the available revised text suffered from the same corruption as CD, involving the loss
of stanza Il, it would be not unnatural to replace completely the one remaini ng truncated
sentence by the full eady verssion of the passage.
11.5 vinodayantyo Thi is the readjng of only one group, GHL. Without
the evidence of CD or MNO, it is impossible to choose with certainty .
11.10 The Madhavamakarandau of D seems a pointle: addition, and C
is inappropriate when they have already been een.
11.11 kudo Miiladi For this sense of cf. UR HI 14 athava priyataroa 'but
how could it be my beloved?'
12b dravati etc. This would appear to be the revised version, except that the word
bhraSyati is in some doubt. The alternative ver ion is bh(am a am anubaddot-
kampa evfmtar atma. Southern mss however ha ea variant of thiersion, with
aviratam for bhrsam ayam. objects to dravati on the grounds that it
should be used only of emotions such as tenderness, and adduces passages where
it is so used, but it is perhaps too much to assume tbat it mu t alwa be limited
to this meaning. In English, if we say 'his heart melted at the ight' we imply ten-
VIII 12.4 otes 271

derne s. But we an also ay 'his heart melted with terror'. Here the context defines
Mfidha a' emotion uffi iemly .
12.4 o:s a CL note on .18.
Ix kalayasi Apparentl 'do you put m to It: te.t?' - 'jijnasase'. Harihara., Jagad-
dhara and an. (Cf. parikalayitum. in 473.)
14b atbaisyati The prevaJence of the irregular (Whitney 137b) andbis and
ati is urprising. P quotes ( iron e. from the Pailcatanta. (Cr.
Pal)ini Vl 1. . 94).
14 .2 >rikaJ;li There is little e, 'deuce that Bhavabbuti ga e names to any of the
la t three act .

ACT IX
0.2 utpaty ... anu r8)'-mi I print this enlence as it appears ID GL. The prin-
cipal arian are upet f r utpac·ya, up "rutya f r upa rt a and pra clam or
pradesam 'for pari bhramato. It will be een that the InS alignment is
unusually confused., and it is doubtful whether a revi ed te t is in quesiion. If it were,
the later version wou d ,a ppear to be: snparvat.ad upetya utpatya) Padmavatlm
upaSrurya 'tatra m.adha a" . . kantarapraveSam(pradesam)
adhuna tadantikam anupray3.:mi. But 0 whi h u uaUy gives an alternative ersion
mo t failhfull , here agr with GL OY r utpat 'a and upa a, and it reading
do not hang together very ",dl The above version is awkwaro. in making the
qualifications padma atim. and pravciam follow instead of preceding their gerund .
There ma Lherefore be nothing more than corruption at work here, arising from
tpa
the great imilarity !Jet....."eeD and pe in utpatya, and from failure 10 understand
tbe unusual gerund form pravciam [U 4.56).
2c go gu . .1 1 ot an eas cpd. I on true: 'the rows of woods whose vicinity is sought,
bearing paslllr of fre h ulapa gr dear [0 co in alr. The J. vibhanti for
bha .a nti (the lauerto be corntrued \\'ith pramada a) is scarce! po ible in iew of
ibhati in the first line.
3b niitama •. •• prac The same phrase occurs in. MV V 54b.
3c viI!" esu in its expansion among' etc. DELM s is odd.
4.1 ga.gana ga nam Weeem ID have an example of one m D, preserving the truth.
plain gamanam abhinlya if it mean, as Kale lran laL it· he departs', is obviou Iy
inappropriate: there are tiU three taol. of the i. kambhaka to go and it is in
fact the evidence of passing time described in tanza 7 wn..:".:h prompts her departure.
gagana 'gamanam abhiliiya, on the other hand, is ery apt in iew of the description
of the mountain BfhadaSmaD in the following LaDZa. The same phrase occurs in
MY V 14.3.
5c is a better word in this context ·than the artmii. 'tracks' of DHI
(and po 'b! C).
Stanza 6 = UR n It, MY 4.1 and Subha , ita 1591.
6d and would do equaU weB.
6.1 katbam lmadhy;- Ill . EK Qrdb am a alokya is an egregious addition. Saudamanl
knows that it is midday not from the position orthe suo, but from the phenomena
now described.,
272 Notes IX7
Stanza 7 = 987.
7b cumbana, if correct, must here have an active verbal sense - 'their beaks kissing
(Le. grazing) the pods'. cumbita 'kissed by' is also possible. Jagaddhara reads
cumbina, but such a would be unusual and the reading may have resulted
from the correction of cumbita into cumbana.
7.4 One cannot be certain whether this phrase, confined to D and E,
is original or not.
Stanza 9cd = UR I 18cd.
Stanza 12 = UR III 32, 755 .
12b vabati CO's vrajati is equally good in sense, but vahati answers better to muftcati.
13c ' will animate, revive' - fut caus of pra-an. GHKL's
is the fut caus of pri.
'(the breeze) playing in front of you . The reading which makes
this an epithet of kallola is also good.
13.2 svagatam seems hardly dispensable in which case prakasam, despite DEN is
necessary also.
spburad 'quivering'; 'splitting'. There is similar confusion between these
two words at VUI 7c.
14d avirahita sriyo DE's kuvalayino bhuvo appears to be an import.ation from the
UR (I 31 ), where this stanza also OCCUl s. There the final line is kuva-
layino bhuvo and the sense is apparently ' the ground, despite the white
lotuses, seems because of the wings to be covered with blue lotuses'.
The imperative drsyantam here makes such a notion inappropriate. It wiU be seen
that C (like F) does not make this correction.
14.2 apratipatti'simyam 'absently because of his confusion'. Cr. apratipatti-vihvalani
in the Kadambari (Poona ed, p.159 bottom).
Stanza 15 = 215.
Stanza 16 = 217.
16d ivirgandba An improvement upon (and therefore perhaps Bhavabhiiti's correction
01) avirbhiita. .
sUindra I print the spelling of the better IDSS. The Oriya derivative (Turner
12468) is which rather supports d against dh.
16.1 durilob 'charming for their indistinctness - because of the approach-
ing rains.
StaDza 17 = 218.
17d gbarmimbbo vigamigama It is true, as Bhandarkar says, that
usually means 'sweat', but so to take it here (at least to the exclusion of other
meanings) rather obscures the point of the stanza. Bhavabhiiti is describing an.
intermediate season for which there is no name. He therefore calls it 'those days
which bring beauty through the union (?blurring. interaction) of the departure of
summer with the arrival of tbe rains', and the rest of the stanza shows wherein the
beauty consists .
t 8b avaclhuta Here at least CDK can hardly fail to be right, since avadhiita violates
the metre Most editors (Bhandarkar included) have adopted the un-
metrical reading without comment.
18.4 prati pratyiSi This presumably underlies tbe madhav3.D,lpratyasa of
GHKL. Any alternative is uncertain, since C reads Madhavasya and D Madhava.
Stanza 20 = UR III 39.
20d Cf. 25d. There is in both places some evidence for the spelling with palatal
lX 23.4 Notes 273

s but. compLicat,ed b the alternati e reading is am .

23.4 yad 'Thank heavens lhal he ha reco ered'. This is the reading with
most. autborit . The impersonal passi e ma ha e worried some copyists.
23.5 kim The v.1. kam ' po sible.
Stanza 24 = 216. Cr. UR 133, U _0; MV V 40 42.
25d etc. . I trust that) bearing the rainbow on both sides, our lucky sign extends
our beauty' is one among a host of interpretations of this line. none of them very
satisfactory. Bhandarkar with some [leason judges it to be corrupt There are many
uncertainties - whether bibhral is masc or neuter (or even a masc voe), whether
dhanur is nom or a or e en a tern form}. It is generally assumed. that the line
contains a fourth enquiry imilar lo the other three: but it houJd be pointed out
that the particle va is n.ot this time rt>peated.. CH(I) ha e the reading visvaIJ? bibhrat
surapatidhaour laksma laksmlvad eta\, the interpretation of which is again not
obvious - ? 'This rainbow is an auspicious sign'. If the
of the other reading could be combined with this. we might construe it. with the
previous pada: ' the wind) supporting on both sides this rainbow which is your
auspicious igo'. The phase taaati' also occurs in Sak I 19 and
KavyadarS3 l45.
26b Midbuastlhim anstl.:im EGHlKL read madhaviyam a . astbam, but if this was
reallBha abhflti first thought it is odd that the more assonant afternative fits
so neatly in its place.
26.3 unmidopariga eva I hasunmaooparaga j.,o · H unmadah uparaga iva; G unmade
upm.ga i a. Th.e parti le i is of course otiJse with the karmadharaya of com-
parison . Possibly therefore these three readings neat] illustrate the three stages
of a corru ption..
27b gatam Mss of the first recension have yatam. It is not impossible to imagine
Bhavabhuti in framing the tama rejecting the obvious gataIp in favour of
the ,c haiasmic effect of yatam' then in revising his text deciding that the
simpler version ounded more natural.
27.1 D makes Madhava swoon before lama 28 and reco er after it. This seems
absurdly unnecessary. Makaranda makes no refer,ence lo it and Miidbava has
already fainted once and ' to do so again at 35.6.
28.2 loudly' is more appropria.t,e ilian prakitSam ·aloud'. KMNO's
is presumably a mere displacement.
Stanza 29d = UR VI 3Sd.
33.4 samvida resemblance'. W ith the reading the comparison is implicit -
'fragrant and cool as a ID of kadambas .
33.5 kanlalll8l This is tile ewari and Southern reading. here pre-
sumabl means' ellowish red'. anda:kardama I take to mean a mudlike, i.e.
thick, exudatioR. It is difficuJt to be sure whether the [1eading underlying the variants
of EGHIKL makes the cpd neuter (e.g. or masc nom (e.g. karda-
mita kapolata!ah) but against the latter i tbe fa.ct that kapola occurs already in
the cpd.
33.11 tu - i.e. our kill as a]o er is not absolute. This is explained. by the
following stanza. From the ms alignment. [ wonder wbtber Bha abhutl first wrote
sapa Itdam meaning the ame thing, and found that sapa adam was misin-
terpreted asa stage-direction ,as it has been sioa: by editors).
Stanza 34 Tbisrecurs at UR [0 16 with the significant ariant yat for na in the fourth
274 Notes IX 34.2

pada. We may find in this fact alone proof that the Uttararamacarita was written
later than the MalaUmadhava. Here kamam has a precise concessive force. 'granted
that' . and is answe red by punar. There kamarn must be interpreted more vaguely
as 'yathepsitam' (Ghana ' yama), and punar independently of it as ·again'. It is not
credible that Bhavabhiiti should have selected by chance two words which might
later be given a precise syntactic function. and it is therefore the UR version which
i the adaptation. It may also be noted that Bhavabhiiti was writing for an audience
which knew his earlier play. His fondness for echoing hi own lines is not hap-
hazard, still less does it betray a paucity of imagination, [t is intended to fonn a
nostalgic bond between himself and his audience. The words preceding this tama
in the UR are 'sakhi Vasanti paSya paSya - kantfmuvrtticaturyam api
vatsena'. In other words, the young elephant has matured in wi dam (and so b
dhvani he suggests, have you and I).
34.2 vyavaharami 'behave toward '. The na a aharami of CD is very strange.
35b dhig eva ... - i.e. there is no point in ID enjoying pleasant cenes unl
I can feel emotion (bhi'lva) at the igns of emotion (anubha a) which the cene
would produce in you. This reading with its technical terms from ae [heties i
obviously much in Bhavabhiiti's manner. The other readings in olve the non-
technical word anubhrtva. Whether they represent a earlier version seems dubious.
dhig eva ramanlyavastvanubhavan vrtha ' Fie on experienoes of pleasant
things which are vain. and with anubhavad ' Fie on a pleasant thing which come
from a vain experience' , seem neither very effective.
35.1 maI!l prati On this reading agrees with and this seems mo t
natural: madness bad suppressed tbe natural warmth of Miidha a' feelings. The
principal v.!. appears to re to add after marp. prati (although
the word pratyaya crops up in HI) - 'although veiled by madnes he is not avers
to me, since .. .' But this is an awkward and unnecessarily dum y way of expre ing
things,
35.5 Malatim The omission of tu could well be a genuine correction. Embrace
me - I am in despair' heightens the picture of Madhava s helple sness and need
for comfort. The adversative refers [0 his wish for both Makaranda and Malatt
expressed in verse 35.
37a kl1arp. is quite weB attested, and would accord better with the neuter
but 1 can find no authority elsewhere for treating klla as a neuter.
37c prayaI.1e CD's prahaqe would be possible.
37.2 asmad If there is significance in the variant Bhavabhiiti ma ha e
wished to avoid the impression given by the latter that parikramya at 40.1 in 01 e
a feat of mounta ineering.
37.3 Plain agresaro is no doubt po sible, thougb one might claim that
it should mean that Madhava too was going to throw himself from the cliff. Wh re
the revised text merely displays an omission, it is always difficult to know whether
this is intentional or an accident.
38b mamapi -i.e for me as welJ as Cor MalatJ. The reading i also pos ible.
38.1 tansy The reading here is for some reason a little confused.
39d vaSam CDE's mukham is inelegant., when the word occurs alread in the first pada.
39.4 caJldra mukha Bhandarkar very reasonably likes this less than the reading mukha-
candra. which is however very much in the minority (one might perhap claim that
MN s mugdhacandra gives it a measure of support). Rather he itantl I follow
IX40c Notes 275

the best Q1SS. On their reading it eems more natural to make anandana qualify
Madhava rather than candra . (Cr. candra..:..muk.h.i at X 5. 1.)
40c nirastam must here mean 'C t forth·, but not as usual in the sense of 'rejected'.
Harihara and Jagaddbara' gLo is ·dattam'.
41c anyatra amus a and amutra are also good.
41 .3 sahasi CDE's reading preser... the practice of putting ad erbs before the gerund
they qualify. The rest ha, pravi ' ya ahasa.
41.4 amba An interjection of some son seems natural here. Again it i possible to
speculate that the correction of kasi to kflsi t am led lO the a cidental omi sion of
amba.
41.1 A revised text may be in question here, but tbe evidence is not plain. CD more
or less gree on jl\rari sa ka.l Madha le: a? The fir t phrase is merely
the same as at 47.10 the sxond is aw 'ard if what follow i kept, as D keeps it.
C then substitutes tat. kiiicid V)a as atiti man e, but this seems to me
abrupt., and no impro eme.nl al all on what",'e bave.
Madhava' reco ery from his woon mu 1 precede Makranda' next remark,
and 0 KM O's transpo ition of this peech must be wrong.
41.19 pratyi cetano Cf. X 14.13, where the better reading is probably pratya-
sannacetana.. Here makes the minority reading pratyasanna (probably im-
ported from there) inapPL;)priate - 'thank heavens he is et again on the
of recovery'.
42a catakin These are the birds pecifically suppo ed lO live on raindrop and so the
reading seems more appropriate than kokilan.
42.1 nfmaJD etc. It seems that Bha abhuti may first have written me reI somethi.ng
like suJqtam akhilajantuJivanena matariS anal and later decided that thi b itself
was too cryptic,
42.3 talbipi bbavan en -i.e. though I reproach you it i you after all who are
capable of connecting me with m belo\ d.
43c atba vi The v.l apiva would be an unusual combination of particles.
43.4 sikiim etc. The are impo ibl confu ea CD's simplification need not
stem from Bha\'abbiiu.
asmad riracita The phrase has some point in view of the following stanza and
there eems nO advantage in CD's imple mat.
43.5 udviha is the reading of most m _ presumabl , 'in Hearing it on her bo om'.
44c raeano) pi ra ito ) pi is no doubt po ible, but ma r ha \'e been suggested. b grathito
) pi in the next line.
41c . ehib.ril.li 'bringing about affection', Cr. in DaSakumaracarita
Il (J. Brough, Selections from Classical Sanskrit Literat.ure p.122 end). Jagad-
dhara's comment is' nehasyakaro tani/ sneha..f!1 prltim alrurvanti vyakur-
vantlti
47.4 Malao so svahastasya D ha, asyamalatisn ahata ta ya. But a a,
though good in itself is very odd with tasya and ahata ta ya has a
resemblance in letters. odd if fortuitous to vaha (as a. Probably therefore CO'
version is a orruptioIl. svahast.a means 'pe onal roken (Bhandarkar, quoting
dayitasnehasvahastena from the ik:ramorvaSi.
7.6 )'oge's,'ari 'mistr 0 oga': yogi \ an 'mi tr among yogin '. CK have the one
reading here, the other .a1 S3d.
276 Notes IX 47.13

47.L3 kila '1 gather'. The particle eems an Improvement: what he a couLd hardJ
be news to Miidhava.
47.14 - because he wa about (0 acrifice her. CDMO"s kapiUa eems absurd,
but possibly derives from the kara ala of GH.
48d vitatir Readings which make thi ace sg or pi are ohviou I corrupt, a i CD'
nyayuyujat.
49a katham in CDE"s kathamapi ' in orne way' i le effective.
50b piitanatvam putanatvw:ll is perhap aJ 0 pos ible, but equally might be a imple
error.
50d The v.1. caranair seems to be not an earlier thought of Bha abhfiti'
but an importation from U R I 14, where tbe same haJf- erse There the
reference is to the indignity which suffered by the triaJ of her chastity. Here
the point is different. refers, I take it, to the cru hing of flowers to obtain
their perfume. is ' sakamii.' because he is putting into effect the
original plan of sacrificing Malatl to Karala. But to sacrifice MiUatl because she
is a 'strlratnam' CV 4.7) is as perverse as to crush a flower because it is sweet-smelling.
51.1 tat . .. tvam CD's readings are confused.
51 J jflasyate would be all right jii.a syatha, though an ea y rni take for
jiUisyatha9, might al 0 be as ret:erring to Mfllati's friends in general- 'you
will all of you know in time'. CD's jnasya i is urprising when the question has
been put by the two of them together.
52c 'transportatory de ' at desantarapraptikarir?im',
The readings of CDE suggest an abstract noun in the
same sense, but I can find no trace of such a word elsewhere. Kane (introducti.ou
to UR p4) wo uld prefer to read Rather urprisingly he eems to think
that what is involved here is one of the or 'six ruel rite', namely tbat
known as which he apparently equates with id 'creating enmity
between two friends or persons who love each other' ( ee hi Hi tory of Dharona-
sastra vol V p.l070).
Stanza 53a = UR V 13a.
54.L D' vimanasam is strangel at odds with the rest.
54.4 Of the two titles provided (perhaps by copyi t5) unmatta madha a is rather more
accurate than

ACT X
0.2 Here and at 2.5 the revised text mss are unanimous in rejecting an stage direct ion.
Argument from omission is always difficult, hut it seems on balance probable that
the phrases were absent from Bhavabhiiti' revised versiou.
la pratimuhiirta 'with a particular charm at each moment'. The variant prati-
visesamuhurta would presumably mean 'momentarily charming, each in its parti-
cular way', but the expression is not immediately obviou and muhurtaramyani
would naturally imply 'charming for no more than an instant, which would be
too realistic a description of the ways of childr,en.
Stanza 2 = UR IV 4.
2.2 duvviJ:laa is here a bahuvflhi equi aJent in meaning to duvvil)ida.
2.3 ekkaUiae Fern. of ekkalla (cf. VU 0.88).
X 3d Notes 277

3d is presumably also implied by DI' abhthatai? would do equally well.

3.1 biaa This position fo;- the ocative i obviously unusual, and lite placing of it after
vajjamaa by EKLM ,0 is very probably a deliberate interpolation. CD' reading
essentially sup!>Orts the text the oopyi t' eye jumping from hiaa ro h!"dayam, just
as D s omission of lea i a,/ Madha/ akhe at IX 47.16-17 is evidence against TK's
omission of akhe .
3.4 made For matar (Pischel 392). made rather than mae is made more likely by
KM 's madaantie.
6.1 •. Th,ere is a large variety of readings. Po sibly the unusual
sandhi in ahambi gave rise to some of them. The number of readings involving
jivaduvvahaJ?a is odd: this urel cannt)( represent jlva plus
6.2 a adburyia according to Bhandarkar means 'sbaking myself down'.
6.5-7.1 The Southern m omit this pas age, replacing it with the phrase prapatad
des riptive of La angika. But as a stage·direction this
phrase is otio e, and it is neces ary for Kamaodaki to declare her own intentions,
inee she join v.rith tbe others below in preparing to jump.
6.S Kimanda\yipi . .. j;ii ita1fl'am The ewan Kamandatky api ... ji ati might be a
correction but equall ' it might. result fro m a casual misreading of Kamandakyapi
as Kamandalc api, and it is diffi ult lO give the plain present tense the meaning
of 'cannot or win not live' .
7a It is d iffi. utt to make sense of the ewari feadiog5 here. D has ailgamal? kannal?-o
bbediid s ad I Da oama tat eems better tban GHL's tatos-
tunab.
7.3 avadibii. CD s bhavi.d a is presumabl. a mere QrruptioIl, but is a good addition
[0 tbe en e.

7.4 Ilifti.J;laa nbido Bha,Iabhiiti ma have di liked tbe rb ming effect of etto attal?-0
va adana.d o.
cr.
mi . : .risumaresii DOle on V] 7.41. This urely cannot be merely a last adieu,

as Bbandarkar uggests. La · angiU must mean do not kill yourself, forgetful of

the pain it would eau me,
7.13 nepatbye This scene will confuse the reader unle it i realized that the audience
hears the foUowing words poken b Madha . a, and oot as in Act IX b Makaranda.
who now arrives simuItaneou 1 , The fa 1 that he is reacting to his olce, may in
part explain wb when she looks Kamanda.k i exclaims ' iha mama vats as' -
although it. would appear [ram 9.1 that the can all ee MiilatI with him. The
at au of 0 is tempting, but is upported b no other ID .
9b caji or does not make sene, and KM O's cajiviteca
may be no more than a correction of lhi orruption.
9.1 IBha a.bhuti , it eems, ma ha e preferred this to dam anab-
bhudao.
lIe ran Sdadhua 'a blending of the rays of the un and the moon'. This apparently
simple image, tbe ewan readin.g, i to m mind ri her and more satisfying than
the alternati.ve aSanr ' aSadhara 'lightning and moon ra '.
11.1 iisuam.m etc. For utsllka with either in tr. or loco cf. U 3.44, M evidence
Uggests a first ersion uamhi de a. is then
separatoo from ii. uambi and gi en a case ending-but hetber instr. or loc., and
whether in epd with aanakamala is not plain.
11.3 ekk.alla Po ibl Bhaabhuti replaced eklca b , ekkaUa and tbi correction helped
278 Notes X 11.4

to spread confusion . It is noteworthy that in a similar context at VU 0.88,

Newar'i mss substitute ekkalla for ekka.
11.4 afoIajjae alajjae would do, and so would C' D's agar;tidalajja
(rnasc. pI.) is hardly likely.
12d vikalayitum Both this and kavalayitum make excellent ense. The close similarity
of the words makes it difficult to say whether revision is in question.
13a praviisam prayasam her troubles is also quite possible, but with changes of a
singk letter it is difficult to distinguish between correction and corruption. That
pravasam is correct at least as tbe first reading is confirmed by UR VII 4, where the
second half of this stanza recurs. The first pada there is s04ha.s (or ekas)
which has an obvious affinity of thOUght.
13c jantur The v.l. jantor occurs also at UR VIJ 4c. Mss do not divide in such a way
as to suggest a difference of recension here. jantur eems to me the superior reading.
pakabhimukhyasya must surely qualify daivasya, in which case a genitive of a
different kind between the two would be most awkward. Conversely tbe existence
of the genitive ending mukhasya immediately before makes the attraction of jantur
into the genitive case an easy corruption .
13.1 Before sakhe, it seems, Bhavabbfiti may originally have written sahasopasrtya
madhavam prab. It is nOl a very necessary direction , and is perhaps better dispensed
with.
14c ibiibam etc. There is terrible confusion here. Many of the I'eadings are unmel-
ncal. CD's has no proper caesura, and does not seem partic-
ularly effective.
14.13 pratyiisanna cetani - i.e. sbe is in the process of regaining consciousness. At
IX 41.19 the reading is pratyapannacetano. There (as most mss give the scene)
Madhava has already spoken, and his reeo ery is complete. Here the following
stanza describes the signs of a gradual return to life.
1Sa kvisonniba CD's ucchvasa hardly affect the sense but [ find C's pra-
paiica and D 's prasanna puzzling.
17a sa yogioiyam adhuna There is a surprising variety of readings but the sense is not
much affected. Just possibly GL's sa yogini'variyam is not only the original but
the one true reading, the others arising from its being accidentally shortened
to sayoginiyam.
18d In the singular this must mean Lavangika. One might expect Mada-
yantikii to be included (as she indeed is, in the embrace which follow). but no ms
gives the dual. The v.1. priyasakhis.ca (only GIO) does not help: only two of MalatJ s
girlfriends are on stage. A further oddity is that CDE make MaJatI a ha piasahi
at 18.6 below, although even on CDE's own readings both speak to her and both
embrace ber,
18.4 antarida 'sight of whom had vanished (e en) from our hopes' . The many variants
(except E's) represent atirikta and atikranta, both of which would mean, 'sigbt
of whom surpasses our hopes was more than we dared hope', and are al 0 quite
possible.
lS.7 ubOO ub;' e aliDgati is also po sible.
19.2 rimanijjaam-i.e. ramat;Uyakam, a fav.JUrite word of Bhavabhfiti 's. At I 21a a::Jd
IX 4Sb the guarantees the word. Below at 23.11 it. is again disputed b GIKL.
19.5 idya might also be possible. er. purva at I 15.10.
2CK: Jabdha pramodam The original reading is dattapramo-:am. which Bhavabbuti
may h?ve decided had a slightly awkward ambiguity.datta in a bahuvrihi may imply
X 21d Oies 279
dative case relation hip w ith what is qualified (e .g. dattamarga, dattavara, and
bere) but it may also be used ilh the tandard instrumental case relationship
dattakal1?-a. daualman). The inappropriale meaning 'although it has
given pleasure' might therefore cro the listener' s mind. Of course in such a case
one cannot be ompletet cenain that be scruple is Bba abhuti rather than that
of a later copy; t.
21d vij!iMbh:itam naJ;t .][ is you who must be aluLed, whose blo oming, its seed neces-
sarily inferred from our previous acquaintan e, has borne great fruit for us'. These
two lines areery diffi uh. On balance, 0 and CD'M s vijrmbh:itena
seem unacceptable because the male it necessary It o bljam as the subject
of the eolence if one did 0 , one po ibility would be (.0 iDterpret it as a karma-
dharaya of comparison - pu.ra :parica a :pratibaddha :b'ijam - but this is perhaps
a little recherche). The word pratibaddba gives me the most trouble. [ do not see
how it can mean 'sown" as mo I interpretations require. (Bhandarkar followed
by Kale, rn.ther disingenously tranSlated it as 'laid - which I assume means the
same tbing. Jagaddbara sa) ·ankuriKrtam'.) A ording to MW it can mean 'that
which is ah\lay connected or implied (as fire in moke)' and in iew of Bha abhliti's
fondness for philo op.hical lerms. 1 wonder if this .is the point here. Kamandaki
says tbat Saudamani, though once her pupu . the one to be rever1c nced, as is shown
b the great demon tralian of her powers, whose seed was always to be inferred
in their previous relation hip. bija corresponds to the fire but I should think that
the moke n:right be either purilpari :aya in tbe first case she would
mean 'there was alwa that in our relationship which gave promise of your special
powers' ; in the second, 'what has happened [oda show that ou were always
potentiall m superior' ,
21.4 In'lW Bbandarkar compares the expression
(J 23.1.).
22c akrtuaJ . ye 'Dot proouced ponlaneousl . - M.W. alqtakam there-
fore means 'without. beiQg induced - pontaneousl . acintiLaI'tl would do equally
weU, but E1KO's must be a corruption of CD's fleading: the
point is n.o l ilial no one else .has undertaken the feat but that she undertook: it
unprompted_
22.1 hanta laiis)'ati laufu:!l fan is a cle-ar example of a ewan corruption. Since
Saudamaru goes OD to pe-ak, the formula would in any case ha e to be ' alajjam
(cf.lnttoduction eel 13 .
Stanza 23 It looks as if Bha abhuti decided to elimiaale the sentence preceding this
stanza, fOlJDd onl in Gl l: _ astu amajnapayati (yatha).
23a -- - means much the same as the .1. Srestha. .
23.1 Ki- daki [t eems quite probable t.hat the ignmeoH oId should be rie peated
here as It . . b DEK . The formal reading out of another person swords neces-
sa.ri1. b as a d ifferent tatus lO normal dialogue - as is bOWD b the finite verb form
acayati above (and at I 35.4).
23.3 ettihe 'now, henceforth', Pis hel 426 condemns the word for Sa urase nI, but it
will be eeo that the e 'deuce fa '.'Ours it here,
.a'fagacial:!l . better all led than apabrtam) which is
also possible.
23.4 Mihanssa GlL add Matau' Dame.,. 1 with the particle a (without it, MaIadie is
presumabl go med by CDEKM o are all apable of rdlecting the
280 Notes X 23.5 - 6

revised version. Possibly therefore Bhavab buti included Malatl's name in the first
draft.
23.5-6 CDEMNO have no more than this speech. GIKL make AvalokiUi, Buddha-
and K alahamsaka actually come onto the stage and congratulate Kaman-
dakT and Madhava. There is a slight awkwardnes in the fact that they then take
absolutely no part in the rest of the act, but this ma have been Bhavabhuti' first
draft, and he may later have felt that their entry was unnecessary. A point which
theatrical experience might have brought home to him, is that Done of these three
has been on stage since Act VIII, and there could be practical objections to bringing
the actors back: so gratuitously for a brief appearance. Furthermor'e, there are
already seven characters on the stage, and elsewhere in tbe play there are never
more than eight (IV 1.5, after the entrace of 'purusa' . By doubling of parts, there-
fore, a cast of eight can perform the whole play provided that this final appearance
is eliminated.
23.8 J.laccadi -i.e. for joy. This word is read only by those mss in which tbe three do
not enter - except for I , whose reading here is confused.
23.9 There is much variation. I have assumed that this word might easily
slip out after
23.12 This is the best attested reading, but GL's sarpbandhatma is
also good.
23.16 It would also be possible to follow N in assigning this line to Avalokita.
23.21 pradhina prak!ti 'Chjef Minister, i.e. Nandana' (Bhandarkar and PUrt;la-
sarasvatT) .
23.24 ' not breaking fai th '-over the oath which BhUrivasu and
Devarata swore. The first version seems to have been something like I's avisrupsthula
pratapinya.l:t 'unshakeably majestic' - though the reading which Bhandarkar adopts
from one of his mss, 'concealing what i intended' is more to
the point.
24b kleso )pi 'Your happiness bas come to fruiton, and so has the labour of Avalokita
and SaudamanI' - a rather awkward zeugma MN s klesaiSca is tempting, but
the emendation is such an obvious one that authority for the reading isalmo t
non-existent.
24c samagamo) pi Here on the coDtra.ry it. is eDEN's substitution of ca for api which
is difficult. Since can hardly be used substaO(ively here I can see no justi-
fication for ca. It is just conceivable that this results from a misplaced correction
of kleso) pi in the preceding pacta.
24d karyam Apparently corrected from sreyas (cf. note on VI 19d).
25d gbana baddha. 'closely bound' - i.e. by ties of kinship and affection. bandhu for
baddha is a less happy reading. Jagaddh ara makes baddha qualify pramoda, but
to describe joy as closely bound seems rather unnatural. 'T aking pleasure in the
fellowship of relatives and friends whose attachment is close'.
This pada is identical with Nligananda V 39d.